Introduction

This manual describes the various signal interfaces and functions required when creating sequence
program of PLC CPU to operate C70.
Read this manual thoroughly before programming.
Thoroughly study the "Safety Precautions" on the following page to ensure safe use of this CNC unit.

Details described in this manual

CAUTION

For items described in "Restrictions" or "Usable State", the instruction manual issued by the machine
maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the specifications
issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the CNC version.
 Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and
attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure
correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if
DANGER
handling is mistaken.

WARNING When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage could occur if
CAUTION
handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION" may lead to major results depending on the situation. In
any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.

CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

CAUTION CAUTION HOT Danger explosive
object risk

Disassembly is
Prohibited KEEP FIRE AWAY General instruction Earth ground
prohibited

DANGER

There are no "Danger" items in this manual.

 WARNING

1. Items related to prevention of electric shocks

Do not operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this may lead
to electric shocks.

CAUTION

1. Items related to product and manual

For the items described in the "Restrictions" and "Usable State", the instruction manual issued by the
machine maker takes precedence over this instruction manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual has been written on the assumption that all options are provided.
Check the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the CNC system version.

2. Items related to connection

When using an inductive load such as relays, always contact a diode in parallel to the load as a noise
measure.
When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to
suppress rush currents.

3. Items related to design

Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before chucking both ends of the
workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle. If the spindle phase synchronization signal is
turned ON when both ends of the workpiece are chucked to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle,
the chuck or workpiece could be damaged by the torsion that occurs during phase alignment.
If the temperature rise detection function is invalidated with the parameters, the control could be
disabled when the temperature is excessive. This could result in machine damage or personal injuries
due to runaway axis, and could damage the device. Enable the detection function for normal use.
In order to prevent illegal transfer of bit data, use data update program.
 Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-
users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and
components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the
battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as
follows:
Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/
recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

 Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, CC-Link IE
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other
countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
 本製品の取扱いについて

( 日本語 /Japanese)
本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外で
の使用をお願いいたします。

Handling of our product

(English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.

본 제품의 취급에 대해서

( 한국어 /Korean)
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에
서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
 CONTENTS

1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 System Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Flow of Signals....................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU Data.......................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Handling of Devices ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Data update program with NC ....................................................................................................... 7
2.1.4 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table ...................................................... 10

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller ............................................................................................. 13

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)..................................................................................................... 16
3.1.1 System State................................................................................................................................ 16
3.1.2 Axis State..................................................................................................................................... 20
3.1.3 Part System State ........................................................................................................................ 22
3.1.4 Spindle State ............................................................................................................................... 26
3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC) ................................................................................................. 28
3.2.1 System State................................................................................................................................ 28
3.2.2 Part System State ........................................................................................................................ 30
3.2.3 Axis State..................................................................................................................................... 33
3.2.4 Spindle State ............................................................................................................................... 34
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC).................................................................................................. 35
3.3.1 System Command ....................................................................................................................... 35
3.3.2 Axis Command............................................................................................................................. 39
3.3.3 Part System Command................................................................................................................ 42
3.3.4 Spindle Command ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC) .............................................................................................. 51
3.4.1 System Command ....................................................................................................................... 51
3.4.2 Part System Command................................................................................................................ 53
3.4.3 Axis Command............................................................................................................................. 56
3.4.4 Spindle Command ....................................................................................................................... 57
3.5 Each Application .................................................................................................................................. 58
3.5.1 PLC Axis State............................................................................................................................. 58
3.5.2 PLC Axis Control.......................................................................................................................... 60
3.5.3 Window Result Information .......................................................................................................... 62
3.5.4 Window Command....................................................................................................................... 65
3.5.5 Data Registered to Magazine for M System ................................................................................ 72
3.5.6 Tool Life Management (M System).............................................................................................. 74
3.5.7 Safety Observing ......................................................................................................................... 76
3.5.8 PLC Constants............................................................................................................................. 78
3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection ......................................................................................................................... 80
3.5.10 PLC Axis Indexing Interface....................................................................................................... 81
3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals............................................................................................................ 82
3.6.1 Special Relay ............................................................................................................................... 82
3.6.2 Special Register........................................................................................................................... 84

4 Explanation of Interface Signals............................................................................................................... 89

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .......................................................... 91
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .............................................................. 103
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) ................................................ 117
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) ......................................................... 146
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)..................................................... 156
4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)........................................................... 173
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .............................................. 177
4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)...................................................... 195
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ............................................. 197
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................................ 213
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................... 229
 4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ........................................... 292
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)........................................ 307
4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ............................................. 321
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................. 323
4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)........................................ 341

5 Explanation for Each Application........................................................................................................... 345

5.1 PLC Axis Control................................................................................................................................ 346
5.1.1 Specifications............................................................................................................................. 346
5.1.2 Detailed Explanation .................................................................................................................. 347
5.1.3 Interface with PLC...................................................................................................................... 348
5.1.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data ............................................................................ 350
5.1.5 Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 358
5.1.6 Timing Chart .............................................................................................................................. 358
5.1.7 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection....................................................................... 365
5.1.8 Handle Feed Axis Selection....................................................................................................... 365
5.1.9 Buffering Mode........................................................................................................................... 366
5.1.10 Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 369
5.1.11 PLC Axis Monitor ..................................................................................................................... 371
5.1.12 Absolute Position Detection ..................................................................................................... 371
5.1.13 Rotary axis ............................................................................................................................... 371
5.1.14 Position switch ......................................................................................................................... 371
5.1.15 Usage Example........................................................................................................................ 372
5.2 PLC Window ...................................................................................................................................... 373
5.2.1 Details ........................................................................................................................................ 373
5.2.2 Read window ............................................................................................................................. 377
5.2.3 Write window.............................................................................................................................. 380
5.2.4 Operation Details ....................................................................................................................... 383
5.2.5 Usage Examples........................................................................................................................ 385
5.2.6 Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 389
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System) .................................................................................................... 390
5.3.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function ................................................................................ 390
5.3.2 Tool Life Management Methods ................................................................................................ 391
5.3.3 Procedure when Tool Function Command is Executed ............................................................. 392
5.3.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed................................................................................. 393
5.3.5 Tool Life Management II Method ............................................................................................... 394
5.3.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools................................................................................... 394
5.3.7 Tool Data ................................................................................................................................... 395
5.3.8 Usage Time, Work Count........................................................................................................... 397
5.3.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register) ...................................................................................................... 398
5.3.10 User PLC Processing............................................................................................................... 399
5.3.11 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 400
5.4 Tool Life Management (L System) ..................................................................................................... 405
5.4.1 Interface with PLC...................................................................................................................... 405
5.5 External Search.................................................................................................................................. 409
5.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation........................................................................ 416
5.7 Safety Observing................................................................................................................................ 417
5.7.1 CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals................................................................................... 417
5.8 GOT Window...................................................................................................................................... 429
5.8.1 GOT Window Interface .............................................................................................................. 430
5.8.2 How to Obtain Window Data...................................................................................................... 433
5.8.3 Details of Command .................................................................................................................. 436
5.8.4 Automatic setting window ......................................................................................................... 451
5.8.5 Error code for each command code.......................................................................................... 454
5.9 PLC Constants ................................................................................................................................... 455
5.10 PLC bit selection .............................................................................................................................. 456
5.11 Chopping......................................................................................................................................... 457
5.11.1 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 458
5.11.2 Chopping command from PLC................................................................................................. 465
5.11.3 Chopping operation.................................................................................................................. 466
5.11.4 Interrupt operation during chopping ........................................................................................ 466
 5.11.5 Changing the peformance parameter during the chopping start state..................................... 467
5.11.6 Chopping compensation operation .......................................................................................... 468
5.11.7 Chopping feedrate ................................................................................................................... 471
5.11.8 Usage example ........................................................................................................................ 473
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing............................................................................................................................ 474
5.12.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................. 474
5.12.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface..................................................................................................... 476
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis ........................................................................................... 496
5.13.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 496
5.13.2 Specification............................................................................................................................. 496
5.13.3 Combined Functions ................................................................................................................ 499
5.13.4 Parameter settings................................................................................................................... 503
5.13.5 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 506

6 Spindle Control ........................................................................................................................................ 509

6.1 Related Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 510
6.2 Connection Method............................................................................................................................ 510
6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data .................................................................................................................... 511

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions ............................................................................................................ 513

7.1 Command Format .............................................................................................................................. 514
7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish........................................................................................................... 514
7.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command)............................................................. 515
7.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command)............................................................. 516
7.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command) ................................................ 517
7.3 M Code Independent Output.............................................................................................................. 518
7.3.1 Operation Sequence .................................................................................................................. 518
7.4 Axis Movement and M Commands .................................................................................................... 520
7.5 Precautions ........................................................................................................................................ 521

8 Exclusive Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 523

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction .................................................................................................................. 525
8.1.1 Outline of ATC Control............................................................................................................... 525
8.1.2 ATC Operation ........................................................................................................................... 525
8.1.3 Explanation of Terminology ....................................................................................................... 526
8.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines............................................... 526
8.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions ............................................................................................. 527
8.1.6 Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction.......................................................................................... 528
8.1.7 Functions ................................................................................................................................... 530
8.1.8 Operation Outline....................................................................................................................... 532
8.1.9 Errors ......................................................................................................................................... 533
8.1.10 Program Example .................................................................................................................... 533
8.1.11 File Register Allocation and Parameters for ATC Control........................................................ 534
8.1.12 Details of Each Instruction ....................................................................................................... 536
8.2 ROT Instruction.................................................................................................................................. 547
8.2.1 Instruction List............................................................................................................................ 547
8.2.2 Format of ROT Instruction ......................................................................................................... 547
8.2.3 Functions ................................................................................................................................... 549
8.2.4 Operation Outline....................................................................................................................... 550
8.2.5 Errors ......................................................................................................................................... 551
8.2.6 Program Example ...................................................................................................................... 551
8.2.7 Details of Each Instruction ......................................................................................................... 552
8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction..................................................................................................................... 556
8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction...................................................................................................... 557
8.3.2 Operation when executing the DDWR instruction...................................................................... 559
8.3.3 Error contents ............................................................................................................................ 560
8.3.4 Calculation error......................................................................................................................... 560
8.3.5 Interlock using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC ................................................................. 561
8.3.6 Program example....................................................................................................................... 562
8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction....................................................................................................................... 563
8.4.1 Format of DDRD Instruction....................................................................................................... 564
 8.4.2 Operation when executing the DDRD instruction ...................................................................... 566
8.4.3 Error contents ............................................................................................................................ 567
8.4.4 Calculation error......................................................................................................................... 567
8.4.5 Program example....................................................................................................................... 568
8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables...................................................................................................... 569
8.5.1 Instruction Format ...................................................................................................................... 569
8.5.2 CNC Side Devices to be Specified ............................................................................................ 569
8.5.3 Common Variable Control Data ................................................................................................. 570
8.5.3.1 Data Type .......................................................................................................................... 571
8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data..................................................................................... 571
8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection ................................................................................................ 572
8.5.4 Error Contents............................................................................................................................ 572
8.5.5 Program Examples .................................................................................................................... 573
8.5.5.1 Write Data to Common Variables ...................................................................................... 573
8.5.5.2 Read Common Variable Data ............................................................................................ 573
8.5.5.3 Change the Common Variable Control Data ..................................................................... 574
8.5.5.4 Read Common Variable Data, Calculate and then Write the Data to Common Variables 575
8.6 Precautions ........................................................................................................................................ 576
8.6.1 Transmitting Exclusive Instructions between CPUs................................................................... 576
8.6.2 Executing NC Exclusive Instructions ........................................................................................ 579
8.6.3 Completion Status Information................................................................................................... 579

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data ....................................................................................................... 581

Appendix 1.1 Section No. List .................................................................................................................. 590
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List ........................................................................................................... 591
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data......................................................................................... 606
Appendix 1.3.1 How to refer to the data ............................................................................................. 606
Appendix 1.3.2 Data unit system ........................................................................................................ 607
Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details......................................................................................... 608
 1
Outline

1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

This manual is prepared to assist you to understand the various control signals necessary for creating the sequence
program.

The manual is composed as shown below. Refer to related sections as necessary to gain the maximum benefit from the
manual.

Handling of
M, S, T and
B functions

Spindle
control

Explanation
of interface
signals
Table for input/
output signals Device
with controller Input signals
Output signals
System Each
configuration application

PLC Interface
Manual

(cover)

<Caution>

Please note that the specifications referred to in the text represent the maximum
specifications which include also those under development.

2
 2
System Configuration

3
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 System Configuration

PLC program development tool

GX-DEVELOPER installed
Personal computer

(USB/Serial) PLC CPU module

CNC CPU module(s)
Power Communication, I/O module(s)
supply
Q J71 E71 - 100 Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x
47 0 '4 4
+0+ 6 %1/ '44 
12' 0
5 &  / 4&

HMI with touch panel

Q172DNCPU-S2
(For GOT/CNC exclusive use)
27..

MITSUBISHI

(Display interface)

Machine operation panel

Switches, coils, etc.

(Optical communication)
sensor

Manual handle
Servo/Spindle drive unit
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI

4
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
2.1 Flow of Signals

2.1 Flow of Signals

2.1.1 Flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU Data
The flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU data is shown below.

PLC CPU (No.1) CNC CPU-#1 (No.2) CNC CPU-#2 (No.3)

The devices shared between
multi-CPU (G)
Write area Read area Read area
U3E0\G10000 Write area 1
Control signal Control signal
No.1 (Y,R) (Y,R)

U3E0\G13072 Write area 2

No.1

Read area 1 Write area Write area

U3E1\G10000 State signal State signal

No.2
(X,R) (X,R)

Read area 2
U3E2\G10000

No.3

(1) The data PLC CPU wrote into G device is automatically transmitted to each CNC CPU by the high-speed bus.
(2) The CNC data (state signal) is automatically written into the read area corresponding to each CNC CPU of PLC
CPU by the high-speed bus.
(3) For the writing area of PLC CPU (G device), the writing area (G device) is different depending on the signal for
which CNC CPU.
(4) Writing area 1 and 2 are the same data structures.
(5) Read area 1 and 2 are the same data structures.
(6) When one CNC CPU is used, writing area 1 and read area 1 are used.
(7) When two CNC CPUs are used, writing area 1 and read area 1 are used for CNC CPU#1, writing area 2 and read
area 2 are used for CNC CPU#2.
(8) Note that the head address of G device in writing area 2 corresponding to CNC CPU#2 and the head address of G
device in writing area 1 corresponding to CNC CPU#1 is different. In "3 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS TABLE WITH
CONTROLLER", this is indicated like "Sharing G+1234".
(9) It is possible to change the head address "U3E0\G13072" for a writing area 2 to "U3E0\G14000" to start from a
round number.

5
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 System Configuration

2.1.2 Handling of Devices

The devices shared CNC CPU#1

PLC CPU between multi-CPU (G)
(QnUD CPU)
Bit data (Note 1) Writing area 1
Internal device
Bit in CNC
Transferred by sequence program Bit
data
data
(A transfer program is indispensable.)
Bit
data
(Y)
(a)
Word
Word data (Note 2) Word Transfer
data
data
Transferred by sequence program Word
(b)
data
(R)
(b)

Bit Bit data (Note 1) Read area 1

data
[MOV Dn Rn] Transferred by sequence program Bit
Bit
data
[MOV Dn Rn] data
(A transfer program is indispensable.) Transfer (X)
(c)
Word
Word data (Note 2)
data
Transferred by sequence program
Word Word
data data
(d) (R)
(d)

X device Y device

The examples of “devices shared between multi-CPU (G)” and “internal

X Y
device in CNC” tables are shown below.

Example for control signal (Bit data (a)) Example for control signal (Word data (b))
MELSEC IO input $1 abbrev. Signal name $1
abbrev. Signal name
)   <- Sharing G Sharing G Internal
Relative of switches ;  ,P Jog mode  4 1st cutting feedrate override
MELSEC IO output ;  *P Handle mode  4 2nd cutting feedrate override
;  5P Incremental mode  4 Rapid traverse override
Lamp ;  262P Manual arbitrary feed mode  4
;  <40P Reference position return mode  4
Manual feedrate
;  #56P Automatic initialization mode  4
Relay, etc. ;     4
;     4
 4 1st handle/incremental feed
 4 magnification

Example for state signal (Bit data (c)) Example for state signal (Word data (d))
$1 abbrev. Signal name $1
abbrev. Signal name
G10048 <- Sharing G Sharing G Internal
: ,1P In jog mode  4 External search status
: *1P In handle mode  4
: 51P In incremental mode  4
: 2621P In manual arbitrary feed mode  4
: <401P In reference position return mode  4 M code data 1
: #561P In automatic initial set mode  4
:    4 M code data 2
:    4
 4 M code data 3
 4

(Note1) Transfer "G device" to "device in PLC CPU" by sequence program when using a bit device.
(Similarly, transfer "device in PLC CPU" to "G device".)
(When writing/reading is executed directly into "G device", correct operation might not be executed according to timing
with CNC.)
(Note2) A word-data can be written/read directly into "G device". However, we will recommend using the device after a
word-data is transferred into "device in PLC CPU".
For a word-data not so used, directly access "G device".
For a word-data often used, use the device after a word-data is transferred into "device in PLC CPU".
However, do not use BMOV command to copy between "G device" and PLC device.

6
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
2.1 Flow of Signals

2.1.3 Data update program with NC

In this manual, inputs to CNC (Y***), outputs from CNC (X***), and registers for data register (R***) are described as
device addresses in the CNC.
Thus, use the PLC internal device later than X300 for transferring from the G device to the PLC internal device and use
the PLC internal device later than Y300 for output in order to have better correspondences with this manual.
It is necessary to avoid using the same names of the devices of I/O units mounted to the PLC.
Same conditions apply when transferring R*** to the PLC internal device and use it.
PLC CPU CNC CPU

$1 abbrev. Signal name

Data is used by G10048 <- Sharing G
X600 JO In jog mode
transferring the Common X601 HO In handle mode
same device device X602 SO In incremental mode
G Automatic X603 PTPO In manual arbitrary feed mode
address in the X604 ZRNO In reference position return mode
transfer X605 ASTO In automatic initial set mode
PLC. X606
X607

[BMOV U3E1 /G10048 K4X600 Kn] In PLC Interface Manual, explained in the
form of CNC internal device address.

CAUTION In order to prevent illegal transfer of bit data, use data update program.

[Data update program]

If input/output signals with CNC and PLC programs for machine control are separately programmed, the PLC
program for machine control will be processed at every process cycle, whose advantage is high-speed processing.

Allowing execution of interrupt program

[EI]

[MOV K4X0 D200] Processes to be executed continuously

[> D200 K100] <Y40> Processes not related to the data transfer timing
with the CNC.
[> D200 K200] <Y41> (Not related to CNC’s input/output.)

[> D200 K300] <Y42>

Synchronized program:
M1000 SM402 Sequence process is skipped until the interrupt
[CJ P100] response. M1000 is an arbitrary device.

Sequence program
Processes in which data transfer timing matching
[MOV D0 U3E0\G10200] is necessary.
(Such as sequence processing by using CNC
status output signals, or turning ON/OFF CNC
[MOV U3E1\G10200 D100]
control input signals)
SM400
[SET M1000]

P100: [FEND] Data transfer cycle interrupt program:

Between the CNC CPU, bit type interface transfer will be
executed.
M1000 For the interrupt pointer, designate "I45".
I45: [BMOV K4Y300 U3E0\G10000 K183] (Note 1) It is recommendable to transfer only necessary data
[BMOV U3E1\G10000 K4X300 K125] considering the scanning time.
(Note 2) For transferring data between the common devices,
[RST M1000] do not use BMOV command except this example.
(Note 3) Do not add any more program to the interrupt
[IRET] program (I45).
[END]
SM400:Always ON
SM402:After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan

7
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 System Configuration

Precautions
(1) Do not buildt the process to multi-CPU synchronous interrupt program other than bit data transfer program. The
execution time exceeds the interrupt cycle as it is executed in about 1ms cycle, so it may not operate normally.
(2) The word data can read and write to the shared device at the arbitrary positon of the PLC program, however do not
transfer the data by BMOV (block transfer) command. To transfer to the internal device, use MOV (16 bit) or DMOV
(32 bit) command.
(3) Although the shared device is the word device, a bit expression that designated the bit position is enabled.
(The example indicates bit 7 of U3E0/G10321.7 No.1 CPU shared device G10321.)
Note that if the multi-CPU synchronous interrput occurs during the two or more bit process, it may not operate
normally as it might be transfered to the CNC CPU in the middle of process. Do not use the bit expression to write
to the shared device.
(4) The processing time to read and write in the shared device takes longer conpared with the internal device. Thus,
when reading and writing to the same address of the shared device a number of times, process it in the internal
device. So that the number of read or write times to the shared device will be reduced and the scanning time can be
shorten.
(5) For the process of the device that turns ON only one scan at the completion, program it to the position where the
scan takes place each time ("processes not related to the data transfer timing with the CNC" of the data update
program).
(6) When the timer is not executed for each scan
Do not jump OUT T1 command with CJ command while the coil of the timer (e.g. T1) has been turning ON.
When OUT T □command is jumped, the current value for the timer will not be updated.

8
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
2.1 Flow of Signals

(7) Following signals used to be set to "1" by CNC at power ON for C64 but not for C70. So make sure to execute PLC
processing depending on necessity.

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Abbreviation Signal name
+016 +019 +022 +025 +028 +031 +034 +037 <- Sharing G
Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551 *SVFn Servo OFF
Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553 *+EDTn External deceleration +
Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554 *-EDTn External deceleration -
Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555 *+AITn Automatic interlock+
Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556 *-AITn Automatic interlock-
Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557 *+MITn Manual interlock+
Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558 *-MITn Manual interlock-

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis Abbreviation Signal name
+040 +043 +046 +049 +052 +055 +058 +061 <- Sharing G
Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1 *SVFn Servo OFF
Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3 *+EDTn External deceleration +
Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4 *-EDTn External deceleration -
Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5 *+AITn Automatic interlock+
Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6 *-AITn Automatic interlock-
Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7 *+MITn Manual interlock+
Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8 *-MITn Manual interlock-

1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part Abbrevi-
Signal name
system system system system system system system ation
+065 +079 +093 +107 +121 +135 +149 <- Sharing G
Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51 *SPn Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)
Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53 *BSLn Block start interlock
Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54 *CSLn Cutting block start interlock
Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B *CDZn Chamfering
Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68 ABSn Manual absolute
Y760 Y840 Y920 YA00 YAE0 YBC0 YCA0 *FV11n Cutting feedrate override 1
Y762 Y842 Y922 YA02 YAE2 YBC2 YCA2 *FV14n Cutting feedrate override 4
Y764 Y844 Y924 YA04 YAE4 YBC4 YCA4 *FV116n Cutting feedrate override 16
Y774 Y854 Y934 YA14 YAF4 YBD4 YCB4 *JV16n Manual feedrate
Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop
(Note) Even though ABSn is not a B-contact signal, it used to be set to "1" for safety as it is usually used without the
manual interruption amount offset.

9
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 System Configuration

2.1.4 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table

Input signal (CNC CPU -> PLC CPU)

Type Shared device (G) CNC device Points (Word) Total (Word) Detail
G10000 X300 16 Interface used in part systems
G10016 X400 32 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)
125
Bit type G10048 X600 56 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)
G10104 X980 21 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)
G10125 - 75 75 Vacancy
G10200 R0 100 Interface used in part systems
G10300 R100 700 960 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)
G11000 R800 160 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)
G11160 R1600 210 210 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)
G11370 R1900 80 80 Interface used in PLC axis (7 axes)
- M system ATC data
G11450 R4700 770 770 - L system Tool life management 1
(1st and 2nd part system)
Word type G12220 R6724 48 48 M system Tool life management
G12270 R9000 200 200 PLC window response interface
G12470 R2150 50 50 Safety observing data
G12520 R4500 96 96 PLC constant parameter setting value
G12616 R4600 24 24 PLC bit selection parameter setting value
G12660 R1980 8 8 Interface used in PLC axis (8 axes)
G12668 - 12 12 Vacancy
G12680 R2000 47 47 PLC axis indexing interface
G12728 - 173 173 Vacancy
Vacancy G13020 - 52 52 Vacancy

10
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
2.1 Flow of Signals

Output signal (PLC CPU -> CNC CPU)

Type Shared device (G) CNC device Points (Word) Total (Word) Detail
+0 Y300 16 Interface used in part systems
+16 Y400 48 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)
183
Bit type +64 Y700 98 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)
+162 YD20 21 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)
+183 - 17 17 Vacancy
+200 R2300 100 Interface used in part systems
+300 R2400 700 960 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)
+1000 R3100 160 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)
+1160 R3900 210 210 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)
+1370 R4200 80 80 Interface used in PLC axis (7 axes)
+1450 R6720 4 4 M system Tool life management
+1454 - 6 6 Vacancy
Word type +1460 D4300 (Note 1) 640 640 GOT window command interface
+2100 R8500 480 480 PLC window command interface
+2580 R4450 50 50 Safety observing data
+2638 - 22 22 Vacancy
+2660 R4280 8 8 Interface used in PLC axis (8 axes)
+2668 - 12 12 Vacancy
+2680 R4300 47 47 PLC axis indexing interface
+2728 - 173 173 Vacancy
Vacancy +3036 - 36 36 Vacancy
(Note 1) GOT window command interface is stored in D register.

11
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 System Configuration

12
 3
Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

13
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Types of Input/Output Signals Tables

The followings are the types of input/output signals tables to be used.

For common devices used in part systems (Sample)

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

X320 MA Controller ready completion X328 INCH In inch unit selection

X321 SA Servo ready completion X329 DROPNS Door open enable

X322 X32A SPSYN1 In spindle synchronization

X323 X32B FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion

10002 10002
X324 X32C FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization completion

X325 X32D SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

X326 X32E BATWR Battery warning

X327 X32F BATAL Battery alarm

For devices used in each axis (Sample)

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

G10016 G10018 G10020 G10022 G10024 G10026 G10028 G10030 <- Sharing G

X400 X420 X440 X460 X480 X4A0 X4C0 X4E0 RDYn Servo ready

X401 X421 X441 X461 X481 X4A1 X4C1 X4E1 AXn Axis selection

X402 X422 X442 X462 X482 X4A2 X4C2 X4E2 MVPn In axis plus motion

X403 X423 X443 X463 X483 X4A3 X4C3 X4E3 MVMn In axis minus motion

X404 X424 X444 X464 X484 X4A4 X4C4 X4E4 ZP1n 1st reference position reached

X405 X425 X445 X465 X485 X4A5 X4C5 X4E5 ZP2n 2nd reference position reached

X406 X426 X446 X466 X486 X4A6 X4C6 X4E6 ZP3n 3rd reference position reached

X407 X427 X447 X467 X487 X4A7 X4C7 X4E7 ZP4n 4th reference position reached

For devices used in each part system (Sample)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10048 G10056 G10064 G10072 G10080 G10088 G10096 <- Sharing G

X600 X680 X700 X780 X800 X880 X900 JOn In jog mode

X601 X681 X701 X781 X801 X881 X901 HOn In handle mode

X602 X682 X702 X782 X802 X882 X902 SOn In incremental mode

X603 X683 X703 X783 X803 X883 X903 PTPOn In manual arbitrary feed mode

X604 X684 X704 X784 X804 X884 X904 ZRNOn In reference position return mode

X605 X685 X705 X785 X805 X885 X905 ASTOn In automatic initial set mode

For devices used in each spindle (Sample)

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

G10105 G10108 G10111 G10114 G10117 G10120 G10123 <- Sharing G

X990 X9C0 X9F0 XA20 XA50 XA80 XAB0

X991 X9C1 X9F1 XA21 XA51 XA81 XAB1 CDOn Current detection

X992 X9C2 X9F2 XA22 XA52 XA82 XAB2 VROn Speed detection

X993 X9C3 X9F3 XA23 XA53 XA83 XAB3 FLOn In spindle alarm

X994 X9C4 X9F4 XA24 XA54 XA84 XAB4 ZSOn Zero speed

X995 X9C5 X9F5 XA25 XA55 XA85 XAB5 USOn Spindle up-to-speed

(Note 1) Signals marked with "*" in the "Abbrev." column are handled as B contacts. Signals marked with "*" in the
"Abbrev." column are handled as B contacts.
(Note 2) Signals marked with "――" are reserved for the system.

14
 C70 PLC Interface Manual

Classification of Input/Output Signals with Controller

There are 1-bit unit, and 16-bit or 32-bit unit controller input/output signals, which are classified as shown below.
When designing, refer to the section indicated below and make allocations according to the table in the respective
section.

Signal type Explanation Reference

(1) Allocated to device X.
(2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a principle.
DI 3.1
(3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are common for all part
systems or all spindles.
Input

(1) Allocated to device R.

Data 3.2
(2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as a principle.

(1) Allocated to device Y.

(2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a principle.
DO 3.3
(3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are common for all part
systems or all spindles.
Output

(1) Allocated to device R.

Data 3.4
(2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as a principle.

Each
Devices are classified under the usage purpose. 3.5
application

15
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

3.1.1 System State

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X300 X308
X301 X309
X302 X30A
X303 X30B
10000 10000
X304 X30C
X305 X30D
X306 X30E
X307 X30F

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X310 CNOP 24 hours continuous operation X318 SKIP1C SKIP1 Input signal state
Dual signals unconfirmed after
X311 SSUCHK X319 SKIP2C SKIP2 Input signal state
compare error
X312 NOFFCHK Output OFF check not complete X31A SKIP3C SKIP3 Input signal state
10001 X313 *PSDNTF Power shutoff notification 10001 X31B SKIP4C SKIP4 Input signal state
X314 X31C
X315 X31D
X316 X31E
X317 X31F

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X320 MA Controller ready completion X328
X321 SA Servo ready completion X329 DROPNS Door open enable
X322 X32A SPSYN1 In spindle synchronization
Spindle rotation speed
X323 X32B FSPRV
synchronization completion
10002 10002
Spindle phase synchronization
X324 X32C FSPPH
completion
X325 X32D SPCMP Chuck close confirmation
X326 X32E BATWR Battery warning
X327 X32F BATAL Battery alarm

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X330 AL1 NC alarm 1 X338 WNG In door interlock
X331 AL2 NC alarm 2 (Servo alarm) X339 MSON Macro single valid
Power OFF required after parameter
X332 X33A PARACHG
change
10003 X333 10003 X33B EDITDO Edited data in processing
X334 X33C EDITERR Edited data error
X335 X33D
X336 X33E SMPFIN NC data sampling completed
X337 X33F ATS ATS valid

16
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X340 X348
X341 X349
X342 X34A
X343 X34B
10004 10004
X344 X34C
X345 X34D
X346 X34E
X347 X34F

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X350 DLOAD0 Download in progress X358
X351 DLDFIN Download completed X359
X352 DLDERR Download error X35A
X353 X35B
10005 10005
X354 X35C
X355 X35D
X356 X35E
X357 X35F

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X360 PSWP1 PLC axis position switch 1 X368 PSWP9 PLC axis position switch 9
X361 PSWP2 PLC axis position switch 2 X369 PSWP10 PLC axis position switch 10
X362 PSWP3 PLC axis position switch 3 X36A PSWP11 PLC axis position switch 11
X363 PSWP4 PLC axis position switch 4 X36B PSWP12 PLC axis position switch 12
10006 10006
X364 PSWP5 PLC axis position switch 5 X36C PSWP13 PLC axis position switch 13
X365 PSWP6 PLC axis position switch 6 X36D PSWP14 PLC axis position switch 14
X366 PSWP7 PLC axis position switch 7 X36E PSWP15 PLC axis position switch 15
X367 PSWP8 PLC axis position switch 8 X36F PSWP16 PLC axis position switch 16

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X370 X378
X371 X379
X372 X37A
X373 X37B
10007 10007
X374 X37C
X375 X37D
X376 X37E
X377 X37F

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X380 APLCIN1 APLC input signal 1 X388 APLCIN9 APLC input signal 9
X381 APLCIN2 APLC input signal 2 X389 APLCIN10 APLC input signal 10
X382 APLCIN3 APLC input signal 3 X38A APLCIN11 APLC input signal 11
X383 APLCIN4 APLC input signal 4 X38B APLCIN12 APLC input signal 12
10008 10008
X384 APLCIN5 APLC input signal 5 X38C APLCIN13 APLC input signal 13
X385 APLCIN6 APLC input signal 6 X38D APLCIN14 APLC input signal 14
X386 APLCIN7 APLC input signal 7 X38E APLCIN15 APLC input signal 15
X387 APLCIN8 APLC input signal 8 X38F APLCIN16 APLC input signal 16

17
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X390 APLCIN17 APLC input signal 17 X398 APLCIN25 APLC input signal 25
X391 APLCIN18 APLC input signal 18 X399 APLCIN26 APLC input signal 26
X392 APLCIN19 APLC input signal 19 X39A APLCIN27 APLC input signal 27
X393 APLCIN20 APLC input signal 20 X39B APLCIN28 APLC input signal 28
10009 10009
X394 APLCIN21 APLC input signal 21 X39C APLCIN29 APLC input signal 29
X395 APLCIN22 APLC input signal 22 X39D APLCIN30 APLC input signal 30
X396 APLCIN23 APLC input signal 23 X39E APLCIN31 APLC input signal 31
X397 APLCIN24 APLC input signal 24 X39F APLCIN32 APLC input signal 32

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3A0 X3A8
X3A1 X3A9
X3A2 X3AA
X3A3 X3AB
10010 10010
X3A4 X3AC
X3A5 X3AD
X3A6 X3AE
X3A7 X3AF

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3B0 X3B8
X3B1 X3B9
X3B2 X3BA
X3B3 X3BB
10011 10011
X3B4 X3BC
X3B5 X3BD
X3B6 X3BE
X3B7 X3BF

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3C0 X3C8
X3C1 X3C9
X3C2 X3CA
X3C3 X3CB
10012 10012
X3C4 X3CC
X3C5 X3CD
X3C6 X3CE
X3C7 X3CF

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3D0 X3D8
X3D1 X3D9
X3D2 X3DA
X3D3 X3DB
10013 10013
X3D4 X3DC
X3D5 X3DD
X3D6 X3DE
X3D7 X3DF

18
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3E0 X3E8
X3E1 X3E9
X3E2 X3EA
X3E3 X3EB
10014 10014
X3E4 X3EC
X3E5 X3ED
X3E6 X3EE
X3E7 X3EF

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
X3F0 X3F8
X3F1 X3F9
X3F2 X3FA
X3F3 X3FB
10015 10015
X3F4 X3FC
X3F5 X3FD
X3F6 X3FE
X3F7 X3FF

19
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.1.2 Axis State

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name
G10016 G10018 G10020 G10022 G10024 G10026 G10028 G10030 <- Sharing G
X400 X420 X440 X460 X480 X4A0 X4C0 X4E0 RDYn Servo ready
X401 X421 X441 X461 X481 X4A1 X4C1 X4E1 AXn Axis selection
X402 X422 X442 X462 X482 X4A2 X4C2 X4E2 MVPn In axis plus motion
X403 X423 X443 X463 X483 X4A3 X4C3 X4E3 MVMn In axis minus motion
X404 X424 X444 X464 X484 X4A4 X4C4 X4E4 ZP1n 1st reference position reached
X405 X425 X445 X465 X485 X4A5 X4C5 X4E5 ZP2n 2nd reference position reached
X406 X426 X446 X466 X486 X4A6 X4C6 X4E6 ZP3n 3rd reference position reached
X407 X427 X447 X467 X487 X4A7 X4C7 X4E7 ZP4n 4th reference position reached
X408 X428 X448 X468 X488 X4A8 X4C8 X4E8 NRFn Near reference position
X409 X429 X449 X469 X489 X4A9 X4C9 X4E9 ARRFn NC axis up-to-speed
X40A X42A X44A X46A X48A X4AA X4CA X4EA ZSFn Zero point initialization set completed
Zero point initialization set error
X40B X42B X44B X46B X48B X4AB X4CB X4EB ZSEn
completed
X40C X42C X44C X46C X48C X4AC X4CC X4EC ZSn In zero point initialization
X40D X42D X44D X46D X48D X4AD X4CD X4ED ZLSn Zero point initialization incomplete
X40E X42E X44E X46E X48E X4AE X4CE X4EE ILIn In current limit
X40F X42F X44F X46F X48F X4AF X4CF X4EF ILAn Current limit reached

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name
G10017 G10019 G10021 G10023 G10025 G10027 G10029 G10031 <- Sharing G
X410 X430 X450 X470 X490 X4B0 X4D0 X4F0 UCLPn Unclamp command
X411 X431 X451 X471 X491 X4B1 X4D1 X4F1 INPn In-position
X412 X432 X452 X472 X492 X4B2 X4D2 X4F2 MSOEn In multi-step speed monitor
X413 X433 X453 X473 X493 X4B3 X4D3 X4F3 MSOMO1n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1
X414 X434 X454 X474 X494 X4B4 X4D4 X4F4 MSOMO2n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2
X415 X435 X455 X475 X495 X4B5 X4D5 X4F5
X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6 AXCHGISn Axis switching invalid status
X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7 PLCMODn In PLC axis control
X418 X438 X458 X478 X498 X4B8 X4D8 X4F8
X419 X439 X459 X479 X499 X4B9 X4D9 X4F9
X41A X43A X45A X47A X49A X4BA X4DA X4FA
X41B X43B X45B X47B X49B X4BB X4DB X4FB
X41C X43C X45C X47C X49C X4BC X4DC X4FC
X41D X43D X45D X47D X49D X4BD X4DD X4FD
X41E X43E X45E X47E X49E X4BE X4DE X4FE
X41F X43F X45F X47F X49F X4BF X4DF X4FF

20
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name
G10032 G10034 G10036 G10038 G10040 G10042 G10044 G10046 <- Sharing G
X500 X520 X540 X560 X580 X5A0 X5C0 X5E0 RDYn Servo ready
X501 X521 X541 X561 X581 X5A1 X5C1 X5E1 AXn Axis selection
X502 X522 X542 X562 X582 X5A2 X5C2 X5E2 MVPn In plus motion
X503 X523 X543 X563 X583 X5A3 X5C3 X5E3 MVMn In minus motion
X504 X524 X544 X564 X584 X5A4 X5C4 X5E4 ZP1n 1st reference position reached
X505 X525 X545 X565 X585 X5A5 X5C5 X5E5 ZP2n 2nd reference position reached
X506 X526 X546 X566 X586 X5A6 X5C6 X5E6 ZP3n 3rd reference position reached
X507 X527 X547 X567 X587 X5A7 X5C7 X5E7 ZP4n 4th reference position reached
X508 X528 X548 X568 X588 X5A8 X5C8 X5E8 NRFn Near reference position
X509 X529 X549 X569 X589 X5A9 X5C9 X5E9 ARRFn NC axis up-to-speed
X50A X52A X54A X56A X58A X5AA X5CA X5EA ZSFn Zero point initialization set completed
Zero point initialization set error
X50B X52B X54B X56B X58B X5AB X5CB X5EB ZSEn
completed
X50C X52C X54C X56C X58C X5AC X5CC X5EC ZSn In zero point initialization
X50D X52D X54D X56D X58D X5AD X5CD X5ED ZLSn Zero point initialization incomplete
X50E X52E X54E X56E X58E X5AE X5CE X5EE ILIn In current limit
X50F X52F X54F X56F X58F X5AF X5CF X5EF ILAn Current limit reached

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name
G10033 G10035 G10037 G10039 G10041 G10043 G10045 G10047 <- Sharing G
X510 X530 X550 X570 X590 X5B0 X5D0 X5F0 UCLPn Unclamp command
X511 X531 X551 X571 X591 X5B1 X5D1 X5F1 INPn In-position
X512 X532 X552 X572 X592 X5B2 X5D2 X5F2 MSOEn In multi-step speed monitor
X513 X533 X553 X573 X593 X5B3 X5D3 X5F3 MSOMO1n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1
X514 X534 X554 X574 X594 X5B4 X5D4 X5F4 MSOMO2n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2
X515 X535 X555 X575 X595 X5B5 X5D5 X5F5
X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6 AXCHGISn Axis switching invalid status
X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7 PLCMODn In PLC axis control
X518 X538 X558 X578 X598 X5B8 X5D8 X5F8
X519 X539 X559 X579 X599 X5B9 X5D9 X5F9
X51A X53A X55A X57A X59A X5BA X5DA X5FA
X51B X53B X55B X57B X59B X5BB X5DB X5FB
X51C X53C X55C X57C X59C X5BC X5DC X5FC
X51D X53D X55D X57D X59D X5BD X5DD X5FD
X51E X53E X55E X57E X59E X5BE X5DE X5FE
X51F X53F X55F X57F X59F X5BF X5DF X5FF

21
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.1.3 Part System State

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10048 G10056 G10064 G10072 G10080 G10088 G10096 <- Sharing G
X600 X680 X700 X780 X800 X880 X900 JOn In jog mode
X601 X681 X701 X781 X801 X881 X901 HOn In handle mode
X602 X682 X702 X782 X802 X882 X902 SOn In incremental mode
X603 X683 X703 X783 X803 X883 X903 PTPOn In manual arbitrary feed mode
X604 X684 X704 X784 X804 X884 X904 ZRNOn In reference position return mode
X605 X685 X705 X785 X805 X885 X905 ASTOn In automatic initial set mode
X606 X686 X706 X786 X806 X886 X906
X607 X687 X707 X787 X807 X887 X907
X608 X688 X708 X788 X808 X888 X908 MEMOn In memory mode
X609 X689 X709 X789 X809 X889 X909
X60A X68A X70A X78A X80A X88A X90A
X60B X68B X70B X78B X80B X88B X90B DOn In MDI mode
X60C X68C X70C X78C X80C X88C X90C
X60D X68D X70D X78D X80D X88D X90D
X60E X68E X70E X78E X80E X88E X90E
X60F X68F X70F X78F X80F X88F X90F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10049 G10057 G10065 G10073 G10081 G10089 G10097 <- Sharing G
X610 X690 X710 X790 X810 X890 X910
X611 X691 X711 X791 X811 X891 X911
X612 X692 X712 X792 X812 X892 X912 OPn In automatic operation "run"
X613 X693 X713 X793 X813 X893 X913 STLn In automatic operation "start"
X614 X694 X714 X794 X814 X894 X914 SPLn In automatic operation "pause"
X615 X695 X715 X795 X815 X895 X915 RSTn In "reset"
X616 X696 X716 X796 X816 X896 X916 CXNn In manual arbitrary feed
X617 X697 X717 X797 X817 X897 X917 RWDn In rewind
X618 X698 X718 X798 X818 X898 X918 DENn Motion command completion
X619 X699 X719 X799 X819 X899 X919 TIMPn All axes in-position
X61A X69A X71A X79A X81A X89A X91A TSMZn All axes smoothing zero
X61B X69B X71B X79B X81B X89B X91B
X61C X69C X71C X79C X81C X89C X91C CXFINn Manual arbitrary feed completion
X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D ETSEn External search finished
X61E X69E X71E X79E X81E X89E X91E
X61F X69F X71F X79F X81F X89F X91F

22
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10050 G10058 G10066 G10074 G10082 G10090 G10098 <- Sharing G
X620 X6A0 X720 X7A0 X820 X8A0 X920 RPNn In rapid traverse
X621 X6A1 X721 X7A1 X821 X8A1 X921 CUTn In cutting feed
X622 X6A2 X722 X7A2 X822 X8A2 X922 TAPn In tapping
X623 X6A3 X723 X7A3 X823 X8A3 X923 THRDn In thread cutting
X624 X6A4 X724 X7A4 X824 X8A4 X924 SYNn In synchronous feed
X625 X6A5 X725 X7A5 X825 X8A5 X925 CSSn In constant surface speed
X626 X6A6 X726 X7A6 X826 X8A6 X926 SKIPn In skip
X627 X6A7 X727 X7A7 X827 X8A7 X927 ZRNNn In reference position return
X628 X6A8 X728 X7A8 X828 X8A8 X928 INCHn In inch unit selection
X629 X6A9 X729 X7A9 X829 X8A9 X929
X62A X6AA X72A X7AA X82A X8AA X92A F1DNn F 1-digit commanded
X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B TLFOn In tool life management
X62C X6AC X72C X7AC X82C X8AC X92C
X62D X6AD X72D X7AD X82D X8AD X92D
X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E TLOVn Tool life over
X62F X6AF X72F X7AF X82F X8AF X92F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10051 G10059 G10067 G10075 G10083 G10091 G10099 <- Sharing G
X630 X6B0 X730 X7B0 X830 X8B0 X930
X631 X6B1 X731 X7B1 X831 X8B1 X931
X632 X6B2 X732 X7B2 X832 X8B2 X932 AL3n NC alarm 3 (Program error)
X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933 AL4n NC alarm 4 (Operation error)
X634 X6B4 X734 X7B4 X834 X8B4 X934
X635 X6B5 X735 X7B5 X835 X8B5 X935 SSEn Search & start (error)
X636 X6B6 X736 X7B6 X836 X8B6 X936 SSGn Search & start (search)
X637 X6B7 X737 X7B7 X837 X8B7 X937 ASLEn Illegal axis selected
X638 X6B8 X738 X7B8 X838 X8B8 X938 F11n F 1-digit No. code 1
X639 X6B9 X739 X7B9 X839 X8B9 X939 F12n F 1-digit No. code 2
X63A X6BA X73A X7BA X83A X8BA X93A F14n F 1-digit No. code 4
X63B X6BB X73B X7BB X83B X8BB X93B
X63C X6BC X73C X7BC X83C X8BC X93C Waiting between part systems
X63D X6BD X73D X7BD X83D X8BD X93D
X63E X6BE X73E X7BE X83E X8BE X93E VAMODOn In hypothetical axis command mode
X63F X6BF X73F X7BF X83F X8BF X93F HSST In high-speed synchronous tapping

23
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10052 G10060 G10068 G10076 G10084 G10092 G10100 <- Sharing G
X640 X6C0 X740 X7C0 X840 X8C0 X940 DM00n M code independent output M00
X641 X6C1 X741 X7C1 X841 X8C1 X941 DM01n M code independent output M01
X642 X6C2 X742 X7C2 X842 X8C2 X942 DM02n M code independent output M02
X643 X6C3 X743 X7C3 X843 X8C3 X943 DM30n M code independent output M30
X644 X6C4 X744 X7C4 X844 X8C4 X944 MF1n M function strobe 1
X645 X6C5 X745 X7C5 X845 X8C5 X945 MF2n M function strobe 2
X646 X6C6 X746 X7C6 X846 X8C6 X946 MF3n M function strobe 3
X647 X6C7 X747 X7C7 X847 X8C7 X947 MF4n M function strobe 4
X648 X6C8 X748 X7C8 X848 X8C8 X948
X649 X6C9 X749 X7C9 X849 X8C9 X949 MMSn Manual numerical command
X64A X6CA X74A X7CA X84A X8CA X94A
X64B X6CB X74B X7CB X84B X8CB X94B TCPn Tool change position return completion
X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C TCRQn New tool change
X64D X6CD X74D X7CD X84D X8CD X94D
X64E X6CE X74E X7CE X84E X8CE X94E
X64F X6CF X74F X7CF X84F X8CF X94F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10053 G10061 G10069 G10077 G10085 G10093 G10101 <- Sharing G
X650 X6D0 X750 X7D0 X850 X8D0 X950 TF1n T function strobe 1
X651 X6D1 X751 X7D1 X851 X8D1 X951
X652 X6D2 X752 X7D2 X852 X8D2 X952
X653 X6D3 X753 X7D3 X853 X8D3 X953
X654 X6D4 X754 X7D4 X854 X8D4 X954 BF1n 2nd M function strobe 1
X655 X6D5 X755 X7D5 X855 X8D5 X955
X656 X6D6 X756 X7D6 X856 X8D6 X956
X657 X6D7 X757 X7D7 X857 X8D7 X957
X658 X6D8 X758 X7D8 X858 X8D8 X958 SF1n S function strobe 1
X659 X6D9 X759 X7D9 X859 X8D9 X959 SF2n S function strobe 2
X65A X6DA X75A X7DA X85A X8DA X95A SF3n S function strobe 3
X65B X6DB X75B X7DB X85B X8DB X95B SF4n S function strobe 4
X65C X6DC X75C X7DC X85C X8DC X95C SF5n S function strobe 5
X65D X6DD X75D X7DD X85D X8DD X95D SF6n S function strobe 6
X65E X6DE X75E X7DE X85E X8DE X95E SF7n S function strobe 7
X65F X6DF X75F X7DF X85F X8DF X95F

24
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10054 G10062 G10070 G10078 G10086 G10094 G10102 <- Sharing G
X660 X6E0 X760 X7E0 X860 X8E0 X960 PSW1n Position switch 1
X661 X6E1 X761 X7E1 X861 X8E1 X961 PSW2n Position switch 2
X662 X6E2 X762 X7E2 X862 X8E2 X962 PSW3n Position switch 3
X663 X6E3 X763 X7E3 X863 X8E3 X963 PSW4n Position switch 4
X664 X6E4 X764 X7E4 X864 X8E4 X964 PSW5n Position switch 5
X665 X6E5 X765 X7E5 X865 X8E5 X965 PSW6n Position switch 6
X666 X6E6 X766 X7E6 X866 X8E6 X966 PSW7n Position switch 7
X667 X6E7 X767 X7E7 X867 X8E7 X967 PSW8n Position switch 8
X668 X6E8 X768 X7E8 X868 X8E8 X968
X669 X6E9 X769 X7E9 X869 X8E9 X969
X66A X6EA X76A X7EA X86A X8EA X96A
X66B X6EB X76B X7EB X86B X8EB X96B
X66C X6EC X76C X7EC X86C X8EC X96C DLWAITn Waiting for data to be downloaded
X66D X6ED X76D X7ED X86D X8ED X96D TRVEn Tap retract possible
X66E X6EE X76E X7EE X86E X8EE X96E PCNTn No. of work machining over
X66F X6EF X76F X7EF X86F X8EF X96F ABSWn Power shutoff movement over

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10055 G10063 G10071 G10079 G10087 G10095 G10103 <- Sharing G
X670 X6F0 X770 X7F0 X870 X8F0 X970 PSW9n Position switch 9
X671 X6F1 X771 X7F1 X871 X8F1 X971 PSW10n Position switch 10
X672 X6F2 X772 X7F2 X872 X8F2 X972 PSW11n Position switch 11
X673 X6F3 X773 X7F3 X873 X8F3 X973 PSW12n Position switch 12
X674 X6F4 X774 X7F4 X874 X8F4 X974 PSW13n Position switch 13
X675 X6F5 X775 X7F5 X875 X8F5 X975 PSW14n Position switch 14
X676 X6F6 X776 X7F6 X876 X8F6 X976 PSW15n Position switch 15
X677 X6F7 X777 X7F7 X877 X8F7 X977 PSW16n Position switch 16
X678 X6F8 X778 X7F8 X878 X8F8 X978
X679 X6F9 X779 X7F9 X879 X8F9 X979
X67A X6FA X77A X7FA X87A X8FA X97A
X67B X6FB X77B X7FB X87B X8FB X97B
X67C X6FC X77C X7FC X87C X8FC X97C
X67D X6FD X77D X7FD X87D X8FD X97D
X67E X6FE X77E X7FE X87E X8FE X97E
X67F X6FF X77F X7FF X87F X8FF X97F

25
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.1.4 Spindle State

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
G10104 G10107 G10110 G10113 G10116 G10119 G10122 <- Sharing G
X980 X9B0 X9E0 XA10 XA40 XA70 XAA0
X981 X9B1 X9E1 XA11 XA41 XA71 XAA1
X982 X9B2 X9E2 XA12 XA42 XA72 XAA2
X983 X9B3 X9E3 XA13 XA43 XA73 XAA3
X984 X9B4 X9E4 XA14 XA44 XA74 XAA4 SIGEn S command gear No. illegal
X985 X9B5 X9E5 XA15 XA45 XA75 XAA5 SOVEn S command max./min. command value over
X986 X9B6 X9E6 XA16 XA46 XA76 XAA6 SNGEn S command no gear selected
X987 X9B7 X9E7 XA17 XA47 XA77 XAA7
X988 X9B8 X9E8 XA18 XA48 XA78 XAA8
X989 X9B9 X9E9 XA19 XA49 XA79 XAA9
X98A X9BA X9EA XA1A XA4A XA7A XAAA
X98B X9BB X9EB XA1B XA4B XA7B XAAB SUPPn Spindle speed upper limit over
X98C X9BC X9EC XA1C XA4C XA7C XAAC SLOWn Spindle speed lower limit over
X98D X9BD X9ED XA1D XA4D XA7D XAAD GR1n Spindle gear shift command 1
X98E X9BE X9EE XA1E XA4E XA7E XAAE GR2n Spindle gear shift command 2
X98F X9BF X9EF XA1F XA4F XA7F XAAF

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
G10105 G10108 G10111 G10114 G10117 G10120 G10123 <- Sharing G
X990 X9C0 X9F0 XA20 XA50 XA80 XAB0
X991 X9C1 X9F1 XA21 XA51 XA81 XAB1 CDOn Current detection
X992 X9C2 X9F2 XA22 XA52 XA82 XAB2 VROn Speed detection
X993 X9C3 X9F3 XA23 XA53 XA83 XAB3 FLOn In spindle alarm
X994 X9C4 X9F4 XA24 XA54 XA84 XAB4 ZSOn Zero speed
X995 X9C5 X9F5 XA25 XA55 XA85 XAB5 USOn Spindle up-to-speed
X996 X9C6 X9F6 XA26 XA56 XA86 XAB6 ORAOn Spindle in-position
X997 X9C7 X9F7 XA27 XA57 XA87 XAB7 LCSAn In L coil selection
X998 X9C8 X9F8 XA28 XA58 XA88 XAB8 SMAn Spindle ready-ON
X999 X9C9 X9F9 XA29 XA59 XA89 XAB9 SSAn Spindle servo-ON
X99A X9CA X9FA XA2A XA5A XA8A XABA
X99B X9CB X9FB XA2B XA5B XA8B XABB SSRNn In spindle forward run
X99C X9CC X9FC XA2C XA5C XA8C XABC SSRIn In spindle reverse run
X99D X9CD X9FD XA2D XA5D XA8D XABD SZPHn Z-phase passed
X99E X9CE X9FE XA2E XA5E XA8E XABE SIMPn Position loop in-position
X99F X9CF X9FF XA2F XA5F XA8F XABF STLQn In spindle torque limit

26
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
G10106 G10109 G10112 G10115 G10118 G10121 G10124 <- Sharing G
X9A0 X9D0 XA00 XA30 XA60 XA90 XAC0
X9A1 X9D1 XA01 XA31 XA61 XA91 XAC1
X9A2 X9D2 XA02 XA32 XA62 XA92 XAC2
X9A3 X9D3 XA03 XA33 XA63 XA93 XAC3
X9A4 X9D4 XA04 XA34 XA64 XA94 XAC4
X9A5 X9D5 XA05 XA35 XA65 XA95 XAC5
X9A6 X9D6 XA06 XA36 XA66 XA96 XAC6
X9A7 X9D7 XA07 XA37 XA67 XA97 XAC7
X9A8 X9D8 XA08 XA38 XA68 XA98 XAC8
X9A9 X9D9 XA09 XA39 XA69 XA99 XAC9 SMSOEn In spindle multi-step speed monitor
X9AA X9DA XA0A XA3A XA6A XA9A XACA SMSOMO1n In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 1
X9AB X9DB XA0B XA3B XA6B XA9B XACB SMSOMO2n In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 2
X9AC X9DC XA0C XA3C XA6C XA9C XACC
X9AD X9DD XA0D XA3D XA6D XA9D XACD
X9AE X9DE XA0E XA3E XA6E XA9E XACE
X9AF X9DF XA0F XA3F XA6F XA9F XACF

27
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

3.2.1 System State

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
10200 R0 10210 R10 1st handle pulse counter
10201 R1 10211 R11 2nd handle pulse counter
10202 R2 10212 R12 3rd handle pulse counter
10203 R3 10213 R13
10204 R4 10214 R14
10205 R5 10215 R15
10206 R6 10216 R16
10207 R7 10217 R17
CRT display information
10208 R8 KEYIN 10218 R18
10209 R9 SMODEN Speed monitor door open possible 10219 R19

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
10220 R20 10230 R30 User macro output #1135
10221 R21 Emergency stop cause 10231 R31 (Controller -> PLC)
10222 R22 10232 R32
10223 R23 10233 R33
CNC software version code
10224 R24 User macro output #1132 10234 R34
10225 R25 (Controller -> PLC) 10235 R35
10226 R26 User macro output #1133 10236 R36
10227 R27 (Controller -> PLC) 10237 R37
10228 R28 User macro output #1134 10238 R38
10229 R29 (Controller -> PLC) 10239 R39

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
10240 R40 Battery drop cause 10250 R50
10241 R41 Temperature warning cause 10251 R51
10242 R42 10252 R52
10243 R43 10253 R53
10244 R44 10254 R54
Spindle synchronization phase error
10245 R45 10255 R55
output
Spindle synchronization Phase error
10246 R46 10256 R56
monitor
Spindle synchronization Phase error
10247 R47 10257 R57
monitor (lower limit)
Spindle synchronization Phase error
10248 R48 Spindle synchronization phase error 1 10258 R58
monitor (upper limit)
Spindle synchronization Phase offset
10249 R49 Spindle synchronization phase error 2 10259 R59
data

28
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
10260 R60 APLC input data 1 10270 R70
10261 R61 APLC input data 2 10271 R71
10262 R62 APLC input data 3 10272 R72
10263 R63 APLC input data 4 10273 R73
10264 R64 APLC input data 5 10274 R74
10265 R65 APLC input data 6 10275 R75
10266 R66 APLC input data 7 10276 R76
10267 R67 APLC input data 8 10277 R77
10268 R68 APLC input data 9 10278 R78
10269 R69 APLC input data 10 10279 R79

Common Common
abbrev. Signal name abbrev. Signal name
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
10280 R80 ZR device No. at occurrence of NC 10290 R90
GOT window Data changeover
NCVERR exclusive instruction (DDWR/DDRD)
10281 R81 10291 R91 completion
error
ZRECVN Common variable No. at occurrence of
10282 R82 10292 R92
O ZR device error
ZRECVF Error cause at occurrence of ZR device
10283 R83 10293 R93
C error
10284 R84 10294 R94
10285 R85 10295 R95
10286 R86 10296 R96
10287 R87 10297 R97
10288 R88 10298 R98
10289 R89 10299 R99

29
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.2.2 Part System State

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10300 R100 10400 R200 10500 R300 10600 R400 10700 R500 10800 R600 10900 R700 External search status
10301 R101 10401 R201 10501 R301 10601 R401 10701 R501 10801 R601 10901 R701
10302 R102 10402 R202 10502 R302 10602 R402 10702 R502 10802 R602 10902 R702
10303 R103 10403 R203 10503 R303 10603 R403 10703 R503 10803 R603 10903 R703
10304 R104 10404 R204 10504 R304 10604 R404 10704 R504 10804 R604 10904 R704
M code data 1
10305 R105 10405 R205 10505 R305 10605 R405 10705 R505 10805 R605 10905 R705
10306 R106 10406 R206 10506 R306 10606 R406 10706 R506 10806 R606 10906 R706
M code data 2
10307 R107 10407 R207 10507 R307 10607 R407 10707 R507 10807 R607 10907 R707
10308 R108 10408 R208 10508 R308 10608 R408 10708 R508 10808 R608 10908 R708
M code data 3
10309 R109 10409 R209 10509 R309 10609 R409 10709 R509 10809 R609 10909 R709

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10310 R110 10410 R210 10510 R310 10610 R410 10710 R510 10810 R610 10910 R710
M code data 4
10311 R111 10411 R211 10511 R311 10611 R411 10711 R511 10811 R611 10911 R711
10312 R112 10412 R212 10512 R312 10612 R412 10712 R512 10812 R612 10912 R712
S code data 1
10313 R113 10413 R213 10513 R313 10613 R413 10713 R513 10813 R613 10913 R713
10314 R114 10414 R214 10514 R314 10614 R414 10714 R514 10814 R614 10914 R714
S code data 2
10315 R115 10415 R215 10515 R315 10615 R415 10715 R515 10815 R615 10915 R715
10316 R116 10416 R216 10516 R316 10616 R416 10716 R516 10816 R616 10916 R716
S code data 3
10317 R117 10417 R217 10517 R317 10617 R417 10717 R517 10817 R617 10917 R717
10318 R118 10418 R218 10518 R318 10618 R418 10718 R518 10818 R618 10918 R718
S code data 4
10319 R119 10419 R219 10519 R319 10619 R419 10719 R519 10819 R619 10919 R719

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10320 R120 10420 R220 10520 R320 10620 R420 10720 R520 10820 R620 10920 R720
T code data 1
10321 R121 10421 R221 10521 R321 10621 R421 10721 R521 10821 R621 10921 R721
10322 R122 10422 R222 10522 R322 10622 R422 10722 R522 10822 R622 10922 R722
10323 R123 10423 R223 10523 R323 10623 R423 10723 R523 10823 R623 10923 R723
10324 R124 10424 R224 10524 R324 10624 R424 10724 R524 10824 R624 10924 R724
10325 R125 10425 R225 10525 R325 10625 R425 10725 R525 10825 R625 10925 R725
10326 R126 10426 R226 10526 R326 10626 R426 10726 R526 10826 R626 10926 R726
10327 R127 10427 R227 10527 R327 10627 R427 10727 R527 10827 R627 10927 R727
10328 R128 10428 R228 10528 R328 10628 R428 10728 R528 10828 R628 10928 R728
2nd M function data 1
10329 R129 10429 R229 10529 R329 10629 R429 10729 R529 10829 R629 10929 R729

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10330 R130 10430 R230 10530 R330 10630 R430 10730 R530 10830 R630 10930 R730
10331 R131 10431 R231 10531 R331 10631 R431 10731 R531 10831 R631 10931 R731
10332 R132 10432 R232 10532 R332 10632 R432 10732 R532 10832 R632 10932 R732
10333 R133 10433 R233 10533 R333 10633 R433 10733 R533 10833 R633 10933 R733
10334 R134 10434 R234 10534 R334 10634 R434 10734 R534 10834 R634 10934 R734
10335 R135 10435 R235 10535 R335 10635 R435 10735 R535 10835 R635 10935 R735
10336 R136 10436 R236 10536 R336 10636 R436 10736 R536 10836 R636 10936 R736 Tool No.
10337 R137 10437 R237 10537 R337 10637 R437 10737 R537 10837 R637 10937 R737
10338 R138 10438 R238 10538 R338 10638 R438 10738 R538 10838 R638 10938 R738 Group in tool life management
10339 R139 10439 R239 10539 R339 10639 R439 10739 R539 10839 R639 10939 R739

30
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10340 R140 10440 R240 10540 R340 10640 R440 10740 R540 10840 R640 10940 R740 No. of work machining
10341 R141 10441 R241 10541 R341 10641 R441 10741 R541 10841 R641 10941 R741 (current value)
10342 R142 10442 R242 10542 R342 10642 R442 10742 R542 10842 R642 10942 R742 Near reference position
10343 R143 10443 R243 10543 R343 10643 R443 10743 R543 10843 R643 10943 R743 (per reference position)
10344 R144 10444 R244 10544 R344 10644 R444 10744 R544 10844 R644 10944 R744
Tool life usage data
10345 R145 10445 R245 10545 R345 10645 R445 10745 R545 10845 R645 10945 R745
10346 R146 10446 R246 10546 R346 10646 R446 10746 R546 10846 R646 10946 R746 No. of work machining
10347 R147 10447 R247 10547 R347 10647 R447 10747 R547 10847 R647 10947 R747 (maximum value)
10348 R148 10448 R248 10548 R348 10648 R448 10748 R548 10848 R648 10948 R748
10349 R149 10449 R249 10549 R349 10649 R449 10749 R549 10849 R649 10949 R749

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10350 R150 10450 R250 10550 R350 10650 R450 10750 R550 10850 R650 10950 R750
10351 R151 10451 R251 10551 R351 10651 R451 10751 R551 10851 R651 10951 R751
10352 R152 10452 R252 10552 R352 10652 R452 10752 R552 10852 R652 10952 R752
10353 R153 10453 R253 10553 R353 10653 R453 10753 R553 10853 R653 10953 R753
10354 R154 10454 R254 10554 R354 10654 R454 10754 R554 10854 R654 10954 R754
10355 R155 10455 R255 10555 R355 10655 R455 10755 R555 10855 R655 10955 R755
10356 R156 10456 R256 10556 R356 10656 R456 10756 R556 10856 R656 10956 R756
10357 R157 10457 R257 10557 R357 10657 R457 10757 R557 10857 R657 10957 R757 Error code output
10358 R158 10458 R258 10558 R358 10658 R458 10758 R558 10858 R658 10958 R758
10359 R159 10459 R259 10559 R359 10659 R459 10759 R559 10859 R659 10959 R759

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10360 R160 10460 R260 10560 R360 10660 R460 10760 R560 10860 R660 10960 R760
10361 R161 10461 R261 10561 R361 10661 R461 10761 R561 10861 R661 10961 R761
Error code output extension
10362 R162 10462 R262 10562 R362 10662 R462 10762 R562 10862 R662 10962 R762
10363 R163 10463 R263 10563 R363 10663 R463 10763 R563 10863 R663 10963 R763

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10364 R164 10464 R264 10564 R364 10664 R464 10764 R564 10864 R664 10964 R764
S code data 5
10365 R165 10465 R265 10565 R365 10665 R465 10765 R565 10865 R665 10965 R765
10366 R166 10466 R266 10566 R366 10666 R466 10766 R566 10866 R666 10966 R766
S code data 6
10367 R167 10467 R267 10567 R367 10667 R467 10767 R567 10867 R667 10967 R767
10368 R168 10468 R268 10568 R368 10668 R468 10768 R568 10868 R668 10968 R768
S code data 7
10369 R169 10469 R269 10569 R369 10669 R469 10769 R569 10869 R669 10969 R769
10370 R170 10470 R270 10570 R370 10670 R470 10770 R570 10870 R670 10970 R770 User Macro output #1132
10371 R171 10471 R271 10571 R371 10671 R471 10771 R571 10871 R671 10971 R771 (Controller -> PLC)
10372 R172 10472 R272 10572 R372 10672 R472 10772 R572 10872 R672 10972 R772 User Macro output #1133
10373 R173 10473 R273 10573 R373 10673 R473 10773 R573 10873 R673 10973 R773 (Controller -> PLC)
10374 R174 10474 R274 10574 R374 10674 R474 10774 R574 10874 R674 10974 R774 User Macro output #1134
10375 R175 10475 R275 10575 R375 10675 R475 10775 R575 10875 R675 10975 R775 (Controller -> PLC)
10376 R176 10476 R276 10576 R376 10676 R476 10776 R576 10876 R676 10976 R776 User Macro output #1135
10377 R177 10477 R277 10577 R377 10677 R477 10777 R577 10877 R677 10977 R777 (Controller -> PLC)
10378 R178 10478 R278 10578 R378 10678 R478 10778 R578 10878 R678 10978 R778
10379 R179 10479 R279 10579 R379 10679 R479 10779 R579 10879 R679 10979 R779

31
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10380 R180 10480 R280 10580 R380 10680 R480 10780 R580 10880 R680 10980 R780 Chopping status
10381 R181 10481 R281 10581 R381 10681 R481 10781 R581 10881 R681 10981 R781 Chopping error No.
10382 R182 10482 R282 10582 R382 10682 R482 10782 R582 10882 R682 10982 R782 Chopping axis
10383 R183 10483 R283 10583 R383 10683 R483 10783 R583 10883 R683 10983 R783
10384 R184 10484 R284 10584 R384 10684 R484 10784 R584 10884 R684 10984 R784
10385 R185 10485 R285 10585 R385 10685 R485 10785 R585 10885 R685 10985 R785
10386 R186 10486 R286 10586 R386 10686 R486 10786 R586 10886 R686 10986 R786
10387 R187 10487 R287 10587 R387 10687 R487 10787 R587 10887 R687 10987 R787
10388 R188 10488 R288 10588 R388 10688 R488 10788 R588 10888 R688 10988 R788
10389 R189 10489 R289 10589 R389 10689 R489 10789 R589 10889 R689 10989 R789

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- Sharing Inter- abbrev. Signal name
G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal G nal
10390 R190 10490 R290 10590 R390 10690 R490 10790 R590 10890 R690 10990 R790
10391 R191 10491 R291 10591 R391 10691 R491 10791 R591 10891 R691 10991 R791
10392 R192 10492 R292 10592 R392 10692 R492 10792 R592 10892 R692 10992 R792
10393 R193 10493 R293 10593 R393 10693 R493 10793 R593 10893 R693 10993 R793
10394 R194 10494 R294 10594 R394 10694 R494 10794 R594 10894 R694 10994 R794
10395 R195 10495 R295 10595 R395 10695 R495 10795 R595 10895 R695 10995 R795
10396 R196 10496 R296 10596 R396 10696 R496 10796 R596 10896 R696 10996 R796
10397 R197 10497 R297 10597 R397 10697 R497 10797 R597 10897 R697 10997 R797
10398 R198 10498 R298 10598 R398 10698 R498 10798 R598 10898 R698 10998 R798
10399 R199 10499 R299 10599 R399 10699 R499 10799 R599 10899 R699 10999 R799

32
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

3.2.3 Axis State

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
Shar- Inter- Sha- Inter Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ring G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal
Thermal expansion
11000 R800 11010 R810 11020 R820 11030 R830 11040 R840 11050 R850 11060 R860 11070 R870 compensation
amount
11001 R801 11011 R811 11021 R821 11031 R831 11041 R841 11051 R851 11061 R861 11071 R871
11002 R802 11012 R812 11022 R822 11032 R832 11042 R842 11052 R852 11062 R862 11072 R872 Machine position
11003 R803 11013 R813 11023 R823 11033 R833 11043 R843 11053 R853 11063 R863 11073 R873 n-th axis
11004 R804 11014 R814 11024 R824 11034 R834 11044 R844 11054 R854 11064 R864 11074 R874 Feedback machine
11005 R805 11015 R815 11025 R825 11035 R835 11045 R845 11055 R855 11065 R865 11075 R875 position n-th axis
11006 R806 11016 R816 11026 R826 11036 R836 11046 R846 11056 R856 11066 R866 11076 R876
11007 R807 11017 R817 11027 R827 11037 R837 11047 R847 11057 R857 11067 R867 11077 R877
11008 R808 11018 R818 11028 R828 11038 R838 11048 R848 11058 R858 11068 R868 11078 R878
11009 R809 11019 R819 11029 R829 11039 R839 11049 R849 11059 R859 11069 R869 11079 R879

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Shar- Inter- Sha- Inter Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ring G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal
Thermal expansion
11080 R880 11090 R890 11100 R900 11110 R910 11120 R920 11130 R930 11140 R940 11150 R950 compensation
amount
11081 R881 11091 R891 11101 R901 11111 R911 11121 R921 11131 R931 11141 R941 11151 R951
11082 R882 11092 R892 11102 R902 11112 R912 11122 R922 11132 R932 11142 R942 11152 R952 Machine position
11083 R883 11093 R893 11103 R903 11113 R913 11123 R923 11133 R933 11143 R943 11153 R953 n-th axis
11084 R884 11094 R894 11104 R904 11114 R914 11124 R924 11134 R934 11144 R944 11154 R954 Feedback machine
11085 R885 11095 R895 11105 R905 11115 R915 11125 R925 11135 R935 11145 R945 11155 R955 position n-th axis
11086 R886 11096 R896 11106 R906 11116 R916 11126 R926 11136 R936 11146 R946 11156 R956
11087 R887 11097 R897 11107 R907 11117 R917 11127 R927 11137 R937 11147 R947 11157 R957
11088 R888 11098 R898 11108 R908 11118 R918 11128 R928 11138 R938 11148 R948 11158 R958
11089 R889 11099 R899 11109 R909 11119 R919 11129 R929 11139 R939 11149 R949 11159 R959

33
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.2.4 Spindle State

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
11160 R1600 11190 R1630 11220 R1660 11250 R1690 11280 R1720 11310 R1750 11340 R1780 SRPMIN Spindle command rotation
11161 R1601 11191 R1631 11221 R1661 11251 R1691 11281 R1721 11311 R1751 11341 R1781 n speed input
11162 R1602 11192 R1632 11222 R1662 11252 R1692 11282 R1722 11312 R1752 11342 R1782 Spindle command final data
SRPMn
11163 R1603 11193 R1633 11223 R1663 11253 R1693 11283 R1723 11313 R1753 11343 R1783 (Rotation speed)
11164 R1604 11194 R1634 11224 R1664 11254 R1694 11284 R1724 11314 R1754 11344 R1784 Spindle command final data
SBINn
11165 R1605 11195 R1635 11225 R1665 11255 R1695 11285 R1725 11315 R1755 11345 R1785 (12-bit binary)
11166 R1606 11196 R1636 11226 R1666 11256 R1696 11286 R1726 11316 R1756 11346 R1786
SREALn Spindle actual speed
11167 R1607 11197 R1637 11227 R1667 11257 R1697 11287 R1727 11317 R1757 11347 R1787
11168 R1608 11198 R1638 11228 R1668 11258 R1698 11288 R1728 11318 R1758 11348 R1788
11169 R1609 11199 R1639 11229 R1669 11259 R1699 11289 R1729 11319 R1759 11349 R1789

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
11170 R1610 11200 R1640 11230 R1670 11260 R1700 11290 R1730 11320 R1760 11350 R1790
11171 R1611 11201 R1641 11231 R1671 11261 R1701 11291 R1731 11321 R1761 11351 R1791 Spindle motor temperature
11172 R1612 11202 R1642 11232 R1672 11262 R1702 11292 R1732 11322 R1762 11352 R1792
11173 R1613 11203 R1643 11233 R1673 11263 R1703 11293 R1733 11323 R1763 11353 R1793
11174 R1614 11204 R1644 11234 R1674 11264 R1704 11294 R1734 11324 R1764 11354 R1794
11175 R1615 11205 R1645 11235 R1675 11265 R1705 11295 R1735 11325 R1765 11355 R1795
11176 R1616 11206 R1646 11236 R1676 11266 R1706 11296 R1736 11326 R1766 11356 R1796
11177 R1617 11207 R1647 11237 R1677 11267 R1707 11297 R1737 11327 R1767 11357 R1797
11178 R1618 11208 R1648 11238 R1678 11268 R1708 11298 R1738 11328 R1768 11358 R1798
11179 R1619 11209 R1649 11239 R1679 11269 R1709 11299 R1739 11329 R1769 11359 R1799

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
11180 R1620 11210 R1650 11240 R1680 11270 R1710 11300 R1740 11330 R1770 11360 R1800
11181 R1621 11211 R1651 11241 R1681 11271 R1711 11301 R1741 11331 R1771 11361 R1801
11182 R1622 11212 R1652 11242 R1682 11272 R1712 11302 R1742 11332 R1772 11362 R1802
11183 R1623 11213 R1653 11243 R1683 11273 R1713 11303 R1743 11333 R1773 11363 R1803
11184 R1624 11214 R1654 11244 R1684 11274 R1714 11304 R1744 11334 R1774 11364 R1804
11185 R1625 11215 R1655 11245 R1685 11275 R1715 11305 R1745 11335 R1775 11365 R1805
11186 R1626 11216 R1656 11246 R1686 11276 R1716 11306 R1746 11336 R1776 11366 R1806
11187 R1627 11217 R1657 11247 R1687 11277 R1717 11307 R1747 11337 R1777 11367 R1807
11188 R1628 11218 R1658 11248 R1688 11278 R1718 11308 R1748 11338 R1778 11368 R1808
11189 R1629 11219 R1659 11249 R1689 11279 R1719 11309 R1749 11339 R1779 11369 R1809

34
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.3.1 System Command

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y300 Y308
Y301 Y309
Y302 Y30A
Y303 Y30B
+000 +000
Y304 Y30C
Y305 Y30D
Y306 Y30E
Y307 Y30F

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y310 MCT Contactor shutoff test Y318 *KEY1 Data protect key 1
Y311 CHKTRG Dual signals check start Y319 *KEY2 Data protect key 2
Y312 OFFCHK Output OFF check Y31A *KEY3 Data protect key 3
Y313 Y31B
+001 +001
Y314 RHD1 Integration time input 1 Y31C
Y315 RHD2 Integration time input 2 Y31D CRTFN CRT changeover completion
Y316 Y31E DISP1 Display changeover $1
Y317 Y31F DISP2 Display changeover $2

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y320 Y328 DOOR1 Door open I
Y321 SMPTRG NC data sampling trigger Y329 DOOR2 Door open II
Y322 HISAVE Saving operation history data Y32A
Y323 EDITOK Edited data recovery confirmation Y32B PABMI PLC axis control buffering mode valid
+002 +002
Y324 Y32C
Y325 Y32D PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid
Y326 Y32E PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid
Y327 QEMG PLC emergency stop Y32F PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y330 SSYNI Spindle synchronization cancel Y338 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis
Y331 SPCMPC Chuck close Y339 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis
Y332 SPSY Spindle synchronization Y33A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis
Y333 SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization Y33B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis
+003 +003
Y334 SPSDR Spindle synchronous rotation direction Y33C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis
Y335 SSPHM Phase shift calculation request Y33D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis
Y336 SSPHF Phase offset request Y33E *PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis
Y337 SPDRPO Error temporary cancel Y33F *PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

35
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y340 PLCAE1 PLC axis control valid 1st axis Y348
Y341 PLCAE2 PLC axis control valid 2nd axis Y349
Y342 PLCAE3 PLC axis control valid 3rd axis Y34A
Y343 PLCAE4 PLC axis control valid 4th axis Y34B
+004 +004
Y344 PLCAE5 PLC axis control valid 5th axis Y34C
Y345 PLCAE6 PLC axis control valid 6th axis Y34D
Y346 PLCAE7 PLC axis control valid 7th axis Y34E
Y347 PLCAE8 PLC axis control valid 8th axis Y34F

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y350 DLDREQ Download request Y358
Y351 Y359
Y352 Y35A
Y353 Y35B
+005 +005
Y354 Y35C
Y355 Y35D
Y356 Y35E
Y357 Y35F

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y360 Y368
Y361 Y369
Y362 Y36A
Y363 Y36B
+006 +006
Y364 Y36C
Y365 Y36D
Y366 Y36E
Y367 Y36F

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y370 Y378
Y371 Y379
Y372 Y37A
Y373 Y37B
+007 +007
Y374 Y37C
Y375 Y37D
Y376 Y37E
Y377 Y37F

36
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y380 APLCOUT1 APLC output signal 1 Y388 APLCOUT9 APLC output signal 9
Y381 APLCOUT2 APLC output signal 2 Y389 APLCOUT10 APLC output signal 10
Y382 APLCOUT3 APLC output signal 3 Y38A APLCOUT11 APLC output signal 11
Y383 APLCOUT4 APLC output signal 4 Y38B APLCOUT12 APLC output signal 12
+008 +008
Y384 APLCOUT5 APLC output signal 5 Y38C APLCOUT13 APLC output signal 13
Y385 APLCOUT6 APLC output signal 6 Y38D APLCOUT14 APLC output signal 14
Y386 APLCOUT7 APLC output signal 7 Y38E APLCOUT15 APLC output signal 15
Y387 APLCOUT8 APLC output signal 8 Y38F APLCOUT16 APLC output signal 16

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y390 APLCOUT17 APLC output signal 17 Y398 APLCOUT25 APLC output signal 25
Y391 APLCOUT18 APLC output signal 18 Y399 APLCOUT26 APLC output signal 26
Y392 APLCOUT19 APLC output signal 19 Y39A APLCOUT27 APLC output signal 27
Y393 APLCOUT20 APLC output signal 20 Y39B APLCOUT28 APLC output signal 28
+009 +009
Y394 APLCOUT21 APLC output signal 21 Y39C APLCOUT29 APLC output signal 29
Y395 APLCOUT22 APLC output signal 22 Y39D APLCOUT30 APLC output signal 30
Y396 APLCOUT23 APLC output signal 23 Y39E APLCOUT31 APLC output signal 31
Y397 APLCOUT24 APLC output signal 24 Y39F APLCOUT32 APLC output signal 32

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3A0 PSKIP1 PLC skip 1 Y3A8 PSKIP9 PLC skip 9
Y3A1 PSKIP2 PLC skip 2 Y3A9 PSKIP10 PLC skip 10
Y3A2 PSKIP3 PLC skip 3 Y3AA PSKIP11 PLC skip 11
Y3A3 PSKIP4 PLC skip 4 Y3AB PSKIP12 PLC skip 12
+010 +010
Y3A4 PSKIP5 PLC skip 5 Y3AC PSKIP13 PLC skip 13
Y3A5 PSKIP6 PLC skip 6 Y3AD PSKIP14 PLC skip 14
Y3A6 PSKIP7 PLC skip 7 Y3AE PSKIP15 PLC skip 15
Y3A7 PSKIP8 PLC skip 8 Y3AF PSKIP16 PLC skip 16

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3B0 PSKIP17 PLC skip 17 Y3B8 PSKIP25 PLC skip 25
Y3B1 PSKIP18 PLC skip 18 Y3B9 PSKIP26 PLC skip 26
Y3B2 PSKIP19 PLC skip 19 Y3BA PSKIP27 PLC skip 27
Y3B3 PSKIP20 PLC skip 20 Y3BB PSKIP28 PLC skip 28
+011 +011
Y3B4 PSKIP21 PLC skip 21 Y3BC PSKIP29 PLC skip 29
Y3B5 PSKIP22 PLC skip 22 Y3BD PSKIP30 PLC skip 30
Y3B6 PSKIP23 PLC skip 23 Y3BE PSKIP31 PLC skip 31
Y3B7 PSKIP24 PLC skip 24 Y3BF PSKIP32 PLC skip 32

37
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3C0 Y3C8
Y3C1 Y3C9
Y3C2 Y3CA
Y3C3 Y3CB
+012 +012
Y3C4 Y3CC
Y3C5 Y3CD
Y3C6 Y3CE
Y3C7 Y3CF

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3D0 Y3D8
Y3D1 Y3D9
Y3D2 Y3DA
Y3D3 Y3DB
+013 +013
Y3D4 Y3DC
Y3D5 Y3DD
Y3D6 Y3DE
Y3D7 Y3DF

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3E0 Y3E8
Y3E1 Y3E9
Y3E2 Y3EA
Y3E3 Y3EB
+014 +014
Y3E4 Y3EC
Y3E5 Y3ED
Y3E6 Y3EE
Y3E7 Y3EF

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
Y3F0 Y3F8
Y3F1 Y3F9
Y3F2 Y3FA
Y3F3 Y3FB
+015 +015
Y3F4 Y3FC
Y3F5 Y3FD
Y3F6 Y3FE
Y3F7 Y3FF

38
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.3.2 Axis Command

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name
+016 +019 +022 +025 +028 +031 +034 +037 <- Sharing G
Y400 Y430 Y460 Y490 Y4C0 Y4F0 Y520 Y550 DTCHn Control axis detach
Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551 *SVFn Servo OFF
Y402 Y432 Y462 Y492 Y4C2 Y4F2 Y522 Y552 MIn Mirror image
Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553 *+EDTn External deceleration +
Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554 *-EDTn External deceleration -
Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555 *+AITn Automatic interlock +
Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556 *-AITn Automatic interlock -
Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557 *+MITn Manual interlock +
Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558 *-MITn Manual interlock -
Y409 Y439 Y469 Y499 Y4C9 Y4F9 Y529 Y559 AMLKn Automatic machine lock
Y40A Y43A Y46A Y49A Y4CA Y4FA Y52A Y55A MMLKn Manual machine lock
Y40B Y43B Y46B Y49B Y4CB Y4FB Y52B Y55B +Jn Feed axis selection +
Y40C Y43C Y46C Y49C Y4CC Y4FC Y52C Y55C -Jn Feed axis selection -
Y40D Y43D Y46D Y49D Y4CD Y4FD Y52D Y55D MAEn Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid
Y40E Y43E Y46E Y49E Y4CE Y4FE Y52E Y55E DTCH2n Control axis detach 2
Y40F Y43F Y46F Y49F Y4CF Y4FF Y52F Y55F

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name
+017 +020 +023 +026 +029 +032 +035 +038 <- Sharing G
Y410 Y440 Y470 Y4A0 Y4D0 Y500 Y530 Y560 ILCn Current limit changeover
Y411 Y441 Y471 Y4A1 Y4D1 Y501 Y531 Y561 DORn Droop release request
Y412 Y442 Y472 Y4A2 Y4D2 Y502 Y532 Y562 AZSn Zero point initialization set mode
Y413 Y443 Y473 Y4A3 Y4D3 Y503 Y533 Y563 ZSTn Zero point initialization set start
Y414 Y444 Y474 Y4A4 Y4D4 Y504 Y534 Y564
Y415 Y445 Y475 Y4A5 Y4D5 Y505 Y535 Y565 UCLPFn Unclamp completion
Y416 Y446 Y476 Y4A6 Y4D6 Y506 Y536 Y566 MSORn Multi-step speed monitor request
Y417 Y447 Y477 Y4A7 Y4D7 Y507 Y537 Y567 MSOMI1n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1
Y418 Y448 Y478 Y4A8 Y4D8 Y508 Y538 Y568 MSOMI2n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2
Y419 Y449 Y479 Y4A9 Y4D9 Y509 Y539 Y569
Y41A Y44A Y47A Y4AA Y4DA Y50A Y53A Y56A CNT0n Counter zero
Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B CHGPLCn PLC axis switching
Y41C Y44C Y47C Y4AC Y4DC Y50C Y53C Y56C
Y41D Y44D Y47D Y4AD Y4DD Y50D Y53D Y56D
Y41E Y44E Y47E Y4AE Y4DE Y50E Y53E Y56E
Y41F Y44F Y47F Y4AF Y4DF Y50F Y53F Y56F

39
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name
+018 +021 +024 +027 +030 +033 +036 +039 <- Sharing G
Y420 Y450 Y480 Y4B0 Y4E0 Y510 Y540 Y570
Y421 Y451 Y481 Y4B1 Y4E1 Y511 Y541 Y571
Y422 Y452 Y482 Y4B2 Y4E2 Y512 Y542 Y572
Y423 Y453 Y483 Y4B3 Y4E3 Y513 Y543 Y573
Y424 Y454 Y484 Y4B4 Y4E4 Y514 Y544 Y574
Y425 Y455 Y485 Y4B5 Y4E5 Y515 Y545 Y575
Y426 Y456 Y486 Y4B6 Y4E6 Y516 Y546 Y576
Y427 Y457 Y487 Y4B7 Y4E7 Y517 Y547 Y577
Y428 Y458 Y488 Y4B8 Y4E8 Y518 Y548 Y578
Y429 Y459 Y489 Y4B9 Y4E9 Y519 Y549 Y579
Y42A Y45A Y48A Y4BA Y4EA Y51A Y54A Y57A
Y42B Y45B Y48B Y4BB Y4EB Y51B Y54B Y57B
Y42C Y45C Y48C Y4BC Y4EC Y51C Y54C Y57C
Y42D Y45D Y48D Y4BD Y4ED Y51D Y54D Y57D
Y42E Y45E Y48E Y4BE Y4EE Y51E Y54E Y57E
Y42F Y45F Y48F Y4BF Y4EF Y51F Y54F Y57F

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name
+040 +043 +046 +049 +052 +055 +058 +061 <- Sharing G
Y580 Y5B0 Y5E0 Y610 Y640 Y670 Y6A0 Y6D0 DTCHn Control axis detach
Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1 *SVFn Servo OFF
Y582 Y5B2 Y5E2 Y612 Y642 Y672 Y6A2 Y6D2 MIn Mirror image
Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3 *+EDTn External deceleration +
Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4 *-EDTn External deceleration -
Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5 *+AITn Automatic interlock +
Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6 *-AITn Automatic interlock -
Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7 *+MITn Manual interlock +
Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8 *-MITn Manual interlock -
Y589 Y5B9 Y5E9 Y619 Y649 Y679 Y6A9 Y6D9 AMLKn Automatic machine lock
Y58A Y5BA Y5EA Y61A Y64A Y67A Y6AA Y6DA MMLKn Manual machine lock
Y58B Y5BB Y5EB Y61B Y64B Y67B Y6AB Y6DB +Jn Feed axis selection +
Y58C Y5BC Y5EC Y61C Y64C Y67C Y6AC Y6DC -Jn Feed axis selection -
Y58D Y5BD Y5ED Y61D Y64D Y67D Y6AD Y6DD MAEn Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid
Y58E Y5BE Y5EE Y61E Y64E Y67E Y6AE Y6DE DTCH2n Control axis detach 2
Y58F Y5BF Y5EF Y61F Y64F Y67F Y6AF Y6DF

40
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name
+041 +044 +047 +050 +053 +056 +059 +062 <- Sharing G
Y590 Y5C0 Y5F0 Y620 Y650 Y680 Y6B0 Y6E0 ILCn Current limit changeover
Y591 Y5C1 Y5F1 Y621 Y651 Y681 Y6B1 Y6E1 DORn Droop release request
Y592 Y5C2 Y5F2 Y622 Y652 Y682 Y6B2 Y6E2 AZSn Zero point initialization set mode
Y593 Y5C3 Y5F3 Y623 Y653 Y683 Y6B3 Y6E3 ZSTn Zero point initialization set start
Y594 Y5C4 Y5F4 Y624 Y654 Y684 Y6B4 Y6E4
Y595 Y5C5 Y5F5 Y625 Y655 Y685 Y6B5 Y6E5 UCLPFn Unclamp completion
Y596 Y5C6 Y5F6 Y626 Y656 Y686 Y6B6 Y6E6 MSORn Multi-step speed monitor request
Y597 Y5C7 Y5F7 Y627 Y657 Y687 Y6B7 Y6E7 MSOMI1n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1
Y598 Y5C8 Y5F8 Y628 Y658 Y688 Y6B8 Y6E8 MSOMI2n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2
Y599 Y5C9 Y5F9 Y629 Y659 Y689 Y6B9 Y6E9
Y59A Y5CA Y5FA Y62A Y65A Y68A Y6BA Y6EA CNT0n Counter zero
Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB CHGPLCn PLC axis switching
Y59C Y5CC Y5FC Y62C Y65C Y68C Y6BC Y6EC
Y59D Y5CD Y5FD Y62D Y65D Y68D Y6BD Y6ED
Y59E Y5CE Y5FE Y62E Y65E Y68E Y6BE Y6EE
Y59F Y5CF Y5FF Y62F Y65F Y68F Y6BF Y6EF

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name
+042 +045 +048 +051 +054 +057 +060 +063 <- Sharing G
Y5A0 Y5D0 Y600 Y630 Y660 Y690 Y6C0 Y6F0
Y5A1 Y5D1 Y601 Y631 Y661 Y691 Y6C1 Y6F1
Y5A2 Y5D2 Y602 Y632 Y662 Y692 Y6C2 Y6F2
Y5A3 Y5D3 Y603 Y633 Y663 Y693 Y6C3 Y6F3
Y5A4 Y5D4 Y604 Y634 Y664 Y694 Y6C4 Y6F4
Y5A5 Y5D5 Y605 Y635 Y665 Y695 Y6C5 Y6F5
Y5A6 Y5D6 Y606 Y636 Y666 Y696 Y6C6 Y6F6
Y5A7 Y5D7 Y607 Y637 Y667 Y697 Y6C7 Y6F7
Y5A8 Y5D8 Y608 Y638 Y668 Y698 Y6C8 Y6F8
Y5A9 Y5D9 Y609 Y639 Y669 Y699 Y6C9 Y6F9
Y5AA Y5DA Y60A Y63A Y66A Y69A Y6CA Y6FA
Y5AB Y5DB Y60B Y63B Y66B Y69B Y6CB Y6FB
Y5AC Y5DC Y60C Y63C Y66C Y69C Y6CC Y6FC
Y5AD Y5DD Y60D Y63D Y66D Y69D Y6CD Y6FD
Y5AE Y5DE Y60E Y63E Y66E Y69E Y6CE Y6FE
Y5AF Y5DF Y60F Y63F Y66F Y69F Y6CF Y6FF

41
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.3.3 Part System Command

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+064 +078 +092 +106 +120 +134 +148 <- Sharing G
Y700 Y7E0 Y8C0 Y9A0 YA80 YB60 YC40 Jn Jog mode
Y701 Y7E1 Y8C1 Y9A1 YA81 YB61 YC41 Hn Handle mode
Y702 Y7E2 Y8C2 Y9A2 YA82 YB62 YC42 Sn Incremental mode
Y703 Y7E3 Y8C3 Y9A3 YA83 YB63 YC43 PTPn Manual arbitrary feed mode
Y704 Y7E4 Y8C4 Y9A4 YA84 YB64 YC44 ZRNn Reference position return mode
Y705 Y7E5 Y8C5 Y9A5 YA85 YB65 YC45 ASTn Automatic initialization mode
Y706 Y7E6 Y8C6 Y9A6 YA86 YB66 YC46
Y707 Y7E7 Y8C7 Y9A7 YA87 YB67 YC47
Y708 Y7E8 Y8C8 Y9A8 YA88 YB68 YC48 MEMn Program operation mode (Memory mode)
Y709 Y7E9 Y8C9 Y9A9 YA89 YB69 YC49 FTPn FTP mode
Y70A Y7EA Y8CA Y9AA YA8A YB6A YC4A EDTn EDIT mode
Y70B Y7EB Y8CB Y9AB YA8B YB6B YC4B Dn MDI mode
Y70C Y7EC Y8CC Y9AC YA8C YB6C YC4C
Y70D Y7ED Y8CD Y9AD YA8D YB6D YC4D
Y70E Y7EE Y8CE Y9AE YA8E YB6E YC4E
Y70F Y7EF Y8CF Y9AF YA8F YB6F YC4F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+065 +079 +093 +107 +121 +135 +149 <- Sharing G
Y710 Y7F0 Y8D0 Y9B0 YA90 YB70 YC50 STn Automatic operation "start" command (Cycle start)
Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51 *SPn Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)
Y712 Y7F2 Y8D2 Y9B2 YA92 YB72 YC52 SBKn Single block
Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53 *BSLn Block start interlock
Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54 *CSLn Cutting block start interlock
Y715 Y7F5 Y8D5 Y9B5 YA95 YB75 YC55 DRNn Dry run
Y716 Y7F6 Y8D6 Y9B6 YA96 YB76 YC56
Y717 Y7F7 Y8D7 Y9B7 YA97 YB77 YC57 ERDn Error detect
Y718 Y7F8 Y8D8 Y9B8 YA98 YB78 YC58 NRST1n NC reset 1
Y719 Y7F9 Y8D9 Y9B9 YA99 YB79 YC59 NRST2n NC reset 2
Y71A Y7FA Y8DA Y9BA YA9A YB7A YC5A RRWn Reset & rewind
Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B *CDZn Chamfering
Y71C Y7FC Y8DC Y9BC YA9C YB7C YC5C ARSTn Automatic restart
Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D EXTSSn External search strobe
Y71E Y7FE Y8DE Y9BE YA9E YB7E YC5E FIN1n M function finish 1
Y71F Y7FF Y8DF Y9BF YA9F YB7F YC5F FIN2n M function finish 2

42
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+066 +080 +094 +108 +122 +136 +150 <- Sharing G
Y720 Y800 Y8E0 Y9C0 YAA0 YB80 YC60 TLMn Tool length measurement 1
Y721 Y801 Y8E1 Y9C1 YAA1 YB81 YC61 TLMSn Tool length measurement 2
Y722 Y802 Y8E2 Y9C2 YAA2 YB82 YC62 SYCMn Synchronization correction mode
Y723 Y803 Y8E3 Y9C3 YAA3 YB83 YC63 SRN Program restart
Y724 Y804 Y8E4 Y9C4 YAA4 YB84 YC64
Y725 Y805 Y8E5 Y9C5 YAA5 YB85 YC65 UITn Macro interrupt
Y726 Y806 Y8E6 Y9C6 YAA6 YB86 YC66 RTn Rapid traverse
Y727 Y807 Y8E7 Y9C7 YAA7 YB87 YC67
Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68 ABSn Manual absolute
Y729 Y809 Y8E9 Y9C9 YAA9 YB89 YC69
Y72A Y80A Y8EA Y9CA YAAA YB8A YC6A
Y72B Y80B Y8EB Y9CB YAAB YB8B YC6B CRQn Recalculation request
Y72C Y80C Y8EC Y9CC YAAC YB8C YC6C PDISPn Program display during operation
Y72D Y80D Y8ED Y9CD YAAD YB8D YC6D BDT1n Optional block skip 1
Y72E Y80E Y8EE Y9CE YAAE YB8E YC6E
Y72F Y80F Y8EF Y9CF YAAF YB8F YC6F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+067 +081 +095 +109 +123 +137 +151 <- Sharing G
Y730 Y810 Y8F0 Y9D0 YAB0 YB90 YC70 ZSL1n Reference position selection code 1
Y731 Y811 Y8F1 Y9D1 YAB1 YB91 YC71 ZSL2n Reference position selection code 2
Y732 Y812 Y8F2 Y9D2 YAB2 YB92 YC72
Y733 Y813 Y8F3 Y9D3 YAB3 YB93 YC73
Y734 Y814 Y8F4 Y9D4 YAB4 YB94 YC74
Y735 Y815 Y8F5 Y9D5 YAB5 YB95 YC75
Y736 Y816 Y8F6 Y9D6 YAB6 YB96 YC76
Y737 Y817 Y8F7 Y9D7 YAB7 YB97 YC77 Mn Reference position selection method
Y738 Y818 Y8F8 Y9D8 YAB8 YB98 YC78 BDT2n Optional block skip 2
Y739 Y819 Y8F9 Y9D9 YAB9 YB99 YC79 BDT3n Optional block skip 3
Y73A Y81A Y8FA Y9DA YABA YB9A YC7A BDT4n Optional block skip 4
Y73B Y81B Y8FB Y9DB YABB YB9B YC7B BDT5n Optional block skip 5
Y73C Y81C Y8FC Y9DC YABC YB9C YC7C BDT6n Optional block skip 6
Y73D Y81D Y8FD Y9DD YABD YB9D YC7D BDT7n Optional block skip 7
Y73E Y81E Y8FE Y9DE YABE YB9E YC7E BDT8n Optional block skip 8
Y73F Y81F Y8FF Y9DF YABF YB9F YC7F BDT9n Optional block skip 9

43
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+068 +082 +096 +110 +124 +138 +152 <- Sharing G
Y740 Y820 Y900 Y9E0 YAC0 YBA0 YC80 HS11n 1st handle axis selection code 1
Y741 Y821 Y901 Y9E1 YAC1 YBA1 YC81 HS12n 1st handle axis selection code 2
Y742 Y822 Y902 Y9E2 YAC2 YBA2 YC82 HS14n 1st handle axis selection code 4
Y743 Y823 Y903 Y9E3 YAC3 YBA3 YC83 HS18n 1st handle axis selection code 8
Y744 Y824 Y904 Y9E4 YAC4 YBA4 YC84 HS116n 1st handle axis selection code 16
Y745 Y825 Y905 Y9E5 YAC5 YBA5 YC85
Y746 Y826 Y906 Y9E6 YAC6 YBA6 YC86
Y747 Y827 Y907 Y9E7 YAC7 YBA7 YC87 HS1Sn 1st handle valid
Y748 Y828 Y908 Y9E8 YAC8 YBA8 YC88 HS21n 2nd handle axis selection code 1
Y749 Y829 Y909 Y9E9 YAC9 YBA9 YC89 HS22n 2nd handle axis selection code 2
Y74A Y82A Y90A Y9EA YACA YBAA YC8A HS24n 2nd handle axis selection code 4
Y74B Y82B Y90B Y9EB YACB YBAB YC8B HS28n 2nd handle axis selection code 8
Y74C Y82C Y90C Y9EC YACC YBAC YC8C HS216n 2nd handle axis selection code 16
Y74D Y82D Y90D Y9ED YACD YBAD YC8D
Y74E Y82E Y90E Y9EE YACE YBAE YC8E
Y74F Y82F Y90F Y9EF YACF YBAF YC8F HS2Sn 2nd handle valid

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+069 +083 +097 +111 +125 +139 +153 <- Sharing G
Y750 Y830 Y910 Y9F0 YAD0 YBB0 YC90 HS31n 3rd handle axis selection code 1
Y751 Y831 Y911 Y9F1 YAD1 YBB1 YC91 HS32n 3rd handle axis selection code 2
Y752 Y832 Y912 Y9F2 YAD2 YBB2 YC92 HS34n 3rd handle axis selection code 4
Y753 Y833 Y913 Y9F3 YAD3 YBB3 YC93 HS38n 3rd handle axis selection code 8
Y754 Y834 Y914 Y9F4 YAD4 YBB4 YC94 HS316n 3rd handle axis selection code 16
Y755 Y835 Y915 Y9F5 YAD5 YBB5 YC95
Y756 Y836 Y916 Y9F6 YAD6 YBB6 YC96
Y757 Y837 Y917 Y9F7 YAD7 YBB7 YC97 HS3Sn 3rd handle valid
Y758 Y838 Y918 Y9F8 YAD8 YBB8 YC98 OVCn Override cancel
Y759 Y839 Y919 Y9F9 YAD9 YBB9 YC99 OVSLn Manual override method selection
Y75A Y83A Y91A Y9FA YADA YBBA YC9A AFLn Miscellaneous function lock
Y75B Y83B Y91B Y9FB YADB YBBB YC9B
Y75C Y83C Y91C Y9FC YADC YBBC YC9C TRVn Tap retract
Y75D Y83D Y91D Y9FD YADD YBBD YC9D RTNn Reference position retract
Y75E Y83E Y91E Y9FE YADE YBBE YC9E
SPOFFM
Y75F Y83F Y91F Y9FF YADF YBBF YC9F Spindle OFF mode
n

44
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+070 +084 +098 +112 +126 +140 +154 <- Sharing G
Y760 Y840 Y920 YA00 YAE0 YBC0 YCA0 *FV11n Cutting feedrate override code 1
Y761 Y841 Y921 YA01 YAE1 YBC1 YCA1 *FV12n Cutting feedrate override code 2
Y762 Y842 Y922 YA02 YAE2 YBC2 YCA2 *FV14n Cutting feedrate override code 4
Y763 Y843 Y923 YA03 YAE3 YBC3 YCA3 *FV18n Cutting feedrate override code 8
Y764 Y844 Y924 YA04 YAE4 YBC4 YCA4 *FV116n Cutting feedrate override code 16
Y765 Y845 Y925 YA05 YAE5 YBC5 YCA5
Y766 Y846 Y926 YA06 YAE6 YBC6 YCA6 FV2En 2nd cutting feedrate override valid
Y767 Y847 Y927 YA07 YAE7 YBC7 YCA7 FVSn Cutting feedrate override method selection
Y768 Y848 Y928 YA08 YAE8 YBC8 YCA8 ROV1n Rapid traverse override code 1
Y769 Y849 Y929 YA09 YAE9 YBC9 YCA9 ROV2n Rapid traverse override code 2
Y76A Y84A Y92A YA0A YAEA YBCA YCAA
Y76B Y84B Y92B YA0B YAEB YBCB YCAB
Y76C Y84C Y92C YA0C YAEC YBCC YCAC
Y76D Y84D Y92D YA0D YAED YBCD YCAD
Y76E Y84E Y92E YA0E YAEE YBCE YCAE
Y76F Y84F Y92F YA0F YAEF YBCF YCAF ROVSn Rapid traverse override method selection

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+071 +085 +099 +113 +127 +141 +155 <- Sharing G
Y770 Y850 Y930 YA10 YAF0 YBD0 YCB0 *JV1n Manual feedrate code 1
Y771 Y851 Y931 YA11 YAF1 YBD1 YCB1 *JV2n Manual feedrate code 2
Y772 Y852 Y932 YA12 YAF2 YBD2 YCB2 *JV4n Manual feedrate code 4
Y773 Y853 Y933 YA13 YAF3 YBD3 YCB3 *JV8n Manual feedrate code 8
Y774 Y854 Y934 YA14 YAF4 YBD4 YCB4 *JV16n Manual feedrate code 16
Y775 Y855 Y935 YA15 YAF5 YBD5 YCB5
Y776 Y856 Y936 YA16 YAF6 YBD6 YCB6
Y777 Y857 Y937 YA17 YAF7 YBD7 YCB7 JVSn Manual feedrate method selection
Y778 Y858 Y938 YA18 YAF8 YBD8 YCB8 PCF1n Feedrate least increment code 1
Y779 Y859 Y939 YA19 YAF9 YBD9 YCB9 PCF2n Feedrate least increment code 2
Y77A Y85A Y93A YA1A YAFA YBDA YCBA JSYNn Jog synchronous feed valid
Y77B Y85B Y93B YA1B YAFB YBDB YCBB JHANn Jog handle synchronous
Y77C Y85C Y93C YA1C YAFC YBDC YCBC
Y77D Y85D Y93D YA1D YAFD YBDD YCBD ILM1n Current limit mode 1
Y77E Y85E Y93E YA1E YAFE YBDE YCBE ILM2n Current limit mode 2
Y77F Y85F Y93F YA1F YAFF YBDF YCBF

45
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+072 +086 +100 +114 +128 +142 +156 <- Sharing G
Y780 Y860 Y940 YA20 YB00 YBE0 YCC0 MP1n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 1
Y781 Y861 Y941 YA21 YB01 YBE1 YCC1 MP2n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 2
Y782 Y862 Y942 YA22 YB02 YBE2 YCC2 MP4n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 4
Y783 Y863 Y943 YA23 YB03 YBE3 YCC3
Y784 Y864 Y944 YA24 YB04 YBE4 YCC4
Y785 Y865 Y945 YA25 YB05 YBE5 YCC5
Y786 Y866 Y946 YA26 YB06 YBE6 YCC6 MPPn Magnification valid for each handle
Handle/incremental feed magnification method
Y787 Y867 Y947 YA27 YB07 YBE7 YCC7 MPSn
selection
Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8 TAL1n Tool alarm 1/Tool skip 1
Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9 TAL2n Tool alarm 2
Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA TCEFn Usage data count valid
Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB TLF1n Tool life management input
Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC TCRTn Tool change reset
Y78D Y86D Y94D YA2D YB0D YBED YCCD
Y78E Y86E Y94E YA2E YB0E YBEE YCCE
Y78F Y86F Y94F YA2F YB0F YBEF YCCF

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+073 +087 +101 +115 +129 +143 +157 <- Sharing G
Y790 Y870 Y950 YA30 YB10 YBF0 YCD0 CX11n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1
Y791 Y871 Y951 YA31 YB11 YBF1 YCD1 CX12n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2
Y792 Y872 Y952 YA32 YB12 YBF2 YCD2 CX14n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 4
Y793 Y873 Y953 YA33 YB13 YBF3 YCD3 CX18n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 8
Y794 Y874 Y954 YA34 YB14 YBF4 YCD4 CX116n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 16
Y795 Y875 Y955 YA35 YB15 YBF5 YCD5
Y796 Y876 Y956 YA36 YB16 YBF6 YCD6
Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7 CX1Sn Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid
Y798 Y878 Y958 YA38 YB18 YBF8 YCD8 CX21n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 1
Y799 Y879 Y959 YA39 YB19 YBF9 YCD9 CX22n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2
Y79A Y87A Y95A YA3A YB1A YBFA YCDA CX24n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4
Y79B Y87B Y95B YA3B YB1B YBFB YCDB CX28n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8
Y79C Y87C Y95C YA3C YB1C YBFC YCDC CX216n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16
Y79D Y87D Y95D YA3D YB1D YBFD YCDD
Y79E Y87E Y95E YA3E YB1E YBFE YCDE
Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF CX2Sn Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid

46
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+074 +088 +102 +116 +130 +144 +158 <- Sharing G
Y7A0 Y880 Y960 YA40 YB20 YC00 YCE0 CX31n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 1
Y7A1 Y881 Y961 YA41 YB21 YC01 YCE1 CX32n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2
Y7A2 Y882 Y962 YA42 YB22 YC02 YCE2 CX34n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 4
Y7A3 Y883 Y963 YA43 YB23 YC03 YCE3 CX38n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 8
Y7A4 Y884 Y964 YA44 YB24 YC04 YCE4 CX316n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 16
Y7A5 Y885 Y965 YA45 YB25 YC05 YCE5
Y7A6 Y886 Y966 YA46 YB26 YC06 YCE6
Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7 CX3Sn Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid
Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8 CXS1n Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off
Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9 CXS2n Manual arbitrary feed axis independent
Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA CXS3n Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F
Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB CXS4n Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1
Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC CXS5n Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK
Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED CXS6n Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC
Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop
Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF CXS8n Manual arbitrary feed strobe

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+075 +089 +103 +117 +131 +145 +159 <- Sharing G
Y7B0 Y890 Y970 YA50 YB30 YC10 YCF0 *ZRITn 2nd reference position return interlock
Y7B1 Y891 Y971 YA51 YB31 YC11 YCF1
Y7B2 Y892 Y972 YA52 YB32 YC12 YCF2 RSSTn Search & start
Y7B3 Y893 Y973 YA53 YB33 YC13 YCF3
Y7B4 Y894 Y974 YA54 YB34 YC14 YCF4
Y7B5 Y895 Y975 YA55 YB35 YC15 YCF5
Y7B6 Y896 Y976 YA56 YB36 YC16 YCF6 Inclined axis control:no z axis compensation
Y7B7 Y897 Y977 YA57 YB37 YC17 YCF7
Y7B8 Y898 Y978 YA58 YB38 YC18 YCF8 VAMODn Hypothetical axis command mode
Y7B9 Y899 Y979 YA59 YB39 YC19 YCF9 Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal
Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA CHPSn Chopping
Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB Chopping parameter valid
Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC Compensation method selection
Y7BD Y89D Y97D YA5D YB3D YC1D YCFD
Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE Operation mode selection
Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF Rapid traverse override valid

47
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+076 +090 +104 +118 +132 +146 +160 <- Sharing G
Y7C0 Y8A0 Y980 YA60 YB40 YC20 YD00
Y7C1 Y8A1 Y981 YA61 YB41 YC21 YD01
Y7C2 Y8A2 Y982 YA62 YB42 YC22 YD02
Y7C3 Y8A3 Y983 YA63 YB43 YC23 YD03
Y7C4 Y8A4 Y984 YA64 YB44 YC24 YD04
Y7C5 Y8A5 Y985 YA65 YB45 YC25 YD05
Y7C6 Y8A6 Y986 YA66 YB46 YC26 YD06
Y7C7 Y8A7 Y987 YA67 YB47 YC27 YD07
Y7C8 Y8A8 Y988 YA68 YB48 YC28 YD08
Y7C9 Y8A9 Y989 YA69 YB49 YC29 YD09
Y7CA Y8AA Y98A YA6A YB4A YC2A YD0A
Y7CB Y8AB Y98B YA6B YB4B YC2B YD0B
Y7CC Y8AC Y98C YA6C YB4C YC2C YD0C
Y7CD Y8AD Y98D YA6D YB4D YC2D YD0D
Y7CE Y8AE Y98E YA6E YB4E YC2E YD0E
Y7CF Y8AF Y98F YA6F YB4F YC2F YD0F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+077 +091 +105 +119 +133 +147 +161 <- Sharing G
Y7D0 Y8B0 Y990 YA70 YB50 YC30 YD10
Y7D1 Y8B1 Y991 YA71 YB51 YC31 YD11
Y7D2 Y8B2 Y992 YA72 YB52 YC32 YD12
Y7D3 Y8B3 Y993 YA73 YB53 YC33 YD13
Y7D4 Y8B4 Y994 YA74 YB54 YC34 YD14
Y7D5 Y8B5 Y995 YA75 YB55 YC35 YD15
Y7D6 Y8B6 Y996 YA76 YB56 YC36 YD16
Y7D7 Y8B7 Y997 YA77 YB57 YC37 YD17
Y7D8 Y8B8 Y998 YA78 YB58 YC38 YD18
Y7D9 Y8B9 Y999 YA79 YB59 YC39 YD19
Y7DA Y8BA Y99A YA7A YB5A YC3A YD1A
Y7DB Y8BB Y99B YA7B YB5B YC3B YD1B
Y7DC Y8BC Y99C YA7C YB5C YC3C YD1C
Y7DD Y8BD Y99D YA7D YB5D YC3D YD1D
Y7DE Y8BE Y99E YA7E YB5E YC3E YD1E
Y7DF Y8BF Y99F YA7F YB5F YC3F YD1F

48
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.3.4 Spindle Command

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
+162 +165 +168 +171 +174 +177 +180 <- Sharing G
YD20 YD50 YD80 YDB0 YDE0 YE10 YE40
YD21 YD51 YD81 YDB1 YDE1 YE11 YE41
YD22 YD52 YD82 YDB2 YDE2 YE12 YE42
YD23 YD53 YD83 YDB3 YDE3 YE13 YE43
YD24 YD54 YD84 YDB4 YDE4 YE14 YE44
YD25 YD55 YD85 YDB5 YDE5 YE15 YE45
YD26 YD56 YD86 YDB6 YDE6 YE16 YE46 GFINn Gear shift completion
YD27 YD57 YD87 YDB7 YDE7 YE17 YE47
YD28 YD58 YD88 YDB8 YDE8 YE18 YE48 SP1n Spindle override code 1
YD29 YD59 YD89 YDB9 YDE9 YE19 YE49 SP2n Spindle override code 2
YD2A YD5A YD8A YDBA YDEA YE1A YE4A SP4n Spindle override code 4
YD2B YD5B YD8B YDBB YDEB YE1B YE4B
YD2C YD5C YD8C YDBC YDEC YE1C YE4C
YD2D YD5D YD8D YDBD YDED YE1D YE4D
YD2E YD5E YD8E YDBE YDEE YE1E YE4E
YD2F YD5F YD8F YDBF YDEF YE1F YE4F SPSn Spindle override method selection

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
+163 +166 +169 +172 +175 +178 +181 <- Sharing G
YD30 YD60 YD90 YDC0 YDF0 YE20 YE50 GI1n Spindle gear selection code 1
YD31 YD61 YD91 YDC1 YDF1 YE21 YE51 GI2n Spindle gear selection code 2
YD32 YD62 YD92 YDC2 YDF2 YE22 YE52
YD33 YD63 YD93 YDC3 YDF3 YE23 YE53
YD34 YD64 YD94 YDC4 YDF4 YE24 YE54 SSTPn Spindle stop
YD35 YD65 YD95 YDC5 YDF5 YE25 YE55 SSFTn Spindle gear shift
YD36 YD66 YD96 YDC6 YDF6 YE26 YE56 SORCn Spindle orientation
YD37 YD67 YD97 YDC7 YDF7 YE27 YE57
YD38 YD68 YD98 YDC8 YDF8 YE28 YE58 SRNn Spindle forward run start
YD39 YD69 YD99 YDC9 YDF9 YE29 YE59 SRIn Spindle reverse run start
YD3A YD6A YD9A YDCA YDFA YE2A YE5A
YD3B YD6B YD9B YDCB YDFB YE2B YE5B
YD3C YD6C YD9C YDCC YDFC YE2C YE5C WRNn Spindle forward run index
YD3D YD6D YD9D YDCD YDFD YE2D YE5D WRIn Spindle reverse run index
YD3E YD6E YD9E YDCE YDFE YE2E YE5E ORCn Spindle orientation command
YD3F YD6F YD9F YDCF YDFF YE2F YE5F LRSLn L coil selection

49
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name
+164 +167 +170 +173 +176 +179 +182 <- Sharing G
YD40 YD70 YDA0 YDD0 YE00 YE30 YE60
YD41 YD71 YDA1 YDD1 YE01 YE31 YE61
YD42 YD72 YDA2 YDD2 YE02 YE32 YE62
YD43 YD73 YDA3 YDD3 YE03 YE33 YE63
YD44 YD74 YDA4 YDD4 YE04 YE34 YE64
YD45 YD75 YDA5 YDD5 YE05 YE35 YE65 TL1n Spindle torque limit 1
YD46 YD76 YDA6 YDD6 YE06 YE36 YE66 TL2n Spindle torque limit 2
YD47 YD77 YDA7 YDD7 YE07 YE37 YE67 TL3n Spindle torque limit 3
YD48 YD78 YDA8 YDD8 YE08 YE38 YE68
YD49 YD79 YDA9 YDD9 YE09 YE39 YE69 SMSORn Spindle multi-step monitor request
YD4A YD7A YDAA YDDA YE0A YE3A YE6A SMSOMI1n Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 1
YD4B YD7B YDAB YDDB YE0B YE3B YE6B SMSOMI2n Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 2
YD4C YD7C YDAC YDDC YE0C YE3C YE6C
YD4D YD7D YDAD YDDD YE0D YE3D YE6D
YD4E YD7E YDAE YDDE YE0E YE3E YE6E
YD4F YD7F YDAF YDDF YE0F YE3F YE6F ESSCn External axis speed clamp

50
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.4.1 System Command

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
+200 R2300 +210 R2310 PLC axis droop release invalid axis
+201 R2301 +211 R2311
+202 R2302 +212 R2312 KEYOUT
+203 R2303 +213 R2313
+204 R2304 +214 R2314
+205 R2305 +215 R2315
+206 R2306 +216 R2316
+207 R2307 +217 R2317
+208 R2308 +218 R2318
+209 R2309 SMOD Speed monitor mode +219 R2319

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
+220 R2320 +230 R2330 User macro input #1035
+221 R2321 +231 R2331 (PLC -> Controller)
+222 R2322 +232 R2332
+223 R2323 +233 R2333
PLC version code
+224 R2324 User macro input #1032 +234 R2334
+225 R2325 (PLC -> Controller) +235 R2335
+226 R2326 User macro input #1033 +236 R2336
+227 R2327 (PLC -> Controller) +237 R2337
+228 R2328 User macro input #1034 +238 R2338
+229 R2329 (PLC -> Controller) +239 R2339

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
+240 R2340 1st axis index +250 R2350 11th axis index
+241 R2341 2nd axis index +251 R2351 12th axis index
+242 R2342 3rd axis index +252 R2352 13th axis index
+243 R2343 4th axis index +253 R2353 14th axis index
+244 R2344 5th axis index +254 R2354 15th axis index
+245 R2345 6th axis index +255 R2355 16th axis index
+246 R2346 7th axis index +256 R2356
Spindle synchronization
+247 R2347 8th axis index +257 R2357
Basic spindle selection
Spindle synchronization
+248 R2348 9th axis index +258 R2358
Synchronous spindle selection
Spindle synchronization
+249 R2349 10th axis index +259 R2359
Phase shift amount

51
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
+260 R2360 +270 R2370
+261 R2361 +271 R2371
+262 R2362 +272 R2372
+263 R2363 PLC version code (method 2) +273 R2373
+264 R2364 +274 R2374
+265 R2365 +275 R2375
+266 R2366 +276 R2376
+267 R2367 +277 R2377
+268 R2368 +278 R2378
+269 R2369 +279 R2379

Common Common
Sharing abbrev. Signal name Sharing abbrev. Signal name
Internal Internal
G G
+280 R2380 APLC output data 1 +290 R2390
GOT window Data changeover request
+281 R2381 APLC output data 2 +291 R2391
+282 R2382 APLC output data 3 +292 R2392
+283 R2383 APLC output data 4 +293 R2393
+284 R2384 APLC output data 5 +294 R2394
+285 R2385 APLC output data 6 +295 R2395
+286 R2386 APLC output data 7 +296 R2396
+287 R2387 APLC output data 8 +297 R2397
+288 R2388 APLC output data 9 +298 R2398
+289 R2389 APLC output data 10 +299 R2399

52
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.4.2 Part System Command

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+300 R2400 +400 R2500 +500 R2600 +600 R2700 +700 R2800 +800 R2900 +900 R3000 1st cutting feedrate override
+301 R2401 +401 R2501 +501 R2601 +601 R2701 +701 R2801 +801 R2901 +901 R3001 2nd cutting feedrate override
+302 R2402 +402 R2502 +502 R2602 +602 R2702 +702 R2802 +802 R2902 +902 R3002 Rapid traverse override
+303 R2403 +403 R2503 +503 R2603 +603 R2703 +703 R2803 +803 R2903 +903 R3003
+304 R2404 +404 R2504 +504 R2604 +604 R2704 +704 R2804 +804 R2904 +904 R3004
Manual feedrate
+305 R2405 +405 R2505 +505 R2605 +605 R2705 +705 R2805 +805 R2905 +905 R3005
+306 R2406 +406 R2506 +506 R2606 +606 R2706 +706 R2806 +806 R2906 +906 R3006
+307 R2407 +407 R2507 +507 R2607 +607 R2707 +707 R2807 +807 R2907 +907 R3007
+308 R2408 +408 R2508 +508 R2608 +608 R2708 +708 R2808 +808 R2908 +908 R3008 1st handle/incremental feed
+309 R2409 +409 R2509 +509 R2609 +609 R2709 +709 R2809 +809 R2909 +909 R3009 magnification

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+310 R2410 +410 R2510 +510 R2610 +610 R2710 +710 R2810 +810 R2910 +910 R3010
2nd handle feed magnification
+311 R2411 +411 R2511 +511 R2611 +611 R2711 +711 R2811 +811 R2911 +911 R3011
+312 R2412 +412 R2512 +512 R2612 +612 R2712 +712 R2812 +812 R2912 +912 R3012
3rd handle feed magnification
+313 R2413 +413 R2513 +513 R2613 +613 R2713 +713 R2813 +813 R2913 +913 R3013
+314 R2414 +414 R2514 +514 R2614 +614 R2714 +714 R2814 +814 R2914 +914 R3014 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis
+315 R2415 +415 R2515 +515 R2615 +615 R2715 +715 R2815 +815 R2915 +915 R3015 travel amount
+316 R2416 +416 R2516 +516 R2616 +616 R2716 +716 R2816 +816 R2916 +916 R3016 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis
+317 R2417 +417 R2517 +517 R2617 +617 R2717 +717 R2817 +817 R2917 +917 R3017 travel amount
+318 R2418 +418 R2518 +518 R2618 +618 R2718 +718 R2818 +818 R2918 +918 R3018 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis
+319 R2419 +419 R2519 +519 R2619 +619 R2719 +719 R2819 +819 R2919 +919 R3019 travel amount

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+320 R2420 +420 R2520 +520 R2620 +620 R2720 +720 R2820 +820 R2920 +920 R3020 OT ignored
+321 R2421 +421 R2521 +521 R2621 +621 R2721 +721 R2821 +821 R2921 +921 R3021 Near-point dog ignored
+322 R2422 +422 R2522 +522 R2622 +622 R2722 +722 R2822 +822 R2922 +922 R3022
+323 R2423 +423 R2523 +523 R2623 +623 R2723 +723 R2823 +823 R2923 +923 R3023
+324 R2424 +424 R2524 +524 R2624 +624 R2724 +724 R2824 +824 R2924 +924 R3024
+325 R2425 +425 R2525 +525 R2625 +625 R2725 +725 R2825 +825 R2925 +925 R3025
+326 R2426 +426 R2526 +526 R2626 +626 R2726 +726 R2826 +826 R2926 +926 R3026
+327 R2427 +427 R2527 +527 R2627 +627 R2727 +727 R2827 +827 R2927 +927 R3027
+328 R2428 +428 R2528 +528 R2628 +628 R2728 +728 R2828 +828 R2928 +928 R3028
+329 R2429 +429 R2529 +529 R2629 +629 R2729 +729 R2829 +829 R2929 +929 R3029

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+330 R2430 +430 R2530 +530 R2630 +630 R2730 +730 R2830 +830 R2930 +930 R3030 Tool group No. designation
+331 R2431 +431 R2531 +531 R2631 +631 R2731 +731 R2831 +831 R2931 +931 R3031
Synchronization control
+332 R2432 +432 R2532 +532 R2632 +632 R2732 +732 R2832 +832 R2932 +932 R3032
operation method
+333 R2433 +433 R2533 +533 R2633 +633 R2733 +733 R2833 +833 R2933 +933 R3033 Droop release invalid axis
Each axis reference position
+334 R2434 +434 R2534 +534 R2634 +634 R2734 +734 R2834 +834 R2934 +934 R3034
selection
+335 R2435 +435 R2535 +535 R2635 +635 R2735 +735 R2835 +835 R2935 +935 R3035
+336 R2436 +436 R2536 +536 R2636 +636 R2736 +736 R2836 +836 R2936 +936 R3036
+337 R2437 +437 R2537 +537 R2637 +637 R2737 +737 R2837 +837 R2937 +937 R3037
+338 R2438 +438 R2538 +538 R2638 +638 R2738 +738 R2838 +838 R2938 +938 R3038
Search & start program No.
+339 R2439 +439 R2539 +539 R2639 +639 R2739 +739 R2839 +839 R2939 +939 R3039

53
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+340 R2440 +440 R2540 +540 R2640 +640 R2740 +740 R2840 +840 R2940 +940 R3040
+341 R2441 +441 R2541 +541 R2641 +641 R2741 +741 R2841 +841 R2941 +941 R3041
+342 R2442 +442 R2542 +542 R2642 +642 R2742 +742 R2842 +842 R2942 +942 R3042
+343 R2443 +443 R2543 +543 R2643 +643 R2743 +743 R2843 +843 R2943 +943 R3043
+344 R2444 +444 R2544 +544 R2644 +644 R2744 +744 R2844 +844 R2944 +944 R3044
+345 R2445 +445 R2545 +545 R2645 +645 R2745 +745 R2845 +845 R2945 +945 R3045
+346 R2446 +446 R2546 +546 R2646 +646 R2746 +746 R2846 +846 R2946 +946 R3046 Workpiece coordinate offset
+347 R2447 +447 R2547 +547 R2647 +647 R2747 +747 R2847 +847 R2947 +947 R3047 measurement compensation No.
+348 R2448 +448 R2548 +548 R2648 +648 R2748 +748 R2848 +848 R2948 +948 R3048
Selected tool No.
+349 R2449 +449 R2549 +549 R2649 +649 R2749 +749 R2849 +849 R2949 +949 R3049

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+350 R2450 +450 R2550 +550 R2650 +650 R2750 +750 R2850 +850 R2950 +950 R3050
+351 R2451 +451 R2551 +551 R2651 +651 R2751 +751 R2851 +851 R2951 +951 R3051
+352 R2452 +452 R2552 +552 R2652 +652 R2752 +752 R2852 +852 R2952 +952 R3052
+353 R2453 +453 R2553 +553 R2653 +653 R2753 +753 R2853 +853 R2953 +953 R3053
+354 R2454 +454 R2554 +554 R2654 +654 R2754 +754 R2854 +854 R2954 +954 R3054
+355 R2455 +455 R2555 +555 R2655 +655 R2755 +755 R2855 +855 R2955 +955 R3055
+356 R2456 +456 R2556 +556 R2656 +656 R2756 +756 R2856 +856 R2956 +956 R3056
+357 R2457 +457 R2557 +557 R2657 +657 R2757 +757 R2857 +857 R2957 +957 R3057
+358 R2458 +458 R2558 +558 R2658 +658 R2758 +758 R2858 +858 R2958 +958 R3058
+359 R2459 +459 R2559 +559 R2659 +659 R2759 +759 R2859 +859 R2959 +959 R3059

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+360 R2460 +460 R2560 +560 R2660 +660 R2760 +760 R2860 +860 R2960 +960 R3060
+361 R2461 +461 R2561 +561 R2661 +661 R2761 +761 R2861 +861 R2961 +961 R3061 External search device No.
+362 R2462 +462 R2562 +562 R2662 +662 R2762 +762 R2862 +862 R2962 +962 R3062
External search program No.
+363 R2463 +463 R2563 +563 R2663 +663 R2763 +763 R2863 +863 R2963 +963 R3063
+364 R2464 +464 R2564 +564 R2664 +664 R2764 +764 R2864 +864 R2964 +964 R3064
External search sequence No.
+365 R2465 +465 R2565 +565 R2665 +665 R2765 +765 R2865 +865 R2965 +965 R3065
+366 R2466 +466 R2566 +566 R2666 +666 R2766 +766 R2866 +866 R2966 +966 R3066
External search block No.
+367 R2467 +467 R2567 +567 R2667 +667 R2767 +767 R2867 +867 R2967 +967 R3067
+368 R2468 +468 R2568 +568 R2668 +668 R2768 +768 R2868 +868 R2968 +968 R3068
+369 R2469 +469 R2569 +569 R2669 +669 R2769 +769 R2869 +869 R2969 +969 R3069

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+370 R2470 +470 R2570 +570 R2670 +670 R2770 +770 R2870 +870 R2970 +970 R3070 User Macro input #1032
+371 R2471 +471 R2571 +571 R2671 +671 R2771 +771 R2871 +871 R2971 +971 R3071 (PLC -> Controller)
+372 R2472 +472 R2572 +572 R2672 +672 R2772 +772 R2872 +872 R2972 +972 R3072 User Macro input #1033
+373 R2473 +473 R2573 +573 R2673 +673 R2773 +773 R2873 +873 R2973 +973 R3073 (PLC -> Controller)
+374 R2474 +474 R2574 +574 R2674 +674 R2774 +774 R2874 +874 R2974 +974 R3074 User Macro input #1034
+375 R2475 +475 R2575 +575 R2675 +675 R2775 +775 R2875 +875 R2975 +975 R3075 (PLC -> Controller)
+376 R2476 +476 R2576 +576 R2676 +676 R2776 +776 R2876 +876 R2976 +976 R3076 User Macro input #1035
+377 R2477 +477 R2577 +577 R2677 +677 R2777 +777 R2877 +877 R2977 +977 R3077 (PLC -> Controller)
+378 R2478 +478 R2578 +578 R2678 +678 R2778 +778 R2878 +878 R2978 +978 R3078
+379 R2479 +479 R2579 +579 R2679 +679 R2779 +779 R2879 +879 R2979 +979 R3079

54
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+380 R2480 +480 R2580 +580 R2680 +680 R2780 +780 R2880 +880 R2980 +980 R3080 CHPOVn Chopping override
+381 R2481 +481 R2581 +581 R2681 +681 R2781 +781 R2881 +881 R2981 +981 R3081 Chopping axis selection
+382 R2482 +482 R2582 +582 R2682 +682 R2782 +782 R2882 +882 R2982 +982 R3082 Upper dead point designation (L)
+383 R2483 +483 R2583 +583 R2683 +683 R2783 +783 R2883 +883 R2983 +983 R3083 Upper dead point designation (H)
+384 R2484 +484 R2584 +584 R2684 +684 R2784 +784 R2884 +884 R2984 +984 R3084 Lower dead point designation (L)
+385 R2485 +485 R2585 +585 R2685 +685 R2785 +785 R2885 +885 R2985 +985 R3085 Lower dead point designation (H)
+386 R2486 +486 R2586 +586 R2686 +686 R2786 +786 R2886 +886 R2986 +986 R3086 Number of cycles designation
+387 R2487 +487 R2587 +587 R2687 +687 R2787 +787 R2887 +887 R2987 +987 R3087 Data No.
+388 R2488 +488 R2588 +588 R2688 +688 R2788 +788 R2888 +888 R2988 +988 R3088
+389 R2489 +489 R2589 +589 R2689 +689 R2789 +789 R2889 +889 R2989 +989 R3089

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+390 R2490 +490 R2590 +590 R2690 +690 R2790 +790 R2890 +890 R2990 +990 R3090
+391 R2491 +491 R2591 +591 R2691 +691 R2791 +791 R2891 +891 R2991 +991 R3091
+392 R2492 +492 R2592 +592 R2692 +692 R2792 +792 R2892 +892 R2992 +992 R3092
+393 R2493 +493 R2593 +593 R2693 +693 R2793 +793 R2893 +893 R2993 +993 R3093
+394 R2494 +494 R2594 +594 R2694 +694 R2794 +794 R2894 +894 R2994 +994 R3094
+395 R2495 +495 R2595 +595 R2695 +695 R2795 +795 R2895 +895 R2995 +995 R3095
+396 R2496 +496 R2596 +596 R2696 +696 R2796 +796 R2896 +896 R2996 +996 R3096
+397 R2497 +497 R2597 +597 R2697 +697 R2797 +797 R2897 +897 R2997 +997 R3097
+398 R2498 +498 R2598 +598 R2698 +698 R2798 +798 R2898 +898 R2998 +998 R3098
+399 R2499 +499 R2599 +599 R2699 +699 R2799 +799 R2899 +899 R2999 +999 R3099

55
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.4.3 Axis Command

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
Shar- Inter- Sha- Intern Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ring G al ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal
External machine
+1000 R3100 +1010 R3110 +1020 R3120 +1030 R3130 +1040 R3140 +1050 R3150 +1060 R3160 +1070 R3170 coordinate system
compensation data
+1001 R3101 +1011 R3111 +1021 R3121 +1031 R3131 +1041 R3141 +1051 R3151 +1061 R3161 +1071 R3171
Thermal expansion
offset
+1002 R3102 +1012 R3112 +1022 R3122 +1032 R3132 +1042 R3142 +1052 R3152 +1062 R3162 +1072 R3172
compensation
amount
Thermal expansion
+1003 R3103 +1013 R3113 +1023 R3123 +1033 R3133 +1043 R3143 +1053 R3153 +1063 R3163 +1073 R3173 max. compensation
amount
External
+1004 R3104 +1014 R3114 +1024 R3124 +1034 R3134 +1044 R3144 +1054 R3154 +1064 R3164 +1074 R3174 deceleration speed
selection
+1005 R3105 +1015 R3115 +1025 R3125 +1035 R3135 +1045 R3145 +1055 R3155 +1065 R3165 +1075 R3175
+1006 R3106 +1016 R3116 +1026 R3126 +1036 R3136 +1046 R3146 +1056 R3156 +1066 R3166 +1076 R3176
+1007 R3107 +1017 R3117 +1027 R3127 +1037 R3137 +1047 R3147 +1057 R3157 +1067 R3167 +1077 R3177
+1008 R3108 +1018 R3118 +1028 R3128 +1038 R3138 +1048 R3148 +1058 R3158 +1068 R3168 +1078 R3178
+1009 R3109 +1019 R3119 +1029 R3129 +1039 R3139 +1049 R3149 +1059 R3159 +1069 R3169 +1079 R3179

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
abbrev
Shar- Inter- Sha- Intern Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Shar- Inter- Signal name
.
ing G nal ring G al ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal ing G nal
External machine
+1080 R3180 +1090 R3190 +1100 R3200 +1110 R3210 +1120 R3220 +1130 R3230 +1140 R3240 +1150 R3250 coordinate system
compensation data
+1081 R3181 +1091 R3191 +1101 R3201 +1111 R3211 +1121 R3221 +1131 R3231 +1141 R3241 +1151 R3251
Thermal expansion
offset
+1082 R3182 +1092 R3192 +1102 R3202 +1112 R3212 +1122 R3222 +1132 R3232 +1142 R3242 +1152 R3252
compensation
amount
Thermal expansion
+1083 R3183 +1093 R3193 +1103 R3203 +1113 R3213 +1123 R3223 +1133 R3233 +1143 R3243 +1153 R3253 max. compensation
amount
External
+1084 R3184 +1094 R3194 +1104 R3204 +1114 R3214 +1124 R3224 +1134 R3234 +1144 R3244 +1154 R3254 deceleration speed
selection
+1085 R3185 +1095 R3195 +1105 R3205 +1115 R3215 +1125 R3225 +1135 R3235 +1145 R3245 +1155 R3255
+1086 R3186 +1096 R3196 +1106 R3206 +1116 R3216 +1126 R3226 +1136 R3236 +1146 R3246 +1156 R3256
+1087 R3187 +1097 R3197 +1107 R3207 +1117 R3217 +1127 R3227 +1137 R3237 +1147 R3247 +1157 R3257
+1088 R3188 +1098 R3198 +1108 R3208 +1118 R3218 +1128 R3228 +1138 R3238 +1148 R3248 +1158 R3258
+1089 R3189 +1099 R3199 +1109 R3209 +1119 R3219 +1129 R3229 +1139 R3239 +1149 R3249 +1159 R3259

56
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

3.4.4 Spindle Command

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+1160 R3900 +1190 R3930 +1220 R3960 +1250 R3990 +1280 R4020 +1310 R4050 +1340 R4080 Spindle command rotation
SRPMOTn
+1161 R3901 +1191 R3931 +1221 R3961 +1251 R3991 +1281 R4021 +1311 R4051 +1341 R4081 speed output
+1162 R3902 +1192 R3932 +1222 R3962 +1252 R3992 +1282 R4022 +1312 R4052 +1342 R4082
+1163 R3903 +1193 R3933 +1223 R3963 +1253 R3993 +1283 R4023 +1313 R4053 +1343 R4083
+1164 R3904 +1194 R3934 +1224 R3964 +1254 R3994 +1284 R4024 +1314 R4054 +1344 R4084
+1165 R3905 +1195 R3935 +1225 R3965 +1255 R3995 +1285 R4025 +1315 R4055 +1345 R4085
+1166 R3906 +1196 R3936 +1226 R3966 +1256 R3996 +1286 R4026 +1316 R4056 +1346 R4086
+1167 R3907 +1197 R3937 +1227 R3967 +1257 R3997 +1287 R4027 +1317 R4057 +1347 R4087
+1168 R3908 +1198 R3938 +1228 R3968 +1258 R3998 +1288 R4028 +1318 R4058 +1348 R4088
+1169 R3909 +1199 R3939 +1229 R3969 +1259 R3999 +1289 R4029 +1319 R4059 +1349 R4089

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+1170 R3910 +1200 R3940 +1230 R3970 +1260 R4000 +1290 R4030 +1320 R4060 +1350 R4090 S command override
Multi-point orientation position
+1171 R3911 +1201 R3941 +1231 R3971 +1261 R4001 +1291 R4031 +1321 R4061 +1351 R4091
data
+1172 R3912 +1202 R3942 +1232 R3972 +1262 R4002 +1292 R4032 +1322 R4062 +1352 R4092
+1173 R3913 +1203 R3943 +1233 R3973 +1263 R4003 +1293 R4033 +1323 R4063 +1353 R4093
+1174 R3914 +1204 R3944 +1234 R3974 +1264 R4004 +1294 R4034 +1324 R4064 +1354 R4094
+1175 R3915 +1205 R3945 +1235 R3975 +1265 R4005 +1295 R4035 +1325 R4065 +1355 R4095
+1176 R3916 +1206 R3946 +1236 R3976 +1266 R4006 +1296 R4036 +1326 R4066 +1356 R4096
+1177 R3917 +1207 R3947 +1237 R3977 +1267 R4007 +1297 R4037 +1327 R4067 +1357 R4097
+1178 R3918 +1208 R3948 +1238 R3978 +1268 R4008 +1298 R4038 +1328 R4068 +1358 R4098
+1179 R3919 +1209 R3949 +1239 R3979 +1269 R4009 +1299 R4039 +1329 R4069 +1359 R4099

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP

Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- Sharin Inter- abbrev. Signal name
gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal gG nal
+1180 R3920 +1210 R3950 +1240 R3980 +1270 R4010 +1300 R4040 +1330 R4070 +1360 R4100
+1181 R3921 +1211 R3951 +1241 R3981 +1271 R4011 +1301 R4041 +1331 R4071 +1361 R4101
+1182 R3922 +1212 R3952 +1242 R3982 +1272 R4012 +1302 R4042 +1332 R4072 +1362 R4102
+1183 R3923 +1213 R3953 +1243 R3983 +1273 R4013 +1303 R4043 +1333 R4073 +1363 R4103
+1184 R3924 +1214 R3954 +1244 R3984 +1274 R4014 +1304 R4044 +1334 R4074 +1364 R4104
+1185 R3925 +1215 R3955 +1245 R3985 +1275 R4015 +1305 R4045 +1335 R4075 +1365 R4105
+1186 R3926 +1216 R3956 +1246 R3986 +1276 R4016 +1306 R4046 +1336 R4076 +1366 R4106
+1187 R3927 +1217 R3957 +1247 R3987 +1277 R4017 +1307 R4047 +1337 R4077 +1367 R4107
+1188 R3928 +1218 R3958 +1248 R3988 +1278 R4018 +1308 R4048 +1338 R4078 +1368 R4108
+1189 R3929 +1219 R3959 +1249 R3989 +1279 R4019 +1309 R4049 +1339 R4079 +1369 R4109

57
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5 Each Application

3.5.1 PLC Axis State

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
11370 R1900 Status 1st PLC axis 11378 R1908 Status 2nd PLC axis
11371 R1901 Alarm details 11379 R1909 Alarm details
11372 R1902 11380 R1910
Machine position Machine position
11373 R1903 11381 R1911
11374 R1904 11382 R1912
Remaining distance Remaining distance
11375 R1905 11383 R1913
11376 R1906 Status 2 11384 R1914 Status 2
11377 R1907 11385 R1915

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
11386 R1916 Status 3rd PLC axis 11394 R1924 Status 4th PLC axis
11387 R1917 Alarm details 11395 R1925 Alarm details
11388 R1918 11396 R1926
Machine position Machine position
11389 R1919 11397 R1927
11390 R1920 11398 R1928
Remaining distance Remaining distance
11391 R1921 11399 R1929
11392 R1922 Status 2 11400 R1930 Status 2
11393 R1923 11401 R1931

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
11402 R1932 Status 5th PLC axis 11410 R1940 Status 6th PLC axis
11403 R1933 Alarm details 11411 R1941 Alarm details
11404 R1934 11412 R1942
Machine position Machine position
11405 R1935 11413 R1943
11406 R1936 11414 R1944
Remaining distance Remaining distance
11407 R1937 11415 R1945
11408 R1938 Status 2 11416 R1946 Status 2
11409 R1939 11417 R1947

Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details
G
11418 R1948 Status 7th PLC axis
11419 R1949 Alarm details
11420 R1950
Machine position
11421 R1951
11422 R1952
Remaining distance
11423 R1953
11424 R1954 Status 2
11425 R1955

58
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal Abbrev. Signal details Internal Abbrev. Signal details
G G
11426 R1956 Status 11434 R1964 Status
11427 R1957 Alarm details 11435 R1965 Alarm details
11428 R1958 11436 R1966
Mashine position For buffering Machine position For buffering
11429 R1959 mode 11437 R1967 mode
11430 R1960 11438 R1968
Remaining distance Data A Remaining distance Data B
11431 R1961 11439 R1969
11432 R1962 11440 R1970
11433 R1963 11441 R1971

Sharing Sharing
Internal Abbrev. Signal details Internal Abbrev. Signal details
G G
11442 R1972 Status 12660 R1980 Status 8th PLC axis
11443 R1973 Alarm details 12661 R1981 Alarm detaiils
11444 R1974 12662 R1982
Machine position For buffering Machine position
11445 R1975 mode 12663 R1983
11446 R1976 12664 R1984
Remaining distance Data C Remaining distance
11447 R1977 12665 R1985
11448 R1978 12666 R1986 Status 2
11449 R1979 12667 R1987

59
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.2 PLC Axis Control

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
+1370 R4200 Axis designation 1st PLC axis +1378 R4208 Axis designation 2nd PLC axis
+1371 R4201 Operation mode +1379 R4209 Operation mode
+1372 R4202 +1380 R4210
Feedrate Feedrate
+1373 R4203 +1381 R4211
+1374 R4204 +1382 R4212
Movement data Movement data
+1375 R4205 +1383 R4213
+1376 R4206 Control signals +1384 R4214 Control signals
External deceleration External deceleration
speed selection/Multi- speed selection/Multi-
+1377 R4207 +1385 R4215
step speed monitor step speed monitor
signal input signal input

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
+1386 R4216 Axis designation 3rd PLC axis +1394 R4224 Axis designation 4th PLC axis
+1387 R4217 Operation mode +1395 R4225 Operation mode
+1388 R4218 +1396 R4226
Feedrate Feedrate
+1389 R4219 +1397 R4227
+1390 R4220 +1398 R4228
Movement data Movement data
+1391 R4221 +1399 R4229
+1392 R4222 Control signals +1400 R4230 Control signals
External deceleration External deceleration
speed selection/Multi- speed selection/Multi-
+1393 R4223 +1401 R4231
step speed monitor step speed monitor
signal input signal input

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
+1402 R4232 Axis designation 5th PLC axis +1410 R4240 Axis designation 6th PLC axis
+1403 R4233 Operation mode +1411 R4241 Operation mode
+1404 R4234 +1412 R4242
Feedrate Feedrate
+1405 R4235 +1413 R4243
+1406 R4236 +1414 R4244
Movement data Movement data
+1407 R4237 +1415 R4245
+1408 R4238 Control signals +1416 R4246 Control signals
External deceleration External deceleration
speed selection/Multi- speed selection/Multi-
+1409 R4239 +1417 R4247
step speed monitor step speed monitor
signal input signal input

Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details
G
+1418 R4248 Axis designation 7th PLC axis
+1419 R4249 Operation mode
+1420 R4250
Feedrate
+1421 R4251
+1422 R4252
Movement data
+1423 R4253
+1424 R4254 Control signals
External deceleration
speed selection/Multi-
+1425 R4255
step speed monitor
signal input

60
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
+1426 R4256 Axis designation +1434 R4264 Axis designation
+1427 R4257 Operation mode +1435 R4265 Operation mode
+1428 R4258 +1436 R4266
Feedrate Feedrate
+1429 R4259 +1437 R4267
1st PLC axis 1st PLC axis
+1430 R4260 Data A +1438 R4268 Data B
Movement data Movement data
+1431 R4261 +1439 R4269
+1432 R4262 Control signals +1440 R4270 Control signals
External deceleration External deceleration
+1433 R4263 +1441 R4271
speed selection signal speed selection signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal details Internal abbrev. Signal details
G G
+1442 R4272 Axis designation +2660 R4280 Axis designation 8th PLC axis
+1443 R4273 Operation mode +2661 R4281 Operation mode
+1444 R4274 +2662 R4282
Feedrate Feedrate
+1445 R4275 +2663 R4283
+1446 R4276 1st PLC axis +2664 R4284
Movement data Movement data
+1447 R4277 Data C +2665 R4285
+1448 R4278 Control signals +2666 R4286 Control signals
External deceleration
External deceleration speed selection signal
+1449 R4279 +2667 R4287
speed selection signal /Multi-step speed monitor
input

61
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.3 Window Result Information

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12270 R9000 Read result 1 12280 R9010 Read result 11
12271 R9001 Read result 2 12281 R9011 Read result 12
12272 R9002 Read result 3 12282 R9012 Read result 13
12273 R9003 Read result 4 12283 R9013 Read result 14
12274 R9004 Read result 5 12284 R9014 Read result 15
12275 R9005 Read result 6 12285 R9015 Read result 16
12276 R9006 Read result 7 12286 R9016 Read result 17
12277 R9007 Read result 8 12287 R9017 Read result 18
12278 R9008 Read result 9 12288 R9018 Read result 19
12279 R9009 Read result 10 12289 R9019 Read result 20

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12290 R9020 Write result 1 12300 R9030 Write result 11
12291 R9021 Write result 2 12301 R9031 Write result 12
12292 R9022 Write result 3 12302 R9032 Write result 13
12293 R9023 Write result 4 12303 R9033 Write result 14
12294 R9024 Write result 5 12304 R9034 Write result 15
12295 R9025 Write result 6 12305 R9035 Write result 16
12296 R9026 Write result 7 12306 R9036 Write result 17
12297 R9027 Write result 8 12307 R9037 Write result 18
12298 R9028 Write result 9 12308 R9038 Write result 19
12299 R9029 Write result 10 12309 R9039 Write result 20

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12310 R9040 1st 12318 R9048 1st
12311 R9041 Read data 12319 R9049 Read data
12312 R9042 2nd 12320 R9050 2nd
12313 R9043 Read data 12321 R9051 Read data
Read window data 1 Read window data 2
12314 R9044 3rd 12322 R9052 3rd
12315 R9045 Read data 12323 R9053 Read data
12316 R9046 4th 12324 R9054 4th
12317 R9047 Read data 12325 R9055 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12326 R9056 1st 12334 R9064 1st
12327 R9057 Read data 12335 R9065 Read data
12328 R9058 2nd 12336 R9066 2nd
12329 R9059 Read data 12337 R9067 Read data
Read window data 3 Read window data 4
12330 R9060 3rd 12338 R9068 3rd
12331 R9061 Read data 12339 R9069 Read data
12332 R9062 4th 12340 R9070 4th
12333 R9063 Read data 12341 R9071 Read data

62
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12342 R9072 1st 12350 R9080 1st
12343 R9073 Read data 12351 R9081 Read data
12344 R9074 2nd 12352 R9082 2nd
12345 R9075 Read data 12353 R9083 Read data
Read window data 5 Read window data 6
12346 R9076 3rd 12354 R9084 3rd
12347 R9077 Read data 12355 R9085 Read data
12348 R9078 4th 12356 R9086 4th
12349 R9079 Read data 12357 R9087 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12358 R9088 1st 12366 R9096 1st
12359 R9089 Read data 12367 R9097 Read data
12360 R9090 2nd 12368 R9098 2nd
12361 R9091 Read data 12369 R9099 Read data
Read window data 7 Read window data 8
12362 R9092 3rd 12370 R9100 3rd
12363 R9093 Read data 12371 R9101 Read data
12364 R9094 4th 12372 R9102 4th
12365 R9095 Read data 12373 R9103 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12374 R9104 1st 12382 R9112 1st
12375 R9105 Read data 12383 R9113 Read data
12376 R9106 2nd 12384 R9114 2nd
12377 R9107 Read data 12385 R9115 Read data
Read window data 9 Read window data 10
12378 R9108 3rd 12386 R9116 3rd
12379 R9109 Read data 12387 R9117 Read data
12380 R9110 4th 12388 R9118 4th
12381 R9111 Read data 12389 R9119 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12390 R9120 1st 12398 R9128 1st
12391 R9121 Read data 12399 R9129 Read data
12392 R9122 2nd 12400 R9130 2nd
12393 R9123 Read data 12401 R9131 Read data
Read window data 11 Read window data 12
12394 R9124 3rd 12402 R9132 3rd
12395 R9125 Read data 12403 R9133 Read data
12396 R9126 4th 12404 R9134 4th
12397 R9127 Read data 12405 R9135 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12406 R9136 1st 12414 R9144 1st
12407 R9137 Read data 12415 R9145 Read data
12408 R9138 2nd 12416 R9146 2nd
12409 R9139 Read data 12417 R9147 Read data
Read window data 13 Read window data 14
12410 R9140 3rd 12418 R9148 3rd
12411 R9141 Read data 12419 R9149 Read data
12412 R9142 4th 12420 R9150 4th
12413 R9143 Read data 12421 R9151 Read data

63
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12422 R9152 1st 12430 R9160 1st
12423 R9153 Read data 12431 R9161 Read data
12424 R9154 2nd 12432 R9162 2nd
12425 R9155 Read data 12433 R9163 Read data
Read window data 15 Read window data 16
12426 R9156 3rd 12434 R9164 3rd
12427 R9157 Read data 12435 R9165 Read data
12428 R9158 4th 12436 R9166 4th
12429 R9159 Read data 12437 R9167 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12438 R9168 1st 12446 R9176 1st
12439 R9169 Read data 12447 R9177 Read data
12440 R9170 2nd 12448 R9178 2nd
12441 R9171 Read data 12449 R9179 Read data
Read window data 17 Read window data 18
12442 R9172 3rd 12450 R9180 3rd
12443 R9173 Read data 12451 R9181 Read data
12444 R9174 4th 12452 R9182 4th
12445 R9175 Read data 12453 R9183 Read data

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
12454 R9184 1st 12462 R9192 1st
12455 R9185 Read data 12463 R9193 Read data
12456 R9186 2nd 12464 R9194 2nd
12457 R9187 Read data 12465 R9195 Read data
Read window data 19 Read window data 20
12458 R9188 3rd 12466 R9196 3rd
12459 R9189 Read data 12467 R9197 Read data
12460 R9190 4th 12468 R9198 4th
12461 R9191 Read data 12469 R9199 Read data

64
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

3.5.4 Window Command

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2100 R8500 Section No. +2108 R8508 Section No.
+2101 R8501 Section sub-ID No. +2109 R8509 Section sub-ID No.
+2102 R8502 Sub-section No. +2110 R8510 Sub-section No.
+2103 R8503 Read control Data No. +2111 R8511 Read control Data No.
+2104 R8504 window 1 Read method +2112 R8512 window 2 Read method
+2105 R8505 Number to be read +2113 R8513 Number to be read
+2106 R8506 +2114 R8514
+2107 R8507 Control signal +2115 R8515 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2116 R8516 Section No. +2124 R8524 Section No.
+2117 R8517 Section sub-ID No. +2125 R8525 Section sub-ID No.
+2118 R8518 Sub-section No. +2126 R8526 Sub-section No.
+2119 R8519 Read control Data No. +2127 R8527 Read control Data No.
+2120 R8520 window 3 Read method +2128 R8528 window 4 Read method
+2121 R8521 Number to be read +2129 R8529 Number to be read
+2122 R8522 +2130 R8530
+2123 R8523 Control signal +2131 R8531 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2132 R8532 Section No. +2140 R8540 Section No.
+2133 R8533 Section sub-ID No. +2141 R8541 Section sub-ID No.
+2134 R8534 Sub-section No. +2142 R8542 Sub-section No.
+2135 R8535 Read control Data No. +2143 R8543 Read control Data No.
+2136 R8536 window 5 Read method +2144 R8544 window 6 Read method
+2137 R8537 Number to be read +2145 R8545 Number to be read
+2138 R8538 +2146 R8546
+2139 R8539 Control signal +2147 R8547 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2148 R8548 Section No. +2156 R8556 Section No.
+2149 R8549 Section sub-ID No. +2157 R8557 Section sub-ID No.
+2150 R8550 Sub-section No. +2158 R8558 Sub-section No.
+2151 R8551 Read control Data No. +2159 R8559 Read control Data No.
+2152 R8552 window 7 Read method +2160 R8560 window 8 Read method
+2153 R8553 Number to be read +2161 R8561 Number to be read
+2154 R8554 +2162 R8562
+2155 R8555 Control signal +2163 R8563 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2164 R8564 Section No. +2172 R8572 Section No.
+2165 R8565 Section sub-ID No. +2173 R8573 Section sub-ID No.
+2166 R8566 Sub-section No. +2174 R8574 Sub-section No.
+2167 R8567 Read control Data No. +2175 R8575 Read control Data No.
+2168 R8568 window 9 Read method +2176 R8576 window 10 Read method
+2169 R8569 Number to be read +2177 R8577 Number to be read
+2170 R8570 +2178 R8578
+2171 R8571 Control signal +2179 R8579 Control signal

65
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2180 R8580 Section No. +2188 R8588 Section No.
+2181 R8581 Section sub-ID No. +2189 R8589 Section sub-ID No.
+2182 R8582 Sub-section No. +2190 R8590 Sub-section No.
+2183 R8583 Read control Data No. +2191 R8591 Read control Data No.
+2184 R8584 window 11 Read method +2192 R8592 window 12 Read method
+2185 R8585 Number to be read +2193 R8593 Number to be read
+2186 R8586 +2194 R8594
+2187 R8587 Control signal +2195 R8595 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2196 R8596 Section No. +2204 R8604 Section No.
+2197 R8597 Section sub-ID No. +2205 R8605 Section sub-ID No.
+2198 R8598 Sub-section No. +2206 R8606 Sub-section No.
+2199 R8599 Read control Data No. +2207 R8607 Read control Data No.
+2200 R8600 window 13 Read method +2208 R8608 window 14 Read method
+2201 R8601 Number to be read +2209 R8609 Number to be read
+2202 R8602 +2210 R8610
+2203 R8603 Control signal +2211 R8611 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2212 R8612 Section No. +2220 R8620 Section No.
+2213 R8613 Section sub-ID No. +2221 R8621 Section sub-ID No.
+2214 R8614 Sub-section No. +2222 R8622 Sub-section No.
+2215 R8615 Read control Data No. +2223 R8623 Read control Data No.
+2216 R8616 window 15 Read method +2224 R8624 window 16 Read method
+2217 R8617 Number to be read +2225 R8625 Number to be read
+2218 R8618 +2226 R8626
+2219 R8619 Control signal +2227 R8627 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2228 R8628 Section No. +2236 R8636 Section No.
+2229 R8629 Section sub-ID No. +2237 R8637 Section sub-ID No.
+2230 R8630 Sub-section No. +2238 R8638 Sub-section No.
+2231 R8631 Read control Data No. +2239 R8639 Read control Data No.
+2232 R8632 window 17 Read method +2240 R8640 window 18 Read method
+2233 R8633 Number to be read +2241 R8641 Number to be read
+2234 R8634 +2242 R8642
+2235 R8635 Control signal +2243 R8643 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2244 R8644 Section No. +2252 R8652 Section No.
+2245 R8645 Section sub-ID No. +2253 R8653 Section sub-ID No.
+2246 R8646 Sub-section No. +2254 R8654 Sub-section No.
+2247 R8647 Read control Data No. +2255 R8655 Read control Data No.
+2248 R8648 window 19 Read method +2256 R8656 window 20 Read method
+2249 R8649 Number to be read +2257 R8657 Number to be read
+2250 R8650 +2258 R8658
+2251 R8651 Control signal +2259 R8659 Control signal

66
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2260 R8660 1st +2268 R8668 Section No.
+2261 R8661 Write data +2269 R8669 Section sub-ID No.
+2262 R8662 2nd +2270 R8670 Sub-section No.
+2263 R8663 Write data +2271 R8671 Data No.
Write control
+2264 R8664 Write data 1 +2272 R8672 Write method
3rd window 1
Write data Number to be
+2265 R8665 +2273 R8673
written
+2266 R8666 4th +2274 R8674
+2267 R8667 Write data +2275 R8675 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2276 R8676 1st +2284 R8684 Section No.
+2277 R8677 Write data +2285 R8685 Section sub-ID No.
+2278 R8678 2nd +2286 R8686 Sub-section No.
+2279 R8679 Write data +2287 R8687 Data No.
Write control
+2280 R8680 Write data 2 +2288 R8688 Write method
3rd window 2
Write data Number to be
+2281 R8681 +2289 R8689
written
+2282 R8682 4th +2290 R8690
+2283 R8683 Write data +2291 R8691 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2292 R8692 1st +2300 R8700 Section No.
+2293 R8693 Write data +2301 R8701 Section sub-ID No.
+2294 R8694 2nd +2302 R8702 Sub-section No.
+2295 R8695 Write data +2303 R8703 Data No.
Write control
+2296 R8696 Write data 3 +2304 R8704 Write method
3rd window 3
Write data Number to be
+2297 R8697 +2305 R8705
written
+2298 R8698 4th +2306 R8706
+2299 R8699 Write data +2307 R8707 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2308 R8708 1st +2316 R8716 Section No.
+2309 R8709 Write data +2317 R8717 Section sub-ID No.
+2310 R8710 2nd +2318 R8718 Sub-section No.
+2311 R8711 Write data +2319 R8719 Data No.
Write control
+2312 R8712 Write data 4 +2320 R8720 Write method
3rd window 4
Write data Number to be
+2313 R8713 +2321 R8721
written
+2314 R8714 4th +2322 R8722
+2315 R8715 Write data +2323 R8723 Control signal

67
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2324 R8724 1st +2332 R8732 Section No.
+2325 R8725 Write data +2333 R8733 Section sub-ID No.
+2326 R8726 2nd +2334 R8734 Sub-section No.
+2327 R8727 Write data +2335 R8735 Data No.
Write control
+2328 R8728 Write data 5 +2336 R8736 Write method
3rd window 5
Write data Number to be
+2329 R8729 +2337 R8737
written
+2330 R8730 4th +2338 R8738
+2331 R8731 Write data +2339 R8739 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2340 R8740 1st +2348 R8748 Section No.
+2341 R8741 Write data +2349 R8749 Section sub-ID No.
+2342 R8742 2nd +2350 R8750 Sub-section No.
+2343 R8743 Write data +2351 R8751 Data No.
Write control
+2344 R8744 Write data 6 +2352 R8752 Write method
3rd window 6
Write data Number to be
+2345 R8745 +2353 R8753
written
+2346 R8746 4th +2354 R8754
+2347 R8747 Write data +2355 R8755 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2356 R8756 1st +2364 R8764 Section No.
+2357 R8757 Write data +2365 R8765 Section sub-ID No.
+2358 R8758 2nd +2366 R8766 Sub-section No.
+2359 R8759 Write data +2367 R8767 Data No.
Write control
+2360 R8760 Write data 7 +2368 R8768 Write method
3rd window 7
Write data Number to be
+2361 R8761 +2369 R8769
written
+2362 R8762 4th +2370 R8770
+2363 R8763 Write data +2371 R8771 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2372 R8772 1st +2380 R8780 Section No.
+2373 R8773 Write data +2381 R8781 Section sub-ID No.
+2374 R8774 2nd +2382 R8782 Sub-section No.
+2375 R8775 Write data +2383 R8783 Data No.
Write control
+2376 R8776 Write data 8 +2384 R8784 Write method
3rd window 8
Write data Number to be
+2377 R8777 +2385 R8785
written
+2378 R8778 4th +2386 R8786
+2379 R8779 Write data +2387 R8787 Control signal

68
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2388 R8788 1st +2396 R8796 Section No.
+2389 R8789 Write data +2397 R8797 Section sub-ID No.
+2390 R8790 2nd +2398 R8798 Sub-section No.
+2391 R8791 Write data +2399 R8799 Data No.
Write control
+2392 R8792 Write data 9 +2400 R8800 Write method
3rd window 9
Write data Number to be
+2393 R8793 +2401 R8801
written
+2394 R8794 4th +2402 R8802
+2395 R8795 Write data +2403 R8803 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2404 R8804 1st +2412 R8812 Section No.
+2405 R8805 Write data +2413 R8813 Section sub-ID No.
+2406 R8806 2nd +2414 R8814 Sub-section No.
+2407 R8807 Write data +2415 R8815 Data No.
Write control
+2408 R8808 Write data 10 +2416 R8816 Write method
3rd window 10
Write data Number to be
+2409 R8809 +2417 R8817
written
+2410 R8810 4th +2418 R8818
+2411 R8811 Write data +2419 R8819 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2420 R8820 1st +2428 R8828 Section No.
+2421 R8821 Write data +2429 R8829 Section sub-ID No.
+2422 R8822 2nd +2430 R8830 Sub-section No.
+2423 R8823 Write data +2431 R8831 Data No.
Write control
+2424 R8824 Write data 11 +2432 R8832 Write method
3rd window 11
Write data Number to be
+2425 R8825 +2433 R8833
written
+2426 R8826 4th +2434 R8834
+2427 R8827 Write data +2435 R8835 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2436 R8836 1st +2444 R8844 Section No.
+2437 R8837 Write data +2445 R8845 Section sub-ID No.
+2438 R8838 2nd +2446 R8846 Sub-section No.
+2439 R8839 Write data +2447 R8847 Data No.
Write control
+2440 R8840 Write data 12 +2448 R8848 Write method
3rd window 12
Write data Number to be
+2441 R8841 +2449 R8849
written
+2442 R8842 4th +2450 R8850
+2443 R8843 Write data +2451 R8851 Control signal

69
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2452 R8852 1st +2460 R8860 Section No.
+2453 R8853 Write data +2461 R8861 Section sub-ID No.
+2454 R8854 2nd +2462 R8862 Sub-section No.
+2455 R8855 Write data +2463 R8863 Data No.
Write control
+2456 R8856 Write data 13 +2464 R8864 Write method
3rd window 13
Write data Number to be
+2457 R8857 +2465 R8865
written
+2458 R8858 4th +2466 R8866
+2459 R8859 Write data +2467 R8867 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2468 R8868 1st +2476 R8876 Section No.
+2469 R8869 Write data +2477 R8877 Section sub-ID No.
+2470 R8870 2nd +2478 R8878 Sub-section No.
+2471 R8871 Write data +2479 R8879 Data No.
Write control
+2472 R8872 Write data 14 +2480 R8880 Write method
3rd window 14
Write data Number to be
+2473 R8873 +2481 R8881
written
+2474 R8874 4th +2482 R8882
+2475 R8875 Write data +2483 R8883 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2484 R8884 1st +2492 R8892 Section No.
+2485 R8885 Write data +2493 R8893 Section sub-ID No.
+2486 R8886 2nd +2494 R8894 Sub-section No.
+2487 R8887 Write data +2495 R8895 Data No.
Write control
+2488 R8888 Write data 15 +2496 R8896 Write method
3rd window 15
Write data Number to be
+2489 R8889 +2497 R8897
written
+2490 R8890 4th +2498 R8898
+2491 R8891 Write data +2499 R8899 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2500 R8900 1st +2508 R8908 Section No.
+2501 R8901 Write data +2509 R8909 Section sub-ID No.
+2502 R8902 2nd +2510 R8910 Sub-section No.
+2503 R8903 Write data +2511 R8911 Data No.
Write control
+2504 R8904 Write data 16 +2512 R8912 Write method
3rd window 16
Write data Number to be
+2505 R8905 +2513 R8913
written
+2506 R8906 4th +2514 R8914
+2507 R8907 Write data +2515 R8915 Control signal

70
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2516 R8916 1st +2524 R8924 Section No.
+2517 R8917 Write data +2525 R8925 Section sub-ID No.
+2518 R8918 2nd +2526 R8926 Sub-section No.
+2519 R8919 Write data +2527 R8927 Data No.
Write control
+2520 R8920 Write data 17 +2528 R8928 Write method
3rd window 17
Write data Number to be
+2521 R8921 +2529 R8929
written
+2522 R8922 4th +2530 R8930
+2523 R8923 Write data +2531 R8931 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2532 R8932 1st +2540 R8940 Section No.
+2533 R8933 Write data +2541 R8941 Section sub-ID No.
+2534 R8934 2nd +2542 R8942 Sub-section No.
+2535 R8935 Write data +2543 R8943 Data No.
Write control
+2536 R8936 Write data 18 +2544 R8944 Write method
3rd window 18
Write data Number to be
+2537 R8937 +2545 R8945
written
+2538 R8938 4th +2546 R8946
+2539 R8939 Write data +2547 R8947 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2548 R8948 1st +2556 R8956 Section No.
+2549 R8949 Write data +2557 R8957 Section sub-ID No.
+2550 R8950 2nd +2558 R8958 Sub-section No.
+2551 R8951 Write data +2559 R8959 Data No.
Write control
+2552 R8952 Write data 19 +2560 R8960 Write method
3rd window 19
Write data Number to be
+2553 R8953 +2561 R8961
written
+2554 R8954 4th +2562 R8962
+2555 R8955 Write data +2563 R8963 Control signal

Sharing Sharing
Internal abbrev. Signal name Internal abbrev. Signal name
G G
+2564 R8964 1st +2572 R8972 Section No.
+2565 R8965 Write data +2573 R8973 Section sub-ID No.
+2566 R8966 2nd +2574 R8974 Sub-section No.
+2567 R8967 Write data +2575 R8975 Data No.
Write control
+2568 R8968 Write data 20 +2576 R8976 Write method
3rd window 20
Write data Number to be
+2569 R8969 +2577 R8977
written
+2570 R8970 4th +2578 R8978
+2571 R8971 Write data +2579 R8979 Control signal

71
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.5 Data Registered to Magazine for M System

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks

T4-digit/T8-digit specifications T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit (data type)
G11450 ← ← ← ← ←
ATC control parameter
R4700 ← ← ← ← ←
G11460 ← G11461 ← G11462 ←
Number of tool parameter Binary
R4710 ← R4711 ← R4712 ←
G11465 ← G11466 ← G11467 ←
Pointer designation Binary
R4715 ← R4716 ← R4717 ←
G11470 G11480
G11470 G11480 - -
G11471 G11481
Spindle tool BCD
R4720 R4730
R4720 R4730 - -
R4721 R4731

G11472 G11482
G11471 G11481 - -
G11473 G11483
Standby 1 tool BCD
R4722 R4732
R4721 R4731 - -
R4723 R4733

G11474 G11484
G11472 G11482 - -
G11475 G11485
Standby 2 tool BCD
R4724 R4734
R4722 R4732 - -
R4725 R4735

G11476 G11486
G11473 G11483 - -
G11477 G11487
Standby 3 tool BCD
R4726 R4736
R4723 R4733 - -
R4727 R4737

G11478 G11488
G11474 G11484 - -
G11479 G11489
Standby 4 tool BCD
R4728 R4738
R4724 R4734 - -
R4729 R4739

G11498 ← ← ← ← ←
AUX data Binary
R4748 ← ← ← ← ←

72
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks

T4-digit/T8-digit specifications T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit (data type)

G11500 G11740 G11980

G11500 G11740 G11980
G11501 G11741 G11981
MG1 BCD
R4750 R4990 R5230
R4750 R4990 R5230
R4751 R4991 R5231

G11502 G11742 G11982

G11501 G11741 G11981
G11503 G11743 G11983
MG2 BCD
R4752 R4992 R5232
R4751 R4991 R5231
R4753 R4993 R5233

G11504 G11744 G11984

G11502 G11742 G11982
G11505 G11745 G11985
MG3 BCD
Magazine tool data R4754 R4994 R5234
R4752 R4992 R5232
R4755 R4995 R5235

: : : : : : : :

G11656 G11896 G12136

G11578 G11818 G12058
G11657 G11897 G12137
MG79 BCD
R4906 R5146 R5386
R4828 R5068 R5308
R4907 R5147 R5387

G11658 G11898 G12138

G11579 G11819 G12059
G11659 G11899 G12139
MG80 BCD
R4908 R5148 R5388
R4829 R5069 R5309
R4909 R5149 R5389

G11660 ← G11900 ← G12140 ←

DN01 BCD
R4910 ← R5150 ← R5390 ←
G11661 ← G11901 ← G12141 ←
DN02 BCD
R4911 ← R5151 ← R5391 ←
G11662 ← G11902 ← G12142 ←
DN03 BCD
Magazine tool data (Aux. D) R4912 ← R5152 ← R5392 ←
: : : : : : : :
G11738 ← G11978 ← G12218 ←
DN79 BCD
R4988 ← R5228 ← R5468 ←
G11739 ← G11979 ← G12219 ←
DN80 BCD
R4989 ← R5229 ← R5469 ←

73
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.6 Tool Life Management (M System)

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

11450 R6720
T life mgmt Spindle tool No.
11451 R6721
PLC -> CNC
11452 R6722
T life mgmt Standby tool No.
11453 R6723

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

12220 R6724
Spare tool: Group No.
12221 R6725
12222 R6726
Spare tool: Tool No.
12223 R6727
12224 R6728 Spare tool: Tool data flag/status
12225 R6729 Spare tool: Auxiliary data
12226 R6730 Spare tool: Life data
12227 R6731 Spare tool: Usage data
12228 R6732
Spare tool: Length compensation amount
12229 R6733
12230 R6734
Spare tool: Radius compensation amount
12231 R6735
CNC -> PLC
12232 R6736
12233 R6737
12234 R6738
12235 R6739
12236 R6740
12237 R6741
12238 R6742
12239 R6743
12240 R6744
12241 R6745
12242 R6746
12243 R6747

74
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

12244 R6748
Active tool: Group No.
12245 R6749
12246 R6750
Active tool: Tool No.
12247 R6751
12248 R6752 Active tool: Tool data flag/status
12249 R6753 Active tool: Auxiliary data
12250 R6754 Active tool: Life data
12251 R6755 Active tool: Usage data
12252 R6756
Active tool: Length compensation amount
12253 R6757
12254 R6758
Active tool: Radius compensation amount
12255 R6759
CNC -> PLC
12256 R6760
12257 R6761
12258 R6762
12259 R6763
12260 R6764
12261 R6765
12262 R6766
12263 R6767
12264 R6768
12265 R6769
12266 R6770
12267 R6771

75
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.7 Safety Observing

CNC -> PLC PLC -> CNC

Device Device
Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ing G nal
12470 R2150 SU_NC1 CNC side dual signal Module 1(L) +2580 R4450 SU_PC1 PLC side dual signal Module 1(L)
12471 R2151 SU_NC1 CNC side dual signal Module 1(H) +2581 R4451 SU_PC1 PLC side dual signal Module 1(H)
12472 R2152 SU_NC2 CNC side dual signal Module 2(L) +2582 R4452 SU_PC2 PLC side dual signal Module 2(L)
12473 R2153 SU_NC2 CNC side dual signal Module 2(H) +2583 R4453 SU_PC2 PLC side dual signal Module 2(H)
12474 R2154 SU_NC3 CNC side dual signal Module 3(L) +2584 R4454 SU_PC3 PLC side dual signal Module 3(L)
12475 R2155 SU_NC3 CNC side dual signal Module 3(H) +2585 R4455 SU_PC3 PLC side dual signal Module 3(H)
12476 R2156 +2586 R4456
12477 R2157 +2587 R4457
12478 R2158 +2588 R4458
12479 R2159 +2589 R4459

Device Device
Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ing G nal
12480 R2160 SU_NER1 CNC side dual signal error Module 1(L) +2590 R4460 SU_PER1 PLC side dual signal error Module 1(L)
12481 R2161 SU_NER1 CNC side dual signal error Module 1(H) +2591 R4461 SU_PER1 PLC side dual signal error Module 1(H)
12482 R2162 SU_NER2 CNC side dual signal error Module 2(L) +2592 R4462 SU_PER2 PLC side dual signal error Module 2(L)
12483 R2163 SU_NER2 CNC side dual signal error Module 2(H) +2593 R4463 SU_PER2 PLC side dual signal error Module 2(H)
12484 R2164 SU_NER3 CNC side dual signal error Module 3(L) +2594 R4464 SU_PER3 PLC side dual signal error Module 3(L)
12485 R2165 SU_NER3 CNC side dual signal error Module 3(H) +2595 R4465 SU_PER3 PLC side dual signal error Module 3(H)
12486 R2166 +2596 R4466
12487 R2167 +2597 R4467
12488 R2168 +2598 R4468
12489 R2169 +2599 R4469

Device Device
Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ing G nal
12490 R2170 SU_NO1 CNC side dual signal output Module 1 +2600 R4470 SU_PO1 PLC side dual signal output Module 1
12491 R2171 SU_NO2 CNC side dual signal output Module 2 +2601 R4471 SU_PO2 PLC side dual signal output Module 2
12492 R2172 SU_NO3 CNC side dual signal output Module 3 +2602 R4472 SU_PO3 PLC side dual signal output Module 3
12493 R2173 +2603 R4473
12494 R2174 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 1 +2604 R4474 SU_POER1 PLC side dual signal output error Module 1
12495 R2175 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 2 +2605 R4475 SU_POER2 PLC side dual signal output error Module 2
12496 R2176 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 3 +2606 R4476 SU_POER3 PLC side dual signal output error Module 3
12497 R2177 +2607 R4477
12498 R2178 +2608 R4478
12499 R2179 SU_NST2 CNC side dual signal compare status 2 +2609 R4479 SU_PST2 PLC side dual signal compare status 2

76
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

CNC -> PLC PLC -> CNC

Device Device
Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ing G nal
CNC side safety compare activity check PLC side safety compare activity check
12500 R2180 SU_NLT +2610 R4480 SU_PLT
information information
12501 R2181 SU_NST CNC side dual signal compare status +2611 R4481 SU_PST PLC side dual signal compare status
12502 R2182 SU_NGDV CNC side head G No. +2612 R4482 SU_NGDV PLC side head G No.
CNC side dual signal compare mismatch PLC side dual signal compare mismatch
12503 R2183 SU_NDLY +2613 R4483 SU_PDLY
allowance time allowance time
12504 R2184 SU_NDV1 CNC side dual signal head device No. 1 +2614 R4484 SU_PDV1 PLC side dual signal head device No. 1
12505 R2185 SU_NDV2 CNC side dual signal head device No. 2 +2615 R4485 SU_PDV2 PLC side dual signal head device No. 2
12506 R2186 SU_NDV3 CNC side dual signal head device No. 3 +2616 R4486 SU_PDV3 PLC side dual signal head device No. 3
12507 R2187 +2617 R4487
12508 R2188 SU_NNUM No. of dual signal modules on CNC side +2618 R4488 SU_PNUM No. of dual signal modules on PLC side
12509 R2189 +2619 R4489

Device Device
Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name Shar- Inter- abbrev. Signal name
ing G nal ing G nal
12510 R2190 +2620 R4490 SU_POP PLC side safety operation status
12511 R2191 +2621 R4491
12512 R2192 +2622 R4492
12513 R2193 +2623 R4493
12514 R2194 +2624 R4494
12515 R2195 +2625 R4495
12516 R2196 +2626 R4496
12517 R2197 +2627 R4497
12518 R2198 +2628 R4498
12519 R2199 +2629 R4499

77
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.8 PLC Constants

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
12520 R4500 #6301(Low-order side) 12530 R4510 #6306(Low-order side)
12521 R4501 (High-order side) 12531 R4511 (High-order side)
12522 R4502 #6302(Low-order side) 12532 R4512 #6307(Low-order side)
12523 R4503 (High-order side) 12533 R4513 (High-order side)
12524 R4504 #6303(Low-order side) 12534 R4514 #6308(Low-order side)
12525 R4505 (High-order side) 12535 R4515 (High-order side)
12526 R4506 #6304(Low-order side) 12536 R4516 #6309(Low-order side)
12527 R4507 (High-order side) 12537 R4517 (High-order side)
12528 R4508 #6305(Low-order side) 12538 R4518 #6310(Low-order side)
12529 R4509 (High-order side) 12539 R4519 (High-order side)

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
12540 R4520 #6311(Low-order side) 12550 R4530 #6316(Low-order side)
12541 R4521 (High-order side) 12551 R4531 (High-order side)
12542 R4522 #6312(Low-order side) 12552 R4532 #6317(Low-order side)
12543 R4523 (High-order side) 12553 R4533 (High-order side)
12544 R4524 #6313(Low-order side) 12554 R4534 #6318(Low-order side)
12545 R4525 (High-order side) 12555 R4535 (High-order side)
12546 R4526 #6314(Low-order side) 12556 R4536 #6319(Low-order side)
12547 R4527 (High-order side) 12557 R4537 (High-order side)
12548 R4528 #6315(Low-order side) 12558 R4538 #6320(Low-order side)
12549 R4529 (High-order side) 12559 R4539 (High-order side)

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
12560 R4540 #6321(Low-order side) 12570 R4550 #6326(Low-order side)
12561 R4541 (High-order side) 12571 R4551 (High-order side)
12562 R4542 #6322(Low-order side) 12572 R4552 #6327(Low-order side)
12563 R4543 (High-order side) 12573 R4553 (High-order side)
12564 R4544 #6323(Low-order side) 12574 R4554 #6328(Low-order side)
12565 R4545 (High-order side) 12575 R4555 (High-order side)
12566 R4546 #6324(Low-order side) 12576 R4556 #6329(Low-order side)
12567 R4547 (High-order side) 12577 R4557 (High-order side)
12568 R4548 #6325(Low-order side) 12578 R4558 #6330(Low-order side)
12569 R4549 (High-order side) 12579 R4559 (High-order side)

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
12580 R4560 #6331(Low-order side) 12590 R4570 #6336(Low-order side)
12581 R4561 (High-order side) 12591 R4571 (High-order side)
12582 R4562 #6332(Low-order side) 12592 R4572 #6337(Low-order side)
12583 R4563 (High-order side) 12593 R4573 (High-order side)
12584 R4564 #6333(Low-order side) 12594 R4574 #6338(Low-order side)
12585 R4565 (High-order side) 12595 R4575 (High-order side)
12586 R4566 #6334(Low-order side) 12596 R4576 #6339(Low-order side)
12587 R4567 (High-order side) 12597 R4577 (High-order side)
12588 R4568 #6335(Low-order side) 12598 R4578 #6340(Low-order side)
12589 R4569 (High-order side) 12599 R4579 (High-order side)

78
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
12600 R4580 #6341(Low-order side) 12610 R4590 #6346(Low-order side)
12601 R4581 (High-order side) 12611 R4591 (High-order side)
12602 R4582 #6342(Low-order side) 12612 R4592 #6347(Low-order side)
12603 R4583 (High-order side) 12613 R4593 (High-order side)
12604 R4584 #6343(Low-order side) 12614 R4594 #6348(Low-order side)
12605 R4585 (High-order side) 12615 R4595 (High-order side)
12606 R4586 #6344(Low-order side)
12607 R4587 (High-order side)
12608 R4588 #6345(Low-order side)
12609 R4589 (High-order side)

79
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
(High-order side) #6401 (High-order side) #6411
12616 R4600 12621 R4605
(Low-order side) #6402 (Low-order side) #6412
(High-order side) #6403 (High-order side) #6413
12617 R4601 12622 R4606
(Low-order side) #6404 (Low-order side) #6414
(High-order side) #6405 (High-order side) #6415
12618 R4602 12623 R4607
(Low-order side) #6406 (Low-order side) #6416
(High-order side) #6407 (High-order side) #6417
12619 R4603 12624 R4608
(Low-order side) #6408 (Low-order side) #6418
(High-order side) #6409 (High-order side) #6419
12620 R4604 1265 R4609
(Low-order side) #6410 (Low-order side) #6420

Device Device
abbrev. Contents abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal
(High-order side) #6421 (High-order side) #6431
12626 R4610 12631 R4615
(Low-order side) #6422 (Low-order side) #6432
(High-order side) #6423 (High-order side) #6433
12627 R4611 12632 R4616
(Low-order side) #6424 (Low-order side) #6434
(High-order side) #6425 (High-order side) #6435
12628 R4612 12633 R4617
(Low-order side) #6426 (Low-order side) #6436
(High-order side) #6427 (High-order side) #6437
12629 R4613 12634 R4618
(Low-order side) #6428 (Low-order side) #6438
(High-order side) #6429 (High-order side) #6439
12630 R4614 12635 R4619
(Low-order side) #6430 (Low-order side) #6440

Device
abbrev. Contents
Sharing G Internal
(High-order side) #6441
12636 R4620
(Low-order side) #6442
(High-order side) #6443
12637 R4621
(Low-order side) #6444
(High-order side) #6445
12638 R4622
(Low-order side) #6446
(High-order side) #6447
12639 R4623
(Low-order side) #6448

80
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.5 Each Application

3.5.10 PLC Axis Indexing Interface

Operation command PLC CPU -> CNC CPU (R4300 to R4345)

PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722
AUXCM4 PLC axis indexing control command 4
R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342
G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723
AUXCM3 PLC axis indexing control command 3
R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343
G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724
AUXCM2 PLC axis indexing control command 2
R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344
G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725
AUXCM1 PLC axis indexing control command 1
R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345
G+2684 G+2690 G+2696 G+2702 G+2708 G+2714 G+2720 G+2726 PLC axis indexing control
R4304 R4310 R4316 R4322 R4328 R4334 R4340 R4346 command position (L)
G+2685 G+2691 G+2697 G+2703 G+2709 G+2715 G+2721 G+2727 PLC axis indexing control
R4305 R4311 R4317 R4323 R4329 R4335 R4341 R4347 command position (H)

Operation status signal CNC CPU -> PLC CPU (R2000 to R2045)

PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722
AUXST4 PLC axis indexing control status 4
R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042
G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723
AUXST3 PLC axis indexing control status 3
R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043
G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724
AUXST2 PLC axis indexing control status 2
R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044
G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725
AUXST1 PLC axis indexing control status 1
R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045
G12684 G12690 G12696 G12702 G12708 G12714 G12720 G12726 PLC axis indexing control
R2004 R2010 R2016 R2022 R2028 R2034 R2040 R2046 machine position (L)
G12685 G12691 G12697 G12703 G12709 G12715 G12721 G12727 PPLC axis indexing control
R2005 R2011 R2017 R2023 R2029 R2035 R2041 R2047 machine position (H)

81
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

3.6.1 Special Relay

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM0 Diagnosis error SM10
SM1 Self-diagnosis error SM11
SM2 SM12 CARRY Carry flag
SM3 SM13
SM4 SM14
SM5 SM15
SM6 SM16 THER Temperature rise
SM7 SM17
SM8 SM18
SM9 SM19

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM20 SM30
SM21 SM31
SM22 SM32 ON Always ON
SM23 QSTOP PLC STOP SM33 OFF Always OFF
SM24 SM34 BSCN Only 1 scan ON after RUN
SM25 SM35 ASCN Only 1 scan OFF after RUN
SM26 SM36 01CLK 0.1-second clock
SM27 SM37 02CLK 0.2-second clock
SM28 SM38 1CLK 1-second clock
SM29 SM39 2CLK 2-second clock

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM40 2NCLK 2n-second clock SM50 (APLC data protect avoidance mode)
SM41 SM51 Battery low latch
SM42 SM52 Battery low
SM43 SM53 AC/DC DOWN detection
SM44 SM54
SM45 SM55
SM46 SM56 Calculation error
SM47 SM57
SM48 SM58 Battery low warning latch
SM49 SM59 Battery low warning

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM60 SM70 (APLC data protect avoidance mode)
SM61 SM71
SM62 SM72
SM63 SM73
Tool registration and Life screen display
SM64 DSPRQ SM74
request
SM65 LSTIN Life management data setting prohibited SM75
SM66 SM76
SM67 SM77
SM68 SM78
SM69 (Data protect avoidance mode) SM79

82
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM80 SM90
SM81 SM91
SM82 Model judgment code (for GOT) SM92
SM83 Model judgment code (for GOT) SM93
SM84 Version information (for GOT) SM94
SM85 SM95
SM86 SM96
SM87 SM97
SM88 SM98
SM89 SM99

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM100 SM110
SM101 SM111
SM102 SM112 CPU No. 1 reset flag
SM103 SM113 CPU No. 2 reset flag
SM104 SM114 CPU No. 3 reset flag
SM105 SM115 CPU No. 4 reset flag
SM106 SM116 CPU No. 1 error flag
SM107 SM117 CPU No. 2 error flag
SM108 SM118 CPU No. 3 error flag
SM109 SM119 CPU No. 4 error flag

Device abbrev. Signal name

Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SM120
flag
Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SM121
counter valid flag
SM122
SM123
SM124
SM125
SM126
SM127

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM240 CPU No. 1 reset flag (same as SM112)
SM241 CPU No. 2 reset flag (same as SM113)
SM242 CPU No. 3 reset flag (same as SM114) SM412 1-second clock (same as SM38)
SM243 CPU No. 4 reset flag (same as SM115)
SM244 CPU No. 1 error flag (same as SM116)
SM245 CPU No. 2 error flag (same as SM117)
SM246 CPU No. 3 error flag (same as SM118)
SM247 CPU No. 4 error flag (same as SM119)

83
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3.6.2 Special Register

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD0 Diagnosis error SD10
SD1 Diagnosis error occurrence time Year/Month SD11
SD2 Diagnosis error occurrence time Date/Hour SD12
Diagnosis error occurrence time Minute/ Error common information (continuation)
SD3 SD13
Second
SD4 Error information class SD14
SD5 SD15
SD6 SD16
SD7 Error common information SD17
Error individual information
SD8 SD18
SD9 SD19

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD20 SD30 Writing translation error step No.
SD21 SD31 Writing translation error No.
SD22 SD32
SD23 Error individual information (continuation) SD33
SD24 SD34 1-second counter
SD25 SD35 SCAN Scan counter
SD26 SD36
SD27 SD37 SCTCR Current scan time
SD28 SD38 SCTMI Minimum scan time
SD29 SD39 SCTMX Maximum scan time

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD40 2n-second clock set SD50
SD41 SD51 Battery low latch
SD42 SD52 Battery low
SD43 SD53 AC/DC DOWN detection
SD44 SD54
SD45 SD55
SD46 SD56
SD47 SD57
SD48 SD58
SD49 SD59

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SD60 SD70
counter for CPU No.3
Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SD61 SD71
counter for CPU No.4
SD62 Clock data Year/Month SD72
SD63 Clock data Date/Hour SD73
SD64 Clock data Minute/Second SD74
SD65 Clock data Week SD75
SD66 Multi-CPU No. SD76
Cyclic transmission receive error threshold
SD67 SD77
frequency setting
Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SD68 SD78
counter for CPU No.1
Cyclic transmission receive error detection
SD69 SD79
counter for CPU No.2

84
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD80 SD90
SD81 SD91
SD82 Model judgment code (for GOT) SD92
SD83 Model judgment code (for GOT) SD93
SD84 Version information (for GOT) SD94
SD85 SD95
SD86 SD96
SD87 SD97
SD88 SD98
SD89 SD99

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD100 SD110
SD101 SD111
SD102 SD112
SD103 SD113
SD104 SD114
SD105 SD115
SD106 SD116
SD107 SD117
SD108 SD118
SD109 SD119

Device abbrev. Signal name

SD120
SD121
SD122
SD123
SD124
SD125
SD126
SD127

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

Switch status
SD200 SD210 Clock data Year/Month (same as SD62)
(without internal device assignment)
SD201 LED status SD211 Clock data Date/Hour (same as SD63)
SD212 Clock data Minute/Second (same as SD64)
SD203 CPU operation status SD213 Clock data Week (same as SD65)
SD204 LED display color

85
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD290 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for X
SD291 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for Y
SD292 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for M
SD293 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for L
SD294 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for B
SD295 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for F
Device allocation: Number of points allocated for
SD296
SB
SD297 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for V
Number of points allocated for B
SD288 SD298 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for S
(for extension) 1
Number of points allocated for B
SD289 SD299 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for T
(for extension) 2

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

Device allocation: Number of points allocated
SD300
for ST
Device allocation: Number of points allocated
SD301
for C
Device allocation: Number of points allocated
SD302
for D
Device allocation: Number of points allocated
SD303
for W
Device allocation: Number of points allocated
SD304
for SW
SD395 Multi-CPU No. (same as SD66)

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD420 Scan counter (same as SD35)

SD412 1-second counter (same as SD34)

SD414 2n-second clock set (same as SD40)

Device abbrev. Signal name

SD520 Current scan time (ms unit) (same as SD37)

Minimum scan time (ms unit) (same as

SD524
SD38)

Maximum scan time (ms unit) (same as

SD526
SD39)

86
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

87
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

88
 4
Explanation of Interface Signals

89
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

The signals are explained in order of the tables of input/output signals with the controller as shown below.

Signal type Explanation Reference

System State (CNC->PLC) 4.1
Axis State (CNC->PLC) 4.2
Bit Type Input Signals
Part System State (CNC->PLC) 4.3
Spindle State (CNC->PLC) 4.4
System State (CNC->PLC) 4.5
Axis State (CNC->PLC) 4.6
Data Type Input Signals
Part System State (CNC->PLC) 4.7
Spindle State (CNC->PLC) 4.8
System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.9
Axis Command (PLC->CNC) 4.10
Bit Type Output Signals
Part System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.11
Spindle Command (PLC->CNC) 4.12
System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.13
Axis Command (PLC->CNC) 4.14
Data Type Output Signals
Part System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.15
Spindle Command (PLC->CNC) 4.16

How to read the signals

Signal
Contact Signal name abbreviation $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

CUTTING BLOCK START

B *CSLn Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54
INTERLOCK

The device Nos. for each part system

The table form is different depending on the signal.

(Common for part system, axis, spindle)

Types of contact

A : Signal which is valid at ON (A contact)

B : Signal which is valid at OFF (B contact)

(Note) For B contact, "*" is added to the head of the signal abbreviation.

90
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
24 HOURS CONTINUOUS OP-
A CNOP X310
ERATION

[Function]
This signal notifies that the connector status of the drive power has been ON for over 24 hours.
[Operation]
This signal turns OFF when the contactor shutoff is confirmed by the contactor shutoff test.
Turn the "contactor shutoff test" signal ON to carry out this test.
[Caution]
There is a possibility that the contactor is welded and so your safety may not be secured when "24 hours continuous
operation" signal is output. Thus, under this condition, do not input "speed monitor mode" signal to open the door.
[Related signals]
Contactor shutoff test (MCT)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
DUAL SIGNAL UNCONFIRMED
A SSUCHK X311
AFTER COMPARE ERROR

[Function]
This signal notifies that ON/OFF of the previous error signal is not yet confirmed after a dual signal comparison error.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON at the power ON, after "Y20 Safety observation error 0020" (dual signal comparison error) has
occurred.
When you check the ON/OFF status of the signal to which a comparison error occurred, or input a reset signal, this
signal will turn OFF.
[Caution]
You can turn OFF this signal by inputting a reset signal as well as by checking the previous error signal's ON/OFF status.
If you wish to use this signal after resetting, latch the signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
OUTPUT OFF CHECK NOT
A NOFFCHK X312
COMPLETE

[Function]
This signal notifies that the connector status of the dual signal module's output signals are not being all OFF for over 24
hours.
[Operation]
"Output OFF check not complete" signal will turn OFF when the all the output signals turned OFF is confirmed while the
"output OFF check" signal is ON.
[Caution]
Create a PLC program that the operaters cannot touch the moving sections by disabling the door lock while the "output
OFF check not complete" signal is OFF or dropping the power.
[Related signals]
Output OFF check (OFFCHK)

91
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
POWER SHUTOFF NOTIFICA-
B *PSDNTF X313
TION

[Function]
This signal informs that the power shutoff of the drive section is required.
[Operation]
This signal turns OFF when it enters the emergency stop state so that the drive section can be shutoff.
It turns ON when the error factors are removed and there is no need to shutoff the drive section.
[Caution]
This signal is used to control a contactor at PLC side when there is no dual signal module. When it has a dual signal
module, do not use this signal.
After the error factor of the emergency stop state is released, NC power needs to be turned ON again to turn this signal
ON. However, it is possible to turn this signal ON by resetting if it is the safety observation error which can be removed
by resetting.
Emergency stop All the axes decelerate to zero speed.

Servo ready completion (SA)

All axes zero speed

Power shutoff notification (PSDNTF)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A SKIPm INPUT SIGNAL STATE SKIPmC X318 - X31B

[Function]
This signal notifies that the skip signal is in input state. (m = 1 to 4)
[Operation]
It turns ON when the skip signal is input regardless of the setting of skip I/F switch parameter (#1258 set30/bit0).
The device No. will be recorded to the operation history at the rising and falling edge of this signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
CONTROLLER READY COM-
A MA X320
PLETION

[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is ready for normal operation.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The controller starts working successfully after it is turned ON or when no off-condition exists.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) The controller is turned OFF.
(2) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU, memory, etc.).
(3) "Servo alarm" which cannot be reset without turning OFF the power supply of the controller occurs.

92
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A SERVO READY COMPLETION SA X321

[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation.
In other words, the servo system (position control) is not working when the signal is OFF.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The diagnosis on the servo system is completed successfully after the control unit is turned ON.
(2) "Servo alarm", if occurs, is reset. (Resetting may not be possible depending on the servo alarm contents.)
(3) "Emergency stop" input is removed.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) "Servo alarm" occurs.
(2) "Emergency stop" is input.
(3) The power supply of controller is turned OFF.
(4) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU or memory).
(Note 1) This signal (SA) cannot be turned OFF only with the "Servo OFF" (*SVFn) signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOOR OPEN ENABLE DROPNS X329

[Function]
This signal notifies the PLC that the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal, or
that the same status is canceled.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal turning
ON.
This signal turns OFF at all axes ready ON and at all servo axes servo ON, due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal
turning OFF.
Release of the door lock is enabled at the rising edge of "Door open enable" signal.
The operation is in a READY status at the falling edge of "Door open enable" signal.
[Caution]
(1) Handling of the PLC axis
Set so "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signals are output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If "Door
open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signals are input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake
method due to the ready OFF state. The remaining distance will be held in the remaining distance of PLC axis
control information data.
(2) Handling of the analog spindle
When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the
CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.
Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run
and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.
(3) Opening the door during ATC operation
When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Door open I (DOOR1)
(2) Door open II (DOOR2)

93
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZA-
A SPSYN1 X32A
TION

[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronous control mode has been entered.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- The G114.1 is commanded, and spindle synchronous control is entered. (Spindle synchronization control I)
- The "spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) signal turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control II)

The signal turns OFF when:

- Spindle synchronous control is canceled with the G113 command. Or, when the "spindle synchronization cancel"
(SSYNI)
signal turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control I)
- When the "spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) signal turns OFF. (Spindle synchronization control II)
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)
(5) Spindle synchronization cancel (SSYNI)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED
A SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLE- FSPRV X32B
TION

[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state mode is entered.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- The rotation speed difference of the primary spindle and secondary spindle reaches the value set for the spindle
rotation speed attainment level in spindle synchronization mode. (Spindle synchronization I)
The signal turns OFF when:
- The actual rotation speed of the basic spindle or synchronous spindle, in respect to the spindle synchronous
rotation speed command value, widely exceeds or deviates value set for the spindle synchronization rotation
speed attainment level during the rotation synchronization mode.
- The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

94
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONI-
A FSPPH X32C
ZATION COMPLETION

[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state is entered.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- The phase alignment of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is completed during the phase synchronization
mode.

The signal turns OFF when:

- The phase difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle exceeds the value set for the spindle
synchronization phase attainment level during the phase synchronization mode.
- The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.

Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before chucking
both ends of the workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle. If the spindle
CAUTION phase synchronization signal is turned ON when both ends of the workpiece are chucked
to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle, the chuck or workpiece could be damaged
by the torsion that occurs during phase alignment.

Spindle synchronous control

(SPSY)

In spindle synchronous control

(SPSYN1) (Note1)
Spindle rotation speed
synchronization completion
(FSPRV)
Spindle phase synchronous
control (SPPHS)

Spindle phase synchronization

completion (FSPPH)

Spindle phase synchronization

completion ON
Spindle phase synchronous Spindle phase synchronous
control ON control OFF
Spindle rotation speed synchronization
completion ON
Spindle synchronous control OFF
Spindle synchronous control ON

(Note 1) Temporary turn OFF to change the rotation speed during the phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

95
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
CHUCK CLOSE CONFIRMA-
A SPCMP X32D
TION

[Function]
This signal informs that chuck close (SPCMPC) is input during spindle synchronous control.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is ON.
This signal turns OFF when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is OFF.
This signal turns OFF when the spindle synchronous control is canceled.

Chuck open
Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close confirmation Chuck open
Chuck close
Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open confirmation Chuck close Chuck close

Spindle synchronous
control (SPSY)
In spindle synchronous
control (SPSYN1)
Spindle rotation speed
synchronization completion
(FSPRV)

Chuck close (SPCMPC)

Error temporary cancel

(SPDRPO)
In error cancel

(Note) Use "error temporary cancel" signal only when the position error between two spindles still occurs even after
the "Chuck close" signal is turned ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Chuck close (SPCMPC)
(2) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(3) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(4) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(5) Error temporary cancel (SPDRPO)

96
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A BATTERY WARNING BATWR X32E

[Function]
This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the control unit or the battery supplying to the absolute
position detector has dropped below the battery alarm detection level.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The voltage of the data storage battery, which is checked constantly, has dropped below the battery alarm detection
level (2.7V).
The alarm indicates the system alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0001" at this time.
(2) A fault is detected in the battery voltage (3.0V or less) supplied to the absolute position detector.
The alarms "Z73 ABS. WARNING 0001" and "S52 SERVO WARNING 009F" are displayed at this time.
(Note 1) Even if this signal is ON, starting the automatic operation is possible.
(Note 2) The battery alarm turns the automatic interlock ON even when the interlock has been set invalid.

The signal is turned OFF in the following way.

(1) When the alarm occurred by the cause written in (1) above, the signal is turned OFF by replacing the battery and
then turning ON the "NC reset 1"signal (NRST1n).
(2) When the alarm occurred by the cause written in (2) above, the signal is turned OFF by removing the cause and
then turning the power ON again.
(3) The signal is also turned OFF when the voltage of the data storage battery drops below the battery alarm detection
level, and the battery alarm (BATAL) signal turns ON.
The system alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0003" is displayed at this time.
[Caution]
When this signal (BATWR) turns ON, it is recommended to replace battery as early as possible.
[Related signals]
(1) Battery alarm (BATAL)
(2) Battery drop cause

97
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A BATTERY ALARM BATAL X32F

[Function]
This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the control unit or the battery supplying to the absolute
position detector has dropped below the battery alarm detection level.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The voltage of the data storage battery is checked when the power is turned ON and is below the battery alarm
detection level (2.5V).
At this time, the alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0003" will be displayed.
(2) A fault is detected in the power voltage (battery voltage)(2.6V or less) for the speed detector in the absolute position
detector.
At this time, the alarm "Z71 DETECTOR ERR 0001" will be displayed.
(3) The absolute position is lost by the drop in the backup power voltage (battery voltage) in the absolute position
detector.
At this time, the alarm "Z70 Abs posn error(servo alm 25) 0101" will be displayed.
(4) A fault is detected in the battery voltage for the data storage detection circuit.
At this time, the alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0002" will be displayed.
(Note 1) Automatic starting is not possible when this signal is ON.
(Note 2) This battery alarm signal turns the automatic interlock ON even when the interlock has been set invalid.
(Note 3) The automatic interlock, validated when the battery alarm has been detected, can be set invalid with the
parameter below.

# R register bit Item Details

Validates/invalidates the automatic interlock when the
battery alarm is detected. This bit is always "0" (valid)
Automatic interlock invalid while
6449 R4624 4 when the power is turned ON.
battery alarm ON
0: Valid
1: Invalid

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) For alarms caused by ON condition (1)
The signal can be turned OFF with "NC reset 1" (NRST1n) signal after the battery is replaced with new one.
(2) For alarms caused by ON conditions (2) and (3)
The signal can be turned OFF by removing the alarm causes and then turning the power ON again.
[Caution]
(1) If simply turning the control unit power OFF upon occurrence of this battery alarm (especially in the "ON" conditions
(1)), data storing machining programs, etc. will be destroyed. Replace the battery with new one before turning the
power OFF and confirm that this signal is turned OFF.
(2) Make sure to backup the control unit data and keep it in case that data will be destroyed.
If this battery alarm has occurred when the control unit power is ON, take measures, assuming that the data storing
machining programs may have been destroyed. (Confirm the data storing machining programs, etc.)
[Related signals]
(1) Battery warning (BATWR)
(2) Battery drop cause

98
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A NC ALARM 1 AL1 X330

[Function]
This signal informs that system error occurred in the controller.
[Operation]
If "watch dog error", "memory parity check error", etc. occurs on the controller side, the signal turns ON.
The system error can be reset by turning OFF.
(Note 1) "NC alarm 1" (AL1) may not be detected as signal.
(Note 2) For details of system alarms, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) AL2 X331

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in servo alarm condition.
If servo alarm occurs, "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns OFF.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:

(1) Servo alarm occurs. Servo alarms include the following:

- Servo failure 1 (no signal, overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.)
- Servo failure 2 (motor overheat, excessive error, drive unit external emergency stop, etc.)
- Initial parameter error (parameter transferred to drive unit when the power is turned ON is illegal)
- Drive unit not mounted (cable is not connected between controller and servo controller).
- Parameter error (a parameter that will disrupt movement of the control axis was found).

Alarm can be reset by turning OFF the power, or using controller reset, or by setting parameter again, etc., depending on
type of alarm.
For details of alarm resetting, and servo alarm, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A MACRO SINGLE VALID MSON X339

[Function]
This signal informs macro single is valid.
Macro single is used to stop the user macro command block by block during single block operation.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON by setting "1" in "#8101 MACRO SINGLE".
[Related signals]
(1) SINGLE BLOCK(SBKn)

99
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
Power OFF required after param-
A PARACHG X33A
eter change

[Function]
This signal informs that the set parameter is not valid without turning the power ON again.
[Operation]
When the following operation is executed, the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal is output, and the
alarm "Z20 Power ON again" will be displayed in the alarm display area.
(1) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are set from CNC monitor screen.
(2) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are input via EZSocket.
(3) The parameter data (ALL.PRM) is input.
(4) The backup data (SRM.BIN) is input by the SRAM backup function.
(5) The backup data/restore data are restored.
(6) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are changed with G10 L70 command.
(7) The standard parameters are set by setting "#1060 SETUP" to "1".
When the power is turned ON again, this signal will turn OFF and the message "Z20 Power ON again" will disappear.
This signal will not be cleared with NC reset.
[Caution]
A warning message and signal will be output when the parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are
changed. However, interlock, such as for operation startup, will not be executed until the power is turned ON again.
Therefore, execute the interlock with PLC program.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
EDITIED DATA IN PROCESS-
A EDITDO X33B
ING

[Function]
This signal informs that the compression process for the edited data is being executed.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON when changing the machining program by editing or inputting the program.
This signal will turn OFF after the edited data compression process is completed.
[Caution]
The data being edited might corrupt if the controller's power is cutoff while this signal is ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Edited data error (EDITERR)
(2) Edited data recovery confirmation (EDITOK)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A EDITED DATA ERROR EDITERR X33C

[Function]
This signal informs that an error has occurred in the edited data.
[Operation]
This signal will turn ON if the alarm "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR" occurs
This signal will turn OFF when the alarm "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR" is all cleared.
[Caution]
Refer to the Setup manual on how to release the alarm.
[Related signals]
(1) Edited data error (EDITERR)
(2) Edited data recovery confirmation (EDITOK)

100
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
NC DATA SAMPLING COM-
A SMPFIN X33E
PLETED

[Function]
This signal informs that the NC data sampling is completed (executed).
[Operation]
(1) This signal turns ON when "#0 sampling startup" is changed from "1" to "0" where the sampling data exists (Note).
(Including when "9" is set to perform a force-quiet.)
(Note) When it entered into in sampling state even once after sampling is started.
(2) This signal turns OFF when "#0 sampling startup" is changed from "0" to "1".
The sampling data will be cleared if either the number of channels, buffering capacity or process configuration is
changed. In this case, this signal will turn OFF.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS DLOAD0 X350

[Function]
This signal informs that download from FTP server is started.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- Downloading a file from FTP server is normally started.
The signal turns OFF when:
- Download is completed.
- Download is interrupted as the data transfer error occurred during the download process. If it happens, the error
code will be stored.
[Related signals]
(1) Download request (DLDREQ)
(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)
(3) Download error (DLDERR)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOWNLOAD COMPLETED DLDFIN X351

[Function]
This signal informs that a download from FTP server is successfully completed.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- Downloading a file from FTP server is started.
The signal turns OFF when:
- "Download request" (DODREQ) is turned OFF
[Related signals]
(1) Download request (DLDREQ)
(2) Download in progress (DLOAD0)
(3) Download error (DLDERR)

101
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOWNLOAD ERROR DLDERR X352

[Function]
This signal informs that an error occurred when download is requested to FTP server.
This signal informs that an error occurred while downloading from FTP server.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- An error occurred when requesting download to FTP server but download cannot be started.
- Download is interrupted as an error occurred while downloading from FTP server.
- Download is requested when option is set as no setting. (In this case, the alarm for communication error will not
occur simultaneously.)
The signal turns OFF when:
- "Download request" (DODREQ) is turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Download request (DLDREQ)
(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)
(3) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A PLC AXIS POSITION SWITCH n PSWPn X360 - X36F

[Function]
This is the position switch for the PLC control axis.
This signal notifies that the machine position is within the area set by the parameters.
[Operation]
It operates the same as the NC axis position switch PSWmn.
[Related signals]
(1) Position switch m (PSWmn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A APLC INPUT SIGNAL n APLCINn X380 - X39F

[Function] [Operation]
This signal is an interface for sending a signal from APLC C language module to PLC device.

102
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X400 X420 X440 X460 X480 X4A0 X4C0 X4E0
A SERVO READY RDYn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X500 X520 X540 X560 X580 X5A0 X5C0 X5E0

[Function]
This signal indicates that the drive section of the nth axis is ready for operation.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The power supply of the controller is turned ON and the diagnosis on the servo system has been completed
successfully.
(2) Servo alarm has been reset.
(3) Emergency stop has been reset.
(4) "Servo off"(*SVFn) signal is reset.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Servo alarm occurs.
(2) Emergency stop is issued.
(3) "Servo off"(*SVFn) signal is input.
[Operation sequence]

Controller power
supply
Controller ready
completion
Servo ready
n-th axis

In reset

Emergency stop

Servo alarm

Reset & rewind

3s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.7s 0.7s 0.7s

[Related signals]
(1) Servo ready completion (SA)

103
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X401 X421 X441 X461 X481 X4A1 X4C1 X4E1
A AXIS SELECTION AXn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X501 X521 X541 X561 X581 X5A1 X5C1 X5E1

[Function]
This signal indicates that motion command is issued to the control axis.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON and OFF as follows:
(1) Automatic operation
The signal is ON while the motion command is issued to the end of movement, or to when automatic operation
pause turns ON.
(2) Manual operation
(a) For JOG mode
The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal is ON.
(b) For HANDLE mode
When "1st to 3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) and "Handle valid" signal (HS1Sn, HS2Sn,
HS3Sn) have been selected, the "Axis selected" signal for the axis specified by the "1st to 3rd handle axis
selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) signal is ON.
(c) For INCREMENTAL mode
The signal turns ON when "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the
specified motion is completed.
(d) For MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode
The signal turns ON when "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the
specified motion is completed.
(e) For REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode
The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal is ON. After "Reference position return
near point detection" signal is detected, and the motion speed changes to approach (creeping) speed, the
"Axis selected" signal remains ON until the motion stops at the reference position, even when "Feed axis
selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal turns OFF.
(3) Other conditions
(a) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock (Z-axis is in cancellation). However, it does not turn ON during
machine lock in manual operation mode.
(b) The signal remains on even when motion stops due to feedrate override set at 0%, manual control feedrate set
at 0 mm/min, or 0 inch/min.
(c) Interlock does not affect status of this signal (the signal remains ON, or turns ON).
(d) "Servo off" signal does not affect status of this signal.
(e) The signal cannot be turned ON by G04 and G92.
(f) The signal turns OFF with "controller Reset & Rewind", or "Emergency stop".
(Example)

Axial motion

Feed axis selection

Axis selected

104
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X402 X422 X442 X462 X482 X4A2 X4C2 X4E2
A IN AXIS PLUS MOTION MVPn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X502 X522 X542 X562 X582 X5A2 X5C2 X5E2

[Function]
This signal indicates that the specified axial motion is in plus (+) direction.
This signal is available per control axis, and the last number of the signal name indicates the control axis No.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The specified axial component starts moving in the plus direction or when moving.
The signal turns OFF when:
(2) The specified control axis stops moving or moves in the minus direction.

An example of the timing chart for the jog mode is shown below.

Feed axis selection+ (+J1)

1st axis motion [+]

Feed axis selection- (-J1)

1st axis motion [-]

In axis plus motion (MVP1)

In axis minus motion (MVM1)

(Note 1) This signal operates regardless of the operation mode.

(Note 2) The real movement direction is indicated.
(Note 3) The signal does not turn ON during machine lock.
[Related signals]
In axis minus motion (MVMn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X403 X423 X443 X463 X483 X4A3 X4C3 X4E3
A IN AXIS MINUS MOTION MVMn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X503 X523 X543 X563 X583 X5A3 X5C3 X5E3

[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is moving in the minus direction
[Operation]
This motion direction is the reverse of the plus motion, and the operation is the same as IN AXIS PLUS MOTION +
(MVPn).
[Related signals]
In axis plus motion (MVPn)

105
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X404 X424 X444 X464 X484 X4A4 X4C4 X4E4
1ST REFERENCE POSITION
A ZP1n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
REACHED
X504 X524 X544 X564 X584 X5A4 X5C4 X5E4

[Function]
This signal indicates that the axial component of the nth axis is ON the 1st reference position.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
(1) The signal turns ON when:
- "1st reference position reached" is attained with reference position return mode in manual operation.
Refer to the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (ZRNn) section for details on returning.
- "1st reference position reached" is attained with G28 command in automatic operation.
(Note 1) If "1st reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the signal
does not turn ON.

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.
- "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.
(3) Reference position return operation pattern
• When basic machine coordinate system is not
Dog-type reference position return
established.
• When dog-type return is selected with setup
parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063
mandog" in the manual mode.

Near-point dog

Reference position •
When basic machine coordinate system is not
High-speed reference position return established.
• When high-speed return is selected with setup
parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063
mandog" in the manual mode.

(Note)
Reference position return will be the
Near-point dog
high-speed return when the basic machine
Reference position coordinate system is established
(2nd time and following).

[Related signals]
(1) 2nd reference position reached nth axis (ZP2n)
(2) 3rd reference position reached nth axis (ZP3n)
(3) 4th reference position reached nth axis (ZP4n)

106
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X405 X425 X445 X465 X485 X4A5 X4C5 X4E5
2ND REFERENCE POSITION
A ZP2n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
REACHED
X505 X525 X545 X565 X585 X5A5 X5C5 X5E5

[Function]
This signal indicates that the axial component of the nth axis is on the 2nd reference position.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
(1) The signal turns ON when:
- "2nd reference position reached" is attained with G30 command (G30 P2 X_ Y_ ...) in automatic operation.
- "2nd reference position reached" is attained with reference position retern mode of automatic operation
(Reference position selection code 1, 2).
(Note) If "2nd reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the signal
does not turn ON.

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.
- "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.
[Related signals]
(1) 1st reference position reached nth axis (ZP1n)
(2) 3rd reference position reached nth axis (ZP3n)
(3) 4th reference position reached nth axis (ZP4n)
(4) Reference position selection code m (ZSLmn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X406 X426 X446 X466 X486 X4A6 X4C6 X4E6
3RD REFERENCE POSITION
A ZP3n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
REACHED
X506 X526 X546 X566 X586 X5A6 X5C6 X5E6

[Function][Operation]
This signal informs that the control axis is on the 3rd reference position.
Function and operation are the same as the 2nd reference position reached, but the reference position and G command
are different.
- Reference position: 3rd reference position
- G comand: G30 P3

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X407 X427 X447 X467 X487 X4A7 X4C7 X4E7
4TH REFERENCE POSITION
A ZP4n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
REACHED
X507 X527 X547 X567 X587 X5A7 X5C7 X5E7

[Function][Operation]
This signal informs that the control axis is on the 4th reference position.
Function and operation are the same as the 2nd reference position reached, but the reference position and G command
are different.
- Reference position: 4th reference position
- G comand: G30 P4

107
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X408 X428 X448 X468 X488 X4A8 X4C8 X4E8
A NEAR REFERENCE POSITION NRFn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X508 X528 X548 X568 X588 X5A8 X5C8 X5E8

[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is near the 1st reference position in the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the control axis is in the range of the parameter set using the 1st reference position as a base
point, and turns OFF when the range is exceeded. The parameter is set with #2057 (nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the
[ABS. POSI PARAM] screen.

1st reference position

+ direction - direction

#2057 setting value #2058 setting value

Near reference position

(NRFn)

(Note 1) The "Near reference position" signal is output even while the axis is moving, but there may be a slight
deviation with the actual machine position.
Rapid traverse: 4.8mm
Cutting feed: 2.4mm
(Note 2) This signal is valid only with the absolute position detection system.
(Note 3) When 0 is set for #2057 (nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen, it will be same as when
the grid width is set.

108
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X409 X429 X449 X469 X489 X4A9 X4C9 X4E9
A NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED ARRFn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X509 X529 X549 X569 X589 X5A9 X5C9 X5E9

[Function]
This signal indicates that the actual axis feedrate has reached the feedrate commanded for each axis.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the difference of the speed commanded for each axis and the motor feedback feedrate is
within a set range (approx. ±15%).
This signal turns OFF when the speed difference exceeds the set range.

Axis start

15%

Axis feedrate

NC axis up-to-speed

In axis plus motion/

In axis minus motion

[Related signals]
(1) In axis plus motion (MVPn)
(2) In axis minus motion (MVMn)

109
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40A X42A X44A X46A X48A X4AA X4CA X4EA
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION
A ZSFn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
SET COMPLETED
X50A X52A X54A X56A X58A X5AA X5CA X5EA

[Function]
This signal notifies that the basic machine coordinate system has been set (established) during zero point initialization
set using the marked point alignment method in the absolute position detection system I/II.
[Operation]
This signal is valid when "#2049 TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4", and turns ON when the
basic machine coordinate system is set (established).
This signal will turn OFF if initializing is carried out again or if the power is turned ON again.

<Zero point initialization set method using marked point alignment method I, and timing chart>

[Outline of zero point initialization set method] Machine basic position

Start point
(Note) The axis movement for
(c) (b) and (d) is carried out
(a) (b)
with jogging or handle
operation.
Basic machine coordinate system Completion
zero point (e) (d)
Reference position Coordinate

Zero point return parameter

([#2037 G53ofs]) Grid point Screen
(absolute position [TO END]
(When #2059 zerbas=1) basic point) display value

(When #2059 zerbas=0)

Either one is [ZERO] value

set on the screen.

[Time chart] ( (a) to (e) in the figure correspond to (a) to (e) above)

Zero point initialization set mode (a)

(AZSn)

In initialization
(R574) (b)

Zero point initialization set start (c) (d)

(ZSTn)

Zero point initialization set completed (e)

(ZSFn)

Initialization incompletion (e)

110
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

<Zero point initialization set method using marked point alignment method II, and timing chart>

[Outline of zero point initialization set method]

Machin basic position
Start point (Note) The axis movement for
(b) and (d) is carried out with
(b) (c) jogging or handle operation.
Basic machine coordinate (a)
system zero point (d)
Completion
Reference position

Zero point return

parameter
「#2037
( G53ofs」) Grid point

#2 Zero point

The parameter "#2059 zerbas" does not influence the "#2 Zero point".

[Time chart] ( (a) to (d) in the figure correspond to (a) to (d) above)

Zero point initialization set mode (a)

(AZSn)
In zero point initialization set (b)

(c)
Zero point initialization set start
(ZSTn)

Zero point initialization set completed (d)

(ZSFn)
Zero point initialization incomplete (d)

[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)
(2) In initialization
(3) Initialization incomplete
(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

111
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40B X42B X44B X46B X48B X4AB X4CB X4EB
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION
A ZSEn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
SET ERROR COMPLETED
X50B X52B X54B X56B X58B X5AB X5CB X5EB

[Function]
This signal is output when initializing is not possible during the marked point alignment method of the absolute position
detection system I/II.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the initializing is not possible at the rising edge of the "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn)
signal.
This signal is invalidated in the following cases:

- During emergency stop

- During reset
- When "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point initialization set mode"
(AZSn) signal
- When grid has not been passed even once after the power has been turned ON. (Depends on the detector type)
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)
(2) In initialization
(3) Initialization incomplete
(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40C X42C X44C X46C X48C X4AC X4CC X4EC
IN ZERO POINT INITIALIZA-
A ZSn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
TION
X50C X52C X54C X56C X58C X5AC X5CC X5EC

[Function]
This signal is output when zero point initialization is being carried out in the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
The axis for which "1" is set in #0 INIT. SET on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is set to "1", and is held until the power
is turned OFF.
The stored stroke limit and stroke end signals are invalid while this signal is set to "1", and the current limit during
initialization is valid.
This signal is also set to "1" when the zero point initialization mode (AZSn) signal is ON.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40D X42D X44D X46D X48D X4AD X4CD X4ED
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION
A ZLSn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
INCOMPLETE
X50D X52D X54D X56D X58D X5AD X5CD X5ED

[Function]
This signal is output when the absolute position is not established in the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal indicates that the zero point initialization has not been established once or that the absolute position has
been lost.
The stored stroke limit of the axis for which this signal is set to "1" in the absolute position detection system is invalid.

112
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40E X42E X44E X46E X48E X4AE X4CE X4EE
A IN CURRENT LIMIT ILIn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X50E X52E X54E X56E X58E X5AE X5CE X5EE

[Function][Operation]
This signal turns ON during the current limit.
[Related signals]
(1) Current limit reached (ILAn)
(2) Current limit changeover (ILCn)
(3) Droop release request (DORn)
(4) Current limit mode 1 and 2 (ILMmn)
(5) Current limit changeover

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X40F X42F X44F X46F X48F X4AF X4CF X4EF
A CURRENT LIMIT REACHED ILAn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X50F X52F X54F X56F X58F X5AF X5CF X5EF

[Function][Operation]
This signal turns ON when the current reaches its limit during the current limit control.
[Related signals]
(1) In current limit (ILIn)
(2) Current limit changeover (ILCn)
(3) Droop release request (DORn)
(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)
(5) Current limit changeover

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X410 X430 X450 X470 X490 X4B0 X4D0 X4F0
A UNCLAMP COMMAND UCLPn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X510 X530 X550 X570 X590 X5B0 X5D0 X5F0

[Function]
This signal is output when movement of the axis selected as the index table indexing axis is commanded.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, the index table indexing axis clamp is released by the ladder, and the "unclamp completion"
(UCLPFn) signal is set.
This signal turns OFF when movement of the index table indexing axis is completed.

The signal turns ON when:

- Movement of the indexing axis is commanded during automatic operation.
This signal turns OFF when:
- Movement of the indexing axis is completed during automatic operation.
- The axis movement is forcibly ended with reset or emergency stop, etc.
(Note 1) The index command will not turn OFF if the axis movement is interrupted with an interlock or automatic
operation pause, etc.
(Note 2) This signal is turned ON and OFF when the index table indexing axis acceleration/deceleration has completed.
Thus, if the in-position has to be confirmed during the clamp/unclamp operation, confirm with the PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Unclamp completion (UCLPFn)

113
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X411 X431 X451 X471 X491 X4B1 X4D1 X4F1
A IN-POSITION INPn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X511 X531 X551 X571 X591 X5B1 X5D1 X5F1

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the control axis is in the in-position state.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) The control axis' acceleration/deceleration delay is zero, and the servo error (droop pulse) is within the range set with
the parameters.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) The control axis' acceleration/deceleration delay is not zero.
(2) The servo error (droop pulse) is not within the range set with the parameters.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X412 X432 X452 X472 X492 X4B2 X4D2 X4F2
IN MULTI-STEP SPEED MONI-
A MSOEn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
TOR
X512 X532 X552 X572 X592 X5B2 X5D2 X5F2

[Function]
This signal indicates that the axis is in multi-step speed monitor.
In multi-step monitor, when the speed of axis exceeds the monitor speed the safety observation error will occur.
[Operation]
After the "Multi-step speed monitor request" (MSORn) is turned on, the speed of axis becomes less than monitoring
speed, and both NC and drive unit start executing the speed monitor function, this signal will be turned ON.
When "Multi-step speed request" (MSORn) signal is turned off, this signal too will be turned off.
[Related signals]
(1) Multi-step speed monitor request (MSORn)
(2) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)
(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

114
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X413 - X433 - X453 - X473 - X493 - X4B3 - X4D3 - X4F3 -
414 434 454 474 494 4B4 4D4 4F4
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MSO-
A 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
MODE OUTPUT m MOmn
X513 - X533 - X553 - X573 - X593 - X5B3 - X5D3 - X5F3 -
514 534 554 574 594 5B4 5D4 5F4

[Function]
This signal notifies which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-step
speed monitoring.

Multi-step speed monitor mode

output Speed monitor mode to be used
MSOMO2n MSOMO1n
0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4

[Operation]
When the monitor speed of drive unit is switched to the safety monitor speed of the mode which is designated by "Multi-
step speed monitor mode input" (MSOMImn), this signal is also switched to the designated mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Multi-step speed monitor request (MSORn)
(2) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)
(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6
AXIS SWITCHING INVALID
A AXCHGISn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
STATUS
X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6

[Function]
This signal informs that the switching between NC axis and PLC axis cannot be executed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the following conditions apply to the axis which is valid for switching between NC axis and
PLC axis. When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while this signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/PLC
axis switch illegal 1250" will occur.
- While the axis is in motion
- During the Servo OFF
- While removing the axis
- While the axis is stooped with interlock
- While the axis is stopped for override
- During the current limit
- During the droop release
- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command
- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the
program
- During the H/W OT, soft limit
[Related signals]
(1) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)
(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

115
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7
A IN PLC AXIS CONTROL PLCMODn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7

[Function]
This signal informs that the mode is PLC axis control for NC axis/PLC axis switching function.
[Operation]
This signal turns OFF during the NC axis control and turns ON during the PLC axis control.
[Related signals]
(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)
(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

116
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN JOG MODE JOn X600 X680 X700 X780 X800 X880 X900

[Function]
This signal indicates that JOG mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to JOG mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (TSMZ) (command acceleration/
deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode JOG mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In jog mode
(JO)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN HANDLE MODE HOn X601 X681 X701 X781 X801 X881 X901

[Function]
This signal indicates that HANDLE mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to HANDLE mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (TSMZn) (command acceleration/
deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode Handle mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In handle mode
(H0)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

117
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN INCREMENTAL MODE SOn X602 X682 X702 X782 X802 X882 X902

[Function]
This signal indicates that INCREMENTAL mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to INCREMENTAL mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/
deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode Incremental mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In incremental mode
(SO)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A PTPOn X603 X683 X703 X783 X803 X883 X903
MODE

[Function]
This signal indicates that MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command
acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode Manual arbitrary feed mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In manual arbitrary feed mode

(PTP0)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn

118
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN REFERENCE POSITION RE-
A ZRNOn X604 X684 X704 X784 X804 X884 X904
TURN MODE

[Function]
This signal indicates that REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode after "All axes smoothing zero"
(command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.

Mode input Other mode Reference positon return mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In reference position return mode

(ZRN0)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET
A ASTOn X605 X685 X705 X785 X805 X885 X905
MODE

[Function]
This signal indicates that AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed over from other mode to IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE mode after "All axes smoothing zero"
(command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.

Mode input Other mode Automatic initial set mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In automatic initial set mode

(ASTO)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

119
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN MEMORY MODE MEMOn X608 X688 X708 X788 X808 X888 X908

[Function]
This signal indicates that MEMORY mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to MEMORY mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/
deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode Memory mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In memory mode
(MEMO)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN MDI MODE DOn X60B X68B X70B X78B X80B X88B X90B

[Function]
This signal indicates that MDI mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to MDI mode when "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/deceleration
delay is zero) is verified.

Mode input Other mode MDI mode Other mode

All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)

In MDI mode
(DO)

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

120
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A OPn X612 X692 X712 X792 X812 X892 X912
"RUN"

[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is in automatic operation caused by "Auto operation "start" command" signal.
[Operation]
This signal stays ON from when automatic operation starts with the "Auto operation "start" command" (STn) signal in the
memory or MDI mode, until the operation is reset.

Automatic operation
“start” command (ST)
In automatic operation
“run” (OP)
Reset conditions

(1) Reset conditions include the followings:

- "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) is input.
- "Emergency stop" signal or "Servo alarm" signal is input.
(2) Signals that indicates status of automatic operation are "In automatic operation "start""(STLn) and "In automatic
operation pause" (SPLn) besides "In atuo operation "run""(OPn).
The ON/OFF state of these signals in each state are shown below.

In automatic In automatic In automatic

operation"RUN" operation"START" operation"PAUSE
(OPn) (STLn) " (SPLn)
Reset condition 0 0 0
Auto operation stop
1 0 0
condition
Auto operation pause
1 0 1
condition
Auto operation start
1 1 0
condition

The outline of each condition is as follows:

- Reset condition
Automatic operation is stopped by one of reset conditions described above.
(All states not in automatic operation are this state.)
- Auto operation stop condition
Automatic operation is stopped after completion of one block.
(This state is entered during single block stop.)
- Auto operation pause condition
Automatic operation suspended in the course of execution of one block.
(This state is entered when the "Auto operation "pause" command" (*SPn) signal is OFF.)
- Auto operation start condition
Automatic operation is being executed.
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation "start" (STLn)
(2) In automatic operation "pause" (SPLn)

121
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A STLn X613 X693 X713 X793 X813 X893 X913
"START"

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the controller is started by automatic operation and motion command or M,S, T, B
processing is in execution.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON by the "Auto operation "start" command" (STn) signal in memory or MDI mode, and OFF when auto
operation pause, block stop or reset condition occurs.
The "In automatic operation "start"" (STLn) signal timing chart, including automatic operation "pause" and block stop, is
shown below.

Automatic operation "start"

command (ST)
In automatic operation "run"
(OP)
In automatic operation "start"
(STL)
In automatic operation "pause"
(SPL)

Automatic operation "pause" STL is OFF after the

command (*SP) block was completed.
Single block (SBK)

Reset conditions
(Reset & rewind (RRW))

(Note 1) For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn).
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation "run" (OPn)
(2) In automatic operation "pause" (SPLn)
(3) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

122
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A SPLn X614 X694 X714 X794 X814 X894 X914
"PAUSE"

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller operation has been stopped due to the "Auto operation "pause" command" signal,
etc., during motion command or miscellaneous function command.
[Operation]
The "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) signal turns ON with the following factors during automatic operation using
the memory or MDI mode.
(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal turns OFF.
(2) When mode changes to manual operation mode (jog, handle, incremental, reference position return mode,
etc.).
This signal turns ON even during machine lock or a miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command.
This signal turns OFF in the following cases.
(1) When "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal turns OFF from ON. However, this will be invalid if
the "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is not turned back ON or if the mode is
not automatic operation (memory, MDI).
(2) When reset conditions are input.
The timing chart for the "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) signal is shown below.

Invalid
Automatic operation
"start" command (ST)
In automatic operation
"start" (STL)
In automatic operation
"pause" (SPL)
Automatic operation
"pause" command (*SP)
Axis motion
G00X100 ··· G00X100 ···
Reset condition
(Reset & rewind (RRW))

(Note 1) Refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) for the rest conditions.
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation (OPn)
(2) In automatic operation "start" (STLn)
(3) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)
(4) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN "RESET" RSTn X615 X695 X715 X795 X815 X895 X915

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in reset condition.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON:
(1) For about 4 to 5 seconds after the power is turned ON.
(2) While "Reset and rewind" (RRWn) signal is ON, and for about 0.5 to 1 seconds after "Reset and rewind"
(RRWn) signal turns OFF.
(3) While "Emergency stop" signal is being input, and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Emergency stop" signal turns
OFF.
(4) During "Servo alarm", and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Servo alarm" is removed.

123
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED CXNn X616 X696 X716 X796 X816 X896 X916

[Function]
This signal is output during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON:
(1) "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8n) turns ON during MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode.
The signal turns OFF:
(1) Commanded feed has been completed.
(2) When "Reset & Rewind" signal is input during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.
[Timing chart]

Manual arbitrary feed strobe

(CXS8)

In manual arbitrary feed

(CXN)

Manual arbitrary feed

completion (CXFIN)

Rise of strobe signal is detected and When the specified feed is completed
"In manual arbitrary feed" signal successfully, the "In manual arbitrary
(CXN) turns ON. feed" signal turns OFF and the "Manual
arbitrary feed completion" signal turns
ON.

[Related signals]
(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8n)
(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXFINn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN REWIND RWDn X617 X697 X717 X797 X817 X897 X917

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is indexing the memory mode.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) signal is turned ON by the PLC in memory mode (with M02 or M30
command), and turns OFF when the controller completes indexing the program in execution.
(Note 1) Since indexing of program in memory mode ends immediately, it may not be verified by user PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

124
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MOTION COMMAND COMPLE-
A DENn X618 X698 X718 X798 X818 X898 X918
TION

[Function]
This signal notifies that the commanded motion has been completed by the controller.
In the machining program when the motion command and miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command are specified in
the same block, this signal can be used as a synchronization signal to determine whether miscellaneous function
command is executed simultaneously with or after the motion command.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The system is initialized after the power is turned ON.
(2) Execution of motion command is completed in automatic operation.
(3) Reset condition occurs.
(For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.)
The timing chart for the "Motion command completion" (DENn) signal is shown below.

Command program G00X100.; G00X200.M08;

Axis motion state

Detection not
Motion command possible
completion (DEN)

M function strobe (MF)

M code data

DEN process
M code decode (user process)

Machine side control

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

(Note 1) The "Motion command completion" signal is output even during machine lock.
(Note 2) Unless commanded motion is completed, this signal does not turn ON even when motion is suspended by
interlock function or "Auto operation "pause" command" signal.

125
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A ALL AXES IN-POSITION TIMPn X619 X699 X719 X799 X819 X899 X919

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the all axis components of the controller are in commanded positions.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) when there is no acceleration/deceleration delay in all control axes and servo errors (remaining pulses) in
positioning are within the specified range.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) Acceleration/deceleration motion is delayed in a control axis.
(2) Servo positioning error (remaining pulses) for a control axis exceeds the specified range.
(Note 1) The signal may turn ON even during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.
(Note 2) The condition where the servo errors must be in a specific range to turn ON the signal can be invalidated with
parameters. In this case, the signal will turn ON/OFF depending on whether there is any delay in the
acceleration/deceleration.

Smoothing circuit Servo amplifer

Accel./Decel. Positioning loop
Time constant Time constant
Motor

Accel./Decel. delay Motor servo control error

[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A ALL AXES SMOOTHING ZERO TSMZn X61A X69A X71A X79A X81A X89A X91A

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that there is no delay (caused by the acceleration/deceleration time constants) in any of the
controller control axis command system.
The PLC axis is not included in the control axis.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when the movement amount commanded in automatic or manual operation, including delay amount
of acceleration/deceleration time constant, is successfully output.
The signal turns OFF during execution of movement command, or if delay exists in acceleration/deceleration time
constant.

Feed axis selection (+J1)

Axis motion
(Position loop delay
Acceleration/deceleration
is not included.)
time constant
All axes smoothing zero

(Note 1) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock.

(Note 2) The signal may turn ON during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.
[Related signals]
(1) All axes in-position (TIMPn)
(2) In axis plus motion (MVPn) ... "All axes smoothing zero" signal turns ON when these signals are OFF.
(3) In axis minus motion (MVMn) ... "All axes smoothing zero" signal turns ON when these signals are OFF.

126
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXFINn X61C X69C X71C X79C X81C X89C X91C
COMPLETION

[Function]
This signal is output when motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) During motion in manual arbitrary feed mode.
(The signal stays OFF when motion is interrupted by a reset & rewind signal.)
(2) The power is turned ON.
[Timing chart]

Manual arbitrary feed strobe

(CXS8)
In manual arbitrary feed
(CXN)

Manual arbitrary feed completion

(CXFIN)

Start of strobe signal is detected

When manual arbitrary feed is completed
and "In manual arbitrary feed"
successfully, "Manual arbitrary feed
signal is output. "Manual arbitrary
completion" signal turns ON.
feed completion" signal turns OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8n)
(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXNn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED ETSEn X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D

[Function] [Operation]
This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.
This signal turns OFF when the "external search strobe" signal is turned OFF from the user PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) External search status
(2) External search device No.
(3) External search program No.
(4) External search sequence No.
(5) External search block No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

127
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN RAPID TRAVERSE RPNn X620 X6A0 X720 X7A0 X820 X8A0 X920

[Function]
This signal is output during rapid traverse motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI).
[Operation]
(1) The signal is ON when:
- Rapid traverse motion in automatic operation.
Fixed cycle positioning and reference position return (G28), etc., are included in the automatic operation rapid
traverse besides the motion command by the G00 command.
(2) The signal turns OFF when:
- The block in rapid traverse motion is completed during automatic operation.
- Rapid traverse motion is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal during
automatic operation.
- Rapid traverse motion axis is stopped by interlock during automatic operation.
- The ratio of the "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FVmn) becomes 0% during automatic rapid traverse
operation.
- A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic rapid traverse operation.
- Reset condition occurs.
(Note 1) "In rapid traverse" (RPNn) signal can turn ON and OFF even during machine lock.
(Note 2) The signal is not output in manual operation.
(Note 3) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.

The timing chart for "In rapid traverse" (RPNn) signal is shown below.

Command program G00X100.; M08 ;

Axis motion state

In rapid traverse
(RPN)

128
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN CUTTING FEED CUTn X621 X6A1 X721 X7A1 X821 X8A1 X921

[Function]
This signal informs that given motion command is executed for cutting feed in automatic operation (memory, MDI).
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) Motion command is given for cutting feed in automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The block in cutting feed in automatic operation is completed.
(2) Execution of cutting feed is suspended by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal.
(3) Execution of cutting feed is stopped by interlock during auto operation.
(4) The ratio of the cutting feedrate override becomes 0% during automatic cutting feed operation.
(5) A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic cutting feed operation.
(6) Reset condition occurs.

(Note 1) The signal (CUTn) can be turned ON and OFF during cutting feed even if machine interlock is applied.
(Note 2) Cutting feed commands in automatic operation include G01, G02, G03 and G31.
(Note 3) The signal is not output in manual operation.
(Note 4) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.

Cutting feed (G01)

Axis motion

In cutting feed (CUT)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN TAPPING TAPn X622 X6A2 X722 X7A2 X822 X8A2 X922

[Function]
This signal informs that commanded motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI) is executed in canned tapping cycle,
or tapping mode is selected for execution of commanded motion.
[Operation]
(1) The signal turns ON when:
- Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in canned tapping cycle.
- Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in tapping mode (G63).

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- Commanded motion is not being executed in fixed tapping cycle, nor in tapping mode.
The signal is reset by G80 or "01" group G command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G33) during canned tapping
cycle, and by G61, G62 and G64 during tapping mode.

Motion
G00 G84····; G80; G63; G01····; G61;
command
In tapping
(TAP)
(Note 1) This signal is output even during machine lock.

129
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN THREAD CUTTING THRDn X623 X6A3 X723 X7A3 X823 X8A3 X923

[Function]
This signal is output during execution of thread cutting command.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) Thread cutting command is given.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Motion command other than thread cutting command is given.
(2) Reset condition occurs during thread cutting.
(Note) Spindle override is invalid (100%) during thread cutting.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED SYNn X624 X6A4 X724 X7A4 X824 X8A4 X924

[Function]
This signal is output during execution of synchronous feed command.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- Synchronous feed command (G94) is given.

The signal turns OFF when:

- Asynchronous feed command (G95) is given.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN CONSTANT SURFACE
A CSSn X625 X6A5 X725 X7A5 X825 X8A5 X925
SPEED

[Function]
This signal informs that automatic operation is under constant circumferential (surface) speed control.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) Constant surface speed control mode (G96) is selected during automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Constant surface speed control off command (G97) is given.

Motion
G00 G96 G1 X30. S30; G0 X- ; G0Z-10.; G97 G01····
command
In constant surface
speed (CSS)

(Note 1) This signal (CSSn) is output even during machine lock.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN SKIP SKIPn X626 X6A6 X726 X7A6 X826 X8A6 X926

[Function]
This signal is output while skip command (G31) is being executed.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) Skip command (G31) is being executed with automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Block having a skip command is completed.

130
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN REFERENCE POSITION RE-
A ZRNNn X627 X6A7 X727 X7A7 X827 X8A7 X927
TURN

[Function]
This signal is output while reference position return command is being executed.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) G28 command is executed.
(2) G30 command is executed.
(3) Manual reference position return mode is selected.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) All cases other than above.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN INCH UNIT SELECTION INCHn X628 X6A8 X728 X7A8 X828 X8A8 X928

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller uses inch unit for data input.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when inch unit is selected.
During G20 (Inch unit command) modal, "In inch unit selection" signal turns ON.
This signal will not change with machine parameter "#1041 l_inch".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A F 1-DIGIT COMMANDED F1DNn X62A X6AA X72A X7AA X82A X8AA X92A

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller uses F1-digit commands (F1 to 5) to control operation.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) F1-digit command (F1 to 5) is selected for feedrate command currently being executed.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Block having a motion command specified with F1-digit code is completed.
(2) Operation is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal during execution of
motion command by F1-digit command.
(3) Operation is stopped by "Interlock" signal during execution of motion command by F1-digit command.
(4) Reset condition occurs.
(For details of reset conditions, refer to the description about "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.)
(Note 1) The machine parameter, base specification parameter "#1079 F1digt" must be validated and "#1185 to 89 F1-
digit feedrate" must be set to use the F1-digit command.
[Related signals]
(1) F1-digit No. code m (F1mn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B

[Function]
This signal is output during the tool life management.
[Operation]
"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is
ON.

131
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E

[Function]
<For tool life management I>
This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ Life data).
<For tool life management II>
This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.
[Operation]
<For L system tool life management I>
This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

<For L system tool life management II>

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data ≥ life data). (Same timing as the count up
of usage data.)
(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.
(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe
1 (TF1n)" signal.)
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the
signal will remain ON.)
(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)
[Caution]
If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.
(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NC ALARM 3 (Program error) AL3n X632 X6B2 X732 X7B2 X832 X8B2 X932

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in program error condition.
[Operation]
This type of alarm occurs during automatic operation in memory or MDI mode, mainly due to use of faulty machining
program, or program incompatible with the controller specifications.

Some typical examples of program error are shown below. For details, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup
Manual.
(1) Illegal address (address not covered by the specifications is used)
(2) Absence of F command
(3) Arc end point excessive deviation
(4) Return incomplete axis found (a motion command was issued to an axis that has not completed reference
position return)
(5) Program end error (M02 or M30 command is not inserted or reset & rewind process has not been performed)

132
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NC ALARM 4 (Operation error) AL4n X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933

[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in operation error condition.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON in case of operation alarm, and OFF when the alarm condition is removed.
Some typical examples of operation errors are shown below:
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.
(1) Hardware axis motion stroke end
(2) Software axis motion stroke end
(3) No operation mode set
(4) Cutting feedrate override set to "zero"
(5) Manual feedrate zero
(6) External interlock axis found
(7) Warning regarding absolute position detection

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A SEARCH & START ERROR SSEn X635 X6B5 X735 X7B5 X835 X8B5 X935

[Function]
This signal is output when the program No. to be searched with search & start is illegally designated, or search & start is
executed during restart search.
[Operation]
This signal is output when the No. of the program to be searched with search & start is illegal, or search & start is
executed during restart search. Automatic operation start will not be carried out if this signal is output. This signal will turn
OFF if the program No. is correctly input to execute search & start again, or when the reset signal is issued.
Refer to the "Search & start" (RSSTn) signal for details.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start (RSSTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A SEARCH & START SEARCH SSGn X636 X6B6 X736 X7B6 X836 X8B6 X936

[Function]
This signal is output when searching for a program is started with search & start.
[Operation]
Informs the PLC that the CNC is searching for the program with search & start.
Hold the "search & start" signal until the "search & start (search)" signal turns ON.
If the No. of the program to be searched is illegal or search & start is executed during restart search, the "search & start
(error)" (SSEn) signal will be output.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start program No.
(2) Search & start (error) (SSEn)
(3) Search & start (RSSTn)

133
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED ASLEn X637 X6B7 X737 X7B7 X837 X8B7 X937

[Function]
This signal is output if axis (No.) selected in handle mode or manual arbitrary feed mode is illegal.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) For handle mode
If specified "1st to 3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) is beyond the maximum number of
control axes.
(2) For manual arbitrary feed mode
If specified manual arbitrary feed axis No. is beyond the maximum number of control axes.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
X638 - X6B8 - X738 - X7B8 - X838 - X8B8 - X938 -
A F 1-DIGIT NO. CODE m F1mn
63A 6BA 73A 7BA 83A 8BA 93A

[Function]
F1-digit feed function No. is output.
[Operation]
When F1-digit feed command specified in memory or MDI operation is executed, No. of that F1-digit feed function is set
with a code.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
WAITING BETWEEN PART
A X63C X6BC X73C X7BC X83C X8BC X93C
SYSTEMS

[Function]
This signal informs that the waiting between part systems is being executed.
[Operation]
1 : This signal is output while the waiting between part systems is commanded in one part system to when the
corresponding waiting between system command is commanded in the other part system (during the waiting
function between part systems).
0 : When the waiting between part systems is not executed, this signal is not output.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
IN HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COM-
A VAMODOn X63E X6BE X73E X7BE X83E X8BE X93E
MAND MODE

[Function] [Operation]
This signal indicates that the hypothetical axis command mode has been selected.
[Related signals]
(1) Hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN HIGH-SPEED TAPPING HSST X63F X6BF X73F X7BF X83F X8BF X93F

[Function]
This signal indicates that the tapping in execution is high-sped synchronous tapping.

134
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-
A DM00n X640 X6C0 X740 X7C0 X840 X8C0 X940
PUT M00

[Function]
This signal informs that a special miscellaneous function (M00) is selected and commanded. When a special M function
is specified, "Normal miscellaneous function strobe" signal and "M code data" are output.
M code independent outputs include M01, M02 and M30.
[Operation]
When M00, M01, M02 or M30 is specified during auto operation (memory or MDI), or by manually set numerical
command, this signal turns ON. The signal turns OFF when M function finish signal, reset signal or reset & rewind signal
is given.

M code
Signal
Machining program independent Answer back to controller
abbreviation
output
M00 M00 DM00 FIN1n or FIN2n
M01 M01 DM01 FIN1n or FIN2n
M02 M02 DM02 Reset & rewind signal ("FIN" is not sent back)
M30 M30 DM30 Reset & rewind signal ("FIN" is not sent back)

If motion command and/or dwell is present in the same block, the signal turns ON after completion of dwell.
However, the signal is not output if M function finish signal turns ON before completion of motion command or dwell.
Generally, each M code is used for the following purpose:
M00 : Program stop
M01 : Optional stop
M02,M30 : Program end

<Operation on user PLC side>

(1)For M00
When M00 is input, single block (SBKn) signal is turned ON and M function finish signal (FIN1n or FIN2n) is
sent back.
(2) For M01
When M01 is input, optional stop switch setting (ON or OFF) is checked. If the setting is "ON", single block
signal is turned ON and M function finish signal is sent back, like the case with M00. If the setting is "OFF", M
function finish signal is sent back immediately.
(3) For M02, M30
When motion where M02 or M30 was input (spindle stop, coolant stop, etc.) is completed, reset & rewind
(RRWn) signal is sent back instead of M function finish signal. If M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n) signal is sent
back, "program error" may occur.
[Related signals]
(1) M code independent output M01 (DM01n)
(2) M code independent output M02 (DM02n)
(3) M code independent output M30 (DM30n)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-
A DM01n X641 X6C1 X741 X7C1 X841 X8C1 X941
PUT M01

[Function][Operation]
Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

135
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-
A DM02n X642 X6C2 X742 X7C2 X842 X8C2 X942
PUT M02

[Function][Operation]
Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-
A DM30n X643 X6C3 X743 X7C3 X843 X8C3 X943
PUT M30

[Function][Operation]
Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
X644 - X6C4 - X744 - X7C4 - X844 - X8C4 - X944 -
A M FUNCTION STROBE m MFmn
647 6C7 747 7C7 847 8C7 947

[Function]
This signal informs that the miscellaneous functions (M code) is commanded with the automatic operation (memory,
MDI) machining program or manual numerical command input.
The miscellaneous function is also called the M function, and is used to issue miscellaneous functions such as ON/OFF
of the cutting oil, and normal/reverse/stop of the spindle, etc., for the target machine.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) The 1st set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI mode).
(2) M function (M code) is specified by manual numerical command input.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.
(2) Reset condition occurs.
(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)
The relation of the machining program and M function strobe is shown below.

Machining program ..... M03 M08 M10 M18

(1st set) (2nd set) (3rd set) (4th set)
Corresponds to M function strobe 1 (MF1),
1st set of M code
Corresponds to M function strobe 2 (MF2),
2nd set of M code
Corresponds to M function strobe 3 (MF3),
3rd set of M code
Corresponds to M function strobe 4 (MF4),
4th set of M code

(Note 1) During operation with miscellaneous function lock (AFLn signal ON), the "M function strobe" (MFmn) will not
be output. However, this signal will be output when the M code is commanded independently (M00, M01, M02,
M30).
(Note 2) Since M98 (read of subprogram call), M99 (return from subprogram), etc. are handled within the controller, "M
function strobe" is not output.
(Note 3) The "M function strobe" will not be output when the M function is output if the "M function finish 1" (FIN1n)
signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal is ON.
(Note 4) Outputs from manual numerical command always correspond to the "M function strobe 1" (MF1n).

136
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

An example of the timing chart for the "M function strobe" (MF1n, MF2n, MF3n) signal is shown below.

Command program M22; M03M08; M10M25M05; G00··· ;

M code data 1 22 3 10

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M code data 2 8 25

M function strobe 2 (MF2)

M code data 3 5

M function strobe 3 (MF3)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Point The following points must be observed in the sequence process.

(a) When the M function is commanded, the MFmn and M code data m is output.
(b) MFmn is always the trigger in the sequence process to start the M function process.
(c) When the designated M function process is completed, the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) is returned to the controller.
(d) The controller waits for the rising of the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) and then turns MFmn OFF.
(e) MFmn OFF is confirmed in the sequence process and then the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) is turned OFF. This completes
the series of M function processes.

Handshaking with the controller and an accurate sequence process possible if

the Mfn conditions are inserted at the M function start and completed signals.

MFn
Relay meaning a designated
M decode circuit M1
M function
M1
Designated M function process

Relay meaning completion of a

M function finish confirmation M2
Designated M function

MFn M2
FIN1 M function finish 1

[Related signals]
(1) M code data 1 to 4
(2) M function strobe 2 (MF2n)
(3) M function strobe 3 (MF3n)
(4) M function strobe 4 (MF4n)
(5) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(6) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

137
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL NUMERICAL COM-
A MMSn X649 X6C9 X749 X7C9 X849 X8C9 X949
MAND

[Function]
This signal informs that M, S, T or B (2nd miscellaneous function) command is given with a specific display format
selected on the setting and display unit. With the signal, user PLC discriminates the command from that given in normal
automatic operation.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when M, S, T or B signal is specified with a specific display format in manual or automatic operation
(other than auto start). Like M function strobe signal, the signal turns OFF when M function finish 1 (FIN1n) or 2 (FIN2n)
signal turns ON, or in case of reset.
(Example)

M03 manual numerical command

Manual numerical command (MMS)

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

[Related signals]
(1) M function strobe (MFmn)
(2) S function strobe m (SFmn)
(3) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)
(4) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)
(5) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(6) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

138
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
TOOL CHANGE POSITION RE-
A TCPn X64B X6CB X74B X7CB X84B X8CB X94B
TURN COMPLETION

[Function]
This signal notifies that the axis commanded with the tool change position return command has completed return to the
tool change position.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when all axes commanded with the tool change position return command (G30.3) have moved to
the tool change position. This signal turns OFF when even one of the axes moved to the tool change position with the
command has moved from the tool change position.
Refer to the Programming Manual for details on the tool change return command.
[Timing chart]

Example: When G30.1 command, additional axis tool change position return is valid

Machining program G30.1; T02; G00 X-100. ···

Z axis tool change

position reached

X, Y axis tool change

position reached

Additional axis tool change

position reached

Tool change position return

completed (TCP)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NEW TOOL CHANGE TCRQn X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C

[Function]
This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in the group is selected in the tool life management II.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The tool selected by T command tool selection is unused (status 0).

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When T command is completed due to the M function finish signal (FIN1,FIN2).

139
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A T FUNCTION STROBE 1 TF1n X650 X6D0 X750 X7D0 X850 X8D0 X950

[Function]
This signal informs that the tool function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode) machining
program or by manual numerical command input.
The tool function is also called the T function, and is used to command the tool No. In the lathe specification controller,
the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose wear compensation) Nos. are also indicated.
The user PLC receives the T code data m with this signal.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The T function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode).
(2) T function (T) is specified by manual numerical command input.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.
(2) Reset condition occurs.
(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)
(Note 1) One T command can be issued in one block.
(Note 2) The "T function strobe 1" (TF1n) is not output during operation with the M function lock (AFLn signal ON).
(Note 3) In the case of manual numerical command input, outputs are in accordance with "T function strobe 1" (TF1n).

An example of the timing chart for the "T function strobe 1" (TF1n) signal is shown below.

Command program T01; G00X100.;

T code data 1

T function strobe 1 (TF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

[Related signals]
(1) T code data 1
(2) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(3) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

140
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A 2ND M FUNCTION STROBE 1 BF1n X654 X6D4 X754 X7D4 X854 X8D4 X954

[Function]
This signal informs that 2nd M function is selected in automatic operation (memory, MDI) machining program or by
manual numerical command input.
The 2nd M function is also called the B function.
With the signal (BF1n), user PLC receives 2nd M function data m.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The 2nd M function (B code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI).
(2) 2nd M function (B code) is issued by manual numerical command input.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal is turned ON.
(2) Reset condition occurs.
(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

(Note 1) One 2nd M function can be issued in one block at a time.

(Note 2) The "2nd M function strobe 1" (BF1n) is not output during operation with M function lock (AFLn signal ON).
(Note 3) In the case of manual numerical command input, outputs are in accordance with "2nd M function strobe 1"
(BF1n).
(Note 4) Address for 2nd M function can be selected from addresses A, B and C by using machine parameter. Set so
that the address is different from the axis address.
[Related signals]
(1) 2nd M function data 1
(2) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(3) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

141
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
X658 - X6D8 - X758 - X7D8X7 X858 - X8D8 - X958 -
A S FUNCTION STROBE m SFmn
65E 6DE 75E DE 85E 8DE 95E

[Function]
This signal informs that S (spindle) function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode) machining
program or by manual numerical command input.
The spindle function is also called the S function, and is used to command the spindle speed.
With the signal (SF1 to 4), user PLC receives S code data m respectively.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) S function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode).
(2) S function is specified by manual numerical command input.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.
(2) Reset condition occurs.
(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

(Note 1) The S function strobe (SNGEn) is not output during operation with M function lock (AFLn signal ON).
(Note 2) When the S function is commanded, the "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn) signal and "S command no
gear selected" (SNGEn) signal are output in addition to this signal (SFmn). Refer to the sections of each signal
for details.
An example of the timing chart for the "S function strobe" (SF1n) signal is shown below.

Command program S1000; G00X100.;

S code data 1000

S function strobe 1 (SF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

[Related signals]
(1) S code data 1 to 4
(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)
(3) S command no gear selected (SNGEn)
(4) Spindle gear selection code m (GImn)
(5) Spindle gear shift completion (GFINn)
(6) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(7) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

142
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
X660 - X6E0 - X760 - X7E0 - X860 - X8E0 - X960 -
667 6E7 767 7E7 867 8E7 967
A POSITION SWITCH m PSWmn
X670 - X6F0 - X770 - X7F0 - X870 - X8F0 - X970 -
677 6F7 777 7F7 877 8F7 977

[Function]
This signal notifies that the machine position is within the area set by the parameters.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the control axis machine position reaches the range set by the parameters, and turns OFF
when the range is left. The axis name and range are set in parameters #7501 to #7573.
The validity of this signal differs in the following manner depending on the absolute position detection or incremental
detection.

<For absolute position detection system>

This signal is valid when the power is turned ON after zero point initialization is completed.
<For incremental position detection system>
This signal is not validated until the first reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON.
(PSW1n to PSW16n will all remain OFF until this signal is validated.)

Example of signal output

Machine position

PSW1: ON
dog1 dog2

PSW2: OFF
dog1 dog2

PSW3: OFF
dog1 dog2

PSW4: OFF
dog2 dog1

PSW5: OFF
dog2 dog1

The setting range of the position switch uses the basic machine coordinate system as a reference.
The dog1 and dog2 setting values can be set to any size, and the area between the smaller setting and the larger setting
will be used as the signal output range.
A slight delay will occur in the output signal fluctuation due to the actual machine position. This maximum delay time
(tmax), which depends on the area check method parameters #7504 to #7634, is as follows. Also consider the delay by
the scan time as it depends on scan time for the ladder.
When parameter is set to "0" When parameter is set to 1
(commanded machine position) (detector FB position)
tmax = 0.004 - TP [s] tmax = 0.004 [s]
1
TP : Position loop time constant（ [s]）
PGN
PGN : Position loop gain

143
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
WAITING FOR DATA TO BE
A DLWAITn X66C X6EC X76C X7EC X86C X8EC X96C
DOWNLOADED

[Function]
This signal informs that no reading data is in the buffer memory so it is idle and waiting for receiving data during FPT
operation.
If the download is completed, it does not enter into idle mode and an program error (P36) will occur.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
- It is idle and waiting for data to be received as the buffer memory for FTP operation is empty during the download
from FTP server.
The signal turns OFF when:
- The waiting for data to be received state, as described above, is released.
- When download is completed. (If the download is completed while in the waiting for data to be received state, an
program error (P36) will occur.)
[Related signals]
(1) Download completed (DLDFIN)
(2) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE TRVEn X66D X6ED X76D X7ED X86D X8ED X96D

[Function]
This signal informs that tap retract is possible, and is output if operation is stopped during tap cycle execution.
The "Tap retract" (TRVn) signal will be valid when this signal (TRVEn) is ON.
[Operation]
(1) This signal turns ON when tap cycle is stopped in the cutting feed area (between c-d-e in the drawing) due to the
following causes:
- Emergency stop.
- Reset stop.
- Power OFF (only in absolute position detection system).

(2) This signal turns OFF in the following cases:

- Tap retract is executed and completed.
- Tap axis is moved manually or with manual mode.

Tap cycle command

a b f Initial point

c e R point

Tap feed (spindle (Spindle

forward run) reverse run)

d
Tap base

[Related signals]
(1) Tap retract (TRVn)

144
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
NO. OF WORK MACHINING
A PCNTn X66E X6EE X76E X7EE X86E X8EE X96E
OVER

[Function]
This signal is output when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum No. of work machining.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work value (WRK LIMIT) set in
the [Process parameter] screen.
(Note 1) This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work value
regardless of the count up by the controller or user PLC.
(Note 2) This signal is not output when "0" is set for the maximum work value.
[Related signals]
(1) No. of work machining (current value)
(2) No. of work machining (max. value)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
POWER SHUTOFF MOVEMENT
A X66F X6EF X76F X7EF X86F X8EF X96F
OVER

[Function]
This signal notifies that the amount moved while the power is OFF has exceeded to the tolerable amount when using the
absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the difference of the machine position at power OFF and at power ON exceeds the tolerable
value ([ABS. POSI PARAM] "#2051 check" setting value) when using the absolute position detection system.
(Note) The movement amount during power OFF depends on the "PON POS (power ON position)" and "POF POS
(power OFF position)" on the [ABS SERVO MONITOR (absolute position monitor)] screen.

145
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
S COMMAND GEAR NO. ILLE-
A SIGEn X984 X9B4 X9E4 XA14 XA44 XA74 XAA4
GAL

[Function]
This signal is output if specified gear No. is illegal.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if gear No. specified by user is beyond the maximum system gear No.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
S COMMAND MAX./MIN. COM-
A SOVEn X985 X9B5 X9E5 XA15 XA45 XA75 XAA5
MAND VALUE OVER

[Function]
This signal is output when S-analog command value is clamped to the maximum or minimum value.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if S-analog command value is larger than spindle maximum speed parameter (Smaxn) value, or
smaller than spindle minimum speed parameter (Smin) value.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
S COMMAND NO GEAR SE-
A SNGEn X986 X9B6 X9E6 XA16 XA46 XA76 XAA6
LECTED

[Function]
This signal is output if gear is not present for S function (S code) issued by automatic operation.
[Operation]
This signal will turn ON when the S function (S code) is issued during automatic operation, and the S code does not
match any gear set in the spindle maximum speed parameters.

This signal (SNGEn) is output simultaneously with "spindle function strobe m" (SFmn) signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle function strobe m (SFmn)
(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE SPEED UPPER LIMIT
A SUPPn X98B X9BB X9EB XA1B XA4B XA7B XAAB
OVER

[Function]
This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor has exceeded the maximum speed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback exceeds the maximum speed regardless of the commanded
speed.

Maximum speed
(parameter setting value)
Spindle speed
(Feedback)

Spindle speed upper limit over

(SUPP)

146
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE SPEED LOWER LIMIT
A SLOWn X98C X9BC X9EC XA1C XA4C XA7C XAAC
OVER

[Function]
This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor is less than the minimum speed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback is less than the minimum speed regardless of the commanded
speed.

Spindle speed
(Feedback)
Minimum speed
Spindle speed lower limit over (parameter setting value)
(SLOW)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT COM- X98D - X9BD - X9ED - XA1D - XA4D - XA7D - XAAD -
A GRmn
MAND m 98E 9BE 9EE A1E A4E A7E AAE

[Function]
This signal informs which gear stage in the spindle applies to the S command (S code) issued in the automatic operation
(memory, MDI) machining program.
For machines that have gear stage shift, the gear will be shifted on the machine side when this signal is received.
[Operation]
When the S command (S code) is issued in automatic operation, the gear stage for the commanded S code is output
with a 2-bit (GR1n, GR2n) code from the preset parameters (spindle max. speed).

The relation of the spindle max. speed parameter (Smax1 to Smax4) and the "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn)
signal output is shown below.

Spindlegear shift
Gearstage Max. spindlespeed
GR2n GR1n
1 Smax1 0 0 ← Range "S0 to S (Smax1)"
2 Smax2 0 1 ← Range "S (Smax1)+1 to S (Smax2)"
3 Smax3 1 0 ← Range "S (Smax2)+1 to S (Smax3)"
4 Smax4 1 1 ← When range over "S (Smax3)+1" is specified.

This signal (GR1n, GR2n) is output simultaneously with the "Spindle function strobe m" (SFmn).

(Note 1) If the commanded S code does not match any of the gear stages, the "S command no gear selected" (SNGEn)
signal will be output separately from this signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle function strobe m (SFmn)
(2) S command no gear selected (SNGEn)

147
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A CURRENT DETECTION CDOn X991 X9C1 X9F1 XA21 XA51 XA81 XAB1

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
drive motor current is about to reach the permissible maximum current. The signal can be used to prevent stabbing of
cutter into workpiece, for example.
[Operation]
The signal (CDOn) turns ON if motor current goes up to a level (110% output) close to the permissible maximum current
(120%).

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPEED DETECTION VROn X992 X9C2 X9F2 XA22 XA52 XA82 XAB2

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
motor speed is dropped below the speed specified by parameter.
[Operation]
The signal (VRO) turns ON when motor speed (motor rotation speed) drops below the speed specified by the spindle
parameter "#13028 Speed detection set value (SP028:SDTS)". (Related parameter "#13029 Speed detection reset width
(SP029:SDTR)")

Speed command level

(SP020)
Spindle motor speed

Speed detection (VR0)

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A IN SPINDLE ALARM FLOn X993 X9C3 X9F3 XA23 XA53 XA83 XAB3

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
failure occurs in spindle controller.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if alarm which occurs in the spindle controller is detected.

To cancel alarm, reset the controller (by reset & rewind), turn the controller power OFF or turn the spindle controller
power supply OFF. Note that reset method depends on type of alarm.
Typical examples of alarm are listed below. For details of alarm contents and cancel procedure, refer to the Spindle
Controller specifications and maintenance manual.
(1) Overcurrent
(2) Breaker trip
(3) Motor overheat

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

148
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A ZERO SPEED ZSOn X994 X9C4 X9F4 XA24 XA54 XA84 XAB4

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
motor speed has dropped below the set speed level.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the actual spindle motor speed drops below the speed specified by the spindle parameter
"#13027 Motor zero speed (SP027:ZSP)".

Motor Zero speed

Spindle motor speed

Zero speed (ZS0)

(Note 1) The signal is output, no matter whether direction of rotation is "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) or "Spindle
reverse run start" (SRIn).
(Note 2) Minimum output pulse width of the signal is about 200ms.
(Note 3) Speed at which the signal is output can be set within range from 1r/min to 1000r/min with the spindle
parameters.
(Note 4) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

149
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED USOn X995 X9C5 X9F5 XA25 XA55 XA85 XAB5

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
actual spindle motor speed reaches the range designated with the parameter "#3105 sut".
This signal is used for the S command complete conditions or control axis interlock during automatic operation.
[Operation]

Up-to-speed range
Spindle motor speed

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

When the operation is changed from spindle forward run to spindle reverse run, the spindle motor starts to decelerate,
and the spindle up-to-speed signal turns OFF. When the motor enters the detection range again, the spindle up-to-speed
signal turns ON again.

Spindle forward run start

(SRN)

Spindle reverse run start

(SRI) Up-to-speed range

Spindle motor
speed
Up-to-speed range

Spindle up-to-speed
(USO)

(Note 1) This signal is not output unless the "spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal or "spindle reverse run start"
(SRIn) signal is ON.
(Note 2) This signal is not output when operating with a command that is not a speed command such as synchronous
tap.
(Note 3) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serially connected with the spindle controller.

150
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE IN-POSITION ORAOn X996 X9C6 X9F6 XA26 XA56 XA86 XAB6

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle is positioned in the set range in accordance with spindle orientation command.
[Operation]
When the spindle positioning in the set range completes, this signal will turn ON. The spindle orientation is started by
"Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC).
(1) The in-position range is set with the spindle parameter "#13024 SP024 (INP) ".
(2) The signal is turned OFF when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) is turned OFF.

Spindle orientation command (ORC)

Spindle motor speed

Spindle in-position (ORAO)

(Note 1) When spindle orientation command is given, orientation starts regardless of the "Spindle forward run start
(SRNn)" or "Spindle reverse run start (SRIn)".
(Note 2) This signal is not available when an analog connection is used.
(Note 3) While the spindle is in position, it is under servo lock condition. However, if the spindle is rotated by external
force, the signal (ORAO) may be turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A IN L COIL SELECTION LCSAn X997 X9C7 X9F7 XA27 XA57 XA87 XAB7

[Function]
This signal indicates that the low-speed coil is being selected in the spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSLn) in the 2-step coil
changeover specification.

(1) 2-step coil changeover

L coil selection In L coil selection

Selected coil
(LRSLn) (LCSAn)
High-speed (H) OFF OFF
Low-speed (L) ON ON

[Related signals]
(1) L coil selection (LRSLn)

151
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE READY-ON SMAn X998 X9C8 X9F8 XA28 XA58 XA88 XAB8

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle can operate.
[Operation]
This signal (SMAn) turns ON when the spindle controller is ready for operation. The signal turns OFF (ready off) in the
following conditions.
(1) A spindle alarm is generated.
(2) "Ready-on" signal (internal signal) from controller is OFF.

Controller ready-on
(Note1)

Spindle ready-on (SMA)

Spindle alarm

Machine ready-on
(External interface signal) Max. 1 s Max. 1 s Max. 1 s

(Note 1) The ready on signal is output from the controller to the spindle controller.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE SERVO-ON SSAn X999 X9C9 X9F9 XA29 XA59 XA89 XAB9

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle is under the position control state (synchronous tap control, C-axis control).
[Operation]
The "Spindle servo-on" (SSAn) signal turns ON when the spindle is ready (SMAn signal is ON), the servo-on command
has been transferred from the controller to the spindle controller, and the spindle controller is in the servo-on state.
Note that this signal turns OFF during rotation with "spindle forward run start"(SRNn)/"spindle reverse run start"(SRIn)
(except during spindle synchronization) or spindle orientation.
This signal (SSAn) turns OFF when the servo-on command is canceled.

Spindle servo-on command

Note 1)

Spindle servo-on (SSA)

(Note 1) The spindle servo-on command is output from the controller to the spindle controller, and is mainly output
during synchronous tap control.
(Note 2) While the "Spindle servo-on" signal is ON, all input signals for "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn), "Spindle
reverse run start" (SRIn), and "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) are ignored.
(Note 3) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

152
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A IN SPINDLE FORWARD RUN SSRNn X99B X9CB X9FB XA2B XA5B XA8B XABB

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle is rotating in the forward direction.
[Operation]
The "Spindle forward run" (SSRNn) signal turns ON when the spindle motor is rotating in the forward direction. This will
also turn ON if the spindle motor is rotating in the forward direction during orientation or synchronous tap.

Spindle motor speed

In spindle forward run

(SSRN)

(Note 1) The "Spindle forward run" (SSRNn) signal turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the stop state with
servo rigidity during orientation or synchronous tap.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A IN SPINDLE REVERSE RUN SSRIn X99C X9CC X9FC XA2C XA5C XA8C XABC

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle motor is rotating in the reverse direction.
[Operation]
The "Spindle reverse run" (SSRIn) signal turns ON when the spindle motor rotates in the reverse direction. It also turns
ON even during orientation or synchronous tap if the spindle motor rotates in the reverse.

Spindle motor speed

In spindle reverse run

(SSRI)

(Note 1) The "Spindle reverse run" (SSRIn) signal turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the stop state with
servo rigidity during orientation or synchronous tap.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

153
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A Z-PHASE PASSED SZPHn X99D X9CD X9FD XA2D XA5D XA8D XABD

[Function]
This signal is output from the spindle controller (spindle drive) for MELDAS AC spindle drive high-speed serial
connection specification, and informs that the encoder's Z phase has been passed when changing the spindle from
speed control to positioning control during C axis control.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The Z phase is passed during C axis control.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The "Spindle servo-ON" signal turns OFF.
(2) The "Spindle ready-ON" signal turns OFF.

Spindle ready-ON

Spindle servo-ON

Z phase

Z-phase passed

(Note) This signal is valid only for a system having a control unit high-speed serially connected with the spindle
controller.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A POSITION LOOP IN-POSITION SIMPn X99E X9CE X9FE XA2E XA5E XA8E XABE

[Function]
If the spindle controller is connected with high-speed serial connection, this signal will inform that the spindle is in the in-
position state during synchronous tap.
[Operation]
The signal will turn ON when:
(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) is within the in-position range during synchronous tap control
(servo on).
The signal will turn OFF when:
(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) has exceeded the in-position range during synchronous tap
control (servo on)
(2) Synchronous tap control is not commanded. ((A) in the following drawing)

Forward run
Motor speed
Reverse run

Servo-on command

Position loop
In-position
(SIMPn) (A) (A)

154
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT STLQn X99F X9CF X9FF XA2F XA5F XA8F XABF

[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that
the spindle is in position under C-axis control or synchronous tap control.
[Operation]
The "STLQ" signal turns ON when:
(1) Any of "Spindle torque limit" 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n) signals is ON.
The "STLQ" signal turns OFF when:
(1) All of "Spindle torque limit" 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n) signals are OFF.
(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle torque limit 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
IN SPINDLE MULTI-STEP
A SMSOEn X9A9 X9D9 XA09 XA39 XA69 XA99 XAC9
SPEED MONITOR

[Function]
This signal indicates that the spindle is in multi-step speed monitor mode.
When the spindle speed exceeds the monitoring speed in multi-step speed monitor mode, a safety observation error will
occur.
[Operation]
This signal will be turned ON after "Spindle multi-step speed monitor request" (SMSORn) is turned ON, and the spindle
speed becomes less than monitoring speed, and then both NC and drive unit start executing the speed monitor function.
When "Spindle multi-step speed request" (SMSORn) signal is turned OFF, this signal will be also turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)
(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)
(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONI- SMSO- X9AA - X9DA - XA0A - XA3A - XA6A - XA9A - XACA -
A
TOR MODE OUTPUT m MOmn 9AB 9DB A0B A3B A6B A9B ACB

[Function]
This signal notifies which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-step
speed monitoring.

Spindle multi-step speed monitor

mode output Speed monitor mode being executed
SMSOMO2n SMSOMO1n
0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4

[Operation]
When the monitor speed of drive unit is switched to the safety monitor speed of the mode which is designated by
"Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input" (SMSOMImn), this signal is also switched to the designated mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)
(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)
(3) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)

155
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G10208
- KEY IN
R8

[Function]
Operator's key operation can be monitored on the PLC side.
[Operation]
While operator is using the keyboard, the corresponding data is set to "KEY IN".

Code Code Code Code

Key symbol Key symbol Key symbol Key symbol
(HEX) (HEX) (HEX) (HEX)

MONITOR 80 0B(F8) - (+) 2D(2B) O (A) 4F(41)

↑( )

TOOL/PARAM 81 0A(F7) . (,) 2E(2C) N (B) 4E(42)

↓( )

EDIT/MDI 83 ←( ) 08(F5) EOB(］) 3B(5D) G (C) 47(43)

DIAGN
85 →( ) 09(F6) = (#) 3D(23) X (U) 58(55)
IN/OUT
DELETE
SFG 86 7F(8C) / (*) 2F(2A) Y (V) 59(56)
(INS)
F0 87 C.B.(CAN) 8E(18) Z (W) 5A(57)
SHIFT 88 0 (SP) 30(20) F (E) 46(45)
INPUT(CALC) 0D(F4) 1 31 D (L) 44(4C)
2 32 H (!) 48(21)
3 33 P (I) 50(49)
Window key
Previous page 90 89(F9) 4 34 Q (J) 51(4A)
(?HELP)
Activ Wind
Next page 9A 8A(8B) 5 35 R (K) 52(4B)
(CTRL)
Menu 1 91 6 36 M ( () 4D(28)
Menu 2 92 7 37 S () ) 53(29)
Menu 3 93 8 38 Ｔ(〔) 54(5B)
Menu 4 94 9 ($) 39(24)
Menu 5 95

(Note) The key signals and codes shown in parentheses are the shift IN side key signals.
[Related signals]
KEY OUT

156
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPEED MONITOR DOOR OPEN G10209

- SMODEN
POSSIBLE R9

[Function]
This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter
"#2118 S_DSl" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter "#3071 S_DSISp". Then the signal
notifies that the selected door can be opened.
This signal is not output when "#21162 mulstepssc multi-step speed monitor value" is set to "1".
The door No. corresponds to the following bits.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… Door 1
Door 2
…
Door 16

[Operation]
When both CNC and drive unit start the speed monitor function with the speed monitor mode turned ON and speed
monitor parameter check completed, the speed monitor door open signal will turn ON.
When the speed monitor mode is OFF, the speed monitor door open possible signal is OFF as well.

Speed monitor mode (SOMD)

Parameter check In check

Speed monitor door open possible (SMDOEN)

Mechanical door lock Door lock Door lock canceled Door lock

Door status Door close Door open Door close

[Caution]
When using the speed monitor function, create user PLC that enables door open when the speed monitor door open
possible signal is ON.
[Related signals]
Speed monitor mode (SMOD)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G10210 - G10212
- HANDLE PULSE COUNTER
R10 - R12

[Function]
It confirms the handle pulse counter value.
[Operation]
1st to 3rd handle pulse counter values will output to R10 to R12.

157
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G10216 - G10219
- CRT DISPLAY INFORMATION
R16 - R19

[Function]
This signal notifies which screen is currently being displayed by the controller.
[Operation]
The screen information changes in the following cases. Note that the information will not change when a screen that has
already been displayed is re-displayed.
(1) When a function select key is pressed.
(2) When a menu key is pressed.
(3) When a page key is pressed.
The relation of each key operated and the screen information is as follows.

File register Operated key Screen information

MONITOR 00
cmdtyp is 1, 2 0C
TOOL-PARAM
cmdtyp is 3, 4 12
G10217/R17 bit F to 8 Function No. EDIT-MDI 0D
DIAGN-IN/OUT 10
SFG 08
F0 09

00~13 Menu changeover

(0~19: decimal)

00 01 02 03 04

G10217/R17 bit 7 to 0 Menu No.

05 06 07 08 09

0A 0B 0C 0D 0E

0F 10 11 12 13

G10216/R16 01~n
Page No.
... bit F to 8 Change by next page key or previous page key
G10216/R16 Not set.
---
... bit 7 to 0 The data is not set.

(Note)File registers G10218/R18 and G10219/R19 are invalid.

158
 -
tact
Con-

[Function]

[Operation]

File

(R)
register
Signal name

F
Servo drive unit emergency stop output

E
Spindle drive unit emergency stop output
EMERGENCY STOP CAUSE

Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal

File area error
Signal ab-
breviation

D C B
Built-in PLC program execution error
A

Q and Qr bus alarm arisen emergency stop

9

Power down handling error emergency stop

8

Contactor shutoff test

R21

Emergency stop in the safety circuit

G10221

Built-in PLC program S/W emergency stop output is “1”

The bit of this signal that is set to "0" is the emergency stop cause.
The causes of emergency stop are shown with bit correspondence.
Common for part systems

Power supply external emergency stop

4

Control unit EMG connector Emergency stop state

3

Network error emergency stop

2

APLC emergency stop cause state

The cause of the emergency stop state is shown as follows with bit correspondence.
If there are multiple causes, the multiple bits corresponding to each cause are output.

Target MELSEC stop state

0

Built-in PLC stop state

Bit
C70 PLC Interface Manual

159
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 G10224 - G10225

-
(Controller -> PLC) R24 - R25

[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variables #1100 to #1131 or #1132 with the user macro system, the user PLC output
to the file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.
The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal System variable Points Interface output signal
#1100 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 0 #1116 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 0
#1101 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 1 #1117 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 1
#1102 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 2 #1118 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 2
#1103 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 3 #1119 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 3
#1104 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 4 #1120 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 4
#1105 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 5 #1121 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 5
#1106 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 6 #1122 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 6
#1107 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 7 #1123 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 7
#1108 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 8 #1124 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 8
#1109 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 9 #1125 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 9
#1110 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 10 #1126 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 10
#1111 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 11 #1127 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 11
#1112 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 12 #1128 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 12
#1113 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 13 #1129 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 13
#1114 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 14 #1130 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 14
#1115 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 15 #1131 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal

#1132 32 Register G10224/R24,G10225/R25
This correspondence table shows the example for file registers
#1133 32 Register G10226/R26,G10227/R27
G10224/R24 and G10225/R25.
#1134 32 Register G10228/R28,G10229/R29
#1135 32 Register G10230/R30,G10231/R31

File registers G10224/R24 and G10225/R25 correspond to system variables #1100 to #1131, and #1132 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"
each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.
Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

User macro output User macro output

Bit selection parameter
#1132 to #1135 #1032 to #1035
#6454/bit0
(Controller -> PLC) (PLC -> Controller)
0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331
1: Part system independent G10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

160
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 G10226 - G10227

-
(Controller -> PLC) R26 - R27

[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variable #1133 with the user macro system, the user PLC output to the file register Rn
and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.
(Example)

User macro program Sequence program

ACT
#1133 = 1000
DMOV G10226(R26) D100

1000 is input in D100 and 101 when the ACT signal turns ON.

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 G10228 - G10229

-
(Controller -> PLC) R28 - R29

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 G10230 - G10231

-
(Controller -> PLC) R30 - R31

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

161
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

CNC SOFTWARE VERSION G10232 - G10235

-
CODE R32 - R35

[Function]
This indicates the version of the software for controller control.
[Operation]
The version of the software for controller is displayed.

[S/W MODULE TREE] ALARM/DIAGN 8.1/2

MP BND - 377W000 - A0 SV1 BND-

OFFM

The file registers G10202/R32 to G10235/R35 are set to the following data.

(Example) BND - 1007W000-A0A

(1) (2) (3)

Item File register Type Example

(1) Model function No. G10235/R35 Binary 1007=3EFH

(2) Serial No. G10234/R34 Binary 000=0000H

Bits F to 8 of G10233/R33 ASCII code A=41H

(3) Version Bits 7 to 0 of G10233/R33 ASCII code 0=30H

Bits F to 8 of G10232/R32 ASCII code (Note1) A=41H

- - Bits 7 to 0 of G10232/R32 Always 20H (Note2)

(Note 1) If the version is a 2-digit No., bits F to 8 of G10232/R32 are set to "20H".
(Note 2) Bits 7 to 0 on the G10232/R32 are always "20H".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G10240
- BATTERY DROP CAUSE
R40

[Function]
This notifies a drop cause in the battery voltage.
[Operation]
The voltage of the data storage battery in the controller:
(1)This signal is "0" when the voltage is higher than the battery warning detection level.
(Note) If invalidating the battery alarm/warning detection (#6449 bit4=1), this signal is always "0".
(2)This signal is "1" when the voltage is higher than the battery alarm detection level and is below the battery warning
detection level.
(3)This signal is "3" when the voltage is below the battery alarm detection level.
(4)This signal is "2" when error occurs in the battery detection circuit.
[Related signals]
(1) Battery warning (BATWR)
(2) Battery alarm (BATAL)

162
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

TEMPERATURE WARNING G10241

-
CAUSE R41

[Function]
If the internal temperature of the control unit rises above 90°C, the overheat will be detected, and the following states will
occur.
(1) The "Temperature rise" (SM16) is turned ON.
(2) The "Temperature warning cause" is turned ON.
(3) The alarm message (Z53) is displayed on the screen.
If the machine is in automatic operation, the operation will be continued, but restarting will not be possible after resetting
or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible after block stop or feed hold.)
[Operation]
The "Temperature warning cause" is turned ON when:
- The internal temperature of the control unit rises above 90°C.
The "Temperature warning cause" is turned OFF when:
- The internal temperature of control unit drops below 90°C.

The "Temperature warning cause" is a bit unit signal. Independent bits are assigned to the control unit and setting and
display unit for CNC exclusive use respectively.

File F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ← Bit
register
(G10241/R41) Control unit

<Example of operation pattern>

Control unit 90͠ Alarm occurrence

internal temperature temperature

SM16

G10241/R41 Bit0

[Related signals]
(1) Temperature rise (SM16)

163
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10248

-
PHASE ERROR 1 R48

[Function]
- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)
This signal informs the phase error (value including the phase error memorized with the spindle synchronization
phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation
request" signal (SSPHM) is ON. The phase error is output by 1° increment.
The data has no meaning in cases other than above.
[Operation]
- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)
When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON,
and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant, the phase error between the
basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10249

-
PHASE ERROR 2 R49

[Function]
- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)
This signal informs the phase error (value excluding the phase error memorized with the spindle synchronization
phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation
request" (SSPHM) signal is ON. The phase error is output by 1° increment.
The data has no meaning in cases other than above.
[Operation]
- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)
When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON,
and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant, the phase error between the
basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10255

-
PHASE ERROR OUTPUT R55

[Function]
The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output in the spindle synchronous function.
[Operation]
The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output.
Unit: 360°/4096
(Note 1) If the phase can not be calculated because, for instance, the basic spindle or synchronous spindle has not
passed the Z-phase, "-1" will be output.
(Note 2) This data is output only during the phase shift calculation or the spindle phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)
(2) Phase offset request (SSPHF)
(3) Spindle synchronization phase offset data

164
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10256

-
PHASE ERROR MONITOR R56

[Function]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.
[Operation]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit value)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit value)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10257
- PHASE ERROR MONITOR
(lower limit) R57

[Function]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.
[Operation]
The lower limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit value)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10258
- PHASE ERROR MONITOR
(upper limit) R58

[Function]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.
[Operation]
The upper limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit value)

165
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G10259

-
PHASE OFFSET DATA R59

[Function]
With the spindle phase shift amount calculation function, the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is
obtained and memorized by turning signal ON at executing the spindle synchronization. The synchronous spindle can be
rotated with the handle during the spindle phase shift calculation, so the phase relation between two spindles can be
adjusted by seeing.
If the "Spindle phase synchronous control" (SPPHS) signal is input while the "Phase offset request" signal (SSPHF) is
ON, the phase error will be aligned based on the position shifted by the memorized phase shift amount.
Such operation makes the phase alignment easy when clamping an irregular material over.
[Operation]
The phase error memorized by the phase shift calculation is output.
Unit: 360°/4096
(Note 1) This data is output only during the spindle synchronous control.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)
(2) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)
(3) Phase offset request (SSPHF)
(4) Spindle synchronization phase error output

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G10260 - G10269
- APLC INPUT DATA n
R60 - R69

[Function] [Operation]
This signal is an interface for sending data from APLC C language module to PLC device.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
ZR DEVICE NO. AT OCCUR- G10280 - G10281
RENCE OF NC EXCLUSIVE IN-
- PCVERR
STRUCTION (DDWR/DDRD) R80 - R81
ERROR

[Function]
This signal outputs the No. of ZR device in which an error has occurred during read or write of common variables.
[Operation]
CNC sets the No. of ZR device in which an error has occurred first at the execution of the DDWR/DDRD instruction.
If no error has occurred, "0" is set.
This device value is kept until read/write of common variables is executed with the next DDWR/DDRD instruction.

166
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
COMMON VARIABLE NO. AT G10282
- OCCURRENCE OF ZR DEVICE ZRECVNO
ERROR R82

[Function]
This signal outputs the part system No. and common variable No. in which an error has occurred when the common
variable is read with ZR device from GOT.
[Operation]
The thousand's digit represents the part system where the error has occurred, and the hundred's to one's digits indicate
the common variable No.

(Example)

Value Contents
520 The common variable #520 is an error.
2150 The common variable #150 of 2nd part system is an error.

If multiple errors occur when the common variable is read, one of the occurring error codes will be set. It is uncertain
which error cause of common variable will be output.
The value is kept until the error cause is removed.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

ERROR CAUSE FOR ZR DE- G10283

- ZRECVFC
VICE ERROR OCCURRENCE R83

[Function]
This signal outputs the error cause of the common variable No. in which an error has occurred when the common
variable is read with ZR device from GOT.
[Operation]
The error codes are set by CNC. The error causes are as follows.

Error code Error cause

0x0001 The specified common variable is empty
0x0002 The common variable value is illegal (infinity, etc.)
0x0004 The common variable value is out of the range from -214748.3648 to 214748.3647.
The specified common variable is outside of the allowed setting range (subject to option
0x0008
settings).

If multiple errors occur when the common variable is read, one of the occurring error codes will be set. It is uncertain
which error code of common variable will be output.
The value is kept until the error cause is removed.

167
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE- G10290 - G10291

-
OVER COMPLETION R90 - R91

[Function]
This signal notices that data changeover is completed.
[Operation]
Turns ON when data changeover is completed.Turns OFF when Data changeover request signal is turned OFF.
<R90>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Data changeover completion for Window 1

・・・
Data changeover completion for Window 2
・・・
Data changeover completion for Window 10

<R91>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Automatic setting window data change request

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MOD- G12470 - G12475

- SU_NC m
ULE m R2150 - R2155

[Function
This signal informs the CNC side dual signal input status of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.
These devices are the copies of the data X200 to X25F, made by CNC’s internal processing.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module input 00

CNC side dual signal module input 01
…
CNC side dual signal module input 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module input 10

CNC side dual signal module input 11
…
CNC side dual signal module input 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

168
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALER- G12480 - G12485

- SU_NER m
ROR MODULE m R2160 - R2165

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status of "CNC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module. The signal turned
ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module error 00

CNC side dual signal module error 01
…
CNC side dual signal module error 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module error 10

CNC side dual signal module error 11
…
CNC side dual signal module error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT- G12490 - G12492

- SU_NO m
PUT MODULE m R2170 - R2172

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module 1 to 3.
[Operation
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.
These signals are the copies of the output signals Y200 to Y25F, made by CNC’s internal processing.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output 0A

… … CNC side dual signal module output 0B
…
CNC side dual signal module output 0F

CNC side dual signal module output 1A

CNC side dual signal module output 1B
…
CNC side dual signal module output 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

169
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT- SU_NOER G12494 - G12496

-
PUT ERROR MODULE m m R2174 - R2176

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status between CNC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal
module.
The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output error 0A

… … CNC side dual signal module output error 0B
…
CNC side dual signal module output error 0F

CNC side dual signal module output error 1A

CNC side dual signal module output error 1B
…
CNC side dual signal module output error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G12499

- SU_NST2
PARE STATUS 2 R2179

[Function]
This signal informs CNC side dual signal compare status to the PLC.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Output off check error

Device test error detection 2

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.
bit1: Device test error detection 2
An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.
[Caution]
This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual
signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

170
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE G12500
- ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMA- SU_NLT
TION R2180

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.
[Operation]
To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check
each other.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G12501

- SU_NST
PARE STATUS R2181

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison status.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side emergency stop status

CNC side dual signal module input compare error
CNC side counterpart’s signal compare stop detected
CNC side dual signal module data error detected
CNC side dual signal module output FB compare error
CNC side compare process start
CNC side compare process stopping
PLC side compare process stopping
Servo ready ON
Dual Signal Module compare ladder check normal

[Caution]
This device is for monitorting only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
G12502
- CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV
R2182

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal head G device No.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

171
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G12503
- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE SU_NDLY
TIME R2183

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD G12504 - G12506

- SU_NDV m
DEVICE NO. m R2184 - R2186

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1” to “#21145 SSU_Dev3”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MOD- G12508

- SU_NNUM
ULES ON CNC SIDE R2188

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the number of dual signal modules.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

172
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G11000 G11010 G11020 G11030 G11040 G11050 G11060 G11070
R800 R810 R820 R830 R840 R850 R860 R870
THERMAL EXPANSION COM-
- 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
PENSATION AMOUNT
G11080 G11090 G11100 G11110 G11120 G11130 G11140 G11150
R880 R890 R900 R910 R920 R930 R940 R950

[Function]
During ball screw thermal expansion compensation, the compensation amount calculated based on the "thermal
expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" is set in this register by
the CNC.
[Operation]
The "thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and the "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" is set as
a set for each axis in the R register.
The current compensation amount is set by the CNC into the "thermal expansion compensate amount".
The thermal expansion compensation is invalid for the axis if the "thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and
"thermal expansion max. compensation amount" are set to 0.
These R registers are cleared to zero when the power is turned ON.

Thermal expansion offset Thermal expansion max. Thermal expansion

compensation amount compensation amount compensation amount
(PLC R CNC) (PLC R CNC) (CNC R PLC)
Unit: Minimum command unit/2 Unit: Minimum command unit/2 Unit: Minimum command unit/2
1st axis G+1002/R3102 G+1003/R3103 G11000/R800
2nd axis G+1012/R3112 G+1013/R3113 G11010/R810
3rd axis G+1022/R3122 G+1023/R3123 G11020/R820
4th axis G+1032/R3132 G+1033/R3133 G11030/R830
5th axis G+1042/R3142 G+1043/R3143 G11040/R840
6th axis G+1052/R3152 G+1053/R3153 G11050/R850
7th axis G+1062/R3162 G+1063/R3163 G11060/R860
8th axis G+1072/R3172 G+1073/R3173 G11070/R870
9th axis G+1082/R3182 G+1083/R3183 G11080/R880
10th axis G+1092/R3192 G+1093/R3193 G11090/R890
11th axis G+1102/R3202 G+1103/R3203 G11100/R900
12th axis G+1112/R3212 G+1113/R3213 G11110/R910
13th axis G+1122/R3222 G+1123/R3223 G11120/R920
14th axis G+1132/R3232 G+1133/R3233 G11130/R930
15th axis G+1142/R3242 G+1143/R3243 G11140/R940
16th axis G+1152/R3252 G+1153/R3253 G11150/R950

A unit half of the minimum command unit is the setting unit.

If the minimum command unit is 1μm and 100 is set, for example, the compensation amount will be 50μm.

173
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Setting example

(1) When the compensation basic point is in the (2) When the compensation basic point is in the plus
minus area, and the plus area is to be area, and the minus area is to be compensated.
compensated.
Thermal expansion Thermal expansion
compensation amount (μm) compensation amount (μm)

70 70
Thermal Thermal
expansion max. expansion
compensation max. Thermal
amount compen- expansion offset
sation 20 compensation
- 100.000 120.000 amount amount

Machine
- 100.000 120.000
Thermal Machine
position (mm)
expansion offset - 20 position (mm)
compensation
amount
Data Setting value Data Setting value
bscmp- -100.000 bscmp- 120.000
bscmp+ 120.000 bscmp+ -100.000
Thermal expansion offset Thermal expansion offset
-40 40
compensation amount compensation amount
Thermal expansion offset Thermal expansion offset
180 100
compensation amount compensation amount

[Caution]
The compensation amount calculated with this compensation function is added to the machine error compensation
amount and output to the servo system.
Make sure that the ball screw thermal expansion compensation amount + machine error compensation amount does not
exceed -32768 to +32767.
[Related signals]
Thermal expansion offset compensation amount
Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

174
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G11002- G11012- G11022- G11032- G11042- G11052- G11062- G11072-
G11003 G11013 G11023 G11033 G11043 G11053 G11063 G11073
R802- R812- R822- R832- R842- R852- R862- R872-
R803 R813 R823 R833 R843 R853 R863 R873
- MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS MPOSn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
G11082- G11092- G11102- G11112- G11122- G11132- G11142- G11152-
G11083 G11093 G11103 G11113 G11123 G11133 G11143 G11153
R882- R892- R902- R912- R922- R932- R942- R952-
R883 R893 R903 R913 R923 R933 R943 R953

[Function]
This signal outputs the position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC setting unit.
[Operation]
The base point of basic machine coordinate system is 0. Backlash compensation and machine error compensation are
not included.
The unit is the input setting unit parameter "#1003 iunit".
The range of output value is shown below.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Linear axis -2147483648 to 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Rotation axis 0 to 359999 0 to 3599999

(Example 1) For a linear axis, the following values are output.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value where machine position is
2000 20000
at 1mm (metric system)
Output value where machine position is
20000 200000
at 1inch (inch system)

(Example 2) When diameter specification axis parameter "#1019 dia" is set to "1", the following values are output.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value where machine position is
1000 10000
at 1mm (metric system)
Output value where machine position is
10000 100000
at 1inch (inch system)

(Example 3) For a rotation axis, the following values are output.

The output values are common for inch/metric system

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value at machine position 1° 1000 10000

175
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G11004- G11014- G11024- G11034- G11044- G11054- G11064- G11074-
G11005 G11015 G11025 G11035 G11045 G11055 G11065 G11075
R804- R814- R824- R834- R844- R854- R864- R874-
R805 R815 R825 R835 R845 R855 R865 R875
FEEDBACK MACHINE POSI-
- FBMPOSn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
TION n-TH AXIS
G11084- G11094- G11104- G11114- G11124- G11134- G11144- G11154-
G11085 G11095 G11105 G11115 G11125 G11135 G11145 G11155
R884- R894- R904- R914- R924- R934- R944- R954-
R885 R895 R905 R915 R925 R935 R945 R955

[Function]
This signal outputs feedback position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC setting unit.
[Operation]
The base point of basic machine coordinate system is 0. Backlash compensation and machine error compensation are
not included.
The unit is the input setting unit parameter "#1003 iunit".
The range of output value is shown below.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Linear axis -2147483648 to 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Rotation axis 0 to 359999 0 to 3599999

(Example 1) For a linear axis, the following values are output.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value where feedback machine position
2000 20000
is at 1mm (metric system)
Output value where feedback machine position
20000 200000
is at 1inch (inch system)

(Example 2) When diameter specification axis parameter "#1019 dia" is set to "1", the following values are output.

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value where feedback machine position
1000 10000
is at 1mm (metric system)
Output value where feedback machine position
10000 100000
is at 1inch (inch system)

(Example 3) For a rotation axis, the following values are output.

The output values are common for inch/metric system

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1μm) C (0.1μm)

Output value at machine position 1° 1000 10000

176
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10300 G10400 G10500 G10600 G10700 G10800 G10900
- EXTERNAL SEARCHSTATUS
R100 R200 R300 R400 R500 R600 R700

[Function][Operation]
The status at the end of the external search is output.
The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the CNC CPU based on the external
search is shown below.

External
searchstatus Details Remedy
value
0 Normally finished. ────
Wait for other function’s operation search to finish
1 Operation search is being carried out.
before searching.
2 Search was attempted during theprogram operation. Stop the program before searching.
Confirm the presence of the device, and that the
3 A non-existed or disabled device was designated.
device is within the specifications.
4 The program file is not designated. Designate the program No. or sequence No.
The block with the designated program No.,
5 sequence No. or block No. was not found. Reset the restart search and search again.
Or search was attempted during restart search.
6 No external search specifications Check the specifications.
The operation search did not yet finished after three Data may be being input or output. Restart the
7
seconds since the external search had started. (Note) external search after finishing the operation.

(Note) Timeout monitoring is executed only when "1" is set to "#21102 add02/bit1".

[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search device No.
(3) External search program No.
(4) External search sequence No.
(5) External search block No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

177
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10304 - G10404 - G10504 - G10604 - G10704 - G10804 - G10904 -
G10305 G10405 G10505 G10605 G10705 G10805 G10905
- M CODE DATA 1
R104 - R204 - R304 - R404 - R504 - R604 - R704 -
R105 R205 R305 R405 R505 R605 R705

[Function]
When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller
is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
M code data are updated when:
(1) "M**" is issued in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
(2) "M**" in fixed cycle causes motion during execution of the fixed cycle.
(3) "M**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
M code data is also updated when an "M code independent output" command is issued even during M function lock. The
data is kept unchanged after "M function finish" (FIN1n, FIN2n) signal is sent back.
"Reset" or "Emergency stop" does not clear the data.

[Caution]
(1) Commands can be defined up to four in a block with parameters. When plural M functions are placed in one block,
the signals are output in the order at programming.

M03 M08 M80 M82;

Output to M code data 1
Output to M code data 2
Output to M code data 3
Output to M code data 4

A program error will not occur even if more than the maximum numbers of commands are issued. The latter
commands will be valid.(Example) When five M commands are issued though only four M commands can be used.

M 11 M 12 M 13 M 14 M 15 ；

The last four M commands are valid.

The last four M commands are valid.

(2) M98 (read of subprogram), M99 (return to main program), etc. are processed within the CNC, and not output as M
code data.

[Related signals]
(1) M function strobe m (MFmn)
(2) M code data 2, 3, 4

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10306 - G10406 - G10506 - G10606 - G10706 - G10806 - G10906 -
G10307 G10407 G10507 G10607 G10707 G10807 G10907
- M CODE DATA 2
R106 - R206 - R306 - R406 - R506 - R606 - R706 -
R107 R207 R307 R407 R507 R607 R707

[Function]
When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller
is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
M code data 2 are updated when:
(1) Two or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

178
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10308 - G10408 - G10508 - G10608 - G10708 - G10808 - G10908 -
G10309 G10409 G10509 G10609 G10709 G10809 G10909
- M CODE DATA 3
R108 - R208 - R308 - R408 - R508 - R608 - R708 -
R109 R209 R309 R409 R509 R609 R709

[Function]
When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller
is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
M code data 3 are updated when:
(1) Three or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10310 - G10410 - G10510 - G10610 - G10710 - G10810 - G10910 -
G10311 G10411 G10511 G10611 G10711 G10811 G10911
- M CODE DATA 4
R110 - R210 - R310 - R410 - R510 - R610 - R710 -
R111 R211 R311 R411 R511 R611 R711

[Function]
When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller
is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
M code data 4 are updated when:
(1) Four or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

179
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10312 - G10412 - G10512 - G10612 - G10712 - G10812 - G10912 -
G10319 G10419 G10519 G10619 G10719 G10819 G10919
- S CODE DATA 1 to 4
R112 - R212 - R312 - R412 - R512 - R612 - R712 -
R119 R219 R319 R419 R519 R619 R719

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10364 - G10464 - G10564 - G10664 - G10764 - G10864 - G10964 -
G10369 G10469 G10569 G10669 G10769 G10869 G10969
- S CODE DATA 5 to 7
R164 - R264 - R364 - R464 - R564 - R664 - R764 -
R169 R269 R369 R469 R569 R669 R769

[Function]
When S function is specified, value following address "S" can be identified. The S code data output from the controller is
binary code with a sign.
[Operation]
"S code data" are updated when:
(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
(2) "S**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
Data remain unchanged when M function finish (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency stop"
does not cause clear to data.

The S code data is assigned in the following manner. (Refer to the table above for the 2nd and further part systems.)

Signal name Register (1st part system)

S code data 1 G10312,10313/R112,113
S code data 2 G10314,10315/R114,115
S code data 3 G10316,10317/R116,117
S code data 4 G10318,10319/R118,119
S code data 5 G10364,10365/R164,165
S code data 6 G10366,10367/R166,167
S code data 7 G10368,10369/R168,169

[Caution]
(1) Seven S codes can be placed in one block. If the number of S codes defined exceeds the specified number, the S
codes defined last is valid.
(2) If two or more S codes for one spindle are issued in a block, the S code defined last will be valid.
[Related signals]
(1) S function strobe m (SFmn)

180
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10320 - G10420 - G10520 - G10620 - G10720 - G10820 - G10920 -
G10321 G10421 G10521 G10621 G10721 G10821 G10921
- T CODE DATA 1
R120 - R220 - R320 - R420 - R520 - R620 - R720 -
R121 R221 R321 R421 R521 R621 R721

[Function]
When T function is specified, value following address "T" can be identified. The T code data output from the controller is
a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
T code data 1 are updated when:
(1) "T**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
(2)"T**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
Data remain unchanged even when "M function finish" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency
stop" does not clear this data.
[Caution]
(1) Up to one T code can be commanded in one block.
The latter code will be valid if more than two codes are commanded in one block.
[M system]

T05 T15 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

[L system]

T0505 T1515 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

[Related signals]
(1) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)

181
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10328 - G10428 - G10528 - G10628 - G10728 - G10828 - G10928 -
G10329 G10429 G10529 G10629 G10729 G10829 G10929
- 2ND M FUNCTION DATA 1
R128 - R228 - R328 - R428 - R528 - R628 - R728 -
R129 R229 R329 R429 R529 R629 R729

[Function]
When 2nd M function is specified, value following address "B" can be identified.
The 2nd M function data output from the controller is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
(Note 1) Select an address for the 2nd M function address from the setup parameters basic specification parameter
"#1170 M2name" A, B or C address that is not being used for "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax".
[Operation]
2ND M FUNCTION DATA 1 are updated when:
(1) "B (A, C)**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).
(2)"B (A, C)**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
Data remain unchanged even when "M function finish" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency
stop" does not clear this data.
[Caution]
(1) Only one 2nd M function can be commanded in one block. The latter code will be valid if more than two codes are
commanded in one block.

B05 B15 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

[Related signals]
(1) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10336 G10436 G10536 G10636 G10736 G10836 G10936
- TOOL NO.
R136 R236 R336 R436 R536 R636 R736

[Function]
Set the compensation No. of the tool data for setting the measurement result during manual tool length measurement II.
This is set in BCD code.
[Operation]
When the sensor is touched by the tool, compensation amount will be written into the tool data of the compensation No.
automatically specified.
This tool No. is interpreted as the tool compensation No. by the CNC.
[Related signals]
(1) Wear compensation No.
(2) Tool length measurement 2 (TLMSn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10338 G10438 G10538 G10638 G10738 G10838 G10938
- GROUP IN LIFE MANAGEMENT
R138 R238 R338 R438 R538 R638 R738

[Function] [Operation]
This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.

182
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10340 - G10440 - G10540 - G10640 - G10740 - G10840 - G10940 -
NO. OF WORK MACHINING G10341 G10441 G10541 G10641 G10741 G10841 G10941
-
(CURRENT VALUE) R140 - R240 - R340 - R440 - R540 - R640 - R740 -
R141 R241 R341 R441 R541 R641 R741

[Function]
The No. of work machining current value and maximum value are notified by the controller to the PLC.
[Operation]
If data is set in the No. of work machining (WRK COUNT M) and the maximum No. of work machined (WRK LIMIT) of the
[Process parameters], the current value or maximum value of the No. of work machining is output.

<For 1st part system>

G10340/R140 No. of work machining Low-order side

G10341/R141 Current value High-order side

G10346/R146 No. of work machining Low-order side

G10347/R147 Maximum value High-order side

(Note 1) If data is not set in "WRK COUNT M" and "WRK LIMIT" on the [Process Parameter] screen, data will not be
output to the file register.
(Note 2) If the No. of work machining matches or exceeds maximum value, the No. of work machining over (PCNTn)
signal turns ON.

183
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

<Counting of No. of work machining using user PLC>

(1) Set "0" in "WRK COUNT M" on the [Process Parameter] screen. With this setting, the controller side will not
count up.
(2) Add "1" to "No. of work machining (current value)" with the user PLC.
(3) The controller will display "No. of work machining (current value)" as the No. of work machining on the
[COORDINATE] screen. Even in this case, if the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the work
maximum value, the No. of work machining over (PCNTn) signal will turn ON.
(Note) This area allows CNC CPU to output the data to PLC CPU, while it does not allow PLC CPU to write the
data in with the shared device. To write the No. of work machining current value and maximum value in
this area, use the PLC window as follows.

<Writing the No. of work machining current value>

M1000
[DMOV D1000 U3E0\G12260] Set the No of work machining
current value
[MOV K0 U3E0\G12268] Section No.0
[MOV K140 U3E0\G12270] Sub-section No.140 = R140
[MOV K1 U3E0\G12272] Write method
[MOV K1 U3E0\G12273] The number of the write data
[MOV K2 U3E0\G12275]
Start one-shot write

<Writing the No. of work machining maximum value>

M0
[DMOV K1000 U3E0\G12260] Set the No of work machin
maximum value
[MOV K0 U3E0\G12268] Section No.0
[MOV K146 U3E0\G12270] Sub-section No.146 = R146
[MOV K1 U3E0\G12272] Write method
[MOV K1 U3E0\G12273] The number of the write data
[MOV K2 U3E0\G12275]
Start one-shot write

[Related signals]
(1) No. of work machining (maximum value)

184
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10342 - G10442 - G10542 - G10642 - G10742 - G10842 - G10942 -
NEAR REFERENCE POSITION G10343 G10443 G10543 G10643 G10743 G10843 G10943
-
(PER REFERENCE POSITION) R142 - R242 - R342 - R442 - R542 - R642 - R742 -
R143 R243 R343 R443 R543 R643 R743

[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is near the reference position when using the absolute position detection
system.
This signal is output for the 1st reference position to the 4th reference position.
Near the 1st reference position, the time for outputting the signal is shorter than the "near reference position" (NRFn)
signal (the ON/OFF timing accuracy during axis movement is improved).
[Operation]
(1) Using the nth reference position as a reference, when the control axis is in the range set with the parameters, this
signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the axis is not within the range.
(2) The near reference position signal is output with four bits for each axis.
(a) R register and corresponding axes
G10342/R142

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis output value

2nd axis output value
3rd axis output value
4th axis output value

G10343/R143

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

5th axis output value

6th axis output value
7th axis output value
8th axis output value

(b) Output value and near nth reference position

Near nth reference position

High-order bit Low-order bit
0 0 0 1 Near 1st reference position
0 0 1 0 Near 2nd reference position
0 1 0 0 Near 3rd reference position
1 0 0 0 Near 4th reference position

(Note 1) The near reference position signal devices include X devices (NRFn) which output signal only for the 1st
reference position, and the R registers (G10342/R142,G10343/R143) which outputs a signal for each
reference position (1st reference position to 4th reference position).
(Note 2) The near reference position signal output width is set with the absolute position parameters "#2057 nrefp" and
"#2058 nrefn". The near reference position signal output width is the same width for the 1st reference position
to the 4th reference position.
(Note 3) Near the 1st reference position, the signals are output to the conventional X device (NRFn) and the R registers
(G10342/R142,G10343/R143) which output signals to each reference position.
[Related signals]
(1) Near reference position nth axis (NRFn)

185
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10344 - G10444 - G10544 - G10644 - G10744 - G10844 - G10944 -
G10345 G10445 G10545 G10645 G10745 G10845 G10945
- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA
R144 - R244 - R344 - R444 - R544 - R644 - R744 -
R145 R245 R345 R445 R545 R645 R745

[Function] [Operation]
This signal output usage data of tools currently being used with the tool life management II. (When multiple
compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10346- G10446- G10546- G10646- G10746- G10846- G10946-
NO. OF WORK MACHINING G10347 G10447 G10547 G10647 G10747 G10847 G10947
-
(MAXIMUM VALUE) R146- R246- R346- R446- R546- R646- R746-
R147 R247 R347 R447 R547 R647 R747

[Function]
The No. of work machining maximum value are notified by the controller to the PLC.
[Operation]
Refer to the No. of work machining current value.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10356 - G10456 - G10556 - G10656 - G10756 - G10856 - G10956 -
G10358 G10458 G10558 G10658 G10758 G10858 G10958
- ERROR CODE OUTPUT
R156 - R256 - R356 - R456 - R556 - R656 - R756 -
R158 R258 R358 R458 R558 R658 R758

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10360 - G10460 - G10560 - G10660 - G10760 - G10860 - G10960 -
ERROR CODE OUTPUT EX- G10363 G10463 G10563 G10663 G10763 G10863 G10963
-
TENSION R160 - R260 - R360 - R460 - R560 - R660 - R760 -
R163 R263 R363 R463 R563 R663 R763

[Function]
With this function, the CNC alarms and errors which are normally output to CNC screen are partially coded and output to
PLC I/F device. Thus, the contents of alarms and errors can be confirmed without CNC screen.
[Operation]
The following output will be made when an alarm occurs.
The message displayed in CNC screen is not converted.
(Example) When servo alarm S03 occurs
(Axis name is added for the messages such as some of M01, S01 to S52, and Z70 to Z73.
The following 48 bits are used as the output PLC I/F devices.)

S03 SERVO WARNING 0052 XZ

Axis name
Alarm No.
Alarm message

Alarm type

The output is as shown above on the CNC screen. However, this can be coded and output to PLC I/F device as shown
below using this function.
Alarm type : Converted into a 2-digit numeral code. (Refer to the code table.)
Alarm message : Not coded, and not output.
Alarm No. : The No. is output as HEX.
Axis name : Error occurrence axis is expressed as a bit, and the bit of servo and spindle are output separately.
The head digit of the alarm without axis name will be "0".

186
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

The output to PLC I/F device is as follows.

[ERROR CODE OUTPUT]

G10358/R158 G10358/R158 G10357/R157 G10357/R157 G10356/R156 G10356/R156

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PLC axis name Alarm type Alarm No. Servo axis name Spindle name

bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
As for the servo axis name and spindle
2nd axis 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 name, the bit corresponding to the No. of
3rd axis 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 axis in which the alarm occurs is turned
on.
4th axis 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
The max servo axis Nos. in the 1st part
5th axis 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 system are 8, and the max spindle Nos. in
the 1st part system are 7. The spindle
6th axis 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
alarm is output to the 1st part system.
7th axis 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 The PLC axis name is output to the 1st
8th axis 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 part system.

[ERROR CODE OUTPUT EXTENSION]

G10361/R161 G10361/R161 G10360/R160 G10360/R160
(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Alarm No.

G10363/R163 G10363/R163 G10362/R162 G10362/R162

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Alarm axis name

If the alarm No. and alarm axis name are numeric type, numeric values are output as they are. If the alarm axis name is
the axis data type, it will not be output.
Ex. Y20 Safety observation error 1234 54321

G10361/R161 G10361/R161 G10360/R160 G10360/R160

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

R161,0 = “00001234” 1 2 3 4

G10363/R163 G10363/R163 G10362/R162 G10362/R162

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

R163,2 = “00054321” 5 4 3 2 1

187
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Code table
The alarm type is coded as the contents of following code table.
Alarm code list

Alarm Details Alarm type Axis name Priority

Multi-CPU error A01 MULTI CPU ERROR A1 Not added 1
Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL 55
Z71 DETECTOR ERROR 56
Z72 COMPARE ERROR 57
System alarm Some are added 2
Z73 ABS. WARNING 58
Z89 APLC ERROR 58
Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 5C
S01 SERVO ALARM: PR 31
S02 INIT PARAM ERR 32
Servo/spindle alarm Added 3
S03 SERVO ALARM: NR 33
S04 SERVO ALARM: AR 36
Y02 System alarm 41
Y03 Amp. Unequipped 42
Y06 mcp_no setting error 49
Y07 Too many axes connected 43
MCP alarm Some are added 4
Y09 Too many axisno connected 4A
Y11 Node detect error 4B
Y14 VIR.AX AMP EQU. 4F
Y20 Safety observation error 4C
L10 DN Initialization error 1 B1
L11 DN Initialization error 2 B2
Network related alarm Not added 5
L12 DN Link error B3
L13 DN Message error B4
Emergency stop EMG EMERGENC 01 Not added 6
P ○○○ (Program error) 71
Program error Not added 7
P990 PREPRO S/W ERR 61
S51 PARAMETER ERROR 34
Servo/spindle warning Added 8
S52 SERVO WARNING 35
Y51 Parameter error 45
MCP warning Y21 Safety observation warning 4E 9
Y90 No spindle signal 47
Z30 ETHERNET ERROR 51
Z52 BATTERY FAULT 52
Z53 TEMP_OVER 53
System warning Not added 10
Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT 54
Z59 TIME CONSTANT 59
Z20 Power ON again 5A
M01 OPERATION ERROR 11 Some are added
Operation error M00 AUX OPER. ALM. 81 Not added 11
M01 AUX OPER. ALM. 82 Added
T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST 21
T02 FEED HOLD 22
Stop code Not added 12
T03 BLOCK STOP 23
T10 FIN WAIT 26
Illegal PLC U10 Built-in PLC alarm 91 Not added 13

188
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

The message at emergency stop is displayed in CNC screen shown below.

(Example) EMG EMERGENCY STOP PLC
When the emergency stop occurs, the message is coded and an alarm No. is output.

Emergency stop code list

Error message Details Alarm No.

EXIN External emergency stop 0000
PLC Built-in PLC emergency stop 0001
SRV Servo drive unit not ready 0002
STOP PLC not running 0003
SPIN Spindle drive unit not ready 0004
DATA File area error 0005
PARA Door open II fixed device setting illegal 0006

Emergency stop STP2 Built-in PLC not running 0007

(EMG) LAD Built-in PLC illegal code 0010
MULT Q and Qr bus alarm 0013
IPWD Illegal power down 0014
CVIN PS external emergency stop 0015
MCT Contactor shutoff test 0016
SUIN Emergency stop in the safety circuit 0017
LINK Network unit error 0018
APLC Emergency stop is set from APLC function 0019

(Note 1)If the MCP alarm "Y02 SYSTEM ALARM" occurs, part of the data will not be coded. Confirm the data on the
display unit.
(Example) Y02 SYSTEM ALARM 0051 0104
In this case, only "Y02" and "0051" are coded and output to the PLC I/F device.
(Note 2)If an alarm without an alarm No. occurs, "0" will be set as the alarm No. and output to the PLC I/F device.
(Note 3)If an alarm that does not have an axis name occurs, "0" will be set as the axis name and output to the PLC I/F
device.
(Note 4)Alarms not shown in the code table are not output to the PLC I/F device.
(Note 5)If multiple alarms occur simultaneously, only the alarm with the highest order of priority in the code table will be
output.
(Note 6)The "OOO" section of the program error "POOO" is output to the alarm No. area.
(Example) "P34 G-CODE ERROR 0 0"
The code output becomes 71003400, and the output to PLC I/F devices is as follows.

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Alarm type Alarm No. Axis name

189
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10770
G10370 - G10470 - G10570 - G10670 - G10870 - G10970 -
-
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 G10371 G10471 G10571 G10671 G10871 G10971
- G10771
(Controller -> PLC)
R170 - R270 - R370 - R470 - R570 - R670 - R770 -
R171 R271 R371 R471 R571 R671 R771

[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC o user macro program.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variables #1100 to #1131 or #1132 with the user macro system, the user PLC output
to the file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.
The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal Systemvariable Points Interface output signal
#1100 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 0 #1116 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 0
#1101 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 1 #1117 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 1
#1102 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 2 #1118 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 2
#1103 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 3 #1119 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 3
#1104 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 4 #1120 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 4
#1105 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 5 #1121 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 5
#1106 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 6 #1122 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 6
#1107 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 7 #1123 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 7
#1108 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 8 #1124 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 8
#1109 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 9 #1125 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 9
#1110 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 10 #1126 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 10
#1111 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 11 #1127 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 11
#1112 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 12 #1128 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 12
#1113 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 13 #1129 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 13
#1114 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 14 #1130 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 14
#1115 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 15 #1131 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal

#1132 32 Register G10370/R170,G10371/R171
This correspondence table shows the example for file
#1133 32 Register G10372/R172,G10373/R173
registers G10370/R170 and G10371/R171.
#1134 32 Register G10374/R174,G10375/R175
#1135 32 Register G10376/R176,G10377/R177

File registers G10370/R170 and G10371/R171 correspond to system variables #1100 to #1131, and #1132 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"
each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.
Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

User macro output User macro output

Bit selection parameter
#1132 to #1135 #1032 to #1035
#6454/bit0
(Controller -> PLC) (PLC -> Controller)
0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331
1: Part system independent G10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

190
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10372 - G10472 - G10572 - G10672 - G10772 - G10872 - G10972 -
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 G10373 G10473 G10573 G10673 G10773 G10873 G10973
-
(Controller -> PLC) R172 - R272 - R372 - R472 - R572 - R672 - R772 -
R173 R273 R373 R473 R573 R673 R773

[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variable #1133 with the user macro system, the user PLC output to the file register Rn
and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.

(Example)

User macro program PLC program

ACT
#1133 = 1000
DMOV G10372(R172) D100

1000 is input in D100 and 101 when the ACT signal turns ON.

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10374 - G10474 - G10574 - G10674 - G10774 - G10874 - G10974 -
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 G10375 G10475 G10575 G10675 G10775 G10875 G10975
-
(Controller -> PLC) R174 - R274 - R374 - R474 - R574 - R674 - R774 -
R175 R275 R375 R475 R575 R675 R775

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10376 - G10476 - G10576 - G10676 - G10776 - G10876 - G10976 -
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 G10377 G10477 G10577 G10677 G10777 G10877 G10977
-
(Controller -> PLC) R176 - R276 - R376 - R476 - R576 - R676 - R776 -
R177 R277 R377 R477 R577 R677 R777

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

191
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10380 G10480 G10580 G10680 G10780 G10880 G10980
- CHOPPING STATUS
R180 R280 R380 R480 R580 R680 R780

[Function] [Operation]
The state of chopping operation is output as each bit information.

BIT Name Description

It turns ON during the chopping operation regardless of either with chopping by the external
0 In chopping start
signal or by the command from the machining program.
It turns ON at the start of chopping command (G81.1 or chopping signal ON).
1 In chopping mode After issuing the chopping complete command (G80 or chopping signal OFF) and then
completing the basic position return, it turns OFF.
While the compensation operation is executed during the chopping operation, it turns ON as
the difference between the position of upper dead point/bottom dead point and the feedback
2 Stroke compensation completion
position has reached less than the tolerance specified with the parameter.
If change, such as the movement stop, operation parameter change etc., occurs, it turns OFF.
Check the setting of operation parameter at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid
signal, and turn it OFF if there is any abnormality. Correct the setting detail, and check it again
3 Chopping designation error
at the rising edge of the chipping parameter valid signal. If there is no abnormality, turn it OFF.
Refer to the alarm No. for the detail of the abnormality.
Reading the operation parameter inside the NC completes at the rising edge of the chopping
Chopping start preparation parameter valid signal, and turn it ON when the operation of the designated parameter is valid.
4
completion Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming this signal is ON.
When the chopping parameter valid signal turned OFF, this signal will also turn OFF.
Even the compensation operation is executed using the memorized compensation amount
with the playback mode of fixed compensation amount method, it turns ON if the difference
between the command position and the feedback position exceeds the tolerance. If the
5 Playback mode error over
difference is within the tolerance, it turns OFF.
Set with the parameter to use the compensation value sequential update type for changing the
compensation amount when the error amount exceeds the tolerance.
It turns ON when the measurement of compensation amount is completed in the record mode
Compensation memorize of fixed compensation amount method. The compensation amount is the difference between
6
complete the command position and the feedback position and should be within the tolerance.
It turns OFF at the completion of chopping operation of the record mode.
Compensation memorize The error amount cannot be within the tolerance even chopping operation with fixed
7
incomplete compensation method is executed 50 times succession.
8 to F Not used
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping (CHPS)
(2) Chopping parameter valid

192
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10381 G10481 G10581 G10681 G10781 G10881 G10981
- CHOPPING ERROR NO.
R181 R281 R381 R481 R581 R681 R781

[Function]
When the alarm occurs during the chopping operation by the external signal or at the rising edge of the chopping
parameter valid signal, the alarm content will be notified to the PLC.
[Operation]
The relationship between the chopping error No. and its content is shown below.

Error No. Description Classification

0 No error -
1 Number of cycles for chopping is zero. (Operates when the number of cycles is 1) A
(Chopping axis feed rate) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)
2 A
(Feed rate is clamped at the cutting feed clamp speed.)
(Acceleration of chopping axis) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed time constant)
3 A
(Feed rate is clamped at (cutting feed clamp speed) / (cutting feed time constant))
(Number of cycles for chopping) > (1000/min)
4 A
(The number of cycles for chopping is clamped at 1000/min.)
5 Chopping axis zero point return is not completed. B
6 Chopping override is zero B
7 Commanded axis is the chopping axis. B
8 The bottom dead point position is zero. B
9 Chopping axis is a manual feed axis. B
10 Interlock B
11 Stored stroke limit or stroke end B
20 No chopping specification. -
22 Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface. C
23 Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter. C
26 Data No. of chopping control data is out of range. C
"#2081 chclsp" (chopping clamp speed) and "#2002 clamp" (cutting clamp speed) for chopping axis
27 C
are both set to "0".
Chopping axis was changed during the chopping operation.
28 C
(Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping.)
29 The rotary axis is designated as a chopping axis. C
31 Chopping command is executed by PLC when selecting the chopping by G command. C

Classificati The error is retained during chopping operation.

on A The alarm is removed after the alarm factor is removed.
Classificati
The error is cleared after the alarm factor is removed, or when the NC is reset.
on B
Classificati
It does not enter into the chopping mode.
on C
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping (CHPS)
(2) Chopping parameter valid

193
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10382 G10482 G10582 G10682 G10782 G10882 G10982
- CHOPPING AXIS
R182 R282 R382 R482 R582 R682 R782

[Function]
The axis which is in the chopping operation is output.
[Operation]
The axis which is in the chopping operation turns ON regardless of either by PLC command or by machining program
command.
It turns OFF when the chopping mode is removed.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis
: :
bit7: 8th axis
bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)
[Related signals]
(1) In chopping mode

194
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
G11160 - G11190 - G11220 - G11250 - G11280 - G11310 - G11340 -
SPINDLE COMMAND ROTA- G11161 G11191 G11221 G11251 G11281 G11311 G11341
- SRPMINn
TION SPEED INPUT R1600 - R1630 - R1660 - R1690 - R1720 - R1750 - R1780 -
R1601 R1631 R1661 R1691 R1721 R1751 R1781

[Function]
This signal informs that spindle speed reference signal (S) command specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI) or
by manual numerical data input. "Spindle command rotation input" speed output from the controller is binary data. The
data can be monitored in the "S display" on the command value screen.
[Operation]
Set "Spindle command rotation speed input" is renewed when:
(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI) and "M function finish 1 or 2" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal or
"Gear shift completion" (GFINn) signal is sent back to the controller.
(2) "S**" is specified by manual numerical command input and "M function finish 1 or 2" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal or "Gear
shift completion" (GFINn) signal is sent back to the controller.

<Data flow>

S func. strobe 1 (SF1n)

S function
command S code data 1 Spindle command rotation speed input (SRPMINn)
PLC program process (mandatory)
S function strobe 1 (SF1n) turns (Copy or set the intended value)(Note 3)
ON and the following signals rise:
Spindle command rotation speed
Transfer timing

M function finish 1,2 (FIN1n,FIN2n) output (SRPMOTn)

Gear shift completion (GFINn)
- Spindle gear shift rotation speed
Reset & rewind (RRWn)
or during synchronous tapping - Spindle orientation rotation speed

Spindle controller

Spindle gear selection code m (GImn)

Spindle stop (SSTPn)
Spindle gear shift (SSFTn) Spindle command final data
Spindle orientation (SORCn) (Rotation speed)(SRPMINn)
Spindle speed override code m (SPmn)

When the system is under constant surface speed

control, constant surface speed data is set for Spindle command final data
"Spindle command rotation speed input" (12 bit binary)(SBINn)

(Note 1) Data cannot be cleared by "Reset" or "Emergency stop".

(Note 2) "Spindle command rotation speed input" directly denotes spindle speed (r/min) specified as S function
command.
(Note 3) By setting data of desired spindle speed to this signal, the spindle can be run at that speed. PLC program for
transfer needs to be created by the user to transfer the data. With the PLC program, if the spindle speed to be
controlled does not need to change from the (S) command value, copy the spindle command rotation speed
input value to the spindle command rotation speed output. If it is desired to be changed, set the intended value
to the spindle command rotation speed output.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle speed command rotation output (SRPMOTn)
(2) Spindle command final data (Rotation speed) (SRPMn)

195
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
G11162 - G11192 - G11222 - G11252 - G11282 - G11312 - G11342 -
SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL G11163 G11193 G11223 G11253 G11283 G11313 G11343
- SRPMn
DATA (rotation speed) R1602 - R1632 - R1662 - R1692 - R1722 - R1752 - R1782 -
R1603 R1633 R1663 R1693 R1723 R1753 R1783

[Function]
The command value is indicated to the spindle controller.
[Operation]
The "Spindle command rotation speed input" indicates the value for the spindle function (S) data commanded with the
automatic operation or manual numeric value command, whereas this data indicates a value to which the "Spindle
override", "Spindle gear selection code 1,2"(Gl1, Gl2), "Spindle stop"(SSTP), "Spindle gear shift"(SSFT) and "Spindle
orientation"(SORC) conditions have been considered.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle command rotation speed input (SRPMINn)
(2) Spindle command rotation speed output (SRPMOTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
G11166 - G11196 - G11226 - G11256 - G11286 - G11316 - G11346 -
G11167 G11197 G11227 G11257 G11287 G11317 G11347
- SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED
R1606 - R1636 - R1666 - R1696 - R1726 - R1756 - R1786 -
R1607 R1637 R1667 R1697 R1727 R1757 R1787

[Function]
When the system has spindle equipped with encoder, actual spindle speed can be monitored.
[Operation]
True spindle speed is always set by feedback signal from spindle encoder.
Data are multiplied by 1000, and stored.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1stSP 2ndSP 3rdSP 4thSP 5thSP 6thSP 7thSP
tact breviation

SPINDLE MOTOR TEMPERA- G11171 G11201 G11231 G11261 G11291 G11321 G11351
-
TURE R1611 R1641 R1671 R1701 R1731 R1761 R1791

[Function]
It displays the thermistor temperature of the spindle motor with a thermistor.
[Operation]
It always sets the thermistor temperature of the spindle motor. The unit is "C°".
It always sets to "0" for the motor without a thermistor.

196
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A CONTACTOR SHUTOFF TEST MCT Y310

[Function]
This signal carries out a contactor shutoff test.
[Operation]
Send a "ready OFF" command to the drive unit at the contactor shutoff test signal's rising edge and shut the drive side
contactor OFF. Then, turn the power shutdown signal of the dual signal module OFF to shut the CNC side contactor
OFF.
Confirm that the contactor's status is OFF by monitoring contactor's auxiliary b contact signal, then send a "ready ON"
command to the drive unit to turn the drive unit side contactor ON. Turn ON the power shutdown signal to turn ON the
CNC side contactor. After that, turn the 24 hours continuous operation signal OFF.
If the contactor shutoff could not be confirmed within 5 seconds, Alarm"Y20 Safety observation error 0008" (contactor
weld detection) is output and the status turns to the emergency stop.
[Timing chart]

24 hours continuous operation (CNOP)

Contactor shutoff test (MCT)

Servo ready state

Contactor's auxiliary b contact signal

[Caution]
Contactor shutoff test must be carried out when the drive's main power can be shut off without causing any problem.
Vertical axis requires brake circuit, etc. for a drop prevention.
[Related signals]
Emergency stop cause
24 hours continuous operation (CNOP)

197
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DUAL SIGNALS CHECK START CHKTRG Y311

[Function]
Dual signal module's output OFF check and contactor welding detected are commenced.
[Operation]
It confirms that the contactor's auxiliary b contact is ON at the rising edge of the "dual signals check start".
When the contactor's welding is detected, "Y20 Safety observation error 0008" will occur.
At the same time, output's ON/OFF check will be commenced.
If the error is detected at the dual signal module's PLC side output, "Y20 Safety observation error 0048" will occur. If the
error is detected at the NC side, "Y20 Safety observation erro 0049" will occur.
"EMG Emergency stop MCT" will be displayed until the output's ON/OFF check is completed.

"Dual signals check start" signal is valid only when "#21161 Dual signal check-time change" (SftySgnlChkTrg) is set to
"1". If "#21161 Dual signal check-time change" is set to "0", the controller will automaticallly start checking. Setting "1" is
allowed only when the power supply to I/Os is impossible at the controller's power ON. It starts checking when the "dual
signals check start" is ON under the state of power supply.
"Dual signals check start" signal is only valid at the first rising edge of the signal.

Dual signal check start ON

OFF

Dual signal ON/OFF check Execution

(NC side) Stop

Dual signal ON/OFF check Execution

(PLC side) Stop

Dual signal comparison Execution

Stop

Controller ready completion ON

(MA) OFF

[Caution]
Output signal state of the dual signals module will change after executing the output ON/OFF check. When creating a
program, consider the state transition so as not to make the machine dangerous state even the output signals change.
[Related signals]
Emergency stop cause

198
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
OUTPUT OFF CHECK
A OFFCHK Y312
(OFFCHK)

[Function]
Dual signal module's output OFF check is commenced.
[Operation]
"Output OFF check" signal is ON, it enters in emergency stop state and then servo ready OFF. In the servo ready OFF
state, all the output signals of the dual signals module will be OFF. Confirm that the input signal of output signal feedback
is OFF. If it is not confirmed in a given amout of time, it will be considered as an error.
If the error is detected at the dual signal module's PLC side output, "Y20 Safety observation error 0050" will occur. If the
error is detected at the NC side, "Y20 Safety observation erro 0051" will occur.
"EMG Emergency stop MCT" will be displayed while the output OFF check is executed.

The output OFF check is turned The output OFF check is

ON when there is no output executed when the output OFF
during the last 24 hours check not complete is ON
Output OFF check not ON
complete (NC -> PLC) OFF

Output OFF check Servo ready turns OFF

ON
(NC -> PLC) when the test is executed
OFF

Servo ready state ON

OFF

All output signals

All dual signal modules’ ON
turn OFF
output signals OFF

Feedback input signal ON

state of all dual signal OFF
modules’ output signals The test is completed after all the output
signals are OFF is confirmed

[Caution]
All the output signals of the dual signals module will be OFF by executing the output OFF check. When creating a
program, consider the state transition so as not to make the machine dangerous state even the output signals are OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Emergency stop cause
(2) Output OFF check not complete (NOFFCHK)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A INTEGRATION TIME INPUT m RHDm Y314 - Y315

[Function]
The total duration of a signal specified by a user PLC can be counted and displayed. For this, integration time input 1 and
2 are available.
[Operation]
The INTEGRAL TIME during this signal (RHDm) has been ON is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Integrating time is displayed on "#6 EXT TIME 1" and "#7 EXT TIME 2" of "[MONITOR]-[TIME]" CNC monitor screen.
The counted (integrated) time is held even when the power is turned OFF. The integration time can be preset or reset.

199
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
B DATA PROTECT KEY 1 *KEY1 Y318

[Function]
Data pertinent to tool functions, and coordinate data (origin reset) can be protected with this signal.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned OFF (set to "0"), the tool data setting operation is prohibited.
[Caution]
If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY1) is OFF, DATA PROTECT appears in the message section of screen.
[Related signals]
(1) Data protect key 2 (*KEY2)
(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
B DATA PROTECT KEY 2 *KEY2 Y319

[Function]
Data pertinent to user parameters, common variables, CNC ladder, R register, C register and T register can be
protected.
[Operation]
When this signal (KEY2) is turned OFF (0), the parameter and common variable setting operation is prohibited.
[Caution]
If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY2) is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT appears in the message section of CRT
screen.
[Related signals]
(1) Data protect key 1 (*KEY1)
(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
B DATA PROTECT KEY 3 *KEY3 Y31A

[Function]
Data pertinent to machining program can be protected.
[Operation]
When this signal (KEY3) is turned OFF (0), the editing of the machining program is prohibited.
[Caution]
If data is edited when the data protect key 3 is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT will appear in the message section.
[Related signals]
(1) Data protect key 1 (*KEY1)
(2) Data protect key 2 (*KEY2)

200
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
CRT CHANGEOVER COMPLE-
A CRTFN Y31D
TION

[Function]
When using one setting and display unit for multiple controller display units, this signal is used to inform the controller
that it has been changed as a display unit.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, the currently selected screen will display at the rising edge. For the setting and display unit
screen, the screen on the controller before the changeover will remain, so when this signal is input, the local screen
display will be changed to.
[Timing chart]

CRT changeover Other controller Local

At least 100 ms
Or more required
CRT changeover completion
(CRTFN)

Screen display Screen display on other controller Local screen display

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DISPLAY CHANGEOVER $m DISP$m Y31E - Y31F

[Function]
The displayed part system of the multiple part systems can be changed.
[Operation]
The displayed part system is changed at the rising edge of each display changeover signal.
The screen display for the multiple part systems is a screen for displaying one of the part systems. Thus, which part
system to be displayed is determined by these signals.
If both of these signals are started up simultaneously, they will be invalid.
[Timing chart]

Display part system $1 display $2 display $1 display

Display changeover
$1 (DISP1)

Display changeover
$2 (DISP2)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A NC DATA SAMPLING TRIGGER SMPTRG Y321

[Function]
The start and end of data sampling are controlled.
[Operation]
When "#34 PLC-DEVICE" is set to "0" (or No. for this device or illegal value):
(1) When "2" is selected for "#5 Starting condition"
The sampling is started as this signal is turned ON during the trigger stand-by state.
(2) When "2" is selected for "#32 Ending condition"
The sampling is stopped as this signal is turned OFF during the sampling state.
(If a ring buffer is used for "#31 processing format", the sampling will be stopped. In other type of buffering is
selected, it enters into preparing for stop state and the sampling will be stopped because the buffer is full.)

201
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SAVING OPERATION HISTORY
A HISAVE Y322
DATA

[Function]
It saves the operation history information to the saving area.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON to save the operation history information to the saving area.
It will be used for analysing the history information when the error occurs.

<Operation history information for the saving operation history data>

- Signal history
- Alarm history
- Key operation history

(Note 1) When the saving operation history data is executed, a new operation history information cannot be saved until
the power is ON again.
(Note 2) Saved operation history will be retained even the power is turned OFF.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
EDITED DATA RECOVERY
A EDITOK Y323
CONFIRMATION

[Function]
This signal instructs to release "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0002" and "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0003".
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0002" and "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0003" are released.
Other alarms (such as 0001, 0004) will not be released.
[Caution]
Always make sure to check the details of machining program before turning this signal ON.
Refer to the Setup manual on how to release other alarms.
[Related signals]
(1) Edited data in processing (EDITDO)
(2) Edited data error (EDITERR)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A PLC EMERGENCY STOP QEMG Y327

[Function]
The controller can be set to emergency stop condition, like the case where emergency stop signal is given by user PLC.
[Operation]
Emergency stop occurs in the controller when the signal (QEMG) is turned ON. In this case, "Servo ready completion
(SA)" is turned OFF.
(Note) Since this signal is processed in software, response is somewhat slower, as compared with external
emergency stop signal. Approximate response is equal to 1 scan by user PLC plus 100ms.

202
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOOR OPEN I DOOR1 Y328

[Function]
This signal stops all axes, and cuts OFF contactor power.
[Operation]
The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns ON.
(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles).
(2) A ready OFF state occurs after all axes stop, and the contactor power of each drive unit is cut OFF.
(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns OFF.
(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.
(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.
[Caution]
(1) Handling of the PLC axis
Set so a "Door open I" signal is output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If a "Door open I" signal
is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake method due to the ready OFF state.
(2) Handling of the analog spindle
When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the
CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.
Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run
and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.
(3) Opening the door during ATC operation
When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Door open enable (DROPNS)

203
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOOR OPEN II DOOR2 Y329

[Function]
This signal stops all axes, and cuts off contactor power.
[Operation]
The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns ON.
(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles). (Axis interlock)
(2) After all axes stop, the contactor power of each drive unit is cut off. The servo READY signal does not turn OFF.
(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.
(4) Automatic operation start is valid during door interlock. Note that an interlock is applied on the axis movement.
(5) If the door interlock ("Door open II" (DOOR2) signal) turns ON during axis movement, the axis will decelerate to a
stop. The axis movement will resume when the door interlock ("Door open II" (DOOR2) signal) turns OFF.

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns OFF.
(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.
(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.
[Caution]
(1) Handling of the PLC axis
Set so a "Door open II" (DOOR2) signal is output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If a "Door
open II" (DOOR2) signal is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake method due
to the ready OFF state. The remaining distance will be held in the R register being used in the PLC axis control
interface.
(2) Handling of the analog spindle
When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the
CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.
Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run
and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.
(3) Opening the door during ATC operation
When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.
[Related signals]
Door open enable (DROPNS)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFER-
A PABMI Y32B
ING MODE VALID

[Function]
This signal validates the PLC axis control in buffering mode.
[Operation]
Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in buffering mode.
If this signal has been turned OFF, the axis movement, which had been commanded in buffering mode, is canceled.
[Caution]
(1) Turning this signal ON updates the control information in single mode, such as status and machining position, even
during axis control in buffering mode.
The information is updated at the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is
recommended to turn the PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering
mode, and to refer to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in
buffering mode.
(2) Specify the axis to command in buffering mode in the control information, axis specification, for buffering mode.

204
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC CONTROL AXIS mTH HAN-
A PCHm Y32D - Y32F
DLE VALID

[Function]
This device designate a handle when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.
[Operation]
When "PLC control axis mth handle valid" (PCHm) is ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.
The 1st part system of "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn), "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn), "2nd handle axis
selection code m" (HS2mn), "2nd handle valid" (HS2Sn), "3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS3mn), "3rd handle valid"
(HS3Sn), which are used with the normal control device, are used to select each handle axis.
PLC axes are differentiated from NC axes and counted from the 1st.
Turn ON "PLC axis 1st handle valid" (PCH1), "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) and "1st handle valid"
(HS1Sn) to operate the 1st handle with PLC axis 1st axis.
[Caution]
The handle feed magnification is also used for CNC control axes.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION
A SSYNI Y330
CANCEL

[Function]
This signal is used to cancel the spindle synchronous control with the G114.1 command.
The spindle synchronous control with the "Spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) is not canceled.
[Operation]
The spindle synchronous control mode can be canceled by turning this signal ON.
[Related signals]
In spindle synchronous control (SPSYN1)
Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
Spindle phase synchronous control (SPPHS)
Spindle synchronous control phase error 1 (degree)
Spindle synchronous control phase error 2 (degree)

205
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A CHUCK CLOSE SPCMPC Y331

[Function]
This signal is turned ON while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle clamp the same work.
[Operation]
The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned ON when the "Chuck close" signal is ON.
The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned OFF when the "Chuck close" signal is OFF.

Chuck open
Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close Chuck open
confirmation
Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open Chuck close Chuck close Chuck close
confirmation

Spindle synchronization
(SPSY)

In spindle synchronization
(SPSYN1)
Spindle rotation speed
synchronization completion
(FSPRV)
Chuck close
(SPCMPC)
Error temporary cancel
(SPDRPO)
In error cancel

(Note) Use the "Error temporary cancel" only when the rotation error between the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle occurs because of the "Chuck close" signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chuck close confirmation (SPCMP)

206
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SPSY Y332

[Function]
The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by turning this signal ON.
[Operation]
The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by inputting the "Spindle synchronous control" signal (SPSY). During
the spindle synchronous control mode, the synchronous spindle is controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed
commanded for the basic spindle.
Set the basic spindle, synchronous spindle and rotation direction beforehand.

Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation

Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the basic spindle.
Spindle (0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th
synchronous spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th spindle
G+257/R2357 -
control (Note 1) Spindle synchronization control will not take place if a spindle not
Basic spindle select connected in serial is selected.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle.
Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the synchronous spindle.
Spindle (0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th
synchronous spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th spindle
G+258/R2358 control - (Note 3) Spindle synchronization control will not take place if a spindle not
Synchronous connected in serial is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected.
spindle selection (Note 4) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous
spindle.
Designate the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation directions for spindle
Spindle
synchronization control.
Y334 synchronous -
0:The synchronous spindle rotates in the same direction as the basic spindle.
rotation direction
1:The synchronous spindle rotates in the reverse direction of the basic spindle.

[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)
(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(6) Spindle synchronous control Basic spindle selection
(7) Spindle synchronous control Synchronous spindle selection

207
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONI-
A SPPHS Y333
ZATION

[Function]
Spindle phase synchronization starts this signal is turned ON during the spindle synchronous control mode.
[Operation]
Spindle phase synchronization starts when the "Spindle phase synchronous control" signal (SPPHS) is input during the
spindle synchronous control mode. The "Spindle phase synchronization completion" signal is output when the spindle
phase synchronization attainment level setting value (#3051 spplv) is reached.
(Note) This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during a mode other than the spindle synchronous
control mode.

Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

In spindle synchronization
(Note1)
(SPSYN1)
Spindle rotation speed
synchronization completion
(FSPRV)
Spindle phase synchronization
(SPPHS)

Spindle phase synchronization

completion (FSPPH)

Spindle phase synchronization

completion ON
Spindle phase synchronous Spindle phase
control ON synchronous
control OFF
Spindle rotation speed
synchronization completion ON Spindle synchronous control OFF
In spindle synchronous control OFF
In spindle synchronous control ON

(Note 1) This is turned OFF once to change the rotation speed during phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(4) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)
(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount

208
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS RO-
A SPSDR Y334
TATION DIRECTION

[Function]
The synchronous spindle's rotation direction is designated with this signal. Select whether the direction is the same as or
the reverse of the basic spindle.
[Operation]
Designate the rotation direction for the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during spindle synchronous control.
0: Synchronous spindle rotates in same direction as basic spindle.
1: Synchronous spindle rotates in reverse direction of basic spindle.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)
(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount

209
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PHASE SHIFT CALCULATION
A SSPHM Y335
REQUEST

[Function]
This signal calculates the phase error of the basic spindle during rotation synchronization, and requests that it be saved
in the CNC memory.
[Operation]
The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is saved in the CNC memory when this signal is ON and
the rotation synchronization command's (with no R address command) spindle synchronization is completed (when
"Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion" signal is ON).
This signal turns ON when the spindle rotation is stopped before the rotation synchronization command.

Phase shift calculation

request (SSPHM)

Spindle synchronization
(SPSY)

In spindle synchronization
(SPSYN1)

Spindle rotation speed

synchronization completion
(FSPRV)

The phase error occurred in this interval is

saved.(Synchronous spindle can be controlled
with handle.)
Spindle synchronous Spindle synchronous
control ON control OFF

Phase shift calculation request ON Phase shift calculation request OFF

(Note 1) The phase cannot be aligned when calculating the phase shift.
(Note 2) If the handle mode is selected as the manual operation mode, the synchronous spindle cannot be rotated with
the handle.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase Offset request (SSPHF)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error output
(3) Spindle synchronization phase Offset data

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A PHASE OFFSET REQUEST SSPHF Y336

[Function]
This signal requests that the phase be aligned to the value obtained by adding the value commanded with the phase
synchronization command's R address to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved with the
"Phase shift calculation request" (SSPHM) signal.
[Operation]
If phase synchronization is commanded (with R address command) while this signal is ON, the basic spindle and
synchronous spindle phases will be aligned to attain the phase error obtained by adding the value commanded with the
R address command to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the CNC memory.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error output
(3) Spindle synchronization phase Offset data

210
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A ERROR TEMPORARY CANCEL SPDRPO Y337

[Function]
This signal cancels the error caused by the speed fluctuation when the chuck is closed.
When the chuck is closed, the speed will fluctuate due to external causes. An error will occur between the basic spindle's
position and the synchronous spindle's position due to this speed fluctuation. This signal is used to cancel this error. (If
spindle synchronization is attempted when closing the chuck without canceling this error, torsion could occur.)
[Operation]
The error between the basic spindle's position and synchronous spindle's position is saved when this signal changes
from OFF to ON. The saved error is canceled and the spindle is synchronized while this signal is ON. (Even if the chuck
close signal is OFF, the error will be canceled while the "Error temporary cancel" signal is ON.)
(Note 1) Turn this signal ON after the chucks on both the basic spindle side and synchronous spindle side have closed
and grasped the chuck.
(Note 2) Turn this signal OFF when the either the basic spindle side or synchronous spindle side chuck is open.

(Example)
(1) Close the basic spindle side chuck.
(2) Start spindle synchronization (G114.1).
(3) Close the synchronous spindle side chuck.
(The speed will fluctuate due to external causes at this time, and an error will occur.)
(4) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" (SPCMP) signal, check that the chucks are closed.
(5) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" (SPDRPO) signal ON, and cancel the error.
(6) Execute machining with spindle synchronous control.
(7) Open the chuck on the synchronous spindle side.
(8) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" (SPCMP) signal, check that the chuck is opened.
(9) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" (SPDRPO) signal OFF, and stop the error cancellation.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPHA)
(4) Chuck close confirmation (SPCMP)
(5) Chuck close (SPCMPC)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC AXIS NEAR POINT DETEC-
B *PCDm Y338 - Y33F
TION m-TH AXIS

[Function]
The near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return is input.
[Operation]
Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

Signal abbreviation Signal name

*PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis
*PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis
*PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis
*PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis
*PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis
*PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis
*PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis
*PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

211
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-
A PLCAEm Y340 - Y347
TH AXIS

[Function]
This signal validates the PLC axis control in single mode.
[Operation]
Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in single mode.
Status, alarm details and machine position of each axis can be referred.
If this signal has been turned OFF, status, alarm details and machine position are not updated. The axis movement,
which has been commanded in single mode, is canceled. The PLC axis control is executed upon the control information
data while the PLC axis control valid signal is ON.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A DOWNLOAD REQUEST DLDREQ Y350

[Function]
This signal designates the download request to FTP server.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the file transfer is requested to FTP server.
When the designated file exists, it will be downloaded to the buffer memory.
This signal should be ON until download is finished. If this signal is turned OFF during the download, download will be
interrupted and the download in progress signal will also be turned OFF.
The file transfer will not begun during the TAPE mode operation (OP). Turn this signal ON again after the operation is
finished.
[Related signals]
(1) Download in progress (DLOAD0)
(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)
(3) Download error (DLDERR)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
APL-
A APLC OUTPUT SIGNAL n Y380 - Y39F
COUTn

[Function] [Operation]
This signal is an interface for sending a signal from PLC device to APLC C language module .

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
A PLC SKIP PSKIPm Y3A0 - Y3BF

[Function]
This is the skip input signal from the PLC. (m = 1 to 32)
The skip condition can be created to perform skip operation.
Skipping is implemented in accordance with the logical sum of high-speed skip (hardware-fixed signals) and PLC skip
conditions.
[Operation]
This can be used for the skip related functions. (G31 skip, tool length measurement, etc.)
[Caution]
When PLC skip is used, the coasting amount from the skip signal input will be slightly longer than the high speed skip.

212
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y400 Y430 Y460 Y490 Y4C0 Y4F0 Y520 Y550
A CONTROL AXIS DETACH DTCHn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y580 Y5B0 Y5E0 Y610 Y640 Y670 Y6A0 Y6D0

[Function]
Desired control axis can be specified to be exempted from control function.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When "Control axis detach" signal (DTCHn) turns ON, the corresponding axis is exempted from control.
(1) Specified axis is not under any positioning control (oriented spindle stop, index, etc.)
(2) "Servo alarm", "Stroke end alarm" and other alarms are not applied to specified axis.
(3) Interlock signal applied to specified axis is deemed to be ON.
(4) Specified axis is displayed by the setting and display unit.
(Note 1) The same function can be used by setting parameter on the setting and display unit. (See below)

The control axis detach is valid when the following are valid:

Basic specification parameter

Basic specification parameter
"#1070 axoff" (axis detach), and
"#1070 axoff" (axis detach), and or
axis parameter of machining parameter
control axis detach n-th axis(DTCHn)
"#8201 AX. RELEASE"

213
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551
B SERVO OFF *SVFn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1

[Function]
Control axis (axis motion under control) can be set to "Servo OFF" (i.e., servo motor remains still).
In servo OFF condition, positioning control is impossible but the position detect function is alive.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When "Servo OFF" signal (*SVFn) turns OFF, the corresponding control axis is set to servo OFF condition.
Whether displacement which was caused during servo OFF by external force is corrected when "Servo ON" signal is
given, or not, can be determined by setting parameter. (#1064 svof Error correction)
(1) When displacement is corrected (follow-up):
- An amount of motion equal to the displacement is commanded so that positioning error becomes zero.
- In this case, machine position remains deviated from in-position when "Servo OFF" signal is restored. The current
position read by position counter is corrected and the machine position is corrected when the next absolute motion
command is given ("Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is turned ON when manual operation is selected).
(2) When displacement is not corrected:
- In this case, machine position should be corrected when "Servo OFF" signal is restored.
(Example) Servo-OFF during motion

Servo OFF (*SVFn)

Axis motion *1

Servo ready
n-th axis Approx.
0.7 s
*2 *3

*1: Servo turns OFF after deceleration and stopping during axis motion.
*2, 3: Controller internal interlock by servo OFF (axis motion not possible)
[Caution]
These signals are all handled as B contacts.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y402 Y432 Y462 Y492 Y4C2 Y4F2 Y522 Y552
A MIRROR IMAGE MIn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y582 Y5B2 Y5E2 Y612 Y642 Y672 Y6A2 Y6D2

[Function]
This signal is used to machine a symmetrical shape by reversing the sign for the movement amount per block.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
Symmetrical cutting is enabled by reversing the sign of the value commanded for memory or MDI operation.
(1)Regardless of whether the coordinate is commanded with an incremental mode or absolute mode, the mirror image is
applied ON the incremental amount to be executed for all axes that can be controlled.
(Note) The mirror image is changed after block stop.
[Related signals]
(1) In mirror image (MIRn)

214
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553
B EXTERNAL DECELERATION + *+EDTn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3

[Function]
The feedrate when the control axis is moving in the + direction can be controlled while this signal (*+EDTn) is OFF, at a
constant speed set with the parameters.
Control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the control
axis No.
"#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid" selects whether it is common setting for all axes or setting
for each axis. (0: Common setting for all axes, 1: Setting for each axis)
[Operation]
During manual mode when the "External deceleration +" (*+EDTn) signal turns OFF, each axis decelerates
independently. However, during automatic mode, all axes will decelerate at the same deceleration speed when even one
axis matches the external deceleration conditions. The deceleration occurs when the movement axis direction matches
the "External deceleration" signal direction of the corresponding axis.
(1) The external deceleration speed can be randomly set with the parameters. (Common setting for all
axes:#1216 extdcc, setting for each axis: #2086 exdcax1, #2161 exdcax2 to #2165 exdcax6)
(2) When the speed is less than the external deceleration speed, it will not be affected even if this signal is OFF.
(3) The deceleration speed during automatic operation will be the combined deceleration speed, if the
deceleration conditions match and the external deceleration speed is exceeded.
(4) When returning in the reverse direction, the speed will immediately return to the correct command speed.
(5) For G28, G29 and G30 commands, the speed will become the external deceleration speed for that axis only,
even in automatic operation.
(6) The speed will become the external deceleration speed even in rapid traverse during synchronous tapping.
(7) About combined speed when the external deceleration signal is multiple axes valid When the combined speed
exceeds the lowest external deceleration speed among the axes that the external deceleration signal valid, it
slows the combined speed to its lowest external deceleration speed.
External deceleration speed

Axis movement + direction movement

External deceleration+ (*+EDTn)

External deceleration- (*-EDTn) *-EDTn is invalid during + direction movement

[Caution]
(1) The unused axis must be put into invalidating an external deceleration by setting "1" with PLC program.
[Related signals]
(1) External deceleration - (*-EDTn)
(2) External deceleration speed selection

215
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554
B EXTERNAL DECELERATION - *-EDTn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4

[Function][Operation]
The functions and operations of this signal are the same as those of "External deceleration + nth axis" signal (*+EDTn).
The deceleration occurs when the movement is in the minus direction and the "External deceleration - nth axis" signal (*-
EDTn) is OFF.

[Related signals]
(1)External deceleration +(*+EDTn)
(2) External deceleration speed selection

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555
B AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK + *+AITn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5

[Function]
All axis motions of machine can be decelerated and stopped immediately during automatic operation when motion of a
specific axis (nth axis) in plus direction activates the interlock function.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When this signal turns OFF for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under automatic operation mode (memory,
MDI), motion of all axis decelerates and stops with "M01 operation error code 004" displayed.
With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the system completes calculation for axis motion but makes it remain
stopped with the same operation error code displayed. In either case, setting the signal ON resumes or starts axis
motion.
[Caution]
(1) All automatic interlock + (*+AITn) signals are for B contact.
(2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic interlock -(*-AITn)
(2) Manual interlock +/- (*+/-MITn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556
B AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK - *-AITn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6

[Function][Operation]
The details are the same as the "Automatic interlock +" (*+AITn) signal, except that the direction is opposite.
The "Automatic interlock +" (*+AITn) signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal is valid for the
axis moving in the minus direction.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic interlock + (*+AITn)
(2) Manual interlock +/- (*+/-MITn)

216
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557
B MANUAL INTERLOCK + *+MITn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7

[Function]
When the corresponding axis is moving in the plus direction with manual operation (jog, manual, incremental, reference
position return), only the corresponding axis can be decelerated and stopped by turning OFF this signal that corresponds
to that axis.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When this signal turns OFF (0) for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under manual operation mode (jog,
handle, incremental, reference position return), motion of the axis decelerates and stops with NC alarm "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0004" displayed.
With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the system completes calculation for axis motion but makes it remain
stopped with the same operation error code displayed. In either case, setting the signal ON (1) resumes or starts axis
motion.
[Caution]
(1) All manual interlock + (*+MITn) signals are for B contact.
(2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual interlock - (*-MITn:)
(2) Automatic interlock +/- (*+/-AITn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558
B MANUAL INTERLOCK - *-MITn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8

[Function][Operation]
The details are the same as the "Manual interlock +nth axis" signal, except that the direction is opposite.
The "Manual interlock +nth axis" signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal is valid for the axis
moving in the minus direction.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual interlock + (*+MITn)
(2) Automatic interlock +/- (*+/-AITn)

217
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y409 Y439 Y469 Y499 Y4C9 Y4F9 Y529 Y559
A AUTOMATIC MACHINE LOCK AMLKn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y589 Y5B9 Y5E9 Y619 Y649 Y679 Y6A9 Y6D9

[Function]
During automatic operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to check program.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
In the automatic operation (memory, MDI), when this signal is ON, the current position (counter) can be changed on a
specific axis (for which the signal is ON) without actual machine motion. If the signal turns ON in the middle of a block
(during motion), block termination occurs after the completion of that block, and then the machine lock will be valid for the
following blocks.
[Caution]
(1) If "Auto machine lock" (AMLKn) signal changes during automatic operation, block stop occurs after completion of
the block in execution.
(2) To move only the table without drilling to confirm the drilling position, turn ON the signal for the 3rd axis (AMLK3) if
the drilling axis is the 3rd axis.
(Equivalent to Z axis cancel)
[Related signals]
(1) Manual machine lock (MMLKn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y40A Y43A Y46A Y49A Y4CA Y4FA Y52A Y55A
A MANUAL MACHINE LOCK MMLKn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y58A Y5BA Y5EA Y61A Y64A Y67A Y6AA Y6DA

[Function]
During manual operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to check program.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, current position can be changed on a specific axis (nth axis) without actual machine motion. If
the signal turns ON or OFF during execution of a block, the operation continues until it is completed. It is required to stop
motion of all axes to validate the machine lock.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic machine lock (AMLKn)

218
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y40B Y43B Y46B Y49B Y4CB Y4FB Y52B Y55B
A FEED AXIS SELECTION + +Jn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y58B Y5BB Y5EB Y61B Y64B Y67B Y6AB Y6DB

[Function]
This signal is used to start motion (jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return mode) in plus direction during
manual operation.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When "Feed axis select" signal (+Jn) turns ON, the following motion occurs.
(1) When jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return is possible, motion in plus direction occurs on the
selected axis.
(2) In jog feed, motion continues while the signal is ON.

Jog mode (Jn)

Feed axis selection (+Jn)

1st axis motion [+]

(3) In incremental feed, amount (length) of motion depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed magnification". The
motion is in plus direction. Even when signal (+Jn) turns OFF during motion, the motion (feed) does not stop. To
start the motion again, turn ON the signal after the preceding motion has been completed.

Incremental feed mode (Sn)

Feed axis selection (+Jn)

1st axis motion [+]

(4) After reference position return mode is decelerated to approach speed by the near point detect dog, the motion
continues, even after the feed axis selection + (+Jn) signal is turned OFF, until motion reaches the reference
position.

(Note 1) If feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn) signals turn ON at the same time, neither plus signal nor minus signal is
selected (same as the case where feed axis select signal is OFF.)
(Note 2) If this signal turns ON before jog, incremental or reference position return mode is selected, this signal is
ignored. In this case, the signal should be turned OFF and then ON.
(Note 3) If reset is exerted while this signal is ON, or " this signal turns ON during reset, the this signal is ignored even
when the reset condition is canceled. In this case, this signal should be turned OFF and then ON.
(Note 4) This signal will be invalid even if turned ON while the corresponding axis is decelerating (when command
output is not completed). The signal must be turned OFF and ON again after the deceleration has completed
completely (command output is completed). Special care is required when the feed axis direction changes.
(Note 5) In the 2nd part system specifications, even if this signal of 1st part system and 2nd part system turn ON in the
same cycle (scan) of the sequence, the start up may not be completely simultaneous.
[Related signals]
(1) Feed axis selection - (-Jn)

219
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y40C Y43C Y46C Y49C Y4CC Y4FC Y52C Y55C
A FEED AXIS SELECTION - -Jn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y58C Y5BC Y5EC Y61C Y64C Y67C Y6AC Y6DC

[Function]
This signal is used to feed the axis in the minus (-) direction during jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return
mode in manual operation.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
(Refer to the "Feed axis selection + nth axis" for details.)
[Operation]
The operation is the same as the feed axis selection + (+Jn).
Use this signal to move in the minus (-) direction.
[Related signals]
(1) Feed axis selection + (+Jn)

220
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y40D Y43D Y46D Y49D Y4CD Y4FD Y52D Y55D
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SIMUL-
A MAEn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
TANEOUS VALID
Y58D Y5BD Y5ED Y61D Y64D Y67D Y6AD Y6DD

[Function]
The automatic mode (MDI, memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog, manual reference position return) can be
simultaneously selected allowing manual operation during automatic operation. (Arbitrary feed with the PLC is also
possible.)
[Operation]
The manual/auto simultaneous mode is entered when the automatic mode and manual mode are selected
simultaneously. The manual operation axis is selected with this signal during the manual/auto mode. The manual
operation axes (MAEn) are selected individually for each axis.
The axis selected with this signal can be operated in the manual mode during automatic operation.
(Note 1) If an axis command is issued to a manual operation axis from the automatic mode, the "M01 OPERATION
ERROR 0005" will occur. The automatic operation will be interlocked until the operation error is canceled.
(Note 2) During the automatic mode (when manual is not selected and manual/auto simultaneous mode is not entered),
this signal will be invalid and the interlock will not be applied.
(Note 3) If this signal turns ON in respect to an axis commanded with automatic during the manual/auto simultaneous
mode, an interlock will be applied on the axis, and the axis will immediately decelerate and stop. (The "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0005" will occur.)
After decelerating and stopping, operation with the manual mode will be possible. Note that the interlock will
also be applied during the tap modal.
(Note 4) During the manual/auto simultaneous mode and the automatic mode, the manual axis command for which this
signal is OFF will be invalid. Note that interruption with the manual handle will be possible.
(Note 5) The feedrates for the automatic command axis and the manual command axis are different. The acceleration/
deceleration mode (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are also independent.
(Note 6) The rapid traverse override, cutting feed override and 2nd cutting feedrate override are valid for both the
automatic command axis and manual command axis. (Note that the cutting and 2nd cutting overrides to the
manual command axis are valid when the manual cutting override is valid.) Override cancel is valid for the
automatic command axis.
(Note 7) The manual interlock is valid for the manual command axis, and the automatic interlock is valid for the
automatic command axis.
(Note 8) The in-cutting feed and in-rapid traverse signals will follow the automatic command axis movement mode.
(Note 9) The axis moving with manual movement will not stop with single block stop or feed hold.
(Note 10) If the G92 and G53 commands are issued in the manual mode to an axis for which this signal is ON, the G92
and G53 commands will be executed after the manual axis movement stops. (An axis command with G53 will
cause an operation error after the manual axis movement stops.)
(Note 11) If a soft limit or OT is applied on the manual command axis during the manual/auto simultaneous mode, the
automatic command axis will also decelerate to a stop, and will enter the feed hold state.

<Relation with manual handle interrupt>

The operation of the automatic handle interruption during the manual/auto mode is as follows.

Axis for which manual/auto valid signal is

Axis for which manual/auto valid signal is ON
OFF
The specifications of the manual/auto
The specifications of the automatic handle
simultaneous mode will be followed.
Handle mode Automatic handle interruption will be followed.
The automatic axis command will cause an
selection interrupt Interruption with the handle can be applied in
operation error, and only the manual axis
respect to the automatic axis movement.
command will be valid.
Manual mode other than handle Same as above Same as above

221
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y40E Y43E Y46E Y49E Y4CE Y4FE Y52E Y55E
A CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2 DTCH2n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y58E Y5BE Y5EE Y61E Y64E Y67E Y6AE Y6DE

[Function]
A control axis can be excluded from the control targets with this function.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the
control axis No.
[Operation]
When the "Control axis detach 2" signal (DTCH2n) turns ON, the corresponding axis is excluded from the control targets.
(1) Position control cannot be carried out, but the position is not lost because the position detection is valid.
(2) The "Interlock" signal of the corresponding axis is considered turned ON.
(3) The corresponding axis also appears in the CRT position display.
[Related signals]
(1) Control axis detach (DTCHn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y410 Y440 Y470 Y4A0 Y4D0 Y500 Y530 Y560
CURRENT LIMIT CHANGE-
A ILCn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
OVER
Y590 Y5C0 Y5F0 Y620 Y650 Y680 Y6B0 Y6E0

[Function][Operation]
This signal turns on when validating the current limit.
The current limit parameter switches from SV013 to SV014.
Release the droop and move the command value to the FB position.
(Note 1) The axis that droop release invalid axis is set does not execute the droop release.

[Related signals]
(1) In current limit (ILIn)
(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)
(3) Droop release request (DORn)
(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)
(5) Current limit changeover
(6) Droop release invalid axis

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y411 Y441 Y471 Y4A1 Y4D1 Y501 Y531 Y561
A DROOP RELEASE REQUEST DORn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y591 Y5C1 Y5F1 Y621 Y651 Y681 Y6B1 Y6E1

[Function][Operation]
During the current limit control, release the droop generated by the current limit and follow the FB position.
(Note 1) The axis that the droop release invalid axis is set does not execute the droop release.

[Related signals]
(1) In current limit (ILIn)
(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)
(3) Current limit changeover (ILCn)
(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)
(5) Current limit changeover
(6) Droop release invalid axis

222
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y412 Y442 Y472 Y4A2 Y4D2 Y502 Y532 Y562
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION
A AZSn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
SET MODE
Y592 Y5C2 Y5F2 Y622 Y652 Y682 Y6B2 Y6E2

[Function]
This selects the zero point initialization set with the marked point alignment method I/II in the absolute position detection
system.
[Operation]
The zero point initialization set is selected with this signal.
Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.
(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the operation
mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.
(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.
- When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position detection system.
- When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4".
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)
(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)
(3) In initialization
(4) Initialization incomplete
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y413 Y443 Y473 Y4A3 Y4D3 Y503 Y533 Y563
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION
A ZSTn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
SET START
Y593 Y5C3 Y5F3 Y623 Y653 Y683 Y6B3 Y6E3

[Function]
This is used to set a random position as the origin during zero point initialization set using the marked point alignment
method in the absolute position detection system I/II.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when a corresponding axis is moved in the zero point initialization set mode, and the position to be
set as the zero point is reached.
Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.
(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the operation
mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.
(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.
- When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position detection system.
- When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4".
(Note 3) This signal will be invalid in the following states.
- During emergency stop
- During reset
- When the "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point initialization set
mode" (AZSn) signal. In this case, turn this signal OFF once, and then turn it ON again.
- When the grid (Z-phase signal provided per motor rotation) has not been passed once after the power is
turned ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)
(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)
(3) In initialization
(4) Initialization incomplete
(5) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

223
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y415 Y445 Y475 Y4A5 Y4D5 Y505 Y535 Y565
A UNCLAMP COMPLETION UCLPFn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y595 Y5C5 Y5F5 Y625 Y655 Y685 Y6B5 Y6E5

[Function]
This signal indicates that unclamping has been completed in respect to the unclamp command from the CNC.
[Operation]
When the unclamp command (UCLPn) signal turns ON, the clamp on the corresponding axis is released by the PLC,
and then this signal turns ON.
When the unclamp command (UCLPn) turns OFF, the corresponding axis is clamped by the PLC, and then this signal
turns OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Unclamp command (UCLPn)

224
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y416 Y446 Y476 Y4A6 Y4D6 Y506 Y536 Y566
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR
A MSORn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
REQUEST
Y596 Y5C6 Y5F6 Y626 Y656 Y686 Y6B6 Y6E6

[Function]
This signal is used to execute the multi-step speed monitor for the control axes.
This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".
(Note) Refer to "5.1 PLC Axis Control" when using PLC axes.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, NC operates as follows.
(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters.
(2) Checks if NC's speed monitor parameters match with the speed monitor parameters sent to the drive unit.
(3) Notifies a speed monitor command to the drive unit.
(4) Executes the speed monitor function on NC.
(5) Turns the "Speed monitor door open possible" signal ON when receiving the "In speed monitor mode" signal from
the drive unit.

The followings are monitored while the multi-step speed monitor function is executed.

Item Details
When a command speed that NC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with
Command speed monitoring
a parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.
When a motor rotation speed sent from the drive unit to NC exceeds a safety rotation speed
Feedback speed monitoring
set with the parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.
When a difference between feedback position sent from the drive unit to NC and a position
Feedback position monitoring
commanded by NC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

(Note) Use "Multi-step speed monitor input" (MSOMImn) to select which to use among the parameters from "#2181
sscfeed1 Safety observation speed 1" to "#2184 sscfeed4 Safety observation speed 4".

[Timing chart]

Multi-step speed
monitor request
Safety observation
speed
FB speed

In multi-step speed
monitor
Emergency stop

Changing the speed

[Caution]
(1) Be sure to confirm the deceleration speed of the axis before turning this signal ON. Turning the signal ON without
decelerating the speed will cause the safety observation warning due to the FB speed exceeding the monitoring
speed. The speed monitor mode will not be entered in the mean time.
(2) Turning this signal ON while a parameter error occurs will not start the speed monitor. Set the parameter to
appropriate value before turning the signal ON.
[Related signals]
(1) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)
(2) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)
(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

225
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y417 to Y447 to Y477 to Y4A7 to Y4D7 to Y507 to Y537 to Y567 to
418 448 478 4A8 4D8 508 538 568
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR
A MSOMImn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
MODE INPUT m
Y597 to Y5C7 to Y5F7 to Y627 to Y657 to Y687 to Y6B7 to Y6E7 to
598 5C8 5F8 628 658 688 6B8 6E8

[Function]
This signal designates which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-
step speed monitoring.

Multi-step speed monitor mode

input m Corresponding safety observation speed
Speed monitor mode to be selected
parameter
MSOMI2n MSOMI1n
0 0 1 #2181 sscfeed1
0 1 2 #2182 sscfeed2
1 0 3 #2183 sscfeed3
1 1 4 #2184 sscfeed4

This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".
[Operation]
When the signals' state is changed, the safety observation speed of the designated mode will be transferred to the drive
and the "Multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals' state will also be changed. (It will be changed
even when "In multi-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) is OFF.)

Multi-step speed monitor

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
mode input

NC side speed monitor Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

Drive side speed monitor Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

Multi-step speed monitor Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

mode output
Safety observation speed 1
Safety observation speed 2
FB speed Safety observation speed 3

* When changing the mode, be sure to decelerate before chaging it.

226
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Caution]
(1) Before changing these signals' state while "In multi-step speed monitor" is ON, be sure to decelerate the axis below
the monitor speed of the mode to be changed. When the signals' state has been changed before deceleration
starts, the safety observation warning will be output until the speed decelerates below the monitor speed of the
mode to be changed, and the speed monitor mode will not be changed in the meantime.
(2) Do not open the door before the "Multi-step speed monitor mode output" (MSOMOmn) signals for all axes in the
door are changed to the desired mode, even when the "In mult-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) signals are ON for all
axes in the door.

Multi-step speed monitor

request
In multi-step speed monitor
Speed Monitor speed of mode 1
Monitor speed of mode 2

Multi-step speed monitor mode Mode 1 Mode 2

input
Multi-step speed monitor mode Mode 1 Mode 2
output

Safety observation Safety observation

warning warning

[Related signals]
(1) Multi-step speed monitor (MSORn)
(2) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)
(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y41A Y44A Y47A Y4AA Y4DA Y50A Y53A Y56A
A COUNTER ZERO CNT0n 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y59A Y5CA Y5FA Y62A Y65A Y68A Y6BA Y6EA

[Function]
Set each axis's relative values displayed to "0".
[Operation]
The relative value counter of corresponding axis is set to "0" when this signal is ON.
[Caution]
- Only the relative value counter is set to "0" when this signal is ON. Workpiece coordinate value and the machine
position counter will not change.
- This signal is valid during the program operation.
- The relative values of the primary axis and the secondary axis will both be set to "0" when this signals for the primary
axis during the synchronous control is ON.
- This signal for the secondary axis is invalid during the synchronous control.
- The signal must be ON for at least 15ms.

227
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B
A PLC AXIS SWITCHING CHGPLCn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB

[Function]
This signal can switch between NC axis and PLC axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC axis. When it is turned OFF, it is controlled as the NC
axis.
Switch this signal after confirming the axis switching invalid signal is OFF.
When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while axis switching invalid signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/
PLC axis switch illegal 1250" will occur. If the axis switching invalid signal is OFF with this state, NC axis and PLC axis
are switched and the alarm will be cleared.
If this signal is switched while executing the axis movement command, NC axis and PLC axis will be switched when the
command is completed and the axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF.

PLC axis switching

(CHGPLCn)

Axis switching invalid status

(AXCHGISn)

Feedrate

In PLC axis control

(PLCMODEn) In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

(1) (2) (3)

(1) If the PLC switching signal is turned ON when the "axis switching invalid status" signal is OFF (switching is
permitted), the NC axis changes over to the PLC axis control state, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned
ON.
(2) The NC axis does not change over to the NC axis control by turning OFF the "PLC axis switching" signal when the
"axis switching invalid status" signal is ON (where switching is prohibited). An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch
illegal 1250" will occur.
(3) Axis switching invalid status signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. Then the NC axis changes
over to the NC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)
(2) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

228
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC
CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A JOG MODE Jn Y700 Y7E0 Y8C0 Y9A0 YA80 YB60 YC40

[Function]
JOG operation mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When JOG mode (Jn) signal turns ON, JOG operation mode is selected.
Axis motion is started by turning ON the "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal after turning ON the jog mode and
setting the "Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)" signal.
For rapid traverse, "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is turned ON together with this signal (Jn).
If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will
occur.
[Related signals]
(1)Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)
(2)Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(3)Rapid traverse (RTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A HANDLE MODE Hn Y701 Y7E1 Y8C1 Y9A1 YA81 YB61 YC41

[Function]
"Handle feed operation" mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When HANDLE mode (Hn) signal is turned ON, HANDLE FEED mode is selected.
Axis motion starts when the manual pulse generator handwheel is rotated after axis is selected by handle axis selection
code (HS1mn, HS1Sn, HS2mn, HS2Sn, HS3mn, HS3mn) and this signal is turned ON. Speed of the axis motion
depends on setting of feedrate magnification (Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)).
If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will
occur.
The handle feed speed is clamped at the rapid traverse speed (at the external deceleration speed when the external
deceleration is valid) .The speed clamping method can be selected from clamping with the feedrate by the parameter
"#1281 ext17/bit4" or clamping with the handle input pulse number.
[Related signals]
(1)1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn), 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)
(2)2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn), 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn) .....Valid only for handle 2-axis spec.
(3)3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn), 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn) ......Valid only for handle 3-axis spec.
(4)Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)

229
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A INCREMENTAL MODE Sn Y702 Y7E2 Y8C2 Y9A2 YA82 YB62 YC42

[Function]
INCREMENTAL FEED mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When incremental mode command (Sn) signal is turned ON, INCREMENTAL FEED mode is selected.
Each time "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal for desired axis is turned ON, axis motion starts. Speed of the axis
motion (incremental feed) depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m" (MPmn).
When "Rapid traverse" signal (RTn) is ON, speed is the rapid traverse speed. When signal (RTn) is OFF, speed is equal
to "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn).
If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101"
will occur.
(Note 1) The incremental mode is also called the step mode.
[Related signals]
(1)Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)
(2)Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)
(3)Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(4)Rapid traverse (RTn)

230
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A PTPn Y703 Y7E3 Y8C3 Y9A3 YA83 YB63 YC43
MODE

[Function]
Manual arbitrary feed mode in manual operation is selected.
[Operation]
Manual arbitrary feed mode is selected when this signal is turned ON ("1").
[Caution]
To turn the manual arbitrary feed mode ON, the rest of the manual modes and the automatic mode must be OFF (0).
Otherwise, this mode cannot be selected. (Note that this mode can be selected simultaneously when manual/automatic
simultaneous is valid.)
[Related signals]
(1)Signals from PLC to controller

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+073 +087 +101 +115 +129 +143 +157 <- Sharing G
Y790 Y870 Y950 YA30 YB10 YBF0 YCD0 CX11n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1
Y791 Y871 Y951 YA31 YB11 YBF1 YCD1 CX12n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2
Y792 Y872 Y952 YA32 YB12 YBF2 YCD2 CX14n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 4
Y793 Y873 Y953 YA33 YB13 YBF3 YCD3 CX18n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 8
Y794 Y874 Y954 YA34 YB14 YBF4 YCD4 CX116n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 16
Y795 Y875 Y955 YA35 YB15 YBF5 YCD5
Y796 Y876 Y956 YA36 YB16 YBF6 YCD6
Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7 CX1Sn Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid
Y798 Y878 Y958 YA38 YB18 YBF8 YCD8 CX21n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 1
Y799 Y879 Y959 YA39 YB19 YBF9 YCD9 CX22n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2
Y79A Y87A Y95A YA3A YB1A YBFA YCDA CX24n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4
Y79B Y87B Y95B YA3B YB1B YBFB YCDB CX28n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8
Y79C Y87C Y95C YA3C YB1C YBFC YCDC CX216n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16
Y79D Y87D Y95D YA3D YB1D YBFD YCDD
Y79E Y87E Y95E YA3E YB1E YBFE YCDE
Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF CX2Sn Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+074 +088 +102 +116 +130 +144 +158 <- Sharing G
Y7A0 Y880 Y960 YA40 YB20 YC00 YCE0 CX31n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 1
Y7A1 Y881 Y961 YA41 YB21 YC01 YCE1 CX32n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2
Y7A2 Y882 Y962 YA42 YB22 YC02 YCE2 CX34n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 4
Y7A3 Y883 Y963 YA43 YB23 YC03 YCE3 CX38n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 8
Y7A4 Y884 Y964 YA44 YB24 YC04 YCE4 CX316n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 16
Y7A5 Y885 Y965 YA45 YB25 YC05 YCE5
Y7A6 Y886 Y966 YA46 YB26 YC06 YCE6
Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7 CX3Sn Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid
Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8 CXS1n Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off
Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9 CXS2n Manual arbitrary feed axis independent
Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA CXS3n Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F
Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB CXS4n Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1
Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC CXS5n Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK
Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED CXS6n Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC
Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop
Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF CXS8n Manual arbitrary feed strobe

231
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
abbrev
Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Sharin Intern Signal name
.
gG al gG al gG al gG al gG al gG al gG al
+308 R2408 +408 R2508 +508 R2608 +608 R2708 +708 R2808 +808 R2908 +908 R3008 1st handle/incremental feed
+309 R2409 +409 R2509 +509 R2609 +609 R2709 +709 R2809 +809 R2909 +909 R3009 magnification
+310 R2410 +410 R2510 +510 R2610 +610 R2710 +710 R2810 +810 R2910 +910 R3010
2nd handle feed magnification
+311 R2411 +411 R2511 +511 R2611 +611 R2711 +711 R2811 +811 R2911 +911 R3011
+312 R2412 +412 R2512 +512 R2612 +612 R2712 +712 R2812 +812 R2912 +912 R3012
3rd handle feed magnification
+313 R2413 +413 R2513 +513 R2613 +613 R2713 +713 R2813 +813 R2913 +913 R3013
+314 R2414 +414 R2514 +514 R2614 +614 R2714 +714 R2814 +814 R2914 +914 R3014 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis
+315 R2415 +415 R2515 +515 R2615 +615 R2715 +715 R2815 +815 R2915 +915 R3015 travel amount
+316 R2416 +416 R2516 +516 R2616 +616 R2716 +716 R2816 +816 R2916 +916 R3016 Manual arbitrary feed 2st axis
+317 R2417 +417 R2517 +517 R2617 +617 R2717 +717 R2817 +817 R2917 +917 R3017 travel amount
+318 R2418 +418 R2518 +518 R2618 +618 R2718 +718 R2818 +818 R2918 +918 R3018 Manual arbitrary feed 3st axis
+319 R2419 +419 R2519 +519 R2619 +619 R2719 +719 R2819 +819 R2919 +919 R3019 travel amount
(2) Signals from controller to PLC
(a)In manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPOn)
(b)In manual arbitrary feed (CXNn)
(c)Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFINn)
(3)Other
(a)Feedrate least increment m (PCFmn)
(b)Manual/automatic simultaneous valid (MAEn)

232
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
REFERENCE POSITION RE-
A ZRNn Y704 Y7E4 Y8C4 Y9A4 YA84 YB64 YC44
TURN MODE

[Function]
The reference position return mode is selected.
"Reference position return" is that axis motion component (tool, table, etc.) is returned to the position previously
determined for individual machine.
[Operation]
The reference position return mode is selected when the "Reference position return mode" signal (ZRNn) is turned ON.
Select the reference position return mode, and turn ON the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal of designated axis to
return to the reference position.
If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101"
will occur.

The first reference position return after the controller power is turned ON is the dog-type return (excluding when the basic
machine coordinate system is established for the absolute position detection specifications). After the second manual
reference position return (when basic machine coordinate system is established), the dog-type return or the high-speed
return is selected with the machine parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063 mandog".
(1) Dog-type reference position return pattern
The return pattern is determined by the final entry method of the machine parameter reference position return.

(a) Operation when axis is moved in same (b) When axis is moved in opposite
direction as the final entry method, and direction from final entry method,
dog is tripped. and dog is tripped.

Parameter’s final Parameter’s final

entry method entry method

Near-point dog Near-point dog

Reference position Reference position

- After the near-point dog is detected and the approach speed is applied, the axis will move to the reference position
even if the Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal is turned OFF. Thus, after the approach speed is applied,
another axis can be switched to and reference position return executed.
- The entry direction (final entry direction) after the near-point dog is tripped is set with parameters.
- The feedrate before the approach speed is the reference position return feedrate if the "Rapid traverse"(RTn) signal is
ON, and the "Manual feedrate code m"(*JVmn) is OFF.
- The approach speed is set with the parameters.
- When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal is
ON, and the "1st reference position reached"(ZP1n) signal will turn ON.
(2) High-speed reference position return
- The axis will move toward the reference position. The motion speed will be rapid traverse if the rapid traverse signal is
ON, and manual feedrate if OFF.
- When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn)" signal is
ON, and the "1st reference position reached"(ZP1n) signal will turn ON.
- "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal for high-speed return is enabled only in the reference position direction. If the
opposite direction signal is designated, the NC alarm "M01 Operation Error 0003" will occur.
[Related signals]
(1) Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn,-Jn)
(2) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(3) Rapid traverse (RTn)
(4) 1st reference position reached (ZP1n)

233
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION
A ASTn Y705 Y7E5 Y8C5 Y9A5 YA85 YB65 YC45
MODE

[Function]
The automatic initialization mode is selected.
[Operation]
This mode is selected when automatic initialization is to be carried out with the machine end stopper method of absolute
position detection.
The initialization is started when the automatic initialization mode is selected, and the "Feed axis selection +/- "(+Jn,-Jn)
signal in the direction of the machine end of the axis to be initialized is turned ON.
(Note 1) The automatic initialization mode is invalid when the absolute position detector is not provided and when the
machine end stopper method is not selected for the absolute position detection.
(During feed axis selection, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0024" will occur.)
(Note 2) This mode will not start in the following cases of the machine end stopper method absolute position detection.
(The message "Start not possible" will display.)
- When "#0 Absolute posn set" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is not set to "1".
- When "#2 Zero-P" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen has not been set.
- When "#2055 pushf" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen has not been set.
- When "Z71 0005" has occurred.

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
PROGRAM OPERATION MODE
A MEMn Y708 Y7E8 Y8C8 Y9A8 YA88 YB68 YC48
(MEMORY MODE)

[Function]
Memory mode of automatic operation is selected.
In this mode of operation, automatic operation is based on programs stored in the memory.
[Operation]
- Memory mode is selected when "Program operation mode (Memory mode)"(MEMn) signal turns ON.
- The program is started with the "Automatic operation "start" command"(STn) signal.
- If the automatic operation mode is duplicated or canceled during automatic operation, the NC alarm "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur, and the block will stop.
- If the manual operation mode is entered or the program is duplicated with the manual operation mode during
automatic operation, the NC alarm will occur, and automatic operation will stop. However, the manual and
automatic programs can be duplicated if manual/automatic simultaneous operation is valid.
(Note 1) Even when operation mode is other than automatic operation, illegal mode, if selected, causes operation error.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)
(2) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A FTP MODE FTPn Y709 Y7E9 Y8C9 Y9A9 YA89 YB69 YC49

[Function]
This signal designates the FTP mode as the operation mode.
[Operation]
After starting up automatically with FTP mode, it starts executing the machining program which is downloaded to the
buffer memory.

234
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A MDI MODE Dn Y70B Y7EB Y8CB Y9AB YA8B YB6B YC4B

[Function]
MDI (Manual Data Input) mode of automatic operation is selected.
Automatic operation is performed with the program set in the MDI screen.
[Operation]
- MDI mode is selected when "MDI mode" (Dn) signal turns ON.
- The program is started with the "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal.
- If the automatic operation mode is duplicated or canceled during automatic operation, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION
ERROR 0101" will occur, and the block will stop.
- If the manual operation mode is entered or the program is duplicated with the manual operation mode during automatic
operation, the NC alarm will occur, and automatic operation will stop. However, the manual and automatic programs
can be duplicated if manual/automatic simultaneous operation is valid.
(Note 1) Even when operation mode is other than automatic operation, illegal mode, if selected, causes operation error.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)
(2) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A "START" COMMAND STn Y710 Y7F0 Y8D0 Y9B0 YA90 YB70 YC50
(Cycle start)

[Function]
This signal is used to start automatic operation in MEMORY mode, MDI mode, or to restart after automatic operation
pause (halt) or block stop.
[Operation]
(1) "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal arises when the pressed "auto operation start" pushbutton is
released (i.e. at the time the signal turns OFF). The signal must be ON for a min. of 100msec.
(2) "In automatic operation "start"" signal (STLn) turns ON when the pressed "auto operation start" pushbutton is
released, and turns OFF when "auto operation pause (or halt)" pushbutton is pressed or block stop occurs in single-
block operation.
(3) Signal (STn) is invalid when:
- Automatic operation starts.
- Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn) signal is OFF.
- During reset ("Reset & rewind" signal is ON).
- During alarm.
- Sequence No. is being searched for.
(4) Automatic operation stops or is suspended or block stops when:
- Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn) signal turns OFF.
- Reset occurs ("Reset & rewind" signal turns ON).
- Alarm which causes stop to automatic operation occurs.
- Automatic operation mode is changed to manual operation mode.
- Mode is changed to other automatic operation mode and then the block in execution is completed.
- Block in execution is completed after "Single-block" (SBKn) signal turns ON.
- Block in execution is completed after "Automatic machine lock" (AMKLn) signal turns ON.
- Program specified in MDI mode has been executed completely.
[Related signals]
(1) Program operation mode (Memory mode) (MEMn)
(2) MDI mode (Dn)

235
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
B "PAUSE" COMMAND *SPn Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51
(Feed hold)

[Function]
During automatic operation, axis motion can be decelerated and stopped with this command signal. To restart, press
"Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal pushbutton.
[Operation]
(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal turns OFF, automatic operation stops.
- During automatic operation, the operation stops. "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) occurs.
- Restart with the automatic start (STn) button. (Press after turning *SP signal.)
(2) In the following cases, automatic operation does not immediately stop.
Operation will continue to where stopping is possible, and then will stop.
- During tapping in fixed cycle.
Automatic operation stops when tapping is completed and the tool returns to "R" point.
- During thread cutting.
Automatic operation stops when a block for axis motion (other than thread cutting), which comes first after the
"Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal turns OFF, is completed. If the "Automatic operation
"pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal remains OFF, however, automatic operation stops immediately
after a block (other than thread cutting) is given.
- When control variable "feed hold invalid" has been set by user macro.
Automatic operation stops immediately after a block where the control variable "feed hold invalid" is cleared
starts.
(3) "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is valid even during machine lock.
[Related signals]
(1)Program operation mode (Memory mode) (MEMn)
(2)MDI mode (Dn)
(3)Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

236
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A SINGLE BLOCK SBKn Y712 Y7F2 Y8D2 Y9B2 YA92 YB72 YC52

[Function]
Machining program can be executed block by block in automatic operation.
[Operation]
(1) When "Single block" (SBKn) signal turns ON, operation of controller is as follows:
- During automatic operation
After the block in execution has been completed, automatic operation stops. To start execution of the next
block, "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) must be turned ON to OFF.
- There will be no operation when automatic operation is not being executed but if automatic operation is started
with the "Single block" (SBKn) signal ON, one block will be executed and then will stop. This allows the
commanded program to be executed one block at a time.
(2) If the "Single block" (SBKn) signal is ON at the end of a block, operation will normally stop immediately. However, in
the following case, operation will continue to where stopping is possible, and then will stop.
- During cycle operation such as a fixed cycle.
The block where single block is being received will differ according to each cycle. Refer to the cycle sections in
the Programming Manual.

Single block signal (SBK)

Automatic operation "start"

command (ST)
G00 X100 … G01 Y100 … G01 X10 Y20 …
Axis motion block

SBK turns ON at start SBK switches during axis motion SBK turns ON after completion
(INVALID) (VALID) of block
(VALID)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
B BLOCK START INTERLOCK *BSLn Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53

[Function]
This signal prohibits start of the next block in automatic operation (memory, MDI).
[Operation]
While the "Block start interlock" (*BSLn) signal is OFF, execution of the next block may not be started in automatic
operation. When the signal is given during execution of a block, the execution of the block continues until it is completed.
Since the signal does not cause stop or suspension of automatic operation, execution of program starts when the "Block
start interlock" (*BSLn) signal turns ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated in controller by fixed cycle, etc.
(Note 2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.
[Related signals]
(1) Cutting block start interlock (*CSLn)

237
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
CUTTING BLOCK START IN-
B *CSLn Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54
TERLOCK

[Function]
This signal prohibits start of an axis motion command block other than that for positioning in automatic operation
(memory, MDI).
[Operation]
While the "Cutting block start interlock" (*CSLn) signal is OFF, execution of an axis motion command block other than
that for positioning may not be started in automatic operation. When the signal is given during execution of a block, the
execution of the block continues until it is completed.
Since the signal does not cause stop or suspension of automatic operation, execution of program starts when the
"Cutting block start interlock" (*CSLn) signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated by fixed cycle, etc.
(Note 2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.
[Related signals]
(1) Block start interlock (*BSLn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A DRY RUN DRNn Y715 Y7F5 Y8D5 Y9B5 YA95 YB75 YC55

[Function]
Feedrate in automatic operation is specified by manually set value instead of program command value (F value).
[Operation]
(1) DRY RUN signal given during cutting feed
- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON, the cutting feedrate is equal to the maximum cutting feedrate.
In this case, "cutting feedrate override" and "rapid traverse override" are ignored.
- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF, the set "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn) will apply.
Cutting feed override will also be valid if the "Manual override method selection" (OVSLn) signal is ON.
(2) Dry run signal given during rapid traverse
- The parameter must be turned ON to validate dry run for rapid traverse (G0, G27, G28, G29, G30).
- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON, the "Dry run" signal is ignored.
- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF, the speed is equal to manually set speed.
(Note 1) Dry run is not applicable to manual operation.
(Note 2) Dry run is valid even during G84 or G74 operation.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(2) Rapid traverse (RTn)
(3) Manual override method selection (OVSLn)

238
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A ERROR DETECTION ERDn Y717 Y7F7 Y8D7 Y9B7 YA97 YB77 YC57

[Function]
Machine motion is stopped momentarily in transition from a cutting feed block to other block during automatic operation
to provide time for determination whether in-position check is made or not before start of the next block.
Block-to-block transition may cause rounding in cutting because of delay caused by acceleration or deceleration, and
servo response delay. Rounding can be eliminated by stopping the machine motion between the blocks by turning the
"Error detection" (ERDn) signal ON.
[Operation]
When this "Error detection" (ERDn) signal is ON in block-to-block transition during cutting in automatic operation, in-
position check is accomplished. If the signal is OFF, the next block starts after completion of the preceding block without
stop.

Error detection (ERD)

Axis motion
X axis cutting feed Y axis cutting X axis cutting feed
feed

OFF ON
X axis X axis

The next motion starts The next motion starts

without machine stop. Y axis Y axis after machine stop.

(Note 1) In general practice, the signal (ERDn) is turned ON and OFF using an appropriate miscellaneous function (M
code, etc.) so that command program can determine whether machine motion should be stopped or not. When
the signal is ON, the status is same as the case where G09 is specified by the command program.
Consequently, it is recommended to use G function unless otherwise required especially.

239
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NC RESET 1 NRST1n Y718 Y7F8 Y8D8 Y9B8 YA98 YB78 YC58

[Function]
This signal is used to reset the control unit.
[Operation]
When this signal (NRST1n) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.
Generally, the signal for the reset button of the setting and display unit for CNC exclusive use is set to "NC reset 1"
(NRST1n). At this time, the control unit will take the following actions.
(1) The G command modal will be held.
(2) The tool compensation data will be held.
(3) The memory will be indexed.
(4) The error/alarm will be reset.
(5) The MST code output will be held.
(6) The M independent output M00 to M30 (DM00n to Dm30n) will turn OFF.
(7) The axis movement will stop.
(8) The "In reset" (RSTn) signal will be output.

NC reset 1 (NRST1)

In reset (RST)

[Related signals]
(1) NC reset 2 (NRST2n)
(2) Reset & rewind (RRWn)
(3) In "reset" (RSTn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NC RESET 2 NRST2n Y719 Y7F9 Y8D9 Y9B9 YA99 YB79 YC59

[Function]
This signal is used to reset the control unit.
[Operation]
When this signal (NRST2n) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.
Generally, this is turned ON when the miscellaneous function M02 or M30 is executed. In some cases, the "Reset &
Rewind" (RRWn) explained later is used.
At this time, the control unit will take the following actions.
(1) The G command modal will be initialized.
(2) The tool compensation data will be canceled. (Will not be applied.)
(3) The memory will not be indexed.
(4) The error/alarm will be reset.
(5) The MST code output will be held.
(6) The M independent output M00 to M30 (DM00n to Dm30n) will turn OFF.
(7) The axis movement will stop.
(8) The "In reset" signal (RSTn) will be output.

NC reset 2 (NRST2)

In reset (RST)

[Related signals]
(1) NC reset 1 (NRST1n)
(2) Reset & rewind (RRW:n)
(3) In "reset" (RSTn)

240
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A RESET & REWIND RRWn Y71A Y7FA Y8DA Y9BA YA9A YB7A YC5A

[Function]
This signal resets the controller.
During memory operation, the head of the machining program currently being run can be called out.
The reset button in the setting and display unit for CNC exclusive use may be set to "Reset & rewind" (RRWn).
According to the operation condition, it is set in either "NC reset 1" (NRST1n) or "Reset & rewind" (RRWn).
[Operation]
When this signal (RRWn) turns ON:
(1) Ongoing axis motion is decelerated and stopped.
(2) CNC is reset after axis motion stops. In about 0.5 second after CNC is reset, "In reset" (RSTn) signal turns ON.
(3) At the same time as CNC is reset, "In rewind" (RWDn) signal turns ON.
- In memory operation mode, the head of program in execution is read (memory index).
(4) While the signal (RRWn) is ON, automatic operation and manual operation are impossible.
(5) G command modal is initialized.
(6) Tool compensation (offset) data are canceled (no motion).
(7) Error/alarm is reset.
(8) M, S, T code outputs are held. (Strobe signal turns OFF.)
(9) M independent output (M00 to M30 (DM00n to DM30n)) is turned OFF.
<Operation example>
The process when M02 or M30 are commanded in the program is shown below.
Generally, when M02 (or M30) is executed by the program, this signal (RRWn) will be returned when the
designated operation is completed. M function finish 1 (FIN1n) and M function finish 2 (FIN2n) will not be returned.
(Refer to *1 in the following drawing.)

M02 (M02), M30 (M30)

*1

Reset & rewind (RRW)

In reset (RST)
About 0.5 s

In rewind (RWD) This interval is unknown.

M function finish 1,2 (FIN1, FIN2)

[Related signals]
(1) In reset (RSTn)
(2) In rewind (RWDn)

241
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
B CHAMFERING *CDZn Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B

[Function]
In thread cutting cycle, chamfering can be ignored.
[Operation]
Status of this signal is determined at start of thread cutting cycle.
- CHAMFERING (*CDZn) is OFF.
Chamfering (at end of thread cutting) is accomplished.

Tool nose path

Chamfer section
Thread section

- CHAMFERING (*CDZn) is ON.

Chamfering is not accomplished (signal is ignored).

Tool nose path

Thread section

242
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A AUTOMATIC RESTART ARSTn Y71C Y7FC Y8DC Y9BC YA9C YB7C YC5C

[Function]
If this signal is turned ON after the end of the machining program execution, the same machining program will be
restarted.
[Operation]
The same machining program will restart if this signal is turned ON during automatic start.
[Timing chart]

N01 …… ;
Program example Program indexing
N04 …… ; Head block
N05 M02 ;

Machining program N03 … ; N04 … ; N05 M02 ; N01 … ; N02 … ;

M code M02

In automatic operation "start"

(STLn)
Automatic restart
Miscellaneous function strobe

M single output

In rewind
(RWDn) *1

Automatic restart
(ARSTn) *2

*1:Rewind time During memory operation …approx. 0.1 to 0.2

Program indexing time is a moment, so its time might not be confirmed by sequence program.

*2:Refer to Note 8.

(Note 1) The modal is initialized with this signal.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only during automatic start.
(Note 3) This signal is valid during the memory and MDI automatic operation modes.
(Note 4) Normally, "M code independent output" signal for M02 or M30 is input into this signal, but in this case, do not
input the M02 or M30 completion signal (FIN1n, FIN2n).
(Note 5) If the "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is valid, the "Automatic restart" signal
will be invalid.
(Note 6) This signal is invalid during single block stop.
(Note 7) Note that if an M command other than M02 or M30 is input into this signal, the program will return to the start
point without completing the program, and the program will be restarted.
(Note 8) If "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) are applied during the auto restart process (*2 section in time chart above), the
modal will be initialized and the tape will be rewound, but the "Automatic restart" signal will be invalid.

243
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE EXTSSn Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D

[Function] [Operation]
The CNC CPU starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.
The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the operation search blocks are shown below.
The designated block No. is added to the operation search block No. which is searched by operation search.

Condition
Operation search block
Program No. Sequence No.
Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program
Designated Not designated (=0) Head of designated program
Not designated (=0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program
Not designated (=0) Not designated (=0) Error: 4 (Refer to "External search status")

(Example) If program No. 100, sequence No. 300 and block No. 2 are designated, operation search is executed for the
block with(*).
O100()
N0100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;
M3 S1000;
N0200 G0 Z100.;
G0 X100. Y0.;
N0300 G01 Z50. F1000;
G01 Y10.;
G01 Z0. F100; ......... (*)
G00 Z50.
N0400 G0 Z100.;
M30;
(Note) The block No. is designated with the number of blocks following the last sequence No.
[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search status
(3) External search device No.
(4) External search program No.
(5) External search sequence No.
(6) External search block No.

244
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A M FUNCTION FINISH 1 FIN1n Y71E Y7FE Y8DE Y9BE YA9E YB7E YC5E

[Function]
This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function, tool (T) function
or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side.
[Operation]
If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each function strobe
(MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) will turn ON.
When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or B function has been specified, it performs that function(s) and,
after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal turns OFF.
When the controller verifies that signal FIN1n turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding function.
The PLC checks that each strobe signal turns OFF, then turns OFF FIN1n.
With the signal FIN1n turned OFF, the controller proceeds to the next block.

An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:

Command program M08 Next block

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

There are two "M function finish" signals, namely, "M function finish 1" and "M function finish 2" (Refer to the next page).
The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at the rising edge. These can be used
separately per operation in one PLC.
(Note 1) "M function finish" (FIN1n) signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.
(Note 2) The "M function finish 1" signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S command data,
etc.) during S function execution.
(Note 3) If signal FIN1 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or B function are
not output. To output, the signal FIN1 should be turned OFF once.
(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) signal is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish" 1 or 2 signal
should not be sent back. If the M function finish 1 (2) signal is return with the M02 command at the end of the
machining program, the NC alarm "P36 PROGRAM END ERR" will occur.
[Related signals]
(1) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)
(2) M, S, T, B function strobe (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n)
(3) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R)
(4) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

245
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A M FUNCTION FINISH 2 FIN2n Y71F Y7FF Y8DF Y9BF YA9F YB7F YC5F

[Function]
This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function, tool (T) function
or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side. When too much signals FIN1 must be used,
this signal can be used instead of signal FIN1 to save time.
[Operation]
If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each function strobe
(MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) will turn ON.
When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or 2nd M function has been specified, it performs that function(s)
and, after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.
When the controller verifies that signal FIN2n turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding function.
When each strobe signal turns OFF, the PLC turns OFF signal FIN2n. With the signal FIN2n turned OFF, the controller
proceeds to the next block.
An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:

Command program M08 Next block

M function strobe (MF1)

M function finish 2 (FIN2)

There are two types of M function finish signals, namely, "M function finish 1" (refer to the previous page) and "M function
finish 2". The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at the rising edge. These can be
used separately per operation in one PLC.
(Note 1) "M function finish 2 (FIN2n)" signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.
(Note 2) The M function finish 2 signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S command data, etc.)
during S function execution.
(Note 3) If signal FIN2 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or B function are
not output.
(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" signal (RRWn) is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish" 2 or 1 signal
should not be sent back. If the "M function finish 2 (1)" signal is return with the M02 command at the end of the
machining program, the NC alarm "P36 PROGRAM END ERR" will occur.
[Related signals]
(1) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)
(2) M, S, T, B function strobe (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n)
(3) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R)
(4) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE-
A TLMn Y720 Y800 Y8E0 Y9C0 YAA0 YB80 YC60
MENT 1

[Function]
"Tool length manual measurement 1" is selected by this signal.
For M system, "Tool length manual measurement 1 and 2" functions are used by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (TLMn) is turned ON (1), amount of tool length to be corrected is calculated automatically in the
controller.
[Caution]
(1) This signal is invalid if the tool length data screen (L system)/tool compensation screen (M system) is not selected.
(2) The calculation result is read when INPUT key is pressed.

246
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE-
A TLMSn Y721 Y801 Y8E1 Y9C1 YAA1 YB81 YC61
MENT 2

[Function]
"Tool length measurement 2" is selected by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (TLMSn) is turned ON, calculation of tool length compensation amount is automatically started in the
controller.
When skip signal is input during tool length measurement, amount of tool length to be corrected is calculated.
[Timing chart]

Manual mode
Measurement mode
Tool length measurement 2
(TLMS)

Controller internal interlock

Manual feed

Tool measurement sensor

[Caution]
(1) To use the tool length measurement 2 function, select manual operation mode.
Otherwise, tool length measurement mode cannot be established.
(2) "Tool length measurement 2" can be used with a machine equipped with tool measurement sensor.
The sensor for tool length measurement is connected to the connector "CON3" No. 24 pin ON the controller unit.
(3) The calculation result is read automatically inside the controller.
(4) With tool length measurement 2, multiple part systems cannot be measured simultaneously.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool No.

247
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
SYNCHRONIZATION CORREC-
A SYCMn Y722 Y802 Y8E2 Y9C2 YAA2 YB82 YC62
TION MODE

[Function]
When the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0051" (Synchronization error too large) occurs, the occurring error is corrected
without changing the operation method with this mode.
[Operation]
In the correction mode, the operation is as follows.
(1) The synchronous control is not carried out even in the secondary axis, and the primary axis and secondary
axis are handled as independent two axes in the each control part. Thus, the primary axis and secondary axis
can be moved individually.
(2) If the zero point has established, the synchronization error check is carried out.
(3) If the correction mode switch is turned ON during selecting the mode except the handle or manual arbitrary
feed mode, the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120" (Synchronization correction mode ON) will occur.
In the handle or manual arbitrary feed mode, if the correction mode switch is turned ON, the correction mode can be set
and "CORRECTION MODE" will be displayed in the operation mode display position.
The operation procedure is shown below.

Start

Correction mode ON

Handle or manual Yes

arbitrary feed mode?

No Display the message

"M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120"
Select the handle or manual (in the synchronization correction).
arbitrary feed mode.

"CORRECTION MODE" is
displayed in the operation mode
Select the axis to be moved display position.
between the primary axis and
secondary axis.
Only the axis selected between the
Move the axis primary axis and secondary axis is
moved.

Correction mode OFF The mode returns to the

Synchronization mode, and the
mode display becomes "HANDLE"
End or "MANUAL ARBITRARY".

[Related signals]
(1) Synchronous control operation method selection

248
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A PROGRAM RESTART SRN Y723 Y803 Y8E3 E9C3 YAA3 YB83 YC63

[Function]
With the program restart function, when the axis is returned to the restart position with the manual mode after the restart
search is performed, the direction can be checked, or the axis can be stopped at the restart position.
[Operation]
If the "Program restart" signal (SRN) is turned ON after the restart search is performed and the axis is moved to the
restart position direction with the manual mode, the axis is stopped at the restart position automatically. The
[RESTARTR] values on the program restart screen are set to zero and "RP" appears by the side of the [RESTART-P]
values. If the axis is moved in the opposite direction to the restart position, an OPERATION ERROR will occur.

[RESTART . (G54)] [RESTART . R]

X -130.000 RP X 0.000
Y -10.000 RP Y 0.000
Z 0.000 RP Z 0.000

(Note) When "#1302 AutoRP (Automatic return by program restart)" is set to "1", it recovers by the automatic start to
the position at the same speed as when dry run (DRN) is turned ON, and all axes start machining after the
restart position recovery is completed. Therefore, the program restart signal is not necessary. Even when
"#1302 AutoRP (Automatic return by program restart)" is set to "1", the restart position recovery is possible by
manually turning the program restart signal (SRN) ON.

249
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A MACRO INTERRUPT UITn Y725 Y805 Y8E5 Y9C5 YAA5 YB85 YC65

[Function]
When the controller is ready for user macro interrupt, the program being in execution can be interrupted, or other
program can be executed after the former program has been executed, by turning ON "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal.
[Operation]
When "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal turns ON within time interval starting with M96 command and ending with M97
command or reset, the program being in execution can be interrupted for execution of other program.
"Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal becomes valid when:
(1) Memory, tape or MDI is selected.
(2) Automatic operation is selected (signal STLn is ON).
(3) Other user macro is not being executed.

"Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is accepted in "status trigger" method or "edge trigger" method, either one of which can
be selected by parameter #1112.
(1) Status trigger method
While "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is ON, the signal can be accepted.
When M96 is used to make acceptable user macro interrupt, the inserted program is executed when the signal
(UITn) turns ON.
With the signal (UITn) kept turned ON, inserted program can be executed repeatedly.
(2) Edge trigger method
The signal (UITn) is accepted when its status changes from "OFF" to "ON" (i.e., with rise edge of signal).
This method is advantageous when inserted program is executed only once.
<Command format>

M96 P_ H_ ;•••••••••••User macro interrupt valid

Interrupt sequence No.
Interrupt program No.
M97; ••••••••••• User macro interrupt invalid

Refer to the relevant "Programming Manual" for details on the user macro interrupt function such as interrupt
method and call method for when the "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is ON.

(Note 1) M96 and M97 can be changed to other M code by using a parameter.
(Note 2) User macro interrupt control M code is processed internally and not output to an external source (PLC).

250
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A RAPID TRAVERSE RTn Y726 Y806 Y8E6 Y9C6 YAA6 YB86 YC66

[Function]
Speed or feedrate of axis motion in "JOG" mode, "incremental feed" mode or "reference position return" mode can be
changed to rapid traverse speed.
[Operation]
When the signal (RTn) is turned ON.
(1) The jog and incremental feedrate will be the rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.
(2) The speed until the near-point detection dog signal is detected during dog-type reference position return will be
the reference position return rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.
(3) Speed or feedrate is changed at the same time as the signal is turned ON.When the signal (RTn) is turned
OFF, rapid traverse speed changes to the previous speed or feedrate.
"Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal may be kept turned ON.
(4) The speed will be the rapid traverse feedrate until the near point dog signal is detected during jog, incremental
feed or reference position return. The rapid traverse override will also be valid.
(5) The "Rapid traverse override code m" (ROVmn) will be validated when the "Rapid traverse" signal is ON.

JOG mode (Jn)

Feed axis selection

(+Jn)
Rapid traverse (RTn)

1st axis motion [+]

Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
speed speed

Manual feedrate speed Manual feedrate speed

(Note 1) "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal does not act as mode signal, but serves as interrupt signal for "JOG" mode,
"INCREMENTAL FEED" mode, etc.
(Note 2) This signal can be used likewise during machine lock.
(Note 3) For handling of "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal during dry run, refer to the description about dry run signal
(DRNn).
[Related signals]
(1) Rapid traverse override code m (ROVmn)

251
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A MANUAL ABSOLUTE ABSn Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68

[Function]
This signal selects whether to update the program coordinate system the amount moved with manual operation (jog,
handle, etc.).
[Operation]
(1) When "Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is OFF:
The amount moved with manual operation is not added to the absolute position register in the controller. Thus, if
manual is used during automatic operation, the axis will move in parallel the amount moved manually at the end
point of the block and the end point of the following blocks. (The axis will move in parallel regardless of the absolute/
incremental command in the machining program.)

X axis
Stop caused by feed hold
Programmed path
(absolute command)

Interrupt by manual
operation

Start after manual interrupt

Z axis Locus shifts the amount moved

with manual interrupt.

(2) When "Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is ON:

The amount moved by manual operation is added to the absolute position register in the controller, and the
coordinate system is not changed. Thus, if manual operation is used during automatic operation by absolute
command, the axis will return to the position commanded at the end of the inserted block and following blocks.
However, if the manual interrupt is an incremental command, the axis will move in parallel the amount moved
manually. (The axis will move in parallel regardless of the absolute/incremental command at the end of the inserted
block.)

X axis
Stop caused by feed hold
Programmed path
(absolute command)

Interrupt by manual
operation

Start after manual interrupt

Z axis
Pass the same path as commanded in
the machining program

252
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A RECALCULATION REQUEST CRQn Y72B Y80B Y8EB Y9CB YAAB YB8B YC6B

[Function]
This signal is turned ON if a calculated block (next block) is recalculated during operation of the machining program.
[Operation]
For example, to operate mirror image, etc., with the miscellaneous (M) command in the program.
∫
N1 M45; To apply mirror image with this M command
N2 G0X100;
∫
When the N1 block is reached in the above program example, the "Recalculate request" signal will turn ON before FIN is
output or simultaneously with FIN. This will validate the mirror image from the N2 block.

Execution block N1 M45;

M function strobe (MF)

Recalculate request (CRQ)

Auxiliary function finish (FIN)

Control unit latches rising edge

Calculate next block N1 M45; N2 G0X100;

N2 G0X100 calculation start Recalculate N2 G0X100

Mirror image ON

[Caution]
The "Recalculation request" (CRQn) signal latches the rising edge in the controller. Thus, even if the "Recalculation
request" (CRQn) signal is ON (1), the "recalculation" will not take place unless at the rising edge.

253
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
PROGRAM DISPLAY DURING
A PDISPn Y72C Y80C Y8EC Y9CC YAAC YB8C YC6C
OPERATION

[Function]
This signal is used to display a program on the Word Edit screen during operation.
[Operation]
When the "Program display during operation" signal (PDISPn) turns ON, the program being operatedwill appear in the
program display of the EDIT screen.
[Caution]
Word editing function enables editing a machining program in operation in the foreground edit mode (with the Program
display during operation signal (Y72C) turned OFF) even in an automatic operation as long as it is in a block stop.
When the automatic start up is executed after the editing, the operation may start from an unintended location, and it
may cause program errors or unintended operations. Therefore, create a sequence program in which automatic start is
disabled during in the foreground edit mode (with the Program display during operation signal (Y72C) turned OFF) .

Edit mode 
Y70A EDIT mode 
Y70A
Y72C Program display during
operation
Automatic start

Y710 
Automatic Operation Start
Y72C

254
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
Y72D Y80D Y8ED Y9CD YAAD YB8D YC6D
A OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m BDTmn Y738 - Y818 - Y8F8 - Y9D8 - YAB8 - YB98 - YC78 -
73F 81F 8FF 9DF ABF B9F C7F

[Function]
Block accompanying "/n (n: 1 to 9)" (slash) can be skipped.
By creating a machining program with a "/" code inserted, a different part can be machined with one program.
[Operation]
(1)When a program having a block with "/n" (slash code) placed at the head of block is executed with "Optional block
skip mn" (BDTmn) signal turned ON, the block is skipped. The block with the "/n" code in the middle instead of at the
head will be executed.
When the signal is OFF, block with "/n" is executed.

(Example)If machining the two parts as illustrated below, create the following program. When machining with the
"Optional block skip mn" (BDTmn) signal ON, part 1 will be provided. With the signal OFF, part 2 will be provided.
<Program>
N1 G54;
N2 G90G81X50. Z-20. R3. F100;
/1N3 X30.;
N4 X10.;
N5 G80;
M02;
(Note) "1" of "/1N3 X30.;" can be omitted.

Part 1 Part 2
Optional block skip ON Optional block skip OFF

N4 N2 N4 N3 N2

255
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
REFERENCE POSITION SE- Y730 - Y810 - Y8F0 - Y9D0 - YAB0 - YB90 - YC70 -
A ZSLmn
LECTION CODE m 731 811 8F1 9D1 AB1 B91 C71

[Function]
It is also possible to return to the nth reference position in the manual reference position return mode. This signal is used
to select the number of the reference position (n) to return to. Normally both the "Reference position selection code 1, 2"
(ZSL1n, ZSL2n) signals are turned OFF, and 1st point reference position return is performed.
[Operation]
"Reference position selection code 1, 2" (ZSL1n, ZSL2n) signals are valid when:
(1) Reference position return mode is ON ("1").
(2) Manual start condition is held.

Reference position selection code 2 Reference position selection code 1 Return position
0 0 1st reference position
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position

(Note 1) Returning to the first reference position must be performed before returning to the second, third or forth
reference position.

Even when "Reference position selection code"

signal changes during axis movement, point
selected at start of motion is held.

Reference position return mode

Reference position selection code N-th reference position return request

No change

Manual start (Feed axis selection (+)/(-)) Goes to n-th reference position

In axis motion

N-th reference position reached

[Related signals]
(1) Reference position return mode (ZRN)
(2) Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)
(3) Mth reference position reached (ZP1n to ZP4n)

256
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
REFERENCE POSITION SE-
A Mn Y737 Y817 Y8F7 Y9D7 YAB7 YB97 YC77
LECTION METHOD

[Function]
This signal selects whether the reference position selection is common for all axes or independent for each axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is OFF, the reference position selection is common for all axes, and Reference position selection code
m (ZSLmn) are valid.
When this signal is ON, the reference position selection is independent for each axis, and "Each axis reference position
select" is valid.
[Related signals]
(1) Reference position selection code m (ZSLmn)
(2) Each axis reference position select

257
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
1ST HANDLE AXIS SELECTION Y740 - Y820 - Y900 - Y9E0 - YAC0 - YBA0 - YC80 -
A HS1mn
CODE m 744 824 904 9E4 AC4 BA4 C84

[Function]
In HANDLE mode (handwheel is operated), axis component to be moved is selected.
In the case of 2-axis or 3-axis handle specification (two or three handles are required), axis is selected for the 1st handle.
[Operation]
For axis motion in HANDLE mode:
(1) Select HANDLE mode.
(2) Specify axis No. for 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn).
(3) Turn ON "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn) signal (later described).
(4) Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.
The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

Handle axis No.

HS HS HS HS HS HS 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
- -
1Sn 116n 18n 14n 12n 11n
Motion axis
X axis (1st axis) selected 1 0 0 0 0 1
Y axis (2nd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 0
Z axis (3rd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 1
#4 axis (4th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 0
#5 axis (5th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 1 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
axis selection axis selection axis selection
#6 axis (6th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 0
code m code m code m
#7 axis (7th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 1 (HS1mn) (HS2mn) (HS3mn)

#8 axis (8th axis) selected 1 0 1 0 0 0

"1st handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved

with the nth handle.

[Related signals]
(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)
(2) 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn)
(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)
(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn)

258
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A 1ST HANDLE VALID HS1Sn Y747 Y827 Y907 Y9E7 YAC7 YBA7 YC87

[Function]
In HANDLE mode, axis No. of axis motion component to be moved is set for 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn).
To make valid the specified handle axis No., this signal is used.
[Operation]
Axis motion does not start when the 1st handle (handwheel) is rotated after HANDLE mode is selected and the desired
axis No. is set for the "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) if this signal (HS1Sn) is not given. Although either the
"1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) signal or the "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn) signal can be given first, these two
signals are to be given when manual axis motion is started.
[Related signals]
(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)

259
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
2ND HANDLE AXIS SELECTION Y748 - Y828 - Y908 - Y9E8 - YAC8 - YBA8 - YC88 -
A HS2mn
CODE m 74C 82C 90C 9EC ACC BAC C8C

[Function]
This signal selects which handle to move with the 2nd handle when using the 2-axis or 3-axis handle specifications (two
or three handles are required).
[Operation]
For axis motion controlled by the 2nd handle:
(1)Select HANDLE mode.
(2)Specify axis No. for 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn).
(3)Turn ON "2nd handle valid" (HS2Sn) signal (later described).
(4)Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.
The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

Handle axis No.

HS - - HS HS HS HS HS 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
2Sn 216n 28n 24n 22n 21n
Motion axis
X axis (1st axis) selected 1 0 0 0 0 1
Y axis (2nd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 0
Z axis (3rd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 1
#4 axis (4th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 0
#5 axis (5th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 1 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
axis selection axis selection axis selection
#6 axis (6th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 0 code m code m code m
#7 axis (7th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 1 (HS1mn) (HS2mn) (HS3mn)

#8 axis (8th axis) selected 1 0 1 0 0 0

"2nd handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved

with the nth handle.

[Related signals]
(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)
(2) 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)
(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)
(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn)

260
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A 2ND HANDLE VALID HS2Sn Y74F Y82F Y90F Y9EF YACF YBAF YC8F

[Function][Operation]
This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable only to 2-axis
handle specification (two handles are required).
Refer to the above table for the relation with the "2nd handle axis selection code m" (HS2mn).
[Related signals]
(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)

261
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
3RD HANDLE AXIS SELECTION Y750 - Y830 - Y910 - Y9F0 - YAD0 - YBB0 - YC90 -
A HS3mn
CODE m 754 834 914 9F4 AD4 BB4 C94

[Function]
This signal selects which handle to move with the 3rd handle when using the 3-axis handle specifications (three handle
is required).

[Operation]
For axis motion in HANDLE mode:
(1) Select HANDLE mode.
(2) Specify axis No. for 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn).
(3) Turn ON "3rd handle valid" (HS3Sn) signal (later described).
(4) Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.
The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

Handle axis No.

HS HS HS HS HS HS 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
- -
3Sn 316n 38n 34n 32n 31n
Motion axis
X axis (1st axis) selected 1 0 0 0 0 1
Y axis (2nd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 0
Z axis (3rd axis) selected 1 0 0 0 1 1
#4 axis (4th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 0
#5 axis (5th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 0 1 1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
axis selection axis selection axis selection
#6 axis (6th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 0 code m code m code m
#7 axis (7th axis) selected 1 0 0 1 1 1 (HS1mn) (HS2mn) (HS3mn)

#8 axis (8th axis) selected 1 0 1 0 0 0

"3rd handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved

with the nth handle.

[Related signals]
(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)
(2) 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)
(3) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)
(4) 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn)

262
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A 3RD HANDLE VALID HS3Sn Y757 Y837 Y917 Y9F7 YAD7 YBB7 YC97

[Function][Operation]
This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable only to 3-axis
handle specification (three handles are required).
Refer to the above table for the relation with the "3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS3mn).
[Related signals]
(1) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A OVERRIDE CANCEL OVCn Y758 Y838 Y918 Y9F8 YAD8 YBB8 YC98

[Function]
With this signal, override to cutting feedrate input to the controller during automatic operation is ignored.
[Operation]
When the signal (OVCn) turns ON ...
(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn) is ignored and feedrate specified by F command is selected.
(2) When cutting feedrate override is set at "0%", the signal (OVCn) is not valid (feedrate is zero and no motion
occurs).
(3) The signal does not affect to "Manual feedrate override" and "Rapid traverse override".
[Related signals]
(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL OVERRIDE METHOD
A OVSLn Y759 Y839 Y919 Y9F9 YAD9 YBB9 YC99
SELECTION

[Function]
Override can be exerted on "manual feedrate" (feedrate in JOG feed, incremental feed, etc. during manual operation).
[Operation]
When this signal (OVSLn) is turned ON when manual feedrate has been set, the previously set cutting feedrate override
(%) is applied to that feedrate.

OVSL
ON
Manual feedrate Cutting federate override
(1) Code method (*JV1 to 16) (1) Code method (*FV1 to 16) 2nd curring
(2) File register method × OFF (2) File register method
× feedrate override
(Setting value) (Setting value)

= Actual manual feedrate

(Note) For details of "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn), "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) and "2nd
cutting feedrate override", refer to the relevant descriptions.

263
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
A AFLn Y75A Y83A Y91A Y9FA YADA YBBA YC9A
LOCK

[Function]
Strobe signal for miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified during automatic operation cannot be output when this
signal is used. The signal (AFLn) can be used to check machining program, for example.
[Operation]
When the signal (AFLn) turns ON:
(1) Miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified in automatic operation cannot be executed, i.e. output of
code data and function strobe signal (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) are withheld.
(2) If the signal turns ON after code data is output, that output is accepted and the corresponding function can be
completed (FIN1n or FIN2n is received and strobe signal is set to "0").
(3) Miscellaneous function M00, M01, M02 or M30 is, however, accepted and realized even when the signal
(AFLn) is ON and the decode signals, code data and "M function strobe" signal are output.
(4) Miscellaneous function which is executed within the controller and does not output its code data and "M
function strobe" signal, such as M98 and M99, is executed even when the signal is ON.
(Note) As for S command data (output), the value before "Miscellaneous function lock" (AFLn) signal is turned ON will
be retained even when this signal is ON. When the signal is ON at CNC power ON, S command data will be 0.
[Related signals]
(1) M function strobe m (MFmn)
(2) M code data
(3) S function strobe m (SFmn)
(4) S code data
(5) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)
(6) T code data
(7) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)
(8) 2nd M function data

264
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TAP RETRACT TRVn Y75C Y83C Y91C Y9FC YADC YBBC YC9C

[Function]
This function is used to remove the tap from the workpiece when tap cycle has been stopped due to emergency stop,
etc.
[Operation]
If the "Tap retract" signal (TRVn) is turned ON while the "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) is ON due to an
interruption in the tap cycle, the tap retract operation can be started.
(1) The following items are conditions for tap retract. (The "Tap retract possible" signal will turn ON at this time.)
- Emergency stop during tap cycle
- Reset during tap cycle
- Power OFF during tap cycle (Only for absolute position detection system)
(2) Tap retract is executed as follows:
- Execute the synchronous tap cycle command. ---> (a)
- Stop the tap cycle with emergency stop. ---> (b)
- The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) turns ON. ---> (c)
- Release the emergency stop. (The "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns ON.) ---> (d)
- Turn ON the "Tap retract" signal (TRVn). ---> (e)
- The spindle will rotate in reverse, and the tap axis will move toward the tap cycle's initial point.
The feedrate is the tap cycle feedrate. ---> (f)
- When the tap axis reaches the tap cycle initial point, the spindle and tap axis will stop, and
tap retract will be completed. ---> (g)
- The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) will turn OFF.
Normal tap cycle Tap retract operation
Tap cycle command
(a) Tap cycle command

(g)
Stop
a b f Initial point a b f Initial point

c e R point R point C
(f)
Tap feed Tap retract operation
(spindle (spindle reverse
Tap feed (spindle (Spindle (b) forward run) run)
forward run) reverse run) Emergency stop

(c) Stop
(e)
(d) Emergency stop
d release Tap retract
Tap base d
Tap base

(Note 1) The area between "c" and "e" above is the tap cycle. The "Tap retract possible" signal will not be output if the
operation is not stopped in this area.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only during rising in the tap cycle.
(Note 3) When this signal turns ON, emergency stop and reset will not function.
(Note 4) The acceleration/deceleration method at the time of tap retract will be the time-constant method, and the time
constant set for tapping will be used for tap retract.
[Related signals]
(1) Tap retract possible (TRVEn)

265
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
REFERENCE POSITION RE-
A RTNn Y75D Y83D Y91D Y9FD YADD YBBD YC9D
TRACT

[Function]
This function returns immediately to a set reference position when the return signal is input. This function is used to
return to a set position for changing the tool.
[Operation]
Reference position return is executed when this signal is turned ON. At the rising edge of the signal, the program is
automatically reset (reset & rewind) and then reference position return is executed.
During the automatic or MDI operation, the operation is interrupted and stopped by the reset, and reference position
return is executed.
If this signal is input during execution of a tap cycle in the automatic or MDI operation modes, the "Tap retract possible"
signal will be output by the reset interruption, and the return operation will be the tap retract operation. The tap retract is
completed at the initial point, and after that the reference position return will be carried out.
(1) If there are two or more axes, set the return order with parameter "#2019 revnum".
(2) When the reference position is reached, the corresponding "Reference position reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n)
signal will be output.
(3) This signal must be held until the "Reference position reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n) signal is output. If it is turned
OFF midway, the return operation will be interrupted and stop. If the signal is input again, the operation will
restart from execution of resetting.
(4) The reference position return speed is handled in the same manner as the normal reference position return
speed.
(5) The reference position returned to during reference position retract depends on the "Reference position
selection code m".
(6) Even if the return signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However, if the return signal is
executed in a block other than the thread cutting block, the return operation will be executed.
(7) The return signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error will occur when the
return signal is input. "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0020"
[Timing chart]

Reference position retract

(RTN)

In reset
(RST)
Approx.
100ms
Automatic operation
Reset stop Reference position return

Reference position reached

(ZP1n)

[Related signals]
(1) Tap retract possible (TRVEn)
(2) Tap retract (TRVn)

266
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A SPINDLE OFF MODE SPOFFMn Y75F Y83F Y91F Y9FF YADF YBBF YC9F

[Function]
This function is used to check the program by moving the machine without rotating the spindle when the synchronous
tapping command is issued. The program can advance without rotating the spindle during synchronous feed even in the
asynchronous tapping mode.
[Operation]
(1) Synchronized tapping mode
When the spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the spindle will not rotate even if the servo is turned ON.
During the synchronized tapping mode, the operation up to when the synchronized tapping mode turns OFF will not
change even if the spindle OFF mode is changed.
This signal should be ON from the start of operation.
When the spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the operation is executed with the command speed if the dry run signal
is OFF.
When the dry run signal is ON, the operation is executed with the manual feed rate.
(2) Asynchronous tapping mode
(a) During synchronous (per revolution) feed
When the tapping cycle is executed with the spindle being not rotated, the machine will be stopped because of
the “M01 Operation error 0154” (spindle stop). When the dry run signal is turned ON at this time and the
spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the tapping cycle will be executed as the spindle in the stopping status (in that
case, it moves at the speed of the dry run).
When the dry run signal OFF or the spindle OFF mode signal is turned OFF, the machine will be stopped
because of the “M01 Operation error 0154” (spindle stop).
(b) During asynchronous feed (per minute) feed
Even when the tapping cycle is executed with the spindle being not rotated, the taping cycle will be executed.
The spindle OFF mode signal is not related.

267
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
CUTTING FEEDRATE OVER- Y760 - Y840 - Y920 - YA00 - YAE0 - YBC0 - YCA0 -
B *FV1mn
RIDE CODE m 764 844 924 A04 AE4 BC4 CA4

[Function]
Override (magnification) can be exerted to cutting feedrate (F feedrate) during automatic operation with this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal is valid, true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying referenced speed by override ratio (%)
specified by the signal.
Override is 100%, even when the signal is given, in the following cases:
(1) When "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping mode.
(3) During thread cutting.
These signals (*FV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

*FV16 *FV8 *FV4 *FV2 *FV1 Cutting feedrate override

1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 1 1 0 10%
1 1 1 0 1 20%
1 1 1 0 0 30%
1 1 0 1 1 40%
1 1 0 1 0 50%
1 1 0 0 1 60%
1 1 0 0 0 70%
1 0 1 1 1 80%
1 0 1 1 0 90%
1 0 1 0 1 100%
1 0 1 0 0 110%
1 0 0 1 1 120%
1 0 0 1 0 130% Generally, the rotary switch(5-step, 21-notch,
complimentbinary code output) is connectedto the
1 0 0 0 1 140% operation board, and used between 0 and 200%.
1 0 0 0 0 150% If *FV1 to *FV16 are all OFF, the previous value will
be maintained. The value will change to 0% when the
0 1 1 1 1 160%
power is turned OFF.
0 1 1 1 0 170%
0 1 1 0 1 180%
0 1 1 0 0 190%
0 1 0 1 1 200%
0 1 0 1 0 210%
0 1 0 0 1 220%
0 1 0 0 0 230%
0 0 1 1 1 240%
0 0 1 1 0 250%
0 0 1 0 1 260%
0 0 1 0 0 270%
0 0 0 1 1 280%
0 0 0 1 0 290%
0 0 0 0 1 300%

[Related signals]
(1) Override cancel (OVCn)
(2) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)
(3) Cutting feedrate override method selection (FVSn)

268
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE
A FV2En Y766 Y846 Y926 YA06 YAE6 YBC6 YCA6
OVERRIDE VALID

[Function]
Override normally exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation is within a range from 0% to 300%. When this
signal is used, another override (ranging from 0% to 327.67%) can be exerted on overridden feedrate.
[Operation]
When the signal (FV2En) is ON, override can be exerted on feedrate previously overridden in code method (*FV1mn), or
file register method (by setting numerals manually). Applicable range of the 2nd override is 0% to 327.6% (0.01%
increment). Value (override ratio) is set to file register in binary code.

FV2E ON
Code method override (*FV1 to *FV16) 2nd override
×
File register method override
or
(File register)
OFF
= True override

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
CUTTING FEEDRATE OVER-
A FVSn Y767 Y847 Y927 YA07 YAE7 YBC7 YCA7
RIDE METHOD SELECTION

[Function]
When override is exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation, override method can be selected between "code
method" and "file register method".
[Operation]
When the signal (FVSn) is OFF, code method of "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) is selected.
When the signal (FVSn) is ON, file register method (value is specified by manual setting) is selected.

FVS
OFF: Code method
*FV1 to *FV16 (0 to 300%, 10% increment)
Cutting feedrate
(Fmm/min) × = True feedrate
File register (0 to 300%, 1% increment)
ON: File register method

(Note) For details of code method and file register method, refer to the relevant descriptions.

269
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE Y768 - Y848 - Y928 - YA08 - YAE8 - YBC8 - YCA8 -
A ROVmn
CODE m 769 849 929 A09 AE9 BC9 CA9

[Function]
This signal is used to exert override on rapid traverse speed set by parameter (for rapid traverse) in automatic operation
(memory, MDI) or manual operation.
[Operation]
The true rapid traverse speed is that obtained by multiplying rapid traverse speed (set by parameter) by override ratio
specified by this signal.
This signal is invalid if the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF during cutting feed during automatic operation or during
manual operation.

These signals (ROVmn) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

ROV2n ROV1n Rapid traversespeed override

0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 1%

[Related signals]
(1) Rapid traverse speed override method selection (ROVSn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
A ROVSn Y76F Y84F Y92F YA0F YAEF YBCF YCAF
METHOD SELECTION

[Function]
When speed override is exerted on rapid traverse speed specified in automatic operation or manual operation, override
method is selected between code method and file register method (manually set).
[Operation]
When the signal (ROVSn) is OFF, code method of "Rapid traverse override code m" (ROVmn) is used.
When the signal (ROVSn) is ON, file register method is used.

ROVS
OFF: Code method
ROV1, 2 (1, 25, 50, 100%)
Rapid traverse speed True rapid
(parameter setting) × = Traverse speed
File register (0 to 100%, 1% increment)
ON: File register method

(Note) For details of "code method override" and "file register method", refer to the respective description.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
Y770 - Y850 - Y930 - YA10 - YAF0 - YBD0 - YCB0 -
B MANUAL FEEDRATE CODE m *JVmn
774 854 934 A14 AF4 BD4 CB4

[Function]
Feedrate in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or in dry run of automatic operation (memory,
MDI) is selected.
[Operation]
This signal is valid in the following cases, but will be invalid when the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON.
(1) Jog mode, incremental mode or reference position return mode is ON.
(2) During cutting feed in automatic operation and "Dry run" (DRNn) signal is ON.
(3) Dry run signal is ON during rapid traverse in the automatic operation. Note that parameter "#1085 G00 dry run"
must be ON.
These signals (*JV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

270
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Manual feedrate
Machine parameter setin meters Machine parameter setin inches
*JV16 *JV8 *JV4 *JV2 *JV1
Metric mode Inch mode Metric mode Inch mode
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.000 0.00 0.000
1 1 1 1 0 1.00 0.040 0.51 0.020
1 1 1 0 1 1.40 0.054 0.71 0.028
1 1 1 0 0 2.00 0.079 1.02 0.040
1 1 0 1 1 2.70 0.106 1.37 0.054
1 1 0 1 0 3.70 0.146 1.88 0.074
1 1 0 0 1 5.20 0.205 2.64 0.104
1 1 0 0 0 7.20 0.283 3.66 0.144
1 0 1 1 1 10.00 0.394 5.08 0.200
1 0 1 1 0 14.00 0.551 7.11 0.280
1 0 1 0 1 20.00 0.787 10.16 0.400
1 0 1 0 0 27.00 1.060 13.72 0.540
1 0 0 1 1 37.00 1.460 18.80 0.740
1 0 0 1 0 52.00 2.050 26.42 1.040
1 0 0 0 1 72.00 2.830 36.58 1.440
1 0 0 0 0 100.00 3.940 50.80 2.000
0 1 1 1 1 140.00 5.510 71.12 2.800
0 1 1 1 0 200.00 7.870 101.60 4.000
0 1 1 0 1 270.00 10.600 137.16 5.400
0 1 1 0 0 370.00 14.600 187.96 7.400
0 1 0 1 1 520.00 20.500 264.16 10.400
0 1 0 1 0 720.00 28.300 365.76 14.400
0 1 0 0 1 1000.00 39.400 508.00 20.000
0 1 0 0 0 1400.00 55.100 711.20 28.000
0 0 1 1 1 2000.00 78.700 990.60 39.000
0 0 1 1 0 2700.00 106.000 1371.60 54.000
0 0 1 0 1 3700.00 146.000 1879.60 74.000
0 0 1 0 0 5200.00 205.000 2641.60 104.000
0 0 0 1 1 7200.00 283.000 3657.60 144.000
0 0 0 1 0 10000.00 394.000 5080.00 200.000
0 0 0 0 1 14000.00 551.000 7112.00 280.000
If *JV 1 to *JV16 are all OFF, the previous value will be maintained. The value will be set to 0 when the power is turned
OFF.
(Note 1) In JOG mode, true feedrate changes if this signal changes during feed motion.
(Note 2) In incremental feed mode, true feedrate does not change if this signal changes during feed motion.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate method selection (JVSn)
(2) Manual override method selection (OVSLn)

271
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL FEEDRATE METHOD
A JVSn Y777 Y857 Y937 YA17 YAF7 YBD7 YCB7
SELECTION

[Function]
When feedrate is specified in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or dry run (automatic
operation), feedrate command method is selected between code method and file register method.
[Operation]
When the signal (JVSn) is OFF, code method of "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn) is selected.
When the signal (JVSn) is ON, file register method is selected.

JVS
OFF: Code method
*JV1 to 16 (0 to 14000mm/min)
Feedrate in automatic operation or
dry run (automatic operation) =
File register (0 to 100000mm/min)
ON: File register method

(Note) For details of "code method feedrate" and "file register method feedrate", refer to the relevant description.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
FEEDRATE LEAST INCRE- Y778 - Y858 - Y938 - YA18 - YAF8 - YBD8 - YCB8 -
A PCFmn
MENT CODE m 779 859 939 A19 AF9 BD9 CB9

[Function]
When manual feedrate is specified in file register method (JVSn: "ON") or in arbitrary manual feed mode, manual
feedrate of file registers R is used. In this case, least increment of the feedrate entered into the file registers is specified
by this signal.
[Operation]
The relationship between PCFmn and least feed increment is as follows:

Least increment
PCF2n PCF1n Operation
(mm/min or inch/min)
0 0 10 10mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
0 1 1 1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
1 0 0.1 0.1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
1 1 0.01 0.01mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
JOG SYNCHRONOUS
A JSYNn Y77A Y85A Y93A YA1A YAFA YBDA YCBA
FEED VALID

[Function]
This is used when the manual feedrate designation is to be per rotation feed (feed rate per spindle rotation).
[Operation]
(1) The following operation mode feedrates will immediately become per rotation feed when the "Jog synchronous feed
valid" signal is turned ON.
- Jog mode
- Incremental feed mode
- Reference position return mode
- When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is OFF and "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1"
(CXS4n) is ON in the manual random feed mode.
(2) Even if the "Jog synchronous feed valid" signal is ON, the per minute feed will be used in the following states.
- When the dry run signal is ON.
- When the "Rapid traverse" signal is ON in the jog, incremental or reference position return modes.

272
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Designation of feedrates]
The designation of the per rotation feedrate is the same as the per minute feed input.
The cutting override will be valid when the "Manual override method selection" (OVSLn) signal is ON.
(a) Code method (*JV1n to *JV16n)

Feed per minute Feed per rotation

*JV16n *JV8n *JV4n *JV2n *JV1n
mm/min inch/min mm/rev inch/rev
1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.000 0.0000 0.00000
1 1 1 1 0 1.00 0.040 0.0100 0.00040
1 1 1 0 1 1.40 0.054 0.0140 0.00054
1 1 1 0 0 2.00 0.079 0.0200 0.00079
1 1 0 1 1 2.70 0.106 0.0270 0.00106
1 1 0 1 0 3.70 0.146 0.0370 0.00146
1 1 0 0 1 5.20 0.205 0.0520 0.00205
1 1 0 0 0 7.20 0.283 0.0720 0.00283
1 0 1 1 1 10.00 0.394 0.1000 0.00394
1 0 1 1 0 14.00 0.551 0.1400 0.00551
1 0 1 0 1 20.00 0.787 0.2000 0.00787
1 0 1 0 0 27.00 1.060 0.2700 0.01060
1 0 0 1 1 37.00 1.460 0.3700 0.01460
1 0 0 1 0 52.00 2.050 0.5200 0.02050
1 0 0 0 1 72.00 2.830 0.7200 0.02830
1 0 0 0 0 100.00 3.940 1.0000 0.03940
0 1 1 1 1 140.00 5.510 1.4000 0.05510
0 1 1 1 0 200.00 7.870 2.0000 0.07870
0 1 1 0 1 270.00 10.600 2.7000 0.10600
0 1 1 0 0 370.00 14.600 3.7000 0.14600
0 1 0 1 1 520.00 20.500 5.2000 0.20500
0 1 0 1 0 720.00 28.300 7.2000 0.28300
0 1 0 0 1 1000.00 39.400 10.0000 0.39400
0 1 0 0 0 1400.00 55.100 14.0000 0.55100
0 0 1 1 1 2000.00 78.700 20.0000 0.78700
0 0 1 1 0 2700.00 106.000 27.0000 1.06000
0 0 1 0 1 3700.00 146.000 37.0000 1.46000
0 0 1 0 0 5200.00 205.000 52.0000 2.05000
0 0 0 1 1 7200.00 283.000 72.0000 2.83000
0 0 0 1 0 10000.00 394.000 100.0000 3.94000
0 0 0 0 1 14000.00 551.000 140.0000 5.51000

(b) File register method (manual feedrate)

The feedrate when the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) is selected will be set in manual feedrate with
the binary value. However, the designation unit will be as follows according to the "Feedrate least increment code
m" (PCFmn).

Feed per minute Feed per rotation

PCF2n PCF1n
Speed unit mm/min. or inch/min. Speed unit mm/rev. or inch/rev.
0 0 10 0.1
0 1 1 0.01
1 0 0.1 0.001
1 1 0.01 0.0001

[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate

273
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A JOG HANDLE SYNCHRONOUS JHANn Y77B Y85B Y93B YA1B YAFB YBDB YCBB

[Function]
Jog feed and handle feed can be carried out without changing the operation mode.
[Operation]
If the "Jog mode" (Jn) signal and this signal are input simultaneously, the "jog/handle synchronous mode" will be
entered.
If the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is turned ON during the "jog/handle synchronous mode", the jog feed will be carried
out at the rapid traverse feedrate. When the "Rapid traverse" turns OFF, the jog feed will be carried out at the manual
feedrate.

Operation Jog handle synchronous Rapid traversesignal

Operation during jog feed Handle feed
mode signal (JHANn) (RTn)
ON Rapid traverse feedrate Possible
ON
OFF Manual feedrate Possible
Jog feed
ON Rapid traverse feedrate Impossible
OFF
OFF Manual feedrate Impossible

(1) During "jog/handle synchronous mode", jog feed and handle feed can be carried out randomly.
However, jog feed and handle feed cannot be carried out simultaneously on the same axis. If carried out
simultaneously, the jog feed will have a priority. The changeover between jog feed and handle feed on the same
axis is carried out when the relevant axis has stopped.

• If handle feed is carried out on an axis that is

Handle pulses as this
being jog fed, the jog feed will have a priority, Jog feed section are ignored.
so after movement with jog feed has completed command
(the axis has stopped), handle feed movement
will start. Handle pulse

Axis
movement
Jog movement Handle movement
• If jog feed is carried out on an axis that is being
Handle pulses as this
handle fed, the handle feed movement will
section are ignored.
stop at the rising edge of the jog feed Jog feed
command. After the axis stops, the jog feed command
movement will start.
Handle pulse
Axis
movement
Jog movement Handle movement

(Note) If only the "Jog handle synchronous" signal is output, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur. If the "Jog
handle synchronous" signal is input simultaneously with an operation mode signal other than the jog mode, the
"Jog handle synchronous" signal will be ignored.

274
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
Y77D - Y85D - Y93 - YA1 - YAFD - YBDD - YCBD -
A CURRENT LIMIT MODE m ILMmn
77E 85E 93E A1E AFE BDE CBE

[Function]
This signal selects process of current limit reached.
[Operation]
When the current reaches its limit during current control, the "current limit reached" signal will be output, and the
following mode will be selected and performed.

Current limit mode 2 Current limit mode 1 Mode

0 0 Normal
0 1 Interlock
1 0 Normal
1 1 Normal

(1)Normal mode
Movement command is executed in the current state.
In automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end and moves to the next block with droops
accumulated.
(2) Interlock mode
Movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
In automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block and does not move to the next block.
In manual operation, the subsequent commands to the same direction will be ignored.
[Related signals]
(1) In current limit (ILIn)
(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)
(3) Current limit changeover (ILCn)
(4) Droop release request (DORn)
(5) Current limit changeover

275
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED Y780 - Y860 - Y940 - YA20 - YB00 - YBE0 - YCC0 -
A MPmn
MAGNIFICATION CODE m 782 862 942 A22 B02 BE2 CC2

[Function]
Amount of feed motion per pulse from the manual pulse generator in HANDLE feed mode, or amount of feed motion per
shot in incremental feed mode +/- (+Jn, -Jn) is multiplied by this signal.
[Operation]
This signal (MPmn) is set with the code method.
When this code mode is selected, the true amount of feed motion (per pulse feed in handle feed mode, and per ON/OFF
of ±Jn value in incremental feed mode) is the product obtained by multiplying originally set amount of feed by multiplier
MP1n, MP2n, MP4n.
The relationship between multiplier code (MPmn) and magnification in each feed mode is as follows.

Magnification in HANDLE Magnification in INCREMENTAL

MP4n MP2n MP1n
feed feed
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 10 10
0 1 0 100 100
0 1 1 1000 1000
1 0 0 1 5000
1 0 1 10 10000
1 1 0 100 50000
1 1 1 1000 100000

[Related signals]
(1) Handle mode (Hn)
(2) Incremental mode (Sn)

Con- Signal
Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact abbreviation
MAGNIFICATION VALID FOR
A MPPn Y786 Y866 Y946 YA26 YB06 YBE6 YCC6
EACH HANDLE

[Function] [Operation]
This signal sets magnification per each handle when setting magnification of feed arbitrarily.
(1) When the signal is ON
When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification can be set per each handle.
When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for all handles.

Magnification of feed
Handle
File register method Code method
1st handle R2408, 2409
2nd handle R2410, 2411 Y780, Y781, YC782
3rd handle R2412, 2413

(2) When the signal is OFF

When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification of 1st handle/incremental feed will be
applied for all handles.
When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for all handles.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)
(2) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MP1n, MP2n, MP4n)
(3) 1st handle/incremental feed magnification

276
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED
A MAGNIFICATION METHOD SE- MPSn Y787 Y867 Y947 YA27 YB07 YBE7 YCC7
LECTION

[Function]
Feed magnification method in handle feed or incremental feed is selected between "code method" and "file register
method" by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (MPSn) is OFF, "Handle/incremental feed magnification code m" (MPmn) is selected.
When the signal (MPSn) is ON, "file register magnification method" is selected.

MPS
OFF: Code method
Multiplier by MP1, MP2, MP4
Basic amount of feed (1µ) × = True amount
Multiplier by value set in file register of motion
ON: File register method

(Note)For details of the motion corresponding to the code method or file register method, refer to the relevant
descriptions.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)
(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

[Function]
This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.
This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]
<M system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool
alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

<L system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool
skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.
(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is
designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is
selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.
(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal
is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group
is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be
carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected
needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected
due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal
input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation
request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

277
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL ALARM 2 TAL2n Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9

[Function]
This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 4 (a tool of Tool alarm 2).
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "4" (a tool of
Tool alarm 2).
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.
See "4.19.11 Interface with PLC" for details.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

[Function]
This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]
<M system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management
specification.
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

<L system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management
specification.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT IN-
A TLF1n Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB
PUT

[Function]
This signal validates the tool life management.

[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, the tool life management process is executed.

278
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL CHANGE RESET TCRTn Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC

[Function]
This signal is used to clear all tool usage data in a group with the tool life management II.

[Operation]
Select with the tool group No. designation whether all groups that have exceeded their lifetimes or specific group to be
cleared.
After this signal is input, the first tool of the group will be selected at the next group selection.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be
carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected
needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again. However, a tool may not be selected
due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal
input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation
request" (CRQn) signal before selecting the group.

[Related signals]
(1) Recalculation request (CRQn:Y72B)

279
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CX1mn Y790 - 4 Y870 - 4 Y950 - 4 YA30 - 4 YB10 - 4 YBF0 - 4 YCD0 - 4
1ST AXIS SELECTION CODE m

[Function]
This signal specifies a number of the axis component to move in manual arbitrary feed mode.
Components of up to three axes can be moved simultaneously in manual arbitrary feed mode.
This signal is used to specify one of them.
[Operation]
(1) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) must be set before "Manual arbitrary feed strobe"
(CXS8n) signal is turned ON. An attempt to set it during motion shall fail.
(2) Besides this signal (CX1mn), there are two signals to specify a "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code m"
(CX2mn) and a "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m" (CX3mn). The axis numbers need not be
specified in ascending order.
(3) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) is validated by turning ON the "Manual arbitrary
feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal explained later. Similarly, the valid signals (CX2Sn, CX3Sn) are also provided
for the 2nd and 3rd axis number signals.
(4) Axis numbers can be specified as follows:
n: 1 to 3

Signal
Axis CXnS — — CXn16 CXn8 CXn4 CXn2 CXn1
specification

1st axis 1 — — 0 0 0 0 1

2nd axis 1 — — 0 0 0 1 0

3rd axis 1 — — 0 0 0 1 1

4th axis 1 — — 0 0 1 0 0

Validity signal Axis number

(5) Motion of the specified axis component is as follows:
(a) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn)
signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount".
(b) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code m" (CX2mn)
signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount".
(c) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m" (CX3mn)
signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount".
[Related signals]
For related signals, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CX1Sn Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7
1ST AXIS VALID

[Function]
This signal is used to validate the axis specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal
so that the axis component can move in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
(1) The specification of the axis by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal explained
earlier is validated only when the "CX1S" signal is turned ON.
[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

280
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED Y798 - Y878 - Y958 - YA38 - YB18 - YBF8 - YCD8 -
A CX2mn
2ND AXIS SELECTION CODE m 79C 87C 95C A3C B1C BFC CDC

[Function][Operation]
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn)" signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CX2Sn Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF
2ND AXIS VALID

[Function][Operation]
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CX3mn Y7A0 - 4 Y880 - 4 Y960 - 4 YA40 - 4 YB20 - 4 YC00 - 4 YCE0 - 4
3RD AXIS SELECTION CODE m

[Function][Operation]
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal explained above.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CX3Sn Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7
3RD AXIS VALID

[Function][Operation]
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS1n Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8
SMOOTHING OFF

[Function]
This signal is used to move an axis component under the condition where the acceleration/ deceleration time constant is
0 is manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
With the "Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off" (CXS1n) signal set ON, axis motion in manual arbitrary feed mode is
performed under the same conditions as when the acceleration/deceleration time constant is set to 0.
(Note 1) When using this signal to move an axis component under the condition where the acceleration/deceleration
time constant is 0, move it at a slow speed. Otherwise, a servo alarm (excess error) may occur.
[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode" (PTPn) mode.

281
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS2n Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9
AXIS INDEPENDENT

[Function]
When moving two or more axis components simultaneously in "manual arbitrary feed" mode, this signal can be used to
position each axis independently without performing interpolation.
[Operation]
When a manual arbitrary feed is executed for two or more axes at the same time with "Manual arbitrary feed axis
independent" (CXS2n) ON, each axis is positioned independently without being subjected to interpolation.
The "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent" (CXS2n) signal is generally used when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1"
(CXS4n) signal explained later is OFF (G0 selected).
The following is an example where the rapid traverse speeds of X-axis and Z-axis are both set to 9,600 mm/min, and the
amounts of movement of X-axis and Z-axis are set to 300mm and 200mm respectively.

(Example 1)
Z-axis
Z-axis effective speed:
9600 mm/min
End point
fz

200 (Example 2) Z-axis effective speed:

Z-axis 6400 mm/min

End point fz
X-axis

300 Start point 200

fx
X-axis
X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min
Start point
300

fx
X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min

[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

282
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS3n Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA
EX.F/MODAL.F

[Function]
This signal selects whether a manual arbitrary feed in G1 mode is done at manual feed rate or at modal speed in
automatic operation.
[Operation]
When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal explained later is ON n, the "CXS3" signal works as follows:
(1) When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is OFF:
1)When the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is OFF, the speed selected by the manual feed rate
(*JV1 to 16) applies.
2)When the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is ON, the applicable speed is determined by the
relation between the contents of the corresponding file register (R) and the "Feedrate least increment code m"
(PCFmn) signal.
(2) When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is ON:
Manual arbitrary feed is operated at a modal speed (F***) set in automatic operation. However, it will not operate if
no F command has been executed before.
After executing 1-digit F command when F 1-digit feed is valid (#1079 is set to "1"), it will operate with the F 1-digit
feed speed (#1185 to #1189) which is registered beforehand.

Manual feedrate code *JV1~*JV16 Off EX. F/MODAL. F (CX3n)

JVS

Off
File register (R) × PCF1, PCF2 On
Moving speed
On
F command modal (F***)

[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS4n Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB
G0/G1

[Function]
This signal selects a manual feed speed or rapid traverse speed in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
This signal operates as shown below depending on the status of the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal.
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is OFF:
The rapid traverse speed originally set to the corresponding axis applies. Rapid traverse override is also valid. The
rapid traverse speed applicable when moving two or more axis components at the same time varies with the status
of the "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent" (CXS2n) signal. See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed
axis independent" (CXS2n) signal.
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is ON:
The manual feed speed or the speed specified by the F command in automatic operation apply. For details, see the
description on the "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n).
[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

283
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS5n Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC
MC/WK

[Function]
This signal selects a machine coordinate system or a modal workpiece coordinate system on which positioning is done in
manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
The "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal becomes valid when the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6)
signal explained later is OFF in manual arbitrary feed mode.
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the machine
coordinate system.

Amount of motion =

Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on machine coordinate system

(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the modal
workpiece coordinate system.

Amount of motion =

Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on modal workpiece coordinate system

[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS6n Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED
ABS/INC

[Function]
This signal selects whether travel amount is given in an absolute value or incremental value for manual arbitrary feed.
[Operation]
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6) signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as an absolute value. For details,
see the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5)" signal explained before.
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6) signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as a real movement value.
[Related signals]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

284
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
B *CXS7n Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE
STOP

[Function]
This signal stops an ongoing axis component halfway in manual arbitrary feed mode.
The function of this signal is equivalent to those of the "Manual interlock +" (*+MITn) and "Manual interlock -" (*-MITn)"
signals.
[Operation]
Turning the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n) signal OFF (0) causes the following:
(1) Motion of axis in manual arbitrary feed mode is decelerated and stopped.
(2) The axis component which is going to move in manual arbitrary feed mode remains stopped. When the "Manual
arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n) signal is turned ON (1) while an axis component is in the stop state, it immediately
restarts the operation.
[Related signals]
For related signal, see the "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

285
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
A CXS8n Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF
STROBE

[Function]
This signal is a trigger signal for moving an axis component in manual arbitrary feed mode. The axis component starts
moving at the rising edge of this signal.
[Operation]
The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal should be turned ON after all signal values necessary for manual
arbitrary feed are set appropriately.
(1) The following signals must be appropriately set before turning ON the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n)
signal:
(a) Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)
(b) Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m to Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m (CX1mn to
CX3mn), Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid to Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid (CX1Sn to CX3Sn)
(c) Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount
(d) Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off (CXS1n)
(e) Manual arbitrary feed axis independent (CXS2n)
(f) Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3n)
(g) Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1 (CXS4n)
(h) Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)
(i) Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6)
(2) The following signals can be changed even after the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal is turned ON:
(j) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(k) Rapid traverse override for a rapid traverse speed when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is
OFF.
(l) "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n)
(Note 1) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal can be accepted even when the "Manual arbitrary feed
stop" (*CXS7n) signal is OFF (0).
Example of operation timing chart

Manual arbitrary feed mode, etc.

((a) to (i)) above )

Manual arbitrary feed strobe

(CXS8n: YCBF)

Axis motion

Axis selected (Axn: X7A0)

Manual arbitrary feed stop

(*CXS7n: YCBE)

In manual arbitrary feed

(CXNn: XC16)
Manual arbitrary feed
completion (CXFINn: XC1C)

(Note 2) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal must be ON for at least 30ms.
[Related signals]
Signals listed in (a) to (l) above

286
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
2ND REFERENCE POSITION
B *ZRITn Y7B0 Y890 Y970 YA50 YB30 YC10 YCF0
RETURN INTERLOCK

[Function]
The axis is interlocked at a designated position during manual 2nd reference position return.
[Operation]
During 2nd reference position return while this signal is valid (base specification parameter "#1505 ckref2" is "1"), if this
signal turns OFF , movement of axes that have reached the designated position will stop, and an interlock will be applied.
Axes that have not reached the designated position will be interlocked after reaching the designated position.
When this signal is ON, the axis movement will not stop, and the 2nd reference position return will continue.

287
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A SEARCH & START RSSTn Y7B2 Y892 Y972 YA52 YB32 YC12 YCF2

[Function]
This signal is input into the controller when executing operation search in the memory mode and carrying out automatic
start up.
This signal is also input into the controller when a program is downloaded from the FTP server also, the automatic
startup is executed.
[Operation]
If this signal is input when the memory operation mode is selected, an operation search of the machining program
designated by "Search & start program No." will be carried out. After the search, the program will be automatically
started.
When the FTP mode is selected, download the program designated by "search and start program No." from FTP server
and execute the automatic startup after the search is completed.
If this signal is input during automatic operation, the program will be reset before the search. After the resetting is
completed, the search and automatic start operations will be executed.
Do not turn OFF this signal until the download completed signal turns ON or the download error signal turns ON.
Otherwise download will be interrupted.
(Example)The O900 machining program is designated and search & start is executed in a state other than automatic
operation.

Program No. O900

In automatic operation

Search & start (search)

Search & start

(Example)When O900 machining program is designated during operation of the O1 machining program, and search &
start is executed.

Program No. 01 O900

In automatic operation

In "reset"

Search & start (search)

Search & start

(Note 1) This signal is valid only when the memory mode is selected.
(Note 2) An error signal will be output if:
- the machining program No. is not designated;
- the designated program No. is illegal (0 or exceeding 99999999); or
- restart search is in execution.
(Note 3) This signal is valid at the rising edge.
(Note 4) If this signal is input during resetting, the search & start will not be executed.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start program No.
(2) Search & start error (SSEn)
(3) Search & start (search) (SSGn)

288
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
INCLINED AXIS CONTROL: NO
A Y7B6 Y896 Y976 YA56 YB36 YC16 YCF6
Z AXIS COMPENSATION

[Function]
Select whether the movement for the inclined axis in the manual operation is affected to the corresponding basic axis or
not.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the corresponding basic axis is
not moved.
When this signal is turned OFF and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the compensation operation
attending the movement of the inclined axis is executed to the corresponding basic axis.
[Caution]
Even if this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will not be valid.
If this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will be valid after the axis movement is stopped.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COM-
A VAMODn Y7B8 Y898 Y978 YA58 YB38 YC18 YCF8
MAND MODE

[Function]
In the hypothetical linear axis control, select whether to command the hypothetical axis in the hypothetical plane or to
command the actual axis.
[Operation]
Hypothetical axis command mode can be selected by turing ON the hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn). This
mode can command the hypothetical axis out of the hypothetical plane and the actual axis.
Actual axis command mode can be selected by turing OFF the hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn). This mode
can command the actual axis.
[Related signals]
(1) In Hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODOn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
A COMMAND POLARITY REVER- Y7B9 Y899 Y979 YA59 YB39 YC19 YCF9
SAL

[Function]
Designate whether to rotate the spindle in reverse during synchronous tapping.
[Operation]
When the "Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal" signal is ON, the spindle will rotate in reverse during
synchronous tapping.

T command

Command
polarity reversal
Synchronous
tapping
Command to
spindle

Basically, the reverse run The spindle will not rotate The spindle will not return to
command signal is input in reverse even if turned forward run even if turned
simultaneously with the T ON during synchronous OFF during synchronous
command tapping tapping

289
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
A CHOPPING CHPSn Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA

[Function]
This validates the chopping function by external signal.
[Operation]
The chopping operation is started at the rising edge of this signal and terminated at the falling edge of this signal.
This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
CHOPPING PARAMETER VAL-
A Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB
ID

[Function]
This validates the chopping operation parameter by the external signal.
[Operation]
(1) The chopping operation parameter is valid at the rising edge of this signal.
The chopping operation parameters include the following.
(a) Compensation method selection
(b) Operation mode selection
(c) Rapid traverse override valid
(d) Chopping axis selection
(e) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(f) Bottom dead point position designation (L)(H)
(g) Number of cycles designation
(h) Data No.
(2) This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.
(3) Chopping operation parameter can be changed with this signal during chopping operation.
[Related signals]
(1) Compensation method selection
(2) Operation mode selection
(3) Rapid traverse override valid
(4) Chopping axis selection
(5) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(6) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(7) Number of cycles designation
(8) Data No.
(9) Chopping status

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
COMPENSATION METHOD SE-
A Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC
LECTION

[Function]
The compensation method of the chopping by external signal is selected.
[Operation]
0: The compensation amount sequential update method
1: The fixed compensation amount method
The selection with this signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

290
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
OPERATION MODE SELEC-
A Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE
TION

[Function]
The operation mode is selected when the fixed compensation amount method is selected in the compensation method of
the chopping operation with eternal signal.
[Operation]
0: Playback mode
1: Record mode
This selects the operation mode, when the fixed compensation amount method from the chopping operation's
compensation method by the external signal, is selected.
When the compensation value sequential update method is selected as a compensation method, this signal will be
ignored.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
A Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF
VALID

[Function]
This sets the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the motion speed between basic point and the upper dead
point.
[Operation]
0: Invalid
1: Valid
When this signal is OFF, the axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate regardless of the designation of the rapid traverse
override.
This signal will not be switched at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal or in the the chopping operation
where the G81.1 command is issued.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

291
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION GFINn YD26 YD56 YD86 YDB6 YDE6 YE16 YE46

[Function]
This signal changes the spindle speed to the speed (S command) specified in the machining program.
This signal is used to smoothly perform the spindle speed (S command, etc.) control.
[Operation]
To change the spindle speed to the speed specified by the S command during automatic operation (memory, MDI), it is
needed to turn ON the "Gear shift completion" (GFINn), or "M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n)" signal.

S command + Spindle command speed Spindle

Rising edge of GFIN, FIN1, or FIN2

When using the "Gear shift completion" (GFINn) signal, the following two conditions should be considered:
- Whether gear shift (gear change) is applicable (whether there are two or more states of gear shift).
- Whether "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal output from the spindle controller is used for verification of spindle
speed.

(Operation example 1) There is no gear shift and the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is not used.

Command program S100 Next block

S function strobe (SF)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle speed

(Operation example 2) There is no gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is used.

Command program S100 Next block

S function strobe (SF)

Gear shift completion

(GFIN)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Spindle speed

292
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

(Operation example 3) There is gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is not used.

Command program S100 Next block

S function strobe (SF)

Spindle gear shift

(GR1, GR2)

Spindle stop (SSTP)

Spindle gear shift (SSFT)

Spindle gear selection

code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)
Gear shift completion The same operation will be
(GFIN) executed even if gear shift
completion signal is not used.
M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle speed

(Operation example 4) There is gear shift and "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal are used.

Command program S100 Next block

S function strobe (SF)

Spindle gear shift
(GR1, GR2)

Spindle stop (SSTP)

Spindle gear shift (SSFT)

Spindle gear selection
code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)

Gear shift completion

(GFIN)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Spindle speed

[Related signals]
(1) S function strobe m (SFmn)
(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)
(3) M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n)
(4) Spindle gear selection input code (GImn)
(5) Spindle stop (SSTPn), Spindle gear shift (SSFTn)

293
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE SPEED YD28 - YD58 - YD88 - YDB8 - YDE8 - YE18 - YE48 -
A SPmn
OVERRIDE CODE m D2A D5A D8A DBA DEA E1A E4A

[Function]
This signal applies override (magnification) on the S command issued in the automatic operation (memory, MDI).
[Operation]
By selecting "Spindle speed override m" (SPmn) signal, override ratio can be selected within range from 50% to 120%
(increment: 10%).
Override cannot be set when:
(1) "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal is ON.
(2) TAP mode is selected.
(3) Thread cutting mode is selected.
This signal (SPmn) is set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

SP4n SP2n SP1n Spindle override

1 1 1 50%
0 1 1 60%
0 1 0 70%
1 1 0 80%
1 0 0 90%
0 0 0 100%
0 0 1 110%
1 0 1 120%

(Note)The spindle override can be set either with the code method or by directly inputting the numerical value.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle override method selection (SPSn)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
A SPSn YD2F YD5F YD8F YDBF YDEF YE1F YE4F
METHOD SELECTION

[Function]
When override is applied on the S command issued in automatic operation (memory, MDI), "code method" or "file
register method" is selected for override method.
[Operation]
When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) is OFF, "Spindle override code m" (SPmn) is selected.
When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) is ON, register method override (value set in file register is
applicable) is selected.
OFF: Code method
SP1 to SP4 (50 to 120%, 10% increment)
S command × SPS = Spindle speed
File register (0 to 200%, 1% increment)
ON: File register method

[Related signals]
(1) Spindle override code m (SPmn)

294
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE GEAR SELECTION YD30 - YD60 - YD90 - YDC0 - YDF0 - YE20 - YE50 -
A GImn
CODE m D31 D61 D91 DC1 DF1 E21 E51

[Function]
This signal informs the controller which spindle gear has been selected on the machine side.
[Operation]
This "Spindle gear selection code" (GImn) signal is set according to the machine's spindle gear stage. The controller
calculates the S command data (data is transferred when the spindle controller is the high-speed serial connection
specification) based on this "Spindle gear selection" (GImn).
The flow after the spindle (S) command is executed and output to the spindle is shown below.

S Spindle command Spindle command Calcu- Spindle command

Spindle
command rotation speed input rotation speed output lation final data (SBINn)

PLC program process (mandatory) Spindle gear selection code (GImn)

Spindle parameter (Slimt1 to 4, Smax1 to 4)
Spindle override code m (SPmn)

The relation of the gear stage to the spindle limit speed and maximum spindle speed selected with gear selection code
signal (Glmn) is as shown below.

Spindle gear selection code

Gear stage Spindle speedlimit Maximumspindle speed
GI2n GI1n
1 0 0 Slimt1 Smax1
2 0 1 Slimt2 Smax2
3 1 0 Slimt3 Smax3
4 1 1 Slimt4 Smax4

(1) Slimt1 to 4 are set with parameters. The spindle speed for when the spindle (S) command final data is the max.(the
motor is run at the max. speed) is set.This setting is used for each gear stage unit, and is determined by the
deceleration ratio (gear ratio) of the motor and spindle.
For example, if the max. motor speed is 6000 r/min, and the 1st gear stage is decelerated to half, "3000" will be set
in parameter Slimt1.
(2) The controller calculates the spindle command final data as shown below.For example, if S command is issued,
"Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn) is the 1st stage (GI1n=OFF, GI2n=OFF), spindle override value (%) is
SOVR.

Spindle command final data = S command × SOVR × 4095

(SBINn) Slimt1 100

(3) If S2600 is executed when Slimt1 = "3000", Slimit2 = "6000" and spindle override "100%":

Spindle command final data 2600 100

= × × 4095 = 3549(r/min)
(SBINn) 3000 100

During this time, the motor rotation speed is 3549/4095 * 6000 = 5200 (r/min) and the gear ratio is 1/2 therefore the
spindle command final data is 2600 r/min.
(4) The S command is clamped with the Smaxn (n=1 to 4).If Smax1="2500" in the above state, the S-analog output will
be:

Spindle command final data = ( 2500 100

× × 4095 ) < 2500(r/min)(Smax1)
(SBINn) 3000 100

(Note) The spindle controller calculates the actual motor rotation speed with gear ratio as the motor max. rotation
speed is 6000 r/min with the gear ratio is 2nd gear stage.

295
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE STOP SSTPn YD34 YD64 YD94 YDC4 YDF4 YE24 YE54

[Function]
In spindle control, S command data (spindle speed) can be set to "0" by using this signal (SSTPn). Usually, the signal is
not used alone, but combined with "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal explained later.
[Operation]
When the signal (SSTPn) is turned ON, S command data is set to "0". S command data is restored when the signal is
turned OFF.
When "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal turns ON while the signal is ON, S command data which corresponds to speed
set by the spindle speed parameter is output.
"Spindle speed override code m" (SPmn)) is ignored while the signal is ON.

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT SSFTn YD35 YD65 YD95 YDC5 YDF5 YE25 YE55

[Function]
This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed, when spindle gear is shifted, so that spindle gear can be
engaged smoothly.

[Operation]
When the signal (SSFTn) turns ON, the S command data equivalent to the low speed previously set by parameter is
output.
If gears are not engaged properly, the signal is turned ON. It should be noted that "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal should
be ON beforehand to use the signal (SSFTn).
Together with this signal (SSFTn), the forward run signal or the reverse run signal needs to be turned ON.

Spindle gear shift speed is selected by "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn).The relation is as follows:

Spindle gearselection
Gearstage codesignal Spindle speed atgear shift Spindle speedlimit
GI2n GI1n
1 0 0 Ssift1 Slimt1
2 0 1 Ssift2 Slimt2
3 1 0 Ssift3 Slimt3
4 1 1 Ssift4 Slimt4

S command data (spindle speed data) while "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal is ON can be determined from the
formula shown below.
For example, if the "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn) is the 1st stage (GI1n=OFF, GI2n=OFF), the spindle rotation
speed data is as follows:

Ssift1
Spindle rotation speed = × Maximum motor rotation speed
(Motor rotation speed) Slimt1

Actual value is as follows:

Spindle command final data (SBINn) = Ssift1 / Slimt1 * 4095

When the spindle command final data (SBINn) is "4095", the rotation speed of the motor becomes maximum.

296
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A SPINDLE ORIENTATION SORCn YD36 YD66 YD96 YDC6 YDF6 YE26 YE56

[Function]
This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed when executing mechanical orientation (Note) during spindle
control.
<Supplement>
Since most spindle drive/control units recently marketed are equipped with spindle orientation function, and
therefore this signal is rarely used for mechanical orientation. The signal (SORCn) is used for application such as
rotating the spindle by constant rotation speed.
(Note) The mechanical orientation assumes to operate the orientation by performing as follows.
(1) Rotate the spindle at low speed.
(2) It detects when the spindle has reached the area where such as proximity switch is used and then stops
the spindle. The spindle stops after the speed is slowed to some extent.
(3) The position (the orientation position) is decided by hitting the pin against the spindle under the status of
(2).

[Operation]
When the signal (SORCn) turns ON, spindle speed is changed to the low speed previously set by parameter.
It should be noted that "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal must be ON to use the signal (SORCn). Together with this signal
(SORCn), the forward run signal or the reverse run signal is required.

The table below shows the relationship between the oriented spindle speed and the "Spindle gear selection code m"
(GImn) signal.

Spindle gearselection
Gearstage codesignal Orientantion spindle speed Spindle speedlimit
GI2n GI1n
1 0 0 Slimt1
2 0 1 Slimt2
SORI
3 1 0 Slimt3
4 1 1 Slimt4

Spindle speed data while "Spindle orientation" (SORCn) signal is ON can be determined from the formula shown below.
When "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn)" signal combination is GI2n=0 and GI1n=1, the spindle rotation speed
data is as follows:

SORI
Orientation spindle speed data = × Maximum motor rotation speed
(Motor rotation speed) Slimt2

Actual spindle rotation speed is as follows:

Spindle command final data (SBINn) = SORI / Slimt2 * 4095

When the spindle command final data (SBINn) is "4095", the motor becomes the maximum rotation speed.

297
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN
A SRNn YD38 YD68 YD98 YDC8 YDF8 YE28 YE58
START

[Function]
This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal
turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in normal direction (CCW as viewed from the shaft side).
[Operation]
Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command when the signal (SRNn) is turned ON.
When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.
When the "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle forward rotation, the
acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.
When the "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal is turned ON during deceleration to stop of spindle forward rotation,
the spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the machining will start immediately.

Spindle forward run (SRN)

start

Spindle reverse run (SRI)

start

Variation at (Forward rot.)

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)

(1) Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal and "Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal
are turned ON at the same time. To resume forward run, both signals OFF once and then turn the "Spindle forward
run start" signal ON.
(2) The operation may stop during forward run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn the forward run
signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion " (SA) signal turns ON.
(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation speed when the
S command data changes.
(4) When "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORCn) is turned ON at the same as "Spindle forward run start" signal
(SRNn) is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.
(5) Servo ON command (SRVn) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the CNC side so that it will turn
ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle reverse run start (SRIn)
(2) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

298
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN
A SRIn YD39 YD69 YD99 YDC9 YDF9 YE29 YE59
START

[Function]
This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal
turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in inverse direction (CW as viewed from the shaft side).
[Operation]
Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command when the signal (SRIn) is turned ON. (The operation with
"Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal is the same as one with "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) except for its rotation
direction.)
When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.
When the "Spindle reverse run" (SRIn) signal is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle reverse rotation, the
acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.
When the "Spindle reverse run" (SRIn) signal is turned ON during deceleration to stop of spindle reverse rotation, the
spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the machining will start immediately.

Spindle forward run (SRN)

start

Spindle reverse run (SRI)

start

Variation at (Forward rot.)

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)

Spindle forward run (SRN)

start

Spindle reverse run (SRI)

start

Variation at (Forward rot.)

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)

(1)
Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal and "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal
turn ON at the same time. To resume reverse run, both signals OFF once and then turn the "Spindle reverse run
start" signal ON.
(2) The operation may stop during reverse run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn the reverse run
signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns ON.
(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation speed when the
S command data changes.
(4) When "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned ON at the same time "Spindle reverse run start"
(SRIn) signal is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.
(5) Servo ON command (SRVn) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the CNC side so that it will turn
ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle forward run start (SRNn)
(2) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

299
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN IN-
A WRNn YD3C YD6C YD9C YDCC YDFC YE2C YE5C
DEX

[Function]
This signal is used for the forward run index in multi-point indexing.
[Operation]
(1) Multi-point indexing
(a) This signal turns ON after the "Spindle in-position" (ORAOn) signal is output.
(b) Continuous indexing can be carried out by turning this signal ON and OFF while the "Spindle orientation
command" (ORCn) signal is ON.
(c) If this signal is turned ON before the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned ON and the
"Spindle in-position" (ORAOn) signal is output, first the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal will turn
ON, and the orientation will be completed at the multi-point orientation position data read in. Then, the spindle
will be indexed to the position command value read in when this signal is turned ON. If the position command
value is the same when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) turns ON and this signal turns ON, the
indexing operation will not be carried out.
(d) The index position command value is read in at the rising edge of this signal. Thus, even if the index position
command value is changed after this signal is input, the stop position will not change.
(e) Even if this signal is turned OFF while the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) is ON, the spindle will
continue to stop at the position before this signal was turned OFF. Even if this signal is turned OFF during the
indexing operation, the spindle will stop at the position command value read at the rising edge of this signal.
(f) If the stop point and index position command value are close (within the in-position range), the "Spindle in-
position" (ORAOn) signal may not turn OFF and the indexing may be carried out.
(g) If the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned OFF during indexing or when stopped, the servo
lock will turn OFF and the motor will coast. "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) must be carried out again
when executing indexing again.

Multi-point orientation
position data (index) (R7009)

Spindle orientation command

(ORC)

Spindle in-position (ORAO)

t
Spindle forward run index
(WRN) t

Spindle speed waveform

Index stop Index stop

Orienting operation Indexing operation Indexing operation

T : 100ms or more
Orientation stop

300
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Indexing operation according to encoder installation direction]

Case 1 Case 2

Encoder Encoder

Installation method Belt Belt

Motor View A Motor View A

Forward run 0 Reverse run Forward run 0 Reverse run

2328H 6978H 6978H 2328H

Indexing (90°) (270°) (270°) (90°)

4650H 4650H
(180°) (180°)

Forward run 0 Reverse run Forward run 0 Reverse run

2328H 6978H 6978H 2328H

Orientation (90°) (270°) (270°) (90°)

4650H 4650H
(180°) (180°)

(Note) Case 1 above applies when using the motor built-in encoder with Z-phase.
[Related signals]
(1) Multi-point orientation position data
(2) Spindle in-position (ORAOn)
(3) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN IN-
A WRIn YD3D YD6D YD9D YDCD YDFD YE2D YE5D
DEX

[Function]
This signal is used for the spindle reverse run index in multi-point indexing.
[Operation]
The operation is the same as forward run indexing, except that the direction is different. Refer to the section on "Spindle
forward run index".
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle forward run index (WRNn)

301
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
SPINDLE ORIENTATION COM-
A ORCn YD3E YD6E YD9E YDCE YDFE YE2E YE5E
MAND

[Function]
This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal
is turned ON, the spindle is indexed in position.
[Operation]
If the "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORCn) turns ON during spindle rotation or when stopped, the spindle will
start orientation (stopping at set position). When positioning at the set position is completed, the "Spindle in-position"
signal (ORAOn) will be output, and orientation will stop.
During oriention spindle stop, the control system is under "servo lock" condition. Servo lock is released when the signal
(ORCn) is turned OFF. When servo lock must be maintained, the signal, therefore, should be kept turned ON.
The encoder or proximity method can be used for orientation.

The orientation rotation direction is determined with the parameters.

The orientation stop position is determined by the Z-phase for the encoder method, and by the sensor installation
position for the proximity method. The stopping position can be changed with the following items when using the encoder
method.
(1) By parameters (position shift amount)
(2) By the value of multi-point orientation position data
The value of multi-point orientation position data is added to the parameters.

The timing chart for basic orientation is shown below.

Spindle orientation command

(ORC)

Motor speed

Spindle in-position
(ORAO)

(Note 1) The "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) takes precedence over the forward run (SRNn) and reverse run
(SRIn) commands.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only for systems that are high-speed serial connected with the spindle controller.
[Related signals]
(1) Multi-point orientation position data
(2) Spindle in-position (ORAOn)

302
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
A L COIL SELECTION LRSLn YD3F YD6F YD9F YDCF YDFF YE2F YE5F

[Function]
This signal is used to select the low-speed coil in the spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSLn) in the 2-step coil
changeover specification.
(Note) The coil is not changed over during the position loop control mode even if this signal is changed.The coil
selected immediately before the position loop control mode is entered is retained.

(1) 2-step coil changeover

Selected coil L coil selection(LRSLn) In L coil selected(LCSAn)

High-speed (H) OFF OFF
Low-speed (L) ON ON

[Related signals]
(1) In L coil selected (LCSAn)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
YD45 - YD75 - YDA5 - YDD5 - YE05 - YE35 - YE65 -
A SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT m TLmn
D47 D77 DA7 DD7 E07 E37 E67

[Function]
This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal
turns ON, spindle motor torque is reduced temporarily.
The signal is used in mechanical oriented spindle stop, or gear shift.
[Operation]
"Spindle torque limit 1 to 3" (TL1n to TL3n) are provided as spindle torque limit signals.
Spindle torque limit ratio is set by spindle parameters.
Spindle torque limit ratio is determined depending on the combination of Spindle torque limit 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n), and
the output torque will drop accordingly.

Signal Spindle torque Spindle torque Spindle torque

Note
Selection limit (TL1n) limit (TL2n) limit (TL3n)
Spindle torque limit invalid 0 0 0
Spindle torque limit level 1 1 0 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP065
Spindle torque limit level 2 0 1 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP066
Spindle torque limit level 3 1 1 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP067
Spindle torque limit level 4 0 0 1 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP068

(Example) When TL1n=1,TL2n=1,TL3n=0 and SP067=50

Torque
Rated motor torque

100% Spindle torque limit ratio when TL1n=1,

TL2n=1, and TL3n=0 is 50%.

50%

Rotation speed

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for systems that are connected with the spindle controller via high-speed serial
interface.

303
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONI-
A SMSORn YD49 YD79 YDA9 YDD9 YE09 YE39 YE69
TOR REQUEST

[Function]
This signal is used to execute the multi-step speed monitor for the control axes.
This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, NC operates as follows.
(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters.
(2) Checks if NC's speed monitor parameters match with the speed monitor parameters sent to the drive unit.
(3) Notifies a speed monitor command to the drive unit.
(4) Executes the speed monitor function on NC.
(5) Turns the "Speed monitor door open possible" signal ON when receiving the "In speed monitor mode" signal from
the drive unit.

The followings are monitored while the multi-step speed monitor function is executed.

Item Details
When a command speed that NC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with
Command speed monitoring
a parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.
When a motor rotation speed sent from the drive unit to NC exceeds a safety rotation speed
Feedback speed monitoring
set with the parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.
When a difference between feedback position sent from the drive unit to NC and a position
Feedback position monitoring
commanded by NC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

(Note) "Multi-step speed monitor input" (SMSOMImn) selects which parameter to use from "#3141 spsscfeed1 Safty
observation speed 1" to "#3144 spsscfeed4 Safty observation speed 4".

[Timing chart]

Spindle multi-step monitor

request
Safety observation
Speed speed

In spindle multi-step speed

monitor
Emergency stop

Changing the speed

[Caution]
(1) Always make sure to confirm deceleration speed of the spindle before turning this signal ON.Turning the signal ON
without decelerating the speed will cause the safety observation warning due to the FB speed exceeding the
monitoring speed. The speed monitor mode will not be entered in the mean time.
(2) Turning this signal ON while a parameter error occurs will not start the speed monitor. Set the parameter to
appropriate value before turning the signal ON.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)
(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)
(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

304
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED SMSO- YD4A - YD7A - YDAA - YDDA - YE0A - YE3A - YE6A -
A
MONITOR MODE INPUT m MImn D4B D7B DAB DDB E0B E3B E6B

[Function]
This signal designates which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-
step speed monitoring.

Spindle multi-step speed monitor

mode input Corresponding safety observation speed
Mode to be selected
parameter
SMSOMI2n SMSOMI1n
0 0 1 #3141 spsscfeed1
0 1 2 #3142 spsscfeed2
1 0 3 #3143 spsscfeed3
1 1 4 #3144 spsscfeed4

[Operation]
When these signals' state has been changed, the safety observation speed of the designated mode will be transferred to
the drive and the "Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals' state will also be changed. (It
will be changed even when "In spindle multi-step speed monitor" (SMSOEn) is OFF.)
Spindle multi-step speed monitor
mode input Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

NC side speed monitor Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

Drive side speed monitor Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

Spindle multi-step speed monitor Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

mode output
Safety observation speed 1
Safety observation speed 2
FB speed Safety observation speed 3

* When changing the mode, be sure to decelerate before chaging it.

305
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

[Caution]
(1) Before changing these signals' state while "In multi-step speed monitor" is ON, be sure to decelerate the spindle
below the monitor speed of the mode to be changed. When the signals' state has been changed before
deceleration starts, the safety observation warning will be output until the speed decelerates below the monitor
speed of the mode to be changed, and the speed monitor mode will not be changed in the meantime.
(2) Do not open the door before the "Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals for all axes
in the door are changed to the desired mode, even when the "In spindle mult-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) signals
are ON for all axes in the door.

Spindle multi-step monitor request

In spindle multi-step speed monitor

FB speed Monitor speed of
mode 1
Monitor speed of
mode 2

Spindle multi-step speed monitor Mode 1 Mode 2

mode input
Spindle multi-step speed monitor Mode 1 Mode 2
mode output

Safety observation warning Safety observation warning

[Related signals]
(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)
(2) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)
(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis
tact breviation
EXTERNAL AXIS SPEED
A ESSCn YD4F YD7F YDAF YDDF YE0F YE3F YE6F
CLAMP

[Function]
The spindle speed will be clamped with the speed which is designated with the parameter.
[Operation]
The rotating speed will be controlled with the smaller value of either command speed or clamp speed (the parameter
setting value "#3119 ext_clp") by turning the external axis speed clamp signal ON.
Do not switch the state of the external axis speed clamp while the spindle is in operation.

306
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G+209
- SPEED MONITOR MODE SMOD
R2309

[Function]
This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter
"#2118 SscDrSel" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter "#3071 SscDrSelSp".
This signal is ignored when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor valid" is set to "1"
The door No. corresponds to the following bits.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… Door 1
Door 2
…
Door 16

[Operation]
CNC performs as follows by turning the speed monitor signal ON.
(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters
(2) Checks if CNC's speed monitor parameter matches with the speed monitor parameter sent to servo drive unit and
spindle drive unit.
(3) Notifies speed monitor command to the drive unit
(4) Executes the speed monitor function on CNC
(5) Turns ON Speed monitor door open possible signal when CNC receives Speed monitor mode signal from the drive
unit

The followings are performed while the speed monitor function is executed.

Item Details
When a command speed CNC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with
Monitoring command speed
parameter, an emergency stop occurs.
When a motor rotation speed sent to CNC from the drive unit exceeds a safety rotation speed set
Monitoring feed back speed
with parameter, an emergency stop occurs.
When a difference between feedback position sent to CNC from the drive unit and a position
Monitoring feed back position
commanded by CNC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

[Caution]
(1) Be sure to turn ON the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) after confirming deceleration of all axes.
If the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON without deceleration, and the motor rotation speed exceeds
the set speed, a speed monitor alarm will occur, resulting in an emergency stop state.Then, power of the drive
section will be shut off.
(2) Turn OFF the speed monitor mode signal after confirming the door lock is OFF.
(3) Even if the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON while parameter error is output, speed monitoring is not
initiated. Set the parameter with appropriate value, and then turn ON the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD).
[Related signals]
Speed monitor door open possible (SMODEN)

307
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

PLC AXIX DROOP RELEASE IN- G+210

- SMOD
VALID AXIS R2310

[Function] [Operation]
The PLC axis for which the droop should not be released is set when current limit changeover (ILCn) is executed.
The axis corresponds to the following bits:

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Droop release invalid 1st axis

Droop release invalid 2nd axis

Droop release invalid 8th axis

DROOP RELEASE
Operation
INVALID AXIS
Release the droop and adjust the command value to the FB position when current limit
0
changeover is executed.
1 During the current limit changeover, the droop will not be released.

[Caution]
(1) This signal is also valid at the droop release request.
(2) This signal is invalid if the current does not reach its limit at the current limit changeover.

308
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G+212
- KEY OUT
R2312

[Function]
When this signal is used, key data can be entered on the PLC side instead of the CNC keyboard.

[Operation]

CNC PLC
G O T 1000

KEY IN G device Reading key

(R8) U3E1\G10208 data

When
#6451/bit3 is
ON, the PLC Key data copy
When PLC CPU is STOP,
processing is or screen
#6451/bit3 is equal to OFF.
indispensable. selection key,
etc.
#6451/bit3
OFF
CNC KEY OUT
(R2312) G device
process Writing key
ON U3E0\G10212
data

Process of the key data changing/issuing by the PLC program is as follows.

(1) Parameter "#6451/bit3" is ON.
(2) The key data is set to "KEY IN".
(3) The PLC refers to "Reading key data".
(4) Either of the following processes is carried out. (Data is written in "Writing key data".)
Usually, (a) is processed, (b) and (c) are processed if necessary.)
(a) Always copies "Reading key data" to "Writing key data" without change.
(b) Data that is rewritten according to the content of "Reading key data" is written to "Writing key data".
When deleting the key data, etc.
(c) The substitute of the operator
When the alarm is generated, the key data which selects the alarm diagnosis screen is written in "Writing key
data", etc.
(5) CNC processes the valid key data according to the contents of "KEY OUT".

[Caution]
(1) When the key data is rewritten from the PLC, maintain the key data at 50ms or more.
(2) When the key data is rewritten by the PLC program, parameter "#6451/bit3" is turned ON. It is necessary to write the
key data to the PLC program when turning ON.
The key data does not pass PLC program when turning OFF.

[Related signals]
KEY IN

309
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO INPUT#1032 G+224 - G+225

-
(PLC -> Controller) R2324 - R2325

[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user
macro system variables #1000 to #1031 or #1032.The relationship between system variable and file register is as
follows:

System variable Points Interface input signal System variable Points Interface input signal
#1000 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit0 #1016 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit0
#1001 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit1 #1017 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit1
#1002 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit2 #1018 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit2
#1003 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit3 #1019 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit3
#1004 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit4 #1020 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit4
#1005 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit5 #1021 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit5
#1006 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit6 #1022 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit6
#1007 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit7 #1023 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit7
#1008 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit8 #1024 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit8
#1009 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit9 #1025 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit9
#1010 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit10 #1026 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit10
#1011 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit11 #1027 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit11
#1012 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit12 #1028 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit12
#1013 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit13 #1029 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit13
#1014 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit14 #1030 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit14
#1015 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit15 #1031 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit15

System variable Points Interface input signal

#1032 32 Register G+224/R2324, G+225/R2325
This correspondence table shows theexample for file
#1033 32 Register G+226/R2326, G+227/R2327
#1034 32 Register G+228/R2328, G+229/R2329 registers G+224/R2324and G+225/R2325.
#1035 32 Register G+230/R2330, G+231/R2331
File registers G+224/R2324 and G+225/R2325 correspond to system variables #1000 to #1031, and #1032 (32-bit
data).
“User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)” and “User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)”
each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.
Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

Bit selection User macro output#1132 to #1135(Controller - User macro output#1032 to #1035(PLC ->
parameter#6454/bit0 > PLC) Controller)
0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331
1: Part system independent G10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC) (Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC) (Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller) (Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller) (Part system independent)

310
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO INPUT #1033 G+226 - G+227

-
(PLC -> Controller) R2326 - R2327

[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user
macro system variables #1033.

(Example)
Sequence program User macro program

IF [#1000 EQ 0] GOTO 100

ACT
#100 = #1033
DMOV K1000 G10226(R2326)
N100
ACT
WOR G10224(R2324) K1 G10224(R2324)
The #1033(G10226/R2326,
Set 1 in #1000. G10227/R2327)data is read into #100
Other than when #1000 is set to 0.

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO INPUT #1034 G+228 - G+229

-
(PLC -> Controller) R2328 - R2329

[Function][Operation]
The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

USER MACRO INPUT #1035 G+230 - G+231

-
(PLC -> Controller) R2330 - R2331

[Function][Operation]
The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

311
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G+232 - G+235
- PLC VERSION CODE
R2332 - R2335

[Function]
The user PLC version can be displayed with the software version that controls controller on the setting and display unit
(communication terminal) DIAGNOSIS screen.
[Operation]
Characters to be displayed are placed in ASCII code.

<Display format>

PLCu BND − W −
, : Alphabet is used.
: Numeric is used.

Version code ("A0" for 1st version)

: Renewed at major revision A to Z
(I and O should not be used.)
: Renewed at minor revision 0 to 9
: Renewed at supplemental revision A to Z
(I and O should not be used.)

3 digits can be used (no restriction).

4 digits can be used (no restriction).

BND − 1 2 3 4 W 5 6 7 − A 0 B

G+232/R2332 … [Set to "B" in ASCII code (42) for the

high-order side
Set to "FF" code for the low-order side]
G+233/R2333 … [Set to "A0" in ASCII code]

G+234/R2334 … [Set to 567 in binary notation]

G+235/R2335 … [Set to 1234 in binary notation]

(Program example)

ACT
MOV H 4 2 F F G10232(R2332)

Always set to "FF" when displaying 3 digits

" B"
MOV H 4 1 3 0 G10233(R2333)
" 0"
" A"
MOV K567 G10234(R2334)

MOV K 1 2 3 4 G10235(R2335)

Always turn ON at the first scan of the sequence program (constant also possible)

312
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G+240 - G+255
- mTH AXIS INDEX
R2340 - R2355

[Function]
PLC I/F signal of each axis is allocated from the 1st axis of 1st part system in order, but if the axis structure of each part
system is changed, PLC I/F signal corresponding to that will be changed. In that case, the PLC I/F signal's allocation of
each axis is set randomly to make the PLC program in common with the I/F signal.
[Operation]
In the following example, when the 1st part system is a two or three-axes structure and the 2nd part system is a one-axis
structure, it is impossible to make the PLC program in common because the axis I/F of 2nd part system is changed by
the axis structure of 1st part system. Then, by changing the allocation with the axis index, the allocation of 2nd part
system is fixed and the PLC program can be made in common.

1st part system 2 axes • 2nd system part 1 axis

X400 Axis index

Y400
$1 1st axis G+240/R2340 0
$1 1st axis
X420 G+241/R2341 0
$1 2nd axis G+242/R2342 0
Y420
X440
$1 2nd axis
$2 1st axis

Y440
$2 1st axis

Axis I/F after the allocation is

1st part system 3 axes • 2nd part system 1axis changed with the axis index.

X400 Axis index X400

Y400 Y400
$1 1st axis 0 $1 1st axis
G+240/R2340 $1 1st axis
$1 1st axis
X420 G+241/R2341 0 X420

$1 2nd axis $1 2nd axis

G+242/R2342 4
Y420 Y420
X440 G+243/R2343 3 X440
$1 2nd axis $1 2nd axis
$1 3rd axis $2 1st axis
Move 3rd axis to 4th axis.
X460 Move 4th axis to 3rd axis. X460
Y440 Y440
$2 1st axis $1 3rd axis
$1 3rd axis $2 1st axis

Y460 Y460

$2 1st axis $1 3rd axis

313
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G+257

-
BASIC SPINDLE SELECTION R2357

[Function]
Select the basic spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.
[Operation]
Select the spindle to be controlled as the basic spindle from the serially connected spindles.
(0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th
spindle
(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected, spindle synchronous control will not be executed.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G+258
- SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE SE-
LECTION R2358

[Function]
Select the synchronous spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.
[Operation]
Select the spindle to be controlled as the synchronous spindle from the serially connected spindles.
(0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th
spindle
(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected,
spindle synchronous control will not be executed.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous spindle.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION G+259

-
PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT R2359

[Function]
The synchronous spindle's phase shift amount can be designated from the PLC.
[Operation]
Designate the phase shift amount for the synchronous spindle.
Unit: 360°/4096
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)
(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)
(3) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)
(4) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
(5) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)
(6) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)

314
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

PLC VERSION CODE G+260 - G+266

-
(METHOD 2) R2360 - R2366

[Function]
This signal enables the user PLC version to be displayed, together with the software version controlling control unit, in
the DIAGNOSIS screen of the setting display unit (communication terminal).
[Operation]
The ASCII code that corresponds to the character to be displayed in the version display interface is set.
<Display format and usage example>

PLCu
: Random alphanumeric
Total of 14 characters characters are used.
"HIGH" side of R*
PLCu 6L 84 01 23 45 67 89 "LOW" side of R*

G+260/R2360 …… (38 39)

G+261/R2361 …… (36 37)

G+262/R2362 …… (34 35)

G+263/R2363 …… (32 33)

G+264/R2364 …… (30 31)

G+265/R2365 …… (38 34)

G+266/R2366 …… (36 4C)

ASCII code
Interface

(Program example)

ACT
DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10260(R2360)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10262(R2362)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10264(R2364)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10266(R2366)

Always turn ON at the 1st scan of the sequence program.

(Can be left ON constantly.)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
G+280 - G+289
- APLC OUTPUT DATA n
R2380 - R2389

[Function] [Operation]
This signal is an interface for sending data from PLC device to APLC C language module.

315
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE- G+290 - G+291

-
OVER REQUEST R2390 - R2391

[Function]
This signal notices that necessary command is set in command area.
[Operation]
Turns ON when command data is changed.
(R2391/bitF is handled as window valid signal.)
<R2390>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Data changeover request for Window 1

・・・
Data changeover request for Window 2
・・・
Data changeover request for Window 10

<R2391>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Automatic setting window data change request

Window valid

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MOD- G+2580 - G+2585

- SU_PC m
ULE m R4450 - R4455

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal input status of the dual signal modules.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module input 00

PLC side dual signal module input 01
…
PLC side dual signal module input 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module input 10

PLC side dual signal module input 11
…
PLC side dual signal module input 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

316
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALER- G+2590 - G+2595

- SU_PER m
ROR MODULE m R4460 - R4465

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status of "PLC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module.The signal turned ON
once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module error 00

PLC side dual signal module error 01
…
PLC side dual signal module error 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module error 10

PLC side dual signal module error 11
…
PLC side dual signal module error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT- G+2600 - G+2602

- SU_PO m
PUT MODULE m R4470 - R4472

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module.
[Operation
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output 0A

・・・ ・・・ PLC side dual signal module output 0B
・・・
PLC side dual signal module output 0F

PLC side dual signal module output 1A

PLC side dual signal module output 1B
・・・
PLC side dual signal module output 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

317
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT- SU_POER G+2604 - G+2606

-
PUT ERROR MODULE m m R4474 - R4476

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status between PLC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal
module. The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output error 0A

… … PLC side dual signal module output error 0B
…
PLC side dual signal module output error 0F

PLC side dual signal module output error 1A

PLC side dual signal module output error 1B
…
PLC side dual signal module output error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2609

- SU_PST2
PARE STATUS 2 R4479

[Function]
This signal informs PLC side dual signal compare status to the CNC.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals:
bit0: Output off check error
An error is detected during the output off check.
bit1: Device test error detection 2
An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.
[Caution]
This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual
signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
PLC SIDE SAFETYCOMPARE G+2610
- ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMA- SU_PLT
TION R4480

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.
[Operation
To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check
each other.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

318
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2611

- SU_PST
PARE STATUS R4481

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison status.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side emergency stop status

PLC side dual signal module input compare error
PLC side counterpart’s signal compare stop
detected
PLC side dual signal module output FB compare error
PLC side compare process start

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
G+2612
- PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV
R4482

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head G device No. that has been transmitted to the PLC.
This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2613
- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE SU_PDLY
TIME R4483

[Function
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module, which
has been transmitted to the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

319
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD G+2614 - G+2616

- SU_PDV m
DEVICE NO. m R4484 - R4486

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module, which has been transmitted to
the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1” to “#21145 SSU_Dev3”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

NO. OF DUAL SIGNALMOD- G+2618

- SU_PNUM
ULES ON PLC SIDE R4488

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the number of dual signal modules, which has been transmitted to the PLC.This is for
confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The CNC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

PLC SIDE SAFETYOPERATION G+2620

- SU_POP
STATUS R4490

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the safety-related operation status that has been set by PLC side user ladder when dual
signal comparison function is valid.
[Operation]
The CNC is informed of the safety-related operation status devices (M0 to M15) that have been set by PLCside user
ladder.
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

M0 CNC emergency stop request

M1 User safety status signal 1
M2 User safety status signal 2
…
M15 User safety status signal 15

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

320
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G+1000 G+1010 G+1020 G+1030 G+1040 G+1050 G+1060 G+1070

EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDI- R3100 R3110 R3120 R3130 R3140 R3150 R3160 R3170
- NATE SYSTEM COMPENSA- 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
TION DATA G+1080 G+1090 G+1100 G+1110 G+1120 G+1130 G+1140 G+1150
R3180 R3190 R3200 R3210 R3220 R3230 R3240 R3250

[Function] [Operation]
External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the G
device for each axis.
Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC CPU rewrites G device compensation data. Necessary condition, timing,
etc., are set by PLC CPU.
The interface between PLC CPU and CNC is shown below.

G device Details G device Details

File register File register
G+1000 G+1080
Compensation data 1st axis Compensation data 9th axis
R3100 R3180
G+1010 G+1090
Compensation data 2nd axis Compensation data 10th axis
R3110 R3190
G+1020 G+1100
Compensation data 3rd axis Compensation data 11th axis
R3120 R3200
G+1030 G+1110
Compensation data 4th axis Compensation data 12th axis
R3130 R3210
G+1040 G+1120
Compensation data 5th axis Compensation data 13th axis
R3140 R3220
G+1050 G+1130
Compensation data 6th axis Compensation data 14th axis
R3150 R3230
G+1060 G+1140
Compensation data 7th axis Compensation data 15th axis
R3160 R3240
G+1070 G+1150
Compensation data 8th axis Compensation data 16th axis
R3170 R3250

(Note 1) File register Nos. correspond to CNC.

(Note 2) The delay to compensation is about (one PLC program scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and
servo follow delay are not contained.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G+1002 G+1012 G+1022 G+1032 G+1042 G+1052 G+1062 G+1072

THERMAL EXPANSION OFF- R3102 R3112 R3122 R3132 R3142 R3152 R3162 R3172
- SET COMPENSATION 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
AMOUNT G+1082 G+1092 G+1102 G+1112 G+1122 G+1132 G+1142 G+1152
R3182 R3192 R3202 R3212 R3222 R3232 R3242 R3252

[Function][Operation]
Set the compensation amount for the axis feed error caused by the ball screw's thermal expansion. Set "thermal
expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" as a set for each axis.
Refer to "thermal expansion compensation amount" for details.
[Related signals]
Thermal expansion max. compensation amount
Thermal expansion compensation amount

321
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G+1003 G+1013 G+1023 G+1033 G+1043 G+1053 G+1063 G+1073
R3103 R3113 R3123 R3133 R3143 R3153 R3163 R3173
THERMAL EXPANSION MAX.
- 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
COMPENSATION AMOUNT
G+1083 G+1093 G+1103 G+1113 G+1123 G+1133 G+1143 G+1153
R3183 R3193 R3203 R3213 R3223 R3233 R3243 R3253

[Function][Operation]
Set the maximum compensation amount of the axis feed error caused by the ball screw's thermal expansion. Set
"thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" as a set for each
axis. Refer to "thermal expansion compensation amount" for details.
[Related signals]
Thermal expansion offset compensation amount
Thermal expansion compensation amount

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
G+1004 G+1014 G+1024 G+1034 G+1044 G+1054 G+1064 G+1074
R3104 R3114 R3124 R3134 R3144 R3154 R3164 R3174
EXTERNAL DECELERATION
- 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
SPEED SELECTION
G+1084 G+1094 G+1104 G+1114 G+1124 G+1134 G+1144 G+1154
R3184 R3194 R3204 R3214 R3224 R3234 R3244 R3254

[Function]
When the external deceleration signal is valid, the external deceleration parameter for each axis is selected. This R
register is valid when "1" is set to "#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid".
[Operation]
When external deceleration +(*EDTn) or external deceleration-(*EDTn) is valid, it is decelerated to the speed, which is
set in "#2086 exdcax1 External deceleration speed 1", "#2161 exdcax2 External deceleration speed 2" to "#2165
exdcax6 External deceleration speed 6". The relationship between parameter and the setting value is as follows.

The external deceleration External deceleration speed (for each

speed selection value axis)
External deceleration speed 1 (#2086
0
exdcax1)
External deceleration speed 2 (#2161
1
exdcax2)
External deceleration speed 3 (#2162
2
exdcax3)
External deceleration speed 4 (#2163
3
exdcax4)
External deceleration speed 5 (#2164
4
exdcax5)
External deceleration speed 6 (#2165
5
exdcax6)
External deceleration speed 1 (#2086
Other than the above.
exdcax1)

[Related signals]
(1)External deceleration +(*+EDTn)
(2)External deceleration -(*-EDTn)

322
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC
CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE G+300 G+400 G+500 G+600 G+700 G+800 G+900
-
OVERRIDE R2400 R2500 R2600 R2700 R2800 R2900 R3000

[Function]
When "Cutting feedrate override method selection method" (FVSn) is set to "file register method", override (0 to 300%,
1% increment) can be exerted on the cutting feedrate. Desired value is set to file register (R) in binary code.
[Operation]
When override is exerted to the preset feedrate, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying the preset
feedrate by the specified override ratio (provided that "2nd cutting feedrate override" is not valid).
The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st feedrate override" setting, under the following condition:
(1) "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.
(3) During TAPPING mode.
(4) During thread cutting.
(Note) Only when override setting is 0%, override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic operation.
That is, cutting feed as well as rapid traverse stop if the 1st feedrate override is set to 0% during automatic
operation. When override setting is 0%, "M01 OPERATION ERROR" appears in the alarm display section of
setting and display unit, and "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0102" in the ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.
[Related signals]
(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)
(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection method (FVSn)
(3) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)
(4) 2nd cutting feedrate override
(Note) For relationship among these signals, refer to the description the cutting federate override.

323
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE G+301 G+401 G+501 G+601 G+701 G+801 G+901
-
OVERRIDE R2401 R2501 R2601 R2701 R2801 R2901 R3001

[Function]
When the "2nd cutting feedrate override valid" function (FV2En) is used, another override can be exerted on cutting
feedrate overrided by "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) in code method, or by "1st cutting feedrate override"
when the "Cutting feedrate override method selection" (FVSn) is set to file register method. The 2nd feedrate override
can be set within range from 0% to 327.67% with 0.01% increment. The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
When this override function is used, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying commanded feedrate (F) by
"1st cutting feedrate override" ratio and "2nd cutting feedrate override" ratio.
Since the least increment of 2nd feedrate override is 0.01%, override setting "10000" corresponds to 100%.
The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st cutting feedrate override" or "2nd cutting feedrate override"
setting, under the following condition:
(1) "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.
(3) During TAPPING mode.
(4) During thread cutting.
(Note) Only when the 1st cutting feedrate override or 2nd cutting feedrate override is 0% or both of them are 0%,
override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic operation. That is, cutting feed as well as rapid
traverse stop if the 1st override feedrate is set to 0% during automatic operation. When override setting is 0%,
"M01 OPERATION ERROR" appears in the alarm display section of setting and display unit, and "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0102" in the ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.
[Related signals]
(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)
(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection method (FVSn)
(3) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)
(4) 1st cutting feedrate override
(Note) For relationship among these signals, refer to the description about the cutting feedrate override.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+302 G+402 G+502 G+602 G+702 G+802 G+902
- RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
R2402 R2502 R2602 R2702 R2802 R2902 R3002

[Function]
The rapid traverse override specified with values (ROVSn) provides the override control within the range of 0% to 100%
by 1% increments in addition to the normal override specified with codes (ROVmn).
The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
During rapid traverse in the automatic or manual operation, the actual feed rate will be the result of multiplying this
override ratio by the rapid traverse speed set in a parameter.
(Note 1) The override will be clamped at 100%.
(Note 2) No operation error messages are indicated even if the value is set to 0%.
[Related signals]
(1) Rapid traverse overridecode m (ROVmn)
(2) Rapid traverse override method selection (ROVSn)

324
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+304 - G+404 - G+504 - G+604 - G+704 - G+804 - G+904 -
G+305 G+405 G+505 G+605 G+705 G+805 G+905
- MANUAL FEEDRATE
R2404 - R2504 - R2604 - R2704 - R2804 - R2904 - R3004 -
R2405 R2505 R2605 R2705 R2805 R2905 R3005

[Function]
When "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is set to "file register method", feedrate can be specified,
besides code method (*JVmn) setting, by setting desired feedrate ratio manually. The value is set in the file register (R)
in binary.
[Operation]
This mode of feedrate setting can be used in JOG feed, incremental feed, reference position return feed and manual
arbitrary feed mode. For JOG, incremental and reference position return mode, "Rapid traverse speed" (RTn) signal
should be OFF. For manual arbitrary feed mode, "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) signal should be OFF.
Feedrate specified in this mode can be applied to feed motion in dry run (automatic operation).
The use of this signal is conditioned as follows:
(1) When "Manual feedrate override valid" (OVSLn) signal is OFF, the originally set feedrate is applied.
(2) When "Manual feedrate override valid" (OVSLn) signal is ON, the actual feedrate can be obtained by
multiplying the feedrate specified by the 1st/2nd cutting feed override value.
(3) Manual feedrate is set to file registers Rn and Rn+1. The feedrate depends on "Feedrate least increment code
m" (PCFmn) as listed below.

Least increment(mm/
PCF2n PCF1n Operation
min or inch/min)
0 0 10 10mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
0 1 1 1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
1 0 0.1 0.1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
1 1 0.01 0.01mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

(4) Feedrate clamp (max. feedrate) depends on setting of axis parameter (cutting feedrate clamp) when "Rapid
traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF.
(Note 1) During incremental feed mode, the true feedrate does not change even when the manual feedrate setting
is changed while feed motion is going on.
(Note 2) As for file registers (Rn and Rn+1), Rn is of lower order.Of the file registers Rn and Rn+1 to designate the
feedrate, if the value is 2-bytes (one word), the high-order side does not need to do anything.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)
(2) Manual feedrate method selection (JVSn)

325
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+308 - G+408 - G+508 - G+608 - G+708 - G+808 - G+908 -
1ST HANDLE/INCREMENTAL G+309 G+409 G+509 G+609 G+709 G+809 G+909
-
FEED MAGNIFICATION R2408 - R2508 - R2608 - R2708 - R2808 - R2908 - R3008 -
R2409 R2509 R2609 R2709 R2809 R2909 R3009

[Function]
By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPSn), an arbitrary magnification can be designated
separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is set in file register (R) in
binary.
When the "handle/incremental feed magnification method selection" (MPSn) signal is ON, this magnification factor is
applied for the hand pulse from handy terminal.
[Operation]
Magnification is applied to amount of feed per pulse in handle feed mode (output from manual pulse generator), or to
amount of feed per signal in incremental feed mode +/- (+Jn, -Jn).
When multiplier is "500" and one pulse is given in handle feed mode, for example, 500μm of feed motion occurs.
When multiplier is "30000" and one feed command signal is given in incremental feed mode, 30mm of feed motion
occurs (time constant for feed motion is equal to time constant for rapid traverse or step).
(Note 1) Change of magnification setting during feed motion is ignored.
(Note 2) Since considerably large magnification can be used, the signal should be used carefully.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/Incremental feed magnification +/- (MPmn)
(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+310 - G+410 - G+510 - G+610 - G+710 - G+810 - G+910 -
2ND HANDLE FEED MAGNIFI- G+311 G+411 G+511 G+611 G+711 G+811 G+911
-
CATION R2410 - R2510 - R2610 - R2710 - R2810 - R2910 - R3010 -
R2411 R2511 R2611 R2711 R2811 R2911 R3011

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+312 - G+412 - G+512 - G+612 - G+712 - G+812 - G+912 -
3RD HANDLE FEED MAGNIFI- G+313 G+413 G+513 G+613 G+713 G+813 G+913
-
CATION R2412 - R2512 - R2612 - R2712 - R2812 - R2912 - R3012 -
R2413 R2513 R2613 R2713 R2813 R2913 R3013

[Function]
By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPSn), an arbitrary magnification can be designated
separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is set in file register (R) in
binary.
Arbitrary magnification, when using 2nd and 3rd handles, is designated here.
[Operation]
When 1 pulse is sent by 2nd or 3rd handle, its feed amount conforms to this feed magnification.
For example, when 1 pulse is sent in handle mode with magnification set at "500", its feed amount will be 500μm.
(Note 1) Changing magnification during feed motion is invalid.
(Note 2) Considerably large magnification can be set in the handle/incremental feed magnification method. Pay extra
attention when setting magnification.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)
(2) Handle/incremental feed magnification
(3) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)

326
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+314 - G+414 - G+514 - G+614 - G+714 - G+814 - G+914 -
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G+315 G+415 G+515 G+615 G+715 G+815 G+915
-
1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT R2414 - R2514 - R2614 - R2714 - R2814 - R2914 - R3014 -
R2415 R2515 R2615 R2715 R2815 R2915 R3015

[Function]
This data specifies the travel amount or positioning point in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis
selection code m" (CXmn).
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" means differently depending on the statuses of the "Manual arbitrary feed
MC/WK" (CXS5n) and "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signals.
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies the travel amount (increment).
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signal is OFF, it depends on the status of the "Manual
arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal as follows:
(a) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of the
machine coordinate system.
(b) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of the
modal workpiece coordinate system.
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is written in binary notation with a sign. The unit of the specified value
matches that of data entered.

(Example)When micrometer system specifies "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" to 1, axis motion is set to
1μm (at incremental specification).
[Caution]
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" forms a data item by G+314/R2414 and G+315/R2415 (for 1st part
system). Handle negative data carefully.
[Related signals]
For related signals, see the descriptions on "Manual arbitrary feed mode" (PTPn).

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+316 - G+416 - G+516 - G+616 - G+716 - G+816 - G+916 -
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G+317 G+417 G+517 G+617 G+717 G+817 G+917
-
2ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT R2416 - R2516 - R2616 - R2716 - R2816 - R2916 - R3016 -
R2417 R2517 R2617 R2717 R2817 R2917 R3017

[Function][Operation]
"Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd
axis selection code m" (CX2mn).
The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the previous section.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+318 - G+418 - G+518 - G+618 - G+718 - G+818 - G+918 -
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G+319 G+419 G+519 G+619 G+719 G+819 G+919
-
3ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT R2418 - R2518 - R2618 - R2718 - R2818 - R2918 - R3018 -
R2419 R2519 R2619 R2719 R2819 R2919 R3019

[Function][Operation]
"Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd
axis selection code m" (CX3mn).
The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the previous section.

327
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+320 G+420 G+520 G+620 G+720 G+820 G+920
- OT IGNORED
R2420 R2520 R2620 R2720 R2820 R2920 R3020

[Function]
When this signal is used, stroke end error can be avoided without eternal wiring for stroke end signal (a device which is
set in 2074 H/W_OT+ or #2075 HW_HT-) provided for each axis. "Stroke end" signal ON axis for which the "OT ignored"
signal is set can be used for other purpose.

[Operation]
"Stroke end" signal associated with a specific axis motion can be ignored.
The interface for this signal is as follows:

File register (R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ← Bit

1st axis OT ignored

2nd axis OT ignored
:
16th axis OT ignored

(Note 1) The signal is applicable to (+) and (-) motion at the same time (ignored when "ON").
(Note 2) "OT" is abbreviation of "Over Travel".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+321 G+421 G+521 G+621 G+721 G+821 G+921
- NEAR-POINT DOG IGNORED
R2421 R2521 R2621 R2721 R2821 R2921 R3021

[Function]
When this signal is used, "Near-point detected" signal which is used for dog type reference position return can be
ignored (tripping of near switch can be ignored).
The selection of two or more near-point dogs with conditions, or the activation of the "Near-point detected" signal at a
position not desirable due to the machine structure can seemingly be ignored. Furthermore, the "Near-point detected"
signal for an axis to which the "Near-point dog ignored" signal is set can be used for other applications.
[Operation]
When the signal is turned ON, "Near-point detected" signal corresponding to the control axis can be ignored.
The interface is shown below:

File register (R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ← Bit

1st near point ignored

2nd near point ignored
:
16th near point ignored

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA- G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930
-
TION R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

[Function]
The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool
life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]
The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)

328
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

SYNCHRONIZATION CON- G+332 G+432 G+532 G+632 G+732 G+832 G+932

-
TROL OPERATION METHOD R2432 R2532 R2632 R2732 R2832 R2932 R3032

[Function]
The synchronization control's ON/OFF can be changed over by operating the bit corresponding to each axis of this
signal. CNC changes over the operation at the point when all axes enter in-position state.

Synchronization control
operation method
・・・7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
6th axis

[Operation]

In case of synchronous control

(1) Designation of the synchronization operation method
Turn ON both the bits corresponding to the primary axis and secondary axis with the base specifications parameter
"#1068 slavno".
(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis) and 3rd axis (secondary axis) are operated by the synchronous
operation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX
Synchronization control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
operation method 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 06

(2) Designation of the independent operation method

Turn ON the bit corresponding to only one of the axes to be moved with the primary axis command.
(Example) When only the 3rd axis (secondary axis) is moved

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX
Synchronization control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
operation method 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 04

For the machine structure reasons, if the synchronous state must always be kept from immediately after the power is
turned ON, set the synchronization control operation method when the ladder power is turned ON at the first time.

329
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

In case of multi-secondary-axis synchronous control

(1) Designation of the synchronization operation method
Turn ON both the bits corresponding to the primary axis and secondary axis with the base specifications parameter
"#22014 mastno".
(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis), the 3rd axis (secondary axis), and the 4th axis (secondary axis) are
operated by the synchronous operation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX
Synchronization control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
operation method 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0E

(2) Designation of the independent operation method

Turn ON the bit corresponding to only one of the axes to be moved with the primary axis command.
(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis) and the 3rd axis (secondary axis) are moved in synchronization, and
the 4th axis is operated independently.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX
Synchronization control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
operation method 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 06

For the machine structure reasons, if the synchronous state must always be kept from immediately after the power is
turned ON, set the synchronization control operation method when the ladder power is turned ON at the first time.

330
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

<Example of ladder creation>

MOV H0C G10332(R2432)

Only turning the power ON

at the first time

When changing the operation with the synchronization control operation method during automatic operation,
calculate the coordinates again.
After secondary axis independent operation is carried out, the end point coordinates of the secondary axis are
substituted in the program end point coordinates for the primary axis. Thus, if the coordinates are not recalculated,
the primary axis' movement command will not be created properly.
Request recalculation immediately after the synchronization control operation method is changed.
<Example of ladder creation>
Primary axis: 2nd axis Secondary axis: 3rd axis
When M code is assigned to each:
M10: Asynchronous operation
M20: Independent operation
M40: Synchronous operation

X230
= H10 G10220(R20) M2000 Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON
and M10 commanded → M2000 ON
X230
= H20 G10220(R20) M2001 Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON
and M20 commanded → M2001 ON
X230
= H40 G10220(R20) M2002 Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON
and M40 commanded → M2002 ON
M2000 X1F8
MOV H00 G10332(R2432) M2000 ON and motion command completion (DENn)
→ Asynchronous operation signal set
M2001 X1F8
MOV H04 G10332(R2432) M2001 ON and motion command completion (DENn)
→ Independent operation signal set
M2002 X1F8
MOV H06 G10332(R2432) M2002 ON and motion command completion (DENn)
→ Synchronous operation signal set
M2000
Y72B M2000 or M2001 or M2002 ON
→ Recalculation request (CRQn) set
M2001

M2002

331
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Execution block Movement (1) M2002;(synchronization designation) Movement (2)

MFmn

DENn

Operation method Asynchronous Synchronous

selection

All axes in-position

Operation method Asynchronous Synchronous

Recalculation
request (CRQn)
CNC latches at
rising edge

FIN

Calculation of next
block

Recalculation

[Caution]
(1) During synchronous operation or independent operation, the primary axis signals are valid for the "Interlock" and
"Machine lock" signals, etc.
(2) The secondary axis will return to the reference position in synchronization with the primary axis if G27, G28 or G30
is commanded during synchronous operation. If the secondary axis is at the reference position when the primary
axis completes reference position return, the reference position return will be completed. If the secondary axis is not
at the reference position when the primary axis completes reference position return, the "Reference position
reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n) signal for the primary axis will not be output.
(3) The position switches are processed independently for the primary axis and secondary axis.
(4) Input the same OT signal for the primary axis and secondary axis.
Set the same soft limit value for the primary axis and secondary axis.
If the above settings cannot be made because of the machine specifications, observe the following points.
- If OT or soft limit occurs during the manual operation mode, an alarm will occur only for the secondary axis,
and the primary axis will not stop.
Thus, make sure that the primary axis alarm turns ON before the secondary axis.
- OT during the manual operation mode will cause the secondary axis to stop when the OT signal for only the
primary axis turns ON. The primary axis is stopped by the position controller, and the secondary axis is
stopped by the CNC control unit. Thus, there may be a difference in the stop positions. If an excessive error
alarm occurs because of OT, enter the editing mode, and cancel the alarm.
(5) The primary axis independent operation is handled as asynchronous, so the PLC input/output signal is not reflected
on the secondary axis.
(6) A command error and feedback error are confirmed on a synchronous error screen.
[Related signals]
Synchronized correction mode (SYCMn)
Recalculation request (CRQn)

332
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

DROOP RELEASE INVALID G+333 G+433 G+533 G+633 G+733 G+833 G+933
-
AXIS R2433 R2533 R2633 R2733 R2833 R2933 R3033

[Function]
The axis which does not release droop is set when current limit changeover (ILCn) is executed.
[Operation]

Droop release invalid axis Operation

Release the droop and move the command value to the FB position when current limit
0
changeover is executed.
1 During the current limit changeover, the droop will not be released.

(Note 1) This signal is also valid at the droop release request.

(Note 2) This signal is invalid if the current does not reach its limit at the current limit changeover.
[Related signals]
(1) Current limit changeover (ILCn)
(2) Droop release request (DORn)
(3) In current limit (ILIn)
(4) Current limit reached (ILAn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

EACH AXIS REFERENCE POSI- G+334 G+434 G+534 G+634 G+734 G+834 G+934
-
TION SELECTION R2434 R2534 R2634 R2734 R2834 R2934 R3034

[Function]
Select the each axis reference position return position for manual reference position return.
[Operation]
(1) This signal is valid when the reference position select method is ON.
(2) Two bits are used for each axis to select the reference position.
(a) R register and corresponding axis
Each axis reference position select

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
               


 1st axis setting value
2nd axis setting value
3rd axis setting value
4th axis setting value
5th axis setting value
6th axis setting value
7th axis setting value
8th axis setting value

(b) Setting value and reference position No.

High-order bit Low-order bit Return position

0 0 1st reference position
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position

[Related signals]
(1) Reference position select method (Mn)

333
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+338 - G+438 - G+538 - G+638 - G+738 - G+838 - G+938 -
SEARCH & START G+339 G+439 G+539 G+639 G+739 G+839 G+939
-
PROGRAM NO R2438 - R2538 - R2638 - R2738 - R2838 - R2938 - R3038 -
R2439 R2539 R2639 R2739 R2839 R2939 R3039

[Function]
The No. of the program to be searched with search & start is designated.
[Operation]
Set the No. of the program to be searched with search & start with a binary value.
(Note 1) The program No. must be set before the "Search & start" signal is input.
(Note 2) If a machining program No. is not designated or if an illegal No. is designated, and error signal will be output
when the search operation is executed.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start (RSSTn)
(2) Search & start (error) (SSEn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+346 - G+446 - G+546 - G+646 - G+746 - G+846 - G+946 -
WORKPIECE COORDINATE G+347 G+447 G+547 G+647 G+747 G+847 G+947
- OFFSET MEASUREMENT
COMPENSATION NO. R2446 - R2546 - R2646 - R2746 - R2846 - R2946 - R3046 -
R2447 R2547 R2647 R2747 R2847 R2947 R3047

[Function]
(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool No. (Selected tool No.) and the tool compensation No. (Workpiece coordinate offset measurement
compensation No.) used for workpiece coordinate offset measurement in a BCD code.
(2) Chuck barrier check
Set the tool No. (Selected tool No.) and the compensation No. (Workpiece coordinate offset measurement
compensation No.) selected for the chuck barrier check.
[Operation]
(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool No. and the tool compensation No. used for workpiece coordinate offset measurement in a BCD code.
This is set with the user PLC.
This tool No. (Selected tool No.) is interpreted as the tool offset No. by the CNC.
(2) Chuck barrier check
The file register used differs according to the parameter (#1098 Tlno.)

Workpiece coordinate offset

#1098 Tlno. Selected tool No.
measurement compensation No.
0 Tool length, tool nose wear offset No. Tool No.
Tool No., tool length
1 Tool nose wear offset No.
compensation No.

If the tool length compensation No. is not designated (if the contents are 0), the tool length and tool nose wear offset will
both follow the T command modal.
The T command modal will also be followed if the designated offset No. is not within the specified range.
If the T command modal value is 0, the compensation amount will be interpreted as 0.
[Related signals]
(1) Selected tool No.

334
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+348 - G+448 - G+548 - G+648 - G+748 - G+848 - G+948 -
G+349 G+449 G+549 G+649 G+749 G+849 G+949
- SELECTED TOOL NO.
R2448 - R2548 - R2648 - R2748 - R2848 - R2948 - R3048 -
R2449 R2549 R2649 R2749 R2849 R2949 R3049

[Function][Operation]
Refer to the explanation of "workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No." for details.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE G+361 G+461 G+561 G+661 G+761 G+861 G+961
-
NO. R2461 R2561 R2661 R2761 R2861 R2961 R3061

[Function] [Operation]
The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No. Be sure to set 0 for this CNC.
An error occurs if any No. except "0" is set. (Status: 3)

Device No. Device

0 Memory

[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search status
(3) External search program No.
(4) External search sequence No.
(5) External search block No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+362 - G+462 - G+562 - G+662 - G+762 - G+862 - G+962 -
EXTERNAL SEARCH PRO- G+363 G+463 G+563 G+663 G+763 G+863 G+963
-
GRAM NO. R2462 - R2562 - R2662 - R2762 - R2862 - R2962 - R3062 -
R2463 R2563 R2663 R2763 R2863 R2963 R3063

[Function] [Operation]
Designate the program No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (8 digits).

[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search status
(3) External search device No.
(4) External search sequence No.
(5) External search block No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

335
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+364 - G+464 - G+564 - G+664 - G+764 - G+864 - G+964 -
EXTERNAL SEARCHSE- G+365 G+465 G+565 G+665 G+765 G+865 G+965
-
QUENCE NO. R2464 - R2564 - R2664 - R2764 - R2864 - R2964 - R3064 -
R2465 R2565 R2665 R2765 R2865 R2965 R3065

[[Function] [Operation]
Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
The setting range is 1 to 99999 (5 digits).

[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search status
(3) External search device No.
(4) External search program No.
(5) External search block No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+366 - G+466 - G+566 - G+666 - G+766 - G+866 - G+966 -
EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK G+367 G+467 G+567 G+667 G+767 G+867 G+967
-
NO. R2466 - R2566 - R2666 - R2766 - R2866 - R2966 - R3066 -
R2467 R2567 R2667 R2767 R2867 R2967 R3067

[[Function] [Operation]
Designate the block No. as a binary.
The setting range is 0 to 99 (2 digits).

[Related signals]
(1) External search finished
(2) External search status
(3) External search device No.
(4) External search program No.
(5) External search sequence No.
(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

336
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+370 - G+470 - G+570 - G+670 - G+770 - G+870 - G+970 -
USER MACRO INPUT #1032 G+371 G+471 G+571 G+671 G+771 G+871 G+971
-
(PLC -> Controller) R2470 - R2570 - R2670 - R2770 - R2870 - R2970 - R3070 -
R2471 R2571 R2671 R2771 R2871 R2971 R3071

[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user
macro system variables #1000 to #1031 or #1032.
The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

Systemvariable Points Interface input signal Systemvariable Points Interface input signal
#1000 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 0 #1016 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 0
#1001 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 1 #1017 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 1
#1002 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 2 #1018 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 2
#1003 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 3 #1019 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 3
#1004 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 4 #1020 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 4
#1005 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 5 #1021 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 5
#1006 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 6 #1022 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 6
#1007 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 7 #1023 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 7
#1008 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 8 #1024 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 8
#1009 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 9 #1025 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 9
#1010 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 10 #1026 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 10
#1011 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 11 #1027 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 11
#1012 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 12 #1028 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 12
#1013 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 13 #1029 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 13
#1014 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 14 #1030 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 14
#1015 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 15 #1031 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface input signal

#1032 32 Register G+370/R2470, G+371/R2471
This correspondence table shows the example for file
#1033 32 Register G+372/R2472, G+373/R2473
registers G+370/R2470 and G+371/R2471.
#1034 32 Register G+374/R2474, G+375/R2475
#1035 32 Register G+376/R2476, G+377/R2477

File registers G+370/R2470 and G+371/R2471 correspond to system variables #1000 to #1031, and #1032 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"
each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.
Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

User macro output User macro output

Bit selection parameter
#1132 to #1135 #1032 to #1035
#6454/bit0
(Controller -> PLC) (PLC -> Controller)
0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331
1: Part system independent G10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

337
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+372 - G+472 - G+572 - G+672 - G+772 - G+872 - G+972 -
USER MACRO INPUT #1033 G+373 G+473 G+573 G+673 G+773 G+873 G+973
-
(PLC -> Controller) R2472 - R2572 - R2672 - R2772 - R2872 - R2972 - R3072 -
R2473 R2573 R2673 R2773 R2873 R2973 R3073

[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user
macro system variables #1033.

(Example)
Sequence program User macro program

IF [#1000 EQ 0] GOTO 100

ACT
#100 = #1033
DMOV K1000 G10372(R2472)
N100
ACT
WOR G10370(R2470) K1 G10370(R2470)
The #1033(G10372/R2472,
Set 1 in #1000. G10373/R2473)data is read into #100
Other than when #1000 is set to 0.

[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)
(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)
(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)
(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+374 - G+474 - G+574 - G+674 - G+774 - G+874 - G+974 -
USER MACRO INPUT #1034 G+375 G+475 G+575 G+675 G+775 G+875 G+975
-
(PLC -> Controller) R2474 - R2574 - R2674 - R2774 - R2874 - R2974 - R3074 -
R2475 R2575 R2675 R2775 R2875 R2975 R3075

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+376 - G+476 - G+576 - G+676 - G+776 - G+876 - G+976 -
USER MACRO INPUT #1035 G+377 G+477 G+577 G+677 G+777 G+877 G+977
-
(PLC -> Controller) R2476 - R2576 - R2676 - R2776 - R2876 - R2976 - R3076 -
R2477 R2577 R2677 R2777 R2877 R2977 R3077

[Function][Operation]
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

338
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
G+380 G+480 G+580 G+680 G+780 G+880 G+980
- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOVn
R2480 R2580 R2680 R2780 R2880 R2980 R3080

[Function]
The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100% (1% increment).
[Operation]
(1) Only the chopping override is valid for the chopping operation. However, valid or invalid of the rapid traverse override
can be selected for the rapid traverse between the basic position and the upper dead point.
(2) The chopping override is set between 0 and 100% in a 1% increment. If a value outside the range from 0 to 100% is
set, the override will be clamped at 100%.
(3) If the "Chopping override" signal is set to "0", "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0150" will occur.
(4) The value is set in binary.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+381 G+481 G+581 G+681 G+781 G+881 G+981
- CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION
R2481 R2581 R2681 R2781 R2881 R2981 R3081

[Function]
The axis to operate chopping is set when the chopping is commanded by the external signal.
[Operation]
When chopping is commanded by the external signal, "1" is set to a corresponding bit of the axis to operate chopping.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis
: :
bit7: 8th axis
bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

If two or more bit are designated, the lowest number axis will be selected.
The axis designation with this signal is valid in the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method
and the fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA- G+382 G+482 G+582 G+682 G+782 G+882 G+982
-
TION (L) R2482 R2582 R2682 R2782 R2882 R2982 R3082
UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA- G+383 G+483 G+583 G+683 G+783 G+883 G+983
-
TION (H) R2483 R2583 R2683 R2783 R2883 R2983 R3083

[Function]
The upper dead point is set when chopping is commanded by external signal.
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

339
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG- G+384 G+484 G+584 G+684 G+784 G+884 G+984
-
NATION (L) R2484 R2584 R2684 R2784 R2884 R2984 R3084

LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG- G+385 G+485 G+585 G+685 G+785 G+885 G+985
-
NATION (H) R2485 R2585 R2685 R2785 R2885 R2985 R3085

[Function]
The bottom dead point of when chopping is commanded by the external signal is set with the increment amount from the
upper dead point.
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system

NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIG- G+386 G+486 G+586 G+686 G+786 G+886 G+986
-
NATION R2486 R2586 R2686 R2786 R2886 R2986 R3086

[Function]
The speed when chopping is commanded by external signal is set with the number of cycles in one minute. [Number of
cycles/min]
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
G+387 G+487 G+587 G+687 G+787 G+887 G+987
- DATA NO.
R2487 R2587 R2687 R2787 R2887 R2987 R3087

[Function]
When the compensation method is the fixed compensation amount method, the number of the data to be recorded or
played back is designated.
[Operation]
(When operating in the record mode, the measured amount of compensation is recorded in the area of the designated
number. In the playback mode, operation parameter is read from the area of the designated number.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

340
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
G+1160 - G+1190 - G+1220 - G+1250 - G+1280 - G+1310 - G+1340 -
SPINDLE COMMAND ROTA- G+1161 G+1191 G+1221 G+1251 G+1281 G+1311 G+1341
- SRPMOTn
TION SPEED OUTPUT R3900 - R3930 - R3960 - R3990 - R4020 - R4050 - R4080 -
R3901 R3931 R3961 R3991 R4021 R4051 R4081

[Function]
By setting data of desired spindle speed to this signal, the spindle can be run at that speed.
Even when the data does not need to be changed, the process of copying the spindle command rotation speed input to
the spindle command rotation speed input is required.
[Operation]
(1) When the spindle function (S) command is issued, the control device set the commanded value to the spindle
command rotation speed input.
(2) The spindle command rotation speed value will be copied to the spindle command rotation speed output each time if
the spindle speed if the spindle speed to be controlled does not need to change from the (S) command for the PLC
program. If it is desired to be changed, set the intended value to the spindle command rotation speed output each
time.
(3) The control device processes the value of the spindle command rotation speed output and output the rotation speed
command to the spindle controller.

S command Spindle command Spindle command Spindle controller

rotation speed input rotation speed output
(SRPMINn) (SRPMOTn)

(Controller process) PLC program process (mandatory) The controller device processes, such as override,
Copy or set the intended value and output to the spindle controller. (Refer to Note 3)

(Note 1) Prepare the PLC program by the user.

(Note 2) When the data is set to the spindle command rotation speed output with PLC program, it will be written each
time.
(Note 3) The conditions of the spindle override code m(SPmn), spindle gear selection code m(GImn), spindle stop
(SSSTPn), spindle gear shift (SSFTn) and spindle orientation (SORCn) are evaluated to the spindle command
rotation speed output, and then transferred to the spindle controller.
(Note 4) Refer to the spindle command rotation speed input section for the flow of spindle function (S) command and
the timing of updating the data.

[Related signals]
(1) Spindle command rotation speed input
(2) Spindle command final data(rotation speed)

341
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle
G+1170 G+1200 G+1230 G+1260 G+1290 G+1320 G+1350
- S COMMAND OVERRIDE
R3910 R3940 R3970 R4000 R4030 R4060 R4090

[Function]
When "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) signal is set to "file register method", override can be exerted on the
spindle rotation speed besides the code method override (Spindle override code m (SPmn)).
Override can be exerted within range of 0% to 200% (1% increment).
The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
When this function is used, the true spindle speed is obtained by multiplying the originally set spindle speed by override
ratio set with this signal.
Clamp spindle speed is the maximum or minimum speed set with parameters, which depends on "Spindle gear selection
code m" (GImn) signal.
Even when spindle speed exceeds the maximum or minimum speed at the currently selected gear stage, due to change
of override setting, "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn) signal does not automatically change.

GR10 : Applicable override range at gear stage

0 Smini Smax1 Smax2 Smax3 GR20 : Applicable override range at gear stage
G10 GR30 : Applicable override range at gear stage
Smini : Minimum spindle speed (parameter)
G20
Smax1: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 1
(parameter)
G30
Smax2: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 2
(parameter)
Smax3: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 3
Applicable override range at gear stage 3 (parameter)

(Note)Override is not valid (100%) under the following condition:

(1)"Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal is ON.
(2)During tapping mode.
(3)During thread cutting.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle override code m (SPmn)
(2) Spindle override method selection (SPSn)
(3) Spindle gear selection code m (GImn)
(4) Spindle stop (SSTPn)
(5) Spindle gear shift (SSFTn)
(6) Spindle orientation (SORCn)

342
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

Con- Signal ab- 1st spin- 2nd spin- 3rd spin- 4th spin- 5th spin- 6th spin- 7th spin-
Signal name
tact breviation dle dle dle dle dle dle dle

MULTI-POINT ORIENTATION G+1171 G+1201 G+1231 G+1261 G+1291 G+1321 G+1351

-
POSITION DATA R3911 R3941 R3971 R4001 R4031 R4061 R4091

[Function]
This signal, having the following two functions, is issued in respect to the high-speed serial connection specification
spindle controller (spindle drive).
(1) Notification of orientation position to control unit (spindle controller) at orientation command.
Position data where the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) is turned ON.
(2) During multi-point indexing, notification of indexing position during forward run indexing or reverse run indexing to
control unit (spindle controller).
Position data where the "Spindle forward run index" (WRNn), the "Spindle reverse run index" (WRIn) is turned ON.
[Operation]
(1) Orientation command
The orientation position at when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) turns ON is input.
The values designated with the spindle parameter (SP007 OPST: in-position shift amount for orientation) and with
"Multi-point orientation position data" signal are totaled to determine the orientation position.
(2) Multi-point indexing
Each time the "Spindle forward run index" (WRNn) and "Spindle reverse run index" (WRIn) turn ON, the axis rotates
by the amount designated with the multi-point orientation position data.

When using MDS-D series drive unit, command value is handled as 16-bit binary data and its increment is as
follows.
Command increment = 360/36000 [0.01°]
This signal must be validated before the "Spindle orientation command" signal turns ON (at least 30 ms before).

Multi-point orientation
position data

Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

Spindle forward run index (WRNn)
/Spindle reverse run index (WRIn) At least 30 ms required.

[Related signals]
(1) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)
(2) Spindle forward run index (WRNn)
(3) Spindle reverse run index (WRIn)

343
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Explanation of Interface Signals

344
 5
Explanation for Each Application

345
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1 PLC Axis Control

This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the user PLC, separately from the CNC
control axis.

5.1.1 Specifications

Item Details
No. of control axes Max. 8 axes
Simultaneous control The PLC control axis is controlled independently of the CNC control axis. Simultaneous start
axes of multiple PLC axes is possible.
Min. command unit (Note 1)
Command unit 0.001mm (0.0001 inch)
0.0001mm (0.00001 inch)
0 to 1000000mm/min (0 to 100000inch/min)
Feedrate
(The feedrate is fixed regardless of the unit system.)
Incremental value commands from the current position.
Movement commands Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system.
0 to ± 99999999 (Note 1)
Rapid traverse, cutting feed
Jog feed (+), (-)
Operation modes
Reference position return feed (+), (-)
Handle feed
Backlash compensation Provided
Stroke end Not provided
Soft limit Provided
Provided
Absolute value commands......Rotation amount within one rotation.
Rotation axis commands (Rotates the remainder divided by rotational axis division count.)
The axis rotates in shortcut direction according to "#8213 Rotation axis type" setting.
Incremental commands...........Rotates the commanded rotation amount.
Not provided
Inch/mm changeover
Command to match the feedback unit.

(Note 1) Screen displays as follows according to the setting of the parameter "#1003 iunit".

Setting value Unit Display

Displays up to three digits after the
B 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
decimal point.
Displays up to four digits after the
C 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)
decimal point.

(Note 2) Commands can be issued by inch if "#1042 pcinch (PLC axis command)" is set to "1"
(inch system).

Other restrictions
(1) There is no mirror image or machine lock function.
(2) Rapid traverse override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible.
(3) Automatic operation start, automatic operation stop, reset and interlock CNC controls are invalid for PLC
control axes.
The same control can be realized using an interface dedicated for PLC control axes.
(4) There is no dedicated emergency stop. The emergency stop is valid in the same manner as the CNC control
axis.
(5) PLC axis external deceleration is valid only when external deceleration ("#1239 set11/bit6 External
deceleration axis compliance valid" is set to "1") is set by axis.

346
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

5.1.2 Detailed Explanation

The flow of the process during PLC axis control execution is shown below.
(1) PLC sets operation mode, feedrate, movement data and others.
(2) PLC turns ON the PLC axis control valid signal/PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal.
(3) PLC turns ON the start signal of the control signal.
(4) CNC notifies PLC of the execution of PLC axis control, status being processed and others according to the
conditions of PLC axis control.
(5) PLC turns OFF the start signal after confirming busy/wait signal.

Flow of PLC axis control for 1st PLC axis

CNC CPU PLC CPU

G+1370(R4200) Axis specification

G+1371(R4201) Operation mode (1) PLC sets operation mode, feedrate,
movement data and others.
G+1372(R4202) Feedrate (2) PLC turns ON the PLC axis control
valid signal/PLC axis control buffering mode
valid signal.
G+1374(R4204) Movement data (3) PLC turns ON the start signal of the control
signal.

G+1376(R4206) Control signal

G11370(R1900) Status
(5) PLC turns OFF the start signal after
G11371(R1901) Alarm details confirming busy/wait signal.
G11372(R1902) Machine position

(4) G11374(R1904) Remaining distance

(4) CNC notifies PLC of the execution

of PLC axis control, status being
processed and others according to
the conditions of PLC axis control.

(Note 1) The specification of axis is valid only in buffering mode.

(Note 2) Refer to "5.1.6 Timing Chart" for the exact timing.

347
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1.3 Interface with PLC

To perform interface between PLC and CNC, PLC carries out the following steps.
-Sets the control information data to the shared device (G).
-Turns ON either the PLC axis control valid signal or the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal.
-Turns ON the start signal of control signal.
The operation is executed in single mode if the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, executed in buffering mode if the PLC
axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON.
Single mode and buffering mode can be operated simultaneously. However, a movement command to the same axis
can only be issued in either mode.
Alarm doesn't occur when either mode is operating an axis and valid signal of the other mode is turned ON for the same
axis. Instead, the mode commanded later is ignored.
In this case, process in the first mode is not canceled.

(Note 1) Refer to "5.1.9 Buffering Mode" for details of buffering mode.

(Note 2) Refer to "5.1.4 (2) Alarm details" for alarms.

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-
A PLCAEm Y340 - Y347
TH AXIS

[Function]
This signal validates the PLC axis control in single mode.
[Operation]
Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in single mode.
Status, alarm details and machine position of each axis can be referred.
If this signal has been turned OFF, status, alarm details and machine position are not updated. The axis movement,
which has been commanded in single mode, is canceled. The PLC axis control is executed upon the control information
data while the PLC axis control valid signal is ON.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFER-
A PABMI Y32B
ING MODE VALID

[Function]
This signal validates the PLC axis control in buffering mode.
[Operation]
Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in buffering mode.
If this signal has been turned OFF, the axis movement, which had been commanded in buffering mode, is canceled.
[Caution]
(1) Turning this signal ON updates the control information in single mode, such as status and machining position, even
during axis control in buffering mode.
The information is updated at the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is
recommended to turn the PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering
mode, and to refer to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in
buffering mode.
(2) Specify the axis to command in buffering mode in the control information, axis specification, for buffering mode.

348
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

PLC axis control information data

Store the control information data in the R registers indicated in the table below before executing the PLC axis
control. The control information data is arranged as table below.
(Note) Devices are written with each shared memory device (G) Nos. in upper line and each internal register
Nos. in bottom line.

<PLC axis state: CNC PC>

PLC axis No. For buffering mode

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Data A Data B Data C
G11370 G11378 G11386 G11394 G11402 G11410 G11418 G12660 G11426 G11434 G11442
Status
R1900 R1908 R1916 R1924 R1932 R1940 R1948 R1980 R1956 R1964 R1972
G11371 G11379 G11387 G11395 G11403 G11411 G11419 G12661 G11427 G11435 G11443
Alarm details
R1901 R1909 R1917 R1925 R1933 R1941 R1949 R1981 R1957 R1965 R1973
G11372 G11380 G11388 G11396 G11404 G11412 G11420 G12662 G11428 G11436 G11444
R1902 R1910 R1918 R1926 R1934 R1942 R1950 R1982 R1958 R1966 R1974
Machine position
G11373 G11381 G11389 G11397 G11405 G11413 G11421 G12663 G11429 G11437 G11445
R1903 R1911 R1919 R1927 R1935 R1943 R1951 R1983 R1959 R1967 R1975
G11374 G11382 G11390 G11398 G11406 G11414 G11422 G12664 G11430 G11438 G11446
R1904 R1912 R1920 R1928 R1936 R1944 R1952 R1984 R1960 R1968 R1976
Remaining distance
G11375 G11383 G11391 G11399 G11407 G11415 G11423 G12665 G11431 G11439 G11447
R1905 R1913 R1921 R1929 R1937 R1945 R1953 R1985 R1961 R1969 R1977
G11376 G11384 G11392 G11400 G11408 G11416 G11424 G12666
Status 2 (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)
R1906 R1914 R1922 R1930 R1938 R1946 R1954 R1986

<PLC axis command: PC CNC>

PLC axis No. For buffering mode

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Data A Data B Data C
Axis specification (Not (Not (Not (Not (Not (Not (Not (Not +1426 +1434 +1442
(Note 1) used) used) used) used) used) used) used) used) R4256 R4264 R4272
+1371 +1379 +1387 +1395 +1403 +1411 +1419 +2661 +1427 +1435 +1443
Operation mode
R4201 R4209 R4217 R4225 R4233 R4241 R4249 R4281 R4257 R4265 R4273
+1372 +1380 +1388 +1396 +1404 +1412 +1420 +2662 +1428 +1436 +1444
R4202 R4210 R4218 R4226 R4234 R4242 R4250 R4282 R4258 R4266 R4274
Feedrate
+1373 +1381 +1389 +1397 +1405 +1413 +1421 +2663 +1429 +1437 +1445
R4203 R4211 R4219 R4227 R4235 R4243 R4251 R4283 R4259 R4267 R4275
+1374 +1382 +1390 +1398 +1406 +1414 +1422 +2664 +1430 +1438 +1446
R4204 R4212 R4220 R4228 R4236 R4244 R4252 R4284 R4260 R4268 R4276
Movement data
+1375 +1383 +1391 +1399 +1407 +1415 +1423 +2665 +1431 +1439 +1447
R4205 R4213 R4221 R4229 R4237 R4245 R4253 R4285 R4261 R4269 R4277
+1376 +1384 +1392 +1400 +1408 +1416 +1424 +2666 +1432 +1440 +1448
Control signal
R4206 R4214 R4222 R4230 R4238 R4246 R4254 R4286 R4262 R4270 R4278
External +1377 +1385 +1393 +1401 +1409 +1417 +1425 +2667 +1433 +1441 +1449
deceleration
speed selection/
Multi-step speed R4207 R4215 R4223 R4231 R4239 R4247 R4255 R4287 R4263 R4271 R4279
monitor signal
input (Note 2)

(Note 1) Axis specification is valid only for buffering mode.

(Note 2) The buffering mode area is invalid for multi-step speed monitor signal input.
(Note 3) Pay attention when programming as the device No. of PLC axis 8th axis is not close to that of 1st to 7th
axis.

349
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data

(1) Status
The status is set by the CNC to indicate the execution status of PLC axis control and the status of the axis being
controlled.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G11370(R1900)
(1st axis)

bit0:busy Command processing bit8:oper Option error

1:den Axis movement completed 9:ILI In current limit
2:move Axis moving A:ILA Current limit reached
3:SA Servo ready B:
4:svon Servo ON C:
5:ZP Reference position reached D:ALM3 Feedrate zero alarm
6:IMP During in-position E:ALM2 Axis in control alarm
Control information data designation
7:WAIT Axis movement wait F:ALM1
alarm

bit 0: busy Command processing

This turns ON when the command is being processed.
The next command is not received while this bit is ON.
The next command to be issued is received while this bit is OFF.
bit 1: den Axis movement completed
This bit turns ON when the initialization and commanded movement are completed.
This bit stays OFF during movement, even when an interlock is applied.
This bit turns ON at reset or servo OFF, or when PLC axis control valid is "0".
bit 2: move Axis moving
This bit turns ON when the machine is moving, and turns OFF when the machine is stopped.
When movement distance is microscopically small, PLC may be unable to detect having turned ON.
bit 3: SA Servo ready
This bit turns ON when the servo is ready.
It turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.
bit 4: svon Servo ON
This bit turns OFF when a servo OFF signal is output.
It also turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.
Machine movement is possible when this signal is ON.
bit5: ZP Reference position reached
This bit turns ON when the reference position is reached after completion of a reference position return.
It turns OFF when the machine moves.
bit6: IMP During in-position
This bit turns ON when the PLC axis moves upon in-position, turns OFF when out of in-position.
bit7: WAIT Axis movement wait
This bit turns ON in the buffering mode when the axis movement of the previous block has been completed,
and the machine is in a WAIT status.
It turns OFF when the previous block movement is completed and the movement of the next block begins.
bit 8: oper Option error
This bit turns ON when an attempt is made to execute PLC axis control when there is no PLC axis control
option.

350
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

bit9 : ILI In Current Limit

This bit turns ON when a current limit changeover signal turns ON and entering in current limit state. It turns
OFF by turning the current limit changeover signal OFF.
(Note 1) In current limit of the axis, which is selected by axis designation, will be output in a buffering mode.

bitA :ILA Current limit reached

This bit turns ON when a current value reaches to the current limit. It turns OFF when a current value falls
below the current limit.
(Note 1) A current limit reached of the axis, which is selected by axis designation, will be output in a buffering
mode.

bitD: ALM3 Feedrate zero alarm

It turns ON when the feedrate is zero during the execution of axix control.
It turns OFF by setting the feedrate, and starts moving immediately.

bit E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm

This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control. Axis control
cannot be executed while this bit is ON.
After the cause of the alarm has been removed, turn the bit OFF by turning ON a reset signal of PLC axis,
setting PLC axis control valid signal to 0, or turning the power OFF then ON again.
(Note) When alarms occur during axis control, the same alarms appear in the CNC screen as for CNC
control axes. Set the 1st PLC axis to "1", and the 2nd PLC axis to "2".
Example: When a servo alarm occurs for the 1st PLC axis

S03 Servo alarm 52 1

PLC axis

bit F: ALM:1 Control information data designation alarm

This bit turns ON when the designated details of the control information data are illegal.
When an alarm occurs for the simultaneous operation of buffering mode and single mode, the mode
designated later is not executed and the mode designated first continues processing.
PLC axis control is not executed when any other alarm occurs.
Turn the bit OFF by correcting the data, turning ON a reset signal of PLC axis, or setting PLC axis control valid
signal to 0.

(Note) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON for an axis, status of the same axis is
automatically updated.

351
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(2) Alarm details

The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set.

F 8 7 0
G11371(R1901)
ALM1 Alarm No. ALM2 Alarm No.
(1st axis)

The details of each alarm No. are shown below.

ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm)

Alarm No. Details

Control signal illegal
01
(A signal other than a registered control signal has been commanded.)
02 Axis No. illegal
03 Operation mode illegal (0 to 6)
04 Movement data range exceeded -99999999 to +99999999
05
06
07
Reference position return not complete
10
(absolute value command not possible)
11
12

ALM2 (Axis in control alarm)

Alarm No. Details

Servo alarm (Alarm No. is displayed in the PLC axis monitor screen.
0
Refer to the Drive Unit Maintenance Manual for details.)
1 Z-phase not passed
2 Soft limit (+)
3 Soft limit (-)

(Note) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON for an axis alarm details for the same axis is
automatically updated.

352
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(3) Machine Position

The machine position output to the machine system is expressed. The machine position becomes the Rfp
(reference position) when the reference position is reached.

G11372(R1902)
Machine position

G11373(R1903) (input unit)

(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.
(Note 2) When the PLC axis control valid signal turned is ON for an axis, machine position for the same axis is
automatically updated.

(4) Remaining Distance

The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed.

G11374(R1904)
Remaining distance

G11375(R1905) (input unit)

(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.
(Note 2) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON, remaining distance for the same axis is
automatically updated.

(5) Status 2
Multi-step speed monitor related signals for each axis are output. It is valid wether PLC axis control valid signal is
ON or OFF. This signal outputs only when “#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled” is set to “1”.

F A 9 8 1 0
G11376
R1906
(1st axis)

Bit 0: ZLS Zero point initialization incomplete

This signal is output when the absolute position is not established in the absolute position detection system.
Bit 1: Power shutoff movement over
This signal turns ON when the difference of the machine position at power OFF and at power ON exceeds the
tolerable value (parameter "#2051 check" setting value) when using the absolute position detection system.
Bit 8: In multi-step speed monitor
This signal turns ON when the muti-step speed monitor request is ON and PLC axis is in multi-step speed
monitor.
Bit 9, A: Multi-step speed monitor output
This signal outputs the mode is currently used to monitor the speed for multi-step speed monitor.
(Numerical data)
0: Speed monitor mode 1
1: Speed monitor mode 2
2: Speed monitor mode 3
3: Speed monitor mode 4

353
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(6) Axis specification

PLC axis No. is designated.

G+1370(R4200)
Axis specification
(1st axis)

0: 1st axis
1: 2nd axis
2: 3rd axis
3: 4th axis
4: 5th axis
5: 6th axis
6: 7th axis
7: 8th axis
Only buffering mode allows the axis specification upon this data.
Single mode, which provides the PLC axis control valid signal for each axis, does not allow the axis specification
upon this data.

(7) Operation Mode

The operation mode for the PLC axis is designated.
For example, in the handle mode, R1n+5=6 (DATA) is set.

G+1371(R4201)
Operation mode
(1st axis)

(Numeric value data)

0: Rapid traverse (G0)
1: Cutting feed (G1)
2: Jog feed (+)
3: Jog feed (-)
4: Reference position return (+)
5: Reference position return (-)
6: Handle feed
7: Automatic initial set
The axis movement will not be affected by changing the operation mode, even while the axis is moving. The new
operation mode is validated at the next start.

(8) Feedrate
When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (operation mode, register = 1 to 3), the PLC axis feedrate is
designated with a binary code.

G+1372(R4202)
Feedrate
G+1373(R4203)
(1st axis)

Command range : 1 to 1000000 mm/min. (0.1 to 100000 inch/min.)

(Note 1) The measure unit of feedrate is fixed regardless of the unit system set as command unit.
(Note 2) The feedrate designated in the parameters is used for the rapid traverse mode and reference position
return mode.
(Note 3) The feedrate can be changed during axis movement by directly changing the feedrate data (R1n + 6, 7).

354
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(9)Movement Data
When the operation mode is rapid traverse or cutting feed, the movement data is designated with a binary code.

G+1374(R4204)
Movement data
G+1375(R4205)
(1st axis)
Command range : -99999999 to +99999999

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.
(Note 2) The movement data is classified as follows by the absolute value command flag (bit 8) of the command
signal.
Absolute value command flag = 0: Incremental value from the current position
Absolute value command flag = 1: Absolute value of the machine coordinate system
(Note 3) If the movement amount is changed during axis movement, the new movement amount will be validated
at the next start.

(10) Control Signals

Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the PLC axis.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G+1376(R4206)
(1st axis)

bit 0: Start bit 8: Absolute value command

1: Interlock 9:Current limit changeover
2: Reset A:Droop release request
3: Servo OFF B:
4: Axis removal C:
5: Axis removal 2 D:
6: External deceleration + E:
7: External deceleration - F:

bit 0: Start
Starting begins at the rising edge (OFF -> ON) of the start signal, based on the control information data.
Turn ON a start signal after turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal.
The axis does not move during interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2.
Movement starts after interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2 are canceled.
Start is invalid during resetting.
bit 1: Interlock
The moving PLC axis executes a deceleration stop when the interlock signal turns ON.
The stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the interlock signal turns OFF (is canceled).
bit 2: Reset
The PLC axis is reset when the reset signal turns ON.
Moving PLC axes will execute a deceleration stop.
Commands and controls are invalid during resetting.
If the reset signal turns ON during an alarm occurrence, the alarm will be cleared.
bit 3: Servo OFF

355
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

bit4: Axis removal

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF status will result, when the axis removal signal
turns ON.
A servo ON status will result and the stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the axis removal signal
turns OFF (is canceled).
Axis removal is validated when either this signal or machining parameter and axis parameter "#8201 Axis
Removal" is validated.
The reference position return will become incomplete when the axis is removed. Therefore, a dog-type
reference position return must be completed again when starting with an absolute value command.
bit 5: Axis removal 2
The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF/ready OFF status will result, when the axis removal
2 signal turns ON.
A servo ON/ready ON status will result for the stopped PLC axis when the axis removal 2 signal turns OFF (is
canceled).
A restart must be executed to start the movement again.
Position control cannot be carried out while the axis removal 2 signal is ON. However, position detection is
possible so the position will not be lost.
bit6: External deceleration +
When the external deceleration + signal has been turning ON while the PLC axis is moving towards +
direction, the feedrate can be set to constant speed set by parameter. Turning this signal ON does not affect it
when it is moving at the speed less than the external deceleration. The external deceleration speed can be
randomly set with "#2086 exdcax1 External deceleration speed 1", "#2161 exdcax2 External deceleration
speed 2" to "#2165 exdcax6 External deceleration speed 6" and the external deceleration speed selection
signal.
This signal is valid only when "#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid" is set to "1".
bit7 : External deceleration -
The performance is the same as the External deceleration +. The condition of deceleration is to turn the
external deceleration signal - ON while the PLC axis is moving towards "-" direction.
bit 8: Absolute value command
Turn this bit ON when the movement data is commanded in absolute values.
When this bit is OFF, the commands will be processed as incremental value commands.
bit9 : Current limit changeover
Turn this bit ON when validating the current limit. A current limit parameter will switch from SV013 to SV014.
If this signal is turned OFF, the droop generated by the current limit will be released and the command value
will move to the FB position during the current limit reached.
(Note 1) If “#1236 set08/bit2 Current limit droop cancel invalid” is selected for current limit changeover or for
the axis designated as a droop release invalid axis, the droop will not be released.
(Note 2) Use the current limit changeover signal in single mode even during the buffering mode. (The PLC
axis control valid signal needs to be ON.) The current limit changeover signal for a buffering mode is
invalid.
(Note 3) If the current limit changeover signal is turned ON while the movement command remains, do not
release the droop at once. After turning OFF the signal, make sure no movement command remains
and then release the droop.

356
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

bitA : Droop release request

Release the droop generated by the current limit and move the command value to the FB position if it is during
the current limit reached.
(Note 1) This signal is invalid for the axis that is set as the droop release invalid axis.
(Note 2) Use the droop release request signal in the single mode even during the buffering mode. (The PLC
axis control valid signal needs to be ON.) The current limit changeover signal for a buffering mode is
invalid.
(Note 3) If the current limit changeover signal is turned ON while the movement command is still effective, do
not release the droop at once. After turning OFF the signal, make sure no movement command is
still effective and then release the droop.

(11) External deceleration speed selection

This signal selects which external deceleration parameter to use when the PLC axis external deceleration signal is
valid. It is valid only when “#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid” is set to “1”.

F 8 7 0
+1371 External deceleration speed
R4207 selection
(1st axis)

Setting range:0~5
(Numerical value data)
0: External deceleration speed 1(#2086 exdcax1)
1: External deceleration speed 2 (#2161 exdcax2）
2: External deceleration speed 3(#2162 exdcax3)
3: External deceleration speed 4(#2163 exdcax4)
4: External deceleration speed 5(#2164 exdcax5)
5: External deceleration speed 6(#2165 exdcax6)
Other than above: External deceleration speed 1(#2086 exdcax1)

(12) Multi-step speed monitor input

This signal is used to input the multi-step speed monitor related signal for each axis. It is always valid wether the
PLC axis control valid signal is ON or OFF.
This signal is ignored when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "0".

F A98 0
+1377
R4207 External deceleration
(1st axis) speed selection

bit8 : Multi-step speed monitor request

PLC axis executes to monitor the multi-step speed while the speed monitor request signal is ON.
bit9,A :Multi-step speed monitor mode input
This signal selects which speed monitor parameter to use when the speed monitor request signal for PLC axis
becomes valid.
(Numerical data)
0 : Speed monitor mode 1 (#2181 sscfeed1)
1 : Speed monitor mode 2 (#2182 sscfeed2)
2 : Speed monitor mode 3 (#2183 sscfeed3)
3 : Speed monitor mode 4 (#2184 sscfeed4)

357
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1.5 Precautions
(1) Updates of signals are not synchronized. Set the control information data, such as feedrate and movement data
before setting the start signal of control signal/bit 0.
(2) PLC control valid signal is valid at all times for as many PLC axes as used.
PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is also valid at all times during the axis is used.
Therefore, the PLC axis control valid signal and the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal must be turned ON
until the movement of the axis specified is completed.
If these signals are turned OFF, the axis is reset and the command is canceled.
(3) Always transfer 32bit data via 32bit regardless of the setting value.

5.1.6 Timing Chart

(1) For rapid traverse and cutting feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

(2) For jog feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) The axis moves by jog feed only during start ON.

358
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(3) For reference position return feed mode

(a) Dog-type reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

(Note 1) The axis moves by reference position return feed only during start ON.
Turn the start OFF after confirming that the reference position has been reached.
(Note 2) The first reference position return after the power is turned ON is always dog-type.
All returns after that are high-speed reference position returns.

(b) High-speed reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

359
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(4) For handle feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Handle

Speed

(Note) Handle feed is possible only during start ON.

(5) When the interlock signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Interlock

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

360
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(6) When the reset signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Reset

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note 1) Make sure that the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.
(Note 2) The busy signal will be reset at the falling edge of the reset signal. The start signal has to start up again to
make the mode valid if the mode is used with the start signal ON for handle mode, JOG mode, or
reference position return mode.
When the reset command is issued with this mode and the start up signal is turned OFF, it will be a busy
state as the reset is cancelled and the start signal is turned ON again. Then the handle mode becomes
valid.

(7) When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Servo OFF

busy
den

move

svon

Speed

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

361
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(8) When the PLC axis control valid signal is OFF (= 0)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

362
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(9) When the start signal ON (=1) is earlier than the PLC axis control valid signal ON (=1) (A section)

(a) When OFF the last PLC axis control valid signal OFF is earlier than a start signal OFF (B section)

PLC axis control

valid signal A section
B section
Start

busy

den

move

Speed

When PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF at the 1st time, a start signal continues being ON, and since
the start signal is turned ON previously when PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON at the 2nd time, CNC
cannot detect the standup of a start signal.
Therefore, a PLC axis does not operate by the 2nd start signal.

(b) When the PLC axis control valid signal OFF is later than the start signal OFF (C section)

PLC axis control

valid signal A section
C section
Start

busy

den

move

Speed

When PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF at the 1st time, a start signal is turned OFF, CNC can detect
the standup of a start signal when PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON at the 2nd time.
Therefore, a PLC axis operates by the 2nd start signal.

When the start signal ON (=1) is earlier than the PLC axis control valid signal ON (=1), a PLC axis does not
operate according to the state of the last start signal.
In order to avoid such a situation, please turn ON PLC axis control valid signal after a start signal or turn OFF
PLC axis control valid signal after a start signal.

363
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(10) When the external deceleration speed signal is set to ON (="1") during the G0/G1 mode

PLC axis
control valid
signal

Speed
0 3000

Start

busy

den

move

External deceleration +

External deceleration
speed selection 0 2 1 0

Feedrate

3000

2000

1000
500
0

Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

364
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

5.1.7 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

Device No. Signal name

Y338 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis
Y339 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis
Y33A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis
Y33B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis
Y33C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis
Y33D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis
Y33E *PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis
Y33F *PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

5.1.8 Handle Feed Axis Selection

The axis is designated for the following devices when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

Device No. Signal name

Y32D PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid
Y32E PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid
Y32F PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid

When Y32D, Y32E, Y32F are ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.
Y740-Y744, Y747, Y748-Y74C, Y74F, Y750-Y754, Y757 used with the normal control device are used to select each
handle axis.
PLC axes are differentiated from NC axes and counted from the 1st.
Therefore, if you will operate the first handle in the 1st PLC axis, turn ON Y32D, Y740-Y744 and Y747.

(Note) The handle feed magnification is also used for CNC control axes.

365
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1.9 Buffering Mode

In the buffering mode, the PLC axis command (control information data) is commanded to several blocks. This enables
smooth changeover of commands.
Axis specifications can be set to each control information data. Up to three axes can be controlled in sequence. (See the
figure in "(1) Control information data".)

(1) Control information data

The control data for the buffering mode is set in three blocks, the control information data A, B and C.
The contents of each control information data have the same configuration as the normal control information data.
When executing, the axis moves in the order that each control information data has been started. When the
movement is completed, it will move to the next block.
(If the start signals are turned ON simultaneously, it will be performed in the order of A, B, and C.)

<PLC axis command: PLC→CNC> <PLC axis state: CNC→PLC>

G+1426 G11426
Axis specification Status
R4256 R1956
Operation mode Alarm details
Control Control
information Feedrate information Machine
data A data A position
Movement data
Remaining
Control signal distance
G+1434 G11434
R4264 R1964
Control Control
information information
data B data B

G+1442 G11442
R4272 R1972
Control Control
information information
data C data C

(Note 1) Only one set of the buffering mode can be commanded.

(Note 2) Turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal updates the control information in single mode, such as
status and machining position, even during axis control in buffering mode. The information is updated at
the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is recommended to turn the
PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering mode, and to refer
to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in buffering mode.

366
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

(2) Timing chart

G1→G1→G0→G1 (same axis)

PLC axis control

valid signal
Start

busy

A den

move

wait

Start

busy

B den

move

wait

Start

busy

C den

move

wait

Speed

(Note) Change and start the data after the busy signal or wait signal turns OFF.
Starting while the busy signal or wait signal is ON will be ignored.
As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal or wait signal is kept ON even after the movement has
ended.

367
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

G1→G1→G0→G1 (two axes)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Axis No. 0 1

Start

busy
A
den

move

wait

Axis No. 0

Start

busy
B
den

move

wait

Axis No. 1

Start

busy
C
den

move

wait

1st axis speed

2nd axis speed

368
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

5.1.10 Parameters
Set the parameters according to the Operation Manual. Servo parameters to set are same as parameters for CNC axis.
The table below shows the axis parameters, the basic parameters and the axis specification parameters, which are
related to PLC axis control.

Correspondence of Parameters to PLC axis

○: Supported ×: Not supported

Support Support Support

# Name # Name # Name
ed ed ed
[Axis parameters] 1065 JOG_H × 1106 Tcount ×
8201 AX. RELEASE ○ 1066 JOG_HP × 1107 Tllfsc ×
8202 OT-CHECK × 1067 JOG_HN × 1108 TlrectM ×
OFF 1068 slvno × 1109 Subs_M ×
8203 OT-CHECK- × 1069 no_dsp × 1110 M96_M ×
CANCEL 1070 axoff ○ 1111 M97_M ×
8204 OT-CHECK-N × 1071 JOG_D × 1112 S_TRG ×
8205 OT-CHECK-P × 1073 I_Absm × 1113 INT_2 ×
8206 TOOL CHG. P × 1074 I_Sync × 1114 mcrint ×
8207 G76/87 IGNR × 1075 I_G00 × 1115 thwait ×
8208 (-)G76/87 (-) × 1076 AbsInc × 1116 G30SLM ×
8209 G60 SHIFT × 1077 radius × 1117 H_sens ○
8210 OT INSIDE × 1078 Decpt2 × 1118 mirr_A ×
1079 F1digt ×
8213 Rotation axis type ○
[Basic parameters] 1080 Dril_Z ×
1001 SYS_ON ○ 1081 Gmac_P ×
1002 axisno ○ 1082 Geomet ×
1003 iunit ○ 1084 RadErr ×
1013 axname ○ 1085 G00Drn ×
1014 incax × 1086 G0intp ×
1015 cunit × 1087 G96_G0 ×
1016 iout ○ 1088 G30SL ×
1017 rot ○ 1089 Cut_RT ×
1018 ccw ○ 1090 Lin_RT ×
1019 dia × 1091 Mpoint ×
1020 sp_ax × 1092 Tchg_A ×
1037 cmdtyp × 1093 Wmvfin ×
1038 plccel × 1094 Tl_SBK ×
1039 spinno × 1095 T0tfof ×
1040 M_inch ○ 1096 T_Ltyp ×
1041 I_inch × 1097 T1digt ×
1042 pcinch ○ 1098 Tlno. ×
1043 lang × 1099 Treset ×
1044 auxno × 1100 Tmove ×
1060 SETUP × 1101 Tabsmv ×
1061 intabs × 1102 tlm ×
1062 T_cmp × 1103 T_life ×
1063 mandog × 1104 T_Com2 ×
1064 svof ○ 1105 T_Sel2 ×

369
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Support Support
# Name # Name
ed ed
[Axis specification parameters] 2055 pushf ×
2001 rapid ○ 2056 aproch ×
2002 clamp ○ 2057 nrefp ×
2003 smgst ○ 2058 nrefn ×
2004 G0tL ○ 2059 zerbas ○
2005 G0t1 ○ 2061 OT_1B- ×
2006 G0t2 ○ 2062 OT_1B+ ×
2007 G1t+ ○ 2063 OT_1Btype ×
2008 G1t1 ○ 2068 G0fwdg ×
2009 G1t2 ○ 2069 Rcoeff ×
2010 fwd_g × 2070 div_RT ○
2011 G0back ○
2012 G1back ○
2013 OT- ○
2014 OT+ ○
2015 tlml- ×
2016 tlml+ ×
2017 tap_g ×
2018 no_srv ○
2019 revnum ×
2020 o_chkp ×
2021 out_f ×
2022 G30SLX ×
2023 ozfmin ×
2024 synerr ×
2025 G28rap ○
2026 G28crp ○
2027 G28sft ○
2028 grmask ○
2029 grspc ○
2030 dir(-) ○
2031 noref ○
2032 nochk ×
2033 zp_no ×
2037 G53ofs ○
2038 #2_rfp ×
2039 #3_rfp ×
2040 #4_rfp ×
2049 type ○
2050 absdir ○
2051 check ○
2052 absg28 ×
2053 absm02 ×
2054 clpush ×

370
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.1 PLC Axis Control

5.1.11 PLC Axis Monitor

The PLC axis operation status (machine position and remaining distance) can be confirmed by checking the section of
the PLC axis on the servo monitor.

5.1.12 Absolute Position Detection

The absolute position of the PLC axis can be detected in the same manner as the CNC control axis.
The initial setting operations are the same as the CNC control axis. However, the following restrictions apply to the
absolute position detection with the PLC axis.
(1) The near zero-point signal cannot be output.
(2) About the automatic initialization set start trigger
PLC axis automatic initialization set starts by starting the axis that the initialization is to be performed. (For NC axis,
the initialization is started when the automatic initialization mode is selected, and the "Feed axis selection" (+Jn, -
Jn) signal in the direction of the machine end of the axis to be initialized is turned ON.

5.1.13 Rotary axis

In PLC axis, the axis which is designated “1" by “#1017 rot rotary axis” is controlled with the rotary axis' coordinate
system in the same manner as the CNC control axis.
The rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) is set with the parameter "#8213 rotation axis type".
The setting range for “#8213 rotation axis type” is 0 to 2. "Workpiece coordinate linear type” is applied when "2" is set for
NC axis, but for PLC axis it performs as same as “0” (disable shot-cut) is set.

5.1.14 Position switch

Position switch function can be used for PLC axis in the same manner as NC axis. The following devices turn ON within
the area set by parameter.

The relationship of PLC axis position switch and output signal (CNC -> PLC)

PWS No. PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 PSW4 PSW5 PSW6 PSW7 PSW8
Shared device G10006.0 G10006.1 G10006.2 G10006.3 G10006.4 G10006.5 G10006.6 G10006.7
Internal device X360 X361 X362 X363 X364 X365 X366 X367

PWS No. PSW9 PSW10 PSW11 PSW12 PSW13 PSW14 PSW15 PSW16
Shared device G10006.8 G10006.9 G10006.A G10006.B G10006.C G10006.D G10006.E G10006.F
Internal device X368 X369 X36A X36B X36C X36D X36E X36F

371
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.1.15 Usage Example

An example of the PLC axis control ladder in single mode for the 1st PLC axis is shown below.

Mode: cutting feed, speed: 60mm/min, movement amount: 1.000mm (iunit: B)

Always ON
PLC axis control
Y340 (Note 1)
valid signal ON
Y340
MOV U3E1\G11370 D110 Read status

TEST D110 K0 M100 Fetch BUSY signal

PLC axis
control start
MOV K1 D101 Set operation mode (G1)

DMOV K60 D102 Set feedrate

DMOV K1000 D104 Set movement data

MOV K1 D100 Turn start signal ON

M100
BRST D100 K0 Turn start signal OFF

Y340
MOV D101 U3E0\G11371 Output operation mode

DMOV D102 U3E0\G11372 Output feedrate

DMOV D104 U3E0\G11374 Output movement data

MOV D100 U3E0\G11376 Output control signal (Note 2)

(Note 1) Program example of bit-type interface was made on the premise that the interface is transferred corresponding
to the device Nos. of NC interface.
Assignment of device Nos. may change the details of the program.
(Note 2) Set all kinds of control information data before outputting control signal.

372
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

5.2 PLC Window

PLC window is used to read/write the operation state, axis information, parameters and tool data through a cyclic
transmission area in CPU shared memory.

5.2.1 Details
PLC window has two interfaces, "window command interface" and "window response interface", which are used between
PLC and CNC.
"Window command interface", an interface for control signals (from PLC to CNC), requests CNC for the data of "read
control command", "write control command" and "write data".
"Window response interface", an interface for state signals (from CNC to PLC), outputs data of "read result", "write
result" and "read data" to PLC.

If PLC sets the required command to the window command interface, data can be written to or read from CNC.

<Outline of interfaces between CNC and PLC>

Interface between CNC and PLC

Window command interface

(Interface from PLC to CNC)

Read control command

Write control command

Write data

Window response interface

(Interface from CNC to PLC)

Read result

Write result

Read data

373
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

"Read control command", "read data" and "read result" in the chart above are all called "read window". "Write control
command", "write data" and "write result" are all called "write window".
These windows are used for the read and write operations. 40 units of windows, 20 units for each, are provided for "read
window" and "write window".

Note that the device Nos. assigned to the windows are not continuous through each unit of read/write window. Refer to
"5.2.2 Read Window" and "5.2.3 Write Window" when using the windows. Take care not to set wrong device Nos.

Outlines of read and write processes are shown below.

<Read process>

<Read window>

(1) (2)
Read control command

CNC (2) Parameters

PLC (3)
CPU Tool data
CPU Read data
Variable data

Read result

Max. 20 windows
(1) PLC sets the “read control command” with the information on the CNC internal data to be read, and
then turn the read control signal ON.
(2) CNC receives the control signal, and reads the data designated in the “read control command”.
(3) CNC sets the read data to “read data”.
CNC also sets the read status and results, such as errors, to the “read result”.

<Write process>

<Write window>

(1)
Write control command
(2)
Write data CNC (2) Parameters
PLC
CPU Tool data
CPU Variable data
(3)
Write result

Max. 20 windows
(1) PLC sets the “write control command” with the information of the CNC internal data where the data
is written into, and sets the data to be written to the “write data”. After setting, turns the write
control signal ON.
(2) CNC receives the control signal, and writes the data designated in the “writedata” into the CNC
internal data designated in the “write control command”.
(3) CNC sets the write status and errors to the "write result”

374
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

Data is transmitted between PLC CPU and CNC CPU through a cyclic transmission area in the memory shared among
CPU. The cyclic transmission area is allocated to G device, from G10000.
Interfaces for PLC window are allocated to the cyclic transmission area. This area is used to read out or write into the
CNC internal data.
The lists of device Nos. are shown below. The device Nos. in the lists are offset Nos. from a head device in a cyclic
transmission area.

List of device Nos. of read window

Signal name Shared device Reference

Read control command G+2100 to G+2259
Read data G12310 to G12469 5.2.2 Read window
Read result G12270 to G12289

List of device Nos. of write window

Signal name Shared device Reference

Write control command
G+2260 to G+2579
Write data 5.2.3 Write window
Write result G12290 to G12309

Note that when a system is configured with multiple CNC-CPUs, which divide a cyclic transmission area to use, head
device Nos. are changed as follows.

Relation of CNC configuration to head device No.

Configuration Head device No. Parameter (#26742) Remark

1 unit of
1st unit G10000 10000 Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)
CNC
1st unit G10000 10000 Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)
2 units of
CNC 2nd unit G13072 13072
Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)
* G14000 14000

* The head device of 2nd unit changes depending on the parameter "26742.

Sequence programs need the designation of CPU No. in addition to device No.
Designate as follows to access the cyclic transmission area.

Designation：U__\G__
Address of the memory shared among CPU
Head input/output No. of CPU module

Relation of CPU No. to head input/output No.

CPU No. 1 2 3 4
Head I/O No. 3E0 3E1 3E2 3E3

375
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

The following chart shows the interfaces when a system is configured with a PLC CPU and 2 CNC CPUs.

I/O modules

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

PLC CPU(CPU No.1) CNC CPU(CPU No.2) CNC CPU(CPU No.3)

Cyclic transmission
area
PLC interface
U3E0 \ G10000 Head CNC control signal
:
U3E0 \ G12100 Window command
to interface Internal device
U3E0 \ G12579

:
U3E0 \ G13072 Head PLC interface
: CNC control signal
U3E0 \ G15172 Window command
to interface Internal device
U3E0 \ G15651

Cyclic transmission
area
U3E1 \ G10000 PLC interface
: CNC control signal
U3E1 \ G12270 Window response
to interface
Internal device
U3E1 \ G12469
:

Cyclic transmission
area
U3E2 \ G10000
: PLC interface
CNC control signal
U3E2 \ G12270 Window response
to interface
U3E2 \ G12469 Internal device
:

* When the head address of 2nd unit is U3E\G1400, the window status is U3E0\G16100 to U3E0\G16579.

376
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

5.2.2 Read window

Read control command

Read control command is used to designate the CNC internal data to read. For shared device Nos., refer to "Read
window interface" written later in this section. For setting values such as section Nos., refer to "Appendix 1. List of PLC
Window Data".

Shared device Item Details

Gn Section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.
Section sub-ID No. Designate the part system No.
Gn+1
(Note 1) (0:1st part system 1 - 7:Designated part system 100:PLC axis)
Gn+2 Sub-section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.
Designate the axis No. used in the part system. The axis No. can be designated up to 8
axes for each part system. (Each part system: 1 to 8, PLC axis: 1 to 8. "0" will be
Gn+3 Data No.
converted to designate the 1st axis.
*if the part system is unused, designate the available axis No.
0: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "data No.".
Read method
Gn+4 1: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "sub-section No.".
(Note 2)
2: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "section sub-ID No.".
Designate the number of data to be read. Maximum number to be read is 4.
Gn+5 Number to be read
If 5 or more is designated, the number of data is regarded as 4.
Gn+6 Blank －
bit0:
- ON/ Start continuous read
- OFF/ Stop continuous read
bit1:
- ON/ Start one-shot read
- OFF/ Stop one shot read
bit2: Not used
Control signal bit3:
Gn+7
(Note 3) - ON/ Decimal point is valid
- OFF/ Decimal point is invalid
Bit4:
- ON/ Divide the reading result into halves
- OFF/ Not to divide the reading result into halves

When 2 of the control signals are ON, continuous read is adapted.

Set all the other data in this table before turning the control signal ON.

(Note 1) As well as the usual part system, PLC axis can be designated. Set "100" for designating the PLC axis.
(Note 2) Designating the sub-section No. is only available when the sub-section Nos. are consecutive as 1, 2, 3 (such
as R register, tool offset).
(Note 3) When decimal point is valid, last 4 digits of the value to be read are placed after decimal point.
(Example) The value "1234567" is read as:
"123.4567" when decimal point is valid.
"1234567" when decimal point is invalid.

377
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Read data
"Read data" is an area that stores data read by CNC. "Read data" can store up to 4 consecutive data.
Data read by CNC is stored in the data storage area as follows.
1 or 2 byte read data is stored as 4 byte with sign extension.

(Example 1)
Read data: 100000(0x186A0)
When the device No. of the 1st read data window is G12310/G12311,
G12310: 0x86A0 G12311: 0x0001
(Example 2)
Read data: -2(0xFFFE)
When the device No. of the 1st read data window is G12310/G12311,
G12310: 0xFFFE G12311: 0xFFFF

Shared device Item Details

Gn
1st read data Stores the read data
Gn+1
Gn+2
2nd read data Stores the read data
Gn+3
Gn+4
3rd read data Stores the read data
Gn+5
Gn+6
4th read data Stores the read data
Gn+7

Read result
Read result stores the number of the read data in high 8 bit and the read status in low 8 bit.
As for read status, bit0 is turned ON when the read operation is completed, while bit1 to 7 are combined to show error
status. Refer to the following table for details. Read result is cleared by turning the control signal OFF.

Shared device Item Details

<Status>
bit0: Read finished (this bit is turned ON when the read
operation finished, regardless of whether the operation
succeeded or not.)
bit1 to 7: bit1 to 7: Error status
Read result 0x01: Normally finished
Gn bit0 to bit7: Status 0x11: Read variable is empty
bit8 to bitF: Results 0x21: Read variable overflowed
0x41: Part system designation illegal
0x45: Section No. illegal
0x5D: Data type illegal
0xFF: No option
<Results>: Number of data read

378
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

Read window interface

Window Read control Read data window Read

No. window 1 2 3 4 result
G+2100-G+2107 G12310-G12311 G12312-G12313 G12314-G12315 G12316-G12317 G12270
1
R8500-R8507 R9040-R9041 R9042-R9043 R9044-R9045 R9046-R9047 R9000
G+2108-G+2115 G12318-G12319 G12320-G12321 G12322-G12323 G12324-G12325 G12271
2
R8508-R8515 R9048-R9049 R9050-R9051 R9052-R9053 R9054-R9055 R9001
G+2116-G+2123 G12326-G12327 G12328-G12329 G12330-G12331 G12332-G12333 G12272
3
R8516-R8523 R9056-R9057 R9058-R9059 R9060-R9061 R9062-R9063 R9002
G+2124-G+2131 G12334-G12335 G12336-G12337 G12338-G12339 G12340-G12341 G12273
4
R8524-R8531 R9064-R9065 R9066-R9067 R9068-R9069 R9070-R9071 R9003
G+2132-G+2139 G12342-G12343 G12344-G12345 G12346-G12347 G12348-G12349 G12274
5
R8532-R8539 R9072-R9073 R9074-R9075 R9076-R9077 R9078-R9079 R9004
G+2140-G+2147 G12350-G12351 G12352-G12353 G12354-G12355 G12356-G12357 G12275
6
R8540-R8547 R9080-R9081 R9082-R9083 R9084-R9085 R9086-R9087 R9005
G+2148-G+2155 G12358-G12359 G12360-G12361 G12362-G12363 G12364-G12365 G12276
7
R8548-R8555 R9088-R9089 R9090-R9091 R9092-R9093 R9094-R9095 R9006
G+2156-G+2163 G12366-G12367 G12368-G12369 G12370-G12371 G12372-G12373 G12277
8
R8556-R8563 R9096-R9097 R9098-R9099 R9100-R9101 R9102-R9103 R9007
G+2164-G+2171 G12374-G12375 G12376-G12377 G12378-G12379 G12380-G12381 G12278
9
R8564-R8571 R9104-R9105 R9106-R9107 R9108-R9109 R9110-R9111 R9008
G+2172-G+2179 G12382-G12383 G12384-G12385 G12386-G12387 G12388-G12389 G12279
10
R8572-R8579 R9112-R9113 R9114-R9115 R9116-R9117 R9118-R9119 R9009
G+2180-G+2187 G12390-G12391 G12392-G12393 G12394-G12395 G12396-G12397 G12280
11
R8580-R8587 R9120-R9121 R9122-R9123 R9124-R9125 R9126-R9127 R9010
G+2188-G+2195 G12398-G12399 G12400-G12401 G12402-G12403 G12404-G12405 G12281
12
R8588-R8595 R9128-R9129 R9130-R9131 R9132-R9133 R9134-R9135 R9011
G+2196-G+2203 G12406-G12407 G12408-G12409 G12410-G12411 G12412-G12413 G12282
13
R8596-R8603 R9136-R9137 R9138-R9139 R9140-R9141 R9142-R9143 R9012
G+2204-G+2211 G12414-G12415 G12416-G12417 G12418-G12419 G12420-G12421 G12283
14
R8604-R8611 R9144-R9145 R9146-R9147 R9148-R9149 R9150-R9151 R9013
G+2212-G+2219 G12422-G12423 G12424-G12425 G12426-G12427 G12428-G12429 G12284
15
R8612-R8619 R9152-R9153 R9154-R9155 R9156-R9157 R9158-R9159 R9014
G+2220-G+2227 G12430-G12431 G12432-G12433 G12434-G12435 G12436-G12437 G12285
16
R8620-R8627 R9160-R9161 R9162-R9163 R9164-R9165 R9166-R9167 R9015
G+2228-G+2235 G12438-G12439 G12440-G12441 G12442-G12443 G12444-G12445 G12286
17
R8628-R8635 R9168-R9169 R9170-R9171 R9172-R9173 R9174-R9175 R9016
G+2236-G+2243 G12446-G12447 G12448-G12449 G12450-G12451 G12452-G12453 G12287
18
R8636-R8643 R9176-R9177 R9178-R9179 R9180-R9181 R9182-R9183 R9017
G+2244-G+2251 G12454-G12455 G12456-G12457 G12458-G12459 G12460-G12461 G12288
19
R8644-R8651 R9184-R9185 R9186-R9187 R9188-R9189 R9190-R9191 R9018
G+2252-G+2259 G12462-G12463 G12464-G12465 G12466-G12467 G12468-G12469 G12289
20
R8652-R8659 R9192-R9193 R9194-R9195 R9196-R9197 R9198-R9199 R9019

Read control window is written by PLC, while read data window and read result are written by CNC.

379
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.2.3 Write window

Write control command

Write control command is used to designate the CNC data to write in.
For shared device Nos., refer to "Write window interface" written later in this section.
For setting values such as section Nos., refer to "Appendix 1. List of PLC Window Data".

Shared device Item Details

Gn Section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.
Section sub-ID No. Designate the part system No.
Gn+1
(Note 1) (0:1st part system 1 to 7:Designated part system 100:PLC axis)
Gn+2 Sub-section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.
Designate the axis No. used in the part system. The axis No. can be designated
maximum of 8 axes for each part system. (Each part system: 1 to 8, PLC axis: 1 to 8. "0"
Gn+3 Data No.
will be converted to designate the 1st axis.
*if the part system is unused, designate the available axis No.
0: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Data No.".
Write method
Gn+4 1: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Sub-section No.".
(Note 2)
2: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Section sub-ID No.".
Designate number of data to be written. Maximum number to be written is 4.
Gn+5 Number to be written
If 5 or more is designated, the number of data is regarded as 4.
Gn+6 Blank －
bit0:
- ON/ Start continuous write
- OFF/ Stop continuous write
bit1:
- ON/ Start one-shot write
- OFF/ Stop one-shot write
bit2:
Control signal
Gn+7 - ON/ Addition input
(Note 3)
- OFF/ Direct input
bit3:
- ON/ Decimal point is valid
- OFF/ Decimal point is invalid

When 2 of the control signals are ON, continuous read is adapted.

Set all the other data in this table before turning the control signal ON.

(Note 1) As well as the usual part system, PLC axis can be designated. Set "100" for designating the PLC axis.
(Note 2) Designating the sub-section No. is only available when the sub-section Nos. are consecutive as 1, 2, 3 (such
as R register, tool offset).
(Note 3) When decimal point is valid, last 4 digits of the value to be written are placed after decimal point.
(Example) The value "1234567" is written as:
"123.4567" when decimal point is valid.
"1234567" when decimal point is invalid.

380
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

Write data
"Write data" is an area that stores data to be written in CNC. "Write data" can store up to 4 consecutive data.
Data to be written in CNC should be stored in the data storage area as follows.

(Example)
Write data: 100000(0x186A4)
When the device No. of the 1st write data window is G12260/G12261,
G12260: 0x86A0 G12261: 0x0001

(Note) The value of data which is written to CNC using PLC window function should be within the range shown in the
Appendix 1. If the value is set over the range, the performance is not guaranteed.

Shared device Item Details

Gn
1st write data Stores data to be written
Gn+1
Gn+2
2nd write data Stores data to be written
Gn+3
Gn+4
3rd write data Stores data to be written
Gn+5
Gn+6
4th write data Stores data to be written
Gn+7

Write result
"Write result" stores the number of written data in high 8 bit and the write status in low 8 bit.
As for write status, bit0 is turned ON when the write operation is completed, while bit1 to 7 are combined to show error
status. Refer to the following table for details. "Write result" is cleared by turning the control signal OFF.

Shared device Item Details

<Status>
bit0: Write finished (this bit is turned ON when the write
operation finished, regardless of whether the operation
succeeded or not.))
bit1 to 7: bit1 to 7: Error status
Write result 0x01: Normally finished
Gn bit0 to bit7: Status 0x21: Write variable overflowed
bit8 to bitF: Results 0x41: Part system designation illegal
0x45: Section No. illegal
0x5D: Data type illegal
0x6D: Written in read-only data
0xFF: No option
<Results>: Number of data written

381
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Write window interface

Window Write control Write data window ("write data") Write

No. window 1 2 3 4 result
G+2268-G+2275 G+2260-G+2261 G+2262-G+2263 G+2264-G+2265 G+2266-G+2267 G12290
1
R8668-R8675 R8660-R8661 R8662-R8663 R8664-R8665 R8666-R8667 R9020
G+2284-G+2291 G+2276-G+2277 G+2278-G+2279 G+2280-G+2281 G+2282-G+2283 G12291
2
R8684-R8691 R8676-R8677 R8678-R8679 R8680-R8681 R8682-R8683 R9021
G+2300-G+2307 G+2292-G+2293 G+2294-G+2295 G+2296-G+2297 G+2298-G+2299 G12292
3
R8700-R8707 R8692-R8693 R8694-R8695 R8696-R8697 R8698-R8699 R9022
G+2316-G+2323 G+2308-G+2309 G+2310-G+2311 G+2312-G+2313 G+2314-G+2315 G12293
4
R8716-R8723 R8708-R8709 R8710-R8711 R8712-R8713 R8714-R8715 R9023
G+2332-G+2339 G+2324-G+2325 G+2326-G+2327 G+2328-G+2329 G+2330-G+2331 G12294
5
R8732-R8739 R8724-R8725 R8726-R8727 R8728-R8729 R8730-R8731 R9024
G+2348-G+2355 G+2340-G+2341 G+2342-G+2343 G+2344-G+2345 G+2346-G+2347 G12295
6
R8748-R8755 R8740-R8741 R8742-R8743 R8744-R8745 R8746-R8747 R9025
G+2364-G+2371 G+2356-G+2357 G+2358-G+2359 G+2360-G+2361 G+2362-G+2363 G12296
7
R8764-R8771 R8756-R8757 R8758-R8759 R8760-R8761 R8762-R8763 R9026
G+2380-G+2387 G+2372-G+2373 G+2374-G+2375 G+2376-G+2377 G+2378-G+2379 G12297
8
R8780-R8787 R8772-R8773 R8774-R8775 R8776-R8777 R8778-R8779 R9027
G+2396-G+2403 G+2388-G+2389 G+2390-G+2391 G+2392-G+2393 G+2394-G+2395 G12298
9
R8796-R8803 R8788-R8789 R8790-R8791 R8792-R8793 R8794-R8795 R9028
G+2412-G+2419 G+2404-G+2405 G+2406-G+2407 G+2408-G+2409 G+2410-G+2411 G12299
10
R8812-R8819 R8804-R8805 R8806-R8807 R8808-R8809 R8810-R8811 R9029
G+2428-G+2435 G+2420-G+2421 G+2422-G+2423 G+2424-G+2425 G+2426-G+2427 G12300
11
R8828-R8835 R8820-R8821 R8822-R8823 R8824-R8825 R8826-R8827 R9030
G+2444-G+2451 G+2436-G+2437 G+2438-G+2439 G+2440-G+2441 G+2442-G+2443 G12301
12
R8844-R8851 R8836-R8837 R8838-R8839 R8840-R8841 R8842-R8843 R9031
G+2460-G+2467 G+2452-G+2453 G+2454-G+2455 G+2456-G+2457 G+2458-G+2459 G12302
13
R8860-R8867 R8852-R8853 R8854-R8855 R8856-R8857 R8858-R8859 R9032
G+2476-G+2483 G+2468-G+2469 G+2470-G+2471 G+2472-G+2473 G+2474-G+2475 G12303
14
R8876-R8883 R8868-R8869 R8870-R8871 R8872-R8873 R8874-R8875 R9033
G+2492-G+2499 G+2484-G+2485 G+2486-G+2487 G+2488-G+2489 G+2490-G+2491 G12304
15
R8892-R8899 R8884-R8885 R8886-R8887 R8888-R8889 R8890-R8891 R9034
G+2508-G+2515 G+2500-G+2501 G+2502-G+2503 G+2504-G+2505 G+2506-G+2507 G12305
16
R8908-R8915 R8900-R8901 R8902-R8903 R8904-R8905 R8906-R8907 R9035
G+2524-G+2531 G+2516-G+2517 G+2518-G+2519 G+2520-G+2521 G+2522-G+2523 G12306
17
R8924-R8931 R8916-R8917 R8918-R8919 R8920-R8921 R8922-R8923 R9036
G+2540-G+2547 G+2532-G+2533 G+2534-G+2535 G+2536-G+2537 G+2538-G+2539 G12307
18
R8940-R8947 R8932-R8933 R8934-R8935 R8936-R8937 R8938-R8939 R9037
G+2556-G+2563 G+2548-G+2549 G+2550-G+2551 G+2552-G+2553 G+2554-G+2555 G12308
19
R8956-R8963 R8948-R8949 R8950-R8951 R8952-R8953 R8954-R8955 R9038
G+2572-G+2579 G+2564-G+2565 G+2566-G+2567 G+2568-G+2569 G+2570-G+2571 G12309
20
R8972-R8979 R8964-R8965 R8966-R8967 R8968-R8969 R8970-R8971 R9039

Write control window and write data window are written by PLC, while write result is written by CNC.

382
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

5.2.4 Operation Details

Read operation
Procedure to read data is as follows.
(1) Designate the data to read by setting "section No.", "section sub-ID No.", "sub-section No.", "data No.", and
"data size" to the "read control command".
(2) Designate "number to be read" (max. 4 data) and "read method" to the same "read control command".
(3) If bit0 of "control signal" is turned ON, the read operation starts ("A" in the chart below). The read operation
continues as long as bit0 is ON.
If bit1 of "control signal" is turned ON, one-shot read operation starts ("B" in the chart below).
(4) After the read operation is completed, CNC sets the "status" in "read result" ("C" in the chart below).
If "status" is set while one-shot read is ON, data is not read.
(5) If the control signal of "read control command" is turned OFF, "status (bit0)" in "read result" is also turned OFF.
The operation is the same for both one-shot and continuous read. ("D" in the chart below)
(6) "Read data window" stores the read data. Check the "status" and "result" in "read result" before using the read
data.

<Timing chart of read operation>

Read control command

Control signal bit0 (continuous read)

Read control command

Control signal bit1
(one-shot read)
D
D

Read result, “status”

B A C
C

Read operation
of CNC data

Reading data

One-shot read Continuous read

383
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Write operation
Procedure to write data is as follows.
(1) Designate the data to write by setting "section No.", "section sub-ID No.", "sub-section No.", "data No.", and
"data size" to the "write control command".
(2) Designate "number to be written" (max. 4 data) and "write method" to the same "write control command".
(3) If bit0 of "control signal" is turned ON, the write operation starts ("A" in the chart below).
The write operation continues as long as bit0 is ON.
If bit1 of "control signal" is turned ON, one-shot write operation starts ("B" in the chart below).
(4) After the write operation is completed, CNC sets the "status" in "write result" ("C" in the chart below).
If "status" is set while one-shot write is ON, CNC does not write data.
(5) If the control signal of "write control command" is turned OFF, "status(bit0)" in "write result" is also turned OFF.
The operation is the same for both one-shot and continuous read. ("D" in the chart below)
(6) Check the "status" and "result" in "write result" before executing other operations to the written data.

<Timing chart of write operation>

Write control command

Control signal bit0 (continuous write)

Write control command

Control signal bit1
(one-shot write)
D
D

Write result, “status”

B A C
C
Write operation
of CNC data

Writing data

One-shot write Continuous write

384
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

5.2.5 Usage Examples

This section shows the usage examples with the system configured as follows.

<System configuration>

PLC CPU (CPU No.1)

CNC-CPU (CPU No.2)

I/O modules

M ELS EC

PULL

M IT S U B IS H I

Example 1 (Reading out the G54 workpiece coordinate offset values of each 1st to 4th axes in the1st part system)
(1) Set the data to be read as follows.
[TOOL OFFSET] - [WORK OFFSET] screen

(2) Set the following data to the read control command.

Device No. Item Setting value Details

G12100 Section No. 0x0004 Designate workpiece coordinate offset
G12101 Section sub-ID No. 0x0001 Designate the part system No.
G12102 Sub-section No. 0x0000 Designate G54 workpiece coordinate offset
G12103 Data No. 0x0001 Designate the axis No. used in the part system
Set the method to read the designated number
G12104 Read method 0x0000 of data consecutively from the designated data
No.
G12105 Number to be read 0x0004 Designate the number to be read

385
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

Device No. Device value Details

High 8 bit (number of data read): 4
G12270 0x0401
Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control
command.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x86A0 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 1st axis is
G12311 0x0001 "100.000"

G12312 0x49F0 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 2nd axis is
G12313 0x0002 "150.000"

G12314 0x0D40 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 3rd axis is
G12315 0x0003 "200.000"

G12316 0xD090 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 4th axis is
G12317 0x0003 "250.000"

The sequence program of example 1 is written as follows.

ACT
[MOV K4 U3E0\G12100]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12101]
[MOV K0 U3E0\G12102]
Set data to the read control command
[MOV K1 U3E0\G12103]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12104]
[MOV K4 U3E0\G12105]
Turn ON the control signal
ACT [MOV K1 U3E0\G12107] in the read control window
[> U3E1\G12270 K0 ] ( M100 ) Check the read result
M100
[MOV K0 U3E0\G12107] Turn the control signal OFF

386
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

Example 2 (Reading out the values of each common variable #100 to #103 in the 1st part system)
(1) Set the values to be read as follows.
[POSITION] - [COMMON VARIABLE] screen

(2) Set the following values to the read control command.

Device No. Item Setting value Details

G12100 Section No. 0x0020 Designate common variable
G12101 Section sub-ID No. 0x0001 Designate the part system No.
G12102 Sub-section No. 0x0064 Designate common variable No.
G12103 Data No. 0x0000 Designate the axis No. used in the part system
Set the method to read the designated number
G12104 Read method 0x0001 of data consecutively from the designated sub-
section No.
G12105 Number to be read 0x0004 Designate the number to be read

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0 and bit3) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

Device No. Device value Details

High 8 bit (number of data read): 4
G12270 0x0401
Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0 and bit3) of the read
control command.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x4240 The value of common variable #100 for the 1st part system is
G12311 0x000F "100.0000"

G12312 0xD687 The value of common variable #101 for the 1st part system is
G12313 0x0012 "123.4567"

G12314 0xBDC0 The value of common variable #102 for the 1st part system is
G12315 0xFFF0 "-100.0000"

G12316 0x2979 The value of common variable #103 for the 1st part system is
G12317 0xFFED "-123.4567"

387
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Example 3 (Reading out the value of common variable #100 for each part system)
(1) Set the values to be read as follows.
(The following screen shows the value set for the 1st part system. Change the part systems and set the value for
each 1st to 4th part system.)
Set "150.0000" for 2nd part system #100, "200.0000" for 3rd part system #100, 250.0000 for 4th part system #100.
[POSITION] - [COMMON VARIABLE] screen

(2) Set the following values to the read control command.

Change the setting value of "read method" in the example 2 from "1" to "2". (The other setting values are the same
as those in example 2.)

Device No. Item Setting value Details

Set the method to read the designated number
G12104 Read method 0x0002 of data consecutively from the designated
section sub-ID No.

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

Device No. Device value Details

High 8 bit (number of data read): 4
G12270 0x0401
Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control
command. Turn bit3 ON for the same signal.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x0064 The value of common variable #100 for the 1st part system is
G12311 0x0000 "100"

G12312 0x0096 The value of common variable #100 for the 2nd part system is
G12313 0x0000 "150"

G12314 0x00C8 The value of common variable #100 for the 3rd part system is
G12315 0x0000 "200"

G12316 0x00FA The value of common variable #100 for the 4th part system is
G12317 0x0000 "250"

388
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.2 PLC Window

5.2.6 Precautions
(1) PLC window operates even while PLC stops. If read/write control signal is ON, read/write function operates during
the PLC stop.
(2) When multiple data is read/written while continuous read/write is set, some data may not be updated due to the time
of execution.
To read/write all the multiple data at the same time, synchronize the data transfer timing of each CPU by
designating the target command with I45(interruption pointer) and terminating the command with IRET command.
The following sequence program is the example when the system is configured with PLC CPU for CPU No.1 and
CNC CPU for No.2.

<For reading>

Designate the command

with I45 (interruption pointer)
to ransfer data at the
synchronized timing.
ACT
I45 [DMOV U3E1\G12310 D500] Set the 1st read data to PLC
[DMOV U3E1\G12312 D502] Set the 2nd read data to PLC
[DMOV U3E1\G12314 D504] Set the 3rd read data to PLC
[DMOV U3E1\G12316 D506] Set the 4th read data to PLC
[IRET]

<For writing>

ACT
I45 [DMOV K1 U3E0\G12268] Set the 1st write data to the shared device
[DMOV K2 U3E0\G12270] Set the 2nd write data to the shared device
[DMOV K3 U3E0\G12272] Set the 3rd write data to the shared device
[DMOV K4 U3E0\G12274] Set the 4th write data to the shared device
[IRET]

389
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function
-When the tool is commanded, a tool is selected from the tool group.(Only for tool life management II.)
-The tool status is monitored by counting the tool usage time and number of uses.
-When the tool being used reaches its life, the tool life over signal is output.

[Tool function command]

[Cutting]
The life is checked
Use time
when the tool is
and number Tool life is over
selected
of uses are
counted

[Preparation] [WARNING]
The life time and Tool life over
number of life
[Tool life management screen]
times are set

Spare/spindle
tool data User PLC

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP 10000000
#TOOL NO.ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED
1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)
2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)
3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)
4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)
5
6
7
8
9
10

#( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

390
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.2 Tool Life Management Methods

The following two management methods are available.
(1) Tool life management I (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 1.)
The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721) is
integrated and the tool use state is monitored.
Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759)
(2) Tool life management II (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 2.)
A function to select a spare tool has been added to the tool management I. The spare tool is selected from the
group by the spare tool selection processes executed by the CNC when the tool is commanded, etc. The tool data
for that spare tool is output (G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735).
Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool specified from user PLC (G11450-G1145/R6720-R6721) is output
(G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759) and tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool is made.

(Note) Tool life management can be executed only for the 1st part system.

391
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.3.3 Procedure when Tool Function Command is Executed

(1) Tool life management I
(a) When the tool function command (T command) is commanded, the CNC outputs the T code data (BCD) and
the tool function strobe signal.
(b) The CNC checks the tool function command, and executes the tool selection process if the life management is
valid ("#1103 T_life" is set to "1").
(c) The tool selection process outputs the tool data for the tool corresponding to the designated tool No. (G12220-
G12231/R6724-R6735)
(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data after
the confirmation of the tool function strobe signal, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(2) Tool life management II

(a) When the tool function command (T command) is commanded, the CNC outputs the T code data (BCD) and
the tool function strobe signal.
(b) The CNC checks the tool function command, and executes the spare tool selection process if the life
management is required as is valid ("#1103 T_life" is set to "1").
(c) The spare tool selection process selects the spare tool corresponding to the specified No. (group No., tool No.)
and outputs the tool data of the spare tool. (G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735)
The T command value, after the subtraction of the tool life management standard number (#1312 T_base), is
used as group No. and tool No.
If the commanded value is smaller than the tool life management standard number, the spare tool selection is
not processed.
(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data after
the confirmation of the tool function strobe signal, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. At the time, the specified tool No. is
output to the tool No. in the output tool data as it is.

<When tool function command is executed>

Tool function command (Rm) Spare tool selection Tool data (Rn)
function command
(Tool No., group No.)

In tool life management I, Tool is selected according

tool No. is only specified to tool No. in tool data.
and spare tool is selected.

392
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed

(1) When spindle tool is changed during the spindle tool change command (M06), etc., the user PLC specifies the tool
No. of the spindle tool (G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721).
CNC always outputs the spindle tool data corresponding to the tool No. of the spindle (G12244 -G12255/R6748-
R6759).
(2) CNC integrates the use time or use count of the spindle tool based on the spindle tool data in the tool data file.
In tool life management II, it also executes tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output spindle tool data, the spindle tool data is invalid. At the time, the
specified tool No. (G11450-G11451 (R6720-R6721)) is output to the tool No. in the output spindle tool data as
it is. CNC does not integrate the usage time or usage count of the spindle tool or make tool compensation.

<When tool is changed>

T life mgmt Spare tool No.

G12222-G12223 When tool is changed, the spindle tool No. is set
/R6726-R6727 in G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721. (User PLC)

T life mgmt Spindle tool No. Tool data file

G11450-G11451 CNC
(CNC internal data)
/R6720-R6721

Standby tool No. When the spindle No. is changed, CNC regards
G11452-G11453 that the spindle tool has been changed and
searches for new tool data in the tool data file.
/R6722-R6723
Life management and tool compensation are
conducted based on this data.
Spindle tool data The tool data is output to G12244-G12255/R6748-
G12244-G12255 R6759 when synchronized.
/R6748-R6759

393
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.3.5 Tool Life Management II Method

(1) Tool function command method
One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the
spare tool selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Group No. command method (When Base common parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 0.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as group No. Spare
tool is selected among the tools corresponding to the group No. in tool data.

(b) Tool No. command method (When BASE SPEC parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 1.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as a tool No. The
group No. containing the command tool No. is found and spare tool is selected among the group.

(2) Spare tool selection method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for the spare tool selection method of the spare tool
selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Selection in tool registration order (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 0.)
This selects the tool from the tools in use in the same group, following the registration No. order.
If there are no "Tools in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools" and
"Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.
(b) Life equality selection (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 1.)
This selects the tool with the maximum remaining life from the tools in use and not in use in the same group.
When several tools have the same remaining life, the tools are selected in order of registration No. If there are
no "Tools in use" or "Tools not in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools"
and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

5.3.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools

Maximum number of registerable tools is 100.

394
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.7 Tool Data

The tool data is tool management data such as the group No., tool No., and tool status.

Tool data name Explanation Data range

No. to manage tools of the same type (form and
dimensions) in a group is set.
Group No. 1 to 99999999
The tools assigned the same group No. are assumed to
be spare tools.
No. unique to each tool actually output during tool
Tool No. 1 to 99999999
function command execution

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set the parameter for tool life management method,
Tool data flag length compensation method, radius compensation (1) (2) (3)
method, etc.
(1) Tool life management method 0-2
(2) Tool radius compensation method 0-2
(3) Tool length compensation method 0-2

0 to 4

0 to 4
Tool status The tool state is indicated.
bit F E D C B A 9 8

May differ according to the machine tool builder

Auxiliary data 0 to 65535
specifications.
Life time or life count for each tool is set. 0 to 4000 (minutes)
Tool life data
(If 0 is set, infinity is assumed to be specified.) 0 to 65000 (times)
Usage time or usage count for each tool.
0 to 4000 (minutes)
Tool usage data (Refer to the following "Usage time, usage count" section
0 to 65000 (times)
for details on the count method.)
Compensation No. 1 to 200
Tool length compensation The tool length compensation data is set with the format
Direct offset amount ± 99999.999
data designated with the tool data flag.
Addition offset amount ± 99999.999
Compensation No. 1 to 200
Tool radius compensation The tool radius compensation data is set with the format
Direct offset amount ± 99999.999
data designated with the tool data flag.
Addition offset amount ± 99999.999

(Note) Refer to tool data after the output tool No. coincided with the number set to the spindle tool No.

395
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(1) Tool data flag

Parameter Details Value Explanation

Usage time 0 Manages the cutting feed with the execution time.
Tool life management
Manages the number of times the tool becomes the spindle tool at tool
method Mount count 1
change, etc.
(bit4/5)
Work count 2 Manages with the number of times the cutting feed command is issued.
Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the compensation No.,
Compensation
0 and compensates by replacing the compensation No. commanded in the
number method
machining program with this value.
Tool length Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the addition compensation
Addition
compensation method amount.
compensation 1
(bit0/1) Compensates by adding the amount to the compensation amount indicated
method
Tool radius by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program.
compensation method
Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the direct compensation
(bit2/3) Direct amount.
compensation 2 Compensates by replacing the amount to the compensation amount
method indicated by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program
with this value.

(2) Tool status

Details Value Explanation

Unused tool 0 Set to 0 when replacing the tool with a new tool.
Tool in use 1 This state is activated when cutting is actually started.
Normal life tool 2 This state is activated when the usage data exceeds the life data.
Error tool 1 3 This state is activated when the CNC receives tool error 1 signal.
Error tool 2 4 This state is activated when the CNC receives tool error 2 signal.

-Values of tool status, 3 and 4 may differ according to the machine tool builder specifications.
-The unused tool and tool in use are usable spare tools.
(3) Tool life data, tool usage data
The setting range and unit differ according to the tool data flag's tool life management method.

Tool life management

Setting range Unit
method
0 : Usage time 0 to 4000 Minute
1 : Mount count 0 to 65000 Times
2 : Work count 0 to 65000 Times

(Note) When usage time is selected for the tool life management method, the data is output to user ladder on a
1/16 minute basis.

(4) Tool length compensation data, tool radius compensation data

The tool corresponding to the spindle tool can be compensated with tool life management II.
The setting details and range differ according to the tool data flag's tool length compensation method and tool
radius compensation method.

Tool compensation
Setting details Setting range
data
0 : Compensation Compensation
1 to 200
number method No.
1 : Addition Compensation
± 99999.999
compensation method amount
2 : Direct compensation Compensation
± 99999.999
method amount

396
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.8 Usage Time, Work Count

The usage data is counted with the life system (usage time, work count, mount count) set for each tool.

Usage time count

Counts the time duration of cutting feed movement (G01/02/03, etc.). (The duration indicated with <=> in the following
chart is counted.)

T01M06 G00 G01 G00 G01 G01 G04 G01 G00

Work count
Counts the number of times at which the rapid traverse command (G00) has been changed to the cutting feed command.
However, if a command other than the rapid traverse has been issued while the cutting feed is commanded, the data is
not counted.

Adds 1 Adds 1 *Not counted

to the work count to the work count

T01M06 G00 G01 G00 G01 G01 G04 G01 G00

Mount count
Counts the number of times at which the cutting feed has started after the tool change.
This is not counted unless the cutting feed is commanded after the tool change.

Adds 1
to the mount count

T01M06 G00 G01 G00 G01 G01 G04 G01 G00

Precautions
(1) Tool life management is executed even when the operation mode is MDI.
(2) Linear interporation, arc interporation and threading are regarded as cutting feed.
However, the data is not counted unless any movement has been made in the block.
(3) The data is not counted if the automatic machine lock is executed to any one of the axes.
(4) These counts are available when the parameter "#1103 T_Life (Validate life management)" is set to "1" and "Usage
data count valid" signal (Y78A) is ON. The data is not counted when either the parameter or the signal is set to "0"
or OFF.
(5) None of the "0" tool life data, tools whose life is over, and abnormal tools (status: 3 or 4) are counted.
(6) The data is not counted during miscellaneous function lock or dry run.
(7) The data is not counted during the operation with a single block.
(8) The movement by the skip command (G31) is not counted.

397
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.3.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register)

CNC CPU PLC CPU

G10320/R120 T command data

T command
G10321/R121 (BCD data)

Spare tool selection

G12220/R6724
Group No.
process G12221/R6725
G12222/R6726
Tool No. ①
G12223/R6727
G12224/R6728 Tool data flag/status [DMOV]

G12225/R6729 Auxiliary data When magazine is indexed

according to the read tool No. and
The CNC searches for the tool G12226/R6730 Life data new tool is mounted on the spindle,
data indicated by the T tool No. of the new tool is set in
command data. G12227/R6731 Usage data
G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721.
The searched tool data is set
G12228/R6732 Tool length
in G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735. compensation Status check, etc.
G12229/R6733 amount

G12230/R6734 Tool radius

compensation
G12231/R6735 amount

①
Use as life management
G11451/R6720 [DMOV]
and screen display data. Spindle tool No.
G11452/R6721
Use as screen G11453/R6722 Standby tool
display data. Standby tool number is set.
No.
G11454/R6723

G12244/R6748
Group No.
G12245/R6748

The tool data G12246/R6748

Tool No.
corresponding to the
G12247/R6748
spindle tool No. is
output. G12248/R6748 Tool data flag/status

Tool data can be G12249/R6748 Auxiliary data Status check, etc.

referred to if the
G12250/R6748 Life data
output tool No.
coincides with the G12251/R6748 Usage data (Note)
spindle tool No. Note that the data handled in tool life
G12252/R6748 Tool length management except for tool data flag/status
compensation is binary, while the data used in the
G12253/R6748 amount
D(P).ATC, such as search tool data and
G12254/R6748 Tool radius magazine tool No. in magazine, is BCD.
compensation
G13255/R6759 amount

398
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

5.3.10 User PLC Processing

A PLC processing example when tool change is made by the T command is given below:

START

Tool function
command executed?
NO (X650)
YES
Is life management The control method varies depending on
valid? (X62B) whether or not life management is selected.
NO
YES

Is tool available? The tool status and tool No. are checked to
NO see if the tool can be used.
YES

Index magazine according to tool Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

No. in the read tool data.

Index up magazine Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

according to the
G10320/R120 contents.

• Change tool (mount new tool on

spindle) Set the tool No. of the new tool mounted on the
• Set the tool No. of the tool spindle in G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721.
mounted on the spindle G11450 Seeing a change in the G11450-G11451
-G11451/R6720-R6721. /R6720-R6721 contents, CNC outputs the life
management tool data corresponding to the tool
No. G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759 and starts
life management at the same time.

Turn ON auxiliary function The completion signal when life management is

completion signal(Y71E). selected is turned ON after the spindle tool No.
is set in G11450-G11451 /R6720-R6721.
Error processing

399
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.3.11 Interface with PLC

CNC -> PLC interface signal

Con- Signal name Signal $1

tact abbreviation

A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B

[Function]
This signal is output during the tool life management.
[Operation]
"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is
ON.

Con- Signal name Signal $1

tact abbreviation

A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E

[Function]
<For tool life management I>
This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ Life data).
<For tool life management II>
This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.

[Operation]
<For L system tool life management I>
This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

<For L system tool life management II>

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data ≥ life data). (Same timing as the count up
of usage data.)
(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.
(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe
1 (TF1n)" signal.)
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the
signal will remain ON.)
(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)
[Caution]
If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.
(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

400
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

Standby tool data

1st part system Name Details

G12220/R6724
SPARE TOOL: GROUP NO. This is the SPARE TOOL spare tool's group No.
G12221/R6725
G12222/R6726
SPARE TOOL: TOOL NO. This is the spare tool's tool No.
G12223/R6727

SPARE TOOL: TOOL DATA

G12224/R6728 This is the spare tool's flag/status.
FLAG/STATUS

SPARE TOOL: AUXILIARY

G12225/R6729 This is the spare tool's auxiliary data.
DATA

G12226/R6730 SPARE TOOL: LIFE DATA This is the spare tool's life data.
G12227/R6731 SPARE TOOL: USAGE DATA This is the spare tool's usage data.
G12228/R6732 SPARE TOOL: LENGTH
This is the spare tool's tool length compensation amount.
G12229/R6733 COMPENSATION AMOUNT
G12230/R6734 SPARE TOOL: RADIUS
This is the spare tool's tool radius compensation amount.
G12231/R6735 COMPENSATION AMOUNT

Active tool data

1st part system Name Details

G12244/R6748
ACTIVE TOOL: GROUP NO. This is the active tool's group No.
G12245/R6748
G12246/R6748
ACTIVE TOOL: TOOL NO. This is the active tool's tool No.
G12247/R6748
ACTIVE TOOL: TOOL DATA
G12248/R6748 This is the active tool's flag/status.
FLAG/STATUS

ACTIVE TOOL: AUXILIARY

G12249/R6748 This is the active tool's auxiliary data.
DATA

G12250/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: LIFE DATA This is the active tool's life data.

G12251/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: USAGE DATA This is the active tool's usage data.

G12252/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: LENGTH

This is the active tool's tool length compensation amount.
G12253/R6748 COMPENSATION AMOUNT
G12254/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: RADIUS
This is the active tool's tool radius compensation amount.
G12255/R6759 COMPENSATION AMOUNT

401
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Spindle/Standby tool Nos.

1st part system Name Details

G11450/R6720 T LIFE MGMT SPINDLE TOOL
This is the active spindle tool No.
G11451/R6721 NO.
G11452/R6722 T LIFE MGMT STANDBY TOOL
This is the standby tool No.
G11453/R6723 NO.

PLC -> CNC interface signal

Con- Signal name Signal $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

tact abbreviation

A TOOL ALARM 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

[Function]
This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.
This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]
<M system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool
alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

<L system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool
skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.
(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is
designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is
selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.
(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal
is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group
is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be
carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected
needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected
due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal
input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation
request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

Con- Signal name Signal $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

tact abbreviation

A TOOL ALARM 2 TAL2n Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9

[Function]
This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 4 (a tool of Tool alarm 2).
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "4" (a tool of
Tool alarm 2).
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.
See "4.19.11 Interface with PLC" for details.

402
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

Con- Signal name Signal $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

tact abbreviation

A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

[Function]
This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]
<M system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management
specification.
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

<L system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management
specification.

B Signal name Signal $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

Con- abbreviation
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT IN-
- TLF1n Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB
PUT

[Function]
This signal validates the tool life management.

[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, the tool life management process is executed.

403
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal name Signal $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

tact abbreviation
TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA- G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930
-
TION R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

[Function]
The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool
life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]
The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)
Y (Axis)

PLC -> CNC interface signal

Signal
1st part
abbreviatio Name Details
system
n
Y409 AMLK1 Automatic machine lock 1st axis
Y439 AMLK2 Automatic machine lock 2nd axis
Y469 AMLK3 Automatic machine lock 3rd axis
Y499 AMLK4 Automatic machine lock 4th axis While this signal is being received, the tool life management is
Y4C9 AMLK5 Automatic machine lock 5th axis not performed.

Y4F9 AMLK6 Automatic machine lock 6th axis

Y529 AMLK7 Automatic machine lock 7th axis
Y559 AMLK8 Automatic machine lock 8th axis

Y (Part system)

1st part Signal

Name Details
system abbreviation
Y712 SBKn Single block
While this signal is being received, the tool life management is
Y715 DRNn Dry run
not performed.
Y75A AFLn Miscellaneous function lock

404
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.4 Tool Life Management (L System)

5.4 Tool Life Management (L System)

The tool life is managed based on usage time and usage count of tools.

5.4.1 Interface with PLC

CNC -> PLC interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B

[Function]
This signal is output during the tool life management.
[Operation]
"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is
ON.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E

[Function]
<For tool life management I>
This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ Life data).
<For tool life management II>
This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.

[Operation]
<For L system tool life management I>
This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

<For L system tool life management II>

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only
output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data ≥ life data). (Same timing as the count up
of usage data.)
(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.
(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe
1 (TF1n)" signal.)
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the
signal will remain ON.)
(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)

[Caution]
If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.
(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

405
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A NEW TOOL CHANGE TCRQn X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C

[Function]
This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in the group is selected in the tool life management II.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The tool selected by T command tool selection is unused (status 0).

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When T command is completed due to the M function finish signal (FIN1,FIN2).

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10338 G10438 G10538 G10638 G10738 G10838 G10938
- GROUP IN LIFE MANAGEMENT
R138 R238 R338 R438 R538 R638 R738

[Function] [Operation]
This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10344 - G10444 - G10544 - G10644 - G10744 - G10844 - G10944 -
G10345 G10445 G10545 G10645 G10745 G10845 G10945
- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA
R144 - R244 - R344 - R444 - R544 - R644 - R744 -
R145 R245 R345 R445 R545 R645 R745

[Function] [Operation]
This signal output usage data of tools currently being used with the tool life management II. (When multiple
compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)

406
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.4 Tool Life Management (L System)

PLC -> CNC interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

[Function]
This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.
This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]
<M system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool
alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

<L system>
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool
skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.
(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is
designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is
selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.
(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal
is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group
is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be
carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected
needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected
due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal
input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation
request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

[Function]
This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]
<M system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management
specification.
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

<L system>
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management
specification.

407
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
A TOOL CHANGE RESET TCRTn Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC

[Function]
This signal is used to clear all tool usage data in a group with the tool life management II.

[Operation]
Select with the tool group No. designation whether all groups that have exceeded their lifetimes or specific group to be
cleared.
After this signal is input, the first tool of the group will be selected at the next group selection.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be
carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected
needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again. However, a tool may not be selected
due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal
input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation
request" (CRQn) signal before selecting the group.

[Related signals]
(1) Recalculation request (CRQn:Y72B)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA- G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930
-
TION R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

[Function]
The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool
life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]
The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)

408
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.5 External Search

5.5 External Search

External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program storage device,
program No., sequence No., block No. designated from the PLC CPU.

Details
Flow of process for the external search (the 1st part system) is shown below.

CNC CPU PLC CPU

(4)
Set search result G10300/R100 External search status Check with error check, etc

G+361/R2461 Device No. Set the device No.

G+362/R2462 (1)
Program No. Set the program No.
G+363/R2463
G+364/R2464
Sequence No. Set the sequence No.
G+365/R2465
G+366/R2466
Block No. Set the block No.
G+367/R2467

(3) Search process External search (2)

execution strobe signal
EXTSSn (Y71D) ON

(5) External search External search (6)

finished signal strobe signal
ETSEn (X61D) ON EXTSSn (Y71D) OFF

(7) External search

finished signal
ETSEn (X61D) OFF

[Operation]
(1) The PLC CPU sets the device, program No., sequence No., and block No.
(2) The PLC CPU sets the external search strobe signal ON.
(3) The CNC CPU searches for the target machining program from the designated device, program No., sequence No.,
and block No.
(4) The CNC CPU sets the search results as the external search status.
(5) The CNC CPU turns the external search finished signal ON.
(6) The PLC CPU turns the external search strobe signal OFF.
(7) The CNC CPU turns the external search finished signal OFF.

409
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

CNC CPU → PLC CPU Interface signals

Part system No.

Signal name
$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D
G10300 G10400 G10500 G10600 G10700 G10800 G10900
EXTERNAL SEARCH STATUS
R100 R200 R300 R400 R500 R600 R700

(1) External search finished (ETSFn:X61D)

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.
This signal turns OFF when the "external search strobe" signal is turned OFF from the PLC CPU.

(2) External search status (G10300/R100)

The status at the end of the external search is output.
Refer to "External search status" for the details on status value.

410
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.5 External Search

PLC CPU → CNC CPU Interface signals

Part system No.

Signal name
$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE G+361 G+461 G+561 G+661 G+761 G+861 G+961
NO. R2461 R2561 R2661 R2761 R2861 R2961 R3061
G+362 - G+462 - G+562 - G+662 - G+762 - G+862 - G+962 -
EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM G+363 G+463 G+563 G+663 G+763 G+863 G+963
NO. R2462 - R2562 - R2662 - R2762 - R2862 - R2962 - R3062 -
R2463 R2563 R2663 R2763 R2863 R2963 R3063
G+364 - G+464 - G+564 - G+664 - G+764 - G+864 - G+964 -
EXTERNAL SEARCH G+365 G+465 G+565 G+665 G+765 G+865 G+965
SEQUENCE NO. R2464 - R2564 - R2664 - R2764 - R2864 - R2964 - R3064 -
R2465 R2565 R2665 R2765 R2865 R2965 R3065
G+366 - G+466 - G+566 - G+666 - G+766 - G+866 - G+966 -
EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO. G+367 G+467 G+567 G+667 G+767 G+867 G+967
R2466 - R2566 - R2666 - R2766 - R2866 - R2966 - R3066 -
R2467 R2567 R2667 R2767 R2867 R2967 R3067
EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D

(1) External search device No. (G+361/R2461)

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No. Be sure to set 0 for this CNC.
An error occurs if any No. except "0" is set. (Status: 3)

Device No. Device

0 Memory

(2) External search program No. (G+362/R2462, G+363/R2463)

Designate the program No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (8 digits).

(3) External search sequence No. (G+364/R2464, G+365/R2465)

Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
The setting range is 1 to 99999 (5 digits).

(4) External search block No. (G+366/R2466, G+367/R2467)

Designate the block No. as a binary.
The setting range is 0 to 99 (2 digits).

(5) External search strobe (EXTSSn:Y71D)

The CNC CPU starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.

411
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the operation search blocks are shown below.
The designated block No. is added to the operation search block No. which is searched by operation search.

Condition
Operation search block
Program No. Sequence No.
Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program
Designated Not designated (=0) Head of designated program
Not designated (=0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program
Not designated (=0) Not designated (=0) Error: 4 (Refer to "External search status")

(Example)If program No. 100, sequence No. 300 and block No. 2 are designated, operation search is executed for the
block underlined.

O100()
N0100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;
M3 S1000;
N0200 G0 Z100.;
G0 X100. Y0.;
N0300 G01 Z50. F1000;
G01 Y10.;
G01 Z0. F100; ......... (*)
G00 Z50.
N0400 G0 Z100.;
M30;

(Note) The block No. is designated with the number of blocks following the last sequence No.

412
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.5 External Search

Timing chart
The timing chart for the external search is shown below.

Block information (Note)

(PLC CPU→CNC CPU)

External search strobe

(PLC CPU→CNC CPU)

External search being executed

(CNC CPU)

External search completed

(CNC CPU→PLC CPU)

External search status Referable

(CNC CPU→PLC CPU)

(Note) Block information includes program No., sequence No. and block No.

(Note 1) Retain the external search strobe until external search finished signal is turned ON.
(Note 2) Refer to external search status to confirm that the operation search has successfully completed.

413
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

External search status

The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the CNC CPU based on the external
search is shown below.

External search
Details Remedy
status value
0 Normally finished. ────
Wait for other function's operation search to finish
1 Operation search is being carried out.
before searching.
2 Search was attempted during the program operation. Stop the program before searching.
Confirm the presence of the device, and that the
3 A non-existed or disabled device was designated.
device is within the specifications.
4 The program file is not designated. Designate the program No. or sequence No.
The block with the designated program No.,
5
sequence No. or block No. was not found. ────

6 No external search specifications Check the specifications.

The operation search did not yet finished after three Data may be being input or output. Restart the
7
seconds since the external search had started. (Note) external search after finishing the operation.

(Note) Timeout monitoring is executed only when "1" is set to "#21102 add02/bit1".

Precautions
(1) If the external search strobe is OFF at the time when CNC CPU completes the external search, the external search
finished signal ON may not be confirmed by PLC CPU.
Do not turn OFF the external search strobe signal until the external search finished signal is turned ON.
(2) Set program No., sequence No. and block No. before turning ON the external search strobe signal.
Do not change the Nos. until the external search finished signal is turned ON.
(3) External search status can only be referred when the external search finished signal is ON.
(4) Execution of external search during resetting is possible.

414
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.5 External Search

Usage example
An example of the external search ladder for the 1st part system is shown below.

(Example) Executes the operation search for the block O100 N1 B0 in CNC CPU mounted in slot 0.

External search start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 External search start pulse

External search start pulse

M8001
MOV K0 U3E0\G10361 Set external search device No.

DMOV K100 U3E0\G10362 Set external search program No. (0100)

DMOV K1 U3E0\G10364 Set external search sequence No. (N1)

DMOV K0 U3E0\G10366 Set external search block No. (B0)

M8001 X61D
Y71D Turn external search strobe signal ON
External search finished signal
Y71D

X61D
MOV U3E1\G10300 D100 Retrieve external search status
External search finished signal

(Note) Bit devices (Y71D/X61D) in the program example are set on the premise that the transfer corresponds to the
device Nos. of CNC interface.
Assignment of device Nos. may change the details of the program.

415
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the G
device for each axis.
Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC CPU rewrites G device compensation data. Necessary condition, timing,
etc., are set by PLC CPU.
The interface between PLC CPU and CNC is shown below.

G device Details G device Details

File register File register
G+1000 G+1080
Compensation data 1st axis Compensation data 9th axis
R3100 R3180
G+1010 G+1090
Compensation data 2nd axis Compensation data 10th axis
R3110 R3190
G+1020 G+1100
Compensation data 3rd axis Compensation data 11th axis
R3120 R3200
G+1030 G+1110
Compensation data 4th axis Compensation data 12th axis
R3130 R3210
G+1040 G+1120
Compensation data 5th axis Compensation data 13th axis
R3140 R3220
G+1050 G+1130
Compensation data 6th axis Compensation data 14th axis
R3150 R3230
G+1060 G+1140
Compensation data 7th axis Compensation data 15th axis
R3160 R3240
G+1070 G+1150
Compensation data 8th axis Compensation data 16th axis
R3170 R3250

(Note 1) File register Nos. correspond to CNC.

(Note 2) The delay to compensation is about (one PLC program scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and
servo follow delay are not contained.

416
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

5.7 Safety Observing

5.7.1 CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12470 - G12475
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_NC m
MODULE m R2150 - R2155

[Function
This signal informs the CNC side dual signal input status of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.
These devices are the copies of the data X200 to X25F, made by CNC’s internal processing.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module input 00

CNC side dual signal module input 01
…
CNC side dual signal module input 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module input 10

CNC side dual signal module input 11
…
CNC side dual signal module input 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

417
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12480 - G12485
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_NER m
ERROR MODULE m R2160 - R2165

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status of "CNC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module. The signal turned
ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module error 00

CNC side dual signal module error 01
…
CNC side dual signal module error 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… CNC side dual signal module error 10

CNC side dual signal module error 11
…
CNC side dual signal module error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

418
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12490 - G12492
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_NO m
OUTPUT MODULE m R2170 - R2172

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module 1 to 3.
[Operation
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.
These signals are the copies of the output signals Y200 to Y25F, made by CNC’s internal processing.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output 0A

… … CNC side dual signal module output 0B
…
CNC side dual signal module output 0F

CNC side dual signal module output 1A

CNC side dual signal module output 1B
…
CNC side dual signal module output 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12494 - G12496
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL SU_NOER
-
OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m m R2174- - R2176

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status between CNC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal
module.
The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output error 0A

… … CNC side dual signal module output error 0B
…
CNC side dual signal module output error 0F

CNC side dual signal module output error 1A

CNC side dual signal module output error 1B
…
CNC side dual signal module output error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

419
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G12499

- SU_NST2
PARE STATUS 2 R2179

[Function]
This signal informs CNC side dual signal compare status to the PLC.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Output off check error

Device test error detection 2

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.
bit1: Device test error detection 2
An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.
[Caution]
This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual
signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE G12500
- ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMA- SU_NLT
R2180

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.
[Operation]
To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check
each other.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

420
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL G12501
- SU_NST
COMPARE STATUS R2181

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison status.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side emergency stop status

CNC side dual signal module input compare error
CNC side counterpart’s signal compare stop detected
CNC side dual signal module data error detected
CNC side dual signal module output FB compare error
CNC side compare process start
CNC side compare process stopping
PLC side compare process stopping
Servo ready ON
Dual Signal Module compare ladder check normal

[Caution]
This device is for monitorting only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12502
- CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV
R2182

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal head G device No.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL G12503
- COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOW- SU_NDLY
ANCE TIME R2183

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

421
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G12504 - G12506
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_NDV m
HEAD DEVICE NO. m R2184 - R2186

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1” to “#21145 SSU_Dev3”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL UNITS G12508
- SU_NNUM
ON CNC SIDE R2188

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC of the number of dual signal modules.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

422
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU Interface signals

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2580 - G+2585
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_PC m
MODULE m R4450 - R4455

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal input status of the dual signal modules.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module input 00

PLC side dual signal module input 01
…
PLC side dual signal module input 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module input 10

PLC side dual signal module input 11
…
PLC side dual signal module input 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

423
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2590 - G+2595
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_PER m
ERROR MODULE m R4460 - R4465

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status of "PLC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module.The signal turned ON
once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

<L side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module error 00

PLC side dual signal module error 01
…
PLC side dual signal module error 0F

<H side>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

… PLC side dual signal module error 10

PLC side dual signal module error 11
…
PLC side dual signal module error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

424
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2600 - G+2602
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL
- SU_PO m
OUTPUT MODULE m R4470 - R4472

[Function]
This signal informs the PLC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module.
[Operation
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output 0A

・・・ ・・・ PLC side dual signal module output 0B
・・・
PLC side dual signal module output 0F

PLC side dual signal module output 1A

PLC side dual signal module output 1B
・・・
PLC side dual signal module output 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2604 - G+2606
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL SU_POER
-
OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m m R4474 - R4476

[Function]
This signal informs the comparison status between PLC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal
module. The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output error 0A

… … PLC side dual signal module output error 0B
…
PLC side dual signal module output error 0F

PLC side dual signal module output error 1A

PLC side dual signal module output error 1B
…
PLC side dual signal module output error 1F

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

425
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name Common for part systems
tact breviation

PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2609

- SU_PST2
PARE STATUS 2 R4479

[Function]
This signal informs PLC side dual signal compare status to the CNC.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals:
bit0: Output off check error
An error is detected during the output off check.
bit1: Device test error detection 2
An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.
[Caution]
This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual
signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
PLC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE G+2610
- ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMA- SU_PLT
TION R4480

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.
[Operation
To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check
each other.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2611
- SU_PST
PARE STATUS R4481

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison status.
[Operation]
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side emergency stop status

PLC side dual signal module input compare error
PLC side counterpart’s signal compare stop
detected
PLC side dual signal module output FB compare error
PLC side compare process start

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

426
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.7 Safety Observing

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2612
- PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV
R4482

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head G device No. that has been transmitted to the PLC.
This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- G+2613
- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE SU_PDLY
R4483

[Function
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module, which
has been transmitted to the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
G+2614 - G+2616
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD
- SU_PDV m
DEVICE NO. m R4484- - R4486

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module, which has been transmitted to
the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1” to “#21145 SSU_Dev3”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULE G+2618
- SU_PNUM
ON PLC SIDE R4488

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the number of dual signal modules, which has been transmitted to the PLC.This is for
confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.
[Operation]
The CNC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num”.
[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

427
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal name Signal Common for part systems

tact abbreviation
PLC SIDE SAFETY OPERATION G+2620
- SU_POP
STATUS R4490

[Function]
This signal informs the CNC of the safety-related operation status that has been set by PLC side user ladder when dual
signal comparison function is valid.
[Operation]
The CNC is informed of the safety-related operation status devices (M0 to M15) that have been set by PLCside user
ladder.
Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

M0 CNC emergency stop request

M1 User safety status signal 1
M2 User safety status signal 2
…
M15 User safety status signal 15

[Caution]
This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly
executed when changing.

428
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

5.8 GOT Window

GOT window interface is for displaying various NC data on GOT1000 that is connected to CNC CPU.
By commanding device read instruction, GOT can read data such as current machining program No., current machining
program and coordinate value.
Set a command to CNC CPU using GOT or PLC I/F command. Also create data that corresponds to the command on
CNC CPU side.
As the area of up to ten commands is available, up to ten commands can be designated at a same time.
The group of commands which are frequently used can be automatically set at the power ON, and it is available to refer
to the CNC data without programming. (Automatic setup window)

<Sample screen shot and command examples>

GOT
Main program Sub program

O 1 N 100 O 1 N 100
Current program
N100G91G28X0.Y0.Z0.;
N110G00X-150.Y-200.;
N120G00Z-500.;
N130G01Z-50.F500.;
N140G00Z50.;
N150G00X50.Y50.;
N160G00-Z50.F500.;
Machine position Remaining position
X 110.000 X 110.000

Y 120.000 Y 120.000

Z 130.000 Z 130.000
Spindle Standby
tool 01 tool 02
F 500 S 6000 T 5

Data displayed How to obtain these data

Current program Using command code: 0xF01
Main/Sub/O/N number Using command code: 0xF02
F command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02
S command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02
T command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02
Machine position Using command code: 0xF03
Remaining distance Using command code: 0xF03

429
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.8.1 GOT Window Interface

Outline
Assign command area to the devices from U3En\G11460 (the CNC No. 2 is from U3En\G14532) and response area to
the devices from D5600 to D6879 (devices in CNC). Designated data is set in command area, using PLC I/F command.
And then, CNC will store the designated data in response area, and this data can be read and displayed on GOT as
needed.
Maximum of ten sets of window areas have been assigned. So, up to ten types of command can be designated at a time.

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

PLC CPU CNC CPU (No. 1) CNC CPU (No. 2)

CNC parameter CNC parameter

The devices shared between #26741 = 10000 #26741 = 13072
multi-CPU

U3E0\G10000 (No. 2 head)

\G10290 Data modification request

command area
\G11460 Command 1 Process
Sequence \G11524 Command 2 window
program ：
\G12036 Command 10

Issue
command U3E0\G13072 (No. 3 head)

Set command in \G13362 Data modification request

command area. command area
\G14532 Command 1 Process
\G14596 Command 2 window
：
\G15108 Command 10

D5600 Response 1 D5600 Response 1

D5728 Response 2 D5728 Response 2
： ：
D6752 Response 10 D6752 Response 10

GOT

Read and display the data from Display Display

CNC CPU response area (from D5600). CNC No. 1 CNC No. 2

(Note 1) The head address for CNC CPU No.3 changes depending on the value set for "#26742".
Refer to the table in "Command area and response area" for the relationship between the parameter and the
address.

430
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Automatic setting window is a GOT window that can automatically set frequently-used command group when the power
is turned ON and the CNC data can be referred without programming.
The response data will be stored in the window response area accodance with the command that is automatically set.
Some of the commands can change the acquiring data by changing the argument. The command's argument can be
changed by both GOT and PLC program.
As the automatic setting window is assigned to the different area from the 10 sets of window previously mentioned, GOT
window and automatic setting window can be used in combination.
Refer to "Automatic setting window" section about the automatic setting window.

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

PLC CPU CNC CPU (No. 1) CNC CPU (No. 2)
CNC parameter
CNC parameter #26741 = 13072
The devices shared between
#26741 = 10000
multi-CPU

U3E0\G10000 (No. 2 head) Automatic setting window

Automatic setting window GOT modification interface
GOT
modification interface

Automatic setting window R4416 Coordinate value type R4416 Coordinate value type
modification interface
\G10270 R4417 data type R4417 data type
Coordinate value type
\G10271 data type : :
Sequence R4422 Modification request R4422 Modification request
U3E0\G13072 (No. 3 head)
program
\G10291 BitE: Modification request

Command
argument Automatic setting
change window process
Automatic setting window
modification interface

\G13342 Coordinate value type

\G13343 data type
： Automatic setting
\G13363 BitE: Modification request window process

D6880 Response 1 D6880 Response 1

D7008 Response 2 D7008 Response 2
: :
D8032 Response 10 D8032 Response 10

GOT

Store the command argument from GOT to CNC R4416

onwards or to U3E0/G10270 (for CNC No.2 U3E0/G13342
onwards) using the PLC program, and make modification Display Display
request. Read and display the data from CNC CPU CNC No. 1 CNC No. 2
response area.

(Note 1) The head address for CNC CPU No.3 changes depending on the value set for "#26742".
Refer to the table in "Command area and response area" for the relationship between the parameter and the
address.

431
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Command area and response area

There are ten sets each of command areas and response areas.
64 words are used for one command in the command area, and 128 words are used for one response in the response
area.
Command area is assigned to the devices shared between multi-CPU (G device). Writing command to the command
area is done by PLC program.
The response area is assigned to the D device in the CNC CPU. The response area (CNC CPU device) is monitored by
GOT.

Command area Response

Item CPU No.1 CPU No.2
Setting value for When "13072" When "14000"
10000
parameter "#26742" is set is set Items Devise
U3E0\ U3E0\ U3E0\
Head device
G10000 G13072 G14000

Window command 1 G11460 G14532 G15460 Window response 1 D5600

Window command 2 G11524 G14596 G15524 Window response 2 D5728

Window command 3 G11588 G14660 G15588 Window response 3 D5856

Window command 4 G11652 G14724 G15652 Window response 4 D5984

Window command 5 G11716 G14788 G15716 Window response 5 D6112

Window command 6 G11780 G14852 G15780 Window response 6 D6240

Window command 7 G11844 G14916 G15844 Window response 7 D6368

Window command 8 G11908 G14980 G15908 Window response 8 D6496

Window command 9 G11972 G15044 G15972 Window response 9 D6624

Window command 10 G12036 G15108 G16036 Window response 10 D6752

*G11460 is the top of command area for the first CNC CPU. * When referring the response area (CNC CPU's device)
If there are two CNC CPUs, the command area for the second CPU will change from GOT drawing data, make sure to designate the CNC
depending on the value set for "#26742". No. (2 to 4) to refer to in the CNC No. setting field. If "0"
(host CNC) is designated, it may monitor the CNC which
is not intended to do so depending on the connection state
of GOT.

432
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

5.8.2 How to Obtain Window Data

Procedure
In order for GOT to obtain NC data, firstly set necessary command in command area. And then, turn Data changeover
request signal ON.
When NC has received Data changeover request signal and finished the data changeover, Data changeover completion
signal will be turned ON.
Once Data changeover request signal is turned ON, NC will continuously create data until Data changeover request
signal is turned ON next time.
There are ten Data changeover request signals, which correspond to Window 1 through 10.

Command setting
(Ladder -> CNC)

Data changeover request

(Ladder -> CNC)

Data changeover completion

(CNC -> Ladder)

Data acquisition
(Process of GOT)

- When the command is changed, GOT cannot obtain the response data for modified command until the data
changeover completion signal is turned ON.
- When the command is not changed, turn ON the data changeover request signal only once with PLC program.
Subsequent response area will be constantly updated.

Write command and argument into command area

using ladder. And then, turn Data changeover
request signal ON.

NC receives Data changeover request signal, and

refreshes data in response area. After that, turn Data
changeover completion signal ON.

In response to Data changeover completion signal,

ladder turns OFF Data changeover request signal.

NC continuously creates data that corresponds to

designated command, and store them in response
area.

GOT reads out devices from response area.

433
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU Interface signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE- G+290 - G+291

-
OVER REQUEST R2390 - R2391

[Function]
This signal notices that necessary command is set in command area.
[Operation]
Turns ON when command data is changed.
(R2391/bitF is handled as window valid signal.)
<R2390>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Data changeover request for Window 1

・・・
Data changeover request for Window 2
・・・
Data changeover request for Window 10

<R2391>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Automatic setting window data change request

Window valid

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

Signalab-
Contact Signal name Common for part systems
breviation

GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE- G10290 - G10291

-
OVER COMPLETION R90 - R91

[Function]
This signal notices that data changeover is completed.
[Operation]
Turns ON when data changeover is completed.Turns OFF when Data changeover request signal is turned OFF.
<R90>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Data changeover completion for Window 1

・・・
Data changeover completion for Window 2
・・・
Data changeover completion for Window 10

<R91>

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Automatic setting window data change request

434
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Window command
Ten fixed sets of window command areas are used.

<Command area>

Offset Description Note

The number of bytes from the command code to the end
+0 Data size
of the argument
+1 Reserve
Window 1 +2 Command code Command code to use
+3 Reserve
Argument 1 to Configuration of the argument is different depending on
+4 to +63
Argument 30 the function
The number of bytes from the command code to the end
+64 Data size
of the argument
+65 Reserve
Window 2 +66 Command code Command code to use
+67 Reserve
Argument 1 to Configuration of the argument is different depending on
+68 to +125
Argument 30 the function
： ： ： ：
(Note 1) Offset is described in the word unit.

<Command code list>

Command code Description

0xF01 Get the current program with designating the format
0xF02 Get all modal information
0xF03 Get all axes' coordinate values
0xF04 Get the alarm message currently occurring
0xF05 Get the alarm history information

Window response
Ten fixed sets of window response areas are used.

<Response area>

Offset Description Note

The number of bytes from the command code to the end
+0 Data size
of the argument
+1 Reserve
+2 Command code Command code to use
Window 1 +3 Reserve
0: No error
+4 , +5 Error code
Other than 0: Error
Configuration of the response is different depending on
+6 to +127 Response (122 words)
the function
The number of bytes from the command code to the end
+128 Data size
of the argument
+129 Reserve
+130 Command code Command code to use
Window 2 +131 Reserve
0: No error
+132 , +133 Error code
Other than 0: Error
Configuration of the response is different depending on
+134 to +255 Response (122 words)
the function
： ： ： ：
(Note 1) Offset is described in the word unit.

435
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.8.3 Details of Command

Command code 0x0F01

Get the current program.

Example type 1:(Not to line-wrap the current program)

<Command>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 16
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F01 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack
3 Reserve 0
1: 1st part system
Argument 1: Designate the part Setting range: 1 to 7
4, 5 1
system No. (When “0” is set, it is handled as 1st
part system.)

Argument 2: Designate the number of

6, 7 5 Setting range: 1 to 10
lines in a program to get.(Note 5)

Argument 3: Designate the number of

8, 9 16 Setting range: 1 to 240
characters per line.(Note 5)

<Response>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 92 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F01 Used function code
3 Reserve 0

0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error

0: Not in operation
6, 7 Status 1
1: In operation

8 to 15 Data in 1st line N01G90G28X0.Y0.Z (Note 4)

16 to 23 Data in 2nd line N02G00X-123.456Y
24 to 31 Data in 3rd line N03M03S1000;
32 to 39 Data in 4th line N04G01Z-234.567F
40 to 47 Data in 5th line M30;

(Note 1) Offset is described in word unit.

(Note 2) Make sure the total number of characters ("the number of lines in program to be obtained" * "the number of
characters in one line") is within 240.
(Note 3) The block currently executed is always output from the 2nd line. A space (0x20) will be output for a blank
block. Thus, if not in operation, a space (0x20) will be output for the 1st and 2nd lines.
(Note 4) The number of characters which is designated with the argument 3 are output for one block before the
currently executed block (the 1st line). It is output from the head of the block. It does not line-wrap.
(Note 5) The values for the argument 2 "the number of lines in a program to get" and the argument 3 "the number of
characters in one line" should fit the actual GOT display area. Otherwise it will not be displayed correctly.

436
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Example type 2:(Line-wrap the current program)

<Command>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F01 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack
3 Reserve 0
Argument 1: Designate the part 1: $1 (1st part system)
4, 5 1
system No. 1 to 7: 1st to 7th part system

Argument 2: Designate the number of

6, 7 5 Setting range: 1 to 10
lines in a program to get. (Note 5)

Argument 3: Designate the number of

8, 9 16 Setting range: 1 to 240
characters in a line.(Note 5)

Argument 4: Designate the validation 0:Invalid

10, 11 1
of line-wrapping.(Note 5) 1:Valid

<Response>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 92 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F01 Used function code
3 Reserve 0

0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error

0: Not in operation
1: In operation
6, 7 Status 0x0006
It displays the operation status of
each line for each bit. (Note 7)
8 to 15 Data in 1st line N01G90G28X0.Y0.Z (Note 4)
16 to 23 Data in 2nd line N02G00X-123.456Y (Note 6)
24 to 31 Data in 3rd line -123.456;
32 to 39 Data in 4th line N03M03S1000;
40 to 47 Data in 5th line N04G01Z-234.567F (Note 6)

(Note 1) Offset is described in word unit.

(Note 2) Make sure the total number of characters (“the number of lines in program to be obtained” * “the number of
characters in one line”) is within 240.
(Note 3) The block currently executed is always output to the second line. A space (0x20) will be output for a blank
block. Thus, if not in operation, a space (0x20) will be output for the 1st and 2nd lines.
(Note 4) The number of characters which is designated with the argument 3 are output for one block before the
currently executed block (the 1st line). It is output from the head of the block. It does not line-wrap.
(Note 5) The values for the argument 2 "the number of lines in a program to get" and the argument 3 "the number of
characters in one line" should fit the actual GOT display area. Otherwise it will not be displayed correctly.
(Note 6) When the argument 4 is set to "1", from the program block currently executed is output with line-wrap. But it
might not be display till the end of the block (;).
(Note 7) For example, if the block currently executed is line-wrapped and displayed in 2 lines, the status will be output
as follows. The status can be used to differentiate the block currently executed by changing the display color.

BIT F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Line position 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

The status output example described in the above shows that the program which is output in line 2 and 3 are
being executed.

437
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Command code 0x0F02

Get all modal information.

Example
<Command>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 8
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F02 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack
3 Reserve 0
1: 1st part system
Argument 1: Designate the part Setting range: 1 to 7
4, 5 1
system No. (When “0” is set, it is handled as 1st
part system.)
Offset is described in the word unit.

<Response>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 190 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F02 Used function code
3 Reserve 0

0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error

S1 modal in 8 digits (ASCII)

6 to 9 S1 modal "1200 "
S1 is output regardless of part system
10 to 13 T modal "13 " T modal in 8 digits (ASCII)
14 to 18 F modal "1200.00 " FA modal in 10 digits (ASCII)
"01 17 91 94 "
"21 40 49 80 " G modal of each group (ASCII)
19 to 48 G modal
"98 54 64 67 " One group is output in 4 characters
"97 50.1 43.1 "
0: No alarm message
49 NC status 1 0
1: Alarm message
When there isn't alarm message: ST1 to
ST8 will be output in ASCII
50 to 68 NC status 2 "LSK mm INC G40 G54"
When there is alarm message: Message
will be output in up to 33 characters
69 to 72 Main program No. "100 " Main program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)
Main program sequence No. in 8 digits
73 to 76 Main sequence No. "110 "
(ASCII)
77 to 80 Sub program No. "9990 " Sub program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)
Sub program sequence No. in 8 digits
81 to 84 Sub sequence No. "200 "
(ASCII)
S2 modal in 8 digits (ASCII)
85 to 88 S2 modal "2000 "
S2 is output regardless of part system
89 to 92 Current program No. "9990 " Current program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)
Sequence No. of the program Sequence No. of the program currently
93 to 96 "200 "
currently executed executed in 8 digits (ASCII)
Offset is described in the word unit.
The F modal value will be without override.
NC alarm message language is set by the NC parameter "#1043 lang".
(Note) If the "#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

438
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Command code 0x0F03

Get all axes' coordinate values.
The part system No. and the axis No. of NC axis that the coordinate value is to be get can be designated. After getting
the coordinate value of NC axis, the coordinate values of all mounted PLC axes will be obtained. Designating the type of
coordinate value is valid for NC axis and PLC axis.
There are three types of response store methods - binary type, character string type, and extended character string type.
In binary type, the coordinate value can be obtained with two words signed numerical value. The unit is interpolation unit
(Note).
In character string type, it can be obtained with six words character string.
In extended character string type, it can be obtained with seven words character string. The axis state information, such
as the zero point arrival, is added to the character string.
There is no need to convert the unit for character string type and extended character string type. Select the type of
response with command "Argument4: Data type". See below for a store method of each data type.
(Note) Binary type is stored with interpolation unit.
When command unit is "1μm", the interpolation unit is "0.5μm". The value of response divided by 2 is the
coordinate value [μm].
When command unit is "0.1μm", the interpolation unit is "0.05μm". The value of response divided by 2 is the
coordinate value[0.1μm].

Example of getting the machine value(Getting in binary)

<Command>
Designate "0:Binary type" to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition
3 Reserve 0
1: 1st part system
Argument 1: Designate the part Setting range: 1 to 7
4, 5 1
system No. (When “0” is set, it is handled as 1st part
system.)
BIT0: 1st axis
BIT1: 2nd axis
6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 7 …
If no axis is designated, all axes will be
got.
NC axis PLC axis
0 Machine value Machine value
1 Current value No data obtained
Argument 3: Designate the type of 2 Workpiece No data obtained
8, 9 0
coordinate value coordinate value
3 Remaining Remaining
commands commands
4 Next command No data obtained
0 : Binary type
1 : Character string type (ASCII)
10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 0
2 : Extended character string
type(ASCII)
Offset is described in the word unit

439
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

<Response>
Designate "0:Binary type" to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 68 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F03 Used function code
3 Reserve 0
0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error
Up to 11 ASCII characters. Aligned to
right, and if not all the prepared digits
6, 7 Coordinate value of 1st axis 20000 (0x4E20) are used, spaces will fill the blank
digits. The last character will always
be space.
8, 9 Coordinate value of 2nd axis -24690 (0xFFFF9F8E)
10, 11 Coordinate value of 3rd axis 1000 (0x3E8)
12, 13 Coordinate value of 4th axis 0
14, 15 Coordinate value of 5th axis 0
16, 17 Coordinate value of 6th axis 0
18, 19 Coordinate value of 7th axis 0
20, 21 Coordinate value of 8th axis 0
Response example when there are
22, 23 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value 6000 (0xBB8)
five PLC axes.
24, 25 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value 1000 (0x3E8)
26, 27 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value 20000 (0x4E20)
28, 29 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value 150000 (0x249F0)
30, 31 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value 4000 (0xFA0)
32, 33 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value 0
34, 35 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value 0
36, 37 PLC axis 8th axis coordinate value 0
Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register (0xFFFF9F8E (-024690))

+0 9F8E
+1 FFFF

(Note) Binary type is store with interpolation unit.

When command unit is "1μm", the interpolation unit is "0.5μm". The value of response devided by 2
is the coordinate value [μm].
When command unit is "0.1μm", the interpolation unit is "0.05μm". The value of response devided by
2 is the coordinate value [0.1μm].

<Note>
- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be
returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)
- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC
axis is stored in later than offset 22. (Offset unit is word)
- The blank digits will be stored for the response area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to
acquire.

440
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Example of getting the machine value (Getting in the character string type)
<Command>
Designate "1:Character string type (ASCII) to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition
3 Reserve 0
1: 1st part system
Argument 1: Designate the part Setting range: 1 to 7
4, 5 1
system No. (When “0” is set, it is handled as 1st part
system.)
BIT0: 1st axis
BIT1: 2nd axis
6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 3 …
If no axis is designated, all axes will be
got.
NC axis PLC axis
0 Machine value Machine value
1 Current value No data obtained
Argument 3: Designate the type of 2 Workpiece No data obtained
8, 9 0
coordinate value coordinate value
3 Remaining Remaining
commands commands
4 Next command No data obtained
0 : Binary type
1 : Character string type (ASCII)
10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 1
2 : 2:Extended character string
type(ASCII)
Offset is described in the word unit

441
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

<Response>
Designate "1:Character string type (ASCII) to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 188 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F08 Used function code
3 Reserve 0
0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error
Up to 11 ASCII characters.
Aligned to right, and if not all the
6 to 11 Coordinate value of 1st axis " -12345.678 " prepared digits are used, spaces will
fill the blank digits. The last character
will always be space.
12 to 17 Coordinate value of 2nd axis " -12345.678 "
18 to 23 Coordinate value of 3rd axis " "
24 to 29 Coordinate value of 4th axis " "
30 to 35 Coordinate value of 5th axis " "
36 to 41 Coordinate value of 6th axis " "
42 to 47 Coordinate value of 7th axis " "
48 to 53 Coordinate value of 8th axis " "
Response example when there are
54 to 59 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "
five PLC axes.
60 to 65 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "
66 to 71 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "
72 to 77 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "
78 to 83 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "
84 to 89 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value " "
90 to 95 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value " "
96 to 101 PLC axis 8th axis coordinate value " "
Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register (-123.456)

bit15 ------------------------ bit8 bit7 ------------------------ bit0

+0 "" ""
+1 "-" ""
+2 "2" "1"
+3 "." "3"
+4 "5" "4"
+5 "" "6"

<Note>
- When the data type is character string type, the diameter value will be displayed for the diameter specification
axis.
- When the data type is character string type, "*" will be displayed if the coordinate value exceeds 8 digits. (e.g.)
*****.***
- When the data type is character string, unit conversion is not required.
- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be
returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)
- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC
axis is stored in later than offset 54.(Offset unit is word)
- The blank digits will be stored for the response area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to
acquire.

442
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Example of getting the machine value (Getting in the extended character string type)
<Command>
Designate "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" to "Argument 4

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition
3 Reserve 0
1: 1st part system
Argument 1: Designate the part Setting range: 1 to 7
4, 5 1
system No. (When “0” is set, it is handled as 1st part
system.)
BIT0: 1st axis
BIT1: 2nd axis
6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 3 …
If no axis is designated, all axes will be
got.
NC axis PLC axis
0 Machine value Machine value
1 Current value No data obtained
Argument 3: Designate the type of 2 Workpiece No data obtained
8, 9 0
coordinate value coordinate value
3 Remaining Remaining
commands commands
4 Next command No data obtained
0 : Binary type
1 : Character string type (ASCII)
10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 2
2 : Extended character string
type(ASCII)
Offset is described in the word unit

443
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

<Response>
Designate "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" to "Argument 4: Data type"

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 248 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F03 Used function code
3 Reserve 0
0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error
Maximum of 13 characters of ASCII
Stored by right alignment and spaces
6 to 13 Coordinate value of 1st axis "-12345.678 #1"
will be inserted if there are not
enough digits.
14 to 21 Coordinate value of 2nd axis "-12345.678 #2"
22 to 29 Coordinate value of 3rd axis " "
30 to 37 Coordinate value of 4th axis " "
38 to 45 Coordinate value of 5th axis " "
46 to 53 Coordinate value of 6th axis " "
54 to 61 Coordinate value of 7th axis " "
62 to 69 Coordinate value of 8th axis " "
This is a response example when the
70 to 77 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value "-12345.678 ]["
PLC axes have 5 axes.
78 to 85 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "
86 to 93 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "
94 to 101 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "
102 to 109 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "
110 to 117 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value " "
118 to 125 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value " "
Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register(-123.456 #1)

bit15 ------------------------ bit8 bit7 ------------------------ bit0

+0 "" ""
+1 "-" ""
+2 "2" "1"
+3 "." "3"
+4 "5" "4"
+5 "" "6"
+6 "1" "#"
+7 "" ""

Axis state when "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" is designated as a data type is as follows:
1) Zero point arrival: #1, #2, #3, #4 (# is a zero point arrival No.)
2) Axis detachment: ><
3) Servo OFF: ][
4) Mirror image: MR
5) Others: (Space)

444
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

<Precautions>
- When the data type is character string type, the diameter value will be displayed for the diameter specification
axis.
- When the data type is character string type, "*" will be displayed if the coordinate value exceeds 8 digits. (e.g.)
*****.***
- When the data type is character string, unit conversion is not required.
- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be
returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)
- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC
axis is stored in later than offset 70. (Offset unit is word)
- Space will be stored for theresponse area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to acquire.
- The axis state which is eligible to acquire from PLC axis is only servo OFF.
- When the data type is extended character string type, the coordinate values for the PLC axis 8th axis cannot
be obtained.

445
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Command code 0x0F04

Get the currently occurring alarm messages. It is possible to designate how many messages to get (up to five). The
messages will be got in priority order.
The language of NC alarm/stop code will follow the NC parameter #1043 lang.
(Note) If the ""#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

Example
<Command>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 16
1 Reserve 0
Designate
2 Command code 0x0F04
melGetCurrentAlarmMsg2
3 Reserve 0
0: All part systems
Argument 1: Designate the part 1: 1st part system
4, 5 1
system No. 2: 2nd part system
Setting range: 0 to 7

Argument 2: Designate the number of

6, 7 5 Setting range: 1 to 5
messages to get

bit0: NC alarm
bit1: Stop code
8, 9 Argument 3: Alarm type to get 0x7 Bit2 :Macro alarm message
Alarm message to which
corresponding bit is ON is acquired.
Offset is described in the word unit.

<Response>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 252 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F04 Used function code
3 Reserve 0

0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error

The number of messages there were

6 to 7 The number of messages got 2 got. (The number of alarms currently
occurring.)
8 to 10 Alarm code (1) 0x003300520700 Refer to the code list.
"S03 Servo alarm:PR 0052 Aligned to left. In the blank area,
11 to 31 Alarm message (1)
XYZ $1" spaces (0x20) will go in.
32 to 34 Alarm code (2) 0x000100000000
35 to 55 Alarm message (2) "EMG EXIN $1"
56 to 58 Alarm code (3) 0x000000000000 If there is no alarm, it will be 0.
If there is no alarm, it will be NULL
59 to 79 Alarm message (3) NULL
(0).
80 to 82 Alarm code (4) 0x000000000000
83 to 103 Alarm message (4) NULL
104 to 106 Alarm code (5) 0x000000000000
107 to 127 Alarm message (5) NULL
Offset is described in the word unit.

446
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

(1) Message format

NC alarm and stop codes will be in the following format.
Length of each message is fixed to 21 words (42 characters).
- NC alarm/Stop code
[When the error No.1 is 4 characters]
Message (20 characters)+sp+Error No. 1 (4 characters)+sp+ Error No. 2 (8 characters)+sp+$1 (2
characters)+sp (5 characters)
[When the error No.1 is 5 characters]
Message (20 characters)+sp+Error No.1(5 characters)+sp+Error No.2(7 characters)+sp+$1(2
characters)+sp(5 characters)
- Macro alarm message
Message (30 characters) + sp (2 characters) + No. (4 characters) + sp (6 characters)

(2) Alarm code

NC alarm and stop code that is displayed on the NC screen will be coded in three words.

S03 Servo alarm:PR 0052 XZ

Axis name
Alarm No.
Alarm message
Alarm type

00000000 00110011 00000000 01010010 00000101 00000000

PLC axis name Alarm type Alarm No. Servo axis name Spindle name

Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
As for servo axis name, spindle
2nd axis 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 name and PLC axis name, bit that
3rd axis 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 corresponds with the axis with the
4th axis 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 alarm will be ON.
5th axis 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 When more than one axis has alarm,
6th axis 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 more than one bit will be ON.
7th axis 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8th axis 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Note 1) The alarm message will not be changed into code.

(Note 2) When the alarm number is 5-digits, "10xxx" - "15xxx" are set in the alarm No. area as "Axxx" - "Fxxx", but it will
not be set correctly if the alarm No. is bigger than "16xxx".
(Note 3) If the alarm with no alarm No. occurs, the alarm No. area is set to "0".
(Note 4) If the alarm with no axis name occurs, the axis name area is set to "0".
(Note 5) The alarm not in the alarm code table occurs, it will not be set in the alarm code.
(Note 6) "xxx" of a program error "Pxxx" will be set in the alarm No. area.

447
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

(3) List of alarm code

Alarm types and alarm Nos. are as follows.

Alarm Details Alarm type Axis name Priority

Multi-CPU error A01 MULTI CPU ERROR A1 Not added 1
Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL 55
Z71 DETECTOR ERROR 56
Z72 COMPARE ERROR 57
System alarm Some are added 2
Z73 ABS. WARNING 58
Z89 APLC ERROR 58
Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 5C
S01 SERVO ALARM: PR 31
S02 INIT PARAM ERR 32
Servo/spindle alarm Added 3
S03 SERVO ALARM: NR 33
S04 SERVO ALARM: AR 36
Y02 System alarm 41
Y03 Amp. Unequipped 42
Y06 mcp_no setting error 49
Y07 Too many axes connected 43
MCP alarm Some are added 4
Y09 Too many axisno connected 4A
Y11 Node detect error 4B
Y14 VIR.AX AMP EQU. 4F
Y20 Safety observation error 4C
L10 DN Initialization error 1 B1
L11 DN Initialization error 2 B2
Network related alarm Not added 5
L12 DN Link error B3
L13 DN Message error B4
Emergency stop EMG EMERGENC 01 Not added 6
P ○○○ (Program error) 71
Program error Not added 7
P990 PREPRO S/W ERR 61
S51 PARAMETER ERROR 34
Servo/spindle warning Added 8
S52 SERVO WARNING 35
Y51 Parameter error 45
MCP warning Y21 Safety observation warning 4E 9
Y90 No spindle signal 47
Z30 ETHERNET ERROR 51
Z52 BATTERY FAULT 52
Z53 TEMP_OVER 53
System warning Not added 10
Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT 54
Z59 TIME CONSTANT 59
Z20 Power ON again 5A
M01 OPERATION ERROR 11 Some are added
Operation error M00 AUX OPER. ALM. 81 Not added 11
M01 AUX OPER. ALM. 82 Added
T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST 21
T02 FEED HOLD 22
Stop code Not added 12
T03 BLOCK STOP 23
T10 FIN WAIT 26
Illegal PLC U10 Built-in PLC alarm 91 Not added 13

The highest priority is on the alarm with the priority number 1.

448
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Emergency stop messages are changed into codes as follows.

Error message Details Alarm No.

EXIN External emergency stop 0000
PLC Built-in PLC emergency stop 0001
SRV Servo drive unit not ready 0002
STOP PLC not running 0003
SPIN Spindle drive unit not ready 0004
DATA File area error 0005
PARA Door open II fixed device setting illegal 0006

Emergency stop STP2 Built-in PLC not running 0007

(EMG) LAD Built-in PLC illegal code 0010
MULT Q and Qr bus alarm 0013
IPWD Illegal power down 0014
CVIN PS external emergency stop 0015
MCT Contactor shutoff test 0016
SUIN Emergency stop in the safety circuit 0017
LINK Network unit error 0018
APLC Emergency stop is set from APLC function 0019

Command code 0x0F05

Get the current program with designating the format.

(1) Content of alarm history

- Get the alarm history information in the NC
- From among the history data that is displayed on the NC's "Operation history" screen, get the NC alarm history.
- In getting, history data is sorted in reverse chronological order
- In the NC, up to 168 alarms can be stored. If more alarms occur, older alarms will be deleted
- Stop code isn't stored in the operation history
- Of NC alarms, following alarms aren't stored in the operation history
M01 OPERATION ERROR 0004 (External interlock axis exists)
M01 OPERATION ERROR 0005 (Internal interlock axis exists)
M01 OPERATION ERROR 0109 (Block start interlock)
M01 OPERATION ERROR 0110 (Cutting block start interlock)

(2) Message format of alarm history

Length of each message is fixed to 60 characters.
Blanks in the message will be filled with space code.
07/01/01 sp 13:59:02 sp P153 Compensation interference sp sp … $1 sp sp sp
Y/M/D H:M:S Message

8 1 8 1 42
Part system No. ($1, $2, etc) will be at the 38th and 39th characters in the message.
In the case of the system with one part system, part system No. will be sp+sp.
NC alarm message language is set by the NC parameter "#1043 lang".
(Note) If the ""#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

(3) How to use

Get M history items from the Nth item from the latest item. (M= The number of items to get.) However, due to the
size limitation of the response area, how may items to get at a time is also limited.
Up to four items can be got at a time.
Thus, in order to get all the alarm history in the NC, it is necessary to get by up to 42 times.

449
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Example
<Command>

Setting
Offset Description Note
example
0 Data size 12
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F05 Designate melGetAlarmHistory
3 Reserve 0

0: Start with the latest item

1: Start with the second item from the
Argument 1:Head item No. of history items latest one
4, 5 10
to get 2: Start with the third item from the latest
one
…

6, 7 Argument 2:The number of items to get 4 Setting range: 1 to 4

Offset is described in the word unit. <Response>

<Response>

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 252 The number of bytes
1 Reserve 0
2 Command code 0x0F05 Used function code
3 Reserve 0

0: No error
4, 5 Error code 0
Other than 0: Error

The number of history The number of history items there

6,7 3
items got were got.
8 to 37 Alarm history (1) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "
38 to 67 Alarm history (2) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "
68 to 97 Alarm history (3) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "
If there is no alarm history, it will be
98 to 127 Alarm history (4) " "
space.
Offset is described in the word unit.

450
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

5.8.4 Automatic setting window

Description of automatic setting window

Automatic setting window, which has ten sets of area as shown below, sets pre-establised command automatically when
the power is turned ON.
2-part system’s window (window No. 6 to 10) is not valid for 1-part system. (Null is entered in all the response area.)

No. Command description Part system Details

Machine coordinate value package
1 acquisition (all axes within the 1-part
system) 0xF03 Designate ASCII output
Remaining distance package acquisition
2
(all axes within the 1-part system) 1-part system
3 Modal information package acquisition 0xF02
4 Acquisition of currently running program 0xF01 Designate 48 words × 5 rows
Acquisition of alarm message which is
5 0xF04 The number of messages = 5
occurring
Machine coordinate value package
6 acquisition (all axes within the 2-part
system) 0xF03
Remaining distance package acquisition
7
(all axes within the 2-part system) 2-part system Same as above
8 Modal information package acquisition 0xF02
9 Acquisition of currently running program 0xF01
Acquisition of alarm message which is
10 0xF04
occurring

Window response area

The window response area is assigned in NC as shown below.Direct reference from GOT is possible.

No. Response area’s device

1 D6880
2 D7008
3 D7136
4 D7264
5 D7392
6 D7520
7 D7648
8 D7776
9 D7904
10 D8032

451
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Automatic setting window’s command change

Fixed value is set for automatic setting windows command details, however it is possible to change a part of the value
after it was set.
The followings explain the contens which can be changed.

Command details Changeable argument Setting details Default value

1 Machine value
2 Current value
3 Work coordinate value
Type of output coordinate 1: Machine value
4 Remaining command
Package acquisition of Machine 5 Next command
coordinate values - -
1 Interpolation unit
2 Character string (AXCII) 3: Extended
Data type
Extended character string character string
3
(AXCII)
Number of blocks 5 1 to 10 5 blocks
Acquisition of running program Number of characters
48 1 to 240 48 characters
inside the block
Number of messages 5 1 to 5 5 Messages
Bit0: NC alarm
Obtaining the message during the
bit1: Stop code Bit0: NC alarm
alarm Type of message 1
*When “3”is set, both of only
them are obtained.

The range of changeable setting value depends on the setting range of arguments of each command.
The value is changed for both 1st and 2nd part systems.
When one of the value is changed all the setting values needs to be set. When "0" is set, it does not need to be changed.
Keep in mind that the arguments of machine coordinate value packet acquisition do not mach with the data in the actual
command.
When changing the machine coordinate value packeage acquision, data type of the remaining distance packeage
acquisition’s window is also changed.
When the value outside the specification range is set, the error occurs for the response area window. Normal response is
output by changing the value and removing the error.
(Note) Acquiring the currently executed program in the automatic setting window does not line-wrap and is fixed type.
If the line-wrap is required, use the standard GOT window.

452
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.8 GOT Window

Changing the command from GOT

Write a value to change directory to the device in NC to change the command detail from GOT.
Interfaces for change are shown below.

Device in NC Details of interface

R4416 Type of output coordinate value
R4417 Data type of output coordinate value
R4418 Number of output blocks of running program
R4419 Number of characters in the block of running program
R4420 Number of messages output
R4421 Type of message output
R4422 Change request (write“1”when required)

Timing chart of changing details of command from GOT is shown below.

Follow the order of this timing chart and make sure that the change request is written at the end.

R4416∼R4421 Update from GOT

Modified value
Write from GOT
R4422 0 1 0
Modification request

GOT window
CNC CPU updates the setting value
command

GOT window
response

453
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Changing the command from PLC

Write a value to change via shared device to change the command detail from PLC.
Interfaces for change are shown in the table below.
These interfaces of the NC internal device is same as the NC internal device that is written directory from GOT (refer to
“Changing the command from GOT”).
Updating during the first scan (such as the condition of SM402) from PLC, control for updating because of the change
request is not required. In this case, the command details can be changed by writing the details of changing in G+270 to
G+275. (When detals of G+270 to G+275 are all zero, command changing is not executed.)

Shared device Details of interface

G+270 Type of output coordinate value
G+271 Data type of output coordinate value
G+272 Number of output blocks of running program
G+273 Number of characters in the block of running program
G+274 Number of messages output
G+275 Type of message output
G+291 bite: Change request

Timing chart of changing details of command from PLC is shown below.

Follow the order of this timing chart and make sure that the change request is turned ON at the end.

G+271∼G+276
Update from PLC
Modified value

G+291/BITE
Modification request

GOT window CNC CPU updates the setting value

command

G10291/BITE
Modification complete

GOT window
response output

5.8.5 Error code for each command code

Command code Error No. Error description

0x0F01 0x80050C93 The number of characters of No. of block x 1 block are over 240.
0x0F02 0x80040190 Part system is out of range.
Either part system or axis is out of range.
0x0F03 0x80040190 The coordinate value type is out of range.
The data type is out of range.
Part system is out of range.
0x0F04 0x80040190
The alarm type is out of range.
The head number of history data acquired is out of range (other than 0
0x0F05 0x80040190 to 167).
The number of history data acquired is out of range (1 to 4).

454
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.9 PLC Constants

5.9 PLC Constants

The parameters #6301 to #6348 can be used as PLC constants.
The setting range is ±8 digits (-99999999 to 99999999)
When the data is set while the parameters #6301 to #6348 are displayed, the set data is set in the file register and
backed up.
If the data is set at R register from the PLC side, the screen display will not change. To change the display,
move to another screen and then select the PLC constants screen.

Sharing G device Internal R register

＃
(HIGH side) (LOW side) (HIGH side) (LOW side)
6301 G12521 G12520 R4501 R4500
6302 G12523 G12522 R4503 R4502
6303 G12525 G12524 R4505 R4504
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
6347 G12613 G12612 R4593 R4592
6348 G12615 G12614 R4595 R4594
(1) Parameter input/output
The PLC constant data can be input and output with the CNC data.
PLC constants are output with N6301 to N6348.

455
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.10 PLC bit selection

There are 96 parameters, #6401 to #6469, that can be used for PLC bit selection.
#6401 to #6448 (48 parameters) are for user open area and their interfaces are as follows.
Only reference is possible from the PLC.
#6449 to #6496 are interlocked with the NC system and applications are fixed. CNC performance is changed by setting
the value.
They are set by turning ON/OFF of each bit.

＃ Sharing G device Internal R register

6401 (Low order side) (Low order side)
G12616 R4600
6402 (High order side) (High order side)
6403 (Low order side) (Low order side)
G12617 R4601
6404 (High order side) (High order side)
6405 (Low order side) (Low order side)
G12618 R4602
6406 (High order side) (High order side)
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
6447 (Low order side) (Low order side)
G12663 R4623
6448 (High order side) (High order side)
(1) Parameter input/output
The PLC bit selection data can be input and output with the CNC data input/output operation.
The PLC bit selection data can be input and output with N64011 to N6496.

456
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

5.11 Chopping
This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of the program operation when workpiece
contours are to be cut.
There are two types of command for the chopping function: a command by the machining program and a command by a
signal from the PLC. Use "#1323 chopsel (chopping command method)" to select which command to choose for the
chopping function.

(a) (b)

(c)

(a) Grindstone
(b) Chopping operation
(c) Workpiece

457
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.11.1 Interface with PLC

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10380 G10480 G10580 G10680 G10780 G10880 G10980
- CHOPPING STATUS
R180 R280 R380 R480 R580 R680 R780

[Function] [Operation]
The state of chopping operation is output as each bit information.

BIT Name Description

It turns ON during the chopping operation regardless of either with chopping by the external
0 In chopping start
signal or by the command from the machining program.
It turns ON at the start of chopping command (G81.1 or chopping signal ON).
1 In chopping mode After issuing the chopping complete command (G80 or chopping signal OFF) and then
completing the basic position return, it turns OFF.
While the compensation operation is executed during the chopping operation, it turns ON as
the difference between the position of upper dead point/bottom dead point and the feedback
2 Stroke compensation completion
position has reached less than the tolerance specified with the parameter.
If change, such as the movement stop, operation parameter change etc., occurs, it turns OFF.
Check the setting of operation parameter at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid
signal, and turn it OFF if there is any abnormality. Correct the setting detail, and check it again
3 Chopping designation error
at the rising edge of the chipping parameter valid signal. If there is no abnormality, turn it OFF.
Refer to the alarm No. for the detail of the abnormality.
Reading the operation parameter inside the NC completes at the rising edge of the chopping
Chopping start preparation parameter valid signal, and turn it ON when the operation of the designated parameter is valid.
4
completion Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming this signal is ON.
When the chopping parameter valid signal turned OFF, this signal will also turn OFF.
Even the compensation operation is executed using the memorized compensation amount
with the playback mode of fixed compensation amount method, it turns ON if the difference
between the command position and the feedback position exceeds the tolerance. If the
5 Playback mode error over
difference is within the tolerance, it turns OFF.
Set with the parameter to use the compensation value sequential update type for changing the
compensation amount when the error amount exceeds the tolerance.
It turns ON when the measurement of compensation amount is completed in the record mode
Compensation memorize of fixed compensation amount method. The compensation amount is the difference between
6
complete the command position and the feedback position and should be within the tolerance.
It turns OFF at the completion of chopping operation of the record mode.
Compensation memorize The error amount cannot be within the tolerance even chopping operation with fixed
7
incomplete compensation method is executed 50 times succession.
8 to F Not used
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping (CHPS)
(2) Chopping parameter valid

458
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10381 G10481 G10581 G10681 G10781 G10881 G10981
- CHOPPING ERROR NO.
R181 R281 R381 R481 R581 R681 R781

[Function]
When the alarm occurs during the chopping operation by the external signal or at the rising edge of the chopping
parameter valid signal, the alarm content will be notified to the PLC.
[Operation]
The relationship between the chopping error No. and its content is shown below.

Error No. Description Classification

0 No error -
1 Number of cycles for chopping is zero. (Operates when the number of cycles is 1) A
(Chopping axis feed rate) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)
2 A
(Feed rate is clamped at the cutting feed clamp speed.)
(Acceleration of chopping axis) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed time constant)
3 A
(Feed rate is clamped at (cutting feed clamp speed) / (cutting feed time constant))
(Number of cycles for chopping) > (1000/min)
4 A
(The number of cycles for chopping is clamped at 1000/min.)
5 Chopping axis zero point return is not completed. B
6 Chopping override is zero B
7 Commanded axis is the chopping axis. B
8 The bottom dead point position is zero. B
9 Chopping axis is a manual feed axis. B
10 Interlock B
11 Stored stroke limit or stroke end B
20 No chopping specification. -
22 Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface. C
23 Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter. C
26 Data No. of chopping control data is out of range. C
"#2081 chclsp" (chopping clamp speed) and "#2002 clamp" (cutting clamp speed) for chopping axis
27 C
are both set to "0".
Chopping axis was changed during the chopping operation.
28 C
(Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping.)
29 The rotary axis is designated as a chopping axis. C
31 Chopping command is executed by PLC when selecting the chopping by G command. C

Classificati The error is retained during chopping operation.

on A The alarm is removed after the alarm factor is removed.
Classificati
The error is cleared after the alarm factor is removed, or when the NC is reset.
on B
Classificati
It does not enter into the chopping mode.
on C
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping (CHPS)
(2) Chopping parameter valid

459
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G10382 G10482 G10582 G10682 G10782 G10882 G10982
- CHOPPING AXIS
R182 R282 R382 R482 R582 R682 R782

[Function]
The axis which is in the chopping operation is output.
[Operation]
The axis which is in the chopping operation turns ON regardless of either by PLC command or by machining program
command.
It turns OFF when the chopping mode is removed.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis
: :
bit7: 8th axis
bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)
[Related signals]
(1) In chopping mode

460
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
A CHOPPING CHPSn Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA

[Function]
This validates the chopping function by external signal.
[Operation]
The chopping operation is started at the rising edge of this signal and terminated at the falling edge of this signal.
This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
CHOPPING PARAMETER VAL-
A Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB
ID

[Function]
This validates the chopping operation parameter by the external signal.
[Operation]
(1) The chopping operation parameter is valid at the rising edge of this signal.
The chopping operation parameters include the following.
(a) Compensation method selection
(b) Operation mode selection
(c) Rapid traverse override valid
(d) Chopping axis selection
(e) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(f) Bottom dead point position designation (L)(H)
(g) Number of cycles designation
(h) Data No.
(2) This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.
(3) Chopping operation parameter can be changed with this signal during chopping operation.
[Related signals]
(1) Compensation method selection
(2) Operation mode selection
(3) Rapid traverse override valid
(4) Chopping axis selection
(5) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(6) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)
(7) Number of cycles designation
(8) Data No.
(9) Chopping status

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
COMPENSATION METHOD SE-
A Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC
LECTION

[Function]
The compensation method of the chopping by external signal is selected.
[Operation]
0: The compensation amount sequential update method
1: The fixed compensation amount method
The selection with this signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

461
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
OPERATION MODE SELEC-
A Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE
TION

[Function]
The operation mode is selected when the fixed compensation amount method is selected in the compensation method of
the chopping operation with eternal signal.
[Operation]
0: Playback mode
1: Record mode
This selects the operation mode, when the fixed compensation amount method from the chopping operation's
compensation method by the external signal, is selected.
When the compensation value sequential update method is selected as a compensation method, this signal will be
ignored.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
A Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF
VALID

[Function]
This sets the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the motion speed between basic point and the upper dead
point.
[Operation]
0: Invalid
1: Valid
When this signal is OFF, the axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate regardless of the designation of the rapid traverse
override.
This signal will not be switched at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal or in the the chopping operation
where the G81.1 command is issued.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
G+380 G+480 G+580 G+680 G+780 G+880 G+980
- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOVn
R2480 R2580 R2680 R2780 R2880 R2980 R3080

[Function]
The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100% (1% increment).
[Operation]
(1) Only the chopping override is valid for the chopping operation. However, valid or invalid of the rapid traverse override
can be selected for the rapid traverse between the basic position and the upper dead point.
(2) The chopping override is set between 0 and 100% in a 1% increment. If a value outside the range from 0 to 100% is
set, the override will be clamped at 100%.
(3) If the "Chopping override" signal is set to "0", "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0150" will occur.
(4) The value is set in binary.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

462
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation
G+381 G+481 G+581 G+681 G+781 G+881 G+981
- CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION
R2481 R2581 R2681 R2781 R2881 R2981 R3081

[Function]
The axis to operate chopping is set when the chopping is commanded by the external signal.
[Operation]
When chopping is commanded by the external signal, "1" is set to a corresponding bit of the axis to operate chopping.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis
: :
bit7: 8th axis
bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

If two or more bit are designated, the lowest number axis will be selected.
The axis designation with this signal is valid in the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method
and the fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA- G+382 G+482 G+582 G+682 G+782 G+882 G+982
-
TION (L) R2482 R2582 R2682 R2782 R2882 R2982 R3082

UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA- G+383 G+483 G+583 G+683 G+783 G+883 G+983
-
TION (H) R2483 R2583 R2683 R2783 R2883 R2983 R3083

[Function]
The upper dead point is set when chopping is commanded by external signal.
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
tact breviation

LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG- G+384 G+484 G+584 G+684 G+784 G+884 G+984
-
NATION (L) R2484 R2584 R2684 R2784 R2884 R2984 R3084
LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG- G+385 G+485 G+585 G+685 G+785 G+885 G+985
-
NATION (H) R2485 R2585 R2685 R2785 R2885 R2985 R3085

[Function]
The bottom dead point of when chopping is commanded by the external signal is set with the increment amount from the
upper dead point.
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

463
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system

NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIG- G+386 G+486 G+586 G+686 G+786 G+886 G+986
-
NATION R2486 R2586 R2686 R2786 R2886 R2986 R3086

[Function]
The speed when chopping is commanded by external signal is set with the number of cycles in one minute. [Number of
cycles/min]
[Operation]
The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the
fixed compensation amount method.
The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- Signal ab- 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part
Signal name
tact breviation system system system system system system system
G+387 G+487 G+587 G+687 G+787 G+887 G+987
- DATA NO.
R2487 R2587 R2687 R2787 R2887 R2987 R3087

[Function]
When the compensation method is the fixed compensation amount method, the number of the data to be recorded or
played back is designated.
[Operation]
(When operating in the record mode, the measured amount of compensation is recorded in the area of the designated
number. In the playback mode, operation parameter is read from the area of the designated number.
This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping parameter valid

464
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

5.11.2 Chopping command from PLC

Chopping command by the signalf from PLC is as follows.
(1) The chopping performance parameter setting
Set the information that is required for chopping performance to the PLC interface.
- Rapid traverse override valid/invalid
- Chopping axis selection
- Upper dead point (increment amount from the basic position)
- Lower dead point (increment amount from the upper dead point)
- Number of cycles (number of cycles/min)
(2) Turn the chopping performance parameter valid signal ON
Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON, and make the chopping performance parameters which are
mentioned in “(1)”valid.
Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal is turned
ON.
(3) Starting the chopping operation
The chopping operation starts after turning ON the chopping signal.
When the chopping signal is turned OFF during the operation, the chopping operation ends after returing to the
basic position.

(Note 1) The basic position is the point where the chopping signal is turned ON.
(Note 2) When “1” is set to “#1323 chopsel Chopping command method”, the chopping does not start up from the PLC.
Turning the chopping operation parameter valid signal ON outputs the error No. 31 on the chopping error No.
(Note 3) Operation depends on whether automatic mode or manual mode is selected when the chopping signal is
turned ON during the chopping designated axis is moving with other mode.
< Automatic operation mode >
When a movement command is issued for chopping axis, the chopping operation starts after completing the
movement block.
< Manual operation mode >
When the movement is executed for the chopping axis, the chopping operation does not start and “M01
Operation error 0154” occurs.
(Note 4) When the movement command is executed for the chopping axis during the chopping operation, the chopping
operation continues without executing the movement because of the “M01 Operation error 0151”.
(Note 5) Always make sure to set chopping operation parameter before the chopping starts.
When the chopping operation is executed again after completing the chopping operation, the chopping
operation parameter valid signal needs to be turned ON.
If the chopping operation is executed without setting the parameters, it executes with previous parameter
settings.
(Note 6) The chopping operation parameter can be changed during the chopping operation.
The parameters after changing the operation parameters are validated when the chopping parameter valid
signal ON after changing the operation parameter setting value.
(Note 7) Do not execute the chopping command to an axis in synchronous control (tandem).
(Note 8) Do not execute the coordinate preset (G92) to an axis in chopping operation.

465
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.11.3 Chopping operation

Start Stop
Motion of chopping axis Basic position
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
Upper dead center
point
Bottom dead center
point

(1) Starting the chopping operation

The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of the chopping signal and the chopping operation will be initiated
using the current position as a bisic position. Chopping is operated after travelling from the base position to the
upper dead point with rapid traverse.
Acceleration/deceleration will be performed by linear acceleration/deceleration for travelling from the basic point to
the upper dead point.
(2) During the chopping operation
The axis travels repeatedly between the upper dead point and the lower dead point by designated number of cycles
or the feedrate.
During the chopping operation, the compensation amount is calculated from the machinery operation (feedback
position of the motor end) to compensate so that the machine can move to the upper dead point/lower dead point.
Travelling during the chopping operation will be performed by soft acceleration/deceleration.
(3) Terminating the chopping operation
The chopping operation is terminated at the falling edge of the chopping signal.
After the chopping operation is performed to get to the upper dead point, the chopping axis will travel to the base
point with rapid traverse.
When the chopping axis is travelling from the upper dead point to tthe lower dead point, it will travel to the lower
dead point before terminating.
Acceleration/deceleration will be performed by linear acceleration/deceleration for travelling from the basic point to
the upper dead point.

5.11.4 Interrupt operation during chopping

If an interruption (such as resetting) that affects the chopping axis occurs during the chopping operation, the chopping
axis will perform as follows.

Interrupt operation Chopping operation Chopping mode

Travel to the basic position with rapid traverse after travelling to
Reset Cancel
the upper dead point immediately.
Feed hold
Peformance can be continued witout stopping.
Block stop
Hold
Axis interlock Decelerates to stop.
The chopping operation starts again after cancelling the
Door interlock II interruption.
Door interlock I
Servo OFF
Decelerates to stop.
Axis detachment Cancel
Stroke end
Emergency stop Stop immediately.
Travel to the basic position with rapid traverse after travelling to
Program error Hold
the upper dead point immediately.

466
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

5.11.5 Changing the peformance parameter during the chopping start state
Chopping performance parameter can be changed during the chopping operation.
When the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON after changing the performance parameter, the chopping axis
decelerates to stop once at the upper or bottom dead center point at before the parameter was changed.
As soon as decelerating to stop, chopping operation is carried out immediately with the changed parameter.

(1) Switching the upper dead point and the lower dead point, during the travel from the upper dead point to the lower
dead point

New upper dead center point Upper dead center point before change
Control data change Decelerates to stop
Upper dead center point before change

Control data change Bottom dead center point before change

New upper dead center point

Bottom dead center point before change

New bottom dead center point New bottom dead center point

Decelerates to stop

(2) Switching the upper dead point and the lower dead point, during the travel from the lower dead point to the upper
dead point

New upper dead center point Decelerates to stop

Upper dead center point before change Upper dead center point before change

Control data change Control data change

Bottom dead center point before change

Bottom dead center point before change
New upper dead center point
New bottom dead center point

New bottom dead center point

Decelerates to stop

(Note) Chopping axis cannot be changed during the chopping operation.

467
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.11.6 Chopping compensation operation

As this function involes high-speed repetitive motions, the positioning method allowing compensation based on the
calculation from the machinery operation (feedback position of the motor end) is adapted, rather than the method using
in-position check.
There are two types of compensation method, the compensation value sequential update method and the fixed
compensation amount method.

Compensation value sequential update method

The compensation amount for assigning the position can be calculated from the difference between command position
and feedback position for every four cycyle after the chopping operation started. Then the compensation amount is
added on the positioning command for the next cycle to eliminate the difference between command position and
feedback position.
Compare the commanded stroke and the actual stroke. When the difference between them has become less than the
tolerance which is designated with the parameter (#2080 chwid), output the stroke compensation completion signal.

Upper dead center point

Bottom dead center point

Positioning command Motion of the motor end

Compensation starts from
the 5th cycle.

Fixed compensation amount fixed method

If the grindstone contacts with the workpiece immediately after the chopping operation has started, the chopping width
before and after compensation may be differed, and which may affect the machining surface. In this case, the
compensation value fixed method is appropriate.
With the compensation amount fixed method, compensation amount based on a dry run operation is recorded in
advance so that, in the real operation, compensation is carried out from the first positioning to the bottom dead point
using the compensation amount recorded earlier.
Set with "#1235 set07/bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start" whether to compensate with the same
compensation amount or to update every four cycyle like the compensation value sequential update method.

Upper dead centerpoint

Bottom dead center point

Motion of the motor end
Compensation in the 5th cycle or
Positioning command: later is carried out with the same
Select the compensation value fixed method and set the compensation compensation amount as as in the
amount so that compensation is carried out from the first bottom dead 1st cycle.
center point position since the operation has started.

The stroke compensation completion signal is output when the difference between the commanded stroke and the actual
stroke has reached the tolerance specified with the parameter (#2080 chwid).

468
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

Compensation amount fixed method includes the record mode and the playback mode.

< Record mode >

This mode records the compensation amount with the following procedures.
(1) Setting the chopping operation parameter
Set the necessity information for chopping operation to the PLC interface by turning the compensation
method selection ON (the compensation amount fixed method) and the operation mode selection signal
ON (the record mode).
- Rapid traverse override valid/invalid
- Chopping axis selection
- Upper dead point position (increment amount from the upper dead point)
- Lower dead point position (increment amount from the lower dead point)
- Number of cycles (cycle/min)
- Data No. (0 to 3)
(2) Validating Chopping parameter
Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON to validate the parameters mentioned in (1).
This signal must be turned OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal (chopping
status bit4) is turned ON.
(3) Starting chopping operation
After turning the chopping signal ON, the chopping operation will start.
If the chopping signal is turned OFF during the chopping operation, the chopping operation will be
terminated after returning to the base point.
(4) Recording the compensation amount
From the start of chopping operation, the chopping operation will be carried out with the compensation
value sequential update method.
The compensation is carried out with the compensation value sequential update method. The
compensation value will be recorded when the difference amount between the command position and
feedback position has become within the tolerance, and the compensation recording completion signal
(chopping status bit6) will be output.
(5) Terminating the chopping operation
The compensation amount recording is completed when the compensation amount recording completion
signal is turned ON. Turn the chopping signal OFF.
The chopping operation will be terminated after returning to the base point.

469
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

< Playback mode >

Command the playback mode with the following procedures.
(1) Setting the chopping operation parameter
Set the data No. for playback by turning the compensation method selection ON (the compensation
amount fixed method) and the operation mode selection signal OFF (the playback mode).
Setting for the chopping axis, the upper dead point position, the lower dead point position and the number
of cycles are invalid with the playback mode.
(2) Validating Chopping parameter
The recorded information will be read by turninig ON the chopping parameter valid signal.
The information which is read is the chopping axis, the upper dead point poisition, the lower dead point
position, the number of cycyles and the compensation amount.
This signal must be turned OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal (chopping
status bit4) is turned ON.
(3) Starting chopping operation
After turning the chopping signal ON, the chopping operation will start.
If the chopping signal is turned OFF during the chopping operation, the chopping operation will be
terminated after returning to the base point.
The compansation will be carried out with the recorded compensation amount for four cycles after starting
the chopping opearation.
Set with "#1235 set07/bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start" whether to compensate
with the same compensation amount from 5th cycle onwards or to modify the compensation amount
based on the previous four cycle's error amount.
(4) Terminating the chopping operation
When the chopping signal is turned OFF, the chopping operation will be terminated after returning to the
base point.

470
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

5.11.7 Chopping feedrate

The chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the chopping axis clamp speed (#2081 chclsp). When "0" is set to the chopping
clamp speed, the chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the G1 clamp speed (#2002 clamp). The acceleration/
deceleration time constant is set with chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant (#2141 chtL). When "0" is
set to the chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant, the chopping axis linear acceleration/deceleration time
constant (#2007 G1tL) is used.

Speed [mm/min]

chclsp chclsp
Acceleration α =
chtL(or G1tL)

cht 1 Time [ms]

chtL

Feedrate conversion by designating with cycle

When the chopping is executed by the command from PLC, designate the feedrate with the number of cycles (cycle/
min).
When the upper dead point, the lower dead point and the number of cycles are set with the chopping control data, the
speed pattern in which the acceleration speed will be "the clamp speed/time constant" is commanded to the servo drive
unit.

F chclsp
=
F t chtL(or G1tL)

1/number of cycles (s)

471
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

When the chopping operation parameter is illegal, the chopping designate error signal will be turned ON and the
contents will be notified to the chopping error No.
In the following cases, the number of cycles or feedrate is converted into the value controllable with NC (clamp value)
upon occurrence of the alarm.
(1) When number of cycles is "0"
Number of cycles is 1/min.

(2) When converted feedrate F exceeds chclsp

The following indicates that F exceeds chclsp when the speed pattern is calculated based on the acceleration
of chclsp/chtL. (The number of cycles becomes smaller than that of specified.)

Pattern by the parameter

F
chclsp

Actual pattern (clamp value)

chtL
(or G1tL)

1/2 number of cycles (s)

(3) When number of cycles is 1000/min or more

The number of cycles is clamped at 1000/min.

472
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.11 Chopping

5.11.8 Usage example

The circuit example is shown below.

Always ON
M1001
MOV U3E1\G10380 D100 Retrieve chopping status

Chopping start
M8000
PLS M8001 Parameter setting start pulse

Parameter setting start pulse

M8001
MOV K4 U3E0\G10381 Chopping axis designation (3rd axis)

DMOV K-10000 U3E0\G10382 Upper dead center point position setting

(-10.0mm from base point)

DMOV K-20000 U3E0\G10384 Lower dead center point position setting

(-20.0mm from base point)

MOV K100 U3E0\G10366 Number of cycle setting (100 cycle/min)

M8001 D100.4
Y7BB Chopping parameter valid signal

Y7BB Start ready completion

M8000 D100.4
Y7BA Chopping signal

Y7BA

M8000 D100.0 D100.1 D100.2

M8002 Chopping cutting start interlock

In chopping In chopping Stroke compensation

start mode completion

(Note) Bit devices in the program example are set on the premise that the transfer corresponds to the device Nos. of
CNC interface.
Depending on the device No. to assign, the details of the program may differ.

473
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

5.12.1 Functions
PLC axis indexing is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary coordinate position.
This function is applied to tool exchange and magazine control.

[Positioning command methods]

(1) Station method
The axis will be positioned to the destination (station) that has been decided.
There are two assigning methods: Uniform assignment and arbitrary coordinate assignment.

・Uniform assignment
One rotation (360°) of the rotary axis will be equally divided to determine the stations.
(Maximum number of divisions: 360)

Station
1
8
2

7
3

6
4
5

[Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)]

[For linear axis]

A valid stroke will be equally divided to determine the station. (Maximum number of divisions: 359)

Zero point
Valid stroke length Station

1 2 3 4 5
Station No.

[Setting 5 stations]

・Arbitrary coordinate assignment

A station will be assigned to an arbitrary coordinate set in each table

(2) Arbitrary coordinate designation method

An arbitrary coordinate will be directly designated in PLC program for positioning.

474
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

[Operation functions]
・Automatic mode
Stations will be determined automatically.
・Manual mode
Stations will be determined manually.
While the start signal is ON, the axis will be rotated at a constant speed. When the start signal is OFF, the axis
will be positioned at the nearest station.
・JOG mode
The axis will be rotated at constant speed.
・Incremental feed
The axis will be moved by the designed amount.
・Manual handle feed
The axis will be moved by the manual pulse generator.
・Reference position return
The axis will be positioned at the reference position.
Reference position return is not possible by a dog switch.

[Feed functions]
・Feed rate selection
Automatic mode and manual mode can have each four different feed rates to be designated in the PLC
program.
・Acceleration/deceleration method
Four different combination can be set from the acceleration/deceleration patterns (linear or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration) and the acceleration/deceleration time constants. The combination will be selected
in the PLC program.
Select acceleration/deceleration type with parameter: the acceleration/deceleration with constant time or the
one with a constant angle of inclination.
・Short-cut control
A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated.

475
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.12.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface

List of signals
Operation command PLC CPU -> CNC CPU (R4300 to R4345)

PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722
AUXCM4 PLC axis indexing control command 4
R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342
G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723
AUXCM3 PLC axis indexing control command 3
R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343
G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724
AUXCM2 PLC axis indexing control command 2
R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344
G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725
AUXCM1 PLC axis indexing control command 1
R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345
G+2684 G+2690 G+2696 G+2702 G+2708 G+2714 G+2720 G+2726 PLC axis indexing control
R4304 R4310 R4316 R4322 R4328 R4334 R4340 R4346 command position (L)
G+2685 G+2691 G+2697 G+2703 G+2709 G+2715 G+2721 G+2727 PLC axis indexing control
R4305 R4311 R4317 R4323 R4329 R4335 R4341 R4347 command position (H)

PLC axis indexing control command 4 PLC axis indexing control command 3
(R4300: AUXCM4) (R4301: AUXCM3)
bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 OV1 Speed override 1 bit0 ST1 Station selection 1
bit1 OV2 Speed override 2 bit1 ST2 Station selection 2
bit2 OV4 Speed override 4 bit2 ST4 Station selection 4
bit3 OV8 Speed override 8 bit3 ST8 Station selection 8
bit4 OV16 Speed override 16 bit4 ST16 Station selection 16
bit5 OV32 Speed override 32 bit5 ST32 Station selection 32
bit6 OV64 Speed override 64 bit6 ST64 Station selection 64
bit7 OVR Speed override valid bit7 ST128 Station selection 128
bit8 Spare bit8 ST256 Station selection 256
bit9 Spare bit9 Spare
bitA Spare bitA Spare
bitB Spare bitB Spare
bitC Spare bitC Spare
bitD Spare bitD Spare
bitE Spare bitE Spare
bitF Spare bitF Spare

476
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

PLC axis indexing control command 2 PLC axis indexing control command 1
(R4302: AUXCM2) (R4303: AUXCM1)
bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 ST Operation start bit0 *SVF Servo OFF
bit1 DIR Rotation direction bit1
bit2 STS Arbitrary point feed command valid bit2
bit3 bit3 MRST Master reset
bit4 MP1 Incremental feed magnification 1 bit4 *IT+ Interlock+
bit5 MP2 Incremental feed magnification 2 bit5 *IT- Interlock-
bit6 PR1 Operation parameter selection 1 bit6 RDF Ready OFF
Handle feed operation mode selec-
bit7 PR2 Operation parameter selection 2 bit7 H
tion
bit8 EDT+ External deceleration+ bit8 AUT Automatic operation mode
bit9 EDT- External deceleration- bit9 MAN Manual operation mode
bitA Spare bitA J JOG operation mode
bitB Spare bitB ZRN Reference position return mode
bitC Spare bitC
bitD Spare bitD AZS Basic point initialization setting mode
bitE Spare bitE ZST Basic point setting
Incremental feed operation mode
bitF Spare bitF S
selection

477
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Operation status signal CNC CPU -> PLC CPU (R2000 to R2045)

PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722
AUXST4 PLC axis indexing control status 4
R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042
G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723
AUXST3 PLC axis indexing control status 3
R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043
G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724
AUXST2 PLC axis indexing control status 2
R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044
G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725
AUXST1 PLC axis indexing control status 1
R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045
G12684 G12690 G12696 G12702 G12708 G12714 G12720 G12726 PLC axis indexing control
R2004 R2010 R2016 R2022 R2028 R2034 R2040 R2046 machine position (L)
G12685 G12691 G12697 G12703 G12709 G12715 G12721 G12727 PPLC axis indexing control
R2005 R2011 R2017 R2023 R2029 R2035 R2041 R2047 machine position (H)

PLC axis indexing control status 4 PLC axis indexing control status 3
(R2000: AUXST4) (R2001: AUXST3)
bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 PSW1 Position switch 1 bit0 STO1 Station position 1
bit1 PSW2 Position switch 2 bit1 STO2 Station position 2
bit2 PSW3 Position switch 3 bit2 STO4 Station position 4
bit3 PSW4 Position switch 4 bit3 STO8 Station position 8
bit4 PSW5 Position switch 5 bit4 STO16 Station position 16
bit5 PSW6 Position switch 6 bit5 STO32 Station position 32
bit6 PSW7 Position switch 7 bit6 STO64 Station position 64
bit7 PSW8 Position switch 8 bit7 STO128 Station position 128
bit8 Spare bit8 STO256 Station position 256
bit9 Spare bit9 PSW9 Position switch 9
bitA Spare bitA PSW10 Position switch 10
bitB NST Start not possible bitB PSW11 Position switch 11
bitC Spare bitC PSW12 Position switch 12
bitD Spare bitD PSW13 Position switch 13
bitE Spare bitE PSW14 Position switch 14
bitF Spare bitF PSW15 Position switch 15

478
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

PLC axis indexing control status 2 PLC axis indexing control status 1
(R2002: AUXST2) (R2003: AUXST1)
bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 AUTO In automatic operation mode bit0 RDY Servo ready
bit1 MANO In manual operation mode bit1 INP In-position
bit2 JO In JOG operation mode bit2 SMZ Smoothing zero
bit3 bit3 AX1 Axis selection output
bit4 ZRNO In reference position return mode bit4 MVP In axis plus motion
bit5 bit5 MVM In axis minus motion
In basic point initialization setting
bit6 AZSO bit6 TLQ In torque limit
mode
bit7 SO In incremental mode bit7
bit8 AL1 Alarm 1 bit8 ZP Reference position reached
bit9 AL2 Alarm 2 bit9 RST In reset
bitA AL4 Alarm 4 bitA HO In handle feed operation mode
bitB BAT Battery drop bitB MA Controller ready completion
Absolute position power shutoff
bitC ABS bitC SA Servo ready completion
movement over
bitD ZSN Absolute position data loss bitD JSTA Automatic set position reached
bitE ZSF Initialization setting completed bitE JST Set position reached
bitF ZSE Initialization setting error completed bitF NEAR Near set position

479
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Details of operation command signals (PLC → NC)

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725
AUXCM1
MAND 1 R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
B Servo OFF *SVF AUXCM1/bit0

[Function][Operation]
When the Servo OFF signal is set to "0" (B contact), the control axis enters the servo OFF status. No matter which
operation mode the servo is in and turned OFF, the axis movement will stop, and the servo will turn OFF. The axis
movement restarts when the servo is turned ON again.
If the axis moves for any reason while the servo is OFF, it can be selected whether to compensate that movement
amount when the servo turns ON the next time. Select with parameter "#1064 svof".
(1) When carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 1)
When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are always updated by the amount the axis has moved. When the servo is
OFF, the coordinates show the machine position.
(2) When not carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 0)
When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are not updated even when the axis moves. When the servo is OFF, the
coordinates show the machine position when the servo is OFF.
When the servo is turned ON, the axis is moved to the position where the servo was turned OFF.
When the servo is OFF and the axis movement exceeds the excessive error width (designated with parameter
"#2226 SV026"), a servo alarm occurs.
[Caution]
(1) The actual servo OFF operation is validated after In-position (INP) is completed. When using a mechanical clamp,
carry out the clamp operation after confirming the in-position status.
(2) When the power is turned ON, the Servo OFF signal turns OFF ("0") and the servo OFF function becomes valid. It is
necessary before operation to turn the Servo OFF signal ON ("1") in the PLC program to release the servo OFF.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Master reset MRST AUXCM1/bit3

[Function]
This signal resets the PLC indexing axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, the following reset operations are carried out.
(1) The axis movement decelerates to a stop.
(2) Alarms that can be released by the reset are released.
(3) The In reset (RST) signal is output.
(4) The operation alarm is released while resetting.
[Related signals]
(1) In reset (RST: AUXST1/bit9)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Interlock+ *IT+ AUXCM1/bit4

[Function][Operation]
When the control axis is moving in the (+) direction, this signal decelerates and stops the axis movement immediately.
When this signal is OFF from before movement, the motion is stopped in the same manner as without starting. In any
case the movement is started or restarted by turning this signal ON.

480
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Interlock- *IT- AUXCM1/bit5

[Function][Operation]
This is the same as the Interlock + (IT+) signal, the only difference being the direction.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Ready OFF RDF AUXCM1/bit6

[Function]
This is a signal to turn OFF the READY status.
[Operation]
When put into a READY OFF status, the power supply to the servomotor is shut off, and the contactor control output is
simultaneously turned OFF. If the motor is in operation, it will stop by a dynamic brake stop or a deceleration control
stop. Servo ready completion (SA) and Servo ready (RDY) are also turned OFF, but an alarm does not occur. When this
signal is turned OFF, the machine immediately returns to the original state.
[Related signals]
(1) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)
(2) Servo ready (RDY: AUXST1/bit0)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Handle feed operation mode H AUXCM1/bit7

[Function]
This signal selects the handle feed operation mode.
[Operation]
The axis will move for the amount determined by input pulse multiplied by feed magnification after this signal is turned
ON, each signal [Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) and Incremental feed magnification (MP1, MP2)] is
determined, and the handle pulse is input.
[Caution]
(1) Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.
0101".
(2) The handle mode acceleration/deceleration time is the acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 linear acceleration/
deceleration of the selected operation parameter group.
[Related signals]
(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)
(2) Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 (MP1, MP2: AUXCM2/bit4,5)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Automatic operation mode AUT AUXCM1/bit8

[Function]
This signal selects the automatic operation mode.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON, set Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256) and then turn Operation start (ST) ON to move the
axis to the designated station. The shortcut control or the rotation direction can be selected with parameters.
[Caution]
Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.
0101".
[Related signals]
(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)
(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)
(3) Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256: AUXCM3/bit0 to 8)

481
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Manual operation mode MAN AUXCM1/bit9

[Function]
This signal selects the manual operation mode.
[Operation]
When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving, and the
rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. When Operation start turns OFF, the
axis will be positioned to the nearest station.
[Caution]
Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.
0101".
[Related signals]
(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)
(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A JOG operation mode J AUXCM1/bitA

[Function]
This signal selects the JOG operation mode.
[Operation]
When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving, and the
rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. Unlike the manual operation mode,
when Operation start is turned OFF, the axis immediately decelerate to a stop.
[Caution]
Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.
0101".
[Related signals]
(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)
(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Reference position return mode ZRN AUXCM1/bitB

[Function]
This signal selects the reference position return mode.
[Operation]
When this signal (ZRN) is turned ON, the reference position return mode is designated. To start the reference position
return, turn this signal ON, select the operation parameter group, then turn ON the Operation start (ST) signal.
When the absolute position coordinate system has been established in the absolute position specifications, the high-
speed return will be applied in every operation.
[Related signals]
(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Basic point initialization setting
A AZS AUXCM1/bitD
mode

[Function]
This signal selects the mode that initializes the basic point for the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the basic point initialization setting mode is held until the NC power is turned OFF.
(Cannot be canceled)
When the stopper method is selected by setting "1" to "#2049 type", the torque limit value and the excessive error
detection width in the operation parameter group 4 are automatically selected.

482
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Basic point setting ZST AUXCM1/bitE

[Function]
This signal turns ON when designating the basic point with the basic point initialization in the absolute position detection
system.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON in the basic point initialization setting mode, the designated position is set as the absolute
position basic point.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Incremental feed operation mode
A S AUXCM1/bitF
selection

[Function]
This signal selects the incremental feed operation mode selection.
[Operation]
After turning ON this signal, designate the operation parameter group (with PR1 and PR2), the incremental feed
magnification (with MP1 and MP2) and the rotation direction (with DIR). Then turn ON the Operation start (ST) signal to
move the axis.
S
MP1,MP2
PR1,PR2
DIR
RST
ST
Axis movement

[Caution]
(1) Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.
0101".
(2) In the incremental mode, the axis travel will be maintained at a constant amount, even if the Operation start signal is
OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

483
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724
AUXCM2
MAND 2 R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Operation start ST AUXCM2/bit0

[Function][Operation]
When this signal is turned ON in an operation mode, the operation will start. The Operation start signal is handled as a
status, so the ON status must be maintained until the operation is finished.

Operation movement in each operation mode

(1) Automatic operation mode

Station selection

Operation start

Automatic set position reached

Set position reached

Near set position

Output 0 (zero)
Station position

Axis movement

Station selection (ST1 to ST256) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting
the Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are
held even if they are changed after the startup.
When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position
will be output as "0". When the positioning is completed, Automatic set position reached (JSTA) and Set position
reached (JST) is output. Then turn the Operation start signal OFF.
When the Operation start signal is turned OFF during axis movement, the axis will stop at the nearest station. Note
that for a linear axis, if there is not a nearest point in the movement direction, the commanded station becomes the
nearest point.
(Note) When the shortcut function is OFF for the rotating axis, the positioning direction can be designated with
Rotation direction (DIR).

(2) Manual operation mode

Rotation direction
Operation start
Automatic set position reached
Set position reached
Near set position
Station position Output 0 (zero)

Axis movement

Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting the
Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are held
even if they are changed after the startup.
When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position
will be output as "0".
While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the designated direction. When the Operation start
signal is turned OFF, a positioning is carried out to the nearest station where the axis can stop in the rotation
direction. Note that for a linear axis, if there is no nearest point in the movement direction, the axis will immediately
decelerate to a stop.
When the positioning is completed, Set position reached (JST) is output.
(Note) Automatic set position reached (JSTA) will not be output.

484
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

(3) JOG operation mode

Station selection
Operation start
Automatic set position reached
Set position reached
Near set position
Output 0 (zero)
Station position
Axis movement

Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting the
Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are held
even if they are changed after the startup.
When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position
will be output as "0". While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the designated direction. When
the Operation start signal is turned OFF, the axis decelerates to a stop. Set position reached (JST) and Near set
position (NEAR) are output if the axis is stopped within each tolerable width from the station position.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Rotation direction DIR AUXCM2/bit1

[Function]
This signal designates the rotation direction of the operation in each operation mode.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON to designate the rotation direction before inputting the Operation start (ST) signal.
This signal is invalid in the automatic operation mode when the shortcut control is set and selected by the parameter.
When the shortcut control is not selected, a positioning is carried out in the direction designated by this signal.
This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.

DIR Axis rotation direction Station movement direction

0 Forward run Direction of increasing station No.
1 Reverse run Direction of decreasing station No.
The actual motor rotation direction is reversed by changing the setting of parameter "#1018 ccw".
[Related signals]
(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Arbitrary point feed command val-
A STS AUXCM2/bit2
id

[Function][Operation]
This signal selects the mode that executes the positioning, with the command unit specified by "#1003 iunit", to the
arbitrary position (coordinate) transferred from the NC. Automatic operation mode (AUT) must be turned ON
simultaneously with Arbitrary point feed command valid.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic operation mode (AUT: AUXCM1/bit8)

485
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Incremental feed magnification 1,
A MP1,MP2 AUXCM2/bit4,5
2

[Function][Operation]
This signal selects the incremental feed amount and the handle feed magnification. In the handle feed, the movement
amount per handle pulse is selected.

MP2 MP1 Feed amount

0 0 0.001°
0 1 0.01°
1 0 0.1°
1 1 1°

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Operation parameter selection 1,
A PR1,PR2 AUXCM2/bit6,7
2

[Function][Operation]
This signal selects one parameter group to be actually used from four parameter groups that designate the axis feed
operation. The parameter group cannot be changed while Operation start (ST) is ON. (The group is held in NC.)
If Smoothing zero is confirmed for the target axis, the operation parameter group can be changed with the Operation
start. Changing the parameter setting values of the time constant, torque limit value and excessive error detection width,
however, is not possible unless Smoothing zero is confirmed for all the NC axes. The parameter values, if changed
during the NC axis movement, are valid after the smoothing zero is confirmed.

Operation parameter group 4

Operation parameter group 3
Operation parameter
Operation parameter group 2 • Automatic feedrate
Operation parameter group 1 • Manual feedrate
• Automatic feedrate Select • Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
• Manual feedrate • Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
• Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 • Torque limit value
• Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 • Excessive error detection width
• Torque limit value • Set position detection width
• Excessive error detection width • Near set position detection width
• Set position detection width
• Near set position detection width

PR2 PR1 Selected operation parameter group

0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
B External deceleration+ *EDT+ AUXCM2.bit8

[Function]
The feed speed towards positive direction is controlled by the external deceleration speed while this signal is OFF.
[Operation]
The external deceleration speed is set with the axis parameter.
The external deceleration speed can be set in 6 steps and can be selected with the external deceleration speed selection
signal.
The external deceleration speed selection signal uses the PLC axis interface.

486
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
B External deceleration- *EDT- AUXCM2.bit9

[Function]
The feed speed towards negative direction is controlled by the external deceleration speed while this signal is OFF.
[Operation]
Same as the External deceleration(*EDT+).

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723
AUXCM3
MAND 3 R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
ST1 to
A Station selection 1 to 256 AUXCM3/bit0 to 8
ST256

[Function]
This signal designates an index station No. in the automatic operation mode.
[Operation]
Set an index station No. before inputting Operation start (ST) in the automatic operation mode.
Input a 9-digit binary number. An input "000000001" corresponds to station No.1.
This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.
When this signal is set to "000000000" and the automatic operation is started, a one station rotation special command
will result. (Note that this cannot be used when the station positions are determined in non-uniform assignments.)

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722
AUXCM4
MAND 4 R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
OV1 to
A Speed override 1 to 64 AUXCM4/bit0 to 6
OV64

[Function][Operation]
This signal designates the override value added to the selected feedrate. Set a binary value for the override. Values over
100% are regarded as 100%.
Effective feedrate = (Selected speed * Speed override) / 100

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Speed override valid OVR AUXCM4/bit7

[Function][Operation]
This is a signal to validate the speed override. When this signal is turned OFF, the set feedrate becomes the operation
speed without calculating the override.

487
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Details of operation status signals (NC → PLC)

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725
AUXST1
TUS 1 R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Servo ready RDY AUXST1/bit0

[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is in an operable status.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after turning the power ON.
(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).
(3) The emergency stop has been released.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) or Servo OFF (*SVF) has been released.
This signal turns OFF when:
(1) Servo ready completion (SA) is turned OFF.
(2) The Servo OFF signal is input and the drive unit is in a servo OFF state.
[Related signals]
(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)
(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)
(3) Servo OFF (*SVF: AUXCM1/bit0)
(4) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In-position INP AUXST1/bit1

[Function]
This signal notifies that the control axis is in-position.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned ON and the droop is within the range set in the parameters.
This signal turns OFF when:
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned OFF. (When there is a movement command.)
(2) The droop exceeds the range set in the parameters.
[Caution]
(1) In-position (INP) may turn ON, even during movement, when the axis is moving at extremely low speeds.
(2) The in-position detection range is set in the parameter "#2224 SV024 In-position detection width".
(3) In the servo ready OFF state, Smoothing zero (SMZ) turns OFF when the travel amount of servomotor is detected.
Therefore, In-position (INP) also turns OFF. In axis plus motion (MVP) or In axis minus motion (MVN) turns ON
depending on the detected movement direction. Note that Smoothing zero (SMZ), In axis plus motion (MVP) and In
axis minus motion (MVN) will not change in the servo OFF state without error correction, because detected
servomotor travel amount becomes a droop amount.

Acceleration/
deceleration Position loop process
delay process

Acceleration/deceleration delay Servo droop

[Related signals]
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

488
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Smoothing zero SMZ AUXST1/bit2

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the acceleration/deceleration process in the built-in controller is finished, and that no command
to the control section remains.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Axis selection output AX1 AUXST1/bit3

[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis has received the movement command.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON in the following cases, and turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected.
(1) In automatic operation mode
This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.
(2) In manual operation mode
This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.
(3) In JOG operation mode
This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.
(4) In reference poisition return mode
This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.
When an interlock is applied, this signal remains ON even when the servo is OFF. This signal turns OFF atthe
emergency stop.

Operation start (ST)

Axis movement

Axis selection output (AX1)

[Related signals]
(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In axis plus motion MVP AUXST1/bit4

[Function]
This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (+) direction.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (+) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected
or the axis starts moving in the (-) direction.
[Related signals]
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In axis minus motion MVM AUXST1/bit5

[Function]
This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (-) direction.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (-) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected
or the axis starts moving in the (+) direction.
[Related signals]
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

489
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In torque limit TLQ AUXST1/bit6

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the control axis is at the current limit value. This signal turns ON when the motor output torque
(motor current) is limited at the torque limit value of the selected operation parameter group.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Reference position reached ZP AUXST1/bit8

[Function]
Thsi signal indicates that the control axis is on the reference position.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the reference position is reached in the reference position return mode.
If the reference position is reached in other operation modes or by other commands, the signal will not turn ON.
This signal turns OFF when:
(1) The axis is moved by a travel command, etc.
(2) An emergency stop has been activated due to an emergency stop input or a servo alarm occurrence, etc.
(3) The axis has moved in the servo OFF state.
[Related signals]
(1) Reference position return mode (ZRN: AUXCM1/bitB)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In reset RST AUXST1/bit9

[Function]
This signal indicates that the built-in controller is being reset.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON.
(2) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON and the built-in controller is being reset.
(3) In an emergency stop status.
[Related signals]
(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In handle feed operation mode HO AUXST1/bitA

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that handle feed operation mode is selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Controller ready completion MA AUXST1/bitB

[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is in a status to carry out normal operation.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) Normal operation has begun after the power ON.
This signal turns OFF when:
(1) The power is turned OFF.
(2) An error with the controller, such as CPU error or memory error, has been detected.
(3) A servo error, which cannot be released unless the controller is first turned OFF, has occurred.

490
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Servo ready completion SA AUXST1/bitC

[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation. In other words, the servo system (position
control) is not working when the signal is OFF.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after the power ON.
(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).
(3) The emergency stop has been released.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.
This signal turns OFF when:
(1) Controller ready completion (MA) is turned OFF.
(2) A servo alarm has occurred.
(3) Emergency stop is issued.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.
[Caution]
With Servo OFF (*SVF), Servo ready completion (SA) will not turn OFF as long as there are no separate conditions for
turning the SA OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)
(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)
(3) Controller ready completion (MA: AUXST1/bitB)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Automatic set position reached JSTA AUXST1/bitD

[Function]
In the automatic operation, this signal notifies that the positioning to the commanded station No. is completed. The
tolerable ON width is as same as that of Set position reached (JST).
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The positioning to the designated station No. is completed in the automatic operation mode. The signal actually turns
ON before the positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) When the Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes.
(2) When the axis deviates outside the tolerable width.
[Caution]
(1) In automatic operation, this signal does not turn ON when positioning to the nearest station is carried out by the
Operation start signal OFF.
(2) When this signal is ON, it does not turn OFF if the same station No. index is started.
(3) When the positioning to the station is completed in manual mode and the same station No. index is started, this signal
turns ON. However, there is no movement.
(4) Once turned OFF, this signal does not turn ON again even if the axis returns within the tolerable width.
(5) During the emergency stop or the servo OFF, the axis movement, once deviated outside the output width of Set
position reached, returns within the tolerable width, turns this signal ON again if "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit4" is OFF;
does not turn it ON if "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit4" is ON.

491
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Set position reached JST AUXST1/bitE

[Function]
This signal notifies that the positioning to the station position has been completed. It is ON when the machine position is
at any of the station positions. The tolerable ON width is set with a parameter.
[Operation]
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) The positioning to the station is completed in automatic or manual operation. The signal actually turns ON before the
positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.
(2) The stop position after JOG operation is the station position or within the tolerable width.
(3) The reference position return position corresponds to those of the stop position in (2).
Other than the above conditions, this signal normally monitors the machine position, and carries out comparisons
between stations. Therefore, this signal is output even when the machine moves to a station position outside the
operation.
The signal turns OFF when:
(1) The Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes. When the operation is started by the Operation start
signal, this signal will not turn ON, even when a station position is passed during operation.
(2) The axis deviates outside the tolerable width.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Near set position NEAR AUXST1/bitF

[Function]
This signal notifies that the machine position is near the station.
[Operation]
It operates in the same manner as the Set position reached (JST), but the tolerable width is set with a different
parameter. The tolerable width is generally set larger than that of Set position reached. This signal is generally used at
the mechanical clamp or the like just before the completion of the positioning.

492
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724
AUXST2
TUS 2 R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In automatic operation mode AUTO AUXST2/bit0

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the automatic operation mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In manual operation mode MANO AUXST2/bit1

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the manual operation mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In JOG operation mode JO AUXST2/bit2

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the JOG operation mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In reference position return mode ZRNO AUXST2/bit4

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the reference position return mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
In basic point initialization setting
A AZSO AUXST2/bit6
mode

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the basic point initialization setting mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A In incremental mode SO AUXST2/bit7

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the incremental mode has been selected.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Alarm 1 AL1 AUXST2/bit8

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred requiring the power to be turned ON again after the cause is removed.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Alarm 2 AL2 AUXST2/bit9

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred which can be released by the Master reset (MRST) signal after the
cause is removed.

493
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Alarm 4 AL4 AUXST2/bitA

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that an operation alarm or absolute position alarm has occurred.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Absolute position power shutoff
A ABS AUXST2/bitC
movement over

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the axis moved beyond the tolerable amount while the control power was OFF in the absolute
position system.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Battery voltage dropping BAT AUXST2.bitB

[Function][Operation]
This signal informs that the battery voltage is dropping.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Absolute position data loss ZSN AUXST2/bitD

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the absolute position data has been lost in the absolute position system.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Initialization setting completed ZSF AUXST2/bitE

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that in the absolute position system the basic point initialization setting has completed normally, and
that the absolute position coordinates have been established.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
Initialization setting error complet-
A ZSE AUXST2/bitF
ed

[Function][Operation]
This signal indicates that the basic point initialization setting has not finished normally in the absolute position system.

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723
AUXST3
TUS 3 R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
STO1 to
A Station position 1 to 256 AUXST3/bit0 to 8
STO256

[Function][Operation]
This signal shows a 9-digit binary No. of the present station.
This signal outputs the station position when Set position reached (JST) is ON, "0" when Set position reached is OFF.

494
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

Signal ab-
Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
breviation

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722
AUXST4
TUS 4 R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
PSW1 to AUXST4/bit0 to 7
A Position switch 1 to 15
PSW15 AUXST3/bit9 to F

[Function][Operation]
This signal turns ON when the axis is within the setting range of the respective position switches.

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name bit
tact breviation
A Start not possible NST AUXST4/bitB

[Function][Operation]
This signal turns ON when the Operation start signal is turned ON for non PLC indexing axis.

495
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

5.13.1 Outline
This is the function which dynamically switches the drive unit control method between the control from NC and the
control from PLC. In addition, switching between the NC axis control and the indexing axis control is possible when a
PLC axis is set as the indexing axis.

5.13.2 Specification
Switching
The PLC switching signal (CHGPLCn) preforms switching between the NC axis control and PLC axis control. When it is
turned OFF, an axis is controlled as the NC axis. When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC
axis. In addition, the current control mode is output to the In PLC axis control signal (PLCMODn) as OFF during the NC
axis control, and as ON state during the PLC axis control.

Switching requirements
The axis switching invalid signal (AXCHGISn) informs of the state that the NC axis control and PLC axis control cannot
be switched. Confirm this signal is OFF, and then switch the PLC axis switching signal ON/OFF.
When switching the PLC switching signal ON/OFF while the axis switching invalid signal is ON, the alarm "M01 NC/PLC
axis switch illegal 1250" will occur (*). After that, when axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF, the control will be
switched and the alarm will be released. Returning the state of the PLC axis switching signal also releases the alarm.
If the axis control is switched during motion, the switching will be realized after the command has completed and the axis
switching invalid status has been turned OFF.

The axis switching invalid signal will be turned ON when the valid axis of the NC/PLC axis switching is in the following
conditions.
- While the axis is in motion
- During the Servo OFF
- While removing the axis
- While the axis is stopped with override zero
- While the axis is stopped with interlock
- During the current limit
- During the droop release
- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command
- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the
program
- During the H/W OT, or soft limit

(*) When an alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch illegal 1250" occurs, the NC axis name is displayed regardless of its
control mode.

496
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

Timing of axis switching

PLC axis switching

(CHGPLCn)

Axis switching invalid status

(AXCHGISn)

Feedrate

In PLC axis control

(PLCMODEn) In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

(1) (2) (3)

(1) The switching signal is turned OFF to ON, and the axis switching invalid signal is OFF (switching is permitted).
Therefore the axis changes over to the PLC axis control state and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned ON.
(2) The PLC axis switching signal is turned OFF, but the axis switching invalid signal is ON (switching is prohibited).
Therefore the axis does not change over to the NC axis control. An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch illegal 1250"
will occur.
(3) The axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. And then it will be switched
to the PLC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned ON.

Commands
Commands can be issued only from the mode in control.
When a command is issued from PLC during the NC axis control, the command from PLC is ignored and the NC axis
command execution continues. Moreover, when the command is issued by the buffering mode, the subsequent buffer
commands are all ignored. The command from a PLC axis does not cause an alarm. Make sure the signal is in the PLC
axis control by the ladder, and then activate the switching.
When manual feed command is issued from NC during the PLC axis control, an error "M01 Operation error 0005" (*) will
occur. Then the command from NC is ignored, and the PLC axis command execution continues. Also, if the command
from NC is a program command, an error "P32 Address. Error" occurs, and the program is stopped. However, motion
commands to the other NC axes and parameter input by program do not cause any alarms.

(*) When the alarm "M01 Operation error 0005" occurs, the NC axis No. is displayed.

497
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Control unit
The command unit which is switched to the PLC axis control is the minimum command unit (#1003 iunit) of the NC axis.
Similarly, the command unit system for the inch/mm uses the unit system of the NC axis (#1040 M_inch and #1041
I_inch).
To change the command unit system with G20/G21 is invalid in the PLC axis control.
However, the command position on PLC axis I/F, machine position, remaining distance, command federate, and
machine /command position on indexing axis I/F are based on the unit of "#1042 pcinh". Therefore, the command
position and command federate are converted from the unit system, "pcinh" to "I_inch" due to the "#1041 I_inch" and
"#1042 pcinch" settings. On the contrary, the unit system for the machine position and remaining distance are converted
from "I_inch" to "pcinch". The machine position on I/F may not match with the command position because the position of
the actual NC axis is converted for output.

(Example 1) If 1000 is set to the command position for PLC axis I/F when "#1041 I_inch = 0" and "#1042 pcinh = 1";
The value on I/F is based on inch unit, and on the NC control is based on millimeter unit, so the positioning will
be at 2.540 mm, the result of inch -> millimeter conversion of the command position, which is 1000 (0.1000
inches). The machine position on I/F will be at 1000 (0.1000 inches), the result of millimeter -> inch conversion
of the current NC axis position, which is 2.540 mm.

(Example 2) If 1000 is set to the command position for OLC axis I/F when" #1041 I_inch = 1 "and "#1042 pcinh = 0";
The value on I/F is based on millimeter unit, and on NC control is based on inch unit, so the positioning will be
at 0.0393 inch 0.0393 inches, the result of millimeter -> inch conversion of the command position, which is
1000 (1.000 mm). The machine position on I/F will be at 999 (0.999 mm), the result of millimeter -> inch
conversion of the current NC axis position, which is 0.0393 inches.

Speed display
When the PLC axis is moved, the movement speed (Fc) for relative screen, etc., is not displayed. When the other axes
are simultaneously moving, the composite speed of the axes currently in NC axis control only is displayed.
The movement speed in the PLC axis is displayed as the feedrate in the PLC monitor screen.

Coordinate system
Command during the PLC axis control is issued using positions on the machine coordinate of the NC axis.
When the axis is moved by PLC axis, the machine values, workpiece coordinates and relative values of the NC axis are
updated. Also, the NC axis workpiece coordinates are updated when workpiece coordinates are changed by G54, etc.,
while in the PLC axis control.

Tool compensation
If the axis is switched to the PLC axis as keeping the tool compensation amount, including the length and radius
compensation valid in the NC axis control, the compensation amount is retained. However, when the axis in the PLC
control is moved by the compensation amount, the program error "P32 ADDRESS. ERROR" will occur.
When the axis in the PLC axis control is returned to zero point, the compensation amount will be cleared.

PLC axis monitor screen

The PLC axis which is switched to the NC axis is also displayed on the PLC axis monitor screen. However, only the
machine position is updated in the NC axis control, and other data except it will not be updated. For the switching axis,
"NC" appears on the axis type column for the switching axis.

498
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

5.13.3 Combined Functions

Function list

Function name Summary

Reset The signal of each control mode is valid.
Servo OFF The signal of each control mode is valid.
The signal of each control mode is validated, so is the axis detachment by
Axis detach parameters.
During switching the indexing axis, only axis detachment by parameters is valid.
Interlock The signal of each control mode is valid.
Current limit changeover The signal of each control mode is valid.
Droop release request The signal of each control mode is valid.
The signal of each control mode is validated.
External deceleration However, external deceleration in the PLC axis control is valid only for the each axis
external deceleration ("#1239 set11/bit6" is set to 1).
When individual axis speed is monitored, speed monitor is performed with the NC axis
Speed monitor signal even if the axis is currently in the PLC axis control. Turning the PLC axis signal
ON does not activate the speed monitor.
Absolute value initialization can be set with the zero point initialization setting mode
(AZSn) of the NC axis and the zero point initialization start (ZSTn) signal in the PLC
Absolute value initialization setting axis control. Absolute initialization can be set with the same signal which is available
in the indexing axis I/F during the indexing axis control.
The PLC axis (indexing axis) signal is used to start the axis in the PLC axis control.
High accuracy control The axis in the PLC axis control is invalided.
When this function is set to the primary axis / secondary axis of the synchronization
Synchronization control control, the parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error #2187" will occur when the
power is turned ON.
When this function is set to the axis designated as the spindle C axis, the parameter
Spindle C axis
error "Y05 Initial parameter error #2187" will occur when the power is turned ON.
Ready OFF The ready OFF signal of each axis on the PLC indexing axis is always invalid.
The machine lock signal of NC axis enables to update the current position without
moving the axis through the PLC axis command in the PLC axis control.
Machine lock
The machine lock status does not switch while the axis is moving.
However, the automatic machine lock signal is invalid.
Compensation amount is set for the NC axis. The set amount is valid even when the
Machine error compensation (backlash control mode is switched, and it can be set in either mode regardless of the control
error compensation, pitch error compen- mode.
sation, thermal expansion compensa- The backlash error compensation during the indexing axis control will be always G0
tion, external machine error backlash compensation regardless of the command mode. It is switched to the G0 or
compensation) G1 backlash compensation during the NC axis control depending on the command
mode.
The axis is stopped by the OT signal of the NC axis even during the PLC control. It is
impossible to switch the axis during stroke end, so release the alarm to execute the
switching.
If the axis switched to the PLC axis causes the alarm of H/W or soft limit, an
Stroke end (over travel)
alarm"T01 Cycle start prohibit 106"will occur, and it prevents automatic operation
start. If the axis which is switched to the PLC axis causes a limit alarm at the time of
automatic start, an alarm "T02 Feed hold 202"occurs and the program will be
stopped.
Parameters are shared by the NC axis control and PLC axis control. The axis control
can not be switched when soft limit is occurring, so release the alarm and execute
switching.
Resetting NC axis releases the alarms during the NC axis control, and resetting PLC
axis releases the alarms during the PLC axis control. However, regardless of the con-
trol mode, the soft limit IB and IIB can be released by resetting the NC axis.
Soft limit When the axis which is switched to the PLC axis causes the soft limit alarm, "T01
Cycle start prohibit 106"will occur, and it prevents automatic start. When the axis
which is switched to the PLC axis causes the limit alarm, an alarm"T02 Feed hold
202"occurs, and the program will be stopped.
When the range is moved to the outside of the limit to the inside during PLC control,
the clamp with "#2021 out_f"is not executed, and the axis is operated at the com-
manded speed.

499
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Function name Summary

The NC axis PSW and PLC axis PSW are both valid any time, and the signal turns
ON/OFF in their own PSW ranges. The PLC axis No. after being switched is set on
the PLC axis PSW. The PLC axis PSW can be switched to the indexing axis.
Position switch (PSW)
However, the indexing axis PSW is valid only while the indexing axis is being
switched, and the signal is not output during the NC axis control even the axis is in
the range of the PSW.
Data can be read and write by specifying the NC axis No. regardless of its control
PLC window
modes. When the PLC axis No. is specified, the alarm of illegal data type will occur.
Specifying the desired NC axis No. can set programmable parameter input regardless
Programmable parameter input
of its control modes.
The command from the PLC axis is counted as the manual interrupt amount. When
Manual absolute the manual ABC signal is ON, execution of the absolute value command from NC af-
ter being moved by the PLC axis updates the program coordinate.
The requirements for the acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
are different between NC axes and PLC axes.
The acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination for a NC axis can
be performed in "#1200 G0_acc (rapid traverse)", "#1201 G1_acc(cutting feed)",
Acceleration/deceleration with a
"#1205 G0bdcc(before G0 interpolation)" or high accuracy control (G61.1).
constant angle of inclination
The acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination for a PLC axis is
can be performed in "#21101 add01/bit0 (rapid traverse)" or "#21101 add01/bit1
(cutting feed)", and in "#1361 aux_add (automatic operation mode)" for a PLC index-
ing axis.
The axis on the PLC axis control can be selected; however, the absolute value and
workpiece coordinate will not be zero value even if the origin zero function is applied.
Origin zero
When the origin zero is applied to the axis in the PLC axis control, the axis name will
be no longer highlighted. To perform the origin zero, set as the NC axis control.
The counter zero function can be applied during the PLC axis control. The counter
Counter zero
zero for a NC axis signal is also valid.

500
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

Signal list
All the PLC axis and indexing axis signal are invalid in the NC axis control.
The validity of control signals which are available for each NC axis in the PLC axis (indexing axis) control is as follows.
Signal name Abbreviation Valid/Invalid
Control axis detach DTCHｎ ×
Servo OFF *SVFn ×
Mirror image MIｎ ×
External deceleration + *+EDTn ×
External deceleration - *-EDTn ×
Automatic interlock + *+AITn ×
Automatic interlock - *-AITn ×
Manual interlock + *+MITn ×
Manual interlock - *-MITn ×
Automatic machine lock AMLKｎ ×
Manual machine lock MMLKn ○
Feed axis selection + +Jn ×
Feed axis selection - -Jn ×
Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid MAEn ×
Control axis detach 2 DTCH2n ×
Current limit ILCn ×
Droop release request DORn ×
Zero point initialization set mode AZSn ○
Zero point initialization set start ZSTn ○
Unclamp completion UCLPFn ×
Multi-step speed monitor request MSORn ×
Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 MSOMI1n ×
Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 MSOMI2n ×
Counter zero CNT0n ○
External machine coordinate system compensation data - ○
Each axis reference position selection - ×
Thermal expansion offset compensation amount - ○
Thermal expansion max. compensation amount - ○
External deceleration speed selection - ×

501
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

The validity of status signals which are available for each NC axis in the PLC axis (indexing axis) control is as follows.
Signal name Abbreviation Valid/Invalid
Servo ready RDYn ○
Axis selection AXn ○
In axis plus motion MVPn ○
In axis minus motion MVMn ○
1st reference position reached ZP1n ×
2nd reference position reached ZP2n ×
3rd reference position reached ZP3n ×
4th reference position reached ZP4n ×
Near reference position NRFn ○
NC axis up-to-speed ARRFn ○
Zero point initialization set completed ZSFn ○
Zero point initialization set error completed ZSEn ○
In zero point initialization ZSn ×
Zero point initialization incomplete ZLSn ○
In current limit ILIn ×
Current limit reached ILAn ×
Unclamp command UCLPn ×
In-position INPn ○
In multi-step speed monitor MSOEn ×
Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1 MSOMO1n ×
Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2 MSOMO2n ×
Thermal expansion compensation amount - ○
Servo motor temperature - ○

502
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

5.13.4 Parameter settings

This NC axis / PLC axis switching function sets the PLC No. to be switched to a NC axis. The I/F No. of a vacant PLC
axis will be used. If this function is not used, set to 0.
When a PLC axis I/F No. is designated twice or more, the parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur.
No. Item Details Setting range
When the NC/PLC axis switching is used, this sets the I/F No. of
PLC axis switch- the PLC axis to be switched. The I/F No. of a vacant PLC axis
2187(PR) chgPLCax 0 to 8
ing axis No. will be used.
When it is not used, set to 0.

Switching between NC axis and PLC axis

Assuming there are 3 NC-exclusive axes, 1 PLC-exclusive axis and 1 switching axis, and if the 4th NC axis is switched to
the 6th PLC axis, set the PLC axis No. "6" which is switched to the A axis side as the following. For this example, when
"1" is set to "#2187 chgPLCax", a parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur when the power is turned
ON. When the axis is changed to the PLC axis, the command will be issued using the 6th I/F of the PLC axis.

$1 PLC
#1001 syson 1 1
#1002 axisno 4 1

1 2 3 4 5
#1013 axname X Y Z A 1
#1021 mcp_no 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005
#2187 chgPLCax 0 0 0 6 0
#12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 0 0

PLC axis I/F

1st axis G1137 +1370
R1900 R4200
:
6th axis G11410 +1410
R1940 R4240

PLC NC
Q17

NC axis command PLC axis command

X Y Z A 1

NC axis Switching axis PLC axis

PLC 6th axis

503
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

Switching between NC axis and PLC indexing axis

Assuming there are 3 NC-exclusive axes, 2 PLC-exclusive axis and 1 switching axis, and if the A axis is switched to the
8th PLC axis, and the 8th PLC axis is used as the 2nd indexing axis, set the PLC axis No. "8" and indexing axis No. "2"
which are switched to the A side as the following. In this example, if axis Nos. "1" to "3" are set to "#2187 chgPLCax", a
parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur when the power is turned ON. After the axis is changed to
the PLC indexing axis, the command is issued using the 8th PLC axis and 2nd indexing axis's I/F.

$1 PLC
#1001 syson 1 1
#1002 axisno 4 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
#1013 axname X Y Z A 1 2 3
#1021 mcp_no 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007
#2187 chgPLCax 0 0 0 8 0 0 0
#12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 2 0 0 1

PLC axis I/F

1st axis G11370 +1370
R1900 R4200
2nd axis G11378 +1378
R1908 R4208
3rd axis G11386 +1386
R1916 R4216
:
8th axis G12660 +2660
R1980 R4280

PLC Indexing axis I/F

1st axis G12680 +2680
R2000 R4300
2nd axis G12686 2686
R2006 R4306

PLC NC
Q17

NC axis command PLC axis command

X Y Z A 1 2 3

NC axis Switching axis PLC axis 1st Indexing

8th PLC axis / axis
2nd Indexing axis

504
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

Operation parameter
When switching between the NC axis and PLC axis, the parameters in the following chart are valid only in either NC or
PLC axis mode. The parameters except the following are common to both the NC axis control and the PLC axis control.

Parameters which turn valid only when the axis is controlled as the NC axis:
Parameter No. Operations
Select acceleration/deceletion mode of rapid traverse when the axis is set to NC axis to be
#1200 G0_acc
with constant time or constant angle of inclination.
Select acceleration/deceleration mode of cutting feed when the axis is set to NC axis to be
#1201 G1_acc
with constant time or constant angle of inclination.
Set the G0 command to be acceleration and deceleration before interporation regardless of
#1205 G0bdcc
validity/invalidity of high accuracy control when the axis is set to NC axis.

Parameters which turn valid only when the axis is controlled as the PLC axis (common to non-switching PLC axes
including PLC indexing axes):
Parameter No. Operations
Select acceleration/deceleration mode of rapid traverse when the axis is set to PLC axis to
#21101 add01/bit0
be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.
Select acceleration/deceletion mode of cutting feed when the axis is set to PLC axis to be
#21101 add01/bit1
with constant time or constant angle of inclination.
Select acceleration/deceletion mode of automatic operation mode when the axis is set to PLC
#1361 aux_add
indexing axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

505
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

5.13.5 Interface with PLC

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6
AXIS SWITCHING INVALID
A AXCHGISn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
STATUS
X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6

[Function]
This signal informs that the switching between NC axis and PLC axis cannot be executed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the following conditions apply to the axis which is valid for switching between NC axis and
PLC axis. When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while this signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/PLC
axis switch illegal 1250 will occur.
- While the axis is in motion
- During the Servo OFF
- While removing the axis
- While the axis is stopped for interlock
- While the axis is stopped for override
- During the current limit
- During the droop release
- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command
- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the
program
- During the H/W OT, soft limit
[Related signals]
(1) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)
(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7
A IN PLC AXIS CONTROL PLCMODn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7

[Function]
This signal informs that the mode is PLC axis control for NC axis/PLC axis switching function.
[Operation]
This signal turns OFF during the NC axis control and turns ON during the PLC axis control.
[Related signals]
(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)
(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

506
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- Signal ab-

Signal name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis
tact breviation
Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B
A PLC AXIS SWITCHING CHGPLCn 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12tha axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis
Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB

[Function]
This signal can switch between NC axis and PLC axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC axis. When it is turned OFF, it is controlled as the NC
axis.
Switch this signal after confirming the axis switching invalid signal is OFF.
When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while axis switching invalid signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/
PLC axis switch illegal 1250" will occur. If the axis switching invalid signal is OFF with this state, NC axis and PLC axis
are switched and the alarm will be cleared.
If this signal is switched while executing the axis movement command, NC axis and PLC axis will be switched when the
command is completed and the axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF.

PLC axis switching

(CHGPLCn)

Axis switching invalid status

(AXCHGISn)

Feedrate

In PLC axis control

(PLCMODEn) In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

(1) (2) (3)

(1)
If the PLC switching signal is turned ON when the "axis switching invalid status" signal is OFF (switching is
permitted), the NC axis changes over to the PLC axis control state, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned
ON.
(2) The NC axis does not change over to the NC axis control by turning OFF the "PLC axis switching" signal when the
"axis switching invalid status" signal is ON (where switching is prohibited). An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch
illegal 1250" will occur.
(3) Axis switching invalid status signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. Then the NC axis changes
over to the NC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)
(2) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

507
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation for Each Application

508
 6
Spindle Control

509
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Spindle Control

Spindle speed can be directly controlled by an 8-digit S code command.

The controller selects an appropriate spindle gear stage corresponding to the 8-digit command following the S code and
outputs (spindle gear shift command) it to the machine side (PLC CPU). The controller also outputs S command data
(serial connection data) corresponding to the gear input (spindle gear select input) and spindle speed specified by the
machine side (PLC CPU).

6.1 Related Parameters

The PLC can have up to four gear stages.
The table below lists the four gear stages and the corresponding parameters.

Parameters
Parameter Maximum Output
Spindle Spindle shift Tap cycle Oriented Minimum Input signal
name spindle signal
limit speed speed maximum speed speed speed
Gear stage speed GR2 GR1 GI1 GI2

Slimt1 Smax1 Ssift1 Stap1

1 0 0 0 0
#3001 #3005 #3009 #3013

Slimt2 Smax2 Ssift2 Stap2

2 0 1 0 1
#3002 #3006 #3010 #3014
Sori Smin
#3021 #3023
Slimt3 Smax3 Ssift3 Stap3
3 1 0 1 0
#3003 #3007 #3011 #3015

Slimt4 Smax4 Ssift4 Stap4

4 1 1 1 1
#3004 #3008 #3012 #3016

(Note 1) The upper line shows the parameter name, and the bottom line shows the parameter No.
(Note 2) Set the parameter for the gear stage not being used to 0.

6.2 Connection Method

To serially connect the controller and spindle controller

Control unit
Operation
panel I/O unit Axis drive unit Spindle drive unit

[Spindle forward run,

reverse run,
orientation command, etc.]

[Zero speed, CN1A CN1B

spindle up-to-speed,
OPT
orientation completion signal, etc.]

High-speed serial connection

510
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data

6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data

Part system 1

Operation SF12(X6D8)
program SF11(X658)
G10412,G10413
G10312,G10313 R212,R213
S100 ; R112,R113
•
• +
• G11160,G11161
• (Spindle command rotation speed input: for monitor)
R1600,R1601
S150 ; PLC program process (MOV)
•
• Spindle parameter (SOUT) Spindle drive unit
• G+1160,G+1161 /inverter, etc.
+
• R3900,R3901 0: No output
1: Serial output
S200 ;
Spindle override
• Spindle gear selection
• G11162,G11163
• Spindle stop
• Spindle gear shift R1602,R1603
Spindle orientation, etc. Spindle end command data
Part system 2 (Rotation speed: for monitor)
FIN11(Y71E), FIN21(Y71F)
G11164,G11165
or GFIN1(YD26)
R1604,R1605
S command completion process with Spindle end command data
PLC program (ladder) (12-bit binary: for monitor)

Outline explanation

(1) The "S function strobe 1" (SF1n) signal is output when the spindle (S) command is issued.
(2) After the designated processes is executed by SF1n with the sequence program, the M function finish or gear
shift completion signal is returned to the controller.
(3) Data (rotation speed) corresponding to the S command is output to Spindle rotation speed input (G11160/
R1600 and G11161/R1601) with the completion signal.
(4) The values of spindle rotation speed input are transferred to spindle command rotation speed output(G+1160/
R3900 and G+1161/R3901) with PLC process. (By setting data to the spindle command rotation speed output,
the spindle can be rotated with that value. PLC program for transfer needs to be created by the user.)
(5) Spindle command rotation speed output data is transferred to the spindle drive unit with serial communication
according to the spindle parameter SOUT value.

(Note) If spindle commands from multiple part systems are issued to a spindle, the command issued later will be
applied.

511
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Spindle Control

512
 7
Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

513
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

The following abbreviations are used in the subsequent explanations.

- Miscellaneous function (command) : M function (command)

- Spindle function (command) : S function (command)
- Tool function (command) : T function (command)
- 2nd miscellaneous function (command) : B function (command)
- Miscellaneous function strobe 1 to 4 : MF (MF1, 2, 3, 4)
- Spindle function strobe 1 to 7 : SF (SF1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
- Tool function strobe 1 : TF (TF1)
- 2nd miscellaneous function strobe 1 : BF (BF1)
- Miscellaneous function finish 1, 2 : FIN1, FIN2

7.1 Command Format

(1) The maximum number of commands that can be issued in one block are shown below.

Maximum number of commands

Function
(when released to user)
M function 4 commands
S function 7 commands (Form : Sn = xxxx)
T function 1 command
B function 1 command

(2) The command can have up to eight digits.

(3) A program error will not occur even if more commands than the maximum number are issued. The latter commands
will be valid.
(Example) When five M commands are issued though only four M commands can be used.

M 11 M 12 M 13 M 14 M 15 ；

The last four M commands are valid.

7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish

After the PLC CPU (machine) finished the specified operations for the M, S, T, B commands output with automatic
operation (memory, MDI) or manual numerical commands from the CNC, the finish signal will be returned to the CNC.
However, there are two types of finish signals as shown below. Use these accordingly in one sequence.

(1) FIN1 ... CNC proceeds to next block at falling edge of finish (FIN1n) signal.
(2) FIN2 ... CNC proceeds to next block at rising edge of finish (FIN2n) signal.

The details for FIN1 and FIN2 are also described in the section "4. Explanation of Interface Signals".
Examples of the M function are given in the following section.

514
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish

7.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command)

[Example of machining program]

N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ;

N002 G0Z-2000;
N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ;

Machining program N001 G0X10000…… N002…… N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ；

Axis movement

M code 1 Maa Mee

M code 2 Mbb Mff

M code 3 Mcc Mgg

M code 4 Mdd Mhh

MF1

MF2

MF3

MF4

FIN1 (c)
(b) t1 t2 Next block
t1: User sequence process time

(a) (d) (e) t2: 15 to 30 ms

[Explanation of operation]
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data m (BCD) and MFm to the PLC CPU (machine).
Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF
output timing.
(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and executes the
specified operation. Then, it turns FIN1 ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns MF OFF.
(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.
(e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then proceeds to the next block.

515
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

7.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command)

[Example of machining program]
N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ;
N002 G0Z-20000;
N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ;

Machining program N001 G0X…… N002 Z-20000 ; N003 Mee Mff…… Next block

Axis movement

M code 1 Maa Mee

M code 2 Mbb Mff

M code 3 Mcc Mgg

M code 4 Mdd Mhh

MF1

MF2

MF3

MF4

FIN2

(b)
t2
t1: User sequence process time
(a)
t2: 15 to 30 ms
(c)
t1 (d)

[Explanation of operation]
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data m (BCD) and MFm to the PLC CPU (machine).
Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF
output timing.
(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and executes the
specified operation. Then, it turns FIN2 ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned ON, and proceeds to the next block simultaneously with the turning
OFF of MF.
(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN2 OFF.

516
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish

7.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command)

Machining program Maa Mbb Mcc

M code n Maa Mbb Mcc

MFm

FIN2
(a) (a)

[Explanation of operation]
The general operation is the same as "6.2.2 Operation sequence 2" on the previous page.
(a) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned OFF, and then output the next code signal and MF.

517
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

7.3 M Code Independent Output

The following four types of M codes output "M code independent output" signal (decode signals) separately from their
code signals and MF.The M code independent output is generally used with the following details, but the CNC outputs
only the decode signal, and the operation and finish signal processes, etc., are carried out by the PLC CPU (machine).
Program stop
M00 ： <Example of process>The block stop state is entered when M00 is commanded.
Optional stop
M01 ： <Example of process>The block stop state is entered when M01 is commanded and
the optional stop selection switch is selected.
Program end
M02, M30 ： <Example of process>When M02 or M30 is commanded, "Reset" or "Reset & rewind"
is returned to the CNC, and the reset state is entered.

7.3.1 Operation Sequence

The "M code independent output" signal turns ON when M00, M01, M02 or M30 is commanded during automatic
operation (memory, MDI) or by the manual numerical command, and turns OFF with the "FIN1", "FIN2", "Reset 1",
"Reset 2" or "Reset & rewind" signal.

Example of M01 process (stopping the block with the M01 command)

In automatic start Block stop state

M code M01

M code independent M01

output
MF

FIN1

Optional switch * Turns OFF after confirming that

"In automatic start" is OFF.
Single block
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

[Explanation of operation]
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC CPU (machine).
Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF
output timing.
(b) (c) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out the specified
operation. It then confirms that the "Optional switch" is ON, and then turns "Single block" and "FIN1" ON.
(d) (e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns the MF and "M code independent output" signal
OFF. The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.
(f) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then turns "In automatic start" signal OFF.
(g) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that "In automatic start" signal has turned OFF, and then turns the "Single
block" OFF at the next automatic start.

518
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
7.3 M Code Independent Output

Example of M02 process (carrying out "Reset & rewind" with M02 command)

Reset state
In automatic start

M code M02

M code independent M02

output

MF
* FIN does not turn ON.
FIN1
* Turns OFF after confirming "In reset"
Reset & rewind or "In rewind" signal.

In reset (In rewind)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

[Explanation of operation]
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC CPU (machine).
Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF
output timing.
(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out the specified
operation. It then turns "Reset & rewind" ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that "Reset & rewind" has turned ON, then turns MF, "M code independent output" and "In
automatic start" OFF, and then starts the rewinding operation.
(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms the "In reset" or "In rewind" signals, and then turns the "Reset & rewind"
signal OFF.

519
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

7.4 Axis Movement and M Commands

If an M command is issued in the same block as a movement command, whether to process the M command
simultaneously with the movement command or to process it after the movement is finished, depends on the "Movement
command finish (DEN)" signal output from the CNC. When processing M command after the movement is finished, the
"Movement command finish" (DEN) signal is inserted in the startup condition of M function.

Axis movement and general M command (To execute M command after movement command is finished)

Machining program G01X䂾䂾䂾F䂔䂔 Maa ； G01X ……

Axis movement G01X䂾䂾䂾 G01X ……

M code Maa

MF

Movement
command finish
FIN1

M command
execution
M command execution timing when not using
"Movement command finish" signal

Example: Processing the spindle forward rotation and reverse rotation simultaneously without DEN, while processing the
spindle stop with DEN.

MF1 M3
[= K3 G10304(R104)] < > Spindle forward run
MF1 M4
[= K4 G10304(R104)] < > Spindle reverse run
MF1 DEN M5
[= K5 G10304(R104)] < > Spindle stop

520
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
7.5 Precautions

Axis movement and M code independent output command

(a) When the M code independent output command is issued in the same block as a movement command, the M code
independent output will be output after the movement command is finished.
(b) Even when the M code independent output command is issued without movement command, it will be output after
the axis movement in the previous command block is finished.

For (a) For (b)

Machining program G01X……M00 ； G01X …… M00 ；

Axis movement G01X…

M code M00

MF
M code independent
output M00
M00

Movement
command finish

(Note 1) Refer to the section "7.3 M Code Independent Output" for details on the PLC CPU (machine) process for the M
code independent output.

7.5 Precautions
(1) M code data and MF output timing (Also applies to S, T, B signal)
The M code data m and MFm are output simultaneously to the PLC CPU.
(2) The finish signals (FIN1, FIN2) are commonly used for the M, S, T, B functions, so turn them ON under the conditions
where all function operations have been finished.
(3) When the "M function lock" (AFLn) signal is turned ON, the M, S, T, B functions (including M commands in fixed
cycle) issued during automatic operation (memory, MDI) and manual numerical command, will not be executed. In
other words, the code signal, MF, SF, TF and BF signals will not be output (updated). However, when the M code
independent output (M00, M01, M02, M30) is commanded, the "M code independent output", "M code data" and
MF will be output as usual.
(4) The 2nd miscellaneous (B) function can be selected from address A, B or C using the setup parameters. The "B
function" refers to when address "B" is selected.

521
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

522
 8
Exclusive Instructions

523
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

NC exclusive instruction is limited to its application for the processes which may be difficult to perform only with basic
instruction or function instruction.

NC exclusive instructions include:

(1) ATC exclusive instruction (ATC)
With this instruction, ATC, such as magazine index control, tool change by arm, etc. is performed.
ATC exclusive instructions include:
- Tool No. search
- Tool change
- Tool table forward/reverse run
- Pointer (which displays magazine index position) forward/reverse run
- Tool data read/write, etc.

(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function
as a ring counter is realized.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret, etc. based
on the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC dedicated instruction, or used when controlling the rotary
body position.

(3) Another CPU module's device write instruction (DDWR)

An instruction to write data from the PLC CPU to another CPU module's device

(4) Another CPU module's device read instruction (DDRD)

An instruction to read the data of another CPU module's device to the PLC CPU.

524
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

8.1.1 Outline of ATC Control
The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) control, also called magazine control, is executed in the following two ways:
(1) Mechanical random control
With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control method determines
the direction of magazine rotation, number of steps, etc. for index of the magazine, according to the given
command.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) has a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" that supports the transfer of the tool is provided between the spindle and the
magazine.
This control is possible by not using ATC instruction, but ROT instruction only.
(2) Memory random control
With the information of magazine rotation, or magazine position from the machine, the control method controls
tool No. stored in the memory.
For index of the magazine, the direction of magazine rotation and number of steps, etc. are determined by the
given T command and tool No. stored in the memory.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) does not always have a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" is not provided.

8.1.2 ATC Operation

The motions related to ATC operation can be largely divided into the following four motions:
(1) Index of magazine ....... (ATC-Function No.1, Function No.2, Function No.5, Function No.6, Function No.7,
Function No.8)
(2) Tool change (arm, or the like is used) ....... (ATC-Function No.3, Function No.4)
(3) Transfer of tool to intermediate pot or arm ....... (Normal function instructions such as MOV, XCH are used)
(4) Others ....... (ATC-Function No.9, Function No.10, Function No.11)

525
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.3 Explanation of Terminology

Points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No. are previously
(1) Pointer: recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer serves as
"ring counter" for control of magazine position.
This is the type with tool pots numbered and the relationship between tool pot and tool No. is fixed if the
Fixed pointer
(2) magazine is rotated. When the tool table is rotated, fixed pointer does not functionally differ from
method:
variable pointer method.
Variable pointer This is the type with numbered fixed position on magazine and the relationship between magazine No.
(3)
method: and tool No. changes when the magazine rotates.

7 One step in CW direction

4
CW
5

2
4 5

5 12 2
3 4
12
12 8 3 5
3 8
12 1 3
2 2
1
Pot No. Fixed pointer
Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
Tool No. does not change.
4 One step in CW direction CW

4 2 4 6

9 3 3
12
5 2
2 12 2
1 1
12 8 3 5
Magazine No. 3 8
(fixed)
Variable pointer
Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
changes.

8.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines

[TOOL REGISTRATION]
HEAD NEXT1
99 1
4
4 3 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D
5 3 1 1 11 11
8 7 6 2
2 2 2 12 12
9 5
3 3
7 10 4 1 1 4 4
5 5
11 3
8 12 6 6
12 2 12
1
11
10 11 Pot No.
Magazine No.
Tool No.

Magazine No. (floating pointer method, tool table rotation method)

or pot No. (Fixed pointer method)

When the floating pointer method or tool table rotation method is selected on the tool registration screen,
correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates; when the fixed
pointer method is selected, it does not change.

526
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

8.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions

The use order of the ATC and ROT instructions during the T command or tool change command is shown below:

T command Tool No. search Matching place

ATC instruction
No.
Function No.1 Number of the Error process
Tool No. AND operation matches
search
Pointer or ring ATC instruction
counter value Function No.2

Rotary body Fixed pointer method

indexing Turning Magazine turn Ring counter control
direction ROT instruction
ROT instruction
Variable pointer Function No.3
Function No.1 Number of
method Pointer
steps, etc. forward run /reverse run
ATC instruction
Function No.5
Function No.K6
Tool table
forward run /reverse run
ATC instruction
Function No.7
Function No.8
Magazine stop Tool change
ATC instruction
Tool change Function No.3
command
Arbitrary position tool change
ATC instruction
Function No.4

The relationship between the tool number search instruction and rotary body indexing instruction when the tool table
rotation method or variable pointer method is used is explained below.

Tool table rotation method Variable pointer method

5 0 Current 1 0
position
: 6 1 : 2 1 10
: 2 : 3 2 1 9
7
: 8 3 : 4 3 Target
2 8 position
: 5 4 Current
: 9 4 position
: 10 5 : 6 5
3 7
: 1 6 : 7 6
: 2 7 : 8 7
4 6
: 3 8 : 9 8 5
4 9 10 9
Current
position

Tool No. Pointer

(1) When indexing tool number 8 in the situation given in the above chart,
(a) In the tool table rotation method, the tool number search instruction outputs 3.
(b) In the variable pointer method, the tool number search instruction outputs 7.
(2) The tool number search instruction output result is used by the rotary body indexing instruction to find the rotation
direction, the number of steps, etc.
(a) In the tool table rotation system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship
between current value 0 (pointer 0) and tool number search output result 3.
(b) In the variable pointer method, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship
between current value 4 (pointer 4) and tool number search output result 7, as in (a) above.
In the fixed pointer system, the pointer is fixed to 0 and the ring counter of 0 to n-1 (n is the number of
magazines), separate from the pointer, is controlled. The counter value is used as the current position.

527
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.6 Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction

(1) Available devices

Available devices
Unit access
Internal user device/ Link direct device
File register device Constant
Internal system device (J \ )
(U \G )
Setting Indirect Index
data Word Word
desig- register Decimal, Others
Digit Digit Real
nation Digit (Z ) hexa-
Bit desig- desig- Bit Word Bit Bit Word number
desig- decimal
nation nation string
nation (K,H)
A B
n1 － ○ ○ ○ － ○ ○ － － － － － － ○ － －
S1 － ○ － － － ○ ○ － － － － － － － － －
△ △
D1 － (Note) － － － (Note) － － － － － － － － － －

△ △
(Note) － － － (Note) － － － － － － － － － － －
D2

(Note) Local devices are not available.

[Instruction] [Execution]
symbol condition
Instruction

D.ATC D.ATC n1 S1 D1 D2

Instruction
DP.ATC DP.ATC n1 S1 D1 D2

(2) Setting data

Setting
Setting details Setting range Setting side Data type
data
Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16
n1 3E1h to 3E3h User BIN16 Bit
For CPU No. 2 to 4: H3E1 to H3E3
S1 Head device that stores the control data for request data － User Word
D1 Head device that stores the control data for response data － System Word
Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is
D2
completed. － System Bit

(3) (S1) Control data for request data

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the
S1+0 Size of request data 3 to 6 User
control data for request data.
S1+1 Function No. Designate the No. of function to command. 1 to 11 User
R No. to store
Designate the No. of file that stores the number of tools
S1+2 the number of tools in 0 to 8191 User
in magazine.
magazine
Stores the arguments that correspond to the designated
S1+3
function No.
to Argument 1, 2
Refer to "(1) Control data for request data" in "8.1.7 － User
S1+6
Functions".

528
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(4) (D1) Control data for response data

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Stores the status when an instruction has been
completed.
D1+0 Completion status
0: No error (Successfully completed) － System
Others: Error codes (Note)
Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the
D1+1 Size of response data 0 to 2 System
control data for response data.
D1+2 Response 1 Stores the response data that corresponds to the
designated function No.
Refer to "(2) Control data for response data" in "8.1.7 － System
D1+3 Response 2
Functions".

(Note) For error codes other than "0", see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

(5) (D2) Completion device

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction has been
D2+0 0/1 System
completed.
Completion device
D2+1 Goes ON with D2+0 upon abnormal completion. 0/1 System

(6) Availability of instruction execution for each type

No. Type of execution Availability

1 Initial program Available
2 Scan program Available
3 Fixed-interval program Available (Note)
4 Interrupt program Available (Note)

(Note) Completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, is not recognized in the sequence program (execution type) with
long cycle time. The device is basically programmed in a scan.

529
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.7 Functions
This section explains the functions to execute ATC (Automatic Tool Change) control for the target CPU. D(P).ATC
instruction has 11 functions. Operations of the instruction are decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1).
Size of the request data stored in (S1+0) is also decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1).

Contents and numbers of data, stored in the control data for request data, differ according to the function No. in (S1+1).
Contents and numbers of responses, stored in control data for response data, also differ.
The following tables show the contents of the control data for request data, which are set according to the function No.,
and the contents of responses, which are stored in the control data for response data.

(1) Control data for request data

<For T4-digit specification>

(S1+0) (S1+1)
(S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4)
Size of data Function No. Type of instruction
3 1 Tool No. search -
Tool No. AND Tool No. to be searched (BCD)
4 2 AND data
operation search
3 3 Tool change -
R No. to specify the position of
Arbitrary position tool tool change
4 4 Magazine No. to be changed
change
3 5 Forward run of pointer R No. to specify pointer in -
3 6 Reverse run of pointer R No. to store the magazine -
Forward run of tool number of tools in
3 7 magazine -
table R No. to specify the number of
Reverse run of tool tools in magazine
3 8 -
table
3 9 Tool data read Magazine No. to be read -
Magazine No. to which data is
4 10 Tool data write Data to be written
written
Automatic tool data
3 11 Default value -
write

<For T8-digit specification>

(S1+0) (S1+1)
(S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4) (S1+5) (S1+6)
Size of data Function No. Type of instruction
4 1 Tool No. search - -
Tool No. AND Tool No. to be searched (BCD)
6 2 AND data
operation search
3 3 Tool change R No. to specify - - -
Arbitrary position tool the position of Magazine No. to
4 4 tool change - -
change be changed
3 5 Forward run of pointer R No. to specify - - -
pointer in
3 6 Reverse run of pointer magazine - - -
R No. to store the
Forward run of tool
3 7 number of tools in R No. to specify - - -
table the number of
magazine
Reverse run of tool tools in
3 8 magazine - - -
table
Magazine No. to
3 9 Tool data read - - -
be read
Magazine No. to
5 10 Tool data write which data is Data to be written -
written
Automatic tool data
4 11 Default value - -
write

530
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(2) Control data for response data

<For T4-digit specification>

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

Number of the
1 Tool No. search Size of response data; 2 Search result
matches
Number of the
2 Tool No. AND operation search Size of response data; 2 Search result
matches
3 Tool change Size of response data; 0 - -
4 Arbitrary position tool change Size of response data; 0 - -
5 Forward run of pointer Completion status Size of response data; 0 - -
6 Reverse run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -
7 Forward run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -
8 Reverse run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -
9 Tool data read Size of response data; 1 Read data -
10 Tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -
11 Automatic tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

<For T8-digit specification>

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

Number of the
1 Tool No. search Size of response data; 2 Search result
matches
Number of the
2 Tool No. AND operation search Size of response data; 2 Search result
matches
3 Tool change Size of response data; 0 - -
4 Arbitrary position tool change Size of response data; 0 - -
5 Forward run of pointer Completion status Size of response data; 0 - -
6 Reverse run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -
7 Forward run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -
8 Reverse run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -
9 Tool data read Size of response data; 2 Read data
10 Tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -
11 Automatic tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

531
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.8 Operation Outline

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).ATC instruction is executed.
If (D2+1) has been turned ON, the instruction is abnormally completed. Then the data is stored in completion status
(D1+0). For the values stored, see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

<Operation outline when an instruction is executed>

Sequence program END END END END

ON
D(P).ATC instruction executed
D(P).ATC instruction

CNC-CNC exclusive
communication Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
(0.888ms cycle time)

Reception of D(P).ATC instruction

D(P).ATC instruction received
ON

Completion device
(D2+0)
Only upon abnormal
ON completion
Device that display
the status when an
instruction has been 1 scan
completed (D2+1)

532
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

8.1.9 Errors
SM0 is turned ON and the error code is stored in SD0 when:
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that has already been reserved or has not been
mounted.
(Error code: 2110<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the host CPU itself.
(Error code: 2114<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that does not correspond to the exclusive
instructions in this section.
(Error code: 2117<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the invalid value (not within 3E0H to 3E3H).
(Error code: 4100<OPERATION ERROR>)

CNC CPU outputs the following error codes to the completion status when:
- An invalid function No. (out of the range 0 to 11) was specified. (Error code: 3200)
- An invalid R No. to store the number of tools in magazine (out of the range 4710 to 4714) was specified. (Error code:
3201)
- An invalid tool No. (negative value or over the number of tools) is specified.(Error code: 3202)
- An invalid magazine No. was specified. (Error code: 3203)
- An invalid number of arguments was specified. (Error code: 3207)

8.1.10 Program Example

(1) Executes an ATC instruction (tool No. search) to CPU No.2 (Q17nNCCPU) when X0 is turned ON.

X0 SM771
MOV K3 D100

MOV K1 D101

MOV K4710 D102

MOV R220 D103

DP.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M10

M10 M11

Program upon normal completion

M11
Program upon abnormal completion

533
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.11 File Register Allocation and Parameters for ATC Control

(1) File registers for ATC control
File registers used for ATC control are as shown below.
The number enclosed with brackets "( )" is a relative address of the shared device.

R register for corresponding file

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks
Specification (data type)
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T8-digit T8-digit
T4-digit/T8-digit
R4700
ATC control parameters
(2210) ← ← ← ← ←

Number of magazine R4710 R4711 R4712

designation (2220) ← (2221) ← (2222) ← Binary

R4715 R4716 R4717

Pointer designation
(2225) ← (2226) ← (2227) ← Binary

R4720 R4730
R4720 R4721 R4730 R4731
Spindle tool - - BCD
(2230) (2230) (2240) (2240)
(2231) (2241)
R4722 R4732
R4721 R4723 R4731 R4733
Standby 1 tool - - BCD
(2231) (2232) (2241) (2242)
(2233) (2243)
R4724 R4734
R4722 R4725 R4732 R4735
Standby 2 tool - - BCD
(2232) (2234) (2242) (2244)
(2235) (2245)
R4726 R4736
R4723 R4727 R4733 R4737
Standby 3 tool - - BCD
(2233) (2236) (2243) (2246)
(2237) (2247)
R4728 R4738
R4724 R4729 R4734 R4739
Standby 4 tool - - BCD
(2234) (2238) (2244) (2248)
(2239) (2249)
AUX data R4748 ← ← ← ← ← Binary (0 to 99)

534
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

R register for corresponding file

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks
Specification (data type)
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
T4-digit/T8-digit
R4750 R4990 R5230
R4750 R4751 R4990 R4991 R5230 R5231
MG1 BCD
(2260) (2260) (2500) (2500) (2740) (2740)
(2261) (2501) (2741)
R4752 R4992 R5232
R4751 R4753 R4991 R4993 R5231 R5233
MG2 BCD
(2261) (2262) (2501) (2502) (2741) (2742)
(2263) (2503) (2743)
R4754 R4994 R5234
R4752 R4755 R4992 R4995 R5232 R5235
MG3 BCD
(2262) (2230) (2502) (2504) (2742) (2744)
Magazine tool data (2231) (2505) (2745)

: : : : : : : :

R4906 R5146 R5386

R4828 R4907 R5068 R5147 R5308 R5387
MG79 BCD
(2338) (2416) (2578) (2656) (2818) (2896)
(2417) (2657) (2897)
R4908 R5148 R5388
R4829 R4909 R5069 R5149 R5309 R5389
MG80 BCD
(2339) (2418) (2579) (2658) (2819) (2898)
(2419) (2659) (2899)
(Note 1) The maximum number of tools to be set is 80 per magazine.
(Note 2) Tool registration screen is provided only for No.1 magazine.

(2) Contents of control parameter

R4700 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(2210)
0:T4-digit
Max. number of standby
1:T8-digit
displayed: 4

0:Magazine starts from "1"

1:Magazine starts from "0"

535
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.1.12 Details of Each Instruction

Tool No. search

Searches for the tool No. stored in the magazine (tool data table) and outputs the number of the matches as well as their
location in the tool data table. If two or more tool Nos. are found, the location of tool No. closest to the pointer is output.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K1 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 2
Matched at (3) in
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number D202 3 tool data table
of tools in magazine
D103 K234 Tool No. to be searched 2 Number of data
found: 2
Based on the output result, the rotation
File registers for ATC allocated in NC
direction, the number of steps, etc. are
figured out by using the ROT instruction.

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine

R4715 2 Pointer

R4750 234 (0) Tool data table head

(fixed)
R4751 567 (1)
100 (2)
Two locations have data "234". The location "3", which is closer
234 (3) to the pointer No., is output.

(Note 1) Pointer and location are numbered from the

R4758 101 (8) tool data table head as 0,1,2,...9.
R4759 102 (9) (Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when
not used.

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

536
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

Tool No. AND operation search

The function of this instruction is as same as that of the tool number search instruction (ATC K1). Search data and in-
magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K4 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K2 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 2 Matched at (3) in
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number D202 3 tool data table
of tools in magazine
D103 234 Tool No. to be searched 3 Number of data
D104 HF000 AND data found: 3
Based on the output result, the rotation
File registers for ATC allocated in NC
direction, the number of steps, etc. are
figured out by using the ROT instruction.

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine

R4715 2 Pointer

R4750 2001 (0) Tool data table head

(fixed)
R4751 1002 (1)
3003 (2)
Three locations have data "2***". The location "3", which is
2004 (3) closest to the pointer No., is output.

(Note 1) Pointer and location are numbered from the

R4758 1009 (8) tool data table head as 0,1,2,...9.
R4759 2010 (9) (Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not
used.

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

537
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Tool change
This instruction is used to update the contents in the memory (R register) after a spindle tool and a magazine index tool
have been exchanged by the ATC arm, etc.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K3 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
of tools in magazine
D103 K4720 R No. to specify
the position of tool
change
File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine
R4715 2 Pointer

R4720 1234

R4750 1000 (0) Tool data table head

(fixed)
R4751 1001 (1)
R4752 1002 (2)
Change the content "1234" in R4720 (R No. to specify tool
1003 (3) change position) with the content "1002" in R4752, which is
designated by R4715 (R No. to specify pointer position).

(Note 1) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when

R4758 1008 (8) not used.
R4759 1009 (9)

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

538
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

Arbitrary position tool change

In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur, however, that tool
change is required at other stations (tool change at spare tool change position, for example). This instruction is used in
such a case.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K4 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K4 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
R No. to store the number
D102 K4710 of tools in magazine
D103 K4720 R No. to specify
the position of tool change
D104 K5 Magazine No. to be changed

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

Number of tools
R4710 10
in magazine
R4715 2 Pointer

R4720 1234 Tool data table head Spindle tool in this example

R4750 1000 (0) 9 8

R4751 1001 (1) 10 9
1002 (2) MG1 MG0
1003 (3) 2 1
1004 (4) 3 2
1005 (5) 4 3 (Note 1) Tool change position differs depending on
1006 (6) whether magazine No. starts from "0" or "1".
⑤ 4
However, the substantial consequence does
1007 (7) 6 ⑤ not differ.
R4758 1008 (8) 7 6 (Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when
R4759 1009 (9) 8 7 not used.

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

539
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Forward run of pointer

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actual magazine position
when the magazine rotates in forward direction.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K5 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
of tools in magazine
D103 K4715 R No. to specify
pointer in magazine

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine

R4715 1→2 Pointer

Pointer No. is incremented.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control

sequence is as follows:
0,1,2,3,...9,0,1,2,...8,9,0,1,...
(Note 1) This instruction changes the relation between magazine
No. and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

540
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

Reverse run of pointer

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actual magazine position
when the magazine rotates in reverse direction.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K6 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
of tools in magazine
D103 K4715 R No. to specify pointer
in magazine

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine

R4715 2→1 Pointer

Pointer No. is decremented

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control

sequence is as follows:
2,1,0,9...2,1,0,9,8,...1,0,9...
(Note 1) This instruction changes the relation between magazine No.
and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

541
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Forward run of tool table

This instruction is used to rotate the tool table in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K7 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
D103 K4710 of tools in magazine

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10

R4750 1000
R4751 1001
R4752 ・
・
・ (Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0"
R4760 1010 (tool table head).
(Note 2) This instruction changes the relation between
magazine No. and tool No. on the tool registration
screen.

542
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

Reverse run of tool table

This instruction is used to rotate the tool table in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K8 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
D103 K4710 of tools in magazine

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10

R4750 1000
R4751 1001
R4752 ・
・ (Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0"
・ (tool table head).
R4760 1010 (Note 2) This instruction changes the relation between
magazine No. and tool No. on the tool registration
screen.

543
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Tool data read

This instruction is used to read out a specific tool No. in the magazine.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K9 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 1
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number D202 1004/1005
of tools in magazine Read data
D103 K3 Magazine No. to be read

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine
R4715 2 Pointer

R4750 1000 (0) 9 8

R4751 1001 (1) 10 9
1002 (2) MG1 MG0
1003 (3) 2 1
1004 (4) ③ 2 (Note 1) Tool change position differs depending
1005 (5) 4 ③ on whether magazine No. starts from
1006 (6) 5 4 "0" or "1". However, the substantial
consequence does not differ.
1007 (7) 6 5
(Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0"
R4758 1008 (8) 7 6 when not used.
R4759 1009 (9) 8 7

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

544
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

Tool data write

This instruction is used to write a tool No. to each magazine No. through PLC program, instead of using the setting and
display unit.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K4 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K10 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
K4710 R No. to store the number
D102 of tools in magazine
D103 K3 Magazine No. to which
data is written
D104 K1234 Data to be written

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine
R4715 2 Pointer

R4750 1000 (0) 9 8

R4751 1001 (1) 10 9
1002 (2) MG1 MG0
1003 (3) 2 1
(4) ③ 2
Data "1234" is written to magazine No.3.
(5) 4 ③
1006 (6) 5 4
1007 (7) 6 5
R4758 1008 (8) 7 6 (Note) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0"
when not used.
R4759 1009 (9) 8 7

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

545
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Automatic tool data write

All tool Nos. are written in batch. This instruction is used for initialization and so on.
Data is written for each tool while incrementing the default value one by one.

ACT
D.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M100

D100 K3 Number of arguments D200 Completion status

D101 K11 Function No. D201 Size of response data; 0
D102 K4710 R No. to store the number
of tools in magazine
D103 K1000 Tool No. to be searched

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

R4710 10 Number of tools

in magazine

R4715 2 Pointer

R4750 1008 (0) Tool data table head

(fixed)
R4751 1009 (1)
1000 (2)
Data is written for each tool while incrementing the default
1001 (3) value one by one from the location indicated by the pointer.
1002 (4)
1003 (5)
1004 (6)
(Note) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0"
1005 (7) when not used.
R4758 1006 (8)
R4759 1007 (9)

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

546
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.2 ROT Instruction

8.2 ROT Instruction

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function as a
is realized.
This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret, etc. based on
the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC instruction, or used when controlling the rotary body position.

8.2.1 Instruction List

Instruction Description
D.ROT S1 D1 D2n Rotary body indexing/ring counter

8.2.2 Format of ROT Instruction

(1) Available devices

Available devices
Unit access
Internal user device/ Link direct device
File register device Constant
Internal system device (J □ \ □ )
In- (U □ \G □ )
Setting Index
Word direct Word
data register Decimal, Others
Digit Digit desig- Real
Digit (Z □ ) hexa-
Bit desig- desig- Bit Word nation Bit Bit Word number
desig- decimal
nation nation string
nation (K,H)
A B
n1 － ○ ○ ○ － ○ ○ － － － － － － ○ － －
S1 － ○ － － － ○ ○ － － － － － － － － －
△ △
D1 － (Note) － － － (Note) － － － － － － － － － －

△ △
(Note) － － － (Note) － － － － － － － － － － －
D2

(Note) Local devices are not available.

[Instruction] [Execution]
symbol condition
Instruction

D.ROT D.ROT n1 S1 D1 D2

Instruction

DP.ROT DP.ROT n1 S1 D1 D2

547
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

(2) Setting data

Setting
Details Setting range Setting side Data type
data
Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16
n1 3E1h to 3E3h User BIN16 Bit
For CPU No. 2 to 4: H3E1 to H3E3
S1 Head device that stores the control data for request data － User Word
D1 Head device that stores the control data for response data － System Word
Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is
D2
completed. － System Bit

(3) (S1) Control data for request data

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Set the number of words of arguments to store in the
S1+0 Number of arguments 4、5 User
control for the request data.
S1+1 Function No. Designate the No. of function to command. 1、3 User
Set the parameter that designates the specifications of
S1+2 Parameter
rotary body to control. － User

Stores the arguments corresponding to the designated

S1+3
function No.
to Argument 1 to 3
Refer to "(1) Control data for request data" in "8.2.3 － User
S1+5
Functions".

(4) (D1) Control data for response data

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Stores the status when an instruction has been
completed.
D1+0 Completion status
0: No error (Successfully completed) － System
Others: Error codes (Note)
Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the
D1+1 Size of response data 0 to 2 System
control data for response data.
D1+2 Response 1 Stores the response data corresponding to the
designated function No.
Refer to "(2) Control data for response data" in "8.2.3 － System
D1+3 Response 2
Functions".
(Note) For error codes other than "0", see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

(5) (D2) Completion device

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

D2+0 Goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is completed. 0/1 System

Completion device
D2+1 Goes ON with D2+0 upon abnormal completion. 0/1 System

(6) Availability of instruction execution for each type

No. Type of execution Availability

1 Initial program Available
2 Scan program Available
3 Fixed-interval program Available (Note)
4 Interrupt program Available (Note)

(Note) Completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, is not recognized in the sequence program (execution type)
with long cycle time. The device is basically programmed in a scan.

548
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.2 ROT Instruction

8.2.3 Functions
This instruction is used to determine the rotary body's target position, rotation direction, etc. in the target CPU.
D(P).ROT instruction has 2 functions. Operations of the instruction are decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1). The
number of arguments stored in (S1+0) is also decided according to the function No. stored in (S1+1).

Contents and number of data, stored in the control data for request data, differ according to the function No. in (S1+1).
Contents and number of responses, stored in control data for response data, also differ.
The following tables show the contents of the control data for request data, which are set according to the function No.,
and the contents of responses, which are stored in the control data for response data.

(1) Control data for request data

S1+0) (S1+1)
Number of (S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4) (S1+5)
Function No. Type of instruction
arguments
Number of rotary body
5 1 Rotary body indexing Parameter Current position Target position
indexing cycles
Number of rotary
R No. to specify ring
4 3 Ring counter Parameter
counter
body indexing －
cycles

(2) Control data for response data

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

Rotary direction
Number of output
1 Rotary body indexing Completion status Size of response data; 2 0:CW
steps
1:CCW
3 Ring counter Completion status Size of response data; 0 － －

549
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.2.4 Operation Outline

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).ROT instruction is executed.
If (D2+1) has been turned ON, the instruction is abnormally completed. Then the data is stored in completion status
(D1+0).For the values stored, see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

<Operation outline when an instruction is executed>

Sequence program
END END END END

ON
D(P).ROT
D(P).ROT instruction instruction executed

CNC-CNC exclusive
communication
Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
(every 0.888ms)

Reception of D(P).ROT
D(P).ROT instruction instruction received
ON

Completion device
(D2+0)
Only upon abnormal
ON completion
Device that display
the status when an
1 scan
instruction has been
completed (D2+1)

550
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.2 ROT Instruction

8.2.5 Errors
SM0 is turned ON and the error code is stored in SD0 when:
- “Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16” (n1) specified the CPU already been reserved or has not been mounted.
(Error code: 2110<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the operating CPU itself.
(Error code: 2114<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that does not correspond to the exclusive
instructions in this section.
(Error code: 2117<SP. UNIT ERROR>)
- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the invalid value (not within 3E0H to 3E3H).
(Error code: 4100<OPERATION ERROR>)

CNC CPU outputs the following error codes to the completion status when:
- An invalid function No. (other than 0 and 3) was specified. (Error code: 3200)
- An invalid number of rotary body indexing cycles (negative) was specified. (Error code: 3204)
- An invalid current position was set. (Error code: 3205)
- An invalid parameter was specified (calculation does not result to 11). (Error code: 3206)
- An invalid number of arguments was specified. (Error code: 3207)

8.2.6 Program Example

(1) Executes an ROT instruction (tool No. search) on CPU No.2 (Q17nNCCPU) when X0 is turned ON.

X0 SM771
MOV K5 D100
MOV K1 D101

MOV H8 D102

MOV K1X30 D103

MOV R220 D104

MOV K6 D105
DP. ROT H3E1 D100 D200 M10
M10 M11

Program upon normal completion

M11
Program upon abnormal completion

551
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.2.7 Details of Each Instruction

Rotary body indexing

Direction of rotation and number of steps of ATC magazine (or turret) are determined.

D.ROT H3E1 Dn Dm Mm

Dn K5 Number of Dm Completion status

arguments
Dn+1 K1 Function No. Dm+1 Size of response data; 2
Dn+2 Parameter Dm+2 Number of output steps
Dn+3 Current position Dm+3 Rotary direction
Dn+4 Target position 0:CW
Dn+5
Number of rotary body 1:CCW
indexing cycles

(Note) CW or CCW output is controlled so that it takes a short circuit

regardless of parameter specification.

Contents of Rp(parameter)

15 14 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(Spare)
0 : Rotary body starts from 1
1 : Rotary body starts from 0

0 : Direction of rotation is determined for

4 3 shorter reach
1 : Direction of rotation is not determined for
shorter reach

0 0 : (Step No. +1) is counted

0 1 : Step No. is counted
1 0 : (Step No. -1) is counted
When the current value is equal to the target value,
“-1” is counted.

552
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.2 ROT Instruction

(Example) Rotary body index by ROT-Function No.1 instruction

Conditions
(i) The number of rotary body index is 6.
(ii) The target position is set with the T command. The T command is set with the parameters so that it outputs to the
PLC with a binary. (Set base specification parameter Tbin to 1.)

6
1 5
Target position

2 4
M
3

Current position

PLC CPU
0 X30 Y10
Index code 2 CW
Index code 2 1 X31 PLC Y11 CCW
2
processing
Index code 2 X32
Index code 2 3 X33
G10320-G10321/
Index code strobe X34 R120-R121 Y71E

CNC CPU Auxiliary function

completed
T code data (Fin)
T command ON

In the example of ladder circuit shown below, the rotation direction is determined by the T command and current position
data given by the machine, and the rotary body is rotated in that direction until the target position reaches the current
position. When indexing is completed, the auxiliary command completion signal is turned ON.

553
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Shared memory device

ACT
D.ROT H3E1 Dn Dm Mm
T command G10320 1 to 6 (binary)
Top of request data (from CNC)
Completion G10321
(D100 in this example) status 0
Top of response data
(D200 in this example)

File register (R) map

M1000
MOV K5 D100 Number of request data stored D100 5
MOV K1 D101 Function No. stored D101 1
MOV H8 D102 Parameter stored D102 8
MOV K6 D105 Number of rotary body D103 1 to 6
indexing cycles stored
D104 1 to 6
X34
PLS M100 Strobe rising signal created D105 6
M100
MOV K1X30 D103 Current position stored
X650
MOV U3E1\G10320 D104 Target position (T command) stored
X650
DP.ROT H3E1 D100 D200 M200 CW or CCW is determined
M200 M201 with the ROT instruction
SET M204 ROT instruction completed
D200 Completion status
M201
SET M205 Error check → When required D201 Size of response
X650 M202
= U3E1\G10320 D103 Stop signal created (Note 1) D202 Number of steps
M200 M203
(target value = current value)
= K0 D202 Stop signal created (Note 1) D203 CW/CCW
M204 M202 Y10 (number of steps = 0)
= K0 D203 CW
(M203) Y11
<> K0 D203 CCW
Y71E
Completion circuit Auxiliary function completed
RST M204 ROT instruction completed and reset
M1000 M1000
On-signal after PLC1 scan
M1000

(Note 1) Either M202 or M203 can be used for a stop signal.

(Note 2) The X and Y devices used above are set on the premise that the data is transferred to the device that coincides
with the CNC internal device.
(Note 3) The D devices are used in this example for no special purpose. Use any device within the available range.
(Note 4) If a value from 1 to 6 has not been set for current position data (D103) before the ROT instruction is issued, an
error will occur.
(Note 5) The contents of the control parameter (D102) is as follow:
- Rotary body starts from 1
- Take a short cut.
- Calculate the number of steps.

554
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.2 ROT Instruction

Ring counter (Up/down counter)

This instruction is used to control position of rotary body.

ACT
DP.ROT H3E1 Dn Dm Mm

Device that goes ON upon completion

Ring counter instruction
Top of response data

Top of request data

Dn 4 Number of arguments is stored.

Dn+1 3 Function No. is stored.
Dn+2 Parameter Parameter is stored.
Dn+3 Ring counter Device No. of ring counter is stored.
Dn+4 Num of indexing Number of rotary body indexing cycles is stored.

The ring counter is a binary counter; it is used as an up/down counter of "start from 0" or "start from 1" according to the
parameter rotary body selection.
For ring counter, specify the device No. of CNC internal device on which up/down operation is executed.

15 - - - 3 2 1 0
F E
Rotary body selection
Error output 0 : Rotary body starts from 1
Instruction code --- DR.ROT Function No.n 1 : Rotary body starts from 0
(the value of "Dn+1") is
neither 1 or 3
Up/down selection
0 : Up counter
1 : Down counter

(Note 1) The ring counter instruction is executed after setting R No. to Rn to Rn+1 and specifying data for the
parameter.
(Note 2) The error completion (Mm) of the ring counter instruction and the error output in bit F of the parameter (Rp) are
cleared when the activating signal (ACT) goes OFF. The activating signal (ACT) of the ring counter instruction
is generally pulsed. This makes it hard for the interface diagnostic and ladder monitor programs to detect an
error signal. For debugging, therefore, an error hold circuit is provided after the ring count instruction to ease
error detection.

555
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

This instruction is to execute a batch data write from PLC CPU to a device in another CPU.

DDWR instruction image figure

NC

(S2) Device memory (S3) Device memory

D0 W10
； ； (S1+1) ； ； (S1+1)
10 words 10 words
Write
D9 W19

556
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction

(1) Available devices

Usable device
Unit access
Internal user device/ Link direct device
File register device Constant
Internal system device (J □ \ □ )
Setting (U □ \G □ ) Index
In-
data Word direct Word register
Note 1 design
Decimal, Real Others
Digit Digit hexa-
ation Digit Num-
Bit designa designa Bit Word Bit Bit Word (Z □ ) decimal
designa ber
tion tion
tion (K,H) String
A B
n1 － ○ ○ ○ － ○ ○ － － － － － － ○ － －
△ △
－ － － － Note 3 ○ － － － － － － － － －
S1
Note 2
S2 － ○ ○ － － ○ ○ － － － － － － － － －
S3 － ○ － － － ○ ○ － － － － － － － ○ －
△ △
D1
Note 2 － － － Note 3 － － － － － － － － － － －

○ : Available to designate △ : Partially available to designate

(Note 1): Index qualification can be used for setting data (n1) to (D1).
(Note 2): Local devices cannot be used.
(Note 3): Each program's file register cannot be used.

Instruction Execution
[ symbol ] [ condition ]
Instruction
D.DDWR D.DDWR n1 S1 S2 S3 D1

Instruction
DP.DDWR DP.DDWR n1 S1 S2 S3 D1

(2) Setting data

Setting
Settings Setting side Data type
data
Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16
The followings are the values actually assigned. BIN16
n1 User
No. 2: H3E1　No. 3: H3E2　No. 4: H3E3 Bit
(Note) NC CPU cannot be No.1 with multi-CPU configuration.
S1 The host CPU's head device which stores control data. User Word
S2 The host CPU's head device which stores the write data. User Word
S3 The target CPU unit's head device which stores the write data. User Word
Completion device
(D1+0): Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan at the completion of the instruction.
D1 System Bit
(D1+): Device that goes ON for 1 scan at the abnormal completion of the instruction.
(D1+0 will also be turned ON at the abnormal completion)

(3) Control data

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

Stores the status when an instruction has been completed.
S1+0 Completion status 0: No error (Successfully completed) － System
Other than 0: Error code
S1+1 Number of write data Set the number of write data with word unit. 1 to 100 User

557
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Details of control
In multi-CPU configuration, the data stored in each of the host CPU's devices starting from the one specified with (S2) by
the number specified with (S1+1) are copied. The copied data are stored in each of the devices starting from the one
specified with (S3) of the target CPU (n1).
Bit device digit designation is available for (S2) and (S3). However, it is 4-digit designation and only a multiple of 16 is
available for the start bit device No. If the value other than that is designated, MULTI-COM.ERROR [4353] will occur.
D(P).DDWR instruction being accepted and normal/abnormal completion can be confirmed with the status display device
(D1+1) at the completion of completion device (D1).
(a) Completion device
It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the next END process.
(b) State display device at completion
It turns ON/OFF depending on the condition at the instruction completion.
- Successfully completed: It stays OFF.
- Abnormal completion: It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the
next END process.
(Error code will be stored in the control data (S1+0: completion status) at the abnormal completion.)

NC devices that can write with DDWR instruction are shown below.

Usable NC devices

Device Usable device range Representation

W 0 to 1FFF Hexadecimal
ZR 0 to 4184063 (Note 1)(Note 2) Decimal
(Note 1) If a specified device is write-disabled, an error occurs (error code: 3001(HEX)).
(Note 2) The ZR devices ZR60000 to ZR67999 are used for reading and writing common variables.
For details, refer to "8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables".

558
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

8.3.2 Operation when executing the DDWR instruction

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).DDWR instruction is executed.

<The outline of operation between CPUs>

Sequence program BND BND BND

ON
D(P).DDWR instruction executed

D(P).DDWR instruction

Request data set

Communication reception process Transfer

exclusive among the CPUs 0.88ｍs
Response data set

Target CPU D(P).DDWR

D(P).DDWR instructionreception
instruction reception process Set
process

The operating CPU storage device

(D1) ON

Completion device
Only upon abnormal
D(2+0)
ON completion

Device that display

the status when an 1 scan
instruction has been
completed (D2+1)

Precautions
- Execute this instruction when the target NC CPU has started up. It cannot be executed without starting up the target
CPU. (No process will occur.)
- After executed this instruction, do not change the device range etc. which is designated in the setting data until the
completion device is turned ON. If the change is made, data (the completion status and completion device) to be
stored in the system cannot be stored correctly.
- When executing this instruction without empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area, it will be
abnormal completion. Abnormal completion because of not having the empty block for the exclusive instruction
transmission area can be avoided by using a flag for with/without the exclusive instruction transmission area empty
block (SM796 to 799) as the instruction interlock.

559
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.3.3 Error contents

Abnormal completion occurs in the following cases, and the error code will be stored in the device which is designated by
the completion status storage device (S1+0).

Completion status
Error factors Remedy
error code
The instruction request from PLC CPU to NC CPU exceeds
0010 (HEX) the tolerance. Decrease the number of instructions to execute at
( 16 ) (No empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission a time and adjust them to be within the tolerance.
area.)
3001 (HEX) The device which is designated by the program cannot be Refer to "Device" of "(3) Control data" and
( 12289 ) used with NC CPU. Or outside the device range. designate the usable device with NC CPU.
3080 (HEX) The number of write data which is set with D(P).DDWR
Set the number of read data 1 to 100.
( 12416 ) instruction is illegal.
3209 (HEX) The common variable control data is not set correctly in the
Set the common variable control data correctly.
(12809) D(P).DDWR instruction.
(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

8.3.4 Calculation error

In the following cases, the calculation error occurs, the diagnosis error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code will be
stored in the diagnosis error register (SD0).

Error code Error factors Remedy

An incorrect target CPU unit was selected by the instruction
set in the program.
10FE (HEX) (1) The designated unit has already been reserved.
( 4350 ) (2) CPU which is not mounted is designated.
(3) Head I/O No. of target CPU unit divided by 16 (n1) is not
within 3E0H to 3E3H.
The designated target CPU cannot be executed.
10FF (HEX) (1) The instruction name is incorrect.
( 4351 ) (2) The instruction which is not supported by the target CPU
Read the common information of the error using
is executed.
a programming tool, check error step
1100 (HEX) An incorrect number of devices are designated in the corresponding to its numerical value (program
( 4352 ) program. error location), and correct the problem.
1101 (HEX)
An unusable device is designated in the program.
( 4353 )
1102 (HEX)
An unusable character string is designated in the program.
( 4354 )
1104 (HEX)
The number of write data is outside the range of 1 to 100.
( 4355 )
1005 (HEX) The number of write data is outside the range of the write
( 4101 ) data's storage device.
(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

560
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

8.3.5 Interlock using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC

Special relay SM796 to SM799 (block information used for instruction exclusive for Multi CPU high speed transmission)
can be used as an interlock when using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC.
When a number of Multi CPU high speed transmission instructions are executed at once, use SM796 to SM799 as an
interlock for Multi CPU high speed transmission instructions.

When using special relay SM796 to SM799, set the maximum number of blocks used for special register SD796 to
SD799 of each CPU. (Maximum number of blocks that DDWR instruction uses is 7 and a DDRD instruction uses is 1.)
When the Multi CPU high speed transmission area becomes less than the number of blocks set in the SD796 to SD799,
corresponding special relay (SM796 to 799) will be turned ON.

No.1 No.2
Multi-CPUs high-speed Multi-CPUs high-speed
communication area communication area
Execution SM
command 797 Sending area Receiving area
(1 -> 2) (1 -> 2)
D(P).DDWR H3E1
In use

Number of requested
block : 4
Number of
unused block
2
Turn ON the SM797 where there are enough unused

blocks for D(P).DDWR instruction.

(Not execute the D(P).DDWR instruction) Not enough unused block to write
the request of D(P).DDWR instruction.

Increasing the unused area for request block in the sending area (1 -> 2)
No.1 No.2
Multi-CPUs high-speed Multi-CPUs high-speed
communication area communication area
Execution SM
command 797 Sending area Receiving area
(1 -> 2) (1 -> 2)
D(P).DDWR H3E1
In use

Number of requested
block : 4 Number of
unused block

8
Turn OFF the SM797 as there are enough unused blocks

for D(P).DDWR instruction.

(Execute the D(P).DDWR instruction) Enable to write the request of D(P).DDWR

instruction.

561
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.3.6 Program example

(Example) A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No.2 when SM796 to 799 is used as an
interlock and X0 has started up.

SM402
Set the maximum number of
MOV K7 SD797
used blocks per instruction.

SM402

MOV K100 D1301 Set the number of write data.

X0

SET M2000

M2000 SM797
Store the D1400 to D1499 of the
D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 W0 M2001 operating CPU to W0 to W99
of the No.2 CPU.

RST M2000

562
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

This instruction is to read the device data in the other CPUs to the PLC CPU.

DDRD instruction image figure

(n1)
3E1h

NC

(D1) Device memory (S2) Device memory

D0 W10
； ； (S1+1) ； ； (S1+1)
10 words 10 words
Read
D9 W19

563
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.4.1 Format of DDRD Instruction

(1) Usable devices

Usable device
Unit access
Internal user device/internal Link direct device
File register device Constant
system device (J □ \ □ )
Setting (U □ \G □ )
data Word Indirect Word Index register
*1
designa Real Others
Digit Digit tion (Z □ ) Decimal,
Digit hexa-charact
Bit designa designa Bit Word Bit Bit Word decima
designa er
tion tion (K,H) string
tion
A B
n1 － ○ ○ ○ － ○ ○ － － － － － － ○ － －
△ △
S1 － Note 2 － － － Note 3 ○ － － － － － － － － －

S2 － ○ ○ － － ○ ○ － － － － － － － ○ －
△ △ △
D1 － Note 2 Note 2 － － Note 3 ○ － － － － － － － － －

△ △
D2
Note 1 － － － Note 3 － － － － － － － － － － －

○ : Available to designate △ : Partially available to designate

(Note 1) Index qualification can be used for setting data (n1) to (D1).
(Note 2) Local devices are not available.
(Note 3) Each program's file register cannot be used.

Instruction Execution
[ symbol ] [ condition ]
Instruction
D.DDRD D.DDRD n1 S1 S2 D1 D2

Instruction
DP.DDRD DP.DDRD n1 S1 S2 D1 D2

(2) Setting data

Setting
Settings Setting side Data type
data
Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16
The followings are the values actually assigned. BIN16
n1 User
No. 2: H3E1　No. 3: H3E2　No. 4: H3E3 Bit
(Note) Motion CPU cannot be No.1 with multi-CPU configuration.
S1 The host CPU's head device which stores control data. User Word
S2 The target CUP unit's head device that the data to be read is stored. User Word
D1 The host CPU's head device that stores the read data. User Word
Completion device
(D1+0): Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan at the completion of the instruction.
D2 System Bit
(D1+1): Device that goes ON for 1 scan at the abnormal completion of the instruction.
(D1+0 will also be turned ON at the abnormal completion)

(3) Control data

Device Item Setting Setting range Setting side

Stores the status when an instruction has been completed.
S1+0 Completion status 0: No error (Successfully completed) － System
Other than 0: Error code
S1+1 Number of read data Set the number of read data with word unit. 1 to100 User

564
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

Details of control

In multi-CPU configuration, the data stored in each of the devices starting from the one specified with (S2) of the target
CPU (n1) by the number specified with (S1+1) are copied. The copied data are stored in each of the host CPU's devices
starting from the one specified with (D1).
Bit device digit designation is available for "S2" and "D1". However, it is 4-digit designation and only a multiple of 16 is
available for the start bit device No. If the value other than that is designated, MULTI-COM.ERROR [4353] will occur.
D(P).DDRD instruction being accepted and normal/abnormal completion can be confirmed with the status display device
(D2+1) at the completion of completion device (D2).
(a) Completion device
It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the next END process.
(b) State display device at completion
It turns ON/OFF depending on the condition at the instruction completion.
- Successfully completed: It stays OFF.
- Abnormal completion: It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the
next END process.
(Error code will be stored in the control data (S1+0: completion status) at the abnormal completion.)

NC devices that can write with DDRD instruction are shown below.

Usable NC devices

Device Usable device range Representation

W 0 to 1FFF Hexadecimal
ZR 0 to 4184063 (Note 1)(Note 2) Decimal
(Note 1) If a specified device is write-disabled, an error occurs (error code: 3001(HEX)).
(Note 2) The ZR devices from ZR60000 to ZR67999 are used for reading and writing common variables.
For details, refer to "8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables".

565
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.4.2 Operation when executing the DDRD instruction

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).DDRD instruction is executed.

The outline of operation between CPUs

Sequence program BND BND BND

ON
D(P).DDRD instruction executed

D(P). DDRD instruction

Request data set

Communication reception process Transfer

exclusive among the CPUs 0.88ms
Response data set

Target CPU D(P).DDRD D(P).DDRD instruction reception

instruction reception process process
Set

The operating CPU storage device

(D1)
ON

Completion device
Only upon abnormal
D(2+0)
ON completion

Device that display

the status when an 1 scan
instruction has been
completed (D2+1)

Precautions
- Execute this instruction when the target NC CPU has started up. It cannot be executed without starting up the target
CPU. (No process will occur.)
- After executed this instruction, do not change the device range etc. which is set in the setting data until the
completion device is turned ON. If the change is made, data (the completion status and completion device) to be
stored in the system cannot be stored correctly.
- When executing this instruction without empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area, it will be
abnormal completion. Abnormal completion because of not having the empty block for the exclusive instruction
transmission area can be avoided by using a flag for with/without the exclusive instruction transmission area empty
block (SM796 to 799) as the instruction interlock.

566
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

8.4.3 Error contents

Abnormal completion occurs in the following cases, and the error code will be stored in the device which is designated by
the completion status storage device (S1+0).

Completion status
Error factors Remedy
error code
The instruction request from PLC CPU to Motion CPU
0010 (HEX) exceeds the tolerance. Decrease the number of instructions to execute at
( 16 ) (No empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission a time and adjust them to be within the tolerance.
area.)
Refer to "Device" of "8.4.1 Format of DDRD
3001 (HEX) The device which is designated by the program cannot be
Instruction" and designate the usable device with
( 12289 ) used with NC CPU. Or outside the device range.
NC CPU.
3081 (HEX) The number of write data which is set with D(P).DDRD
Set the number of read data 1 to 100.
( 12417 ) instruction is illegal.
This error may occur when a common variable
value is got using the D(P).DDRD instruction.
3208 (HEX) Any of the data specified in the D(P).DDRD instruction is Change the setting so as not to get the common
( 12808 ) overflowed. variable.
Or change the setting of the common variable
control data.
(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

8.4.4 Calculation error

In the following cases, the calculation error occurs, the diagnosis error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code will be
stored in the diagnosis error register (SD0).

Error code Error factors Remedy

An incorrect target CPU unit was selected by the instruction
set in the program.
10FE (HEX) (1) The designated unit has already been reserved.
( 4350 ) (2) CPU which is not mounted is designated.
(3) "Head I/O No. of target CPU unit divided by 16' (n1) is
not within 3E0H to 3E3H.
The designated target CPU cannot be executed.
10FF (HEX) (1) The instruction name is incorrect.
( 4351 ) (2) The instruction which is not supported by the target CPU
Read the common information of the error using a
is executed.
programming tool, check error step corresponding
1100 (HEX) An incorrect number of devices is designated in the to its numerical value (program error location), and
( 4352 ) program. correct the problem.
1101 (HEX)
An unusable device is designated in the program.
( 4353 )
1102 (HEX)
An unusable character string is designated in the program.
( 4354 )
1103 (HEX)
The number of write data is outside the range of 1 to 100.
( 4355 )
1105 (HEX) The number of read data is outside the range of the reading
( 4101 ) data's storage device.
(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

567
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.4.5 Program example

(Example 1) A program which stores 100 words data from D400 of CPU No.2 in later than X0 of the host CPU when X0
turns ON.

SM402
Set the maximum number of
MOV K2 SD797
used blocks per instruction.

SM402

MOV K100 D1301 Set the number of read data.

X0

SET M2000

M2000 SM797
Store the ZR50000∼ZR50099 of
D.DDRD H3E1 D1300 ZR50000 D1400 M2001 the No.2 CPU to D1400∼D1499
of the operating CPU.

RST M2000

568
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

This section explains how to read and write common variables using the DDWR/DDRD instructions from the PLC.
To read and write common variables using the DDWR/DDRD instructions, specify the CNC side devices from between
ZR60000 and ZR67199
The setting of common variable read/write can be changed by executing the common variable control data, which is
described later, by using the DDWR instruction.
(Note 1) It is not possible to write "empty" data to a common variable using the DDWR instruction.
(Note 2) When an "empty" common variable is read using the DDRD instruction, "0" is loaded.

8.5.1 Instruction Format

The format of DDWR instruction for writing common variables is the same as of "8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction".
However, the CNC side devices are within the range between ZR60000 and ZR67199.
In the same way, the DDRD instruction format for reading common variables is the same as of "8.4.1 Format of DDRD
Instruction", but the CNC side devices are within the range between ZR60000 and ZR67199.

8.5.2 CNC Side Devices to be Specified

The assignment of S3 (the target CPU's head device which stores the write data) in DDWR instruction and S2 (the host
CPU's head device which stores the read data) in DDRD instruction is as shown below.

ZR 6 1 134
The devices from Part system No. (1 to 7) Corresponding common
ZR60000 are used for "0" for the common variable No.
common variables variable 1
[How to assign CNC side devices]

The following CNC side devices are specified.

Type Devices used on the CNC side
Common variable control data ZR60000
Common variable 1 (#500 to #999) ZR60500 to ZR60999
1st part system ZR61100 to ZR61199
2nd part system ZR62100 to ZR62199
3rd part system ZR63100 to ZR63199
Common variable 2
4th part system ZR64100 to ZR64199
(#100 to #199)
5th part system ZR65100 to ZR65199
6th part system ZR66100 to ZR66199
7th part system ZR67100 to ZR67199

[Correspondence table between common variables and ZR devices]

569
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.5.3 Common Variable Control Data

The following items are set to the common variable control data:
- The type of data to be read and written in common variables
- The decimal point position
- The overflow error notification selection

The following default settings are applied at the CNC power ON for reading and writing common variables.
- Two-word data
- With decimal point, and four effective decimal digits
- Error code is returned when overflowed

The settings of common variable control data are listed in the table below.
Setting
Device Item Setting data Setting side
range
Set the type of data to read and write, and the decimal point
position.
[0 to the 3rd bits: Data type]
0: Two-word data
1: Word data
2: Double-precision floating-point data
3: Single-precision floating-point data
[4th to 7th bits: Decimal point position in the data]
Control data for
ZR60000 0: With decimal point/Four effective decimal digits - User
common variables
1: With decimal point/According to #1003(iunit) and #1041
(I_inch)
2: No decimal point
(Note) Refer to "8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data".
[8th bit: Error notification selection]
0: Error code is returned
1: Error is ignored
(Note) Refer to "8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection".

If a value other than 0 to 3 is selected for the data type, or if a value other than 0 to 2 for the decimal point position, an
error (error code: 3209(HEX)) is returned.
The settings of the common variable control data are held until the control data is changed next time.
In order to set the common variable control data, select "1" for the number of write data for the DDWR control data.
For program examples, refer to "8.5.5 Program Examples".

570
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

8.5.3.1 Data Type

The numbers of read and write data specified by the DDWR and DDRD instructions vary according to the data type
setting.
The table below shows the numbers of read and write data required for read and write of one data.
Number of read/write data
Data type set in the control When five common
required for read and write of
data variablesare read and written
one data
Two-word data 2 10
Word data 1 5
Double-precision floating-point
4 20
data
Single-precision floating-point
2 10
data

The values listed in "When five common variables are read and written" are the numbers of read/write data required for
reading and writing five common variables with the selected data type.

8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data

When two-word data or word data is selected for the data type, the numbers of effective decimal digits are as in the table
below.
Number of Common variable val-
Setting effective ue after execution of Value read with DDRD
Decimal point position setting
value decimal DDWR instruction instruction
digits (Note 1)
0 Four effective decimal digits 4 1234.5678 456789
12345.678
Iunit=B 3 45679
I_inch=0 (12345.6780)
Determined with Iunit=C 4 1234.5678 456789
1 #1003(iunit) and
#1041(I_inch) Iunit=B 4 1234.5678 456789
I_inch=1 123.45678
Iunit=C 5 4567891
(123.4568)
12345678
2 No decimal point 0 46
(1.2346 E 7)

The values listed in "Common variable value after execution of DDWR instruction" are the ones when the write data
"12345678" is executed using the DDWR instruction.
The values listed in "Value read with DDRD instruction" are the ones when the common variable value "45.678912" is
read using the DDRD instruction.

(Note 1) Values enclosed with brackets "( )" are the ones when the common variable is displayed using the remote
monitor tool.
(Note 2) When the common variable 1 is read and written with the decimal point position set to "1", the decimal point
position is determined by the combination of #1003(iunit) and #1041(I_inch) set for the 1st part system.
(Note 3) If the value read with the DDRD instruction is smaller than the effective decimal digit, the value is rounded off.

571
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection

Select how to respond to an overflow error that occurs during execution of the DDRD instruction.

Operation when "0: Error code is returned" is selected

The processing ends at the point of the overflow error occurrence, and the completion status error code is returned.
In this case, no common variables can be retrieved.

Operation when "1: Error is ignored" is selected

When an overflow error occurs while a common variable is being read, the retrieved data of the variable is handled
as "0", and reading the subsequent common variables is continued. After the completion of the processing, the
normal completion status is returned.
In this case, it is possible to read out the common variable data by the specified number of variables.

8.5.4 Error Contents

For the DDWR instruction completion status error codes, refer to "8.3.3. Error Contents", and "8.4.3 Error Contents" for
the DDRD completion status error codes.

The No. of ZR device, in which an error has occurred during read/write of common variables with DDWR/DDRD
instruction, is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).
The No. of ZR device, where an error has occurred first, is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).
The contents of "H3E1\G10280" (by two words) are held until the next execution of the DDWR and DDRD instructions for
reading and writing common variables.
If there is no error occurring, "0" is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).

572
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

8.5.5 Program Examples

8.5.5.1 Write Data to Common Variables

<EX> A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X0, in order to write
three data to the 1st part system's common variables starting from #100.
(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

SM400
Set the maximum number of
MOV K7 SD797 used blocks per instruction

DMOV K1000000 D1400

Set the three data for writing

DMOV K2000000 D1402 to common variables

DMOV K3000000 D1404

Set the number of write data to
"6", as the two-word data type is
MOV K6 D1301 selected for the control data.

X0
SET M2000
M2000 SM797
D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 ZR61100 M2001 Execute the D.DDWR instruction

RST M2000

[Example of executing write of common variables]

8.5.5.2 Read Common Variable Data

<EX> A program which executes the D.DDRD instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X0, in order to
retrieve three common variable data starting from #500.
(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

SM400
Set the maximum
MOV K7 SD797 number of used blocks
per instruction
Set the number of read
MOV K6 D1311 data to "6", as the two-word
data type is selected for
X1 the control data.
SET M2010
M2010 SM797
D.DDRD H3E1 D1310 ZR60500 D1600 M2011 Execute the D.DDRD
instruction

RST M2010

[Example of executing read of common variables]

573
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.5.5.3 Change the Common Variable Control Data

<EX> A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X2, in order to
change the control data settings to "word data" and "no decimal point".
After this, the D.DDWR instruction is executed again to write the 1st part system's three common variable data
starting from #100.

SM400
Set the maximum number
MOV K7 SD797 of used blocks per instruction

Select "word data" and

"no decimal point" for the
MOV H21 D1200
control data

MOV K1 D1101 Set the number of write

data to "1"
X2
SET M2100
M2100 SM797 Execute the D.DDWR
D.DDWR H3E1 D1100 D1200 ZR60000 M2101 instruction to change
the control data

RST M2100
M2101 M2102
MOV K1000 D1400

Set the three data for

MOV K2000 D1401 writing to common variables

MOV K3000 D1402

Set the number of write
data to "3", as the word
MOV K3 D1301 data type is selected for
the control data
SM797
D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 ZR61100 M2111 Execute the D.DDWR
instruction

[Example of executing change of common variable control data]

574
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

8.5.5.4 Read Common Variable Data, Calculate and then Write the Data to Common Variables
<EX> A program which executes the D.DDRD instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X3. In this program,
the 1st part system's three common variable data starting from #100 are read out, calculation is performed,
and then the data are written to the common variables
(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

SM400
Set the maximum number
MOV K7 SD797 of used blocks per instruction

Set the number of read data

MOV K6 D1301 to "6", as the two-word data
type is selected for the
X3 control data

SET M3010
M3010 SM797
D.DDRD H3E1 D1300 ZR61100 D1400 M3011 Execute the D.DDRD
instruction

RST M3010
M3011 M3012
M3013
DDRD
DDRD
completion
error signal
signal
M3013 Set the number of write
data to "6", as the two-word
MOV K6 D1311 data type is selected for the
control data

D+ K10000 D1400

D+ K20000 D1402 Calculate the retrieved data

D+ K30000 D1404
M3013 SM797
Execute the D.DDWR
D.DDWR H3E1 D1311 D1400 ZR61100 M3014 instruction

[Example of executing read of common variable data, calculation and write of the data to common variables]

575
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

8.6 Precautions
8.6.1 Transmitting Exclusive Instructions between CPUs

Operation concept of NC exclusive instructions

NC exclusive instructions are transmitted through the CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area, which is
provided to the system area in the shared memory for cyclic transmissions. The following chart shows the operation
concept of NC exclusive instructions.

CPU-CPU
PLC CPU exclusive instruction CNC CPU
transmission area (2) Receives instructions
(every 0.88ms)
(1) Executes instructions
(3) Executes instructions
[NC exclusive instruction 1] Exclusive instruction 1
[NC exclusive instruction 2] Exclusive instruction 2

(5) Receives data

(every 0.88ms) (4) Sets response data

CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area is allocated as follows when CNC CPU has standard settings (system
area size: 1K points).
<Table 1 Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area>

Number of multi-CPUs Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area per instruction target CPU
2 CPUs 47 blocks
3 CPUs 23 blocks
4 CPUs 15 blocks
Table 2 shows the numbers of blocks of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area used from the execution of a
NC exclusive instruction by PLC CPU until the completion device's ON.
<Table 2 Numbers of blocks used for a NC exclusive instruction>

Instruction Number of blocks used

D(P).ATC 1
D(P).ROT 1
Numbers of data -
1 to 4 1
5 to 20 2
D(P).DDWR 21 to 36 3
D(P).DDRD 37 to 52 4
53 to 68 5
69 to 84 6
85 to 100 7
If the number of blocks used for the instructions is larger than the size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission
area in table 1, the instructions cannot be executed at the same time. Instruction executions after the CPU-CPU
exclusive instruction transmission area has been occupied are not successfully completed. Execute either the interlock
with the special register for "Command FULL", explained in "Special register for "Command FULL"" column later, or the
adjustment of system area size, explained in "CPU-CPU exclusive transmission area" column, as required.

576
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.6 Precautions

Special register for "Command FULL"

When the CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area is occupied, the target CPU cannot receive NC exclusive
instructions, which is "Command FULL" state.
Then, the special register for "Command FULL" (special relay in PLC CPU) goes ON and operates to the target CPU. If
the "Command FULL" state has been cleared with END process, the special relay goes OFF.

To prepare for the anticipated "Command FULL" state, execute an interlock with the special register for "Command
FULL" in the target CPU. Unless the interlock is executed, the error code "4C90" is set to the completion status when an
instruction is executed in "Command FULL" state. Note that no process is executed when the completion device is
omitted.

Special relay in PLC

Name Details
CPU
Exclusive instructions for multi-
CPUs high-speed
SM770
communication at "Command
FULL" of CPU No.1
Exclusive instructions for multi-
CPUs high-speed Operates to multi-CPUs high-speed communication with target
SM771
communication at "Command CPU.
FULL" CPU No.2 Goes ON when the CPU-CPU transmission area is occupied,
Exclusive instructions for multi- which is "Command FULL" state.
CPUs high-speed Goes OFF if the "Command FULL" state has been cleared with
SM772
communication at "Command END process.
FULL" CPU No.3
Exclusive instructions for multi-
CPUs high-speed
SM773
communication at "Command
FULL" CPU No.4

Operation of the special register for "Command FULL"

The following chart shows the operation outline when "Command FULL" state has occurred after the execution of NC
exclusive instructions.

Sequence program END

Instructions executed

…
NC exclusive instructions
Command FULL
Size of transmission area
used for CPU-CPU … Check with
exclusive instruction END process

ON
Special register for
"Command FULL"
SM771 (for CPU No.2)

CPU-CPU
Transfer Transfer
exclusive instruction
(per 0.88ms) 0.88ms

577
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

Program example
A program to execute an ATC instruction to CNC CPU No.2 after MO is ON.
(With the completion device and completion status omitted)

M0 SM771
DP.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M10
Execution “Command FULL”
commanded in CPU No.2 RST M0
Execution
commanded

CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area

The size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area (number of blocks; 16 words per block) can be enlarged by
changing the system area size. The number of the CPUs used and the size of the selected system area decide the size
of the transmission area as follows.

When 2 multi-CPUs are used

Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission

Size of selected system area
area per target CPU
1.0kw 48 blocks
2.0kw 112 blocks

When 3 multi-CPUs are used

Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission

Size of selected system area
area per target CPU
1.0kw 24 blocks
2.0kw 56 blocks

578
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
8.6 Precautions

8.6.2 Executing NC Exclusive Instructions

(1) NC exclusive instructions are available in both fixed-interval programs and interrupt programs. If a completion
device is designated, make sure to execute the program during the scan after the completion of instruction.
Otherwise, the completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, will not be recognized.
(2) File registers for each local device and each program are written into devices with END process. The following
devices are not available:
Completion devices and completion status of instructions

8.6.3 Completion Status Information

The following table shows the codes stored in completion status when a NC exclusive instruction has been completed.
(Error codes with "*" are detected on CNC CPU.)
Note that omitting a completion status storage device makes no error detection and null processing.

Completion status
Error factors
(Error code)(H)
0 Successfully completed
4C20* The designated device is not available on CNC CPU or out of the range.
4C21* The executed multi-CPU instruction is not supported by CNC CPU.
4C2A* The designated command cannot be read by CNC CPU.
4C30* An invalid function No. was specified by the ATC or ROT instruction.
An invalid No. to store the number of magazines was specified by the ATC
4C31*
instruction.
4C32* An invalid tool No. was specified by the ATC instruction.
4C33* An invalid magazine No. was specified by the ATC instruction.
An invalid number of rotary body indexing cycles was specified by the ROT
4C34*
instruction.
4C35* An invalid current position was specified by the ROT instruction.
4C36* An invalid parameter was set by the ROT instruction.

The number of instructions from PLC CPU to CNC CPU exceeds the tolerance.
0010 * The tolerance amount differs for each CPU and the number of the CPUs mounted
on.

579
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Exclusive Instructions

580
Appendix
付録 1
Ap1
章

List of PLC Window Data

581
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
0 R register R0 R/W - 0 to 65535 Unsigned integer
Not
0 R register Not used ： ： R/W
used
9214 R register R0 R/W - 0 to 65535 Unsigned integer
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st
8960 R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
step)
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd
8964 R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
step)
Not used Axis No.
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd
8968 R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
step)
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th
8972 R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
step)
8976 Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
8980 Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
Not used Axis No.
8984 Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
8988 Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
9008 Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
Spindle shift speed (Gear 2nd
9010 R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
Not used Axis No. step)
9012 Spindle shift speed (Gear 3rdstep) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
9014 Spindle shift speed (Gear 4thstep) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
Not used Axis No. 9024 Spindle orientation speed R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
Not used Axis No. 9026 Minimum spindle speed R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]
8192 Spindle parameter SP001 R/W - 1 to 200 [1/s]
8194 Spindle parameter SP002 R/W - 1 to 200 [1/s]
Not used Axis No.
： ：
8670 Spindle parameter SP240 R/W - Refer to the manual
Not used Axis No. 195 Method selection parameter (1) R - -
Parameters Not used Axis No. 130 Method selection parameter (3) R/W - Refer to the manual
1 common to each Not used Axis No. 194 Method selection parameter (4) R/W - Refer to the manual
axis
Input the name of the
11984 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part
Not code.
system Position switch [1]
used
No. 11968 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
11972 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
12004 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part
Not code.
system Position switch [2]
used
No. 11988 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
11992 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
12024 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part
Not code.
system Position switch [3]
used
No. 12008 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
12012 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
12044 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part
Not code.
system Position switch [4]
used
No. 12028 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
12032 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
12064 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part
Not code.
system Position switch [5]
used
No 12048 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
12052 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]

582
 C70 PLC Interface Manual

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
Input the name of the
12084 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [6]
system
12068 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
12072 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
Part 12104 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
systemP code.
Not used Position switch [7]
art
12088 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system
12092 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
12124 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [8]
system
12108 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
12112 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14128 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [9]
system
14112 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14116 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14148 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [10]
system
14132 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14136 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14168 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Parameters
Part code.
1 common to each Not used Position switch [11]
system
axis 14152 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14156 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14188 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [12]
system
14172 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14176 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14208 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [13]
system
14192 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14196 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14228 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [14]
system
14212 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14216 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14248 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [15]
system
14232 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14236 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Input the name of the
14268 axis R/W R/W designated axis with ASCII
Part code.
Not used Position switch [16]
system
14252 dog1 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
14256 dog2 R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]

583
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
272 1st reference position coordinate R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm]

Part 276 2nd reference position coordinate R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]

Axis No.
system 280 3rd reference position coordinate R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
284 4th reference position coordinate R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
Part
Axis No. 288 Stored stroke limit (+) R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #2014
system
Part
Axis No. 292 Stored stroke limit (-) R/W R/W ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #2013
system
R/W is not valid
Part for the diameter
Axis No. 20 Movement control parameter R R Refer to the manual
system specification axis
of PLC axis.
Part Reference position return
Axis No. 38 R/W R/W 1 to 60000 [mm/min] Unsigned integer
system approach speed
Part Reference position return shift
Axis No. 44 R/W R/W 0 to 65535 [μm] Unsigned integer
system amount
Part
Axis No. 46 Rapid traverse backlash amount R/W R/W ± 9999
system
Part
Axis No. 48 Cutting feed backlash amount R/W R/W ± 9999
system
Part
Axis No. 640 Axis parameter R/W - Refer to the manual
system
Axis
2 independent Part
Axis No. 656 Stored stroke limit II (+) R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #8205
parameters system
Part
Axis No. 660 Stored stroke limit II (+) R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #8204
system
Part
Axis No. 24 Rapid traverse time constant G0tL R/W R/W 1 to 4000 [ms] #2004
system
Part
Axis No. 26 Cutting feed time constant G1tL R/W R/W 1 to 5000 [ms] #2007
system
Part
Axis No. 28 Rapid traverse time constant G0t1 R/W R/W 1 to 4000 [ms] #2005
system
Part
Axis No. 32 Cutting feed time constant G1t R/W R/W 1 to 5000 [ms] #2008
system
Part
Axis No. 122 Current limit value 2 (SV014) R/W R/W 0 to 999
system
Part
Axis No. 0 Axis name (axname) R/W R/W X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C #1013
system
Part
Axis No. 264 Cutting feed clamp speed R/W R/W 1 to 1000000 #2002
system
Part
Axis No. 768 Soft limit IB+ R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #2062
system
Part
Axis No. 772 Soft limit IB- R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm] #2061
system
Part
Axis No. 376 Soft limit IB type R/W - 0 to 2
system
Not
Not used 2 Compensation basic axis No. R - -
used
Not
Not used 6 Compensation direction axis No. R - -
used
Not Division point No. at reference
Not used 10 R - -
used position
Machine error
Not Division point No. at the most
3 compensation Not used 14 R - -
used negative side
information
Not Division point No. at the most
Not used 18 R - -
used positive side
Not
Not used 20 Compensation scale factor R/W - 0 to 99
used
Not
Not used 28 Division interval R/W - 2 to 19999998 [0.5unit]
used

584
 C70 PLC Interface Manual

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
Part G54 workpiece coordinate system
Axis No. 0 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset
Part G55 workpiece coordinate system
Axis No. 4 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset
Workpiece Part G56 workpiece coordinate system
coordinate Axis No. 8 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset
system offset,
Part G57 workpiece coordinate system
4 external Axis No. 12 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset
workpiece
coordinate Part G58 workpiece coordinate system
Axis No. 16 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset system offset
Part G59 workpiece coordinate system
Axis No. 20 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system offset
Part External workpiece coordinate
Axis No. 24 R/W - ± 199999998 [0.5μm]
system system offset
16 Main R - -
Attribute
Part 18 R - -
Not used Servo alarm No. (bit F)
system
20 Sub 1 R - -
22 Sub 2 R - -
64 Main R - -
Attribute
Part 66 R - -
Not used Servo warning No. (bit F)
system
68 Sub 1 R - -
Alarm 70 Sub 2 R - -
5
information 96 Main R - -
Attribute
Part 98 R - -
Not used Operation error No. (bit F)
system
100 Sub 1 R - -
102 Sub 2 R - -
104 Main R - -
Attribute
Part 106 R - -
Not used Automatic stop code (bit F)
system
108 Sub 1 R - -
110 Sub 2 R - -
Axis common Part
Not used 172 Interporation vector length R - -
non-modal system
11 information in
block being Part
Not used 71 Movement mode R - -
executed system

Axis
independent
non-modal Part
12 Axis No. 4 Axis direction movement amount R - -
information in system
block being
executed

585
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.

0 G code (group 1) R - -

1 G code (group 2) R - -
2 G code (group 5) R - -
3 G code (group 7) R - -
4 G code (group 9) R - -
5 G code (group 12) R - -
6 G code (group 13) R - -
Axis common
7 G code R - -
modal
Part
13 information in Not used 15 Block No. R - -
system
block being 64 G code (group 15) R - -
executed
76 Shape compensation No. R - -
78 Wear compensation No. R - -
208 Miscellaneous function code R - -
212 Spindle function code R - -
216 Tool function code R - -
220 2nd miscellaneous function code R - -
240 Program No. R - -
244 Sequence No. R - -
Axis
independent
modal
14 112 Tool length compensation No. R - -
information in
block being
executed
Axis common
non-modal
15 Same as the section No. 11
information in
next block
Axis
independent
16 non-modal Same as the section No. 12
information in
next block
Axis common
modal
17 Same as the section No. 13
information in
next block
Axis
independent
18 modal Same as the section No. 14
information in
next block
19
Part Not
84 Automatic effective feedrate R - -
system used
Axis common
Part Not
20 machine control 88 Manual effective feedrate R - -
system used
information 1
Part Not
4 In-position R - -
system used

586
 C70 PLC Interface Manual

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
Part Current position in machine
Axis No. 0 R R -
system coordinate system
Part
Axis No. 8 Manual interrupt amount (1) R - -
system
Part
Axis No. 12 Manual interrupt amount (2) R - -
system
Part Current position in workpiece
Axis No. 36 R - -
system coordinate system
Part Current position in workpiece
Axis Axis No. 112 R - -
system coordinate system during skip ON
independent
21 Part Current position in machine
machine control Axis No. 116 R - -
information 1 system coordinate system during skip ON
Part Remaining distance during skip
Axis No. 120 R - -
system ON
Current position in machine
Part
Axis No. 124 coordinate system during manual R - -
system
skip ON
Part Current position of the program
Axis No. 64 R - -
system command
Part
Axis No. 400 Remaining command R - -
system
Information
Part Not
22 input from PLC 0 Emergency stop cause R - -
system used
to controller
Information
output from Not Spindle command speed (effective
23 Axis No. 48 R - -
controller to used value)
PLC
Not
Not used 0 Power ON time R/W - Refer to the manual
used
Not
Not used 4 Automatic operation time R/W - Refer to the manual
used
Cumulative time Not
24 Not used 8 Automatic start up time R/W - Refer to the manual
data used
Not
Not used 12 External cumulative time 1 R/W - Refer to the manual
used
Not
Not used 16 External cumulative time 2 R/W - Refer to the manual
used
25
Not used Axis No. 8992 Spindle motor real speed R - -
Axis common
Not used Axis No. 8988 Spindle motor load R - -
26 machine control
information 2 Spindle position within one rotation
Not used Axis No. 9176 R - -
(Z-phase standard)
Part
Axis No. 74 Smoothing status, servo status R R -
system
Part
Axis No. 308 Servo delay amount R R -
system
Part
Axis No. 328 Feed axis motor load A (%) R R -
system
Axis Part
Axis No. 330 Feed axis motor load B (%) R R -
independent system
27
machine control Part
information 2 Axis No. 60 Grid amount R R -
system
Part
Axis No. 1720 Overload (%) R R -
system
Part
Axis No. 1704 Estimated disturbance torque (%) R R -
system
Part
Axis No. 2540 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) R R -
system
28

587
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
Input/Output with
Common decimal point is
variables available
(Common for all part systems,
29 (common for all Not used Not used x R/W - Refer to the manual Addition input and
#500 to #999) (x=500 to 999)
part systems, absolute value
from #500) input are
available
Addition input and
absolute value
input are
Part availableAddition
Not used x Local variables (level 0) (x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual
system input and
absolute value
input are
available
Addition input and
Part absolute value
Not used 100+x Local variables (level 1)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual
system input are
Local variable available
30
value Addition input and
Part absolute value
Not used 200+x Local variables (level 2)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual
system input are
available
Addition input and
Part absolute value
Not used 300+x Local variables (level 3)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual
system input are
available
Addition input and
Part absolute value
Not used 400+x Local variables (level 4)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual
system input are
available

588
 C70 PLC Interface Manual

Sub ID Signifi-
Details for Sub- Spindle,
Section (system cance PLC axis
each section section Details for each sub-section No. NC axis Data range when writing Remarks
No. designa- of data R/W
No. No. R/W
tion) No.
Addition input and
Part Tool compensation amount 1 (M absolute value
Not used 1 to 400 R/W - ± 99999999
system system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 1001 to Tool compensation amount 2 (M absolute value
Not used R/W - ± 99999
system 1400 system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 6001 to Tool compensation amount 3 (M absolute value
Not used R/W - ± 99999999
system 6400 system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 7001 to Tool compensation amount 4 (M absolute value
Not used R/W - ± 99999
system 7400 system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 1st axis tool length compensation absolute value
Not used 1 to 80 R/W - ± 99999999
system amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 1001 to 1st axis wear compensation absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 1080 amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Tool
Part 2001 to 3rd axis tool length compensation absolute value
31 compensation Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 2080 amount (L system) input are
amount
available
Addition input and
Part 3001 to 3rd axis wear compensation absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 3080 amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 4001 to 2nd axis tool length compensation absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 4080 amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 5001 to 2nd axis wear compensation absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 5080 amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 6001 to Nose R compensation amount (L absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 6080 system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 7001 to Nose R wear compensation absolute value
Not used R/W - 0 to 99999
system 7080 amount (L system) input are
available
Addition input and
Part 8001 to absolute value
Not used Hypothetical nose No. (L system) R/W - Refer to the manual
system 8080 input are
available
Input/Output with
decimal point is
Common available
Part
32 variables (from Not used x #100 to #199 (x=100 to 199) R/W - Refer to the manual Addition input and
system
#100) absolute value
input are
available
Not used Not used 101 Command error (1st set) R R -
Not used Not used 201 Command error (2nd set) R R -
Not used Not used 301 Command error (3rd set) R R -
Not used Not used 102 FB error (1st set) R R -
Synchronous
62 Not used Not used 202 FB error (2nd set) R R -
error monitor
Not used Not used 302 FB error (3rd set) R R -
Not used Not used 103 Machine position (1st set) R R -
Not used Not used 203 Machine position (2nd set) R R -
Not used Not used 303 Machine position (3rd set) R R -

589
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Appendix 1.1 Section No. List

Axis Sub ID (system PLC axis
Section No. Details Write Remark
specifcation designation) designation
Possible (partially
0 R register Invalid Invalid Not possible
not possible)
Possible
Possible (partially Partially
1 Parameters common to each axis Partially valid (partially not
not possible) valid
possible)
Possible
2 Axis independent parameters Possible Invalid Valid (partially not
possible)
Machine error compensation Not possible
3 Invalid Invalid Not possible
information (partially possible)
Workpiece coordinate system offset,
4 External workpiece coordinate system Possible Valid Valid Not possible
offset
Not possibleNot
5 Alarm information Invalid Valid Not possible
possible
6
7
8
9
10
Axis common non-modal information
11 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
in block being executed
Axis independent non-modal
12 Not possible Valid Valid Not possible
information in block being executed
Axis common modal information in
13 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
block being executed
Axis independent modal information in
14 Not possible Valid Valid Not possible
block being executed
Axis common non-modal information
15 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
in next block
Axis independent non-modal
16 Not possible Valid Valid Not possible
information in next block
Axis independent non-modal
17 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
information in next block
Axis independent modal information in
18 Not possible Valid Valid Not possible
next block
19
Axis common machine control
20 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
information 1
Possible
Axis independent machine control
21 Not possible Valid Valid (partially not
information 1
possible)
Information input from PLC to
22 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
controller
Information output from controller to
23 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
PLC
24 Cumulative time data Possible Invalid Invalid Not possible
25
Axis common machine control
26 Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible
information 2
Axis independent machine control
27 Not possible Valid Valid Possible
information 1
28
29 Common variable value 1 Possible Invalid Invalid Not possible From #500

590
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Axis Sub ID (system PLC axis

Section No Details Write Remark
specifcation designation) designation
30 Local variable value Possible Invali Valid Not possible
31 Tool compensation amount Possible Invalid Valid Not possible
32 Common variable value 2 Possible Invalid Valid Not possible From #100
33 - 61
62 Synchronous error monitor Not possible Invalid Invalid Not possible

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

The sub-section No. list shows the sub-section No. of each data in correspondence with the section No.
Each data has a search No. To refer to the contents of the data, search for the corresponding data in "Explanation of
Read/Write Data" using this search No.

Search No.

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

PLC
System/
Sub-section axis
Search No. Data type Size (byte) Write axis Remark
No. designa
designation
tion
Invalid/ Not
Valid possible
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) 8960 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd step) 8964 4 Possible Valid possible
1-10
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) 8968 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step) 8972 4 Possible Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Valid possible
∼ ∼
∼ ∼

1 - 10
No. of searching‫(ޓޓ‬Note) This is not the sub-section No.
Section No.

1-10 ‫ޓ‬Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

[Data definition]
This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smax1 to 4.)
The CNC creates the spindle gear shift command 1 and 2 with this va lue and the commanded S command.
During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.
∼ ∼
∼ ∼

591
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 0 R resister

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
R register R0 0 2 Possible Invalid Not possible
R register R1 1 2 Possible Invalid Not possible
0-10
: : : : : :
R register R9214 9214 2 Possible Invalid Not possible

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) 8960 4 Possible
Valid Possible
Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) 8964 4 Possible
Valid Possible
1-10
Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) 8968 4 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step) 8972 4 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) 8976 4 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) 8980 4 Possible
Valid possible
1-11
Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) 8984 4 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step) 8988 4 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step) 9008 2 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle shift speed (Gear 2nd step) 9010 2 Possible
Valid possible
1-13
Invalid/ Not
Spindle shift speed (Gear 3rd step) 9012 2 Possible
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Spindle shift speed (Gear 4th step) 9014 2 Possible
Valid possible
1-20 Spindle orientation speed 9024 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
1-21 Minimum spindle speed 9026 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
Spindle parameter SP001 8192 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
Spindle parameter SP002 8194 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
1-30
: : : : : :
Spindle parameter SP240 8670 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

592
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Method selection parameter (1)
Bit0:
Bit1:
Bit2:
Not
1-50 Bit3: 195 1 Invalid/Valid Not possible
possible
Bit4:
Bit5:
Bit6: Synchronous tapping
Bit7:
Method selection parameter (3)
Bit0:
Bit1: Tool compensation method (Tabsmv)
Bit2:
1-70 Bit3: 130 1 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
Bit4:
Bit5:
Bit6:
Bit7:
Method selection parameter (4)
Bit0:
Bit1:
Bit2:
1-80 Bit3: 194 1 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible
Bit4:
Bit5: Reference point middle point ignore
Bit6:
Bit7:

593
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis (position switch)

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Designate ASCII code
axis 11984 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [1]
dog1 11968 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 11972 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12004 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [2]
dog1 11988 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 11992 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12024 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [3]
dog1 12008 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12012 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12044 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [4]
dog1 12028 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12032 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12064 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [5]
dog1 12048 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12052 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12084 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [6]
dog1 12068 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12072 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12104 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [7]
dog1 12088 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12092 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 12124 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [8]
dog1 12108 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 12112 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

594
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis (position switch)

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Designate ASCII code
axis 14128 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [9]
dog1 14112 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14116 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14148 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [10]
dog1 14132 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14136 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14168 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [11]
dog1 14152 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14156 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14188 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [12]
dog1 14172 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14176 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14208 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [13]
dog1 14192 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14196 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14228 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [14]
dog1 14212 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14216 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14248 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [15]
dog1 14232 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14236 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
Designate ASCII code
axis 14268 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
with a decimal
1-100 Position switch [16]
dog1 14252 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible
dog2 14256 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

595
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 2 Axis independent parameters

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
1st reference position coordinate 272 4 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2nd reference position coordinate 276 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
2-10
3rd reference position coordinate 280 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4th reference position coordinate 284 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
For machine tool
Stored stroke limit (+) 288 4 Possible Valid/Valid Possible builder
2-11
Stored stroke limit (-) 292 4 Possible Valid/Valid Possible For machine tool
builder
Movement control parameter
Bit0:
Bit1: Inch input
Bit2: Reference point return direction (-)
Bit3: Servo OFF error compensation
Bit4: Rotary axis
Bit5: Motor CCW
Bit6: R/W is not valid for the
Not
2-20 Bit7: 20 2 Valid/Valid Possible diameter specification
possible
Bit8: axis of PLC axis.
Bit9:
BitA: No reference point axis
BitB:
BitC:
BitD: Diameter designated axis
BitE:
BitF:
2-30 Reference position return approach speed 38 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-35 Reference position return shift amount 44 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-36 Rapid traverse backlash amount 46 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-37 Cutting feed backlash amount 48 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
Axis parameter
Bit0:
Bit1:(System reserve)
Bit2:
Bit3:
Bit4:
Bit5:
Bit6: (System reserve)
2-39 Bit7: 640 2 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
Bit8:
Bit9:
BitA: Soft limit invalid #8202
BitB: (System reserve)
BitC: (System reserve)
BitD:(System reserve)
BitE:
BitF:
Stored stroke limit II (+) 656 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible For user
2-40
Stored stroke limit II (-) 660 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible For user
2-50 Rapid traverse time constant G0tL 24 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-51 Cutting feed time constant G1tL 26 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-52 Rapid traverse time constant G0t1 28 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-53 Cutting feed time constant G1t1 32 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-54 Current limit value 2 (SV014) 122 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-55 Axis name (axname) 0 1 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-56 Cutting feed clamp speed 264 4 Possible Valid/Valid Possible
2-57 Soft limit IB+ 768 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
2-58 Soft limit IB- 772 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
2-59 Soft limit IB type 376 1 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

596
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Section No. 3 Machine error compensation information

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Not Invalid/
3-10 Compensation basic axis No. 2 1 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
3-11 Compensation direction axis No. 6 1 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
3-12 Division point No. at reference position 10 2 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
3-13 Division point No. at the most negative side 14 2 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
3-14 Division point No. at the most positive side 18 2 Not possible
possible Invalid
Invalid/
3-15 Compensation scale factor 20 2 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
3-16 Division interval 28 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid

Section No. 4 Workpiece coordinate system offset, external workpiece coordinate system offset

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
4-10 G54 workpiece coordinate system offset 0 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-11 G55 workpiece coordinate system offset 4 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-12 G56 workpiece coordinate system offset 8 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-13 G57 workpiece coordinate system offset 12 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-14 G58 workpiece coordinate system offset 16 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-15 G59 workpiece coordinate system offset 20 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible
4-16 External workpiece coordinate system offset 24 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

597
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 5 Alarm information

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Not
Main 16 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Attribute (bit F) 18 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)
possible
5-30 Servo alarm No.
Not
Sub 1 20 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Sub 2 22 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Main 64 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Attribute (bit F) 66 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)
possible
5-90 Servo warning No.
Not
Sub 1 68 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Sub 2 70 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Main 96 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Attribute (bit F) 98 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)
possible
5-130 Operation error No.
Not
Sub 1 100 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Sub 2 102 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Main 104 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Attribute (bit F) 106 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)
possible
5-140 Automatic stop code
Not
Sub 1 108 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
Sub 2 110 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible

598
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

11 Axis common non-modal information in block being executed

Section No.
15 Axis common non-modal information in the next block

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Not
11/15-10 Interporation vector length 172 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Movement mode gmov
Binary data
0: Positionoing (each axis independent)
1: Positionoing (linear)
2: Linear interpolation
3: Circular interpolation (CW)
4: Circular interpolation (CCW)
5: Helical interpolation (CW)
6: Helical interpolation (CCW)
7:
8:
9:
10:
11: Time designated dwell
12:
13: 1st reference position valification Not
11/15-20 71 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible
14: 2nd reference position valification possible
15: 3rd reference position valification
16: 4th reference position valification
17: Automatic referene point return
18: Return from automatic referene point
19: 2nd reference point return
20: 3rd reference point return
21: 4th reference point return
22: Skip function
23: Multi-step skip function
24: Multi-step skip function 2
25: Multi-step skip function 3
26: Thread cutting
27:
28:
29: Coordinate system setting

12 Axis independent non-modal information in block being executed

Section No.
16 Axis independent non-modal information in the next block

Search Sub- Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. section No. (byte) designation designation
Not
12/16-10 Axis direction movement amount 4 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
possible

599
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

13 Axis common modal information in block being executed

Section No.
17 Axis common modal information in the next block

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Not
13/17-10 G code (Group 1) 0 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Interpolation mode
possible
Not
13/17-11 G code (Group 2) 1 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Plane selection
possible
Not
13/17-12 G code (Group 5) 2 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Feed mode
possible
Not
13/17-13 G code (Group 7) 3 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Radius compensation modal
possible
Not
13/17-14 G code (Group 9) 4 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Fixed cycle modal
possible
Not Workpiece coordinate system
13/17-15 G code (Group 12) 5 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible modal
Not
13/17-16 G code (Group 13) 6 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible Cutting mode
possible
G code
(Group 3, 4, 6, 10, 17, 18)
Bit0: Absolute/incremental mode
Bit1 : Barrier check
Bit2 : Inch/metric mode Not
13/17-17 7 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible
Bit3 : Fixed cycle R point return possible
Bit4 :
Bit5 : Constant surface speed control
Bit6 : Balance cut
Bit7 :
Not
13/17-20 Block No. 15 1 Valid/Invalid Not possible 0 to 99
possible
G code (Group 15)
BitB : In normal line control Not
13/17-25 64 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible Normal line control modal
BitC : The right side is in normal line possible
control
Not
13/17-30 Shape compensation No. 76 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
13/17-31 Wear compensation No. 78 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible
Not
13/17-40 Miscellaneous function No. 208 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible M code (binary)
possible
Not
13/17-41 Spindle function code 212 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible S code (binary)
possible
Not
13/17-42 Tool function code 216 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible T code (binary)
possible
Not
13/17-43 2nd miscellaneous function code 220 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible B code (binary)
possible
Not
13/17-44 Program No. 240 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible O1 to 99999999
possible
Not
13/17-45 Sequence No. 244 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible N1 to 99999
possible

600
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

14 Axis independent modal information in block being executed

Section No.
18 Axis independent modal information in the next block

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Not Machininig center system
14/18-10 Tool length compensation No. 112 2 Valid/Valid Not possible
possible only

Section No. 20 Axis common machine control information

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Not Effective speed of feed
20-10 Automatic effective feedrate 84 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible direction
Not Effective speed of axis
20-11 Manual effective feedrate 88 4 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible direction
Not
20-20 In-position 4 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
possible

Section No. 21 Axis independent machine control information

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Current position in machine coordinate Not
21-10 0 4 Valid/Valid Possible
system possible
Not
21-12 Manual interrupt amount (1) 8 4 Valid/Valid Not possible Manual ABS switch is OFF
possible
Not
21-13 Manual interrupt amount (2) 12 4 Valid/Valid Not possible Manual ABS switch is ON
possible
Current position in workpiece Not
21-20 36 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
coordinate system possible
Current position in workpiece Not
21-30 112 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
coordinate system during skip ON possible
Current position in machine coordinate Not
21-31 116 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
system during skip ON possible
Not
21-32 Remaining distance during skip ON 120 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
possible
Current position in machine coordinate Not
21-33 124 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
system during manual skip ON possible
Current position of the program Not
21-34 64 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
command possible
Not
21-35 Remaining command 400 4 Valid/Valid Not possible
possible

601
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 22 Information input from PLC to controller

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Emergency stop cause
Bit0: CNC side PLC Software stop state
Bit1 :
Bit2 :
Bit3 :
Bit4 :External emergency stop
Bit5 :
Bit6 : PLC Emergency stop output device
Y327 is "1"
Bit7 : Not
22-10 0 2 Valid/Invalid Not possible
Bit8 : possible
Bit9 :
BitA :
BitB :
BitC :
BitD : Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary
allocation device illegal
BitE : Spindle drive unit emergency stop
output
BitF : Servo drive unit emergency stop output

Section No. 23 Information output from controller to PLC

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Spindle command speed (effective Not Valid* /
23-10 48 4 Not possible Including the override
value) possible Invalid

* Use Section sub-ID No. to designate the axis No.

When no Axis No. is designated (Section sub-ID No. is set to "0"), the 1st spindle will be selected.
1: 1st spindle
2: 2nd spindle
::
7: 7th spindle

Section No. 24 Cumulative time data

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Invalid/
24-1 Power ON time 0 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
24-2 Automatic operation time 4 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
24-3 Automatic start up time 8 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
24-4 External cumulative time 1 12 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
24-5 External cumulative time 2 16 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid

602
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Section No. 26 Axis common machine control information

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Not
26-10 Spindle motor real speed 8992 4 Invalid/Valid Not possible Including the override
possible
Not
26-20 Spindle motor load 8988 2 Invalid/Valid Not possible
possible
Spindle position within one rotation Not
26-30 9176 4 Invalid/Valid Not possible
(Z-phase standard) possible

Section No. 27 Axis independent machine control information 2

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Smoothing status, servo status
Bit0: READY ON
Bit1: servo ON
Bit2:
Bit3: In alarm
Bit4: Absolute position established
Bit5: Z phase passed
Bit6: In-position
Not
27-10 Bit7: Torque limit 74 2 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Bit8: Smoothing 0
Bit9: Smoothing +
BitA: Smoothing -
BitB:
BitC: H/W OT+
BitD: H/W OT-
BitE: Near-point dog ON
BitF:
Not
27-20 Servo delay amount 308 4 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Not
27-30 Feed axis motor load A (%) 328 2 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Not
27-31 Feed axis motor load B (%) 330 2 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Feed axis motor speed Not
27-33 2540 2 Valid/Valid Possible
(0.01r/min) possible
Not
27-34 Machine end FB 2192 4 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Feed axis motor speed Not
27-35 2540 2 Valid/Valid Possible
(0.01r/min) possible
Not
27-36 Grid amount 60 4 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Not
27-37 Overload (%) 1720 2 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
Not
27-38 Estimated disturbance torque (%) 1704 2 Valid/Valid Possible
possible
27-39 #2 ZERO 20502 Possible Valid/Valid Possible -99999.999 to 99999.999

603
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Section No. 29 Common variable value 1

Search Sub-section Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. No. (byte) designation designation
Invalid/
50 sets #500 ～ #549 500 to 549 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Invalid/
100 sets #500 ～ #599 500 to 599 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid
Part system common variable
Invalid/
200 sets #500 ～ #699 500 to 699 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid

Invalid/
500 sets #500 ～ #999 500 to 999 4 Possible Not possible
Invalid

Section No. 30 Local variable value

Search Sub-section Size System/axis PLC axis

Data type Write Remark
No. No. (byte) designation designation
30-10 Local variables (Level 0) 1 to 32 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
30-11 Local variables (Level 1) 101 to 132 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
30-12 Local variables (Level 2) 201 to 232 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
30-13 Local variables (Level 3) 301 to 332 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
30-14 Local variables (Level 4) 401 to 432 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 31 Tool compensation amount

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
31-10 Tool compensation amount 1 1 to 400 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
1001 to
31-20 Tool compensation amount 2 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
1400 The contents will differ
6001 to depending on the type of tool
31-30 Tool compensation amount 3 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible offset memory.
6400
7001 to
31-40 Tool compensation amount 4 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
7400
1st axis tool length compensation
31-100 1 to 80 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
amount
1001 to
31-110 1st axis wear compensation amount 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
1080
3rd axis tool length compensation 2001 to
31-120 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
amount 2080
3001 to
31-130 3rd axis wear compensation amount 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
3080
The contents will differ
2nd axis tool length compensation 4001 to
31-140 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible depending on the type of tool
amount 4080
offset memory.
5001 to
31-150 2nd axis wear compensation amount 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
5080
6001 to
31-160 Nose R compensation amount 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
6080
7001 to
31-170 Nose R wear compensation amount 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
7080
8001 to
31-180 Hypothetical nose No. 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
8080

604
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

Section No. 32 Common variable value 2

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
50 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to 100 to
4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
#149 149
32-10 Variables per part system
100 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to 100 to
4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible
#199 199

Section No. 62 Synchronous error monitor

Sub-
Search Size System/axis PLC axis
Data type section Write Remark
No. (byte) designation designation
No.
Not Invalid/
Command error (1st set) 101 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
62-1 Command error (2nd set) 201 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
Command error (3rd set) 301 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
FB error (1st set) 102 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
62-2 FB error (2nd set) 202 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
FB error (3rd set) 302 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
Machine position (1st set) 103 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
62-3 Machine position (2nd set) 203 4 Not possible
possible Invalid
Not Invalid/
Machine position (3rd set) 303 4 Not possible
possible Invalid

605
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

Appendix 1.3.1 How to refer to the data
The explanation of read and write data is common for all machine type. The method for referring to the data is shown
below.

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

PLC
System/
Sub-section axis
Search No. Data type Size (byte) Write axis Remark
No. designa
designation
tion
Invalid/ Not
(1) Valid possible
(2) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step)
→(1) 8960 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd step) 8964 4 Possible Valid possible
1-10
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) 8968 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step) 8972 4 Possible Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Valid possible
Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) 8976 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) 8980 4 Possible Valid possible
1-11
Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) 8984 4 Possible Invalid/ Not
Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step) 8988 4 Possible Valid possible
Invalid/ Not
Valid possible

∼ ∼
∼ ∼

(3)

1-10 ‫ޓ‬Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

[Data definition]
This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step.
(This corresponds to the se tup parameter, spindleparameter smax1 to 4.)
The CNC creates the spindle gear sh ift command 1 and 2 with this value and the commanded S command.
During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.
[Precautions]
After being set (written), this
data is valid from the ne xt spindle speed (S) command.
However, the clamping operation with the maximum speed will be validated immediately.

∼ ∼
∼ ∼

(1) Search for the data to be read or written from the type of data givenin the "Sub-section No. List".
(2) Confirm the search No. corresponding to the searched data.
(3) Search for the reference data from the "Appendix 1.3.3 Detailed Explanation of Data" based on the confirmed search
No.

(Note 1) Note that the first value of the search No. (for example, 1-10) is the section No., but the second value is not the
sub-section No.
(Note 2)The expression "1-50-6" in the read/write data explanation indicates section No.: 1, search No.: 50 and bit: 6.
(Note 3)The search No. expressed as "11/15-10" in the read/write data explanation indicates that the contens are
common to the data in section No.: 11, search No.: 10, and the data in section No.: 15 and search No.: 10.

606
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

Appendix 1.3.2 Data unit system

The unit system in this manual is explained below.

Uni systemt B (1 μm system) C (0.1μm system) Selection parameter

Setup parameter
Mm 0.001 0.0001 Basic specification parameter
#1041 I_inch = 0
Input unit
Setup parameter
Inch 0.0001 0.00001 Basic specification parameter
#1041 I_inch = 1
Setup parameter
Mm 0.0005 0.00005 Basic specification parameter
Output unit #1016 iout = 0
(Detection unit) Setup parameter
Inch 0.00005 0.000005 Basic specification parameter
#1016 iout = 1
Setup parameter
Mm 0.001 0.001 Basic specification parameter
Machine #1040 M_inch = 0
constant input
unit Setup parameter
Inch 0.0001 0.00001 Basic specification parameter
#1040 M_inch = 1

(Note 1)The unit systems B and C are settings for the setup parameters (basic specification parameters: #1003 iunit).
This may differ depending on the machine type.
(Note 2)The unit system C (0.1 μm system) is an option specification.
(Note 3)Of the selection parameters, #1041 I_inch and #1040 M_inch are common for each axis, and #1061 iout is for
the independent axis.
(Note 4)The data is read and written in the internal unit.

607
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details

The details of the data that are read or written with the PLC window are explained below.

0-10 　R resister (R0 to R9214)

[Data definition]
This is CNC R register. (This corresponds to the I/F diagnosis screen.)
Refer to "Chapter4 Explanation of Interface Signals" for contents of each register.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit and range may differ depending on the register. Refer to "Chapter4 Explanation of Interface Signals"
for details.
[Precautions]
Data cannot be written in the R register that the shared device is assigned.
Write the data using the PLC program.

1-10 　Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

[Data definition]
This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smax1 to 4.)
The CNC creates the spindle gear shift command 1 and 2 with this value and the commanded S command.
During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.
[Precautions]
After being set (written), this data is valid from the next spindle speed (S) command.
However, the clamping operation with the maximum speed will be validated immediately.

1-11 　Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

[Data definition]
This parameter is used to calculate the spindle speed (S-analog) data for each gear step.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter slimt1 to 4.)
The CNC determines the corresponding spindle limit speed with the spindle gear selection input (Y...) that is output
from the PLC, and calculates the spindle speed (S-analog) data.

Sd1d2d3d4 SOVR
Spindle speed data ＝ ×
slimt n 100

slimt n : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)
Sd1d2d3d4 : Spindle speed (S) command
SOVR : Spindle override
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

608
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

1-13 Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

[Data definition]
When changing the spindle gears, the spindle motor is run slowly at a constant speed to make the changeover
operation smoothly. This parameter is used to designate the speed for it.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter ssift to 4.)
The CNC determines the corresponding spindle shift speed with the spindle gear selection input (Y...) output from
the PLC.

Spindle speed data for gear shift = ssift n / slimt n

slimt n : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)
ssiftn : Spindle shift speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished

1-20 Spindle orientation speed

[Data definition]
This parameter is used to rotate the spindle at a slow constant speed when carrying out spindle orientation
(stopping at set position).
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter sori.)

Spindle speed data for orientation = sori / slimt n

sori : Spindle orientation speed

slimtn : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.
[Precautions]
If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.
[Supplement]
The orientation function is provided for most of the recent spindle controllers, so this parameter is not used often for
the spindle orientation.

1-21 Minimum spindle speed

[Data definition]
This parameter specifies the minimum spindle speed value.
If the S command issued is a spindle speed lower than this parameter value or if the results of the spindle override
are lower than this parameter value, the spindl will be rotated at this minimum spindle speed.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smini.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

609
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

1-30 Spindle parameter (SP001 to SP240)

[Data definition]
These parameters are used to control the spindles.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter "#13001 (SP001)" to "#13240 (SP240)".)
Refer to Setup manual for details of each parameter.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit and range may differ depending on the parameters. Refer to the Setup manual for details.
[Precautions]
Setting of some parameters will become valid after turning the NC power ON. Please turn the NC power ON after
setting the data using the PLC window.

1-50 Method selection parameter (1)

[Data definition]
The following parameters are set in bit units.
1-50-6) Synchronous tapping
This parameter is used when executing the machining program's tapping cycle (G84, G74) with the synchronous
method.
0: Asynchronous method
1: Synchronous method
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter set01.)

1-70 Method selection parameter (3)

[Data definition]
The following parameters are set in bit units.
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0 to 255.
The set data could affect the other bits, so take care when setting.
1-70-1) Tool compensation method --- Valid only for lathe (L) system
Designate the type of movement command, when the tool compensation operation (Tmove) is set to "1".
0: Compensation is carried out regardless of the movement command type.
1: Compensation is carried out only for a movement command issued with an absolute value.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter Tabsmv.)

1-80 Method selection parameter (4)

[Data definition]
The following parameters are set in bit units.
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0 to 255.
The set data could affect the other bits, so take care when setting.
1-80-5) Reference point middle point ignore
This parameter designates how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference point return.
0: Move to the reference point via the middle point designated in the program.
1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program, and move directly to the reference point.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter Mpoint.)

610
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

1-100 Position switch [1] to [16]

[Data definition]
A software dog switch is established at an arbitrary point of the axis on the machine, and the output signal from this
switch is output to the PLC interface when the axis is passing over this switch. A maximum of sixteen switches can
be set per part system, also another 16 axes can be set for PLC axes (a maximum of 128 axes).
This switch can be used after the zero point is established.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, position switches axis, dog1 and dog2.)

The position switch uses the axis, dog1, dog2 as one set.
axis: Name of axis for which the switch is established.
dog1: Distance 1 from basic machine coordinate system zero point
dog2: Distance 2 from basic machine coordinate system zero point
The difference of distance between dog1 and dog2 becomes the position switch width.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.
[Precautions]
A slight delay will occur in the output signal fluctuation due to the actual machine position. This maximum delay time
(tmax), which depends on the area check method parameters #7504 to #7634, is as follows. Also consider the
delay by the scan time as it depends on scan time for the ladder.

When parameter is set to "0" When parameter is set to 1

(commanded machine position) (detector FB position)
tmax = 0.004 - TP [s] tmax = 0.004 [s]
1
TP : Position loop time constant（ [s]）
PGN
PGN : Position loop gain

2-10 Axis n 1st to 4th reference point coordinate

[Data definition]
The 1st reference point, 2nd reference point, 3rd reference point and 4th reference point using 0 of the basic
machine coordinates as the base point can be set for each axis with these parameters.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameters G53ofs to #4_rfp.)

Basic machine coordinates M

1st reference point

2nd reference point

3rd reference point

4th reference point

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.
[Precautions]
This setting is validated from the next reference point return after setting (writing).

611
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

2-11 Axis n Stored stroke limit II (+), (-) ----- For machine tool builder

[Data definition]
These parameters set the movable range in the (+) or (-) limit using 0 of the basic machine coordinates as the base
point.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameters OT+ and OT-.)

Basic machine coordinates

Basic machine coordinate system M

OT+(Y)

OT-(X)
OT+
(X)
OT-(Y)
Movable range

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

612
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

2-20 Axis n Movement control parameter

[Data definition]
The following parameters are indicated in bit units.

2-20-1) Inch output

This parameter indicates whether the output unit is a metric or inch.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter iout.)
0: When the machine side detectors (ball screw and detectors) are metric specifications.
1: When the machine side detectors (ball screw and detectors) are inch specifications.
2-20-2) Reference point return direction (-)
This parameter indicates whether the reference point position is to the (-) direction or (+) direction from the
reference point return near-point detection (near-point dog).
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter dir(-).)
0: (+) direction
1: (-) direction

(-) direction (+) direction

Near-point dog

2-20-3) Servo OFF error compensation

The servo system will enter the servo OFF state when the servo OFF n th axis (*SVFn) signal is input from the PLC
to the CNC. This parameter indicates for each axis whether the amount that the motor rotated during servo OFF is
to be returned to the original state when the servo is turned ON again.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter svof.)
0: Compensate the error (Do not return to the original state.)
1: Do not compensate the error
2-20-4) Rotary axis
This parameter indicates whether the target control axis is a linear axis or rotary axis.
0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter rot.)
2-20-5) Motor CCW
This parameter indicates the motor rotation direction when commanded in the + direction.
0: CW direction looking from motor load side
1: CCW direction looking from motor load side
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter ccw.)

Looking from load side

CW CCW

For + command For + command

Motor rotation direction definition (when parameter ccw=0)

613
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

2-20-A) No reference point axis

This parameter indicates that the control axis is one that does not have a reference point or that reference point
return is not required.
0: G28, G29, G30, manual reference point return is carried out.
1: G28, G29, G30, manual reference point return is ignored.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, zero point return parameter noref.)
2-20-D) Diameter disgnated axis (valid only for lathe system)
This parameter indicates the movement amount (commanded by U) in the X axis direction to half of the command
value.
The command in address X will always be a diameter command.
0: Addresses X and U command movement amounts are the same.
1: The address U command movement amount is half of the address X movement amount.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter dia.)

2-30 Axis n Reference position return approach speed

[Data definition]
This parameter indicates the movement speed when moving toward the reference point after detecting the near-
point dog and then decelerating to stop during the reference point return command. This parameter can be set for
each axis.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter G28crp.)

Approach speed

Rapid
traverse

Reference point
Near-point dog

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is mm/min, °/min or inch/min and the setting range is 0 to 60000.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

614
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

2-35 Axis n Reference position return shift amount

[Data definition]
This parameter defines the distance from the electrical reference point (grid) to the actual machine reference point
during the reference point return command. This can be set for each axis.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter G28sft.)

Reference point position according to grid point

Dog Mechanically fixed reference point

(Reference point return position
after setting shift amount)
Reference position shift amount

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is 0 to 65535 (μm).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-36 Axis n Rapid traverse backlash amount

[Data definition]
This parameter indicates the backlash amount to be compensated when the movement direction is reversed with
the movement command in the rapid traverse mode or with the manual operation (excluding handle feed). This can
be set for each axis.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G0back.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -9999 to +9999 pulses.
[Precautions]
If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.

2-37 Axis n Cutting feed backlash amount

[Data definition]
This parameter indicates the backlash amount to be compensated when the movement direction is reversed with
the movement command in the cutting feed mode or with the handle feed mode of the manual operation. This can
be set for each axis.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G1back.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -9999 to +9999 pulses.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

615
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

2-39 Axis n Axis parameter

[Data definition]
The following parameters are indicated in bit units.

2-39-A)
Select the soft limit function (stored stroke limit II or IIB) set in the parameter #8204 and #8205.
0: Soft limit valid
1: Soft limit invalid

2-40 Axis n Stored stroke limit II (+), (-) ----- For user

[Data definition]
These parameters set the movable range in the (+) or (-) limit using 0 of the basic machine coordinates as the base
point for each axis.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter's soft limit (+) and soft limit (-))

+Y M
-X Basic machine coordinates
+X

Movable range -Y

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-50 Axis n Rapid traverse time constant G0tL

[Data definition]
Set up the liner control time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the rapid traverse mode.
This can be set for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis
specification parameter G0tL.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 4000 (ms).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-51 Axis n Cutting feed time constant G1tL

[Data definition]
Set up the liner control time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be set
for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter G1tL.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 4000 (ms).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

616
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

2-52 Axis n Rapid traverse time constant G0t1

[Data definition]
Set up the primary-delay time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be
set for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter
G0t1. When acceleration or deceleration by software is selected, the second stage time constant is used in G0t1.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 5000 (ms).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-53 Axis n Cutting feed time constant G1t1

[Data definition]
Set up the primary-delay time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be
set for each axis with the parameter.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G1t1. When acceleration or deceleration by
software is selected, the second stage time constant is used in G1t1.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 5000 (ms).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-54 Axis n Current limit value 2

[Data definition]
Set the rate (%) in respect to the stall current for special operations (absolute position initialization, stopper
operation, etc). (This is the limit value for both + and - direction.) For making the maximum driver torque level
available, set "800". This can be set for each axis with the parameter.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, servo parameter SV014.)
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is the stall rated current %, and the setting range is 0 to 999 (%).
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-55 Axis n Axis name

[Data definition]
Specify the axis name of each axis with alphabet. Spcify it from X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter and basic parameter "axname".)
[Data unit, range]
Input and output with ASCII code.

2-56 Axis n Cutting feed clamp speed

[Data definition]
Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
It will be clamped with this feedrate even if the feedrate with G01 is over this value.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter and basic parameter "clamp".)
[Data unit, range]
Data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 1000000 (ms).

617
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

2-57 Axis n Axis n Soft limit IB+

[Data definition]
Set the coordinate of the upper limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is prohibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter OT_1B+.)
Stored stroke limit IB function will be invalid if the values set for the sign and value (other than 0) are the same as
soft limit IB-.
[Data unit, range]
Data unit is half of machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm

2-58 Axis n Soft limit IB-

[Data definition]
Set the coordinate of the lower limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is prohibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter OT_1B-.)
Stored stroke limit IB function will be invalid if the values set for the sign and value (other than 0) are the same as
soft limit IB-.
[Data unit, range]
Data unit is half of machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm

2-59 Axis n Soft limit IB type

[Data definition]
Select the type that applies the settings of "#2062 OT_IB+" and "#2061 OT_IB-" in stored stroke limit I. (This
corresonds to the axis specification parameter OT_1Byte.)
0: Soft limit IB is valid
1: Both soft limit IB and soft limit IC are invalid
2: Soft limit IC is valid
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0, 1 and 2.

3-10 Compensation basic axis No.

[Data definition]
Specify the basic axis address for machine error compensation.
For pitch error compensation, set the name of the axis to be compensated.
For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be the base axis.
In the multi-part system, set "part system No. + axis name".
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter cmpax.)
[Data unit, range]
Output the axis No. of designated axis.
[Precautions]
Write disabled.

618
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

3-11 Compensation direction axis No.

[Data definition]
Specify the compensation axis address for machine error compensation.
For pitch error compensation, set the same axis name as #4001 cmpax.
For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be actually compensated.
In the multi-part system, set "part system No. + axis name".
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter drcax.)
[Data unit, range]
Output the axis No. of designated axis.
[Precautions]
Write disabled.

3-12 Division point No. at reference position

[Data definition]
Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference point position. The reference point is actually the
base, so there is no compensation No. Set the number that is decremented by 1.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter rdvno.)
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 4101 to 5124.
[Precautions]
Write disabled.

3-13 Division point No. at the most negative side

[Data definition]
Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest negative side.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter mdvno.)
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 4101 to 5124.
[Precautions]
Write disabled.

3-14 Division point No. at the most positive side

[Data definition]
Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest positive side.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter pdvno.)
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 4101 to 5124.
[Precautions]
Write disabled.

3-15 Compensation scale factor

[Data definition]
Set the compensation amount's scale.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter sc.)
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0 to 99.
[Precautions]
If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.

619
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

3-16 Division interval

[Data definition]
Set the interval to divide the basic axis. Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these
intervals.
(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter spcdy.)
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 1 to 9999999.
[Precautions]
Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

4-10 Axis n G54 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-11 Axis n G55 workpiece coordinate system offset
4-12 Axis n G56 workpiece coordinate system offset
4-13 Axis n G57 workpiece coordinate system offset
4-14 Axis n G58 workpiece coordinate system offset
4-15 Axis n G59 workpiece coordinate system offset

[Data definition]
These are the G54 to G59 workpiece offset amount of the nth axis (n: 1 to No. of control axes.).
(This corresponds to the tool/compensation amount workpiece coordinate offset G54 to G59.)
[Data unit, range]
Unit

Input unit Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

Range: -199999998 to +199999998

[Precautions]
This setting is valid after the data is rewritten and the next workpiece coordinate changeover is commanded.

4-16 Axis n External workpiece coordinate system offset

[Data definition]
These are the external workpiece coordinate system offset amount of the nth axis (n: 1 to No. of control axes).
(This corresponds to the tool/compensation amount workpiece coordinate offset EXT.)
[Data unit, range]
Unit

Input unit Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

Range: -199999998 to +199999998

[Precautions]
This setting is valid after the data is rewritten and the next workpiece coordinate changeover is commanded.

620
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

5-30 Servo alarm No.

[Data definition]
This indicates that an error has occurred in the servo system.
When an error occurs, the NC alarm 2 (AL2:X331) will turn ON.
(1) Data configuration

Sub-section No. Details

16 Alarm No. main (2-byte)
Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F
0: No alarm
18
1: Alarm has occurred
(hexadecimal)
20 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)
22 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

(2) Alarm contents

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contents
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
1 10 Alarm axis Insufficient voltage
1 11 - Axis selection error
1 12 Alarm axis Memory error 1
1 13 - Software processing error 1
1 16 Alarm axis Magnetic pole detection error
1 17 Alarm axis A/D converter error
1 18 Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Initial communication error
1 1A Alarm axis Machine side detector - Initial communication error
1 1B Alarm axis Machine side detector - CPU error 1
1 1C Alarm axis Machine side detector - EEPROM/LED error
1 1D Alarm axis Machine side detector - Data error
1 1E Alarm axis Machine side detector - Memory error
1 1F Alarm axis Machine side detector - Communication error
1 20 Alarm axis Mortor side detector - No signal
1 21 Alarm axis Machine side detector - No signal
1 22 Alarm axis LSI error
1 23 Alarm axis Excessive speed error 1
1 25 Alarm axis Absolute position data lost
1 26 - Unused axis error
1 27 Alarm axis Machine side detector - CPU error 2
1 28 Alarm axis Machine side detector - Overspeed
1 29 Alarm axis Machine side detector - Absolute position data error
1 2A Alarm axis Machine side detector - Relative position data error
1 2B Alarm axis Motor side detector - CPU error 1
1 2C Alarm axis Motor side detector - EEPROM/LED error
1 2D Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Data error
1 2F Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Communication error
1 30 Alarm axis Over regeneration
1 31 Alarm axis Overspeed
1 32 Alarm axis Power module overcurrent
1 33 Alarm axis Overvoltage
1 34 - NC-DRV communication - CRC error
1 35 Alarm axis NC command error

621
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contents
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
1 36 - NC-DRV communication - Communication error
1 37 Alarm axis Initial parameter error
1 38 - NC-DRV communication - Protocol Error 1
1 39 Alarm axis NC-DRV communication - Protocol Error 2
1 3A Alarm axis Overcurrent
1 3B Alarm axis Power module overheat
1 3C Alarm axis Regeneration circuit error
1 40 Alarm axis Detector selection unit switching error
1 41 Alarm axis Detector selection unit communication error
1 42 Alarm axis Feedback error 1
1 43 Alarm axis Feedback error 2
1 46 Alarm axis Motor overheat
1 50 Alarm axis Overload 1
1 51 Alarm axis Overload 2
1 52 Alarm axis Excessive error 1
1 53 Alarm axis Excessive error 2
1 54 Alarm axis Excessive error 3
1 55 - External emergency stop
1 58 Alarm axis Collision detection 1 : G0
1 59 Alarm axis Collision detection 1 : G1
1 5A Alarm axis Collision detection 2
1 5C Alarm axis Orientation feedback error
1 5F - External contactor error
1 61 - Power module overcurrent
1 63 - Supplementary regeneration error
1 65 - Rush relay error
1 67 - Phase interruption
1 68 - Watchdog
1 69 - Grounding
1 6A - External contactor welding
1 6B - Rush relay welding
1 6C - Main circuit error
1 6D - Parameter error
1 6E - Memory error
1 6F - Power supply error
1 71 - Instantaneous power interruption
1 73 - Over regeneration
1 74 - Regenerative resistor overheat
1 75 - Overvoltage
1 76 - External emergency stop setting error
1 77 - Power module overheat
1 88 - Watchdog

(Note 1) Depending on the driver type and power supply type, there may be some alarms that might not occur.
(Note 2) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

622
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

5-90 Servo warning No.

[Data definition]
This indicates that a warining alarm has occurred in the servo system.
(1) Data configuration

Sub-section No. Details

64 Alarm No. main (2-byte)
Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F
0: No alarm
66
1: Alarm has occurred
(hexadecimal)
68 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)
70 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

(2) Alarm contents

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contens
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
2 90 Alarm axis Detector - Initial communication error
2 91 Alarm axis Detector - Communication error
2 92 Alarm axis Detector - Protocol error
2 93 Alarm axis Initial absolute position fluctuation
2 96 Alarm axis Scale feedback error
2 97 Alarm axis Scale offset error
2 9E Alarm axis Absolute position detector - Revolution counter error
2 9F - Battery voltage drop
2 A8 Alarm axis Turret indexing error warning
2 E0 Alarm axis Over regeneration warning
2 E1 Alarm axis Overload warning
2 E3 Alarm axis Absolute position counter warning
2 E4 Alarm axis Parameter error warning
2 E6 Alarm axis Control axis detachment warning
2 E7 - In NC emergency stop state
2 E8 - Excessive supplementary regeneration frequency
2 E9 - Instantaneous power interruption warning
2 EA - In external emergency stop state
2 EB - Over regeneration warning

(Note 1) E7 of the alarm No. sub 1 cannot be viewed as the servo warning No.
(Note 2) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

623
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

5-130 Operation error No.

[Data definition]
This indicates that the axis cannot move, etc., due to the operation or machine side conditions.
When an error occurs, the NC alarm 4 (AL4) will turn ON.

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7
AL4
X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933

(1) Data configuration

Sub-section No. Details

96 Alarm No. main (2-byte)
Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F
0: No alarm
98
1: Alarm has occurred
(hexadecimal)
100 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)
102 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

624
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

(2) Alarm contents

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contents
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
1 1 Alarm axis Dog overrun
1 2 Alarm axis Z-axis not cross
1 3 Alarm axis Invalid return
1 4 Alarm axis External interlock
1 5 Alarm axis Internal interlock
1 6 Alarm axis H/W stroke end
1 7 Alarm axis S/W stroke end
1 8 - Chuck/tail-stock barrier stroke end axis found
1 9 - Reference point return number illegal
1 20 - Reference point return illegal
Reference point return disabled during absolute position
1 24 -
detection alarm
Reference point return disabled during zero point
1 25 -
initialization
1 51 - Synchronization error too large
1 101 - Not operation mode
1 102 - Override zero
1 103 - External feedrate zero
1 104 - F1-digit speed zero
1 105 - Spindle stop
1 106 - Handle feed axis No. illegal
1 107 - Spindle speed excessive
1 108 - Fixed point mode feed axis No. illegal
1 109 - Block start interlock
1 110 - Cutting block start interlock
1 112 - Program check mode
1 115 - Resetting
1 117 - Play back not possible
1 120 - Synchronization correction mode ON
1 121 - No synchronous control option
Simultaneous axes movement prohibition when the incline
1 124 Alarm axis
axis control is valid.
Axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft
1 160 Alarm axis
limit range
1 1005 - Execution of G114.* during G114.*
1 1106 - Spindle synchronization phase calculation illegal

(Note 1) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

625
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

5-140 Automatic stop code

[Data definition]
This indicates the cause of automatic stop or block stop.
(1) Data configuration

Sub-section No. Contents

104 Alarm attribute main (2-byte)
Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F
0: No alarm
106
1: Alarm has occurred
(hexadecimal)
108 Alarm attribute sub 1 (2-byte)
110 Alarm attribute sub 2 (2-byte)

(2) Alarm contents

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contents
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
1 101 - Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is moving.
1 102 - Automatic start is not performed as the NC is not ready.
1 103 - Automatic start is not performed as the "reset" signal has been input.
1 104 - Automatic start is not perfomed as the feed hold signal is turned ON.
1 105 - Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is at the stroke end.
Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is at the stored stroke
1 106 -
limit.
1 107 - Automatic start is not performed as there is no operation mode.
Automatic start is not performed as two or more automatic operation
1 108 -
modes have been selected.
Automatic start is not performed as the automatic operaton mode has
1 109 -
changed to another automatic operation mode.
1 110 - Automatic start is not performed as the buffer correction is executed.
Automatic start is not possible because a thermal alarm (Z53 CNC
1 113 -
overheat) has occurred.
Automatic start is not possible because the voltage of the battery in the
1 116 -
NC control unit has dropped.
1 138 - A start signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm.
A start signal was input during zero point initialization in the absolute
1 139 -
position detection system.
A start signal was input for MDI mode while the MDI operation was being
1 141 -
carried out in another part system.
Automatic start is not performed as the setting of setup parameters is
1 190 -
enabled.
1 191 - Automatic start was attempted while a file was being deleted/written.
2 201 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as an axis is at the stroke end.
Automatic operation pause was performed as an axis is at the stored
2 202 -
stroke limit.
2 203 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the reset signal is detected.
2 204 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the feed hold switch is ON.
Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the operation mode has
2 205 -
changed to another mode during automatic operation.
2 206 - The acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large.
2 215 - An absolute position detection alarm occurred.
3 301 - Block stop was performed as the SINGLE BLOCK switch turned ON.
3 302 - Block stop was performed due to the user macro stop.
Block stop was performed as the automatic mode changed to another
3 303 -
automatic mode.

626
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

Alarm No. Alarm No. Alarm No.

Alarm contents
Main Sub 1 Sub 2
3 304 - MDI last block was completed.
3 305 - The interlock signal, which locks the block start, is ON.
3 306 - The interlock signal, which locks the block cutting start, is ON.
The "inclined axis control: No Z axis compensation" signal has turned ON
3 310 -
or OFF during the program operation.
The Nos. in the table are shown during the operation of the
10 (Note 2) - corresponding completion wait factor. The numbers will disappear when
the operation is completed.

(Note 1) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.
(Note 2) 0
Alarm No.

Waiting for unclamp signal

Dwelling

Alarm No.

Waiting for MSTB completion

Door open

Waiting for spindle position to be looped

Alarm No.

Waiting for cutting speed deceleration

Waiting for rapid traverse deceleration

Waiting for spindle orientation to complete
(Note 3) (Note 4)

0 0 0
1 × 1 × 1 ×
8 × 8 × 2 ×
9 × × 9 × × 3 × ×
4 ×
5 × ×
6 × ×
7 × × ×
8 ×
9 × ×
A × ×
B × × ×
C × ×

(Note 3) Waiting for unclamp when "#2076 index_x"=1. D × × ×

(Note 4) Door open mode is enable d by the door interlock E × × ×

function.
F × × × ×

627
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

11/15-10 Interporation vector length

[Data definition]
The remaining movement distance of the block being executed is indicated.
[Interpolation vector length]

Σ(Remaining movement Y
distance of each axis)²

[Data unit, range]

The unit is 1/2 of the input unit.
(Either 0.5μm, or 0.05μm)
[Precautions]
The data is not set when G0 non-interpolation (G0Intp=1). The data will be updated with the interpolation cycle.

11/15-20 Movement mode

[Data definition]

Data (binary) Contents

0 G00 Positionoing (each axis independent)
1 G00 Positionoing (linear)
2 G01 Linear interpolation
3 G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
4 G03 Circular interpolation (CCW)
5 G02 X_Y_Z Helical interpolation (CW)
6 G03 X_Y_Z Helical interpolation (CW)
7
8
9
10
11 G04 Time designated dwell
12
13 G27_P1 1st reference position valification
14 G27_P2 2nd reference position valification
15 G27_P3 3rd reference position valification
16 G27_P4 4th reference position valification
17 G28 Automatic referene point return
18 G29 Return from automatic referene point
19 G30_P2 2nd reference point return
20 G30_P3 3rd reference point return
21 G30_P4 4th reference point return
22 G31 Skip function
23 G31.1 Multi-step skip function 1
24 G31.2 Multi-step skip function 2
25 G31.3 Multi-step skip function 3
26 G33 Thread cutting (G32 for lathe G code series 2.)
27 G34 Variable lead thread cutting (lathe only)
28
29 G92 Coordinate system setting
30

628
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

12/16-10 Axis direction movement amount

[Data definition]
The remaining movement distance of each axis in the block being executed is indicated.

(Machine position at movement end point) - (Machine position at movement start or current position)

For block being executed

For block before execution

[Data unit, range]

The unit is 1/2 of the input unit.
(Either 0.5μm, or 0.05μm)
[Precautions]
(1) If the movement mode is skip or multi-step skip, the movement end point will not be the skip stop point, but
instead will be a value calculated from the commanded value.
(2)If the movement mode is counter preset, the counter preset value will be set instead of the remaining movement
distance of each axis. The value will be cleared immediately after the counter preset is executed.
(3) If the movement mode is reference point return, the remaining movement distance to the middle point will be set.
(4) If the movement mode is start position return, the remaining movement distance from the middle point will be
set.

13/17-10 Interpolation mode (G code group 1)

[Data definition]
The current movement modal (group 1) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 G00 G00 G00
1 G01 G01 G01
2 G02 G02 G02
3 G03 G03 G03
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 G33 G32 G33
7 - - -
8 - G34 G34

13/17-11 Plane selection (G code group 2)

[Data definition]
The current plane selection modal (group 2) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 G17 G17 G17
1 G18 G18 G18
2 G19 G19 G19

629
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

13/17-12 Feed mode (G code group 5)

[Data definition]
The current feed modal (group 5) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 - - -
1 G94 G98 G94
2 G95 G99 G95

13/17-13 Radius compensation modal (G code group 7)

[Data definition]
The current radius compensation modal (group 7) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 G40 G40 G40
1 G41 G41 G41
2 G42 G42 G42
3 - G46 G46

13/17-14 Fixed cycle modal (G code group 9)

[Data definition]
The current fixed cycle modal (group 9) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 - G72 G72
1 - G73 G73
2 - G74 G74
3 - G75 G75
4 - G76 G76
5 - G90 G77
6 - G92 G78
7 - G94 G79
8 G80 G80 G80
9 G81 - -
10 G82 - -
11 G83 G83 G83
12 G84 G84 G84
13 G85 G85 G85
14 G86 - -
15 G87 G87 G87
16 G88 G88 G88
17 G89 G89 G89
18 - - -
19 - G70 G70
20 - G71 G71
21 G73 - -
22 G74 - -
23 G76 G79 G83.2

630
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

13/17-15 Workpiece coordinate system modal (G code group 12)

[Data definition]
The current workpiece coordinate system modal (group 12) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 G54 G54 G54
1 G55 G55 G55
2 G56 G56 G56
3 G57 G57 G57
4 G58 G58 G58
5 G59 G59 G59

13/17-16 Cutting mode (G code group 13)

[Data definition]
The current cutting modal (group 13) is indicated.

Machininig Lathe system

Data
center system Series 2 Series 3
0 G61 G61 G61
1 G62 G62 G62
2 G63 G63 G63
3 G64 G64 G64
4 G61.1 - -

13/17-17 Other G modals (G code group 3, 4, 6, 10, 17, 18)

[Data definition]
The current G modal (group 3, 4, 6, 17, 18) is indicated.

bit7 *bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Group 18 Group 17 Group 10 Group 6 Group 4 Group 3

1 G15 G96 G99 G20 G22 G90

0 G14 G97 G98 G21 G23 G91

* Lathe system

13/17-20 Block No.

[Data definition]
The current block No. is indicated.
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0 to 99.

631
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

13/17-25 Normal line control modal (G code group 15)

[Data definition]
The current normal line control modal (G code group 15) is indicated.

bitF bitE bitD bitC bitB bitA bit9 bit8

Group 15 Group 15

1 G42.1 G41.1/ G42.1

0 G41.1 G40.1

* The bitB is turned ON by either G41.1 or G42.1. The bit C determines which of G41.1 or G42.1 turns the bit B
ON.

13/17-30 Shape compensation No.

[Data definition]
(1)Machininig center system
The tool compensation No. commanded by address D in the nose radius compensation (G41, G42) or position
compensation (G45 to G48) block is indicated.
(2)Lathe system
The tool length compensation No. the tool function code T is indicated.
(a) When designating the tool length and tool nose wear compensation No. with the low-order 1digit or 2 digits
of the T command.

Ｔ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ ＊
Tool compensation method Same
Tool nose wear compensation compensation No.
Tool No.

Ｔ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ ＊＊
Tool compensation method Same
Tool nose wear compensation compensation No.
Tool No.

(b) When designating the tool length compensation No. and tool nose wear compensation No. independently.

Ｔ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ ＊
Tool nose wear compensation

Tool No. + Tool length compensation

Ｔ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ ＊＊

Tool nose wear compensation

Tool No. + Tool length compensation

In this case, the tool length compensation No. is the last two digits of the high-order digit.

13/17-31 Wear compensation No.

[Data definition]
(1) Machininig center system
This is the same as the shape compensation No.
(2) Lathe system
The tool nose wear No. commanded by the tool function code (T) is indicated.

632
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

13/17-40 Miscellaneous function (M) code (BCD)

[Data definition]
The miscellaneous function No. commanded by the miscellaneous function code (M) is indicated.

13/17-41 Spindle function (S) code (BIN)

[Data definition]
The spindle speed commanded by the spindle function code (S) is indicated.

13/17-42 Tool function (T) code (BCD)

[Data definition]
The tool No. commanded by the tool function code (T) is indicated.

13/17-43 2nd miscellaneous function (B) code (BCD)

[Data definition]
The data commanded by the 2nd miscellaneous function code (B, A or C) is indicated.

13/17-44 Program No.

[Data definition]
The current program No. (modal) is indicated.
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (binary).

13/17-45 Sequence No.

[Data definition]
The current sequence No. is indicated.
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 1 to 99999 (binary).

14/18-10 Tool length compensation No.

[Data definition]
The tool length compensation No. of the axis is indicated
[Data unit, range]
The setting range is 0 to 99999999 (binary).
(Note) This is valid only for the machining center system.

20-10 Automatic effective feedrate

[Data definition]
The actual feedrate in the automatic mode is indicated.
(This includes the speed change conditions such as override.)
(1) For G0, G1, G2, G3, G27
The composite speed of all commanded axes is indicated.
(2) For G28, G29, G30
The speed of the fastest axis among the axes moving simultaneously is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
(iunit)
B 1 × 2-10 mm/min 0.1 × 2-10 inch/min
C 0.1 × 2-10 mm/min 0.01 × 2-10 inch/min

633
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

20-11 Manual effective feedrate

[Data definition]
The actual feedrate in the manual mode is indicated.
(This includes the speed change conditions such as override.)
The speed of the fastest axis among the axes moving simultaneously is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
(iunit)
B 1 × 2-10 mm/min 0.1 × 2-10 inch/min
C 0.1 × 2-10 mm/min 0.01 × 2-10 inch/min

20-20 In-position

[Data definition]
This indicates that the control axes which belong to each part system are in teh state of in-position. (Up to 8 axes
are available in the part system)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis

21-10 Current position in machine coordinate system

[Data definition]
The current position of the axis in the machine coordinate system is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) sInput unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-12 Manual interrupt amount (1) (Manual absolute switch OFF)

[Data definition]
The total of the movement amount in the manual mode with the manual absolute switch OFF is indicated.
The program coordinate system is shifted by the distance corresponding to this data.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

634
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

21-13 Manual interrupt amount (2) (Manual absolute switch OFF)

[Data definition]
The total of the movement amount in the manual mode with the manual absolute switch ON is indicated.
This data is cleared in the following cases:
(1) When calculation of the buffer is started during automatic starting, or when automatic start up is executed.
(2) When the reset signal is input.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-20 Current position in workpiece coordinate system

[Data definition]
The current position in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-30 Current position in workpiece coordinate system during skip ON

[Data definition]
The current position in the workpiece coordinate system when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is
indicated.
This corresponds to the macro variable #5061, 5062 .....
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-31 Current position in machine coordinate system during skip ON

[Data definition]
The current position in the machine coordinate system when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is
indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

635
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

21-32 Remaining distance during skip ON

[Data definition]
The remaining commanded distance when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-33 Current position in machine coordinate system during manual skip ON

[Data definition]
The current position in the machine coordinate system when the skip signal is ON during the manual skip command
is indicated.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-34 Current position of program command

[Data definition]
This indicates the program position of machine coordinate system. (The same value as the current value 2 of the
servo monitor screen will be displayed.)
This data does not include the work offset amount, tool compensation amount and radius compensation
amount. Counter operation is artificially carried out by adding the remaining movement amount to the end position
coordinate which is designated by the machining program. So it informs the command position of the machining
program when it reaches the end point of each block, but it does not show the correct path of the machining
program when the axis is in motion.
[Data unit]
The double of the counter value is stored.

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

21-35 Remaining command

[Data definition]
It displays the remaining distance of the movement command currently executed. (The remaining distance is the
incremental distance from the current position to the end point of that block).
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

636
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

22-10 Emergency stop cause

[Data definition]
The cause of why the CNC entered the emergency stop state is indicated.
This data can also be referred to with the file register R21 (G10221) in the PLC interface.
The correspondence of each bit is explained below. Here, the signal is normally "1", and is set to "0" when an
emergency stop occurs.

22-10-0) CNC side PLC Software stop state

This indicates that the emergency stop state was entered because the CNC side PLS is in the stop state. Switching
RUN/STOP for CNC side PLC is made by using the CNC unit rotary switch 2 (right side). (Normal: 0, at STOP: 1)
22-10-4) Emergency stop output
This indicates that the 24V is not being supplied to the emergency stop input because the emergency stop switch
has been pressed.
22-10-6) PLC Emergency stop output device Y327 is "1"
This indicates that the user PLC has entered the emergency stop state.
The PLC device "Y427" is the PLC emergency stop interface.
22-10-D) Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal
The device No. of door interlock dogO/T arbitrary allocation overlaps another signal, or that is specified with and
illegal No.
22-10-E) Spindle drive unit emergency stop output
This indicates that the spindle controller is in the emergency stop state.
22-10-F) Servo drive unit emergency stop output
This indicates that the servo controller is in the emergency stop state.

23-10 Spindle command speed (effective value)

[Data definition]
This is not the spindle function (S) command value, but instead is the commanded speed that is obtained by adding
the conditions such as spindle override, spindle stop and spindle gear shift to the S command. Designate the axis
No. with section sub-ID No.
(1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, ...7: 7th spindle)
* When "0" is set, the 1st spindle data will be output.
[Data unit and range]
The data unit is r/min. The setting range is 0 to 32767.

24-1 Power ON time

[Data definition]
This is the total cumulative time from when the controller power is turned ON to when it is turned OFF.
[Data unit and range]
The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.
The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

64
Time [s] ＝ Read data × 9000

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

9000
Write data ＝ × time
64

637
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

24-2 Automatic operation time

[Data definition]*256
This is the total cumulative time per machining time from when the automatic start button is pressed in the memory
(tape) mode to when the M02/M30 command is issued, or to when the reset process is carried out by pressing the
reset button.
[Data unit and range]
The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.
The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

64
Time [s] ＝ Read data × 9000

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

9000
Write data ＝ × time
64

24-3 Automatic start up time

[Data definition]
This is the total cumulative time of automatic starting from when the automatic start button is pressed in the memory
(tape) mode or MDI mode to when the feedhold stop, block stop or reset button is pressed.
[Data unit and range]
The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.
The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

64
Time [s] ＝ Read data × 9000

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

9000
Write data ＝ × time
64

24-4 External cumulative time 1

24-5 External cumulative time 2

[Data definition]
This counts and displays the total cumulative time that the designated signal (Y414, Y415) is ON with the PLC
program. The signals are assigned in the following manner.
24-4 External cumulative time 1: Y314
24-5 External cumulative time 2: Y315
[Data unit and range]
The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.
The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

64
Time [s] ＝ Read data × 9000

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

9000
Write data ＝ × time
64

638
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

26-10 Spindle Motor real speed

[Data definition]
This is the real speed of the spindle motor detected by the encoder built into the motor.
[Data unit, range]
The data unit is r/min.

26-20 Spindle Motor load

[Data definition]
This is the load (torque current) of the spindle motor.
The rated load for 30 minutes is regarded as 100%.

Spindle motor load (%) = (An absolute value

Read data
is retrieved.)

26-30 Spindle Position within one rotation (Z-phase standard)

[Data definition]
This is the Z-phase position within one rotation of the spindle motor.
The same value (rounded with 360°) as the machine value in the spindle monitor (3) screen of the CNC monitor will
be output.
[Data unit]
If the output unit setting ("#3025") is B, it is 0.0005 degree, and if it is C, it is 0.00005 dgree.

639
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

27-10 Smoothing status, servo status

[Data definition]
The various servo related information is expressed in bit units.

27-10-0) Ready ON
If the drive unit can be entered the ready ON state, including the ready ON request signal from the CNC, the main
circuit can be turned on. While the main circuit is ON, the ready ON signal will turn ON as the answer signal to the
CNC.
The conditions for turning OFF is as follows:
(1) When the ready ON request signal from the CNC turns OFF.
(2) When the CNC enters the emergency stop state.
(3) When a servo alarm occurs.
27-10-1) Servo ON
If the conditions, where the above ready ON signal is ON and the servo ON request signal is received from the
CNC, are met, turn ON the servo ON signal (structure a position loop). While the position loop is structured, the
servo ON signal will remain ON as the answer signal to the CNC.
The conditions for turning OFF is as follows:
(1) When the condition for turning OFF the the ready OFF signal is met and the servo ON request signal from
the CNC turns OFF.
27-10-3) In alarm
This notifies that the drive unit is in the servo OFF state.
27-10-4) Absolute position established
This turns ON when the absolute position has been established.
27-10-5) Z phase passed
This means that the datum point (Z phase) has been passed by the axis movement after the power was turned ON.
The servo parameter "SPEC" value in the setup parameters determines which datum point (Z phase) is valid
among the points output by detector.
The CNC will determine the reference point return position, etc., based on this signal.
Once turned ON, this signal remains ON until it is turned OFF.
27-10-6) In-position
This indicates that the difference of the command and the feedback from the detector, or in other words, the
position deflection (position loop droop) is within the range designated by the servo parameter "SV024" (in-position
width) in the setup parameters.
How the CNC operates upon receiving this signal depends on the basic specification parameter "inpos" (in-position
check valid) in the setup parameters.

Servo

Previous block Next block

Command

In-position width

27-10-7) Torque limit

This notifies that the motor drive current has been limited.
The current limit parameter will follow the ILMT (limit values for both + and - directions) in the servo parameters of
the setup parameters.

640
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

27-10-8) Smoothing 0
The acceleration/deceleration time constant to make the machine movement smooth is applied to the issued step-
state command. The circuit onto which the acceleration/deceleration time constant is applied is called the
smoothing circuit.
Smoothing 0 means that there is no droop amount in that smoothing circuit.
(Note 1) This may turn ON when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.
(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the plus motion (+) signal (MVPn) and the minus motion (-) signal (MVMn)
sent from the CNC to the PLC are both OFF.
27-10-9) Smoothing (+)
This indicates that there is a (+) droop amount (movement in the + direction) in the smoothing circuit described in
section 27-10-8.
(Note 1) This may turn OFF when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.
(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the plus motion (+) signal (MVPn) sent from the CNC to the PLC.
27-10-A) Smoothing (-)
This indicates that there is a (-) droop amount (movement in the - direction) in the smoothing circuit described in
section 27-10-8.
(Note 1) This may turn OFF when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.
(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the minus motion (-) signal (MVPn) sent from the CNC to the PLC.
27-10-C) Hardware OT+ (hardware overtravel)
This indicates that the stroke end (+) signal was input for an axis moving in the (+) direction. Once the conditions
are met, the signal will turn ON and the axis will move in the (+) direction. And when the stroke end (-) signal is no
longer input, this signal will turn OFF.
27-10-D) Hardware OT- (hardware overtravel)
This indicates that the stroke end (-) signal was input for an axis moving in the (-) direction. Once the conditions are
met, the signal will turn ON and the axis will move in the (-) direction. And when the stroke end (-) signal is no longer
input, this signal will turn OFF.
27-10-E) Near-point dog ON
This turns ON when the reference point return near-point detection signal (dog) for the axis is detected while
executing the dog-type reference point return. This turns OFF when the reference point is reached.

Creep speed
Reference point Rapid traverse rate
return operation

Dog
Reference point
Near-point dog ON

27-20 Servo delay amount

[Data definition]
This is an amount that indicates the difference of the actual machine position from the commanded position. (With
code (+) ir (-))
The servo delay amount will be the same as the droop on the diagnosis screen's servo monitor, according to the
following equation.

Droop [command unit] ＝ 1

Read data ×
2

641
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

27-30 Feed axis motor load A (%)

[Data definition]
This is the load of the feed axis monitor.
The data read with the PLC window has a code (+ or -).

(An absolute value

Feed axis motor load (%) Read data is retrieved.)

[Precautions]
The motor data is data that considers the motor type. Thus, conversion may not be required depending on the
motor type.

27-31 Feed axis motor load B (%)

[Data definition]
This is the load (current) of the feed axis monitor.

(An absolute value

Feed axis motor load (%) Read data is retrieved.)

(Note) The same contents as the feed axis motor load A (27-30) are obtained for the feed axis motor load B.
To read the feed axis motor load, use the feed axis motor load A (27-30).

27-32 Motor end FB

[Data definition]
This is the feedback value of the speed detector.
The data read with the PLC window has a code.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

When detecting the relative position, the base (zero) is where the power is turned ON.
When detecting the absolute position, the base (zero) is where the absolute position initialization set is made.
The distance from the base (not rounded to 360°) is displayed as the FB value of the rotary axis unlike the machine
value.

27-33 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

[Data definition]
This is the speed of the feed axis monitor.
The data read with the PLC window has a code (+ or -).

(An absolute value

Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) = Read data is retrieved.)

642
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

27-34 Machine end FB

[Data definition]
In case of full-closed control, it is the feedback value of machine end position detector.
In case of the semi-closed control, the value is the same as the motor end FB value.
The data read with the PLC window has a code.
[Data unit]

Input unit system Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

When detecting the relative position, the base (zero) is where the power is turned ON.
When detecting the absolute position, the base (zero) is where the absolute position initialization set is made.
The distance from the base (not rounded to 360°) is displayed as the FB value of the rotary axis unlike the machine
value.

27-35 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

[Data definition]
This is the speed of the feed axis motor.
The data read with the PLC window has a code.

(An absolute value

Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) = Read data is retrieved.)

27-36 Grid amount

[Data definition]
The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point dog to the
grid point (electrical zero point) as the dog-type reference position return is executed.
The grid amount can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen.
After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the value designated by the parameter #1229 set01/bit6:
0: Distance between dog ON and basic point (including a grid mask amount)
1: A value given by deducting a grid mask amount from the distance between dog ON and basic point.
The grid amount is cleared by power shutoff of NC, and therefore 0 will be obtained if it is read after the NC restart.
[Data unit]

Input unit Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

27-37 Overload (%)

[Data definition]
This indicates the overload status (%) of the motor.

27-38 Estimated disturbance torque (%)

[Data definition]
This indicates the estimated disturbance torque (%) of the motor. The same value as the estimated disturbance
torque in the servo monitor is output.

643
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

27-39 #2 ZERO

[Data definition]
This parameter is used to determine the basic machine coordinate system.
Specify the coordinates of the machine basic position seen from the zero point of basic machine coordinate system
or absolute position basic point.
(Whether the machine basic position or absolute position basic point is used is determined by data specified for
#2059 "zerbas" of the setup parameter.)

Basic machine coordinate system

zero point

Machine basic
position
Values set to #2 ZERO

[Data unit]
Unit: mm
Range: -99999.999 to 99999.999

29-10 Variable command (common variable value 1)

[Data definition]
These are comon variables used by the variable commands and user macros.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the variable No. to be read or written.
The common variable 1 can be used common for all the part systems.

Function
Common variables
Sub-section No. Remark
50 sets: #500 to #549 500 to 549
100 sets: #500 to #599 500 to 599 These can be used in the main program, sub program
200 sets: #500 to #699 500 to 699 and each macro program.

500 sets: #500 to #999 500 to 999

[Precautions]
(1) When data is changed during operation:
(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.
(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.
(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to
the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".
When the control signal bit 3 is set to "0", only the integer is read or written.

30-10 Local variables (Level 0)

[Data definition]
These are the local variables for the main program (macro level 0).
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the local No. to be read or written.
[Precautions]
(1) When data is changed during operation:
(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.
(b) The variable is cleared to a blank when the macro is called.
(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.
(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to
the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".

644
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

30-11 Local variables (Level 2)

[Data definition]
These are the same as the local variables (level 0), and are the local variables in macro level 1.
However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 200 has been added to the local variable
No.

30-12 Local variables (Level 2)

[Data definition]
These are the same as the local variables (level 1), and are the local variables in macro level 2.
However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 200 has been added to the local variable
No.

30-13 Local variables (Level 3)

[Data definition]
These are the same as the local variables (level 2), and are the local variables in macro level 3.
However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 300 has been added to the local variable
No.

30-14 Local variables (Level 4)

[Data definition]
These are the same as the local variables (level 3), and are the local variables in macro level 4.
However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 400 has been added to the local variable
No.

31-10 Tool compensation amount 1

[Data definition]
This is the tool offset and differs according to the distinction of shape and wear.
Without shpae/wear distinction : Tool compensation amount
With shpae/wear distinction : Tool length shape compensation amount
The sub-section No. used by the PLC window corresponds to the tool offset No.
[Data unit, range]
Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 μm, or 0.05 μm)
Data range : -99999999 to +99999999 (binary)
[Precautions]
Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

31-20 Tool compensation amount 2

[Data definition]
This is the tool length wear compensation amount.
(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 1000 has been added to the local variable No.
[Data unit, range]
Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 μm, or 0.05 μm)
Data range : -99999 to +99999 (binary)
[Precautions]
Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

645
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

31-30 Tool compensation amount 3

[Data definition]
This is the tool radius shape compensation amount.
(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 6000 has been added to the offset No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "Tool compensation amount 1".

31-40 Tool compensation amount 4

[Data definition]
This is the tool radius wear compensation amount.
(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 7000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "Tool compensation amount 2".

31-100 1st axis tool length compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 1st axis tool length compensation amount.
The sub-section No. used by the PLC window corresponds to the tool offset No.
[Data unit, range]
Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 μm, or 0.05 μm)
Data range : -99999999 to +99999999 (binary)
[Precautions]
Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

31-110 1st axis wear compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 1st axis wear compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 1000 has been added to the local variable No.
[Data unit, range]
Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 μm, or 0.05 μm)
Data range : 0 to 99999 (binary)
[Precautions]
Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

31-120 3rd axis tool length compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 3rd axis tool length compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 2000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis tool length compensation amount".

31-130 3rd axis wear compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 3rd axis wear compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 3000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis wear compensation amount".

31-140 2nd axis tool length compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 2nd axis tool length compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 4000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis tool length compensation amount".

646
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

31-150 2nd axis wear compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the 2nd axis wear compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 5000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis wear compensation amount".

31-160 Nose R compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the nose R compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 6000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "X axis tool length compensation amount".

31-170 Nose R wear compensation amount

[Data definition]
This is the nose R wear compensation amount.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 7000 has been added to the local variable No.
Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "X axis wear compensation amount".

31-180 Hypothetical nose No.

[Data definition]
This is the hypothetical nose No.
(1) Nose point
Generally, the tool nose is rounded, so the nose position in the program is aligned to point P as shown in the
following example.
With nose R compensation, select one point from the points shown below for each tool No., and preset this
position relation.
(Select from 1 to 8 for G46 mode, and from 0 to 9 for G41/G42 mode.)

+X
8
0,9 4 3
7 5
P 5 7
P 1 2
3 4 6
8 Tool nose point
+Z 0 or 9
Correspondence between
hypothetical tool nose numbers and tool nose points

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 8000 has been added to the local variable No.

647
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

32-10 Variable command (common variable value 2)

[Data definition]
These are comon variables used by the variable commands and user macros.
The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the variable No. to be read or written.
The common variable 2 is prepared per part system. Designate the part system No. on the part system No.
designation bit.

Function
Common variables
Sub-section No. Remark
50 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to
100 to 149
#149 These can be used in the main program, sub program
100 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to and each macro program.
100 to 199
#199

[Precautions]
(1) When data is changed during operation:
(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.
(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.
(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to
the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".
When the control signal bit 3 is set to "0", only the integer is read or written.

62-1 Command error

[Data definition]
This is the deviation of the secondary axis machine position in respect to the primary axis. This displays the error of
the command value to the servo control section before compensating the pitch error, incremental position, or
backlash. If this error occurs, the parameters that should be the same for the secondary axes are different. Check
the setting value.
This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for
axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for
synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.
Command error = Command "s" - command "m" - ∆
Command "s": Seconady axis command value
Command "m": Primary axis command value
∆: Command "s" - command "m" at start of synchronous control
[Data unit]
The data units, depending on the input unit of the part system to which the primary/secondary axis belongs, are as
follows.

Input unit Linear axis

Rotary axis
(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)
B 0.0005 mm 0.00005 inch 0.0005°
C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005 °

648
 C70 PLC Interface Manual
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

62-2 FB error

[Data definition]
This is the deviation of the secondary axis feedback value in respect to the feedback value from the primary axis
servomotor. This displays the error of the actual machine position. The synchronous error check is carried out on
this error.
This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for
axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for
synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.
FB error = FBs - FBm - ∆
FBs : Secondary axis feedback value
FBm: Primary axis feedback value
∆: FBs . FBm at start of synchronous control
[Data unit]
Same as "Command error".

62-3 Machine position

[Data definition]
This displays the machine position of the master axis.
This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for
axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for
synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.
[Data unit]
Same as "Command error".

649
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

650
 Page No. INDEX

Numbers
1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE .......................................................................................................................... 323
1ST HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m...................................................................................................................... 258
1ST HANDLE VALID ........................................................................................................................................................ 259
1ST HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION................................................................................................. 326
1ST REFERENCE POSITION REACHED ....................................................................................................................... 106
24 HOURS CONTINUOUS OPERATION .......................................................................................................................... 91
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE VALID .............................................................................................................. 269
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE.......................................................................................................................... 324
2ND HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................................................... 260
2ND HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION ........................................................................................................................... 326
2ND HANDLE VALID........................................................................................................................................................ 261
2ND M FUNCTION STROBE 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 141
2ND REFERENCE POSITION REACHED....................................................................................................................... 107
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN INTERLOCK.................................................................................................... 287
3RD HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................................................... 262
3RD HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION ........................................................................................................................... 326
3RD HANDLE VALID........................................................................................................................................................ 263
3RD REFERENCE POSITION REACHED....................................................................................................................... 107
4TH REFERENCE POSITION REACHED ....................................................................................................................... 107

A
Absolute position data loss ............................................................................................................................................... 494
Absolute position power shutoff movement over .............................................................................................................. 494
Alarm 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 493
Alarm 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 493
Alarm 4 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 494
ALL AXES IN-POSITION.................................................................................................................................................. 126
ALL AXES SMOOTHING ZERO....................................................................................................................................... 126
APLC INPUT DATA n ....................................................................................................................................................... 166
APLC INPUT SIGNAL n ................................................................................................................................................... 102
APLC OUTPUT DATA n ................................................................................................................................................... 315
APLC OUTPUT SIGNAL n ............................................................................................................................................... 212
Arbitrary point feed command valid .................................................................................................................................. 485
AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION MODE ............................................................................................................................. 234
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK -............................................................................................................................................. 216
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK + ............................................................................................................................................ 216
AUTOMATIC MACHINE LOCK ........................................................................................................................................ 218
AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE" COMMAND (Feed hold) ....................................................................................... 236
AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" COMMAND (Cycle start)....................................................................................... 235
Automatic operation mode................................................................................................................................................ 481
AUTOMATIC RESTART................................................................................................................................................... 243
Automatic set position reached......................................................................................................................................... 491
Axis selection output......................................................................................................................................................... 489
AXIS SELECTION ............................................................................................................................................................ 104
AXIS SWITCHING INVALID STATUS.............................................................................................................................. 115
AXIS SWITCHING INVALID STATUS.............................................................................................................................. 507

B
Basic point initialization setting mode ............................................................................................................................... 482
Basic point setting............................................................................................................................................................. 483
BATTERY ALARM.............................................................................................................................................................. 98
BATTERY DROP CAUSE ................................................................................................................................................ 162
Battery voltage dropping................................................................................................................................................... 494
BATTERY WARNING......................................................................................................................................................... 97
BLOCK START INTERLOCK ........................................................................................................................................... 237

C
CHAMFERING.................................................................................................................................................................. 242
CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION........................................................................................................................................ 339
CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION........................................................................................................................................ 463
CHOPPING AXIS ............................................................................................................................................................. 194
CHOPPING AXIS ............................................................................................................................................................. 460
CHOPPING ERROR NO. ................................................................................................................................................. 193
CHOPPING ERROR NO. ................................................................................................................................................. 459
CHOPPING OVERRIDE................................................................................................................................................... 339
CHOPPING OVERRIDE................................................................................................................................................... 462
CHOPPING PARAMETER VALID.................................................................................................................................... 290
CHOPPING PARAMETER VALID.................................................................................................................................... 461
CHOPPING STATUS ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
CHOPPING STATUS ....................................................................................................................................................... 458
CHOPPING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 290
CHOPPING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 461
CHUCK CLOSE CONFIRMATION..................................................................................................................................... 96
CHUCK CLOSE ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE m .......................................................................................................... 419
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ....................................................................... 172
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ....................................................................... 421
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 .......................................................................................................... 170
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 .......................................................................................................... 420
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS ............................................................................................................. 171
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS ............................................................................................................. 421
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................................. 418
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD DEVICE NO. m........................................................................................................... 422
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ........................................................................................................................... 168
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ........................................................................................................................... 417
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................. 419
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................................. 169
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD DEVICE NO. m............................................................................................................ 172
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................. 170
CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................ 169
CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. .................................................................................................................................................. 171
CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. .................................................................................................................................................. 421
CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMATION ............................................................................. 420
CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMATION .............................................................................. 171
CNC SOFTWARE VERSION CODE................................................................................................................................ 162
COMMON VARIABLE NO. AT OCCURRENCE OF ZR DEVICE ERROR ...................................................................... 167
COMPENSATION METHOD SELECTION ...................................................................................................................... 290
COMPENSATION METHOD SELECTION ...................................................................................................................... 461
CONTACTOR SHUTOFF TEST....................................................................................................................................... 197
CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 222
CONTROL AXIS DETACH ............................................................................................................................................... 213
Controller ready completion.............................................................................................................................................. 490
CONTROLLER READY COMPLETION............................................................................................................................. 92
COUNTER ZERO............................................................................................................................................................. 227
CRT CHANGEOVER COMPLETION............................................................................................................................... 201
CRT DISPLAY INFORMATION........................................................................................................................................ 158
CURRENT DETECTION .................................................................................................................................................. 148
CURRENT LIMIT CHANGEOVER ................................................................................................................................... 222
CURRENT LIMIT MODE m .............................................................................................................................................. 275
CURRENT LIMIT REACHED ........................................................................................................................................... 113
CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK .......................................................................................................................... 238
CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CODE m .................................................................................................................. 268
CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION............................................................................................ 269

D
DATA NO. ........................................................................................................................................................................ 340
DATA NO. ........................................................................................................................................................................ 464
DATA PROTECT KEY 1................................................................................................................................................... 200
DATA PROTECT KEY 2................................................................................................................................................... 200
DATA PROTECT KEY 3................................................................................................................................................... 200
DISPLAY CHANGEOVER $m.......................................................................................................................................... 201
DOOR OPEN ENABLE ...................................................................................................................................................... 93
DOOR OPEN I ................................................................................................................................................................. 203
DOOR OPEN II................................................................................................................................................................. 204
DOWNLOAD COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................................. 101
DOWNLOAD ERROR....................................................................................................................................................... 102
DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS........................................................................................................................................... 101
DOWNLOAD REQUEST .................................................................................................................................................. 212
DROOP RELEASE INVALID AXIS................................................................................................................................... 333
DROOP RELEASE REQUEST......................................................................................................................................... 222
DRY RUN ......................................................................................................................................................................... 238
DUAL SIGNAL UNCONFIRMED AFTER COMPARE ERROR .......................................................................................... 91
DUAL SIGNALS CHECK START ..................................................................................................................................... 198

E
EACH AXIS REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION ........................................................................................................ 333
EDITED DATA ERROR .................................................................................................................................................... 100
EDITED DATA RECOVERY CONFIRMATION ................................................................................................................ 202
EDITIED DATA IN PROCESSING ................................................................................................................................... 100
EMERGENCY STOP CAUSE .......................................................................................................................................... 159
ERROR CAUSE FOR ZR DEVICE ERROR OCCURRENCE .......................................................................................... 167
ERROR CODE OUTPUT EXTENSION............................................................................................................................ 186
ERROR CODE OUTPUT.................................................................................................................................................. 186
ERROR DETECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 239
ERROR TEMPORARY CANCEL ..................................................................................................................................... 211
EXTERNAL AXIS SPEED CLAMP ................................................................................................................................... 306
EXTERNAL DECELERATION -........................................................................................................................................ 216
EXTERNAL DECELERATION +....................................................................................................................................... 215
EXTERNAL DECELERATION SPEED SELECTION ....................................................................................................... 322
External deceleration-....................................................................................................................................................... 487
External deceleration+ ...................................................................................................................................................... 486
EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM COMPENSATION DATA.................................................................... 321
EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO. .................................................................................................................................. 336
EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE NO. ................................................................................................................................. 335
EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED ..................................................................................................................................... 127
EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM NO. ............................................................................................................................ 335
EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE ....................................................................................................................................... 244
EXTERNAL SEARCHSEQUENCE NO. ........................................................................................................................... 336
EXTERNAL SEARCHSTATUS......................................................................................................................................... 177

F
F 1-DIGIT COMMANDED................................................................................................................................................. 131
F 1-DIGIT NO. CODE m ................................................................................................................................................... 134
FEED AXIS SELECTION - ............................................................................................................................................... 220
FEED AXIS SELECTION +............................................................................................................................................... 219
FEEDBACK MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS ................................................................................................................ 176
FEEDRATE LEAST INCREMENT CODE m .................................................................................................................... 272
FTP MODE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 234

G
GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION ........................................................................................................................................... 292
GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER COMPLETION .................................................................................................... 168
GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER COMPLETION .................................................................................................... 434
GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER REQUEST........................................................................................................... 316
GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER REQUEST........................................................................................................... 434

H
Handle feed operation mode ............................................................................................................................................ 481
HANDLE MODE ............................................................................................................................................................... 229
HANDLE PULSE COUNTER............................................................................................................................................ 157
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION CODE m ......................................................................................... 276
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION METHOD SELECTION .................................................................. 277
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COMMAND MODE ..................................................................................................................... 289
I
ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED.............................................................................................................................................. 134
IN "RESET" ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE............................................................................................................................... 119
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE".......................................................................................................................... 123
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "RUN" .............................................................................................................................. 121
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" .......................................................................................................................... 122
In automatic operation mode ............................................................................................................................................ 493
IN AXIS MINUS MOTION................................................................................................................................................. 105
In axis minus motion......................................................................................................................................................... 489
IN AXIS PLUS MOTION ................................................................................................................................................... 105
In axis plus motion............................................................................................................................................................ 489
In basic point initialization setting mode ........................................................................................................................... 493
IN CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED.................................................................................................................................. 130
IN CURRENT LIMIT ......................................................................................................................................................... 113
IN CUTTING FEED .......................................................................................................................................................... 129
In handle feed operation mode......................................................................................................................................... 490
IN HANDLE MODE........................................................................................................................................................... 117
IN HIGH-SPEED TAPPING.............................................................................................................................................. 134
IN HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COMMAND MODE ................................................................................................................ 134
IN INCH UNIT SELECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 131
IN INCREMENTAL MODE ............................................................................................................................................... 118
In incremental mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 493
IN JOG MODE.................................................................................................................................................................. 117
In JOG operation mode .................................................................................................................................................... 493
IN L COIL SELECTION .................................................................................................................................................... 151
IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE .......................................................................................................................... 118
IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED...................................................................................................................................... 124
In manual operation mode................................................................................................................................................ 493
IN MDI MODE .................................................................................................................................................................. 120
IN MEMORY MODE ......................................................................................................................................................... 120
IN MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 114
IN PLC AXIS CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................. 116
IN PLC AXIS CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................. 507
IN RAPID TRAVERSE...................................................................................................................................................... 128
IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE................................................................................................................. 119
In reference position return mode .................................................................................................................................... 493
IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN............................................................................................................................. 131
In reset ............................................................................................................................................................................. 490
IN REWIND ...................................................................................................................................................................... 124
IN SKIP............................................................................................................................................................................. 130
IN SPINDLE ALARM ........................................................................................................................................................ 148
IN SPINDLE FORWARD RUN ......................................................................................................................................... 153
IN SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR ................................................................................................................ 155
IN SPINDLE REVERSE RUN........................................................................................................................................... 153
IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION.................................................................................................................................... 94
IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT ........................................................................................................................................... 155
IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED .............................................................................................................................................. 130
IN TAPPING ..................................................................................................................................................................... 129
IN THREAD CUTTING ..................................................................................................................................................... 130
IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 131
IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 400
IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 405
In torque limit .................................................................................................................................................................... 490
IN ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION.................................................................................................................................... 112
INCLINED AXIS CONTROL: NO Z AXIS COMPENSATION ........................................................................................... 289
Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 ................................................................................................................................. 486
Incremental feed operation mode selection...................................................................................................................... 483
INCREMENTAL MODE .................................................................................................................................................... 230
Initialization setting completed ......................................................................................................................................... 494
Initialization setting error completed ................................................................................................................................. 494
IN-POSITION ................................................................................................................................................................... 114
In-position ......................................................................................................................................................................... 488
INTEGRATION TIME INPUT m........................................................................................................................................ 199
Interlock-........................................................................................................................................................................... 481
Interlock+.......................................................................................................................................................................... 480
J
JOG HANDLE SYNCHRONOUS ..................................................................................................................................... 274
JOG MODE....................................................................................................................................................................... 229
JOG operation mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 482
JOG SYNCHRONOUS FEED VALID ............................................................................................................................... 272

K
KEY IN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 156
KEY OUT .......................................................................................................................................................................... 309

L
L COIL SELECTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 303
LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H) ...................................................................................................................... 340
LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H) ...................................................................................................................... 463
LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ...................................................................................................................... 340
LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ...................................................................................................................... 463

M
M CODE DATA 1.............................................................................................................................................................. 178
M CODE DATA 2.............................................................................................................................................................. 178
M CODE DATA 3.............................................................................................................................................................. 179
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00 ......................................................................................................................... 135
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M01 ......................................................................................................................... 135
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M02 ......................................................................................................................... 136
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M30 ......................................................................................................................... 136
M FUNCTION FINISH 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 245
M FUNCTION FINISH 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 246
M FUNCTION STROBE m ............................................................................................................................................... 136
MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS..................................................................................................................................... 175
MACRO INTERRUPT....................................................................................................................................................... 250
MACRO SINGLE VALID..................................................................................................................................................... 99
MAGNIFICATION VALID FOR EACH HANDLE............................................................................................................... 276
MANUAL ABSOLUTE....................................................................................................................................................... 252
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................... 280
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT .......................................................................................... 327
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS VALID .............................................................................................................. 280
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS SELECTION CODE m .................................................................................... 281
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT.......................................................................................... 327
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS VALID.............................................................................................................. 281
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT.......................................................................................... 327
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS SELECTION CODE m .................................................................................... 281
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS VALID.............................................................................................................. 281
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED ABS/INC ........................................................................................................................... 284
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED AXIS INDEPENDENT....................................................................................................... 282
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED COMPLETION.................................................................................................................. 127
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED EX.F/MODAL.F................................................................................................................. 283
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G0/G1 ............................................................................................................................... 283
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MC/WK ............................................................................................................................. 284
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE............................................................................................................................... 231
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED SMOOTHING OFF ........................................................................................................... 281
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STOP................................................................................................................................ 285
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STROBE........................................................................................................................... 286
MANUAL FEEDRATE CODE m ....................................................................................................................................... 270
MANUAL FEEDRATE METHOD SELECTION................................................................................................................. 272
MANUAL FEEDRATE....................................................................................................................................................... 325
MANUAL INTERLOCK - ................................................................................................................................................... 217
MANUAL INTERLOCK + .................................................................................................................................................. 217
MANUAL MACHINE LOCK .............................................................................................................................................. 218
MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND................................................................................................................................. 138
Manual operation mode .................................................................................................................................................... 482
MANUAL OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ................................................................................................................. 263
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SIMULTANEOUS VALID............................................................................................................ 221
Master reset ..................................................................................................................................................................... 480
MDI MODE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 235
MIRROR IMAGE .............................................................................................................................................................. 214
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK............................................................................................................................. 264
MOTION COMMAND COMPLETION .............................................................................................................................. 125
mTH AXIS INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................ 313
MULTI-POINT ORIENTATION POSITION DATA ............................................................................................................ 343
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE INPUT m ......................................................................................................... 226
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE OUTPUT m ..................................................................................................... 115
MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR REQUEST................................................................................................................... 225

N
NC ALARM 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 99
NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) ............................................................................................................................................... 99
NC ALARM 3 (Program error) .......................................................................................................................................... 132
NC ALARM 4 (Operation error) ........................................................................................................................................ 133
NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED.................................................................................................................................................. 109
NC DATA SAMPLING COMPLETED............................................................................................................................... 101
NC DATA SAMPLING TRIGGER..................................................................................................................................... 201
NC RESET 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 240
NC RESET 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... 240
NEAR REFERENCE POSITION (PER REFERENCE POSITION) .................................................................................. 185
NEAR REFERENCE POSITION ...................................................................................................................................... 108
Near set position .............................................................................................................................................................. 492
NEAR-POINT DOG IGNORED ........................................................................................................................................ 328
NEW TOOL CHANGE ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
NEW TOOL CHANGE ...................................................................................................................................................... 406
NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULES ON CNC SIDE ........................................................................................................ 172
NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULE ON PLC SIDE ............................................................................................................ 427
NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL UNITS ON CNC SIDE ................................................................................................................ 422
NO. OF DUAL SIGNALMODULES ON PLC SIDE........................................................................................................... 320
NO. OF WORK MACHINING (CURRENT VALUE).......................................................................................................... 183
NO. OF WORK MACHINING (MAXIMUM VALUE).......................................................................................................... 186
NO. OF WORK MACHINING OVER ................................................................................................................................ 145
NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIGNATION........................................................................................................................... 340
NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIGNATION........................................................................................................................... 464

O
OPERATION MODE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................... 291
OPERATION MODE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................... 462
Operation parameter selection 1, 2 .................................................................................................................................. 486
Operation start.................................................................................................................................................................. 484
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m ............................................................................................................................................. 255
OT IGNORED................................................................................................................................................................... 328
OUTPUT OFF CHECK (OFFCHK)................................................................................................................................... 199
OUTPUT OFF CHECK NOT COMPLETE.......................................................................................................................... 91
OVERRIDE CANCEL ....................................................................................................................................................... 263

P
PHASE OFFSET REQUEST............................................................................................................................................ 210
PHASE SHIFT CALCULATION REQUEST ..................................................................................................................... 210
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE VALID.......................................................................................................... 204
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE VALID.......................................................................................................... 348
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-TH AXIS ........................................................................................................................ 212
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-TH AXIS ........................................................................................................................ 348
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 1 ............................................................................................................. 480
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 2 ............................................................................................................. 484
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 3 ............................................................................................................. 487
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 4 ............................................................................................................. 487
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 1 .................................................................................................................. 488
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 2 .................................................................................................................. 493
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 3 .................................................................................................................. 494
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 4 .................................................................................................................. 495
PLC AXIS NEAR POINT DETECTION m-TH AXIS.......................................................................................................... 211
PLC AXIS POSITION SWITCH n ..................................................................................................................................... 102
PLC AXIS SWITCHING .................................................................................................................................................... 228
PLC AXIS SWITCHING .................................................................................................................................................... 508
PLC AXIX DROOP RELEASE INVALID AXIS.................................................................................................................. 308
PLC CONTROL AXIS mTH HANDLE VALID ................................................................................................................... 205
PLC EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................................................................................ 202
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ........................................................................ 319
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ........................................................................ 427
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 ........................................................................................................... 318
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 ........................................................................................................... 426
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS .............................................................................................................. 319
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS .............................................................................................................. 426
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................................. 424
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD DEVICE NO. m ............................................................................................................ 427
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ............................................................................................................................ 316
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ............................................................................................................................ 423
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................. 425
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................ 425
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................................... 317
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD DEVICE NO. m ............................................................................................................. 320
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................... 318
PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................. 317
PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. ................................................................................................................................................... 319
PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. ................................................................................................................................................... 427
PLC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMATION .............................................................................. 426
PLC SIDE SAFETY OPERATION STATUS ..................................................................................................................... 428
PLC SIDE SAFETYCOMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMATION ................................................................................ 318
PLC SIDE SAFETYOPERATION STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 320
PLC SKIP.......................................................................................................................................................................... 212
PLC VERSION CODE ...................................................................................................................................................... 312
PLC VERSION CODE (METHOD 2) ................................................................................................................................ 315
POSITION LOOP IN-POSITION....................................................................................................................................... 154
Position switch 1 to 15 ...................................................................................................................................................... 495
POSITION SWITCH m ..................................................................................................................................................... 143
Power OFF required after parameter change................................................................................................................... 100
POWER SHUTOFF MOVEMENT OVER ......................................................................................................................... 145
POWER SHUTOFF NOTIFICATION.................................................................................................................................. 92
PROGRAM DISPLAY DURING OPERATION.................................................................................................................. 254
PROGRAM OPERATION MODE (MEMORY MODE) ...................................................................................................... 234
PROGRAM RESTART ..................................................................................................................................................... 249

R
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE CODE m ....................................................................................................................... 270
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION................................................................................................. 270
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE VALID ........................................................................................................................... 291
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE VALID ........................................................................................................................... 462
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE....................................................................................................................................... 324
RAPID TRAVERSE .......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Ready OFF ....................................................................................................................................................................... 481
RECALCULATION REQUEST ......................................................................................................................................... 253
Reference position reached.............................................................................................................................................. 490
REFERENCE POSITION RETRACT ............................................................................................................................... 266
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE...................................................................................................................... 233
Reference position return mode ....................................................................................................................................... 482
REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION CODE m............................................................................................................. 256
REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION METHOD ........................................................................................................... 257
RESET & REWIND........................................................................................................................................................... 241
Rotation direction.............................................................................................................................................................. 485

S
S CODE DATA 1 to 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 180
S CODE DATA 5 to 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 180
S COMMAND GEAR NO. ILLEGAL ................................................................................................................................. 146
S COMMAND MAX./MIN. COMMAND VALUE OVER..................................................................................................... 146
S COMMAND NO GEAR SELECTED.............................................................................................................................. 146
S COMMAND OVERRIDE ............................................................................................................................................... 342
S FUNCTION STROBE m................................................................................................................................................ 142
SAVING OPERATION HISTORY DATA .......................................................................................................................... 202
SEARCH & START ERROR ............................................................................................................................................ 133
SEARCH & START SEARCH .......................................................................................................................................... 133
SEARCH & START .......................................................................................................................................................... 288
SEARCH & START PROGRAM NO ................................................................................................................................ 334
SELECTED TOOL NO. .................................................................................................................................................... 335
SERVO OFF..................................................................................................................................................................... 214
Servo OFF ........................................................................................................................................................................ 480
Servo ready completion.................................................................................................................................................... 491
SERVO READY COMPLETION......................................................................................................................................... 93
SERVO READY ............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Servo ready ...................................................................................................................................................................... 488
Set position reached......................................................................................................................................................... 492
SINGLE BLOCK ............................................................................................................................................................... 237
SKIPm INPUT SIGNAL STATE.......................................................................................................................................... 92
Smoothing zero ................................................................................................................................................................ 489
SPEED DETECTION........................................................................................................................................................ 148
SPEED MONITOR DOOR OPEN POSSIBLE.................................................................................................................. 157
SPEED MONITOR MODE................................................................................................................................................ 307
Speed override 1 to 64 ..................................................................................................................................................... 487
Speed override valid......................................................................................................................................................... 487
SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED.............................................................................................................................................. 196
SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL DATA (rotation speed) ...................................................................................................... 196
SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED INPUT.......................................................................................................... 195
SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED OUTPUT...................................................................................................... 341
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN INDEX.................................................................................................................................. 300
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN START ................................................................................................................................. 298
SPINDLE GEAR SELECTION CODE m .......................................................................................................................... 295
SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT COMMAND m............................................................................................................................ 147
SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT.................................................................................................................................................... 296
SPINDLE IN-POSITION ................................................................................................................................................... 151
SPINDLE MOTOR TEMPERATURE................................................................................................................................ 196
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONITOR MODE OUTPUT m .................................................................................................. 155
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONITOR REQUEST ............................................................................................................... 304
SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE INPUT m ......................................................................................... 305
SPINDLE OFF MODE ...................................................................................................................................................... 267
SPINDLE ORIENTATION COMMAND............................................................................................................................. 302
SPINDLE ORIENTATION................................................................................................................................................. 297
SPINDLE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ................................................................................................................ 294
SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION .................................................................................................. 95
SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION ......................................................................................................................... 208
SPINDLE READY-ON ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN INDEX ................................................................................................................................... 301
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN START .................................................................................................................................. 299
SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION............................................................................... 94
SPINDLE SERVO-ON ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
SPINDLE SPEED LOWER LIMIT OVER ......................................................................................................................... 147
SPINDLE SPEED UPPER LIMIT OVER .......................................................................................................................... 146
SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE CODE m.......................................................................................................................... 294
SPINDLE STOP ............................................................................................................................................................... 296
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION BASIC SPINDLE SELECTION..................................................................................... 314
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION CANCEL....................................................................................................................... 205
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 1 ........................................................................................................ 164
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 2 ........................................................................................................ 164
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR ......................................................................................... 165
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR (lower limit)...................................................................... 165
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR (upper limit) ..................................................................... 165
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR OUTPUT ........................................................................................... 164
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE OFFSET DATA ............................................................................................... 166
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT ............................................................................................. 314
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE SELECTION ................................................................... 314
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION ...................................................................................................................................... 207
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ROTATION DIRECTION .................................................................................................... 209
SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT m............................................................................................................................................ 303
SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED................................................................................................................................................. 150
Start not possible .............................................................................................................................................................. 495
Station position 1 to 256 ................................................................................................................................................... 494
Station selection 1 to 256 ................................................................................................................................................. 487
SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OPERATION METHOD.............................................................................................. 329
SYNCHRONIZATION CORRECTION MODE .................................................................................................................. 248
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING COMMAND POLARITY REVERSAL.................................................................................. 289

T
T CODE DATA 1............................................................................................................................................................... 181
T FUNCTION STROBE 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 140
TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE .............................................................................................................................................. 144
TAP RETRACT................................................................................................................................................................. 265
TEMPERATURE WARNING CAUSE............................................................................................................................... 163
THERMAL EXPANSION COMPENSATION AMOUNT .................................................................................................... 173
THERMAL EXPANSION MAX. COMPENSATION AMOUNT .......................................................................................... 322
THERMAL EXPANSION OFFSET COMPENSATION AMOUNT..................................................................................... 321
TOOL ALARM 1................................................................................................................................................................ 402
TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1......................................................................................................................................... 277
TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1......................................................................................................................................... 407
TOOL ALARM 2................................................................................................................................................................ 278
TOOL ALARM 2................................................................................................................................................................ 402
TOOL CHANGE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION..................................................................................................... 139
TOOL CHANGE RESET................................................................................................................................................... 279
TOOL CHANGE RESET................................................................................................................................................... 408
TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 328
TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 404
TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 408
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 1 ................................................................................................................................ 246
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2 ................................................................................................................................ 247
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT INPUT ................................................................................................................................. 278
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT INPUT ................................................................................................................................. 403
TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 132
TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 400
TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 405
TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 186
TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 406

U
UNCLAMP COMMAND .................................................................................................................................................... 113
UNCLAMP COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................................... 224
UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)....................................................................................................................... 339
UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)....................................................................................................................... 463
UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ....................................................................................................................... 339
UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ....................................................................................................................... 463
USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 278
USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 403
USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 407
USER MACRO INPUT #1032 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 337
USER MACRO INPUT #1033 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311
USER MACRO INPUT #1033 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338
USER MACRO INPUT #1034 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338
USER MACRO INPUT #1034 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311
USER MACRO INPUT #1035 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311
USER MACRO INPUT #1035 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338
USER MACRO INPUT #1032 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 310
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 160
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 190
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161
USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191

W
WAITING BETWEEN PART SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................... 134
WAITING FOR DATA TO BE DOWNLOADED ................................................................................................................ 144
WORKPIECE COORDINATE OFFSET MEASUREMENT COMPENSATION NO.......................................................... 334

Z
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION INCOMPLETE................................................................................................................ 112
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET COMPLETED......................................................................................................... 110
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET ERROR COMPLETED........................................................................................... 112
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET MODE .................................................................................................................... 223
ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET START ................................................................................................................... 223
ZERO SPEED .................................................................................................................................................................. 149
Z-PHASE PASSED .......................................................................................................................................................... 154
ZR DEVICE NO. AT OCCURRENCE OF NC EXCLUSIVE INSTRUCTION (DDWR/DDRD) ERROR............................ 166
 Device No. INDEX

Numbers
1st axis index .....................................................................................................................................................................R2340
1st cutting feedrate override ........................................................................ R2400,R2500,R2600,R2700,R2800,R2900,R3000
1st handle axis selection code 1...............................................................................Y740,Y820,Y900,Y9E0,YAC0,YBA0,YC80
1st handle valid.........................................................................................................Y747,Y827,Y907,Y9E7,YAC7,YBA7,YC87
1st handle/incremental feed magnification .................................................. R2408,R2508,R2608,R2708,R2808,R2908,R3008
R2409,R2509,R2609,R2709,R2809,R2909,R3009
1st handle pulse counter........................................................................................................................................................R10
1st reference position reached .........................................................................X404,X424,X444,X464,X484,X4A4,X4C4,X4E4
X504,X524,X544,X564,X584,X5A4,X5C4,X5E4
24 hours continuous operation ............................................................................................................................................ X310
2nd cutting feedrate override ....................................................................... R2401,R2501,R2601,R2701,R2801,R2901,R3001
2nd cutting feedrate override valid........................................................................... Y766,Y846,Y926,YA06,YAE6,YBC6,YCA6
2nd handle axis selection code 1..............................................................................Y748,Y828,Y908,Y9E8,YAC8,YBA8,YC88
2nd handle feed magnification..................................................................... R2410,R2510,R2610,R2710,R2810,R2910,R3010
R2411,R2511,R2611,R2711,R2811,R2911,R3011
2nd handle pulse counter ......................................................................................................................................................R11
2nd handle valid...................................................................................................... Y74F,Y82F,Y90F,Y9EF,YACF,YBAF,YC8F
2nd M function data 1 ................................................................................................ R128,R228,R328,R428,R528,R628,R728
R129,R229,R329,R429,R529,R629,R729
2nd M function strobe 1 .............................................................................................X654,X6D4,X754,X7D4,X854,X8D4,X954
2nd reference position reached ........................................................................X405,X425,X445,X465,X485,X4A5,X4C5,X4E5
X505,X525,X545,X565,X585,X5A5,X5C5,X5E5
2nd reference position return interlock ..................................................................... Y7B0,Y890,Y970,YA50,YB30,YC10,YCF0
3rd handle axis selection code 1 .............................................................................. Y750,Y830,Y910,Y9F0,YAD0,YBB0,YC90
3rd handle feed magnification...................................................................... R2412,R2512,R2612,R2712,R2812,R2912,R3012
R2413,R2513,R2613,R2713,R2813,R2913,R3013
3rd handle pulse counter .......................................................................................................................................................R12
3rd handle valid ........................................................................................................ Y757,Y837,Y917,Y9F7,YAD7,YBB7,YC97
3rd reference position reached .........................................................................X406,X426,X446,X466,X486,X4A6,X4C6,X4E6
X506,X526,X546,X566,X586,X5A6,X5C6,X5E6
4th reference position reached .........................................................................X407,X427,X447,X467,X487,X4A7,X4C7,X4E7
X507,X527,X547,X567,X587,X5A7,X5C7,X5E7

A
Absolute position warning......................................................................................... X66F,X6EF,X76F,X7EF,X86F,X8EF,X96F
Active tool: Auxiliary data...................................................................................................................................................R6753
Active tool: Group No............................................................................................................................................. R6748,R6749
Active tool: Length compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6756,R6757
Active tool: Life data ..........................................................................................................................................................R6754
Active tool: Radius compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6758,R6759
Active tool: Tool data flag/status........................................................................................................................................R6752
Active tool: Tool No................................................................................................................................................ R6750,R6751
Active tool: Usage data ..................................................................................................................................................... R6755
All axes in-position ......................................................................................................X619,X699,X719,X799,X819,X899,X919
All axes smoothing zero ........................................................................................... X61A,X69A,X71A,X79A,X81A,X89A,X91A
APLC input data 1 to 10 ............................................................................................................................................ R60 to R69
APLC input signal 1 to 32 .......................................................................................................................................X380 to X39F
APLC output data 1 to 10 .................................................................................................................................. R2380 to R2389
APLC output signal 1 to 32.....................................................................................................................................Y380 to Y39F
ATC control parameter ...................................................................................................................................................... R4700
Automatic initialization mode .................................................................................... Y705,Y7E5,Y8C5,Y9A5,YA85,YB65,YC45
Automatic interlock - ..........................................................................................Y406,Y436,Y466,Y496,Y4C6,Y4F6,Y526,Y556
Y586,Y5B6,Y5E6,Y616,Y646,Y676,Y6A6,Y6D6
Automatic interlock + .........................................................................................Y405,Y435,Y465,Y495,Y4C5,Y4F5,Y525,Y555
Y585,Y5B5,Y5E5,Y615,Y645,Y675,Y6A5,Y6D5
Automatic machine lock ....................................................................................Y409,Y439,Y469,Y499,Y4C9,Y4F9,Y529,Y559
Y589,Y5B9,Y5E9,Y619,Y649,Y679,Y6A9,Y6D9
Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) ................................................ Y711,Y7F1,Y8D1,Y9B1,YA91,YB71,YC51
Automatic operation "start" command (Cycle start).................................................. Y710,Y7F0,Y8D0,Y9B0,YA90,YB70,YC50
Automatic restart .................................................................................................. Y71C,Y7FC,Y8DC,Y9BC,YA9C,YB7C,YC5C
AUX data ........................................................................................................................................................................... R4748
Axis selection ................................................................................................... X401,X421,X441,X461,X481,X4A1,X4C1,X4E1
X501,X521,X541,X561,X581,X5A1,X5C1,X5E1
Axis switching invalid status ............................................................................. X416,X436,X456,X476,X496,X4B6,X4D6,X4F6
X516,X536,X556,X576,X596,X5B6,X5D6,X5F6

B
Battery alarm ....................................................................................................................................................................... X32F
Battery drop cause ................................................................................................................................................................ R40
Battery warning ...................................................................................................................................................................X32E
Block start interlock .................................................................................................. Y713,Y7F3,Y8D3,Y9B3,YA93,YB73,YC53

C
Chamfering ............................................................................................................ Y71B,Y7FB,Y8DB,Y9BB,YA9B,YB7B,YC5B
Chuck close ......................................................................................................................................................................... Y331
Chuck close confirmation ....................................................................................................................................................X32D
Chopping ............................................................................................................... Y7BA,Y89A,Y97A,YA5A,YB3A,YC1A,YCFA
Chopping status ........................................................................................................ R180,R280,R380,R480,R580,R680,R780
Chopping error No. .................................................................................................... R181,R281,R381,R481,R581,R681,R781
Chopping axis............................................................................................................ R182,R282,R382,R482,R582,R682,R782
Chopping axis selection .............................................................................. R2481,R2581,R2681,R2781,R2881,R2981,R3081
Chopping override ....................................................................................... R2480,R2580,R2680,R2780,R2880,R2980,R3080
Chopping parameter valid ..................................................................................... Y7BB,Y89B,Y97B,YA5B,YB3B,YC1B,YCFB
CNC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time................................................................................................. R2183
CNC side dual signall compare status............................................................................................................................... R2181
CNC side dual signal compare status 2 ........................................................................................................................... R2179
CNC side dual signal error Module 1(H) ...........................................................................................................................R2161
CNC side dual signal error Module 1(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2160
CNC side dual signal error Module 2(H) ...........................................................................................................................R2163
CNC side dual signal error Module 2(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2162
CNC side dual signal error Module 3(H) ...........................................................................................................................R2165
CNC side dual signal error Module 3(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2164
CNC side dual signal head device No. 1 ...........................................................................................................................R2184
CNC side dual signal head device No. 2 ...........................................................................................................................R2185
CNC side dual signal head device No. 3 ...........................................................................................................................R2186
CNC side dual signall output error Module 1 .....................................................................................................................R2174
CNC side dual signall output error Module 2 ....................................................................................................................R2175
CNC side dual signall output error Module 3 .....................................................................................................................R2176
CNC side dual signal output Module 1 ..............................................................................................................................R2170
CNC side dual signal output Module 2 ..............................................................................................................................R2171
CNC side dual signal output Module 3 ..............................................................................................................................R2172
CNC side dual signal Module 1(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2151
CNC side dual signal Module 1(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2150
CNC side dual signal Module 2(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2153
CNC side dual signal Module 2(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2152
CNC side dual signal Module 3(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2155
CNC side dual signal Module 3(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2154
CNC side head G No. ........................................................................................................................................................R2182
CNC side safety compare activity check information.........................................................................................................R2180
CNC software version code ............................................................................................................................ R32,R33,R34,R35
Common variable No. at occurrence of ZR device error .......................................................................................................R82
Compensation method selection ..........................................................................Y7BC,Y89C,Y97C,YA5C,YB3C,YC1C,YCFC
Contactor shutoff test signal ................................................................................................................................................ Y310
Control axis detach ........................................................................................... Y400,Y430,Y460,Y490,Y4C0,Y4F0,Y520,Y550
Y580,Y5B0,Y5E0,Y610,Y640,Y670,Y6A0,Y6D0
Control axis detach 2 ..................................................................................... Y40E,Y43E,Y46E,Y49E,Y4CE,Y4FE,Y52E,Y55E
Y58E,Y5BE,Y5EE,Y61E,Y64E,Y67E,Y6AE,Y6DE
Controller ready completion................................................................................................................................................. X320
Counter zero ................................................................................................. Y59A,Y5CA,Y5FA,Y62A,Y65A,Y68A,Y6BA,Y6EA
CRT changeover completion .............................................................................................................................................. Y31D
CRT display information ................................................................................................................................. R16,R17,R18,R19
Current detection .....................................................................................................X991,X9C1,X9F1,XA21,XA51,XA81,XAB1,
Current limit changeover................................................................................... Y410,Y440,Y470,Y4A0,Y4D0,Y500,Y530,Y560
Y590,Y5C0,Y5F0,Y620,Y650,Y680,Y6B0,Y6E0
Current limit mode 1 ............................................................................................ Y77D,Y85D,Y93D,YA1D,YAFD,YBDD,YCBD
Current limit mode 2 ..............................................................................................Y77E,Y85E,Y93E,YA1E,YAFE,YBDE,YCBE
Current limit reached ...................................................................................... X40F,X42F,X44F,X46F,X48F,X4AF,X4CF,X4EF
X50F,X52F,X54F,X56F,X58F,X5AF,X5CF,X5EF
Cutting block start interlock....................................................................................... Y714,Y7F4,Y8D4,Y9B4,YA94,YB74,YC54
Cutting feedrate override code 1 ............................................................................. Y760,Y840,Y920,YA00,YAE0,YBC0,YCA0
Cutting feedrate override method selection..............................................................Y767,Y847,Y927,YA07,YAE7,YBC7,YCA7

D
Data No. ...................................................................................................... R2487,R2587,R2687,R2787,R2887,R2987,R3087
Data protect key 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... Y318
Data protect key 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... Y319
Data protect key 3 ...............................................................................................................................................................Y31A
Display changeover $1 ........................................................................................................................................................Y31E
Display changeover $2 ........................................................................................................................................................ Y31F
Door open enable ................................................................................................................................................................ X329
Door open I.......................................................................................................................................................................... Y328
Door open II......................................................................................................................................................................... Y329
Download error .................................................................................................................................................................... X352
Download completed ........................................................................................................................................................... X351
Download in progress.......................................................................................................................................................... X350
Download request ............................................................................................................................................................... Y350
Droop release request ...................................................................................... Y411,Y441,Y471,Y4A1,Y4D1,Y501,Y531,Y561
Y591,Y5C1,Y5F1,Y621,Y651,Y681,Y6B1,Y6E1
Dry run...................................................................................................................... Y715,Y7F5,Y8D5,Y9B5,YA95,YB75,YC55
Droop release invalid axis ........................................................................... R2433,R2533,R2632,R2733,R2833,R2933,R3033
Dual signals check start ...................................................................................................................................................... Y311
Dual signals unconfirmed after compare error .................................................................................................................... X311

E
Each axis reference position selection ........................................................ R2433,R2533,R2633,R2733,R2833,R2933,R3033
Edited data error..................................................................................................................................................................X33C
Edited data in processing ....................................................................................................................................................X33B
Edited data recovery confirmation ....................................................................................................................................... Y323
EDIT mode ............................................................................................................ Y70A,Y7EA,Y8CA,Y9AA,YA8A,YB6A,YC4A
Emergency stop cause .......................................................................................................................................................... R21
Error cause at occurrence of ZR device error ....................................................................................................................... R83
Error code output....................................................................................................... R156,R256,R356,R456,R556,R656,R756
R157,R257,R357,R457,R557,R657,R757
R158,R258,R358,R458,R558,R658,R758
Error code output extension ...................................................................................... R160,R260,R360,R460,R560,R660,R760
R161,R261,R361,R461,R561,R661,R761
R162,R262,R362,R462,R562,R662,R762
Error detection .......................................................................................................... Y717,Y7F7,Y8D7,Y9B7,YA97,YB77,YC57
Error temporary cancel ........................................................................................................................................................ Y337
External axis speed clamp ....................................................................................YD4F,YD7F,YDAF,YDDF,YE0F,YE3F,YE6F
External deceleration - ......................................................................................Y404,Y434,Y464,Y494,Y4C4,Y4F4,Y524,Y554
Y584,Y5B4,Y5E4,Y614,Y644,Y674,Y6A4,Y6D4
External deceleration +......................................................................................Y403,Y433,Y463,Y493,Y4C3,Y4F3,Y523,Y553
Y583,Y5B3,Y5E3,Y613,Y643,Y673,Y6A3,Y6D3
External deceleration speed selection ..............................................R3104,R3114,R3124,R3134,R3144,R3154,R3164,R3174
R3184,R3194,R3204,R3214,R3224,R3234,R3244,R3254
External machine coordinate system compensation data ................R3100,R3110,R3120,R3130,R3140,R3150,R3160,R3170
R3180,R3190,R3200,R3210,R3220,R3230,R3240,R3250
External search block No............................................................................. R2466,R2566,R2666,R2766,R2866,R2966,R3066
R2467,R2567,R2667,R2767,R2867,R2967,R3067
External search device No........................................................................... R2461,R2561,R2661,R2761,R2861,R2961,R3061
External search finished ......................................................................................... X61D,X69D,X71D,X79D,X81D,X89D,X91D
External search program No........................................................................ R2462,R2562,R2662,R2762,R2862,R2962,R3062
R2463,R2563,R2663,R2763,R2863,R2963,R3063
External search sequence No...................................................................... R2464,R2564,R2664,R2764,R2864,R2964,R3064
R2465,R2565,R2665,R2765,R2865,R2965,R3065
External search status ............................................................................................... R100,R200,R300,R400,R500,R600,R700
External search strobe..........................................................................................Y71D,Y7FD,Y8DD,Y9BD,YA9D,YB7D,YC5D

F
F 1-digit commanded ...............................................................................................X62A,X6AA,X72A,X7AA,X82A,X8AA,X92A
F 1-digit No. code 1 ................................................................................................... X638,X6B8,X738,X7B8,X838,X8B8,X938
F 1-digit No. code 2 ................................................................................................... X639,X6B9,X739,X7B9,X839,X8B9,X939
F 1-digit No. code 4 .................................................................................................X63A,X6BA,X73A,X7BA,X83A,X8BA,X93A
Feed axis selection -.....................................................................................Y40C,Y43C,Y46C,Y49C,Y4CC,Y4FC,Y52C,Y55C
Y58C,Y5BC,Y5EC,Y61C,Y64C,Y67C,Y6AC,Y6DC
Feed axis selection + ..................................................................................... Y40B,Y43B,Y46B,Y49B,Y4CB,Y4FB,Y52B,Y55B
Y58B,Y5BB,Y5EB,Y61B,Y64B,Y67B,Y6AB,Y6DB
Feedback machine position n-th axis ..................................R804,R805,R814,R815,R824,R825,R834,R835,R844,R845,R854
R855,R864,R865,R874,R875,R884.R885.R894,R895,R904.R905
R914.R915.R924.R925,R934,R935.R944.R945.R954.R955
Feedrate least increment code 1 ..............................................................................Y778,Y858,Y938,YA18,YAF8,YBD8,YCB8
Feedrate least increment code 2 ..............................................................................Y779,Y859,Y939,YA19,YAF9,YBD9,YCB9
FTP mode .................................................................................................................Y709,Y7E9,Y8C9,Y9A9,YA89,YB69,YC49

G
Gear shift completion.............................................................................................. YD26,YD56,YD86,YDB6,YDE6,YE16,YE46
GOT window Data changeover completion ................................................................................................................... R90,R91
GOT window Data changeover request................................................................................................................. R2390,R2391
Group in tool life management................................................................................... R139,R239,R339,R439,R539,R639,R739

H
Handle mode ............................................................................................................Y701,Y7E1,Y8C1,Y9A1,YA81,YB61,YC41
Handle/incremental feed magnification code 1.........................................................Y780,Y860,Y940,YA20,YB00,YBE0,YCC0
Handle/incremental feed magnification code 2.........................................................Y781,Y861,Y941,YA21,YB01,YBE1,YCC1
Handle/incremental feed magnification code 4.........................................................Y782,Y862,Y942,YA22,YB02,YBE2,YCC2
Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection ........................................Y787,Y867,Y947,YA27,YB07,YBE7,YCC7
Hypothetical axis command mode............................................................................ Y7B8,Y898,Y978,YA58,YB38,YC18,YCF8
 I
Illegal axis selected ....................................................................................................X637,X6B7,X737,X7B7,X837,X8B7,X937
In "reset" ......................................................................................................................X615,X695,X715,X795,X815,X895,X915
In automatic initial set mode ........................................................................................X605,X685,X705,X785,X805,X885,X905
In automatic operation "pause"....................................................................................X614,X694,X714,X794,X814,X894,X914
In automatic operation "run" ........................................................................................X612,X692,X712,X792,X812,X892,X912
In automatic operation "start" ......................................................................................X613,X693,X713,X793,X813,X893,X913
In axis minus motion......................................................................................... X403,X423,X443,X463,X483,X4A3,X4C3,X4E3
X503,X523,X543,X563,X583,X5A3,X5C3,X5E3
In axis plus motion............................................................................................ X402,X422,X442,X462,X482,X4A2,X4C2,X4E2
X502,X522,X542,X562,X582,X5A2,X5C2,X5E2
In constant surface speed ..........................................................................................X625,X6A5,X725,X7A5,X825,X8A5,X925
In current limit ................................................................................................X40E,X42E,X44E,X46E,X48E,X4AE,X4CE,X4EE
X50E,X52E,X54E,X56E,X58E,X5AE,X5CE,X5EE
In cutting feed .............................................................................................................X621,X6A1,X721,X7A1,X821,X8A1,X921
In handle mode............................................................................................................X601,X681,X701,X781,X801,X881,X901
In high-speed synchronous tapping ......................................................................... X63F,X6BF,X73F,X7BF,X83F,X8BF,X93F
In hypothetical axis command mode ....................................................................... X63E,X6BE,X73E,X7BE,X83E,X8BE,X93E
In inch unit selection ...................................................................................................X628,X6A8,X728,X7A8,X828,X8A8,X928
In incremental mode ....................................................................................................X602,X682,X702,X782,X802,X882,X902
In jog mode..................................................................................................................X600,X680,X700,X780,X800,X880,X900
In L coil selection ...................................................................................................... X997,X9C7,X9F7,XA27,XA57,XA87,XAB7
In manual arbitrary feed ..............................................................................................X616,X696,X716,X796,X816,X896,X916
In manual arbitrary feed mode ....................................................................................X603,X683,X703,X783,X803,X883,X903
In MDI mode ............................................................................................................. X60B,X68B,X70B,X78B,X80B,X88B,X90B
In memory mode .........................................................................................................X608,X688,X708,X788,X808,X888,X908
In multi-step speed monitor .............................................................................. X412,X432,X452,X472,X492,X4B2,X4D2,X4F2
X512,X532,X552,X572,X592,X5B2,X5D2,X5F2
In PLC axis control ........................................................................................... X417,X437,X457,X477,X497,X4B7,X4D7,X4F7
X517,X537,X557,X577,X597,X5B7,X5D7,X5F7
In rapid traverse .........................................................................................................X620,X6A0,X720,X7A0,X820,X8A0,X920
In reference position return ........................................................................................X627,X6A7,X727,X7A7,X827,X8A7,X927
In reference position return mode ...............................................................................X604,X684,X704,X784,X804,X884,X904
In rewind ......................................................................................................................X617,X697,X717,X797,X817,X897,X917
In skip .........................................................................................................................X626,X6A6,X726,X7A6,X826,X8A6,X926
In spindle alarm ........................................................................................................ X993,X9C3,X9F3,XA23,XA53,XA83,XAB3
In spindle forward run ............................................................................................ X99B,X9CB,X9FB,XA2B,XA5B,XA8B,XABB
In spindle multi-step speed monitor......................................................................... X9A9,X9D9,XA09,XA39,XA69,XA99,XAC9
In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 1........................................................ X9AA,X9DA,XA0A,XA3A,XA6A,XA9A,XACA
In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 2........................................................ X9AB,X9DB,XA0B,XA3B,XA6B,XA9B,XACB
In spindle reverse run ........................................................................................... X99C,X9CC,X9FC,XA2C,XA5C,XA8C,XABC
In spindle synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................X32A
In spindle torque limit ..............................................................................................X99F,X9CF,X9FF,XA2F,XA5F,XA8F,XABF
In synchronous feed ...................................................................................................X624,X6A4,X724,X7A4,X824,X8A4,X924
In tapping ................................................................................................................... X622,X6A2,X722,X7A2,X822,X8A2,X922
In thread cutting ......................................................................................................... X623,X6A3,X723,X7A3,X823,X8A3,X923
In tool life management ...........................................................................................X62B,X6AB,X72B,X7AB,X82B,X8AB,X92B
In zero point initialization ............................................................................. X40C,X42C,X44C,X46C,X48C,X4AC,X4CC,X4EC
X50C,X52C,X54C,X56C,X58C,X5AC,X5CC,X5EC
Incremental mode .....................................................................................................Y702,Y7E2,Y8C2,Y9A2,YA82,YB62,YC42
Insulation degradation monitor: limitation value alarm output................................................................................................R99
Insulation degradation monitor: warning................................................................................................................................R98
In-position ......................................................................................................... X411,X431,X451,X471,X491,X4B1,X4D1,X4F1
X511,X531,X551,X571,X591,X5B1,X5D1,X5F1
Integration time input 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ Y314
Integration time input 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ Y315

J
Jog handle synchronous........................................................................................Y77B,Y85B,Y93B,YA1B,YAFB,YBDB,YCBB
Jog mode ..................................................................................................................Y700,Y7E0,Y8C0,Y9A0,YA80,YB60,YC40
Jog synchronous feed valid ...................................................................................Y77A,Y85A,Y93A,YA1A,YAFA,YBDA,YCBA

K
KEY IN .....................................................................................................................................................................................R8
KEY OUT ...........................................................................................................................................................................R2312

L
L coil selection .......................................................................................................YD3F,YD6F,YD9F,YDCF,YDFF,YE2F,YE5F
Lower dead point designation (L) ................................................................ R2484,R2584,R2684,R2784,R2884,R2984,R3084
Lower dead point designation (H)................................................................ R2485,R2585,R2685,R2785,R2885,R2985,R3085

M
Machine position n-th axis ...R802,R803,R812,R813,R822,R823,R832,R833,R842,R843,R852,R853,R862,R863,R872,R873
R882.R883.R892,R893.R902.R903.R912.R913.R922.R923,R932,R933.R942.R943.R952.R953
Magnification valid for each handle ..........................................................................Y786,Y866,Y946,YA26,YB06,YBE6,YCC6
M code data 1 ............................................................................................................ R104,R204,R304,R404,R504,R604,R704
R105,R205,R305,R405,R505,R605,R705
M code independent output M00 ...............................................................................X640,X6C0,X740,X7C0,X840,X8C0,X940
M function finish 1.................................................................................................. Y71E,Y7FE,Y8DE,Y9BE,YA9E,YB7E,YC5E
M function finish 2....................................................................................................Y71F,Y7FF,Y8DF,Y9BF,YA9F,YB7F,YC5F
M function strobe 1 ....................................................................................................X644,X6C4,X744,X7C4,X844,X8C4,X944
Macro interrupt..........................................................................................................Y725,Y805,Y8E5,Y9C5,YAA5,YB85,YC65
Macro single valid ................................................................................................................................................................ X339
Magazine tool data ............................................................................................................................................................R4750
Magazine tool data (Aux. D) ..............................................................................................................................................R4910
Manual absolute .......................................................................................................Y728,Y808,Y8E8,Y9C8,YAA8,YB88,YC68
Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1........................................................ Y790,Y870,Y950,YA30,YB10,YBF0,YCD0
Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount............................................... R2414,R2514,R2614,R2714,R2814,R2914,R3014
 R2415,R2515,R2615,R2715,R2815,R2915,R3015
Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid .......................................................................... Y797,Y877,Y957,YA37,YB17,YBF7,YCD7
Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC ............................................................................ Y7AD,Y88D,Y96D,YA4D,YB2D,YC0D,YCED
Manual arbitrary feed axis independent ................................................................... Y7A9,Y889,Y969,YA49,YB29,YC09,YCE9
Manual arbitrary feed completion ............................................................................X61C,X69C,X71C,X79C,X81C,X89C,X91C
Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F................................................................... Y7AA,Y88A,Y96A,YA4A,YB2A,YC0A,YCEA
Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1 ................................................................................. Y7AB,Y88B,Y96B,YA4B,YB2B,YC0B,YCEB
Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK .............................................................................. Y7AC,Y88C,Y96C,YA4C,YB2C,YC0C,YCEC
Manual arbitrary feed mode ..................................................................................... Y703,Y7E3,Y8C3,Y9A3,YA83,YB63,YC43
Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off ......................................................................... Y7A8,Y888,Y968,YA48,YB28,YC08,YCE8
Manual arbitrary feed stop..................................................................................... Y7AE,Y88E,Y96E,YA4E,YB2E,YC0E,YCEE
Manual arbitrary feed strobe ...................................................................................Y7AF,Y88F,Y96F,YA4F,YB2F,YC0F,YCEF
Manual feedrate .......................................................................................... R2404,R2504,R2604,R2704,R2804,R2904,R3004
R2405,R2505,R2605,R2705,R2805,R2905,R3005
Manual feedrate code 1............................................................................................Y770,Y850,Y930,YA10,YAF0,YBD0,YCB0
Manual feedrate method selection ...........................................................................Y777,Y857,Y937,YA17,YAF7,YBD7,YCB7
Manual interlock - ..............................................................................................Y408,Y438,Y468,Y498,Y4C8,Y4F8,Y528,Y558
Y588,Y5B8,Y5E8,Y618,Y648,Y678,Y6A8,Y6D8
Manual interlock + .............................................................................................Y407,Y437,Y467,Y497,Y4C7,Y4F7,Y527,Y557
Y587,Y5B7,Y5E7,Y617,Y647,Y677,Y6A7,Y6D7
Manual machine lock..................................................................................... Y40A,Y43A,Y46A,Y49A,Y4CA,Y4FA,Y52A,Y55A
Y58A,Y5BA,Y5EA,Y61A,Y64A,Y67A,Y6AA,Y6DA
Manual numerical command ..................................................................................... X649,X6C9,X749,X7C9,X849,X8C9,X949
Manual override method selection............................................................................ Y759,Y839,Y919,Y9F9,YAD9,YBB9,YC99
Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid ..........................................................Y40D,Y43D,Y46D,Y49D,Y4CD,Y4FD,Y52D,Y55D
Y58D,Y5BD,Y5ED,Y61D,Y64D,Y67D,Y6AD,Y6DD
MDI mode .............................................................................................................. Y70B,Y7EB,Y8CB,Y9AB,YA8B,YB6B,YC4B
Mirror image ......................................................................................................Y402,Y432,Y462,Y492,Y4C2,Y4F2,Y522,Y552
Y582,Y5B2,Y5E2,Y612,Y642,Y672,Y6A2,Y6D2
Miscellaneous function lock................................................................................... Y75A,Y83A,Y91A,Y9FA,YADA,YBBA,YC9A
Motion command completion.......................................................................................X618,X698,X718,X798,X818,X898,X918
Multi-point orientation position data............................................................. R3911,R3941,R3971,R4001,R4031,R4061,R4091
Multi-step speed monitor request ..................................................................... Y416,Y446,Y476,Y4A6,Y4D6,Y506,Y536,Y566
Y596,Y5C6,Y5F6,Y626,Y656,Y686,Y6B6,Y6E6
Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 ............................................................ Y417,Y447,Y477,Y4A7,Y4D7,Y507,Y537,Y567
Y597,Y5C7,Y5F7,Y627,Y657,Y687,Y6B7,Y6E7
Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 ............................................................ Y418,Y448,Y478,Y4A8,Y4D8,Y508,Y538,Y568
Y598,Y5C8,Y5F8,Y628,Y658,Y688,Y6B8,Y6E8
Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1 .......................................................... X413,X433,X453,X473,X493,X4B3,X4D3,X4F3
X513,X533,X553,X573,X593,X5B3,X5D3,X5F3
Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2 .......................................................... X414,X434,X454,X474,X494,X4B4,X4D4,X4F4
X514,X534,X554,X574,X594,X5B4,X5D4,X5F4

N
NC alarm 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................... X330
NC alarm 2 (Servo alarm).................................................................................................................................................... X331
NC alarm 3 (Program error)....................................................................................... X632,X6B2,X732,X7B2,X832,X8B2,X932
NC alarm 4 (Operation error) ..................................................................................... X633,X6B3,X733,X7B3,X833,X8B3,X933
NC axis up-to-speed .........................................................................................X409,X429,X449,X469,X489,X4A9,X4C9,X4E9
X509,X529,X549,X569,X589,X5A9,X5C9,X5E9
NC data sampling completed...............................................................................................................................................X33E
NC data sampling trigger ..................................................................................................................................................... Y321
NC reset 1................................................................................................................. Y718,Y7F8,Y8D8,Y9B8,YA98,YB78,YC58
NC reset 2................................................................................................................. Y719,Y7F9,Y8D9,Y9B9,YA99,YB79,YC59
Near reference position ....................................................................................X408,X428,X448,X468,X488,X4A8,X4C8,X4E8
X508,X528,X548,X568,X588,X5A8,X5C8,X5E8
Near reference position (per reference position) ....................................................... R142,R242,R342,R442,R542,R642,R742
R143,R243,R343,R443,R543,R643,R743
Near-point dog ignored ................................................................................ R2421,R2521,R2621,R2721,R2821,R2921,R3021
New tool change ....................................................................................................X64C,X6CC,X74C,X7CC,X84C,X8CC,X94C
No. of dual signal modules on CNC side ...........................................................................................................................R2188
No. of dual signal modules on PLC side............................................................................................................................R4488
No. of work machining (current value) ....................................................................... R140,R240,R340,R440,R540,R640,R740
R141,R241,R341,R441,R541,R641,R741
No. of work machining (maximum value)................................................................... R146,R246,R346,R446,R546,R646,R746
R147,R247,R347,R447,R547,R647,R747
No. of work machining over .....................................................................................X66E,X6EE,X76E,X7EE,X86E,X8EE,X96E
Number of tool parameter..................................................................................................................................................R4710
Number of cycles designation...................................................................... R2486,R2586,R2686,R2786,R2886,R2986,R3086

O
Operation mode selection...................................................................................... Y7BE,Y89E,Y97E,YA5E,YB3E,YC1E,YCFE
Optional block skip 1.............................................................................................Y72D,Y80D,Y8ED,Y9CD,YAAD,YB8D,YC6D
OT ignored................................................................................................... R2420,R2520,R2620,R2720,R2820,R2920,R3020
Output OFF check not complete.......................................................................................................................................... X312
Output OFF check ............................................................................................................................................................... Y312
Override cancel......................................................................................................... Y758,Y838,Y918,Y9F8,YAD8,YBB8,YC98

P
Phase offset request............................................................................................................................................................ Y336
Phase shift calculation request ............................................................................................................................................ Y335
PLC axis 1st handle valid ................................................................................................................................................... Y32D
PLC axis 2nd handle valid ...................................................................................................................................................Y32E
PLC axis 3rd handle valid ....................................................................................................................................................Y32F
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Axis designation ...............................................................................................................R4200
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Control signals .................................................................................................................R4206
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis External deceleration speed selection/Multi-step speed monitor signal input ..................R4207
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Feedrate............................................................................................................... R4202,R4203
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Movement data .................................................................................................... R4204,R4205
PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Operation mode ...............................................................................................................R4201
PLC Axis Control Data A Axis designation ........................................................................................................................ R4256
PLC Axis Control Data A Control signals .......................................................................................................................... R4262
PLC Axis Control Data A Feedrate........................................................................................................................ R4258,R4259
PLC Axis Control Data A Movement data ............................................................................................................. R4260,R4261
PLC Axis Control Data A Operation mode ........................................................................................................................ R4257
PLC axis control buffering mode valid .................................................................................................................................Y32B
PLC axis control valid 1st axis............................................................................................................................................. Y340
PLC axis droop release invalid axis................................................................................................................................... R2310
PLC axis near point detection 1st axis ................................................................................................................................ Y338
PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Alarm details ....................................................................................................................... R1901
PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Machine position ..................................................................................................... R1902,R1903
PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Remaining distance................................................................................................. R1904,R1905
PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Status .................................................................................................................................. R1900
PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Multi-step speed monitor signal output ............................................................................... R1906
PLC Axis State Data A Alarm details................................................................................................................................. R1957
PLC Axis State Data A Machine position .............................................................................................................. R1958,R1959
PLC Axis State Data A Remaining distance.......................................................................................................... R1960,R1961
PLC Axis State Data A Status ........................................................................................................................................... R1956
PLC axis switching ........................................................................................ Y41B,Y44B,Y47B,Y4AB,Y4DB,Y50B,Y53B,Y56B
Y59B,Y5CB,Y5FB,Y62B,Y65B,Y68B,Y6BB,Y6EB
PLC axis position switch 1................................................................................................................................................... X360
PLC axis position switch 2................................................................................................................................................... X361
PLC axis position switch 3................................................................................................................................................... X362
PLC axis position switch 4................................................................................................................................................... X363
PLC axis position switch 5................................................................................................................................................... X364
PLC axis position switch 6................................................................................................................................................... X365
PLC axis position switch 7................................................................................................................................................... X366
PLC axis position switch 8................................................................................................................................................... X367
PLC axis position switch 9................................................................................................................................................... X368
PLC axis position switch 10................................................................................................................................................. X369
PLC axis position switch 11.................................................................................................................................................X36A
PLC axis position switch 12.................................................................................................................................................X36B
PLC axis position switch 13.................................................................................................................................................X36C
PLC axis position switch 14.................................................................................................................................................X36D
PLC axis position switch 15.................................................................................................................................................X36E
PLC axis position switch 16................................................................................................................................................. X36F
PLC emergency stop ........................................................................................................................................................... Y327
PLC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time.................................................................................................. R4483
PLC side dual signal compare status ................................................................................................................................ R4481
PLC side dual signal error Module 1(H) ............................................................................................................................ R4461
PLC side dual signal error Module 1(L) ............................................................................................................................. R4460
PLC side dual signal error Module 2(H) ............................................................................................................................ R4463
PLC side dual signal error Module 2(L) ............................................................................................................................. R4462
PLC side dual signal error Module 3(H).............................................................................................................................R4465
PLC side dual signal error Module 3(L) .............................................................................................................................R4464
PLC side dual signal head device No. 1 ............................................................................................................................R4484
PLC side dual signal head device No. 2 ............................................................................................................................R4485
PLC side dual signal head device No. 3 ............................................................................................................................R4486
PLC side dual signal output error Module 1.......................................................................................................................R4474
PLC side dual signal output error Module 2.......................................................................................................................R4475
PLC side dual signal output error Module 3.......................................................................................................................R4476
PLC side dual signal output Module 1 ...............................................................................................................................R4470
PLC side dual signal output Module 2 ...............................................................................................................................R4471
PLC side dual signal output Module 3 ...............................................................................................................................R4472
PLC side dual signal Module 1(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4451
PLC side dual signal Module 1(L)......................................................................................................................................R4450
PLC side dual signal Module 2(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4453
PLC side dual signal Module 2(L)......................................................................................................................................R4452
PLC side dual signal Module 3(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4455
PLC side dual signal Module 3(L)......................................................................................................................................R4454
PLC side head G No..........................................................................................................................................................R4482
PLC side safety compare activity check information .........................................................................................................R4480
PLC side safety operation status .......................................................................................................................................R4490
PLC skip 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A0
PLC skip 2 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A1
PLC skip 3 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A2
PLC skip 4 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A3
PLC skip 5 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A4
PLC skip 6 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A5
PLC skip 7 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A6
PLC skip 8 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A7
PLC skip 9 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A8
PLC skip 10 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A9
PLC skip 11 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AA
PLC skip 12 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AB
PLC skip 13 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AC
PLC skip 14 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AD
PLC skip 15 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AE
PLC skip 16 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AF
PLC skip 17 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B0
PLC skip 18 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B1
PLC skip 19 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B2
PLC skip 20 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B3
PLC skip 21 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B4
PLC skip 22 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B5
PLC skip 23 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B6
PLC skip 24 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B7
PLC skip 25 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B8
PLC skip 26 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B9
PLC skip 27 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BA
PLC skip 28 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BB
PLC skip 29 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BC
PLC skip 30 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BD
PLC skip 31 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BE
PLC skip 32 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3BF
PLC version code ............................................................................................................................ R2332R2333,R2334,R2335
PLC version code (method 2)...................................................................... R2360,R2361,R2362,R2363,R2364,R2365,R2366
Pointer designation............................................................................................................................................................ R4715
Position loop in-position ........................................................................................ X99E,X9CE,X9FE,XA2E,XA5E,XA8E,XABE
Position switch 1.........................................................................................................X660,X6E0,X760,X7E0,X860,X8E0,X960
Power OFF required after parameter change......................................................................................................................X33A
Power shutoff movement over.................................................................................. X66F,X6EF,X76F,X7EF,X86F,X8EF,X96F
Power shutoff notification .................................................................................................................................................... X313
Program display during operation......................................................................... Y72C,Y80C,Y8EC,Y9CC,YAAC,YB8C,YC6C
Program operation mode (Memory mode) ............................................................... Y708,Y7E8,Y8C8,Y9A8,YA88,YB68,YC48
Program restart ....................................................................................................... Y723,Y803,Y8E3,Y9C3,YAA3,YB83,YC63

R
Rapid traverse .......................................................................................................... Y726,Y806,Y8E6,Y9C6,YAA6,YB86,YC66
Rapid traverse override ............................................................................... R2402,R2502,R2602,R2702,R2802,R2902,R3002
Rapid traverse override valid...................................................................................Y7BF,Y89F,Y97F,YA5F,YB3F,YC1F,YCFF
Rapid traverse override code 1 ................................................................................Y768,Y848,Y928,YA08,YAE8,YBC8,YCA8
Rapid traverse override code 2 ................................................................................Y769,Y849,Y929,YA09,YAE9,YBC9,YCA9
Rapid traverse override method selection .............................................................. Y76F,Y84F,Y92F,YA0F,YAEF,YBCF,YCAF
Read control window 1 Control signal ............................................................................................................................... R8507
Read control window 1 Data No. ....................................................................................................................................... R8503
Read control window 1 Number to be read ....................................................................................................................... R8505
Read control window 1 Read method................................................................................................................................ R8504
Read control window 1 Section No.................................................................................................................................... R8500
Read control window 1 Section sub-ID No. ....................................................................................................................... R8501
Read control window 1 Sub-section No............................................................................................................................. R8502
Read result 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... R9000
Read window data 1 1st Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9040
Read window data 1 1st Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9041
Read window data 1 2nd Read data ................................................................................................................................. R9042
Read window data 1 2nd Read data ................................................................................................................................. R9043
Read window data 1 3rd Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9044
Read window data 1 3rd Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9045
Read window data 1 4th Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9046
Read window data 1 4th Read data...................................................................................................................................R9047
Recalculation request ............................................................................................ Y72B,Y80B,Y8EB,Y9CB,YAAB,YB8B,YC6B
Reference position retract.....................................................................................Y75D,Y83D,Y91D,Y9FD,YADD,YBBD,YC9D
Reference position return mode ...............................................................................Y704,Y7E4,Y8C4,Y9A4,YA84,YB64,YC44
Reference position selection code 1 ......................................................................... Y730,Y810,Y8F0,Y9D0,YAB0,YB90,YC70
Reference position selection code 2 ......................................................................... Y731,Y811,Y8F1,Y9D1,YAB1,YB91,YC71
Reference position selection method........................................................................ Y737,Y817,Y8F7,Y9D7,YAB7,YB97,YC77
Reset & rewind ...................................................................................................... Y71A,Y7FA,Y8DA,Y9BA,YA9A,YB7A,YC5A

S
Saving operation history data .............................................................................................................................................. Y322
S code data 1............................................................................................................. R112,R212,R312,R412,R512,R612,R712
R113,R213,R313,R413,R513,R613,R713
S command gear No. illegal......................................................................................X984,X9B4,X9E4,XA14,XA44,XA74,XAA4
S command max./min. command value over............................................................X985,X9B5,X9E5,XA15,XA45,XA75,XAA5
S command no gear selected ...................................................................................X986,X9B6,X9E6,XA16,XA46,XA76,XAA6
S command override.................................................................................... R3910,R3940,R3970,R4000,R4030,R4060,R4090
S function strobe 1.....................................................................................................X658,X6D8,X758,X7D8,X858,X8D8,X958
Search & start ........................................................................................................... Y7B2,Y892,Y972,YA52,YB32,YC12,YCF2
Search & start (error) ................................................................................................. X635,X6B5,X735,X7B5,X835,X8B5,X935
Search & start (search).............................................................................................. X636,X6B6,X736,X7B6,X836,X8B6,X936
Search & start program No. ......................................................................... R2438,R2538,R2638,R2738,R2838,R2938,R3038
R2439,R2539,R2639,R2739,R2839,R2939,R3039
Selected tool No. ......................................................................................... R2448,R2548,R2648,R2748,R2848,R2948,R3048
R2449,R2549,R2649,R2749,R2849,R2949,R3049
Servo OFF ........................................................................................................ Y401,Y431,Y461,Y491,Y4C1,Y4F1,Y521,Y551
Y581,Y5B1,Y5E1,Y611,Y641,Y671,Y6A1,Y6D1
Servo ready ......................................................................................................X400,X420,X440,X460,X480,X4A0,X4C0,X4E0
X500,X520,X540,X560,X580,X5A0,X5C0,X5E0
Servo ready completion ....................................................................................................................................................... X321
Single block .............................................................................................................. Y712,Y7F2,Y8D2,Y9B2,YA92,YB72,YC52
SKIP1................................................................................................................................................................................... X318
SKIP2................................................................................................................................................................................... X319
SKIP3...................................................................................................................................................................................X31A
SKIP4...................................................................................................................................................................................X31B
Spare tool: Auxiliary data...................................................................................................................................................R6729
Spare tool: Group No............................................................................................................................................. R6724,R6725
Spare tool: Length compensation amount ............................................................................................................. R6732,R6733
Spare tool: Life data...........................................................................................................................................................R6730
Spare tool: Radius compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6734,R6735
Spare tool: Tool data flag/status ........................................................................................................................................R6728
Spare tool: Tool No................................................................................................................................................ R6726,R6727
Spare tool: Usage data ......................................................................................................................................................R6731
Speed detection........................................................................................................X992,X9C2,X9F2,XA22,XA52,XA82,XAB2
Speed monitor door open possible.......................................................................................................................................... R9
Speed monitor mode ......................................................................................................................................................... R2309
Spindle actual speed ................................................................................... R1606,R1636,R1666,R1696,R1726,R1756,R1786
R1607,R1637,R1667,R1697,R1727,R1757,R1787
Spindle command final data (Rotation speed)............................................. R1602,R1632,R1662,R1692,R1722,R1752,R1782
R1603,R1633,R1663,R1693,R1723,R1753,R1783
Spindle command final data (12-bit binary) ................................................. R1604,R1634,R1664,R1694,R1724,R1754,R1784
R1605,R1635,R1665,R1695,R1725,R1755,R1785
Spindle command rotation speed input ....................................................... R1600,R1630,R1660,R1690,R1720,R1750,R1780
R1601,R1631,R1661,R1691,R1721,R1751,R1781
Spindle command rotation speed output ..................................................... R3900,R3930,R3960,R3990,R4020,R4050,R4080
R3901,R3931,R3961,R3991,R4021,R4051,R4081
Spindle forward run index................................................................................... YD3C,YD6C,YD9C,YDCC,YDFC,YE2C,YE5C
Spindle forward run start ........................................................................................ YD38,YD68,YD98,YDC8,YDF8,YE28,YE58
Spindle gear selection code 1 ................................................................................ YD30,YD60,YD90,YDC0,YDF0,YE20,YE50
Spindle gear selection code 2 ................................................................................ YD31,YD61,YD91,YDC1,YDF1,YE21,YE51
Spindle gear shift.................................................................................................... YD35,YD65,YD95,YDC5,YDF5,YE25,YE55
Spindle gear shift command 1 .............................................................................. X98D,X9BD,X9ED,XA1D,XA4D,XA7D,XAAD
Spindle gear shift command 2 ............................................................................... X98E,X9BE,X9EE,XA1E,XA4E,XA7E,XAAE
Spindle in-position .................................................................................................... X996,X9C6,X9F6,XA26,XA56,XA86,XAB6
Spindle multi-step monitor request ......................................................................... YD49,YD79,YDA9,YDD9,YE09,YE39,YE69
Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 .................................................. YD4A,YD7A,YDAA,YDDA,YE0A,YE3A,YE6A
Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 .................................................. YD4B,YD7B,YDAB,YDDB,YE0B,YE3B,YE6B
Spindle motor temperature .......................................................................... R1611,R1641,R1671,R1701,R1731,R1761,R1791
Spindle OFF mode .................................................................................................. Y75F,Y83F,Y91F,Y9FF,YADF,YBBF,YC9F
Spindle orientation.................................................................................................. YD36,YD66,YD96,YDC6,YDF6,YE26,YE56
Spindle orientation command .............................................................................. YD3E,YD6E,YD9E,YDCE,YDFE,YE2E,YE5E
Spindle override code 1.......................................................................................... YD28,YD58,YD88,YDB8,YDE8,YE18,YE48
Spindle override code 2.......................................................................................... YD29,YD59,YD89,YDB9,YDE9,YE19,YE49
Spindle override code 4....................................................................................... YD2A,YD5A,YD8A,YDBA,YDEA,YE1A,YE4A
Spindle override method selection ........................................................................ YD2F,YD5F,YD8F,YDBF,YDEF,YE1F,YE4F
Spindle phase synchronization............................................................................................................................................ Y333
Spindle phase synchronization completion .........................................................................................................................X32C
Spindle ready-ON ..................................................................................................... X998,X9C8,X9F8,XA28,XA58,XA88,XAB8
Spindle reverse run index................................................................................... YD3D,YD6D,YD9D,YDCD,YDFD,YE2D,YE5D
Spindle reverse run start ........................................................................................ YD39,YD69,YD99,YDC9,YDF9,YE29,YE59
Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion ............................................................................................................X32B
Spindle servo-ON ..................................................................................................... X999,X9C9,X9F9,XA29,XA59,XA89,XAB9
Spindle speed lower limit over.............................................................................. X98C,X9BC,X9EC,XA1C,XA4C,XA7C,XAAC
Spindle speed upper limit over .............................................................................. X98B,X9BB,X9EB,XA1B,XA4B,XA7B,XAAB
Spindle stop............................................................................................................ YD34,YD64,YD94,YDC4,YDF4,YE24,YE54
Spindle synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................... Y332
Spindle synchronization Basic spindle selection ............................................................................................................... R2357
Spindle synchronization cancel ........................................................................................................................................... Y330
Spindle synchronization phase error 1 ..................................................................................................................................R48
Spindle synchronization phase error 2 ..................................................................................................................................R49
Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor ........................................................................................................................R56
Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (lower limit).....................................................................................................R57
Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (upper limit) ....................................................................................................R58
Spindle synchronization phase error output ..........................................................................................................................R55
Spindle synchronization Phase offset data............................................................................................................................R59
Spindle synchronization Phase shift amount .....................................................................................................................R2359
Spindle synchronization Synchronous spindle selection ...................................................................................................R2358
Spindle synchronous rotation direction................................................................................................................................ Y334
Spindle tool ........................................................................................................................................................................R4720
Spindle torque limit 1 .............................................................................................. YD45,YD75,YDA5,YDD5,YE05,YE35,YE65
Spindle torque limit 2 .............................................................................................. YD46,YD76,YDA6,YDD6,YE06,YE36,YE66
Spindle torque limit 3 .............................................................................................. YD47,YD77,YDA7,YDD7,YE07,YE37,YE67
Spindle up-to-speed..................................................................................................X995,X9C5,X9F5,XA25,XA55,XA85,XAB5
Standby 1 tool....................................................................................................................................................................R4721
Synchronization control operation method .................................................. R2432,R2532,R2632,R2732,R2832,R2932,R3032
Synchronization correction mode .............................................................................Y722,Y802,Y8E2,Y9C2,YAA2,YB82,YC62
Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal..................................................... Y7B9,Y899,Y979,YA59,YB39,YC19,YCF9

T
T code data 1............................................................................................................. R120,R220,R320,R420,R520,R620,R720
R121,R221,R321,R421,R521,R621,R721
T function strobe 1 .....................................................................................................X650,X6D0,X750,X7D0,X850,X8D0,X950
T life mgmt Spindle tool No.................................................................................................................................... R6720,R6721
T life mgmt Standby tool No. ................................................................................................................................. R6722,R6723
Tap retract ............................................................................................................Y75C,Y83C,Y91C,Y9FC,YADC,YBBC,YC9C
Tap retract possible ............................................................................................... X66D,X6ED,X76D,X7ED,X86D,X8ED,X96D
Temperature warning cause ..................................................................................................................................................R41
Thermal displacement compensation amount ..................................................R800,R810,R820,R830,R840,R850,R860,R870
R880,R890,R900,R910,R920,R930,R940,R950
Thermal expansion max. compensation amount ..............................R3103,R3113,R3123,R3133,R3143,R3153,R3163,R3173
R3183,R3193,R3203,R3213,R3223,R3233,R3243,R3253
Thermal expansion offset compensation amount .............................R3102,R3112,R3122,R3132,R3142,R3152,R3162,R3172
R3182,R3192,R3202,R3212,R3222,R3232,R3242,R3252
Tool alarm 1/Tool skip 1 ...........................................................................................Y788,Y868,Y948,YA28,YB08,YBE8,YCC8
Tool alarm 2..............................................................................................................Y789,Y869,Y949,YA29,YB09,YBE9,YCC9
Tool change position return completion.................................................................. X64B,X6CB,X74B,X7CB,X84B,X8CB,X94B
Tool change reset .................................................................................................Y78C,Y86C,Y94C,YA2C,YB0C,YBEC,YCCC
Tool group No. designation.......................................................................... R2430,R2530,R2630,R2730,R2830,R2930,R3030
Tool length measurement 1 ......................................................................................Y720,Y800,Y8E0,Y9C0,YAA0,YB80,YC60
Tool length measurement 2 ......................................................................................Y721,Y801,Y8E1,Y9C1,YAA1,YB81,YC61
Tool life management input ................................................................................... Y78B,Y86B,Y94B,YA2B,YB0B,YBEB,YCCB
Tool life over ............................................................................................................X62E,X6AE,X72E,X7AE,X82E,X8AE,X92E
Tool life usage data ................................................................................................... R144,R244,R344,R444,R544,R644,R744
R145,R245,R345,R445,R545,R645,R745
Tool No. ..................................................................................................................... R136,R236,R336,R436,R536,R636,R736

U
Unclamp command .......................................................................................... X410,X430,X450,X470,X490,X4B0,X4D0,X4F0
X510,X530,X550,X570,X590,X5B0,X5D0,X5F0
Unclamp completion ......................................................................................... Y415,Y445,Y475,Y4A5,Y4D5,Y505,Y535,Y565
Y595,Y5C5,Y5F5,Y625,Y655,Y685,Y6B5,Y6E5
Usage data count valid .......................................................................................... Y78A,Y86A,Y94A,YA2A,YB0A,YBEA,YCCA
Upper dead point designation (L) ................................................................ R2482,R2582,R2682,R2782,R2882,R2982,R3082
Upper dead point designation (H) ............................................................... R2483,R2583,R2683,R2783,R2883,R2983,R3083
User macro input #1032(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2324,R2325
User macro input #1032(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2470,R2570,R2670,R2770,R2870,R2970,R3070
R2471,R2571,R2671,R2771,R2871,R2971,R3071
User macro input #1033(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2326,R2327
User macro input #1033(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2472,R2572,R2672,R2772,R2872,R2972,R3072
R2473,R2573,R2673,R2773,R2873,R2973,R3073
User macro input #1034(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2328,R2329
User macro input #1034(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2474,R2574,R2674,R2774,R2874,R2974,R3074
R2475,R2575,R2675,R2775,R2875,R2975,R3075
User macro input #1035(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2330,R2331
User macro input #1035(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2476,R2576,R2676,R2776,R2876,R2976,R3076
R2477,R2577,R2677,R2777,R2877,R2977,R3077
User macro output #1132(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R170,R270,R370,R470,R570,R670,R770
R171,R271,R371,R471,R571,R671,R771
User macro output #1132(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R24,R25
User macro output #1133(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R172,R272,R372,R472,R572,R672,R772
R173,R273,R373,R473,R573,R673,R773
User macro output #1133(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R26,R27
User macro output #1134(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R174,R274,R374,R474,R574,R674,R774
R175,R275,R375,R475,R575,R675,R775
User macro output #1134(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R28,R29
User macro output #1135(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R176,R276,R376,R476,R576,R676,R776
R177,R277,R377,R477,R577,R677,R777
User macro output #1135(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R30,R31

W
Waiting between part systems............................................................................... X63C,X6BC,X73C,X7BC,X83C,X8BC,X93C
Waiting for data to be downloaded ........................................................................ X66C,X6EC,X76C,X7EC,X86C,X8EC,X96C
Workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No. ................... R2446,R2546,R2646,R2746,R2846,R2946,R3046
R2447,R2547,R2647,R2747,R2847,R2947,R3047
Write control window 1 Control signal ............................................................................................................................... R8675
Write control window 1 Data No. ....................................................................................................................................... R8671
Write control window 1 Number to be written .................................................................................................................... R8673
Write control window 1 Section No.................................................................................................................................... R8668
Write control window 1 Section sub-ID No. .......................................................................................................................R8669
Write control window 1 Sub-section No. ............................................................................................................................R8670
Write control window 1 Write method ................................................................................................................................R8672
Write data 1 1st Write data .................................................................................................................................... R8660,R8661
Write data 1 2nd Write data ................................................................................................................................... R8662,R8663
Write data 1 3rd Write data.................................................................................................................................... R8664,R8665
Write data 1 4th Write data .................................................................................................................................... R8666,R8667
Write result 1......................................................................................................................................................................R9020

Z
Zero point initialization incomplete............................................................... X40D,X42D,X44D,X46D,X48D,X4AD,X4CD,X4ED
X50D,X52D,X54D,X56D,X58D,X5AD,X5CD,X5ED
Zero point initialization set completed............................................................X40A,X42A,X44A,X46A,X48A,X4AA,X4CA,X4EA
X50A,X52A,X54A,X56A,X58A,X5AA,X5CA,X5EA
Zero point initialization set error completed ...................................................X40B,X42B,X44B,X46B,X48B,X4AB,X4CB,X4EB
X50B,X52B,X54B,X56B,X58B,X5AB,X5CB,X5EB
Zero point initialization set mode ...................................................................... Y412,Y442,Y472,Y4A2,Y4D2,Y502,Y532,Y562
Y592,Y5C2,Y5F2,Y622,Y652,Y682,Y6B2,Y6E2
Zero point initialization set start ........................................................................ Y413,Y443,Y473,Y4A3,Y4D3,Y503,Y533,Y563
Y593,Y5C3,Y5F3,Y623,Y653,Y683,Y6B3,Y6E3
Zero speed................................................................................................................X994,X9C4,X9F4,XA24,XA54,XA84,XAB4
Z-phase passed ....................................................................................................X99D,X9CD,X9FD,XA2D,XA5D,XA8D,XABD
ZR device No. at occurrence of NC exclusive instruction (DDWR/DDRD) error .......................................................... R80, R81
 Revision History

Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Dec. 2006 IB-1500263(ENG)-A First edition created.
- "Device No. Index" was added.
- The following sections were added.
4.23 Each Application: Safety Observation
7. Exclusive Instructions
- The following explanations of signals were added.
4.1 Bit Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC)
- 24 hours continuous operation X310
- Safety signal unconfirmed after compare error X311
Jan. 2007 IB-1500263(ENG)-B 4.5 Data Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC)
- Speed monitor door open possible R9
4.9 Bit Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC)
- Contactor shutoff test Y310
4.13 Data Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC)
- Speed monitor mode R2309
- The device No. of "No. of work machining (maximum value) was changed to R146.
- The shared G device Nos. of safety observation signals were changed.
- Mistakes were corrected.

- The following sections were added.

2.1.3 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table
May 2007 IB-1500263(ENG)-C
4.24 Each Application : GOT Window
- Mistakes were corrected.

- The following sections were added.

3.3.5 Precautions
3.5.8 PLC Constants
3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection
3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals
4.25 Each Application : PLC Constants
- The following explanations of signals were added.
4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC->PLC)
- In current limit X40E
4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC->PLC)
Jun. 2007 IB-150263(ENG)-D
- In inch unit selection X628
- Waiting between part systems X63C
4.5 Data Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC)
- KEY IN R8
4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC->CNC)
- Program display during operation Y72C
- Inclined axis control: no Z axis compensation Y7B6
4.13 Data Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC)
- KEY OUT R2312
- Mistakes were corrected.

- Corrections are made corresponding to C70 S/W version B2.

- The following sections were added.
2.1.3 Data update program with NC
4.26 Each application : PLC bit selection
4.27 Each application :Chopping
7.3 D(P).DDWR command
Mar. 2010 IB-1500263(ENG)-F 7.4 D(P).DDRD command
Appendix 1.1 Section No. List
Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List
Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data
- Following chapter is revised.
4.17 Each Application: PLC Axis Control
- Mistakes were corrected.
 Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Corrections are made corresponding to C70 S/W version C5.
- Following chapters are added
4.28 Each Application : PLC Axis Indexing
- Type to line-wrap the currently executed program is added to "4.24.3 Details of
Command"
- Following signal explanations are added.
X33E SMPFIN(NC data sampling completed)
X33A PARACHG(Power OFF required after parameter change)
X33B EDITDO(Edited data processing)
X33C EDITERR(Edited data error)
Y323 EDITOK(Edited data recovery confirmation)
Y41B to Y6EB　CHGPLCn(PLC axis switching)
X416 to Y5F6 AXCHGISn(Axis switching invalid status)
X417 to X5F7 PLCMODn(In PLC axis control)
X313 PSDNTF(Power shutoff notification)
YD4F to YE6F ESSCn(External axis speed clamp)
R2310 PLC axis droop release invalid axis
R60 to R69 APLC input data 1 to 10
R2380 to R2389 APLC output data 1 to 10
R2000 to R2047 PLC axis indexing control status 1 to 4
R4300 to R4347 PLC axis indexing control command 1 to 4
R2179 CNC side dual signal compare status 2(SU_NST2)
Dec. 2010 IB-1500263(ENG)-G R4479 PLC side dual signal compare status 2(SU_PST2)
R160 to R163/R260 to R263/R360 to R363/R460 to R463/R560 to R563/R660 to R663/
R760 to R763 Error code output extension, Parameter 1, 2 output area
- Following signal names are changed
X66F to X96F: Absolute position warning is changed to Power shutoff movement over
R1906/R1914/R1922/R1930/R1938/R1946/R1954/R1986: Multi-step speed monitor
signal output is changed to Status 2
- Followings are added to "Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data"
2-50：Rapid traverse time constant G0tL
2-52：Rapid traverse time constant G0t1
2-55：Axis name
2-56：Cutting feed clamp speed
2-57：Soft limit IB+
2-58：Soft limit IB-
2-59: Soft limit IB type
21-34: Current position of program command
21-35: Remaining command
26-36：Spindle Position within one rotation (Z-phase standard)
- Following signals are deleted.
R98 Insulation degradation monitor: warning
R99 Insulation degradation monitor: limitation value alarm output
- Mistakes are corrected.
- Added "Handling of our product"
Feb. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-H
- Mistakes are corrected.
Corrections were made corresponding to C70 S/W version D5.
- The following chapter was added.
5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis
- The following signal explanations were added.
X63F to X93F HSST (In high-speed synchronous tapping)
R82 ZRECVNO (Common variable No. at occurrence of ZR device error)
R83 ZRECVFC (Error cause at occurrence of ZR device error)
R802/R803 to R952/R953 (Machine position n-th axis)
Sep. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-J
R804/R805 to R954/R955 (Feedback machine position n-th axis)
Y3A0 to Y3BF PSKIPn (PLC skip 1 to 32)
Y723 to YC63 SRN (Program restart)
Y75F to YC9F SPOFFMn (Spindle OFF mode)
Y7B9 to YCF9 (Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal)
- The following signal descriptions were deleted.
R801 to R951 Servo motor temperature
(Continued on the following page)
 Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
(Continued from the previous page)
- The followings were updated to the latest version.
"Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data"
"Appendix 1.1 Section No. List"
Sep. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-J
"Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List"
"Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details"
- Mistakes were corrected.
 Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (EUROPE FA CENTER)
Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Germany Service Center
Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-121 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-269-673-4092
France Service Center
Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
CLEVELAND, OHIO 44114, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Minnesota Service Satellite
ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI 7-PALAZZO SIRIO CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI,
20864 AGRATE BRIANZA MILANO ITALY
West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite
VIA SAVELLI 24 - 35129 PADOVA ITALY
Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Service Center
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
East Region Service Center TEL: +44-1707-282-846 / FAX: +44-1707-27-8992
200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NEW JERSEY 08873, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
Pennsylvania Service Satellite 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA 16510, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
TEL: +1-814-897-7820 / FAX: +1-814-987-7820
Poland Service Center
South Region Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
TEL +1-678-985-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519
Turkey Service Center
Texas Service Satellites ŞERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775
GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. ÜMRANIYE / ISTANBUL, TURKEY
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 / FAX: +1-817-416-5000 TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 Czech Republic Service Center
TECHNOLOGICKA 374/6,708 00 OSTRAVA-PUSTKOVEC, CZECH REPUBLIC
Florida Service Satellite TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-321-610-4436 / FAX: +1-321-610-4437 Russia Service Center
213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
Canada Region Service Center TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Sweden Service Center
STRANDKULLEN, 718 91 FRÖVI , SWEDEN
Canada Service Satellite TEL: +46-581-700-20 / FAX: +46-581-700-75
EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Bulgaria Service Center
4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
Mexico City Service Center TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center
APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
Monterrey Service Satellite TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721
MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 / FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center
4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366
BRAZIL
Belarus Service Center
MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e Serviços S.A Nezavisimosti pr.177, 220125 Minsk, Belarus
Brazil Region Service Center TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 South Africa Service Center
P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625 SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-2830
Indonesia Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
THE PLAZZA OFFICE TOWER, 28TH FLOOR JL.M.H. THAMRIN KAV.28-30, JAKARTA, INDONESIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
TEL: +62-21-2992-2333 / FAX: +62-21-2992-2555 China (Jinan) Service Dealer
China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer
Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite
60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Beijing) Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
NO. 16, JALAN SHAH BANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-3907
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Dealer

Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center China (Tianjin) Service Center
UNIT 2408~11, 24TH FLOOR, SAIGON TRADE CENTER, 37 TON DUC THANG STREET, B-2 801/802, YOUYI BUILDING, NO.50 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
DISTRICT 1, HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5947 TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite
SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET,
HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM China (Chengdu) Service Center
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD,
JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA
Philippines Service Center TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Shenzhen) Service Center
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417 ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. (THAILAND FA CENTER) TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
BANG-CHAN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE NO.111 SOI SERITHAI 54 China (Xiamen) Service Dealer
T.KANNAYAO, A.KANNAYAO, BANGKOK 10230, THAILAND China (Dongguan) Service Dealer
TEL: +66-2906-8255 / FAX: +66-2906-3239

Thailand Service Center KOREA

898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1, FLOOR 7
RAMA III RD., BANGPONGPANG, YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120, THAILAND MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-9750 Korea Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
INDIA
Korea Taegu Service Satellite
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA
India Service Center TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411
2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY,
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA
TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399 TAIWAN
Ludhiana satellite office
Jamshedpur satellite office MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)
Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center
India (Pune) Service Center NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE – 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA TAICHUNG CITY 407, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Baroda satellite office
Mumbai satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center
10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 111, TAIWAN R.O.C.
India (Bangalore) Service Center TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2,
LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 710, TAIWAN, R.O.C.
Chennai satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
Coimbatore satellite office

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.

Australia Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoid-
able cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regard-
ing the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
 2006-2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.